Professional Documents
Culture Documents
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bobst Manchester
Heater – Chiller
24-60kW
EC DECLARATION OF Green Resource Engineering Ltd (GRE) hereby declare under our sole
CONFORMITY responsibility that the products identified in this declaration and to
which this declaration relates are in conformity with essential health
and safety requirements of the following directives:
PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE 97/23/EC (Notified Body 0037)
MACHINERY DIRECTIVE 2006/42/EC
LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC as amended by 93/68/EEC
EMC DIRECTIVE 2004/108/EC
To comply with these directives appropriate national & harmonised
standards have been applied.
DESCRIPTION Chiller – Heater system for Vacuum deposition process cooling
SERIAL NUMBER Refer to equipment serial plate
TECHNICAL CONTACT
Name: Mr. Richard Booth Signed:
INTRODUCTION This machine has been designed to provide process cooling and
heating to a Bobst vacuum metalliser.
The equipment is designed for indoor installation only
BASIS OF OPERATION The machine uses reverse-cycle refrigeration to provide the cooling
& reheat cycles to bring the drum down to temperature and to
subsequently reheat before the chamber is opened.
STANDARD FEATURES - Each machine is supplied with the following standard features:
MECHANICAL
• Multiple Scroll Compressors in tandem configuration with oil
24kW balancing system
• Rotalok isolation valves on each compressor
• 4-Way reversing valve to switch from cooling to heating
• Inverter-driven, multistage centrifugal pump
• Brazed plate heat exchangers
• Electrically-actuated valve for tower circuit flow control
• High & Low pressure transducers
• High & Low Pressure trip switches
• Electronic expansion valve(s) offering improved stability at
varying loads
• Liquid line sight glass
• Liquid line filter drier with replaceable core
• Liquid line ball valve
• Pressure relief valve on high pressure side
• Refrigeration-quality copper tube
• Y-strainers on process- and tower-water circuits
STANDARD FEATURES – Each machine is supplied with the following standard features:
ELECTRICAL • Siemens S7-200 PLC with profibus interface
24kW • Manual motor starters on all pumps, compressors and heaters
• Isolator on main incoming supply
• Phase loss / rotation protection relay
• Variable speed drive (inverter) on pump
• Door-mounted emergency stop fitted
All switchgear, where possible, is by Siemens as per the Bobst
specification.
INTRODUCTION This machine has been designed to provide process cooling and
heating to a Bobst vacuum metalliser.
The equipment is designed for indoor installation only
BASIS OF OPERATION The machine uses discrete cooling & reheat cycles to bring the drum
down to temperature and to subsequently reheat before the
chamber is opened.
Cooling is achieved by refrigeration using scroll compressors
Reheat is achieved by bringing a pre-heated tank of water into
circuit
STANDARD FEATURES - Each machine is supplied with the following standard features:
MECHANICAL
• Multiple Scroll Compressors in tandem configuration with oil
48kW, 60kW balancing system
• Dual, independent refrigeration circuits
• Rotalok isolation valves on each compressor
• Multistage centrifugal pump
• Brazed plate heat exchangers
• Electrically-actuated valve for condenser pressure control
• Electrically-actuated valve for reheat control
• High & Low pressure transducers *
• High & Low Pressure trip switches *
• Electronic expansion valve(s) offering improved stability at
varying loads *
• Liquid line sight glass *
• Liquid line filter drier with replaceable core *
• Liquid line ball valve *
• Pressure relief valve on high pressure side *
• Refrigeration-quality copper tube
• Y-strainers on process- and tower-water circuits
* - Per refrigeration circuit
STANDARD FEATURES – Each machine is supplied with the following standard features:
ELECTRICAL • Siemens S7-200 PLC with profibus interface
48, 60kW • Manual motor starters on all pumps, compressors and heaters
• Isolator on main incoming supply
• Phase loss / rotation protection relay
• Cooling module on control cabinet
• Door-mounted emergency stop fitted
All switchgear, where possible, is by Siemens as per the Bobst
specification.
24kW
Glycol header
tank
Electrical
Panel
Door-
mounted
isolator
Glycol pump
Glycol
Y-Strainer
Tower circuit
heat
exchanger
Tower circuit
flow control Glycol flow
valve switch
Electronic
expansion
valve
Glycol inlet
Glycol Outlet
Liquid receiver
Liquid Line
Sight Glass
Tower Water
Inlet
Tower Water
Outlet
Immersion Immersion
Heater Heaters
Heat
Exchanger, Heat Exchanger
Condenser Evaporator
Glycol Pump
Liquid Line
Filter Driers
Liquid Line
Sight Glasses
Electronic
Expansion
Valves
Head Pressure
Control Valve
Tower Water
Inlet
Tower Water
Outlet
Discharge
Suction Rotalock
Rotalock Valve
Valve
Scroll
compressors
Oil Equalisation
Line with sight
glass
Glycol
Filterball Valve
Glycol Inlet
connections
Glycol Outlet
connections
DIMENSIONS
Length mm 970 2170 + 320* 2170 + 320*
Width mm 670 710 710
Height mm 2354 2354 2354
Weight (Shipping) kg 950 950
Weight (Operating) kg 1270 1270
* - Main framework + tower water services connection tray
REFRIGERATION
Refrigerant Type R404A
Number of circuits 1 2 2
Quantity Kg 12.5 9+9 11 + 11
Refrigerant Control Electronic Expansion Valve
HEATERS
Type N/A Immersion, with internal thermostat
Quantity N/A 3 3
COMPRESSORS
Type Scroll, Hermetically Sealed, Tandem configuration
Quantity 2 2+2 2+2
Oil Type Polyolester Oil, ICI Emkarate 32 3MAF
Oil Vol, Per compressor L 4.2 4.2 3.7
TOWER WATER CIRCUIT
Fluid Water, dosed as required
Connection Type Hosetail
Size 1½” 2” 2”
Recommended Flow Rate LPM 130 260 320
PROCESS WATER CIRCUIT
Fluid Ethylene Glycol / water 50/50 mixture, with inhibitor
Connection Type BSP female threaded
Size 4x 1½” 2x 2” / 2x 1½” 2x 2” / 2x 1½”
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
380-420V / 3Ph / 50Hz 380-420V / 3Ph / 50Hz 380-420V / 3Ph / 50Hz
Or Or Or
Mains Incoming 440-480V / 3Ph / 60Hz 440-480V / 3Ph / 60Hz 440-480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
Separate models Separate models
One model for all
for 50/60Hz for 50/60Hz
Control Circuit 110V/230V, 24VAC, 24VDC
ELECTRICAL LOAD
Max Running Current A 56.0 154.0 216.1
COMPRESSORS (each)
Motor Rating kW 15 15 18
Running Current A 25.1 25.1 33.3
Locked Rotor Current A 167 167 174
PUMP
Motor Rating kW 2.2 4.0 5.5
Running Current A 4.5 8.1 11.0
Locked Rotor Current A 36 64 85
HEATERS
Rating kW N/A 12.0 18.0
Running Current A N/A 17.3 26.0
Freezing
Point
Density
GENERAL Chiller units are supplied with loose items as per the table below –
contact GRE upon receipt should any of these items appear to be
missing.
Upon receipt of the machine, ensure that signs of damage or defects
to the unit are reported immediately to the supplier. In any transit, the
unit must remain upright at all times.
Should the unit be subjected to any kind of impact, the unit should be
inspected for damage immediately. This could affect the performance
of the chiller unit.
LIFTING The machines must only be lifted using the designated lifting holes in the
chiller frame.
LOCATION All chillers are designed to integrate into the Bobst metalliser, screwed
to the base using the bolt holes provided, and should only be installed
as such.
PRESSURE TESTING All water/glycol circuits are tested by GRE to 9 barg.
Once final water connections have been made on site, all circuits
should be pressure tested using water to 1.5x maximum operating
pressure.
LOOSE SUPPLIED ITEMS
Item Qty
24kW:
Hose Assembly 1½" x 1900 mm Long 2
Hose Assembly 1½" x 2400 mm Long 2
Brass Adaptor 1½" BSPP Cone Seat Male x 1½" BSP Taper Male 4
Male Hose Tail 1½" BSPM x 1½" Hose Brass 4
Drum containing 200 Litre 50/50 Ethylene Glycol / Water Mix + 2
inhibitor
48 & 60kW:
Drum containing 200 Litre 50/50 Ethylene Glycol / Water Mix + 3
inhibitor
ELECTRICAL Refer to the electrical drawing (supplied with the chiller) for details of
CONNECTIONS interconnecting wiring.
GENERAL The chiller is factory-commissioned and does not need additional on-
site setting up, however the following points should be referred to as a
good practice guide.
PRE- STARTUP Ensure that mains power supply is connected to chiller and electrically
CHECKLIST tested.
Check glycol content and solution. It is possible that the glycol solution
has been diluted by residual water left over from pressure testing.
Check that strainers are present on the glycol and tower-water circuits.
Ensure that mains power has been available to the chiller for at least 6
hours before operation – this is to ensure that the crankcase heaters
have time to warm up
Check that the unit is correctly earthed
Check all refrigerant ball valves are opened
Check all electrical connections are tight
Check the phase rotation is correct
PRIMING PROCESS – 1. Ensure all valves are open initially
24kW MACHINE
2. Fill the tank
3. Close valve V5 and open valves V9 and V10
4. Bleed the pump via its bleed valve
5. Start the priming procedure by setting the flag on the PLC
6. Flow should be seen in the tank and the glycol level should
drop, as the tank level falls, top it up
7. When no more bubbles can be seen, leave running for an
additional ½hour
8. turn off pump prime
9. Open valve V5 and close valve V10
Note Valve V9 must be left open
PRIMING PROCESS – 1. Fill the header tank with glycol to within 100mm of the top
48-60kW MACHINE
2. Bleed the pump via its bleed valve
3. Open valves V9 and MV2
4. Start the priming procedure by setting the flag on the PLC.
The pump will start and the water / glycol will circulate around
the tank loop
5. Check that the pressure transducer on the outlet (PT5) is
reading between 1 and 2 bar
6. Continue to monitor the pressure transducer on the outlet
(PT5) and the water level in the tank. If the level drops, top up
with glycol to within 100mm of the top.
7. Continue this process until there is a steady stream of water /
glycol entering the tank. Any bubbles indicate that the system
is not properly primed and that the process should continue.
REGULAR CHECKS
Carry out the checks listed below to ensure trouble-free operation:
DAILY
Visually inspect unit for water, refrigerant and oil leaks
Check for unusual operating noises
WEEKLY
Visually inspect unit for water, refrigerant and oil leaks
MONTHLY
Check suction and discharge pressure transducers appear to be reading correctly
Check the superheat is controller to 6°C ± 1°C at all operating loads
Check pump outlet pressure – if this has dropped, inspect glycol circuit strainer
3 MONTHLY
Check all electrical connections are tight
Check for excess vibration or unusual noise from all rotating components
Check sight glass on liquid line for dryness and bubbles to verify that there are no leaks
Check compressor oil levels (sight glass should show 1/2 to 2/3 full)
Check process (water/glycol) circuit flow is correct
Check glycol level in header tank, top up if necessary
Check correct operation of the pump and flow switch
Clean condition of water strainers
Check that pipe work clamps are secure
Check that compressor mounts are in good condition and are tight
Check condition of PRV
YEARLY
Check that all safety devices cut out the compressor at the correct settings
Check process circuit water/glycol concentration (should be 50:50)
Check level of corrosion inhibitor (should be 0.5% by volume)
Change superheat controller battery – contact Bobst for spare part information
SUPERHEAT CONTROLLER
Υ0 Refrigerant Type 3
Υ5 Superheat Setpoint 5
Υ2 MOP Enable/Disable 1
/1 Display Value 0
Υ4 Control Mode 0
SETTING PARAMETERS
Parameter Value
P0010 30
P970 1
P0003 3
P10 1
P0304 400
P0305 4.5
P0307 2.2
P0310 60
P0311 3450
P10 0
P0700 5 index 0
P1000 5 index 0
P1080 12
P1082 60
P1120 10
P1121 10
P2000 60
P2009 0 index 0
P2010 7 index 0
P2011 0 index 0
P2014 5000 index 0
P0971 1
System-specified alarms
Pump Current PUMP_OL Pump motor • Reset alarm and run pump
Overload over-current • Check voltage & Current across all three phases with the pump
trip running
If a phase loss or imbalance is detected, isolate power and
measure resistance across motor windings
• Check that the pump’s manual motor starter is correctly set (refer
to electrical drawing) and in the ‘on’ position
Compressor COMP_x_OL Compressor • Reset alarm and run compressor
Current over-current • Check voltage & Current across all three phases with compressor
Overload trip running
If a phase imbalance is detected, isolate power and check motor
windings
• Check that the compressor’s manual motor starter is correctly set
and in the ‘on’ position
Heater Current HEATER_x_OL Heater over- • Reset alarm and run heaters
Overload current trip • Check voltage & Current across all three phases with the heater
running
If a phase imbalance is detected, isolate power and check
resistance across all three phases
• Check that the heater’s manual motor starter is correctly set and in
the ‘on’ position
Compressor COMP_x_FLT Compressor • Check voltage & Current across all three phases for imbalance or
Fault Protection phase loss
Module Trip, • Compressor High Motor Temperature - Check Thermistor contacts
caused by behind protection module.
phase loss or
high motor
winding
temperature
Low Glycol LOW_LEVEL_FLT Glycol level in • Allow the system to cool and check glycol level in tank.
Level fault header tank • Check that low level switch is functioning correctly
has fallen
below minimum
permissible
Description Action
Slow Cooling / • Check that all available compressors are operating when system is in pull-down operation, If not,
Setpoint not reached check for alarms and contact GRE technical support if none are present
• Check that the electrically-actuated valve to the reheat tank is closed when in cooling mode.
• Check glycol concentration using a refractometer, if not 50/50 then correct and re-check.
• Record the data requested in point (4) above and contact GRE technical support with this information
Unusual Noise • Locate source:
o If compressor, check control of superheat during pulldown, this should settle out to 6°C ±
1°C after a couple of minutes
o If pump check glycol level & contraction
o For any other source contact GRE technical support and describe the issue
No function • Check mains power to the machine.
whatsoever • Check setpoint and cool/heat demand commands on profibus
• Check PLC has power and is active (green ‘run’ LED is lit)
Introduction Construction
Thermostatic expansion valves and mechanical regulator valves EX5/EX6/EX7/EX8 consist of two main internal assemblies, the
have been used in the refrigeration and air conditioning industry valve and the stepper motor. The stepper motor is located in the
to control superheat and refrigerant mass flow since its very upper part and connected directly to the slide and cage assembly
beginning. As today’s systems require improved energy of the valve. Similar to the technology used in compressors, the
efficiency, tighter temperature control, wider range of operating motor is exposed to refrigerant and lubricant and the materials
conditions and incorporate new features like remote monitoring used are identical to the ones in compressor motors. The housing
and diagnostics, the application of electronically operated valves of the motor and valve assembly is fully hermetic, utilising
becomes mandatory. Only they offer the controls performance exclusively brazing and welding technologies and eliminating all
necessary to meet these needs. gaskets.
As more new refrigerants appear on the market requiring an ever This design offers several technical advantages such as direct
increasing number of different charges and settings for coupling of motor and valve assembly for easy and reliable
thermostatic expansion valves, electrical control valves can solve movement of the valve assembly, no need for any other seals and
this problem too. eliminating the use of bellows and diaphragms which could be
ALCO electrical control valves are the solution for the challenges subject to lifetime limitations and leaks.
above. The latest technology and more than 70 years of Four electrical pins on top of EX5/6/7/8 are connected to the
experience in design and production of flow controls including motor. These pins are applied to the housing using melting-glass
Thermo® expansion valves have been incorporated in the design process technology. The pins of EX5/6 are require M12 electrical
of the EX5, EX6, EX7 and EX8. connector whereas EX7/8 are supplied with DIN electrical plug.
The body of EXVs is made from stainless steel and the extended
copper fittings (EX5/6/7) are used for easy brazing. EX8 are
equipped with rotalock connections.
Page 1 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Selection table
Type Order Nr. Flow pattern Capacity regulation Inlet connection Outlet connection
EX5-U21 800 600 5/8”(16 mm) ODF 7/8” (22 mm) ODF
EX6-I21 800 610 Uni-Flow 7/8” ODF 1-1/8” ODF
EX6-M21 800 611 22 mm ODF 28 mm ODF
EX7-U21 801 686 10 to 100% 1-3/8” (35 mm) ODF 1-3/8” (35 mm) ODF
EX7-B21 801 679 Bi-Flow (Heat pump) 1-3/8” (35 mm) ODF 1-3/8” (35 mm) ODF
EX8-M21 801 964 Uni-Flow 42 mm ODF 42 mm ODF
EX8-U21 801 970 Uni-Flow 1-3/8” (35 mm) ODF 1-3/8” (35 mm) ODF
Note 1: The EX5/EX6 is delivered without cable/connector assembly. The cable/connector assembly can be ordered separately.
Note 2: The EX7/EX8 is delivered with electrical plug according to DIN 43650, PG 9.
Cable and connector assembly for EX5 / EX6
Type Order Nr. Temp. Length Connector type to valve Connector type to driver board or Illustration
Range controller
EX5-N15 804650 1.5 m
EX5-N30 804651 -25 … +80°C 3.0 m M12, 4 pins Loose wires for EXD-S / -U / -C and
EX5-N60 804652 6.0 m EC3-33x
EX5-L60 804655 -50 …+80°C 6.0 m M12, 4 pins, low temp.
EX5-C15 804656 1.5 m
EX5-C30 804657 -25 … +80°C 3.0 m M12, 4 pins Phoenix type, crimp connection for
EX5-C60 804658 6.0 m Alco EC3 controller
EX5/EX6/EX7/EX8 Nominal and extended capacities as Expansion valves and liquid injection valves
(Pages 2 to 9)
The nominal capacity (Qn) based on the following conditions:
Refrigerant Evaporating temperature Condensing temperature Subcooling
R22, R134a, R404A, R407C, R410A +4°C +38°C 1K
R23 -60°C -25°C 1K
R124 +20°C +80°C 1K
10
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750
Number of Steps
Page 2 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
EX6
140 140
130
R410A (140 kW) 126
120 120
R23 (130 kW)
40
20
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750
Number of Steps
EX7
400
385
350 347
R407C (347 kW) 330
300 R22 (330 kW)
R134a (255 kW)
250 255
R404A (230 kW) 230
Qn, kW
200 R410A
150
100
50
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
Number of Steps
EX8
1000
925
900 880
R407C (925 kW)
800
R22 (880 kW)
700 R134a (680 kW) 680
600 R404A (613 kW) 613
Qn, kW
500
400
300
200
100
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600
Number of Steps
Page 3 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 4 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 5 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 6 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 7 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 8 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 9 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 10 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
EX6/EX7/EX8 Nominal and extended capacities as suction pressure regulator (evaporator or crankcase)
(Pages 10 to 12)
Nominal Capacities, kW
Valve Type Kv, m3/h R407C R22 R134a R404A
EX6 1.57 3.9 4.1 3.1 3.5
EX7 5.58 14 15 11 13
EX8 16.95 42 45 34 38
Nominal capacities are at +4°C, +38°C and 0.15 bar pressure drop.
Remarks:
EX5, EX6, EX7 and EX8 must be installed with motor (head) downward in suction line applications. This insures the valve life expectancy.
Multiply above nominal capacities by following factors to obtain capacities at different pressure drops.
∆P, bar 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.30
Correction factor 0.82 1.00 1.15 1.41
Example:
EX6 provides 3.5 kW at 0.15 bar pressure drop with R404A or 3.5*1.41 = 4.9 kW at 0.3 bar pressure drop.
Page 11 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 12 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 13 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
EX5/EX6/EX7/EX8 Nominal and extended capacities as condensing pressure regulator and liquid duty
(Pages 13 to 15)
Nominal Capacities, kW
Valve Type Kv, m3/h R407C R22 R134a R404A
EX5 0.68 18 20 18 13
EX6 1.57 43 46 42 30
EX7 5.58 153 162 151 106
EX8 16.95 463 491 458 323
Nominal capacities are at +4°C, +38°C and 0,35 bar pressure drop.
Multiply above nominal capacities by following factors to obtain capacities at different pressure drops
∆P, bar 0.15 0.20 0.35
Correction factor 0.65 0.76 1.00
Page 14 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 15 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
TC
T Temperature sensor
Check valve
Liquid Receiver
Solenoid valve
Suction accumulator
Page 16 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
T P
2
1
P
Page 17 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
P
1
T
Page 18 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
4-20mA/0-10V 1
2
T
TC
(1) = Controller
(2) = Stepper motor driver EXD-U
4-20mA/0-10V
1
2
TC
(1) = Controller
(2) = Stepper motor driver EXD-U
Page 19 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
2
3
4-20mA/0-10V
5
1
T
TC
4
Remarks:
(1) = Controller
(2) = Check Valve: It is important to install a check valve just after T-connection as shown. Check valve will not allow return of liquid
refrigerant from condenser through electrical control valve in to the evaporator during power interruption to system.
(3) = Hot gas bypass valve must be installed with motor (head) downward. This insures the valve life expectancy.
(4) = Liquid Distributor must be selected properly for hot gas mass flow.
(5) = Stepper motor driver EXD-U
Page 20 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
T 4-20mA/0-10V
TC
Remarks:
(1) = Controller
(2) = Evaporator temperature regulator. EX6, EX7 and EX8 must be installed with motor (head) downward in suction line applications.
This insures the valve life expectancy.
(3) This application may require additional liquid injection to suction line for desuperheating of compressor by means of suction line
superheat control or discharge line temperature control. Please consult Alco Controls for more details.
(4) = Stepper motor driver EXD-U
4-20mA/0-10V
3 P
TC
Remarks:
(1) = Controller
(2) = Crankcase pressure regulator. EXVs must be installed with motor (head) downward in suction line applications. This insures the
valve life expectancy.
(3) = Stepper motor driver EXD-U
Page 21 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
2 P
3 4-20mA/0-10V
TC
(1) = Controller
(2) = Condensing pressure regulator
(3) = Stepper motor driver EXD-U
Page 22 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
4-20mA/0-10V
1
3
4-20mA 2
4-20mA/0-10V
1
3
4-20mA 2
(1) = Controller
(2) = Liquid level sensor
(3) = Stepper motor driver EXD-U
Note: EXVs are not released for use with ammonia.
Page 23 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Page 24 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Function 4
1) Motor 12
A 2-phase bipolar stepper motor drives the EX5/6/7/8. This motor 8
follows the basic operating characteristics of any stepper motor
i.e. the motor will be held in position unless current pulses from a
driver board initiate rotation in either direction. The direction of
the rotation depends on the phase relationship of the current
pulses, the amount of rotation is dependent on the number of
9
pulses. One pulse will drive the motor one step i.e. the rotor will 7
move by α=1,8°. Successive pulses will lead to continuous 5
rotation.
The drive shaft of the rotor is connected to the spindle of cage 2
assembly to transform the rotation in conjunction with a cage
assembly into a linear motion for moving of the valve slide. 1
0 1α 2α 3α 3
6 11
Pulse 6
12
1 2 3 6 12
1 10
Time
6
2) Valve 1
8
The gate type valve is specifically designed for linear flow
characteristics in order to provide a wide range of capacity with a 7 9
linear relation between flow and positioning of the valve (capacity
vs. number of steps). Slide and ports are made from ceramic for 4 6
precise flow characteristics, high resolution and infinite life. 1
6
The compliant slide eliminates undesirable horizontal forces
caused by differential pressure (across the valve) to the cage 6 6
assembly and shaft of stepper motor. The internal design of the
EX5/6/7/8 is patented. 5 2
Total valve travel is 750 full steps for EX5/6, 1600 steps for EX7 6
6
and 2600 steps for EX8.
A mechanical stop in the fully closed position of the valve acts as 3 1
reference point. The controller can be reset by driving the valve
towards the fully closed position against the mechanical stop. By
overdriving the valve i.e. applying more than the full number of
steps, it can be assured that the reference point is correct.
Page 25 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
0,0
0 0,002 0,004 0,006 0,008 0,01 0,012 0,014 0,016 0,018 0,02
-0,5
Typical electrical connection between EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 and driver board
1 3 2 4
Page 26 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
Technical data
CE marking Protection accordance EX5/EX6: IP 68 with Alco supplied
EX5: not required to IEC 529, DIN 40050 cable connector assembly
EX6/EX7/EX8: required, Cat I, Module A EX7/EX8: IP 65 with ALCO DIN plug
Compatibility CFCs, HCFCs, HFCs, mineral and Vibration for non-connec- 4 g
(not released for use with POE lubricants ted and fastened valve (0 to 1000 Hz, 1 octave /min.)
inflammable refrigerants)
MOPD (maximum operating EX5/EX6: 30 bar Shock 20g at 11 ms
pressure differential) EX7/EX8: 25 bar 80g at 1 ms
Max. working pressure, PS EX5/EX6: 43 bar Net weight 0.52 kg (EX5), 0.60 kg (EX6)
EX7/EX8: 35 bar 1.8 kg (EX7) and 2.5 kg (EX8)
Temperature range: Accessory for EX5/EX6 See table on page 2
Refrigerant TS: -50 to +80°C (At motor) Seat leakage Positive shut-off as solenoid valve
Ambient -40 to +55°C (Except BI-Flow EX7-B21)
Salt spray test non-corrosion stainless steel body External leakage ≤ 3 gram / year
Humidity 5 to 95% r.H. Package and delivery EX5/EX6: without electrical connector
Connections EX5/EX6/EX7: ODF copper fittings (individual) EX7: With DIN plug
EX8: Rotalock with ODF copper EX8: With DIN plug and a pair of
plated fittings rotalock connections
Electrical data
Stepper motor type Bi-polar, phase current Phase inductance EX5/EX6: 30 mH ± 25%
by chopper control (constant EX7: 20 mH ± 25%
current) EX8: 22 mH ± 25%
Electrical connection 4 pin terminal via plug Step mode 2 phase full step
Reccom. driver supply voltg. 24 VDC (nominal) Step angle 1.8° per step ± 8%
Reccommended driver 18 to 36 VDC Total number of steps EX5/EX6: 750 full steps
supply voltage range EX7: 1600 full steps
EX8: 2600 full steps
Phase current, operating EX5/EX6: 500 mA max, -10% Stepping rate EX5/EX6: 500 Hz (full step) +15%
EX7: 750 mA ± 10% EX7: 330 Hz (full step) +15%
EX8: 800 mA ± 10% EX8: 500 Hz (full step) +15%
Holding current EX5/EX6: 100 mA Winding resistance per EX5/EX6: 13 Ohm ± 10%
EX7: 250 mA phase EX7: 8 Ohm ± 10%
EX8: 500 mA EX8: 6 Ohm ± 10%
Nominal input power per EX7/EX8: 5 W Full travel time EX5/EX6: 1.5 seconds
phase EX5/EX6: 3.5 W EX7/EX8: 5 seconds
Reference position Mechanical stop at fully close position
Page 27 of 28
Document Nr.: A3.5.008 6
EX5 / EX6 / EX7 / EX8 Replacement for A3.5.008 5
Date: 25.10.2004
Electrical Control Valves
149 149
35 35
Ø 44.5 Ø 44.5
Ø44
182
Ø38 78 25 25
56 23 23
Ø42 Ø42
205
123
3 3
Ø35 (1 /8) Ø35 (1 /8) 119 117
280
94 88
202
40 40
Ø60 Ø60
ALCO CONTROLS is not to be held responsible for erroneous literature compliance with technical knowledge of today. It is intended only for use
regarding capacities, dimensions, applications, etc. stated herein. by persons having the appropriate technical knowledge and skills, at their
Products, specifications and data in this literature are subject to change own discretion and risk. Since conditions of use are outside of ALCO'S
without notice. The information given herein is based on technical data control we can not assume any liability for results obtained or damages
and tests which ALCO CONTROLS believes to be reliable and which are in occurred due to improper application.
Phone: Fax:
ALCO CONTROLS Benelux +31 (0)773 240 234 +31 (0)773 240 235
Emerson Electric GmbH & Co OHG Denmark & Finland +44 (0)1 635 876 161 +44 (0)1 635 877 111
Postfach 1251 Eastern Europe, Turkey & Iran +32 (0)87 305 061 +32 (0)87 305 506
France/Greece, Maghreb +33 (0)478 668 570 +33 (0)478 668 571
Heerstraße 111
Deutschland, Österreich, Schweiz +49 (0)6109 6059 0 +49 (0)6109 6059 40
D-71332 Waiblingen
Italia +39 02 961 78 1 +39 02 961 78 888
Germany Middle East & Afrika +97 148 832 828 +97 148 832 848
Phone ...49-7151-509-0 Poland +48 22 458 9205 +48 22 458 9255
Fax ...49-7151-509-200 Russia & Cis +7 095 232 94 72 +7 095 232 03 56
España & Portugal +34 93 4 123 752 +34 93 4 124 215
www.alco-controls.com Sweden & Norway +44 (0)163 587 6161 +44 (0)163 587 7111
UK & Ireland +44 (0)163 587 6161 +44 (0)163 587 7111
Page 28 of 28
PT5
Pressure Transmitters
D A T A S H E E T
The PT5 series of Pressure Transmitters convert a pressure
into a linear electrical 4 .. 20mA output signal suitable for
controlling simple compressor and fan switching to the more
sophisticated application of superheat modulation of EX series
Electrical Control Valves.
With competitive performance to price characteristics and an
easy to install pre-fabricated M12 cable assembly, the PT5
transmitters are the designers choice for all refrigeration and
air conditioning applications.
Features
• Sensitive pressure cells with strong primary output signals
for the precise operation of superheat, compressor or fan PT5-xxM
controls systems
• Fully hermetic
• PT5-xxM pressure connector 7/16-20 UNF with Schrader
valve opener
• PT5-xxT with 6mm x 50mm long tube for applications
requiring a fully hermetic system solution
• Output signal 4 to 20 mA
• Standard pressure ranges compatible with former
Emerson pressure transmitters - Sealed gauge pressure
• Calibrated at pressure and temperature ranges to fulfill PT5-xxT
demands of today’s refrigeration and HVAC applications
• Reduced Full Scale Error characteristics over the complete
temperature range
• Easy install M12 electrical connection with pre-assembled
cable assemblies available in various lengths
• Protection class IP 65
• Vibration, shock and pulsation resistant
• CE-mark under EC EMC-Directive PT4-Mxx Cable Assembly
• UL listed. File Nr. E258370
Options (minimum quantity applies)
• Other pressure ranges and calibrations upon request
• Self-assembly plug without cable available upon request
16
12
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Pressure (bar)
Description
At the heart of the transmitter is a thin film pressure sensitive PT5 transmitters produce a relative output signal after being
stainless steel diaphragm on which the strain gauges are calibrated at atmospheric pressure and then sealed during
directly bonded. The direct integration of the strain gauges production. When using PT5 in heights significantly above sea
means no additional errors are introduced between the location level the output signal deviation must be taken into account. i.e.
where the pressure acts and where it is measured creating a at a height of 1000m the signal reads approximately 0.1 bar
inherently strong design with minimal hysteresis. lower than the actual pressure.
The integrated electronic module conditions the output of the
pressure cell to produce a temperature compensated signal of Pressure transmitters PT5 with current output (two wire
4…20 mA. connection) offer the following advantages:
The fully welded monolithic construction creates a fully hermetic • More suitable for signal transmission over long distance
product which ensures reliable operation and a long life-time • Higher immunity to electro-magnetic interference
expectation even under severe operating conditions. With the • Open circuit detection enables fail-safe operation
high operating and burst pressures, the PT5 can be applied to
all requirements of today’s HVAC systems but is particularly
suitable for refrigeration applications.
The protective stainless steel diaphragm ensures compatibility
with the media frequently encountered in refrigeration systems
whilst the Stainless steel housing provides excellent corrosion
resistance. The electrical circuit is sealed to the housing which
together with the pre-fabricated cable assemblies provide an
IP65 solution for the harshest environment.
Technical data
Supply voltage Sensor lifetime 30.000.000 cycles
Nominal 24 Vdc With 1.3 nominal pressure
Range (polarity protected) 7 ... 30 Vdc Burst pressure refer to Table on page 1
Permissible noise & ripple < 1 Vp-p Electrical connection
Influence of supply voltage < 0,02 %FS/V all versions Transmitters M12 connection to EN61076-
2-101 part 2
PT4-Mxx Cable Assemblies Pre-fabricated with various
cable lengths
Operating current Maximum ≤ 24 mA Medium compatibility HFC, HCFC, CFC
4 to 20 mA output not suitable for ammonia and
inflammable refrigerants!
Load resistance Approvals
RL ≤ Ub - 7.0V_
CE conformity PED 97/23/EC
0.02A
CE marking according to EMC 2004/108/EEC, EN 61326
Response time ≤ 5 ms Emission (Group 1; Class B)
and immunity (industrial
locations)
Mounting position Non position sensitive Vibration at 10…2000Hz 5 g according to IEC 68-2-6
Refer to operating Protection class (EN 60529) IP65 with plug
instructions for more details
Temperatures Materials stainless steel
Operating ambient housing -40.....+80 °C Housing, pressure connector 1.4534 / 1.4571 (PT5-xxT) /
Medium -40...+100 °C and diaphragm with medium AISI 316L
Transport and storage -25.....+80 °C contact
Electrical connector Highly resistive, fiberglas-
enforced plastic (PBTGF30)
Weight approx. PT5-xxM: 80 grams Marking CE, UL, cRUus
(without plug and cable assembly) PT5-xxT: 60 grams (UL File Nr. E258370)
Accuracy performance
Type Total error * Temperature range
PT5-07M/T ≤ ±1% FS -40 ….+20 °C
PT5-18M/T ≤ ±1% FS -40…. +20 °C
PT5-30M/T ≤ ±1% FS 0 …. +40 °C
≤ ±2% FS -20 …. +60 °C
Typically ≤ ±2% FS -40 …. +80 °C
PT5-50M/T ≤ ±1% FS 0 …. +40 °C
≤ ±2% FS -20 …. +60 °C
Typically ≤ ±2% FS -30 …. +80 °C
*) Total error includes non-linearity, hysteresis, repeatability as well
as offset and span drift due to the temperature changes.
Note: %FS is related to Percentage of Full sensor Scale.
38 46
12
EMERSON is not to be held responsible for erroneous literature EMERSON’s control we can not assume any liability for results
regarding capacities, dimensions, applications, etc. stated herein. obtained or damages occurred due to improper application. Our
Products, specifications and data in this literature are subject to change products are designed and adapted for fixed locations. For mobile
without notice. The information given herein is based on technical data applications failures may occur. The suitability for this has to be
and tests which EMERSON believes to be reliable and which are in assured from the plant manufacturer which may include making
compliance with technical knowledge of today. It is intended only for appropriate tests.
use by persons having the appropriate technical knowledge and skills, This document replaces all earlier versions.
at their own discretion and risk. Since conditions of use are outside of
Phone: Fax:
Emerson Electric GmbH & Co OHG Benelux +31 (0)77 324 0 234 +31 (0)77 324 0 235
ALCO CONTROLS Germany, Austria & Switzerland +49 (0)6109 6059 -0 +49 (0)6109 6059 40
Postfach 1251 France, Greece, Maghreb +33 (0)4 78 66 85 70 +33 (0)4 78 66 85 71
Heerstraße 111 Italia +39 02 961 781 +39 02 961 788 888
D-71332 Waiblingen Spain & Portugal +34 93 41 23 752 +34 93 41 24 2
Germany UK & Ireland +44 (0) 1635 876 161 +44 (0) 1635 877 111
Phone ...49-7151-509-0 Sweden, Denmark, Norway & Finland +49 (0)2408 929 0 +49 (0)2408 929 528
Fax ...49-7151-509-200 Eastern Europe & Turkey +49 (0)2408 929 0 +49 (0)2408 929 525
Poland +48 (0)22 458 9205 +48 (0)22 458 9255
www.emersonclimate.eu Russia & Cis +7 495 981 9811 +7 495 981 9816
Balkan +385 (0) 1560 38 75 +385 (0) 1 560 3879
Romania +40 364 73 11 72 +40 364 73 12 98
Ukraine +38 44 4 92 99 24 +38 44 4 92 99 28
S4.2
S4.2 S4.1
S4.1
S4.2 S1
S1 S4.1
T1T1
T1
S1
400
400
369
400
490
369
490
369
490
T2T2
T2 S2
S2 S2
S3.1
S3.1 S3.2
S3.2
S3.1 S3.2
166
166
Dimensions in mm 166
Dimensions
A = 7.6 + n x 2.20 (mm)
Weight = 6.5 + 0.35 n x (kg)
n = number of plates
600
Evaporation R410A air conditioning duty
500
200 200
Capacity (kW)
250 250
200
80
80
50 50 50
30
25
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
4.5 Motor protection ............................................................................................................... 18
4.6 Phase protection .............................................................................................................. 18
4.7 Protector functional check and failure detection .............................................................. 19
4.7.1 Checking the connection ...................................................................................... 19
4.7.2 Checking the compressor thermistor chain .......................................................... 19
4.7.3 Checking the protection module ........................................................................... 19
4.8 High-potential testing ....................................................................................................... 19
5 Starting up & operation................................................................................... 21
5.1 Strength pressure test ...................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Tightness/pressure test .................................................................................................... 21
5.3 System evacuation ........................................................................................................... 21
5.4 Preliminary checks – Pre-starting .................................................................................... 22
5.5 Charging procedure ......................................................................................................... 22
5.6 Initial start-up ................................................................................................................... 22
5.7 Rotation direction ............................................................................................................. 22
5.8 Starting sound .................................................................................................................. 23
5.9 Deep vacuum operation ................................................................................................... 23
5.10 Shell temperature ............................................................................................................. 23
5.11 Pump down cycle ............................................................................................................. 23
5.12 Minimum run time ............................................................................................................ 24
5.13 Shut-off sound .................................................................................................................. 24
5.14 Frequency ........................................................................................................................ 24
5.15 Oil level ............................................................................................................................ 24
6 Maintenance & repair ...................................................................................... 25
6.1 Exchanging the refrigerant ............................................................................................... 25
6.2 Rotalock valves ................................................................................................................ 25
6.3 Replacing a compressor .................................................................................................. 25
6.3.1 Compressor replacement ..................................................................................... 25
6.3.2 Start-up of a new or replacement compressor ..................................................... 25
6.4 Lubrication and oil removal .............................................................................................. 26
6.5 Oil additives ..................................................................................................................... 26
6.6 Unbrazing system components ....................................................................................... 27
7 Dismantling & disposal ................................................................................... 27
DISCLAIMER ............................................................................................................... 27
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
1 Safety instructions
instructions
Copeland Scroll™ compressors are manufactered according to the latest European and US
Safety
Safety Standards. Particular emphasis has been placed on the user’s safety.
These compressors are intended for installation in systems according to the EC Machines
directive. They may be put to service only if they have been installed in these systems according
to instructions and conform to the corresponding provisions of legislation. For relevant standards
please refer to Manufacturers Declaration, available on request.
These instructions should be retained throughout the lifetime of the compressor.
description
Product
You are strongly advised to follow these safety instructions.
Installation
damage. personal injury.
High voltage IMPORTANT
This icon indicates operations with a This icon indicates instructions to
danger of electric shock. avoid malfunction of the compressor.
Danger of burning or frostbite This word indicates a
This icon indicates operations with a NOTE recommendation for easier operation.
danger of burning or frostbite.
connection
Explosion hazard
Electrical
This icon indicates operations with a
danger of explosion.
Starting up &
commission and maintain this equipment.
operation
Electrical connections must be made by qualified electrical personnel.
All valid standards for connecting electrical and refrigeration equipment must be
observed.
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 1
1.3 General instructions
WARNING
System breakdown! Personal injuries! Never install a system in the field
and leave it unattended when it has no charge, a holding charge, or with the
service valves closed without electrically locking out the system.
System breakdown! Personal injuries! Only approved refrigerants and
refrigeration oils must be used.
WARNING
High shell temperature! Burning! Do not touch the compressor until it has
cooled down. Ensure that other materials in the area of the compressor do
not get in touch with it. Lock and mark accessible sections.
CAUTION
Overheating! Bearing damage! Do not operate compressors without
refrigerant charge or without being connected to the system.
CAUTION
Contact with POE! Material damage! POE lubricant must be handled
carefully and the proper protective equipment (gloves, eye protection, etc.)
must be used at all times. POE must not come into contact with any surface
or material that it might damage, including without limitation, certain
polymers, eg, PVC/CPVC and polycarbonate.
IMPORTANT
Transit damage! Compressor malfunction! Use original packaging. Avoid
collisions and tilting.
2 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
2 Product description
instructions
2.1 Common information about Copeland Scroll™ compressors
Safety
The Scroll compressor has been under development at Emerson Climate Technologies since
1979. It is the most efficient and durable compressor Emerson Climate Technologies has ever
developed for air-conditioning and refrigeration.
This application guideline deals with all vertical single Copeland Scroll™ compressors for
refrigeration applications from ZB15K* to ZB220K*, ZS21K* to ZS11M* and ZF06K* to
ZF48K*, including vapour injection compressors.
description
Product
Cooling Cooling Cooling
capacity capacity capacity
Compressor kW Motor Compressor kW Motor Compressor kW Motor
Installation
ZB26KCE 5.85 PFJ/TFD ZF11K4E 2.46 TFD
ZB29KCE 6.97 6.08 PFJ/TFD
ZB30KCE 6.87 6.61 PFJ/TFD ZF13K4E 2.78 7.03 TFD ZF13KVE 3.96 TFD
ZB38KCE 8.53 8.21 PFJ/TFD ZF15K4E 3.42 8.46 TFD
ZB45KCE 10.05 9.66 TFD ZF18K4E 4.18 10.30 TFD ZF18KVE 5.91 TFD
ZB48KCE 11.63 10.79 TFD
ZB56KCE 11.75 TWD ZF24K4E 5.16 TWD ZF24KVE 7.20 TWD
ZB75KCE 17.15 TWD ZF33K4E 7.09 TWD ZF33KVE 9.80 TWD
ZB92KCE 21.20 TWD ZF40K4E 8.78 TWD ZF40KVE 11.92 TWD
connection
Electrical
ZB11MCE 25.80 TWD ZF48K4E 10.6 TWD ZF48KVE 14.92 TWD
Starting up &
operation
Evaporating temperature .....-35°C Suction gas return temperature ..... 20°C
Condensing temperature ..... 40°C Liquid sub-cooling ......................... 0K
These compressors have one Scroll compression set driven by a single or three-phase induction
motor. The Scroll set is mounted at the upper end of the rotor shaft of the motor. The rotor shaft
axis is in the vertical plane.
This guideline is intended to enable users to ensure the safe installation, starting, operation and
repair
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 3
2.3 Nomenclature
The model designation contains the following technical information about the standard and
vapour injection compressors:
Z B 56K C E - TWD - 551
Bill of material number
Motor version
Oil type:
E = POE oil
None = mineral oil
Model variation
Oil recharge values can be taken from Copeland Scroll™ compressors brochures or Copeland®
brand products Selection Software.
4 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
The application envelopes shown below are for R404A and R407F. For other refrigerant
application envelopes please refer to Copeland® brand products Selection Software on
www.emersonclimate.eu.
instructions
65 65
65
Safety
60 60
60
55 55
55
50 50 50
45 45 45
40 40 40
25 25 25
description
20 20 20
Product
15 15 15
10 10 10
5 5 5
-30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15
Evaporating Temperature (oC) Evaporating Temperature (oC) Evaporating Temperature (oC)
10K Suction Superheat
25oC Suction Gas Return
Installation
65 65 65
60 60 60
55 55
55
50 50
50
45 45
40 45
40
35 R404A 35 R404A 40
R404A
30 30 35
25 25
30
connection
Electrical
20 20
25
15 15
10 10 20
5 5 15
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10
Evaporating Temperature (oC) Evaporating Temperature (oC) Evaporating Temperature (oC)
25oC Suction Gas Return 0 oC Suction Gas Return
+ Liquid Injection 25oC Suction Gas Return
Starting up &
Figure 1: Application envelopes with R404A
operation
ZB30K* to ZB48K* ZF13K* to ZF18K*
60 60
55 55
Condensing Temperature (oC)
50 50
45 45
Maintenance &
40 40
35 35
R407F R407F
repair
30 30
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5
-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10
Evaporating Temperature (oC) Evaporating Temperature to (oC)
Dismantling &
25oC Suction Gas Return 20oC Suction Gas Return + Liquid injection
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 5
3 Installation
WARNING
High pressure! Injury to skin and eyes possible! Be careful when
opening connections on a pressurized item.
Figure 3
If possible, the compressor should be kept vertical during handling. The discharge connection
plug should be removed first before pulling the suction connection plug to allow the dry air
pressure inside the compressor to escape. Pulling the plugs in this sequence prevents oil mist
from coating the suction tube making brazing difficult. The copper-coated steel suction tube
should be cleaned before brazing. No object, eg, a swaging tool should be inserted deeper than
51 mm into the suction tube or it might damage the suction screen and motor.
3.1.3 Installation location
Ensure the compressors are installed on a solid level base.
3.1.4 Mounting parts
Four vibration absorber grommets are supplied with each compressor. They dampen the start-up
surge of the compressor and minimise sound and vibration transmission to the compressor base
during operation. The metal sleeve inside is a guide designed to hold the grommet in place. It is
not designed as a load-bearing member, and application of excessive torque to the bolts can
crush the sleeve. Its inner diameter is approximately 8.5 mm to fit, eg, an M8 screw. The
mounting torque should be 13 ± 1 Nm. It is critically important that the grommet is not
compressed.
If the compressors are mounted in tandem or used in parallel, then the hard mountings (bolt M9
5/16”) are recommended. The mounting torque should be 27 ± 1 Nm. It is possible to deliver
these hard mounting parts as a kit, or on request to deliver the compressor with these parts
instead of the rubber grommets.
6 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
Mounting parts: ZB15K* to ZB48K*, ZS21K* to ZS45K*, ZF06K* to ZF18K* -
instructions
Soft mountings
Safety
Mounting parts: ZB56K* to ZB11M*, ZS56K* to ZS11M*, ZF24K* to ZF48K* -
description
Soft mountings
Product
Mounting parts: ZB220K* - Soft mountings
Installation
Figure 4
connection
Electrical
IMPORTANT
Blockage! Compressor breakdown! Maintain a flow of oxygen-free
nitrogen through the system at very low pressure during brazing. Nitrogen
displaces the air and prevents the formation of copper oxides in the system.
If allowed to form, the copper oxide material can later be swept through the
system and block screens such as those protecting capillary tubes, thermal
expansion valves, and accumulator oil return holes.
Starting up &
Contamination or moisture! Bearing failure! Do not remove the plugs until
operation
the compressor is set into the unit. This minimises any entry of contaminants
and moisture.
The copper-coated steel tubes on Scroll compressors can be brazed in approximately the
same manner as any copper tube.
Dismantling &
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 7
To disconnect:
Heat joint areas 2 and 3 slowly and uniformly until the braze material softens and the tube
can be pulled out of the fitting.
To reconnect:
Recommended brazing materials: Silfos with minimum 5% silver or silver braze used on
other compressors. Due to the different thermal properties of steel and copper, brazing
procedures may have to be changed from those commonly used.
NOTE: Since the discharge stub contains a check valve, care must be taken not to
overheat it to prevent brazing material to flow into it.
8 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
A filter drier such as ALCO ADKPlus 036MMS or ADKPlus 032S should be installed before the
solenoid valve to avoid blocking the valve and the injection device. If the internal motor protector
instructions
trips power to the injection solenoid must be shut-off.
Safety
R404A/R507 R22
I.D. Length I.D. Length
Model
(inch) (inch) (inch) (inch)
ZF24K4E 0.050" 30" 0.050" 5"
ZF33K4E 0.050" 17.5" 0.050" 5"
ZF40K4E 0.070" 30" 0.070" 30"
ZF48K4E 0.07" 30" 0.07" 10"
description
Product
Table 3: Capillary tube details
Installation
connection
Electrical
Figure 7: Liquid injection
Starting up &
operation
circuit similar to the circuit shown in Figure 8. This increases the refrigeration capacity and the
system efficiency.
The line diagram shows a system configuration for the economizer cycle. A heat exchanger is
used to provide additional subcooling to the refrigerant before it enters the evaporator. This
subcooling process provides the increased capacity gain measured in the system.
The refrigerant evaporated through the heat exchanger is injected into the compressors and Maintenance &
provides additional cooling at higher compression ratios. repair
Dismantling &
disposal
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 9
NOTE: For further information on vapour injection see the Technical Information C7.19.1
"Vapour Injection Scroll Compressors for Refrigeration".
Figure 9
Copeland Scroll™ compressors are delivered with a discharge check valve fitted inside the
discharge port and rubber plugs fitted to the suction and discharge ports as standard. There are
options to fit either Rotalock valves, or Rotalock adaptors or just make brazing connections.
Brazing connections can be converted to Rotalock by means of adaptors. Rotalock shut-off
valves are available for the suction as well as discharge sides. Using either straight or angled
adaptors provides a way to convert a Rotalock into a brazing connection.
Refer to the following table for proper tightening torques:
Torque [Nm]
Rotalock 3/4"16UNF 40-50
Rotalock 1”-14UNS 70-80 NOTE: More information concerning adaptors and
Rotalock 1"1/4-12UNF 110-135 shut-off valves can be found in the "Spare parts
Rotalock 1"3/4-12UNF 135-160 list".
Rotalock 2"1/4-12UNF 165-190
C_T_SCA_002
Table 4
Irrespective of system charge, oil dilution may occur if large amounts of liquid refrigerant
repeatedly flood back to the compressor during:
normal off cycles;
defrost;
varying loads.
In such a case an accumulator must be used to reduce flood-back to a safe level that the
compressor can handle. The use of accumulators is dependent on the application. If an
accumulator must be used, the oil-return orifice should be from 1 to 1.4 mm in diameter for
10 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
models ZB15K* to ZB48K*, ZS19K* to ZS45K*, ZF06K* to ZF18K* and 2.0 mm for models
ZB56K* to ZB11M*, ZS56K* to ZS11M*, ZF24K* to ZF48K* depending on compressor size and
instructions
compressor flood-back results.
Safety
The size of the accumulator depends upon the operating range of the system and the amount of
subcooling and subsequent head pressure allowed by the refrigerant control.
3.7 Screens
CAUTION
Screen blocking! Compressor breakdown! Use screens with at least
description
0.6 mm openings.
Product
The use of screens finer than 30 x 30 mesh (0.6 mm openings) anywhere in the system should
be avoided with these compressors. Field experience has shown that finer mesh screens used
to protect thermal expansion valves, capillary tubes, or accumulators can become temporarily or
permanently plugged with normal system debris and block the flow of either oil or refrigerant to
the compressor. Such blockage can result in compressor failure.
Installation
3.8 Mufflers
External mufflers, normally applied to piston compressors in the past, may not be required for
Copeland Scroll™ compressors.
Individual system tests should be performed to verify acceptability of sound performance. If
adequate attenuation is not achieved, use a muffler with a larger cross-sectional area to inlet
area ratio. A ratio of 20:1 to 30:1 is recommended.
A hollow shell muffler will work quite well. Locate the muffler at minimum 15 to maximum 45 cm
connection
Electrical
from the compressor for the most effective operation. The further the muffler is placed from the
compressor within these ranges, the more effective. Choose a muffler with a length of 10 to
15 cm.
Starting up &
operation
some respects the sound and vibration
characteristics differ from reciprocating
compressors and in rare instances could result in
unexpected sound generation. One difference is
that the vibration characteristic of the scroll
compressor, although low, includes two very close
frequencies, one of which is normally isolated from
Maintenance &
the shell by the suspension of an internally-
suspended compressor. These frequencies, which
repair
are present in all compressors, may result in a low-
Figure 10: Suction tube design level "beat" frequency that can be detected as noise
coming along the suction line into the building
under some conditions. Elimination of the beat can
be achieved by attenuating either of the contributing frequencies. This is easily done by using
one of the common combinations of recommended design configurations. The scroll compressor
makes both a rocking and twisting motion and enough flexibility must be provided in the line to
Dismantling &
prevent vibration transmission into any lines attached to the unit. In a split system, the most
disposal
important goal is to ensure minimal vibration in all directions at the service valve to avoid
transmitting vibrations to the structure to which the lines are fastened.
A second difference of the Copeland Scroll is that under some conditions the normal rotational
starting motion of the compressor can transmit an "impact" noise along the suction line. This
may be particularly pronounced in three-phase models due to their inherently higher starting
torque. This phenomenon, like the one described previously, also results from the lack of internal
suspension and can be easily avoided by using standard suction line isolation techniques as
described below.
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 11
Recommended configuration
Tubing configuration: ...........small shock loop
Service valve: ....................."angled” valve fastened to unit / wall
Suction muffler: ....................not required
Alternative configuration
Tubing configuration: ...........small shock loop
Service valve: ......................."straight through" valve fastened to unit / wall
Suction muffler: ....................may be required (acts as dampening mass)
12 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
4 Electrical connection
instructions
Safety
4.1 General recommendations
The compressor terminal box has a wiring diagram on the inside of its cover. Before connecting
the compressor, ensure the supply voltage, the phases and the frequency match the nameplate
data.
description
Single-phase (PF*) compressors:
Product
Power circuit Control circuit
Installation
connection
Electrical
Starting up &
operation
Motor terminal connections
Figure 11
disposal
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 13
Three-phase compressors (TF*) with internal motor protection:
For the ZB15K* to ZB48K*, ZS19K* to ZS45K*, ZF06K* to ZF18K* TF* range of compressors the
following circuit diagrams can be used:
Power circuit Control circuit
Legend
B1 ....... Room thermostat K1 ........ Contactor
B3 ....... Discharge gas thermostat K35 ...... Current relay (ZF06-ZF18)
F1 ....... Fuse R2 ........ Crankcase heater
F3 ....... HP switch S1 ........ Auxiliary switch
F4 ....... LP switch Y5 ........ Solenoid valve for refrigeration injection
Figure 12
14 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
Three-phase compressors (TW*) with external motor protection INT69SCY2:
For the ZB56K* to ZB220K*, ZS56K* to ZS11M*, ZF24K* to ZF48K* TW* range of compressors
instructions
the following circuit diagrams can be used:
Safety
Power circuit Control circuit
description
Product
Installation
connection
Electrical
Motor terminal connections
Legend
A ......... Motor protection module INT69SCY2 K1 ........ Contactor
Starting up &
B1 ....... Room thermostat R2 ........ Crankcase heater
operation
B3 ....... Discharge gas thermostat S1 ........ Auxiliary switch
F1 ....... Fuse Y5 ........ Solenoid valve for refrigeration injection
F3 ....... HP switch
F4 ....... LP switch
Figure 13
The terminal box is IP21 for all models without electronic motor protection (eg, TF*/PF*) and
repair
IP54 for all models with electronic motor protection (eg, TW*).
4.2.2 Motor windings
These Scroll compressors are offered with either a single-phase or a three-phase induction
motor, depending on the size. All three-phase motors are connected in star; single-phase motors
need a run capacitor.
Dismantling &
The motor insulation material is class "B" (TF*) or "H" (TW*) for compressor models covered in
disposal
this guideline.
4.2.3 Protection devices
Independently from the internal motor protection, fuses must be installed before the compressor.
The selection of fuses has to be carried out according to VDE 0635, DIN 57635, IEC 269-1or
EN 60-269-1.
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 15
4.2.4 Current sensing relay for use with compressors with liquid or vapour injection
The current sensing relay is only concerning the ZF compressors from ZF06K* to ZF18K* with
vapour injection or with liquid injection using capillary tube.
Power to the injection solenoid must be cut if the internal motor protector trips and the danger of
flooding the compressor arises. For models above a current sensing relay, eg, the KRIWAN
INT215, Type K35 can be supplied.
The relay must be installed in a way that it senses the same phase as the control circuit is
hooked up to. “L1” in Figures 11, 12, 13 and 14 serves only as an example. It has to be wired in
such a way that marking “L” faces the compressor and “K” the contactor.
A crankcase heater is used to prevent refrigerant migrating into the shell during standstill
periods. Due to the Copeland scroll’s inherent ability to handle liquid refrigerant in flooded
conditions a crankcase heater is not required when the system charge does not exceed the
charge limits shown in Table 5.
Model Refrigerant charge
Medium temperature Low temperature limit
ZB15K* to ZB29K* / ZS21K* to ZS26K* ZF06K* to ZF11K* 3.6 kg
ZB30K* to ZB48K* / ZS30K* to ZS45K* ZF13K* & ZF18K* 4.5 kg
ZB56K* to ZB11M* / ZS56K* to ZS11M* ZF24K* to ZF48K* 7.5 kg
ZB220K* 11.3 kg
Table 5
If a crankcase heater is fitted it is recommended that
the heater be turned on for a minimum of 12 hours
prior to starting the compressor. This will prevent oil
dilution and bearing stress on initial start up. The
crankcase heater must remain energised during
compressor off cycles.
The crankcase heater must be mounted below the oil
schraeder valve located on the bottom shell (see
Figure 15).
Figure 15: Crankcase heater location
16 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
4.3 Pressure safety controls
instructions
4.3.1 High-pressure control
Safety
A high-pressure control with a maximum cut-out setting of 28 bar(g) is required.
The high-pressure cut-out should have a manual reset feature for the highest level of system
protection.
4.3.2 Low-pressure control
A minimum cut-out setting of 0.3 bar(g) is required for the ZF compressor using R404A, and of
description
0.0 bar(g) for the same compressor using R22. For ZB and ZS compressors, the low-pressure
Product
cut-out should be set as high as possible. The normal minimum is 2.6 bar(g).
The low-pressure cut-out should have a manual reset feature for the highest level of system
protection.
4.3.3 Internal pressure relief valve
There is an internal pressure relief valve on all ZB15K* to ZB48K*, ZF06K* to ZF18K* and
ZS21K* to ZS45K* refrigeration scroll compressors, which opens at a differential pressure of
Installation
28 bar ± 3 bar between high- and low-pressure sides. A high-pressure cut-out may be required
according to national regulations and is strongly recommended due to the capabilities of
pumping to high pressures once the discharge is obstructed. The IPR valve is a safety device,
not an HP switch. It is not designed for repeated operation and there is no guarantee that it will
reset correctly if it does have repeated operation.
connection
Electrical
Internal discharge temperatures reached under some
extreme operating conditions (such as loss of
refrigerant injection charge or extremely high
compression ratio) could cause compressor damage.
For compressors ZF06K* to ZF18K* and ZS21K* to
ZS45K* Emerson Climate Technologies recommends
THERMODISC thermostat 37TJ31 X 1976E. This
Starting up &
thermostat has a cut-out setting of 99°C ± 4K with
operation
28 ± 5K closing differential and should be installed
X approximately 120 mm from the discharge valve
outlet (see Figure 16).
In order to avoid improper functioning due to false
readings this thermostat needs to be insulated (see
Figure 16: Discharge temperature
protection recommended position
“X” in Figure 16). Maintenance &
A discharge line thermostat is not required for
compressors ZB15K* to ZB48K*. For these models, an internal thermodisc is positioned
repair
adjacent to the discharge port. When the thermodisc opens a small gas by-pass occurs which
trips the motor protector.
The internal thermodisc opens at 146°C ± 4K and closes at 91°C ± 7K.
For compressors ZB56K* to ZB11M*; ZS56K* to ZS11M*; ZF24K* to ZF48K* and ZB220K*, a
thermistor is located in the discharge port of the fixed scroll. Excessive discharge temperature
will cause the electronic protector module to trip. The discharge gas thermistor is wired in series
Dismantling &
NAT = 140°C
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 17
4.5 Motor protection
For the ZB15K* to ZB48K*, ZS21K* to ZS45K*, ZF06K* to ZF18K* range of compressors,
conventional inherent internal line break motor protection is provided.
The electronic motor protection system used in all ZB56K* to ZB220K*, ZS56K* to ZS11M*,
ZF24K* to ZF48K* models is identified by a "W" as the centre letter in the motor code. This
system utilizes the temperature-dependent resistance of the thermistors (also called PTC-
resistance) to read the winding temperature. A chain of four thermistors connected in series is
embedded in the motor windings so that the temperature of the thermistors can follow the
winding temperature with little inertia. An electronic module INT69SCY2 is required to process
the resistance values and trip a control depending on the thermistor resistance.
Protection module specifications
Type: .............................................. Kriwan INT69SCY2
Dual voltage:.................................. 115 – 230V/120 – 240V AC 50/60 Hz , -15%...+10%, 3VA
Normal PTC resistance: ................ <1.8 kΩ
Trip resistance: ............................. 4.50 kΩ ± 20%
Reset resistance: ........................... 2.75 kΩ ± 20%
Reset time delay: ........................... 30 minutes ± 5 minutes
Reset of running time………………Power interruption / mains failure approx. 5s
Phase monitor: .............................. Yes
Ambient temperature range……….-30°C…+70°C
Module
The INT69SCY2 hermetic motor protection
module complies with IEC/EN 60335.
The module features mean that the
refrigeration system would still be in a safe
condition even if two faults were to occur.
Backup is provided if the first fault protection
should fail. An additional control contactor
should be fitted to the system.
For protection in case of blocked rotor one
thermistor for each phase is embedded in
the winding heads on the upper (suction gas)
side of the compressor motor. A fourth
T1/T2 Power supply thermistor is located in a winding head at the
L1/L2/L3 Phase control lower end of the motor. A fifth sensor is
S1/S2 Thermistor chain located in the discharge port of the fixed
M1/M2 Relay control circuit scroll to control discharge-gas superheat.
The entire chain is internally led to the fusite
Figure 18: Wiring of the motor protection module
from where it is connected to the module
connections S1 and S2. When any
resistance of the thermistor chain reaches the tripping value, the module interrupts the control
line and causes the compressor to switch off. After the thermistor has cooled sufficiently, its
resistance drops to the reset value but the module itself resets after a time delay of 30 minutes
and restarts the compressor.
18 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
4.7 Protector functional check and failure detection
WARNING
instructions
Conductor cables! Electrical shock! Shut off power supply before and
Safety
between each test.
Prior to start-up of the fully connected compressor a functional check shall be carried out:
Disconnect one terminal either S1 or S2 of the protection module. If the compressor is now
switched on, the motor should not start (simulation of an open thermistor chain).
Reconnect the disconnected thermistor line. If the compressor is now switched on, the
description
motor must start.
Product
If the motor does not start up during the functional check, this indicates a disturbance in
operation. The following steps should be followed:
4.7.1 Checking the connection
Check the connection of the thermistor leads in the terminal box and at the protection
module for possible loose connections or cable breakage.
Installation
If there is neither loose connection nor cable breakage the resistance of the thermistor chain
must be checked.
4.7.2 Checking the compressor thermistor chain
Caution: Use maximum measuring voltage of 3V!
The thermistor leads at terminals S1 and S2 of the module shall be disconnected and the
resistance measured between the leads. The resistance must be between 150 Ω and 1250 Ω.
connection
If the thermistor chain has a higher resistance (2750 Ω or higher), the motor temperature is
Electrical
still too high and it must be allowed to cool. Then measure again.
If the resistance is below 30 Ω, the compressor has to be exchanged due to shorted sensor
circuit.
An infinite value indicates an open sensor circuit and the compressor has to be replaced.
If no defect is detected in the thermistor chain the module must be checked.
Starting up &
4.7.3 Checking the protection module
operation
The control connections at M1 and M2 have to be removed and the switching conditions must be
checked by an ohmmeter or signal buzzer:
Simulation of a short circuit in the thermistor chain (0 Ω): Bridge the already disconnected
thermistor terminals S1 and S2 and switch on the voltage supply; the relay must switch on
then off again after a short period; connection established then interrupted between
terminals M1 and M2.
Maintenance &
Simulation of an open thermistor chain (∞ Ω): Remove the jumper used for the short-circuit
simulation and switch on the voltage supply; the relay remains switched off; no connection
repair
High-potential testing
Dismantling &
4.8
disposal
WARNING
Conductor cables! Electrical shock! Shut off power supply before high-
potential testing.
CAUTION
Internal arcing! Motor destruction! Do not carry out high-voltage or
insulation tests if the compressor housing is under vacuum.
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 19
Emerson Climate Technologies subjects all Scroll compressors to a high-voltage test after final
assembly. Each motor phase winding is tested, according to EN 0530 or VDE 0530 part 1, at a
differential voltage of 1000V plus twice the nominal voltage. Since high-voltage tests lead to
premature ageing of the winding insulation further additional tests of that nature are not
recommended.
If it has to be done for any reason, a lower voltage must be used. Disconnect all electronic
devices, eg, motor protection module, fan speed control, etc prior to testing.
20 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
5 Starting up & operation
instructions
WARNING
Safety
Diesel effect! Compressor destruction! The mixture of air and oil at high
temperature can lead to an explosion. Avoid operating with air.
IMPORTANT
Oil dilution! Bearing malfunction! Turn the crankcase heater on 12 hours
before starting the compressor.
description
Product
5.1 Strength pressure test
The compressor has been strength-tested in the factory. It is not necessary for the customer to
strength- or leak-test the compressor again although the compressor will normally be exposed to
the testing made as part of system testing.
Installation
High pressure! Personal injuries! Consider personal safety requirements
and refer to test pressures prior to test.
WARNING
System explosion! Personal injuries! DO NOT USE other industrial
gases.
CAUTION
connection
Electrical
System contamination! Bearing malfunction! Use only dry nitrogen or
dried air for pressure testing.
If using dry air do not include the compressor in the pressure test – isolate it first. Never add
refrigerant to the test gas (as leak indicator).
Starting up &
operation
Before the installation is put into commission, it has to be evacuated with a vacuum pump.
Proper evacuation reduces residual moisture to 50 ppm. During the initial procedure, suction and
discharge shutoff valves on the compressor remain closed. The installation of adequately sized
access valves at the furthest point from the compressor in the suction and liquid lines is
advisable. Pressure must be measured using a vacuum pressure (Torr) gauge on the access
valves and not on the vacuum pump; this serves to avoid incorrect measurements resulting from
the pressure gradient along the connecting lines to the pump. Maintenance &
Evacuating the system only on the suction side of a Scroll compressor can occasionally result in
a temporary no start condition for the compressor. The reason for this is that the floating seal
repair
could axially seal with the scroll set, with the higher pressure on the floating seal. Consequently,
until the pressures equalise, the floating seal and scroll set can be held tightly together. The
installation should be evacuated down to 0.3 mbar / 0.22 Torr.
Subsequently, the factory holding charge of dry air in the compressor is released to the ambient.
The shut-off valves are opened and the installation, including the compressor, are once more
evacuated as described after the system has been recharged with dry nitrogen. Highest
Dismantling &
demands are placed on the leak proof design of the installation and on leak testing methods
disposal
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 21
5.4 Preliminary checks – Pre-starting
Discuss details of the installation with the installer. If possible, obtain drawings, wiring diagrams,
etc.
It is ideal to use a check-list but always check the following:
Visual check of the electrics, wiring, fuses etc
Visual check of the plant for leaks, loose fittings such as TXV bulbs etc
Compressor oil level
Calibration of HP & LP switches and any pressure actuated valves
Check setting and operation of all safety features and protection devices
All valves in the correct running position
Pressure and compound gauges fitted
Correctly charged with refrigerant
Compressor electrical isolator location & position
The system should be liquid-charged through the liquid-receiver shut-off valve or through a valve
in the liquid line. The use of a filter drier in the charging line is highly recommended. Because
scrolls have discharge check valves, systems should be liquid-charged on both the high and low
sides simultaneously to ensure a positive refrigerant pressure is present in the compressor
before it runs. The majority of the charge should be placed in the high side of the system to
prevent bearing washout during first-time start on the assembly line.
CAUTION
High discharge pressure operation! Compressor damage! Do not use
compressor to test opening set point of high-pressure cut-out. Bearings are
susceptible to damage before they have had several hours of normal
running in.
Liquid and high pressure loads could be detrimental to new bearings. It is therefore important to
ensure that new compressors are not subjected to liquid abuse and high-pressure run tests. It is
not good practice to use the compressor to test the high-pressure switch function on the
production line. Switch function can be tested with nitrogen prior to installation and wiring can be
checked by disconnecting the high-pressure switch during the run test.
22 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
Observing that suction pressure drops and discharge pressure rises when the compressor is
energized allows verification of proper rotation direction. There is no negative impact on
instructions
durability caused by operating three-phase Copeland Scroll™ compressors in the reversed
Safety
direction for a short period of time (under one hour) but oil may be lost. Oil loss can be prevented
during reverse rotation if the tubing is routed at least 15 cm above the compressor. After several
minutes of operation in reverse, the compressor protection system will trip due to high motor
temperature. The operator will notice a lack of cooling. However, if allowed to repeatedly restart
and run in reverse without correcting the situation, the compressor will be permanently
damaged.
All three-phase Scroll compressors are identically wired internally. Therefore, once the correct
description
phasing is determined for a specific system or installation, connecting properly phased power
Product
leads to the identified compressor terminals will ensure proper rotation direction.
Compressors ZB56K* to ZB220K*, ZS56K* to ZS11M* and ZF24K* to ZF48K* have an
electronic protection unit (INT69SCY2) that will not let the compressor operate if the phasing of
the wires is incorrect.
Installation
During the very brief start-up, a clicking sound is audible, resulting from initial contacting of the
spirals and is normal. No start assist devices are required for single-phase compressors, even if
a system uses non-bleed expansion valves. Due to the design of the Copeland Scroll, the
internal compression components always start unloaded even if system pressures are not
balanced. In addition, since internal compressor pressures are always balanced at start-up, low-
voltage starting characteristics are excellent for Copeland Scroll™ compressors. Moreover, if low
voltage conditions exist at start up, protector trips could result.
connection
Electrical
5.9 Deep vacuum operation
CAUTION
Vacuum operation! Compressor damage! Scroll compressors should
never be used to evacuate a refrigeration or air-conditioning system.
The Scroll compressor can be used to pump down refrigerant in a unit as long as the pressures
remain within the operating envelope. Low suction pressures will result in overheating of the
Starting up &
scrolls and permanent damage to the compressor drive bearing. Scroll compressors incorporate
operation
internal low vacuum protection; the floating seal unloads when the pressure ratio exceeds
approximately 20:1 for ZS and ZF and 10:1 for ZB.
be taken to ensure that wiring or other materials that could be damaged by these temperatures
do not come in contact with the shell.
If the compressor is stationary for prolonged periods, refrigerant could migrate into the
compressor and therefore a crankcase heater must be installed.
If cold air is constantly drawn over the compressor this could make the crankcase heater
ineffective and therefore a pump down system is recommended.
For ZB models care should be taken because the scroll sets will unload at a pressure ratio of
approximately 10:1. If the unit fails to pump down the pumpdown pressure should be reset to a
higher value. The low-pressure control differential for all models needs to be reviewed since a
relatively lower volume of gas will reexpand from the discharge plenum of the compressor into
the low side on shutdown.
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 23
5.12 Minimum run time
Emerson Climate Technologies recommends a maximum of 10 starts per hour. There is no
minimum off time because Scroll compressors start unloaded even if the system has unbalanced
pressures. The most critical consideration is the minimum run time required to return oil to the
compressor after start-up. To establish the minimum run time obtain a sample compressor
equipped with a sight tube (available from Emerson Climate Technologies) and install it in a
system with the longest connecting lines that are approved for the system. The minimum on time
becomes the time required for oil lost during compressor start-up to return to the compressor
sump and restore a minimal oil level that will ensure oil pick-up through the crankshaft. Cycling
the compressor for a shorter period than this, for instance to maintain very tight temperature
control, will result in progressive loss of oil and damage to the compressor.
5.14 Frequency
There is no general release of standard Copeland Scroll™ compressors for use with variable
speed AC drives. There are numerous issues that must be considered when applying Scroll
compressors with variable speed, including system design, inverter selection, and operating
envelopes at various conditions. Only frequencies from 50 Hz to 60 Hz are acceptable.
Operation outside this frequency range is possible but should not be done without specific
Application Engineering review. The voltage must vary proportionally to the frequency.
If the inverter can only deliver a maximum voltage of 400V, the amps will increase when the
speed is above 50 Hz, and this may give rise to nuisance tripping if operation is near the
maximum power limit and/or compressor discharge temperature limit.
24 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
6 Maintenance & repair
nstructions
6.1 Exchanging the refrigerant
Safety
Qualified refrigerants and oils are given in section 2.4.1.
It is not necessary to replace the refrigerant with new unless contamination due to an error such
as topping up the system with an incorrect refrigerant is suspected. To verify correct refrigerant
composition, a sample can be taken for chemical analysis. A check can be made during shut
down by comparing the refrigerant temperature and pressure using precision measurements at a
location in the system where liquid and vapour phases are present and when the temperatures
description
Product
have stabilised.
In the event that the refrigerant needs replacing, the charge should be recovered using a
suitable recovery unit.
Installation
6.3 Replacing a compressor
CAUTION
Inadequate lubrication! Bearing destruction! Exchange the accumulator
after replacing a compressor with a burned out motor. The accumulator oil
return orifice or screen may be plugged with debris or may become plugged.
This will result in starvation of oil to the new compressor and a second
failure.
connection
Electrical
6.3.1 Compressor replacement
In the case of a motor burnout, the majority of contaminated oil will be removed with the
compressor. The rest of the oil is cleaned through the use of suction and liquid line filter driers. A
100% activated alumna suction line filter drier is recommended but must be removed after
72 hours. It is highly recommended that the suction accumulator be replaced if the system
contains one. This is because the accumulator oil return orifice or screen may be plugged with
Starting up &
debris or may become plugged shortly after a compressor failure. This will result in starvation of
operation
oil to the replacement compressor and a second failure. When a single compressor or tandem is
exchanged in the field, it is possible that a major portion of the oil may still be in the system.
While this may not affect the reliability of the replacement compressor, the extra oil will add to
rotor drag and increase power usage.
6.3.2 Start-up of a new or replacement compressor
Rapid charging only on the suction side of a scroll-equipped system or condensing unit can Maintenance &
occasionally result in a temporary no start condition for the compressor. The reason for this is
that, if the flanks of the compressor happen to be in a sealed position, rapid pressurisation of the
repair
low side without opposing high-side pressure can cause the scrolls to seal axially. As a result,
until the pressures eventually equalise, the scrolls can be held tightly together preventing
rotation. The best way to avoid this situation is to charge on both the high and low sides
simultaneously at a rate which does not result in axial loading of the scrolls.
A minimum suction pressure of 1.75 bar must be maintained during charging. Allowing pressure
to drop below 0.3 bar for more than a few seconds may overheat scrolls and cause early drive
Dismantling &
bearing damage. Never install a system in the field and leave it unattended when it has no
disposal
charge, a holding charge, or with the service valves closed without securely electrically locking
out the system. This will prevent unauthorised personnel from accidentally operating the system
and potentially ruining the compressor by operating with no refrigerant flow. Do not start the
compressor while the system is in a deep vacuum. Internal arcing may occur when a Scroll
compressor is started in a vacuum causing burnout of the internal lead connections.
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 25
6.4 Lubrication and oil removal
CAUTION
Chemical reaction! Compressor destruction! Do not mix up ester oils with
mineral oil and/or alkyl benzene when used with chlorine-free (HFC)
refrigerants.
The compressor is supplied with an initial oil charge. The standard oil charge for use with
refrigerants R404A / R407C / R407F / R134a / R22 is a polyolester (POE) lubricant Emkarate
RL 32 3MAF. In the field the oil level could be topped up with Mobil EAL Arctic 22 CC if 3MAF is
not available. See nameplate for original oil charge shown in litres. A field recharge is from 0.05
to 0.1 litre less.
One disadvantage of POE is that it is far more hygroscopic than mineral oil (see Figure 19).
Only brief exposure to ambient air is needed for POE to absorb sufficient moisture to make it
unacceptable for use in a refrigeration system. Since POE holds moisture more readily than
mineral oil it is more difficult to remove it through the use of vacuum. Compressors supplied by
Emerson Climate Technologies contain oil with low moisture content, and it may rise during the
system assembling process. Therefore it is recommended that a properly sized filter-drier is
installed in all POE systems. This will maintain the moisture level in the oil to less than 50 ppm. If
oil is charged into a system, it is recommended to use POE with a moisture content no higher
than 50 ppm.
Figure 19: Absorption of moisture in ester oil in comparison to mineral oil in ppm by weight at 25°C and 50%
relative humidity (h=hours)
If the moisture content of the oil in a refrigeration system reaches unacceptably high levels,
corrosion and copper plating may occur. The system should be evacuated down to 0.3 mbar or
lower. If there is uncertainty as to the moisture content in the system, an oil sample should be
taken and tested for moisture. Sight glass/moisture indicators currently available can be used
with the HFC refrigerants and lubricants; however, the moisture indicator will just show the
moisture content of the refrigerant. The actual moisture level of POE would be higher than the
sight glass indicates. This is due to the high hygroscopicity of the POE oil. To determine the
actual moisture content of the lubricant, samples have to be taken from the system and
analysed.
26 C6.2.20/1111-0113/E
6.6 Unbrazing system components
WARNING
nstructions
Explosive flame! Burning! Oil-refrigerant mixtures are highly flammable.
Safety
Remove all refrigerant before opening the system. Avoid working with an
unshielded flame in a refrigerant charged system.
Before opening up a system it is important to remove all refrigerant from both the high and low
sides of the system. If the refrigerant charge is removed from a scroll equipped unit from the high
side only, it is possible for the scrolls to seal, preventing pressure equalization through the
compressor. This may leave the low side shell and suction line tubing pressurized. If a brazing
description
torch is then applied to the low side while the low side shell and suction line contain pressure,
Product
the pressurized refrigerant and oil mixture could ignite when it escapes and contacts the brazing
flame. To prevent this occurrence, it is important to check both the high and low sides with
manifold gauges before unbrazing. Instructions should be provided in appropriate product
literature and assembly (line repair) areas. If compressor removal is required, the compressor
should be cut out of system rather than unbrazed.
Installation
Removing oil and refrigerant:
Do not disperse in the environment.
Use the correct equipment and method of removal.
Dispose of oil and refrigerant properly.
Dispose of compressor properly.
DISCLAIMER
connection
Electrical
1. The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only and are not to
be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or
services described herein or their use or applicability.
2. Emerson Climate Technologies GmbH and/or its affiliates (collectively "Emerson"), as
applicable, reserve the right to modify the design or specifications of such products at any
time without notice.
3. Emerson does not assume responsibility for the selection, use or maintenance of any
Starting up &
operation
product. Responsibility for proper selection, use and maintenance of any Emerson product
remains solely with the purchaser or end user.
4. Emerson does not assume responsibility for possible typographic errors contained in this
publication.
Maintenance &
repair
Dismantling &
disposal
C6.2.20/1111-0113/E 27
BENELUX UK & IRELAND BALKAN
Deltakade 7 Unit 17, Theale Lakes Business Park Selska cesta 93
NL-5928 PX Venlo Reading, Berks RG7 4GB HR-10 000 Zagreb
Tel. +31 77 324 02 34 Tel: +44 1189 83 80 00 Tel. +385 1 560 38 75
Fax +31 77 324 02 35 Fax: +44 1189 83 80 01 Fax +385 1 560 38 79
benelux.sales@emerson.com uk.sales@emerson.com balkan.sales@emerson.com
GERMANY, AUSTRIA & SWITZERLAND SWEDEN, DENMARK, NORWAY & FINLAND UKRAINE
Senefelder Str. 3 Pascalstr. 65 Turgenevskaya Str. 15, offi ce 33
DE-63477 Maintal DE-52076 Aachen UA-01054, Kiev
Tel. +49 6109 605 90 Tel. +49 2408 929 0 Tel. +38 - 44 - 4 92 99 24
Fax +49 6109 60 59 40 Fax +49 2408 92 95 28 Fax. +38 - 44 - 4 92 99 28
ECTGermany.sales@emerson.com nordic.sales@emerson.com Andrey.Gladchenko@emerson.com
! Safety instructions:
• Read installation instructions thoroughly. Failure to comply can result in
device failure, system damage or personal injury.
• The product is intended for use by persons having the appropriate
knowledge and skills.
• Disconnect all voltages from system before installation.
• Do not operate system before all cable connections are completed.
• Comply with local electrical regulations when wiring.
Note: The EC3-X33 series contains a lead, acid gel rechargeable battery. The
battery must NOT be disposed of with other commercial waste. Instead, it is the
user’s responsibility to pass it to a designated collection point for the safe recycling
of batteries (harmonised directive 98/101/EEC). For further information contact
your local environmental recycling centre.
Technical data
Power supply 24VAC ±10%; 50/60Hz; 1A
Power consumption 25VA max. including EX4 … EX8
Plug-in connector Removable screw terminals
wire size 0.14 … 1.5 mm2
Grounding 6.3 mm spade earth connector
Protection class IP20
Connection to ECD-002 ECC-Nxx or CAT5 cable with RJ45 connectors
Digital Inputs 0/24VAC/DC for stop/start function
NTC input Alco Controls temperature sensor ECN-N60
4-20 mA Analog input Alco Controls PT5 Pressure Transmitter
4-20 mA Analog output For connection to any 3rd party controller with
12/24VDC power supply and appropriate burden
Deviation from input signal ±8% max
Output alarm relay SPDT contacts 24V AC/DC, 2 Amp inductive load
Activated: During normal operation (no alarm condition)
Deactivated: During alarm condition or power supply is OFF
! If the output relay is not utilized, the user must ensure appropriate safety
precautions are in place to protect the system against damage caused by a
power failure.
Stepper motor output for Maximum current 0.8A with nominal 24VDC
EX4…EX8 operating voltage
Ambient temperature range 0 … 60°C
1 … 25°C (for best battery life time)
> 35°C battery life time < 2 years
! In order to provide system protection in the event of power loss, it is
recommended to change the battery annually.
Mounting
The EC3-X33 is designed to be mounted onto a standard DIN rail. Mounting A: White wire B: Black wire C: Blue wire D: Brown wire
position: on vertical walls, with stepper motor connector on top side only. E: Plug cable assembly EXV-Mxx for connection to EX4…EX8
G: Remote control panel, system controller
Electrical installation H: Alarm relay, dry contact. Relay coil is not energised at Alarm or power off
• Refer to the electrical wiring diagram for electrical connections.
!
The use of the relay is essential to protect the system in case of power failure
• Do not apply voltage to the controller before completion of wiring.
• Ground the metal housing with a 6.3mm spade connector. if the communications interface or the ECD-002 are not utilized..
• Important: Keep controller and sensor wiring well separated from mains wiring. I: Digital input (0V/open = Stop; 24V/closed = Start)
Minimum recommended distance 30mm. J: Transformer Class II, 24VAC secondary / 25VA
Warning: Use a class II category transformer for 24VAC power supply. Do not K: Third party controller (can use the analog output signal from EC3)
ground the 24VAC lines. We recommend to use individual transformers for EC3 Preparation for Start-up:
controller(s) and for 3rd party controllers to avoid possible interference or • Vacuum the entire refrigeration circuit.
grounding problems in the power supply. Connecting any EC3 inputs to mains Warning: Alco Electrical Control Valves EX4...EX8 are delivered at half open
voltage will permanently damage the EC3. position. Do not charge system before closure of valve.
• Apply supply voltage 24V to EC3 while the digital input is 0V. The valve will be
driven to close position.
• After closure of valve, start to charge the system with refrigerant.
Warning: EC3 needs to be setup prior to start-up. Do not apply 24V digital
input to EC3 before completion of main parameters setting.
• Connect ECD-002 to EC3 as shown in wiring diagram with ECC-Nxx cable or
with any standard straight Cat5 cable with two RJ45 plugs.
ECD-002 display/keypad unit (LEDs and button functions) Main parameters (must be checked and modified if necessary)
Blinking: valve is opening Code Parameter description and choices Min Max Factory Field
ON: valve is fully open setting setting
H5 Password 1 199 12
u0 System refrigerant 0 7 1
Blinking: valve is closing
Parameters setting/saving Next parameter/ 0 = R22 1 = R134a 2 = R507 3 = R404A 4 = R407C
ON: valve is fully close
value (higher) 5 = R410A 6 = R124 7 = R744 (subcritical application)
uP Installed pressure sensor type 0 1 0
0 = PT5-07x (for R22/R134a/R507/R404A/R407C/R124)
1 = PT5-18x (for R410A)
2 = PT5-30x (for R744, subcritical)
ON: demand
ut Installed valve type 1 5 5
OFF: no demand
1 = EX4 2 = EX5 3 = EX6 4 = EX7 5 = EX8
Optional parameters
ON: alarm Next parameter/ (recommended factory setting for majority of applications)
OFF: no alarm Prg & Sel (5 sec) value (lower) uu Start valve opening (%) 10 100 50
Manual reset for Selecting/confirming u9 Start opening duration (second) 1 30 5
blinking alarm codes uL Low superheat alarm function 0 2 1
Setup of main parameters (need to be checked/modified before 0 = disable (for flooded evaporator)
start-up) using ECD-002 1 = enable auto reset 2 = enable manual reset
• Make sure that digital input is 0V (open). Turn the power supply ON. Cut-out at 0.5K (if it maintains 1 min.); Cut-in immediately at 3K
Important: Three main parameters i.e. refrigerant type (u0), pressure sensor type u5 Superheat set-point (K)
(uP) and valve type (ut) can be set only when digital input is open (0V) while the If uL enabled (auto or manual) 3 30 6
power supply is ON (24V). This feature is for added safety to prevent accidental If uL disabled 0.5 30 6
damage of compressors and other system components. u2 MOP function 0 1 1
• For easy setting of main parameters, follow the pictorial procedure of “Quick 0 = disable 1 = enable
start-up” on the attached individual paper. u3 MOP set-point (°C) saturation temperature * * **
Once the main parameters have been selected/saved the EC3 is ready for **) Factory setting is according to selected refrigerant (u0):
startup. All other parameters can be modified at any time during operation or +13°C for R22 +15°C for R134a +7°C for R507
standby if it is necessary. +7°C for R404A +15°C for R407C +15°C for R410A
Start-up +50°C for R124 -5°C for R744
*) Min. and Max. setting values are dependant to selected type of
Start the system and check the superheat and operating conditions.
refrigerant
The EC3-X33 is fully functional without keypad/display unit. ECD-002 may be
┌┘5 Units conversion (only for u3, u5, ┌┘1) 0 1 0
removed or connected at any time.
0 = °C, K, bar 1 = °F, R, psig
Procedure for parameters modification using ECD-002 (Psig values are divided by 10. Example: Display 12.5 is 125 psig)
The parameters can be accessed via the 4-button keypad. The configuration ┌┘1 Value to show 0 4 0
parameters are protected by a numerical password. The default password is “12”. 0 = Measured superheat (K) 1 = Measured evaporating pressure, (bar);
To select the parameter configuration: 2 = Valve opening (%) 3 = Measured coil-out temperature (°C)
Press the PRG button for more than 5 seconds 4 = Calculated evaporating temperature (°C) from the pressure
A flashing 0 is displayed u4 Superheat control mode 0 1 0
Press or until 12 is displayed; (password) 0 = Standard, 1 = Slow
Press SEL to confirm password b1 Battery error management, when battery is 0 3 2
Press or to show the code of the parameter that has to be changed; defective, see below:
Press SEL to display the selected parameter value; Alarm Reset possibility after
value display Alarm relay Valve recovery/replacement
Press or to increase or decrease the value;
Press SEL to temporarily confirm the new value and display its code; 0 - - Regulating -
1 Ab - Regulating -
Repeat the procedure from the beginning "press or to show..."
2 Ab Signalling Fully close Auto
To exit and save the new settings:
3 Ab Signalling Fully close Manual
Press PRG to confirm the new values and exit the parameters modification
(blinking)
procedure.
! When setting b1 to option 0 or 1, the user must ensure appropriate safety
To exit without modifying any parameters:
precautions are in place to protect the system against damage caused by a
Do not press any button for at least 60 seconds (TIME OUT).
power failure.
Reset all parameters to factory setting:
• Make shure that digital input is 0V (open). Mounting of ECD-002
• Press and together for more than 5 seconds. ECD-002 can be installed at any time also during operation.
• ECD-002 can be mounted in panels with 71x29
• A flashing 0 is displayed.
mm cutout
• Press or until the password is displayed (Factory setting = 12). • Push controller into panel cut-out.(1)
If password was changed, select the new password. • Make sure that mounting lugs are flush with
• Press SEL to confirm password outside of controller housing
• “0” is displayed. • Insert Allen key into front panel holes and turn
• Press SEL to reset all parameters to factory setting clockwise. Mounting lugs will turn and gradually
• Press PRG to activate the function and leave the special function mode. move towards panel (2)
Control (valve) start-up behaviour (Parameter uu and u9) • Turn Allen key until mounting lug barely touches
EX4/5/6 ≤ 1.5 seconds uu secured. Do not over tighten as mounting lugs will
EC3-X3 BA.cdr
Service / Troubleshooting
Symptom Cause Action
Operating superheat is several degrees higher or lower than Incorrect signal from pressure or 1- Check the sensors
set-point temperature sensors 2- Make sure ECN-N60 temperature sensor is used
3- For optimum accuracy, please use:
PT5-07x for R22/R134a/R507/R404A/R407C/R124
PT5-18x for R410A
PT5-30x for R744
4- Make sure the sensor cables are not installed along with other
high voltage cables
Operating superheat is too low i.e. compressor wet running 1- Incorrect wiring of ECVs 1- Check the wiring
2- Defective sensors 2- Check the sensor
Valve is not fully closed 1- The digital input is ON (24V) 1- Valve is shut off only when the digital input is turned off (0V)
2- Wrong setting of parameter ut. 2- Check the setting of parameter ut
Instable superheat (hunting) Evaporator is designed to operate at Increase the superheat set-point
higher superheat
Valve opens when EC3 commands to close and vice versa Wrong wiring between EC3-X33 and Correct the wiring
valve
EX8 is not able to open at high differential pressure Wrong setting of parameter ut Check the parameter ut. (Larger valve requires higher torque and
higher current)
Superheat set-point is shifting after several months of Stepper motor driven valves require Do not apply permanent 24V digital input. Interrupt digital input
uninterrupted operation or permanent jumper of 24V digital synchronization once every week for 5 seconds if compressor never stops.
input
Dimensions
EC3-X33 ECD-002
Emerson Electric GmbH & Co OHG - Postfach 1251 - Heerstraße 111 - D-71332 Waiblingen - Germany - Phone .49-(0)7151-509-0 - Fax .49-(0)7151-509-200
www.emersonclimate.eu
0 2 4
EC3-X33
2a 4a
0V
24 V AC
1 2b 4b
5 sec.
0 = R22
1 = R134a 1 = EX4
1a 2 = R507 2 = EX5
12x 3 = R404A 3 = EX6
4 = R407C R 410A 4 = EX7
5 = R410A 5 = EX8 EX7
6 = R124
7 = R744
1b 2 4c
4d
1c 3
4e
EC3-X33
1d 1-199 3a
88 3b 24 V
24 V AC
1e
0 = PT5-07M
(R22/R134a/R507/R404A/R407C/R124)
1 = PT5-18M (R410A)
2 = PT5-30M (R744)
3c
Display of Data:
EX4, EX5 Ts
EX6, EX7 R22
EX8
Emerson Electric GmbH & Co OHG - Postfach 1251 - Heerstraße 111 - D-71332 Waiblingen - Germany - Phone .49-(0)7151-509-0 - Fax .49-(0)7151-509-200
www.emersonclimate.eu
Phone: 989-496-3780
Fax: 989-496-0316
2. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Component Name CAS Number % (w/w) OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV
Polyol ester --- >99 No PEL No TLV
established established
Additives --- <1 No PEL No TLV
established established
3. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Emergency Overview
Page 1 of 6
EMKARATE RL® 32-3MAF
Material Safety Data Sheet
Date Revised: Feb, 2008
5. FIRE-FIGHTING MEASURES
Flash Point (ºF) >392
Flash Point (ºC) >200
Autoignition Temperature (ºF) No data.
Autoignition Temperature (ºC) No data.
Flammable Limits No data.
Page 2 of 6
EMKARATE RL® 32-3MAF
Material Safety Data Sheet
Date Revised: Feb, 2008
Explosion data
Sensitivity to mechanical impact No data.
Sensitivity to static discharge No data.
Steps to be taken in case material is Contain spill. Soak up material with absorbent
released or spilled and shovel into a chemical waste container.
Wash residue from spill area with water
containing detergent and flush to a sewer
serviced by a permitted wastewater treatment
facility.
OSHA PEL
Component Name Exposure limits Notes
No OSHA PEL assigned. Minimize exposure
in accordance with good hygiene practice.
ACGIH TLV
Component Name Exposure limits Notes
No ACGIH TLV assigned. Minimize
exposure in accordance with good hygiene
practice.
Page 3 of 6
EMKARATE RL® 32-3MAF
Material Safety Data Sheet
Date Revised: Feb, 2008
Page 5 of 6
EMKARATE RL® 32-3MAF
Material Safety Data Sheet
Date Revised: Feb, 2008
HMIS Information
Health 1
Flammability 1
Physical Hazards 0
The HMIS ratings displayed above are from the HMIS III Third Edition. There have been significant
changes made to the system. "Physical hazard" stands for physical hazard as defined in the OSHA
Hazard Communication Standard and replaces the former code for reactivity. For a more detailed
explanation of the system and the ratings, please contact our Product Safety and Regulatory Affairs
group.
NFPA Information
Health 1
Flammability 1
Instability 0
This information is intended solely for the use of individuals trained in the particular hazard rating system.
The information presented herein has been compiled from sources considered to be dependable and is accurate to
the best of The Lubrizol Corporation’s knowledge; however, The Lubrizol Corporation makes no warranty
whatsoever, expressed or implied of MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR THE PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
regarding the accuracy of such data or the results to be obtained from use thereof. The Lubrizol Corporation
assumes no responsibility for injury to recipient or to third persons or for any damage to any property and recipient
assumes all such risks.
®
Emkarate is a registered trademark of The Lubrizol Corporation.
Page 6 of 6
Operating instructions
Flow monitors
UK
SI5010
SI5011
08 / 2010
704332 / 02
Contents
1 Safety instructions������������������������������������������������������������������������ 3
2 Functions and features����������������������������������������������������������������� 4
2.1 Application area ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4
2.2 Operating principle flow monitoring������������������������������������������� 4
3 Installation������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 5
3.1 Installation location�������������������������������������������������������������������� 5
3.2 Sources of interference in the pipe system������������������������������� 6
3.3. Mounting operation������������������������������������������������������������������� 6
4 Electrical connection�������������������������������������������������������������������� 7
5 Operating and display elements��������������������������������������������������� 7
6 Set-up and settings for water������������������������������������������������������� 8
6.1 Change the switch point (optional)�������������������������������������������� 8
6.2 High flow adjustment (optional)������������������������������������������������� 9
7 Additional settings (optional)�������������������������������������������������������� 9
7.1 Low flow adjustment������������������������������������������������������������������ 9
7.2 Configure the switching output�������������������������������������������������� 9
7.3 Restore the factory setting (reset)������������������������������������������� 10
7.4 Lock / unlock the unit��������������������������������������������������������������� 10
7.5 Remote adjustment����������������������������������������������������������������� 10
8 Error during adjustment�������������������������������������������������������������� 10
9 Operation������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11
10 Maintenance����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
11 Scale drawing��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12
12 Technical data��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12
2
Preliminary note
• An instruction is indicated by “►”:
Example: ► Check whether the unit operates correctly.
• A reaction to the action is indicated by ">":
Example: > LED 9 lights.
1 Safety instructions
• Please read the product description prior to set-up of the unit. Ensure that the UK
product is suitable for your application without any restrictions.
• The unit conforms to the relevant regulations and EC directives.
• Improper or non-intended use may lead to malfunctions of the unit or to un-
wanted effects in your application.
• That is why installation, electrical connection, set-up, operation and mainte-
nance of the unit must only be carried out by qualified personnel authorised by
the machine operator.
For the scope of validity cULus:
The device shall be supplied from an isolating transformer having a secondary
Listed fuse rated as noted in the following table.
Overcurrent protection
Control-circuit wire size Maximum protective device rating
AWG (mm2) Ampere
26 (0.13) 1
24 (0.20) 2
22 (0.32) 3
20 (0.52) 5
18 (0.82) 7
16 (1.3) 10
3
2 Functions and features
2.1 Application area
The unit monitors the flow of liquid and gaseous media.
2.2 Operating principle flow monitoring
• The unit detects the flow speed to the calorimetric measuring principle and
switches the output:
-- output closed if medium is flowing / output open if no medium is flowing.
This applies to the unit on delivery: output = normally open. In case of need you
can change the output to normally closed (→ 7.2). It then applies: output open
if medium is flowing.
• If the flow speed increases, the switching status changes when the switch point
is reached.
• If the flow speed falls again, the switching status changes if the value "SP
minus hysteresis" is reached.
The hysteresis changes with the flow speed and it is essentially influenced by
the set monitoring range.
It is 2...5 cm/s for the setting 5...100 cm/s (= factory setting), it increases with
higher flow speeds.
• The typical response time of the unit is 1...10 s. It can be influenced by the
setting of the switch point:
-- Low switch point = quick reaction with rising flow.
-- High switch point = quick reaction with falling flow.
4
3 Installation
Using process adapters the unit can be adapted to different process connections.
• Adapters have to be ordered separately as accessories.
A correct fit of the unit and ingress resistance of the connection are only
ensured using ifm adapters.
• For small flow rates ifm adapter blocks are available.
3.1 Installation location
General
• The sensor tip is to be completely sur- UK
rounded by the medium.
• Insertion depth of the sensor: minimum
12 mm.
Recommended
• For horizontal pipes: mounting from
the side.
• For vertical pipes: mounting in the rising
pipe.
Conditional
• Horizontal pipe /mounting from the bot-
tom: if the pipe is free from build-up.
• Horizontal pipe /mounting from the
top: if the pipe is completely filled with
medium.
To avoid
• The sensor tip must not be in contact
with the pipe wall.
• Do not mount in downpipes that are
open at the bottom!
5
3.2 Sources of interference in the pipe system
Components integrated in the pipes, bends, valves, reductions, etc. lead to turbu-
lence of the medium. This affects the function of the unit.
Recommendation: Adhere to the distances between sensor and sources of
interference:
►► Grease the threads of the process connection (1), adapter (2) and nut (3).
Note: The sensor tip (A) must not be in contact with grease.
►► Screw the suitable adapter into the process connection.
►► Place the flow monitor onto the adapter and tighten the nut. Tightening torque
25 Nm. Ensure that the unit is correctly oriented.
6
4 Electrical connection
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be adhered to.
Voltage supply to EN 50178, SELV, PELV.
►► Disconnect power.
►► Connect the unit as follows:
UK
A: SI5010 (positive switching); B: SI5011 (negative switching)
Core colours of ifm sockets:
P: programming wire (for remote adjustment) → 7.5)
1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black)
Use 4-wire connection cables without a link between pins 2 and 4.
With 3-wire sockets with a link between pin 2 and pin 4 switching of the
output stage triggers the remote adjustment.
1: Operation display
• The green LEDs indicate the current flow (the LEDs 0 to 9 represent the range between
no flow and maximum flow).
• A lighting LED indicates the position of the switch point (orange = output closed, red =
output open).
2, 3: Setting buttons for adjustment and configuration
7
6 Set-up and settings for water
(For media other than water → 7.1: Low flow adjustment).
►► Switch on the supply voltage.
>> All LEDs light and go out again step by step. During this time the output is
closed (if configured as normally open). The unit is in the operating mode.
►► Let the normal flow circulate in the installation.
►► Check the display and determine further actions.
The factory setting is suitable for the applica-
1 tion.
►► No further settings are required.
Your normal flow is below the representation
range of the display.
2 2 setting options:
►► Change the switch point (→ 6.1).
►► Carry out high flow adjustment (→ 6.2).
Your normal flow exceeds the representation
3 range of the display (LED 9 flashes).
►► Carry out high flow adjustment (→ 6.2).
8
6.2 High flow adjustment (optional)
The unit determines the existing flow as normal flow and adapts the display repre-
sentation (all LEDs except the switch point LED light green).
►► Let the normal flow circulate in the installation.
►► Press the pushbutton and keep it pressed.
>> LED 9 lights, after approx. 5 s it flashes.
►► Release the pushbutton.
The unit is now adapted to your flow conditions. It passes into the operating mode,
the display should now show example 1.
UK
Note: The adjustment affects the switch point: It is increased proportionally (maxi-
mum up to LED 7).
Remote adjustment → 7.5.
7 Additional settings (optional)
7.1 Low flow adjustment
If the unit is used in media other than water, you should additionally adapt the unit
to the minimum flow.
Note: The following adjustment must only be carried out after the high flow adjust-
ment.
►► Let the minimum flow circulate in the installation or ensure flow standstill.
►► Press the pushbutton and keep it pressed.
>> LED 0 lights, after approx. 5 s it flashes.
►► Release the pushbutton. The unit adopts the new value and passes into the
operating mode.
Remote adjustment → 7.5.
7.2 Configure the switching output
The unit is delivered as normally open. In case of need you can change the output
to normally closed:
►► Press the pushbutton for at least 15 s.
>> LED 0 lights, after approx. 5 s it flashes.
>> After 10 s the current setting is displayed: LEDs 5...9 light orange (= output
normally open).
>> After approx. 15 s LEDs 0...4 flash orange.
►► Release the pushbutton. The output is changed to normally closed operation.
For a new changeover repeat the operation.
9
7.3 Restore the factory setting (reset)
►► Press the pushbutton for at least 15 s.
>> LED 9 lights, after approx. 5 s it flashes.
>> After approx. 15 s LEDs 0...9 flash orange.
►► Release the pushbutton. All settings are reset to the factory setting:
-- operating area: 5 ...100 cm/s for water
-- switch point: LED 7
-- output function: NO
-- unlocked.
7.4 Lock / unlock the unit
The unit can be locked electronically to prevent unintentional settings.
►► Press both setting pushbuttons simultaneously for at least 10 s in the operating
mode.
>> The indication goes out, the unit locks or unlocks.
On delivery: unlocked.
7.5 Remote adjustment
You can adapt the unit to new flow conditions any time.
• Apply the operating voltage for > 5 ... < 10 s to Pin 2 = high flow adjustment.
• Apply the operating voltage for > 10 ... < 15 s to Pin 2 = low flow adjustment.
This adjustment does not affect the switch point (the relative position is not
changed).
10
9 Operation
After every power on all LEDs light and go out again step by step (during this time
the output is closed if configured as normally open). The unit is then ready for
operation.
In case of power failure or interruption all settings remain.
Operating indicators
Green LED bar: Current flow within the representa-
tion range.
Indication of the switch point (SP): UK
- LED orange: output closed.
- LED red: output open.
LED 9 flashes: current flow above the
representation range.
Interference indicator
Short circuit at the switching output:
The operating indicator and red LEDs light
alternately.
If the short circuit has been rectified, the unit im-
mediately passes into the normal operating state.
The current operating state is displayed.
Display OFF Operating voltage too low (< 19 V) or failed.
(no LED lights): Ensure a correct voltage supply.
10 Maintenance
Recommended maintenance:
►► Check the sensor tip for build-up from time to time.
►► Clean it using a soft cloth. Stubborn build-up (e.g. lime) can be removed using
a common vinegar cleaning agent.
11
11 Scale drawing
1 2
50 63
27
M12 x1
113
14
22
65
60
3
45
8,2
12 Technical data
Application area.........................................................................................Liquids and gases
Operating voltage [V].........................................................................................19 ... 36 DC1)
Current rating [mA]...........................................................................................................250
Short-circuit protection, pulsed; reverse polarity / overload protection
Voltage drop [V]..............................................................................................................< 2.5
Current consumption [mA] ..............................................................................................< 60
Power-on delay time [s]....................................................................... 10, optically indicated
12
Liquids
Medium temperature [°C] .................................................................................... -25 ... +80
Setting range [cm/s]..................................................................................................3 ... 300
Greatest sensitivity [cm/s] ..........................................................................................3...100
Temperature gradient [K/min] .........................................................................................300
Gases
Medium temperature [°C] .................................................................................... -25 ... +80
Setting range [cm/s]............................................................................................200 ... 3000
Greatest sensitivity [cm/s].....................................................................................200 ... 800
Switch point accuracy [cm/s] ................................................................................± 2...± 102)
Hysteresis [cm/s] ..........................................................................................................2...52) UK
Repeatability [cm/s] ......................................................................................................1...52)
Temperature drift [cm/s x 1/K].........................................................................................0.13)
Response time [s] .......................................................................................................1 ... 10
Pressure resistance [bar].................................................................................................300
Operating temperature [°C] .................................................................................. -25 ... +80
Protection rating ........................................................................................................... IP 67
Protection class ..................................................................................................................III
Shock resistance [g] .............................................................. 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11 ms)
Vibration resistance [g] ................................................... 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 55-2000 Hz)
Housing materials ......................stainless steel 316L / 1.4404; stainless steel 304 / 1.4301;
PC (Makrolon); PBT-GF 20; EPDM/X (Santoprene)
Materials (wetted parts) ........................................................... stainless steel 316L / 1.4404
O-ring: FPM 8x1.5 gr 80° Shore A
EMC
EN 61000-4-2 ESD: ................................................................................ 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: ...................................................................................... 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: ..................................................................................................... 2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: ....................................................................................... 10 V
1)
to EN50178, SELV, PELV;
2)
for water; 5...100 cm/s; 25°C (factory setting)
3)
for water; 5...100 cm/s; 10...70°C
The sensor conforms to the standard EN 61000-6-2
13
e-SV 1-3-5-10-15-
22-33-46-66-92-125
7 Vianmääritys..........................................................................86 6 Konserwacja........................................................................126
7 Rozwiązywanie problemów...................................................127
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
Íslenska.........................................................................................89 cs - Překlad původního návodu k používání
1 Inngangur og öryggi...............................................................89 Čeština........................................................................................129
7 Úrræðaleit.............................................................................94 6 Údržba...............................................................................134
7 Řešení problémů..................................................................134
et - Algupärase kasutusjuhendi tõlge
Eesti..............................................................................................97 sk - Preklad pôvodného návodu na použitie
1 Juhised ja ohutus....................................................................97 Slovenčina....................................................................................137
7 Tõrkeotsing.........................................................................102 6 Údržba...............................................................................142
7 Riešenie problémov..............................................................143
lv - Instrukciju tulkojums no oriģinālvalodas
Latviešu.......................................................................................105 hu - Eredeti használati utasítás fordítása
1 Ievads un drošība.................................................................105 magyar........................................................................................145
4 Uzstādīšana.........................................................................107 3 Termékleírás........................................................................146
1 Introduzione e sicurezza Di seguito si elencano esempi di altre possibili categorie. Queste rientrano
nei normali livelli di pericolo e possono utilizzare simboli complementari:
• Installazione I pericoli di superficie calda sono indicati da un simbolo specifico che sosti-
• Funzionamento tuisce i simboli tipici di livello di pericolo:
• Manutenzione
ATTENZIONE:
ATTENZIONE:
Prima dell'installazione e dell'utilizzo del prodotto, leggere atten-
tamente questo manuale. L'uso improprio del prodotto può cau- Descrizione dei simboli per l'utilizzatore e l'installatore
sare lesioni personali e danni alle cose e potrebbe rendere nulla la
garanzia. Informazioni specifiche per il personale responsabile dell'in-
stallazione del prodotto nel sistema (impianto idraulico e/o
elettrico) o della manutenzione del prodotto.
NOTA BENE:
Informazioni specifiche per gli utilizzatori del prodotto.
Conservare questo manuale per future consultazioni e tenerlo sempre dispo-
nibile e a portata di mano nel luogo in cui è installata l'unità.
e-SV - Italiano 1
it - Istruzioni originali
Ispezione dell'unità
3 Descrizione del prodotto
1. Rimuovere i materiali di imballaggio dal prodotto.
Smaltire tutti i materiali di imballaggio in base alle normative locali. 3.1 Caratteristiche costruttive della
2. Ispezionare il prodotto per determinare l'eventuale presenza di parti pompa
danneggiate o mancanti. Questo prodotto è una pompa multistadio verticale non autoadescante, ab-
3. Se applicabile, liberare il prodotto rimuovendo viti, bulloni o cinghie. binabile a motori elettrici normalizzati. La pompa può venire utilizzata per
Per la propria sicurezza personale, fare attenzione quando si maneggia- pompare:
no chiodi o nastri.
4. In caso di irregolarità, contattare il Servizio di Vendita ed Assistenza. • Acqua fredda
• Acqua calda
Le parti metalliche della pompa in contatto con l'acqua sono composte di
2.2 Linee guida per la movimentazione quanto segue:
Serie Materiale
Precauzioni
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Acciaio inossidabile.
AVVERTENZA: 33, 46, 66, 92, Acciaio inossidabile e ghisa
125 È disponibile una versione speciale con tutte le parti in
• Osservare le vigenti norme antinfortunistiche. acciaio inossidabile.
• Rischio di schiacciamento. L'unità e i componenti possono es-
sere pesanti. Utilizzare metodi di sollevamento idonei e indos-
sare sempre scarpe con punta in acciaio antinfortunistica. Le SV pompe 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 e 22 SV sono disponibili in diverse versioni a
seconda della posizione delle bocche di aspirazione e mandata e della forma
Verificare il peso lordo riportato nell’imballo per selezionare apparecchi di delle flange di connessione.
sollevamento idonei. Il prodotto può essere fornito come elettropompa (pompa e motore) o solo
come pompa.
Posizione e bloccaggio
L'unità può essere trasportata in posizione orizzontale o verticale. Verificare NOTA BENE:
che l'unità sia adeguatamente fissata durante il trasporto e non abbia possibi- Se è stata acquistata una pompa senza motore, verificare che il motore sia
lità di cadere o di rovesciarsi. adatto per l'accoppiamento con la pompa.
AVVERTENZA:
Non utilizzare bulloni a occhielli avvitati sul motore per spostare Tenuta meccanica
il complessivo dell'elettropompa.
Serie Caratteristiche essenziali
• Usare cinghie allacciate intorno al motore se questo è di potenza compre- 1, 3, 5 Diametro nominale 12 mm (0,47 pollici), non bilanciata, rota-
sa fra 0,25 e 4,0 kW. zione destra, versione K (EN 12756)
• Usare cinghie allacciate alle due flange (o ai bulloni a occhiello, se presen- 10, 15, 22 Diametro nominale 16 mm (0,63 pollici), non bilanciata, rota-
ti) collocate nella zona di accoppiamento fra motore e pompa, se la po- zione destra, versione K (EN 12756)
tenza del motore è compresa fra 5,5 e 55,0 KW. Bilanciata per motori da 5 kW in su
• I bulloni a occhiello avvitati sul motore possono essere utilizzati esclusi-
vamente per spostare il solo motore oppure, in caso di distribuzione diso- 33, 46, 66, Diametro nominale 22 mm (0.86 pollici), bilanciata, rotazione
mogenea dei pesi, per sollevare l'unità in verticale a partire da una posi- 92, 125 destra, versione K (EN 12756)
zione orizzontale.
• Per spostare solo l'unità parzialmente pompa, utilizzare le cinghie salda-
mente fissate lanterna del motore.
2 e-SV - Italiano
it - Istruzioni originali
Usi impropri
4 Installazione
Precauzioni
AVVERTENZA:
• Osservare le vigenti norme antinfortunistiche.
• Utilizzare adeguate attrezzature e protezioni.
• Fare sempre riferimento alle norme, alla legislazione e ai codi-
ci locali e/o nazionali vigenti relativi alla selezione del luogo
La formula seguente è valida in caso d'impiego di un motore provvisto di di installazione e all'allacciamento di acqua ed energia elettrica.
cuscinetto lato accoppiamento, bloccato assialmente (motori standard Lowa-
ra per e-SV), vedere Figura 6 Per ulteriori informazioni, contattare il Servizio
di Vendita ed Assistenza.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
1 EN 60335-2-41 è la norma sulla sicurezza elettrica delle pompe per usi domestici e similari
2 Massimo 100°C per l'acqua
e-SV - Italiano 3
it - Istruzioni originali
4 e-SV - Italiano
it - Istruzioni originali
• I conduttori elettrici sono protetti da temperature troppo elevate, vibra- Usare cavi a norma con 3 conduttori (2 + Terra) per versioni monofase e
zioni e urti. con 4 conduttori (3 + Terra) per versioni trifase.
• La linea di alimentazione è dotata di:
Elettropompa con motore :
• Un dispositivo di protezione corto circuito
• Un interruttore differenziale dal sensibilità (30 mA) per fornire un'ul- Pressacavo
teriore protezione contro le scosse elettriche nel caso in cui l'impianto Intervalli diametro esterno dei cavi in mm
di messa a terra sia inefficiente Tipo
• Un dispositivo di sconnessione dalla rete con distanza di apertura dei M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
contatti di almeno 3 mm. SM X – –
PLM X X X
Lista di verifica per il quadro elettrico di comando
LLM X X X
NOTA BENE:
Il quadro elettrico deve essere idoneo rispetto ai valori nominali dell'elettro- 4.4 Installazione della pompa
pompa. Abbinamenti inappropriati possono non garantire la protezione del
motore.
4.4.1 Installazione meccanica
Controllare che siano soddisfatti i seguenti requisiti:
• Il quadro elettrico deve proteggere il motore da eventuali sovraccarichi e Per informazioni sulla base della pompa e i fori di ancoraggio, vedere Figura
cortocircuiti. 13.
• Installare la protezione da sovraccarico adeguata (relè termico o salvamo- 1. Posizionare la pompa sulla fondazione in calcestruzzo o su una equiva-
tore) lente struttura metallica.
Tipo di pompa Protezione Se la trasmissione di vibrazioni può causare problemi, inserire antivi-
Elettropompa monofase di serie ≤ • protezione termo-amperometri- branti tra la pompa e le fondazione.
1,5 kW: ca a riarmo automatico incorpo- 2. Rimuovere i tappi che coprono le bocche.
rata (motoprotettore) 3. Allineare la pompa e le flange delle tubazioni su entrambi i lati della
• protezione da cortocircuito (a pompa.
cura dell'installatore)3 Verificare l'allineamento dei bulloni.
Elettropompa trifase e altra mono- • protezione termica (a cura del- 4. Fissare le tubazioni alla pompa tramite i bulloni.
fase:4 l'installatore) Non forzare il posizionamento delle tubazioni.
• protezione da cortocircuito (a 5. Ancorare saldamente la pompa mediante appositi bulloni a fondazione
cura dell'installatore) in calcestruzzo o ad una equivalente struttura metallica.
• Il quadro elettrico deve essere dotato di un sistema di protezione contro 4.4.2 Installazione elettrica
la marcia a secco a cui collegare un pressostato, un galleggiante, le sonde
o altri dispositivi altri dispositivi idonei al sistema di protezione. 1. Per agevolare la connessione, il motore può essere ruotato per ottenere
• Per l'utilizzo sul lato di aspirazione della pompa si consigliano i seguenti la posizione più comoda:
dispositivi: a) Rimuovere i quattro bulloni che fissano il motore alla pompa.
• Se l'acqua viene pompata da un acquedotto, utilizzare un pressostato. b) Ruotare il motore fino alla posizione desiderata. Non rimuovere i
• Se l'acqua viene pompata da un serbatoio di prima raccolta o vasca, giunti tra l'albero a motore e quello a pompa.
utilizzare un galleggiante o le sonde. c) Riposizionare i quattro bulloni e serrarli.
• In caso di utilizzo di relè termici, si consiglia di scegliere relé in grado di 2. Rimuovere le viti del coperchio della morsettiera.
segnalare gli errori della fase. 3. Collegare e assicurare i cavi di alimentazione secondo il relativo sche-
ma d'installazione.
Lista di controllo verifica per il motore Per gli schemi d'installazione, vedere Figura 14. Gli schemi sono dispo-
nibili anche sul retro del coperchio della scatola del terminale.
AVVERTENZA:
a) Collegare il conduttore di terra.
• Leggere il manuale d'uso per verificare la presenza di un di- Verificare che il cavo di messa a terra sia più lungo dei conduttori
spositivo di protezione se si utilizza un motore diverso da di fase.
quello di serie. b) Collegare i conduttori di fase.
• Se il motore è dotato di protettori termici automatici, fare at- 4. Rimontare il coperchio della scatola morsettiera.
tenzione al rischio di avviamenti imprevisti in relazione al so-
vraccarico. Non utilizzare tali motori per estinguere incendi e NOTA BENE:
per sistemi antincendio ad acqua polverizzata. Serrare correttamente i pressacavi per garantire l'adeguata protezione
contro lo scorrimento del cavo e l'umidità.
3 fusibili aM (avviamento motore), oppure interruttore magnetotermico con curva C e Icn ≥ 4,5 kA o altro dispositivo equivalente.
4 relè termico di sovraccarico con classe di intervento 10A + fusibili aM (avviamento motore), oppure interruttore magnetotermico di protezione motore con classe di
intervento 10A.
e-SV - Italiano 5
it - Istruzioni originali
5 Messa in funzione, avvio, 3. Serie 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Rimuovere il tappo di riempimento e sfiato (1) e, utilizzando un
funzionamento e spegnimento imbuto (4), riempire la pompa finché l'acqua non fuoriesce dal fo-
ro.
Precauzioni b) Riposizionare il tappo di riempimento e sfiato (1). Il tappo di
riempimento (3) può essere utilizzato invece di (1).
AVVERTENZA:
• Fare attenzione al liquido scaricato in modo che non possa ar- 5.2 Controllo del senso di rotazione (motore
recare danni a cose o persone. trifase)
• I protettori del motore possono causare un riavvio imprevisto
del motore. Questo può determinare gravi lesioni personali.
• Non mettere mai in funzione la pompa senza la protezione Attenersi a questa procedura prima dell'avvio.
giunto correttamente installata. 1. Individuare le frecce sulla lanterna, sul giunto e/o sul copriventola del
motore per determinare il senso di rotazione corretto.
ATTENZIONE: 2. Avviare il motore.
• Durante il funzionamento, le superfici esterne della pompa e 3. Controllare rapidamente il senso di rotazione attraverso la protezione
del motore non devono superare i 40ºC (104ºF). Non toccare del giunto o il copriventola del motore.
il corpo in alcun punto senza indossare l'equipaggiamento di 4. Fermare il motore.
protezione.
• Non porre materiale combustibile vicino alla pompa. 5. Se il senso di rotazione è errato, seguire la seguente procedura:
a) Scollegare l'alimentazione.
NOTA BENE: b) Nella morsettiera del motore o nel quadro elettrico di comando,
• NON mettere in funzione la pompa al di sotto della portata nominale mi- scambiare la posizione di due dei tre fili del cavo di alimentazione.
nima, a secco o senza adescamento. Per gli schemi di collegamento, vedere Figura 14.
• Non far funzionare mai la pompa con la valvola di intercettazione (aspira- c) Verificare nuovamente il senso di rotazione.
zione o mandata) chiusa per più di pochi secondi.
• Non far funzionare mai la pompa con la valvola di intercettazione di aspi- 5.3 Avviamento della pompa
razione chiusa.
• Per impedire il surriscaldamento dei componenti interni della pompa, ve-
rificare che sia sempre garantita una portata d'acqua minima quando la Prima dell'avviamento della pompa, accertarsi che:
pompa è in funzione. Se questo non è possibile, si consiglia un by-pass o • La pompa sia correttamente collegata all'alimentazione elettrica.
un circuito di ricircolo. Fare riferimento ai valori nominali minimi della
portata forniti nell'Appendice. • La pompa sia correttamente adescata secondo le istruzioni in Adescamento
• Non esporre la pompa inattiva a temperature di congelamento. Scaricare della pompa.
tutto il liquido che si trova all'interno della pompa. La mancata osservan- • La valvola di intercettazione a valle della pompa sia chiusa.
za della prescrizione può determinare il congelamento del liquido e dan- 1. Avviare il motore.
neggiare la pompa. 2. Aprire gradualmente la valvola di intercettazione sul lato di mandata
• La somma della pressione sul lato di aspirazione (acquedotto, serbatoio della pompa.
dell'acqua) e la pressione massima fornita dalla pompa non deve superare Alle condizioni di esercizio previste, la pompa deve funzionare in mo-
la massima pressione di lavoro permessa (pressione nominale PN) per la do silenzioso e regolare. Altrimenti, fare riferimento a Risoluzione dei
pompa. problemi.
• Non utilizzare la pompa in caso di cavitazione. La cavitazione può dan-
neggiare i componenti interni.
• Se si pompa acqua calda, è necessario garantire una pressione minima sul
lato di aspirazione per impedire la cavitazione.
6 Manutenzione
Precauzioni
Livello di rumore
Per informazioni sui livelli di rumorosità generati dalle che montano un mo- AVVERTENZA:
tore Lowara fornito, vedere Tabella 10.
Scollegare l'alimentazione elettrica prima dell'installazione o della
manutenzione della pompa
5.1 Adescamento della pompa
Installazioni con il livello del liquido al di sotto della pompa 6.2 Valori della coppia di serraggio
(soprabattente)
Per i valori delle coppie di serraggio, vedere Tabella 18, Tabella 19 o Tabella
Per una figura che mostra le parti della pompa, vedere Figura 17. 20.
1. Aprire la valvola di intercettazione a monte della pompa e chiudere la Per informazioni su momenti e carichi applicabili alle flange, vedere Figura
valvola di intercettazione a valle. Selezionare le operazioni applicabili: 21.
2. Serie 1, 3, 5:
a) Allentare il perno sul tappo di scarico (2). 6.3 Sostituzione del motore elettrico
b) Rimuovere il tappo di riempimento e sfiato (1) e, utilizzando un
imbuto, riempire la pompa finché l'acqua non fuoriesce dal foro.
c) Riposizionare il tappo di riempimento e sfiato (1). La pompa viene fornita con uno spessore calibrato a forcella per facilitare le
d) Serrare il perno sul tappo di scarico (2). operazioni di accoppiamento o di reinserimento del motore.
6 e-SV - Italiano
it - Istruzioni originali
e-SV - Italiano 7
it - Istruzioni originali
Causa Soluzione
Lo strozzamento in mandata Aprire la valvola.
è eccessivo.
Le valvole sono bloccate in Smontare e pulire le valvole.
posizione chiusa o parzial-
mente chiusa.
La pompa è ostruita. Contattare il Servizio di Vendita ed Assisten-
za.
I tubi sono ostruiti. Controllare e pulire i tubi.
Il senso di rotazione della gi- Cambiare la posizione di due delle fasi sulla
rante è errato (versione trifa- morsettiera del motore o nel quadro elettrico
se). di comando.
L'aspirazione soprabattente è Verificare le condizioni di esercizio della
eccessiva o la perdita di cari- pompa. Se necessario, procedere come segue:
co nei tubi di aspirazione è • Diminuire il dislivello
eccessiva. • Aumentare il diametro del tubo di aspira-
zione
Causa Soluzione
Presenza di una perdita in uno o entrambi i seguenti Riparare o sostituire i
componenti: componenti guasti.
• Il tubo di aspirazione
• La valvola di fondo o la check valvola di ritegno
Causa Soluzione
Presenza di una perdita in uno o entrambi i Riparare o sostituire i com-
seguenti componenti: ponenti guasti.
• Il tubo di aspirazione
• La valvola di fondo o la check valvola di ri-
tegno
Causa Soluzione
Pompa in cavitazio- Ridurre la portata richiesta chiudendo parzialmente la
ne valvola di intercettazione a valle della pompa. Se il
problema persiste verificare le condizioni di esercizio
della pompa (dislivelli, perdite di carico, temperatura
del liquido, ecc...)
I cuscinetti del mo- Contattare il Servizio di Vendita ed Assistenza.
tore sono usurati.
Presenza di corpi Contattare il Servizio di Vendita ed Assistenza.
estranei all’interno
della pompa.
Per ogni situazione non contemplata in queste tabelle, fare riferimento al
Servizio di Vendita ed Assistenza.
8 e-SV - Italiano
en - Translation of the original instructions
Hot surface hazards are indicated by a specific symbol that replaces the typi-
1.1 Introduction cal hazard level symbols:
NOTICE:
Save this manual for future reference, and keep it readily available at the lo- Instructions
cation of the unit. The instructions and warnings that are provided in this manual concern the
standard version, as described in the sales document. Special version pumps
may be supplied with supplementary instruction leaflets. Refer to sales con-
1.1.1 Inexperienced users tract for any modifications or special version characteristics. For instruc-
tions, situations, or events that is not considered in this manual or the sales
WARNING: document, contact the nearest Lowara Service Center.
This product is intended to be operated by qualified personnel
only. 1.3 Disposal of packaging and product
Observe the local regulations and codes in force regarding sorted waste dis-
Be aware of the following precautions: posal.
• Persons with diminished capacities should not operate the product unless
they are supervised or have been properly trained by a professional. 1.4 Warranty
• Children must be supervised to ensure that they do not play on or around
the product. For information about warranty, see the sales contract.
These are examples of other categories that can occur. They fall under the
ordinary hazard levels and may use complementing symbols:
• Crush hazard
• Cutting hazard
• Arc flash hazard
e-SV - English 9
en - Translation of the original instructions
FULFILS THE RELEVANT PROVISIONS OF THE FOLLOWING EU- shim is inserted to keep the impeller stack in the correct axial position. In
ROPEAN DIRECTIVES: order to prevent damage during transportation the shaft is also held into
place with expanded polystyrene and plastic straps.
• MACHINERY 2006/42/EC (THE TECHNICAL FILE IS AVAILA-
BLE FROM LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). The bolt and nuts used to fasten the motor are not included. For more in-
AND OF THE FOLLOWING TECHNICAL STANDARDS: formation about how to couple the motor, see Figure 23.
• EN 809 WARNING:
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 A pump and motor that are purchased separately and then cou-
pled together results in a new machine under the Machinery di-
AMEDEO VALENTE rective 2006/42/EC. The person making the coupling is respon-
sible for all safety aspects of the combined unit.
(DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING AND R&D)
rev.01
2.3 Storage guidelines
Lowara is a trademark of Lowara srl Unipersonale, subsidiary of Xylem Inc.
Storage location
2 Transportation and Storage The product must be stored in a covered and dry location free from heat,
dirt, and vibrations.
2.1 Inspect the delivery NOTICE:
1. Check the outside of the package for evident signs of damage. • Protect the product against humidity, heat sources, and mechanical dam-
2. Notify our distributor within eight days of the delivery date, if the age.
product bears visible signs of damage. • Do not place heavy weights on the packed product.
Check the gross weight that is indicated on the package in order to select NOTICE:
proper lifting equipment. If you have purchased a pump without motor, make sure that the motor is
suitable for coupling to the pump.
Position and fastening
The unit can be transported either horizontally or vertically. Make sure that Mechanical seal
the unit is securely fastened during transportation, and cannot roll or fall
over. Series Basic characteristics
1, 3, 5 Nominal diameter 12 mm (0.47 in.), unbalanced, right hand
WARNING: rotation, K version (EN 12756)
Do not use eyebolts screwed on the motor for handling the
whole electric pump unit. 10, 15, 22 Nominal diameter 16 mm (0.63 in.), unbalanced, right hand
rotation, K version (EN 12756)
Balanced with motor power ≥ 5 kW
• Use straps surrounding the motor if the power of the motor is between
0.25 kW and 4.0 kW. 33, 46, 66, Nominal diameter 22 mm (0.86 in.), balanced, right hand ro-
• Use ropes or straps that are linked to the two flanges (eye bolts if provi- 92, 125 tation, K version (EN 12756)
ded) located near the mating zone between the motor and pump, if the
power of the motor is between 5.5 kW and 55.0 kW. Intended use
• Eyebolts screwed onto the motor may be exclusively used to handle the The pump is suitable for:
individual motor or, in case of a not balanced distribution of weights, to
partially lift the unit vertically starting from a horizontal displacement. • Civil and industrial water distribution systems
• To move the pump unit only, use straps firmly linked to the motor adapt- • Irrigation (for example, agriculture and sporting facilities)
er.
• Water treatment
For more information about how to securely harness the unit, see Figure 4.
• Boiler feed
• Washing plants
Unit without motor
• Cooling (for example, air conditioning and refrigeration)
If the unit is not delivered with a motor, the calibrated fork-shaped shim is
already inserted between the adapter and the transmission coupling. The • Fire fighting applications
10 e-SV - English
en - Translation of the original instructions
4 Installation
Precautions
WARNING:
• Observe accident prevention regulations in force.
• Use suitable equipment and protection.
• Always refer to the local and/or national regulations, legisla-
The following formula is valid for motors that are provided with the drive- tion, and codes in force regarding the selection of the installa-
end bearing axially locked (such as the Lowara standard motors for e-SV), tion site, and water and power connections.
see Figure 6. For other situations, contact the Sales and Service Department.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN WARNING:
• Make sure that all connections are performed by qualified in-
P1max Maximum inlet pressure stallation technicians and in compliance with the regulations
Pmax Maximum pressure generated by the pump in force.
• Before starting work on the unit, make sure that the unit and
PN Maximum operating pressure the control panel are isolated from the power supply and can-
not be energized. This applies to the control circuit as well.
5 EN 60335-2-41 is the norm about electric-related safety pumps for household and similar applications
6 Maximum 100ºC for water
e-SV - English 11
en - Translation of the original instructions
4.1 Earthing grounding Z Maximum height at which the pump can be installed (m)
12 e-SV - English
en - Translation of the original instructions
7 fuses aM (motor starting), or magneto-thermal switch with curve C and Icn ≥ 4,5 kA or other equivalent device.
8 Overload thermal relay with operation class 10A + fuses aM (motor starting) or motor protection magneto-thermal switch with operation class 10A.
e-SV - English 13
en - Translation of the original instructions
Installations with liquid level above the pump (suction head) 6.1 Service
For an illustration that shows the pump parts, see Figure 16. The pump does not require any scheduled routine maintenance. If the user
wishes to schedule regular maintenance deadlines, they are dependent on the
1. Close the on-off valve located downstream from the pump. Select the type of pumped liquid and on the operating conditions of the pump.
applicable steps:
2. Series 1, 3, 5: Contact the Sales and Service Department for any requests or information
a) Loosen the drain plug pin (2). regarding routine maintenance or service.
b) Remove the fill and vent plug (1) and open the on-off valve up- Extraordinary maintenance may be necessary to clean the liquid end and/or
stream until the water flows out of the hole. replace worn parts.
c) Tighten the drain plug pin (2).
d) Replace the fill and vent plug (1).
3. Series 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: 6.2 Torque values
a) Remove the fill and vent plug (1) and open the on/off valve up- For information about torque values, see Table 18, Table 19, or Table 20.
stream until the water flows out of the hole.
b) Close the fill and vent plug (1). Fill plug (3) can be used instead of For information about the applicable thrust and torques on the flanges by
(1). the piping, see Figure 21.
Installations with liquid level below the pump (suction lift) 6.3 Replace the electric motor
For an illustration that shows the pump parts, see Figure 17. The pump is supplied with a calibrated fork-shaped shim designed to facili-
1. Open the on-off valve located upstream from the pump and close the tate the motor coupling and replacement operations.
on-off valve downstream. Select the applicable steps:
2. Series 1, 3, 5: • See instructions about how to replace the motor in Figure 23.
a) Loosen the drain plug pin (2). If the calibrated fork-shaped shim is not available use a 5 ± 0.1 mm (0.2
b) Remove the fill and vent plug (1) and use a funnel to fill the pump ± 0.004 in.) shim.
until water flows out of the hole.
c) Replace the fill and vent plug (1). 6.4 Replace the mechanical seal
d) Tighten the drain plug pin (2).
3. Series 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
Series Instruction
a) Remove the fill and vent plug (1) and use a funnel (4) to fill the
pump until water flows out of the hole. 1, 3, 5 Contact the Sales and Service Department.
b) Replace the fill and vent plug (1). Fill plug (3) can be used instead 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 kW Contact the Sales and Service Department.
of (1).
10, 15, 22: > 4 kW See the instructions in Figure 24. Use alcohol for clean-
ing and lubrication.
5.2 Check the rotation direction (three-phase 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 See the instructions in Figure 24. Use alcohol for clean-
motor) ing and lubrication.
14 e-SV - English
en - Translation of the original instructions
e-SV - English 15
en - Translation of the original instructions
Cause Remedy
There is a leakage in one or both of the fol- Repair or replace the faulty
lowing components: component.
• The suction pipe
• The foot valve or the check valve
Cause Remedy
Pump cavitation Reduce the required flow rate by partially closing the
on-off valve downstream from the pump. If the prob-
lem persists check the operating conditions of the
pump (for example height difference, flow resistance,
liquid temperature).
The motor bearings Contact the Sales and Service Department.
are worn.
There are foreign Contact the Sales and Service Department.
objects inside the
pump.
For any other situation, refer to the Sales and Service Department.
16 e-SV - English
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
1 Introduction et sécurité Voici des exemples d'autres catégories éventuelles. Elles se classent en des-
sous des niveaux de risque ordinaires et peuvent utiliser des symboles com-
plémentaires :
1.1 Introduction • Risque d'écrasement
• Risque de coupure
Objet de ce manuel
• Risque d'arc électrique
L'objet de ce manuel est d'apporter les informations nécessaires pour :
• L'installation Risque de surface chaude
• L'utilisation
• La maintenance Les risques de surface chaude sont signalés par un symbole spécifique qui
remplace les symboles courants de niveau de risque :
ATTENTION :
ATTENTION :
Lire attentivement ce manuel avant d'installer et d'utiliser ce pro-
duit. Une mauvaise utilisation du produit peut entraîner des bles-
sures et des dégâts matériels et pourrait annuler la garantie.
Description des symboles pour l'utilisateur et l'installateur
e-SV - Français 17
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
Pour plus d'informations sur l'élingage du groupe en toute sécurité, voir Fi-
POMPE (VOIR ÉTIQUETTE EN PREMIÈRE PAGE) gure 4.
EST CONFORME AUX CLAUSES APPLICABLES DES DIRECTIVES
EUROPÉENNES SUIVANTES : Groupe sans moteur
Si le groupe n'est pas livré avec un moteur, la cale en U étalonnée est déjà
• MACHINE 2006/42/CE (DOSSIER TECHNIQUE DISPONIBLE insérée entre l'adaptateur et l'accouplement de transmission. La cale est insé-
AUPRÈS DE LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). rée pour maintenir la roue en position axiale correcte. Pour éviter tout dégât
ET AUX NORMES TECHNIQUES SUIVANTES: pendant le transport, l'arbre est aussi maintenu en place par du polystyrène
expansé et des sangles en plastique.
• EN 809
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 Les vis et écrous utilisés pour la fixation du moteur ne sont pas inclus. Pour
plus d'informations sur l'accouplement du moteur, voir Figure 23.
AMEDEO VALENTE
AVERTISSEMENT :
(DIRECTEUR INGÉNIERIE ET R&D) Une pompe et un moteur achetés séparément pour accouple-
rév.01 ment ultérieur constituent une nouvelle machine au sens de la di-
rective machine 2006/42/CE. La personne qui effectue l'accou-
plement est responsable de tous les aspects de sécurité du grou-
Lowara est une marqué de commerce de Lowara srl Unipersonale, filiale de pe combiné.
Xylem Inc.
18 e-SV - Français
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
Usage prévu wara pour e-SV), voir Figure 6. Pour les autres cas, contacter le Service com-
La pompe convient pour : mercial et après-vente.
AVERTISSEMENT :
Une utilisation incorrecte de la pompe peut provoquer des situ-
ations dangereuses et occasionner des blessures corporelles ou
des dégâts matériels.
Normes EPDM -30°C (-22°F) 90°C (194° F) 120°C (248°F)
Spécial FPM (FKM) -10° C (14° F) 90°C (194° F) 120 °C10 (248
Une utilisation incorrecte du produit conduit à la perte de la garantie. °F)
Exemples d'utilisation incorrecte : Spécial PTFE 0°C (32°F) 90°C (194° F) 120°C (248°F)
• Liquides non compatibles avec les matériaux de construction de la pompe
Pour des exigences spécifiques, prendre contact avec le Service commercial
• Liquides dangereux (par exemple toxiques, explosifs, inflammables ou et après-vente.
corrosifs)
• Liquides potables autre que l'eau (par exemple vin ou lait)
Nombre max. de démarrages par heure
Exemples d'installation incorrecte :
Ce tableau donne le nombre maximal de démarrages autorisés par heure
• Emplacements dangereux (par exemple atmosphères explosives ou corro- pour les moteurs fournis par Lowara :
sives).
• Emplacement où la température de l'air est très élevée ou la ventilation kW 0,25 - 4,00 - 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
insuffisante. 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
• Installations à l'extérieur en l'absence de protection contre la pluie ou le Démar- 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
gel. rages
par heu-
DANGER : re
Ne pas utiliser cette pompe pour pomper des liquides inflamma-
bles et/ou explosibles. REMARQUE :
Si vous utilisez un moteur autre que celui qui vous a été fourni avec la pom-
REMARQUE : pe électrique, vérifier les instructions correspondantes pour déterminer le
nombre de démarrages autorisés par heure.
• Ne pas utiliser cette pompe pour pomper des liquides contenant des sub-
stances abrasives, solides ou fibreuses.
• Ne pas utiliser la pompe pour des débits dépassant ceux mentionnés sur 3.3 Plaque signalétique
la plaque signalétique.
La plaque signalétique est une étiquette métallique située sur l'adaptateur. La
Applications spéciales plaque signalétique regroupe les caractéristiques principales du produit. Pour
plus d'informations, voir Figure 1.
Prendre contact avec le Service commercial et après-vente dans les cas sui-
vants : La plaque signalétique donne des informations sur le matériau du joint et du
joint mécanique. Pour plus d'informations sur l'interprétation du code de la
• Si la densité et/ou la viscosité du liquide pompé dépasse celle de l'eau, par plaque signalétique, voir Figure 2 .
exemple eau avec glycol, un moteur plus puissant peut être nécessaire.
• Si le liquide pompé est traité chimiquement (par exemple adouci, désioni- Dénomination du produit
sé, déminéralisé, etc.).
Voir Figure 3 pour une explication du code d'identification de la pompe avec
• Si la pompe doit être installée à l'horizontale, une version spéciale et des un exemple.
pattes de fixation doivent être commandées.
• Pour toute situation différente de celles décrites et dépendant de la nature Étiquette WRAS - exigence de pose et remarques (pour le marché
du liquide. Royaume-Uni seulement).
Une étiquette WRAS sur la pompe signifie que ce produit est homologué se-
3.2 Limites d'application lon le Water Regulations Advisory Scheme. Ce produit est conçu pour être
utilisé avec de l'eau potable froide pour consommation par l'homme. Pour
Pression de service maximale plus d'informations, consulter les documents IRNs R001 et R420 dans l'an-
nuaire WRAS Water Fittings and Materials (www.wras.co.uk).
Ce diagramme donne la pression maximale d'utilisation en fonction du mo-
dèle de pompe et de la température du liquide pompé. Marquages IMQ ou TUV ou IRAM ou autres (pour pompe électrique
seulement)
Sauf spécification contraire, pour les produits portant un marquage d'homo-
logation, l'homologation ne concerne que la pompe électrique.
La formule ci-dessous est valable pour les moteurs livrés avec verrouillage
axial du roulement côté entraînement (par exemple les moteurs standard Lo-
9 La norme EN 60335-2-41 est la norme de sécurité électrique concernant les pompes pour utilisations domestiques et assimilées
10 Maximum 100 ºC pour l'eau
e-SV - Français 19
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
20 e-SV - Français
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
• Des vannes d'arrêt de dimension appropriée doivent être posées sur les Liste de contrôle du moteur
canalisations d'aspiration et de sortie (en aval du clapet) pour assurer la
régulation du débit de la pompe, son contrôle et son entretien. AVERTISSEMENT :
• Un clapet antiretour doit être installé pour éviter tout débit inverse dans
la pompe à l'arrêt de celle-ci. • Lire les instructions d'utilisation pour vérifier si un dispositif
de protection est prévu en cas d'utilisation d'un autre moteur
que celui de série.
AVERTISSEMENT : • Si le moteur est équipé de protecteurs thermiques automati-
Ne pas utiliser la vanne d'arrêt côté refoulement pour réguler le ques, attention aux risques de démarrages inattendus associés
débit de la pompe pendant plus de quelques secondes. Si la pom- à une surcharge. Ne pas utiliser de tels moteurs dans la lutte
pe doit fonctionner plus de quelques secondes sur un refoule- contre les incendies et les systèmes d'arrosage d'incendie.
ment fermé, un circuit de dérivation doit être installé pour éviter
une surchauffe de l'eau à l'intérieur de la pompe.
REMARQUE :
Pour des illustrations présentant les exigences de canalisation, voir Figure 12. • N'utiliser que des moteurs équilibrés dynamiquement avec une demi-cla-
vette dans la rallonge d'arbre (IEC 60034-14) avec un taux de vibration
4.3 Caractéristiques électriques normal (N).
• La tension et la fréquence du moteur doivent correspondre aux indica-
• Les réglementations locales applicables ont priorité sur ces préconisa- tions de la plaque signalétique du moteur.
tions.
• Utiliser uniquement des moteurs monophasés ou triphasés dont la taille
• Pour les systèmes de lutte contre l'incendie (bouches d'incendie ou systè- et la puissance sont conformes aux normes européennes.
mes d'arrosage), consulter les réglementations locales en vigueur.
En général, les moteurs peuvent fonctionner dans les tolérances de tension
Liste de vérification des branchements électriques secteur suivantes :
Vérifier que les conditions suivantes sont respectées :
Fréquence en Hz Phase ~ UN [V] ± %
• Les fils électriques sont protégés contre les hautes températures, les vibra- 50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
tions et les collisions.
3 230/400 ± 10
• La ligne d'alimentation est équipée de :
• Un dispositif de protection contre les courts-circuits 400/690 ± 10
• Un interrupteur différentiel à haute sensibilité (30 mA) [RCD : residual 60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
current device] permettant d'assurer une protection supplémentaire 3 220/380 ± 5
contre l'électrocution 380/660 ± 10
• Un dispositif d'isolement du secteur avec écartement des contacts d'au
moins 3 mm Utiliser un câble conforme aux réglementations, à 3 conducteurs (2 + terre/
masse) pour les versions monophasées et 4 conducteurs (3 + terre/masse)
Liste de contrôle du tableau électrique de commande pour la version triphasée.
11 fusibles aM (démarrage de moteur), ou interrupteur magnétothermique de courbe C et Icn ≥ 4,5 kA ou autre dispositif équivalent.
12 Relais thermique de surcharge de classe de fonctionnement 10 A + fusibles aM (démarrage de moteur) ou interrupteur magnétothermique de protection de moteur de
classe de fonctionnement 10 A.
e-SV - Français 21
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
3. Brancher et fixer les câbles d'alimentation selon le schéma de câblage Installations où le niveau de liquide est au-dessus de la pompe
correspondant. (hauteur manométrique d'aspiration)
Pour les schémas de câblage, voir Figure 14. Les schémas sont aussi dis-
ponibles au dos du capot de la boîte à bornes. Pour une illustration présentant les pièces de la pompe, voir Figure 16.
a) Brancher le fil de terre (masse). 1. Fermer la vanne d'arrêt en aval de la pompe. Sélectionner les opéra-
S'assurer que le fil de terre (masse) est plus long que les fils de tions applicables :
phase. 2. Séries 1, 3, 5 :
b) Brancher les fils de phase.
a) Desserrer la goupille du bouchon de vidange (2).
4. Reposer le capot de la boîte à bornes.
b) Déposer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1) et
REMARQUE : ouvrir la vanne d'arrêt en amont jusqu'à la sortie de l'eau par l'ori-
Serrer soigneusement le ou les presse-étoupes pour assurer la protec- fice.
tion contre tout glissement du câble et pénétration d'humidité dans la c) Serrer la goupille du bouchon de vidange (2).
boîte à bornes. d) Reposer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1).
3. Séries 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 :
5. Si le moteur n'est pas équipé d'une protection thermique à réinitialisa- a) Déposer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1) et
tion automatique, régler la protection de surcharge en fonction de la ouvrir la vanne d'arrêt en amont jusqu'à la sortie de l'eau par l'ori-
liste ci-dessous. fice.
• Si le moteur doit être utilisé à pleine charge, régler la valeur au cou- b) Fermer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1). Il est
rant nominal de la pompe électrique (plaque signalétique) possible d'utiliser le bouchon de remplissage (3) plutôt que (1).
• Si le moteur est utilisé à charge partielle, régler la valeur au courant
de fonctionnement (mesuré par exemple avec une pince ampèremé- Installations où le niveau de liquide se trouve en dessous de la pompe
trique). (levage d'aspiration)
• Si la pompe a un système de démarrage triangle-étoile, régler le re-
lais thermique à 58 % du courant nominal ou courant de fonction- Pour une illustration présentant les pièces de la pompe, voir Figure 17.
nement (seulement pour les moteurs triphasés).
1. Ouvrir la vanne d'arrêt en amont de la pompe et fermer la vanne d'ar-
rêt en aval. Sélectionner les opérations applicables :
5 Contrôle de réception, 2. Séries 1, 3, 5 :
Démarrage, Fonctionnement et a) Desserrer la goupille du bouchon de vidange (2).
Extinction b) Déposer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1) et
remplir la pompe avec un entonnoir jusqu'au débordement de
l'eau par l'orifice.
Précautions c) Reposer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1).
d) Serrer la goupille du bouchon de vidange (2).
AVERTISSEMENT :
• S'assurer que le liquide vidangé ne cause pas de dommages ou 3. Séries 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 :
de blessures. a) Déposer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1) et
• Les protections du moteur peuvent causer un redémarrage in- remplir la pompe avec un entonnoir (4) jusqu'au débordement de
attendu de celui-ci. Cela peut entraîner des blessures graves. l'eau par l'orifice.
• Ne jamais faire fonctionner une pompe sans que le protecteur b) Reposer le bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre (1). Il
d'accouplement ait été correctement installé. est possible d'utiliser le bouchon de remplissage (3) plutôt que (1).
Pour plus d'informations sur l'emplacement des bouchons, voir Figure 15.
22 e-SV - Français
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
e-SV - Français 23
fr - Traduction de la notice originale
Cause Solution
Il existe une fuite sur l'un ou les deux composants Réparer ou remplacer
suivants : le composant défectu-
• Canalisation d'aspiration eux.
• Clapet de pied ou clapet antiretour
24 e-SV - Français
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
HINWEIS:
Bewahren Sie dieses Handbuch zur späteren Bezugnahme auf und halten Sie Beschreibung der Benutzer- und Installateursymbole
es am Standort der Einheit bereit. Spezifische Informationen für diejenigen, die für die Instal-
lation des Produkts in die Anlage (hydraulischer und/oder
elektrischer Teil) oder für Wartungsmaßnahmen zuständig
1.1.1 Unerfahrene Benutzer sind.
e-SV - Deutsch 25
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
Rev. 01 Schrauben und Muttern zur Befestigung des Motors sind nicht im Lieferum-
fang enthalten. Weitere Informationen zur Ankupplung des Motors siehe
Lowara ist eine Marke von Lowara srl Unipersonale, einer Tochtergesell- Abbildung 23.
schaft der Xylem Inc.
WARNUNG:
Wenn eine Pumpe und ein Motor getrennt voneinander gekauft
2 Transport- und Lagerung und anschließend miteinander gekoppelt werden, ergeben sie ei-
ne neue Maschine gemäß Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG. Die
Person, die diese Kopplung durchführt, ist für alle Sicherheits-
2.1 Überprüfung der Lieferung aspekte der kombinierten Einheit verantwortlich.
1. Prüfen Sie die Außenseite der Verpackung auf offensichtliche Anzei-
chen einer Beschädigung.
2. Informieren Sie den Händler innerhalb von acht Tagen nach Lieferda- 2.3 Richtlinien hinsichtlich der Lagerung
tum, wenn das Produkt sichtbare Anzeichen einer Beschädigung auf-
weist.
Lagerort
Auspacken des Geräts Das Produkt muss an einem überdachten und trockenen Ort gelagert wer-
1. Führen Sie den anwendbaren Schritt aus: den, der weder Hitze, Schmutz noch Vibrationen aufweist.
• Wenn die Einheit in einem Karton verpackt ist, entfernen Sie die
Klammern und öffnen Sie den Karton. HINWEIS:
• Wenn die Einheit in einer Holzkiste verpackt ist, öffnen Sie den • Schützen Sie das Produkt vor Feuchtigkeit, Wärmequellen und mechani-
Deckel und achten Sie dabei auf Nägel und Bändern. schen Schäden.
2. Entfernen Sie die Sicherungsschrauben oder das Band vom Holzso- • Stellen Sie keine schweren Lasten auf Produktverpackungen ab.
ckel.
26 e-SV - Deutsch
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
HINWEIS:
Wenn Sie eine Pumpe ohne Motor erworben haben, stellen Sie sicher, dass
sich der Motor zum Anschluss an die Pumpe eignet.
Gleitringdichtung
Modellreihe Allgemeine Merkmale
1, 3, 5 Nenndurchmesser 12 mm (0,47 Zoll.), ungewuchtet,
rechtsdrehend, K-Ausführung (EN 12756)
10, 15, 22 Nenndurchmesser 16 mm (0,63 Zoll.), ungewuchtet,
rechtsdrehend, K-Ausführung (EN 12756)
Bei Motoren ≥ 5 kW gewuchtet Folgende Gleichung gilt, wenn ein Motor mit axial fixiertem Lager an der
Antriebsseite verwendet wird (Lowara Standard-Motoren für e-SV), siehe
33, 46, 66, 92, Nenndurchmesser 22 mm (0,86 Zoll.), gewuchtet, rechts- Abbildung 6. Anderenfalls wenden Sie sich bitte an die Vertriebs- und Kun-
125 drehend, K-Ausführung (EN 12756) dendienstabteilung.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Die Pumpe eignet sich für: P1max Maximaler Einlassdruck
• Systeme für die Bau- und Industriewasserverteilung Pmax Maximaler von der Pumpe gelieferter Druck
• Bewässerung (zum Beispiel Landwirtschaft und Sportanlagen) PN Maximaler Betriebsdruck
• Kläranlagen
• Kesselversorgung
• Waschanlagen Medientemperaturintervalle
• Kühlung (zum Beispiel, Klima- und Kälteanlagen) Version Dichtung Minimum Maximum13 Maximum
• Brandbekämpfungsanwendungen
WARNUNG:
Die nicht bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung der Pumpe kann ge- Standard EPDM -30°C (-22°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
fährliche Bedingungen verursachen und zu Personen- und Sach-
schäden führen. Sondermaß FPM (FKM) -10°C (14°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C14
(248°F)
Sondermaß PTFE 0°C (32°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
Die nicht bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung des Produkt führt zum Verlust
der Gewährleistung.
Für besondere Anforderungen wenden Sie sich bitte an die Vertriebs- und
Beispiele für die nicht bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung: Kundendienstabteilung.
• Flüssigkeiten, die nicht mit den Pumpenwerkstoffen kompatibel sind Maximale Schalthäufigkeit pro Stunde
• Gefährliche Flüssigkeiten (wie giftige, explosionsgefährliche, entzündliche
oder korrosive Flüssigkeiten) Diese Tabelle zeigt die zulässige Schalthäufigkeit pro Stunde für Motoren
• Andere trinkbare Flüssigkeiten als Wasser (zum Beispiel Wein oder Milch) von Lowara:
Beispiele für ungeeignete Montageorte:
kW 0,25-3,0 4,00-7,5 11.0 - 18.5 - 30.0 - 45.0 55.0
• Gefährliche Standorte (wie explosionsgefährdete oder korrosive Atmo- 0 0 15.0 22.0 37.0
sphären). Anläufe 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
• Standorte mit hoher Lufttemperatur oder schlechter Belüftung. pro
• Installationen im Freien ohne Schutz vor Regen oder Frost. Stunde
GEFAHR:
Verwenden Sie diese Pumpe nicht zur Förderung von entflamm- HINWEIS:
baren und/oder explosiven Fördermedien. Wenn Sie einen anderen Motor als den standardmäßig mit der elektrischen
Pumpe gelieferten einsetzen, lesen Sie in der Anleitung dieses Motors die
zulässige Anzahl von Anläufen pro Stunde nach.
HINWEIS:
• Verwenden Sie diese Pumpe nicht zur Förderung von Fördermedien, die
abrasive, feste oder faserartige Stoffe enthalten. 3.3 Datenschild
• Verwenden Sie die Pumpe nicht für einen größeren Durchfluss als auf
dem Typenschild angegeben. Das Typenschild ist ein Metallschild, das sich am Adapter befindet. Das Ty-
penschild enthält wichtige Produktspezifikationen. Weitere Informationen
entnehmen Sie bitte Abbildung 1.
Sonderanwendungen
Wenden Sie sich in den folgenden Fällen an die Vertriebs- und Kunden- Das Typenschild liefert Informationen über das Dichtungs- und Gleitring-
dienstabteilung: dichtungsmaterial. Informationen zum Verständnis des Codes auf dem Ty-
penschild entnehmen Sie bitte Abbildung 2.
• Wenn die Dichte und/oder Viskosität des Fördermediums die entsprech-
enden Werte von Wasser überschreiten, wie zum Beispiel Wasser mit Gly-
kol; in diesem Fällen kann ein leistungsstärkerer Motor erforderlich sein. Produktbezeichnung
• Wenn das Fördermedium chemisch behandelt ist (zum Beispiel entioni- Siehe Abbildung 3 für eine Erklärung der Pumpenkennung und für ein Bei-
siert, entmineralisiert, mit Weichmacher versetzt, usw.). spiel.
• Für eine horizontale Montage der Pumpe müssen eine Sonderausführung
und Montagewinkel bestellt werden. WRAS-Label- Montageanforderungen und Hinweise (nur für den GB-
• Andere flüssigkeitsbezogene Aspekte, die von den hier beschriebenen ab- Markt)
weichen. Ein WRAS-Label auf der Pumpe bedeutet, dass das Produkt nach WRAS,
den englischen Zulassungsvorschriften für Trinkwasser zugelassen ist. Das
3.2 Anwendungsgrenzen Produkt ist für den Einsatz mit Trinkwasser für den menschlichen Gebrauch
geeignet. Weitere Informationen entnehmen Sie bitte IRN R001 und R420
Maximaler Arbeitsdruck im WRAS Water Fittings and Materials Directory (www.wras.co.uk).
Dieses Flussdiagramm zeigt den maximalen Arbeitsdruck in Abhängigkeit
vom Pumpenmodell und der Temperatur des Fördermediums.
13 EN 60335-2-41 ist eine Norm zur elektrischen Sicherheit von Pumpen für Haushaltsgeräte und ähnliche Geräte
14 Maximal 100°C für Wasser
e-SV - Deutsch 27
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
IMQ, TÜV, IRAM oder andere Zeichen (nur für elektrische Pumpe) In der Umgebung der Pumpe muss ausreichend Licht und freier Platz vor-
Sofern nicht anders angegeben, bezieht sich die Zulassung bei Produkten handen sein. Stellen Sie sicher, dass ein einfacher Zugang für Installation
mit Zulassungszeichen zur elektrischen Sicherheit ausschließlich auf die Wartung möglich ist.
elektrische Pumpe.
Montage über der Flüssigkeitsquelle (Saughöhe)
4 Montage Die maximale theoretische Ansaughöhe einer Pumpe beträgt 10,33 m. In der
Praxis wird die Saugleistung der Pumpe durch Folgendes beeinträchtigt:
HINWEIS:
Richtlinien
Beachten Sie alle Vorschriften der zuständigen kommunalen Behörden,
Beachten Sie die folgenden Richtlinien zum Standort des Produkts: wenn die Pumpe an das kommunale Wassernetz angeschlossen wird. Sofern
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass der normale Kühlluftstrom des Motorlüfters nicht von den Behörden gefordert, montieren Sie eine entsprechende Rücksperre
behindert wird. an der Saugseite.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Montagebereich vor austretenden Flüssigkeiten
oder Überflutung geschützt ist.
Checkliste für Ansaug- und Auslassleitungen
• Wenn möglich, stellen Sie die Pumpe etwas höher als die Bodenhöhe auf.
• Die Umgebungstemperatur muss zwischen 0°C (+32°F) und +40°C Prüfen Sie, dass die folgenden Voraussetzungen erfüllt werden:
(+104°F) betragen. • Für die Rohrleitungen sind separate Halterungen vorzusehen, die Rohr-
• Die relative Feuchte der Umgebungsluft muss unter 50 % bei +40°C leitungen dürfen zu keiner Belastung der Pumpe führen.
(+104°F) betragen. • Es werden Schläuche oder flexible Verschraubungen verwendet, um die
• Wenden Sie sich in den folgenden Fällen an die Vertriebs- und Kunden- Übertragung von Pumpenvibrationen auf Rohrleitungen zu vermeiden
dienstabteilung: und umgekehrt.
• Die relative Feuchte der Umgebungsluft liegt über den Richtwerten. • Verwenden Sie weite Bögen und vermeiden Sie Kniestücke mit hohem
• Die Raumtemperatur übersteigt einen Wert von 40 °C. Durchflusswiderstand.
• Die Einheit wird in einer Höhe über 1000 m (3000 ft) über Meeres- • Die Saugrohre sind perfekt abgedichtet und luftdicht.
spiegel betrieben. Die Motornennleistung muss heruntergestuft wer- • Bei Pumpen in einem offenen System ist der Durchmesser des Saugrohrs
den, oder es muss ein leistungsstärkerer Motor verwendet werden. für die Installationsbedingungen geeignet. Das Saugrohr darf nicht klei-
Information über die Werte, um die sich die Motornennleistung reduziert, ner sein als der Sauganschluss-Durchmesser.
finden Sie in Tabelle 8. • Wenn ein größeres Saugrohr als der Sauganschluss-Durchmesser verwen-
det werden muss, ist eine exzentrische Reduzierung installiert.
Pumpenpositionen und Abstand • Wenn die Pumpe oberhalb des Flüssigkeitsstands montiert ist, ist am En-
de der Saugleitung ein Fußventil installiert.
HINWEIS: • Das Fußventil ist vollständig in die Flüssigkeit eingetaucht, um das Ein-
Für die horizontale Montage der Pumpe ist eine besondere Anpassung er- dringen von Luft durch Saugwirbel zu verhindern, wenn sich die Flüssig-
forderlich. keit auf ihrem Mindestflüssigkeitsstand befindet und die Pumpe oberhalb
der Flüssigkeitsquelle installiert ist.
28 e-SV - Deutsch
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
• In der Ansaugleitung und der Auslassleitung (hinter dem Rückschlagven- Die Motor-Checkliste
til) sind ausreichend dimensionerte Auf-/Zu-Ventile zur Regelung der
Pumpenkapazität sowie zur Inspektion und Wartung der Pumpe instal- WARNUNG:
liert.
• In der Auslassleitung ist ein Rückschlagventil installiert, um bei abgeschal- • Lesen Sie die Betriebsanweisungen und stellen Sie sicher, dass
teter Pumpe einen Rücklauf in die Pumpe zu verhindern. eine geeignete Schutzvorrichtung vorhanden ist, falls ein an-
derer Motor als der Standardmotor verwendet wird.
• Wenn der Motor mit automatischen thermischem Überlast-
WARNUNG: schützen ausgestattet ist, beachten Sie die Gefahr, dass der
Drosseln Sie den Pumpendurchfluss durch Schließen des Auf-/ Motor nach einer Überlastung wieder unerwartet anlaufen
Zu-Ventils auf der Auslassseite nicht länger als einige wenige Se- kann. Verwenden Sie derartige Motoren nicht für die Brand-
kunden. Wenn die Pumpe für mehr als einige Sekunden mit ge- bekämpfung und Sprinklersysteme.
schlossener Auslassseite betrieben werden soll, muss ein Bypass-
Kreis installiert sein, um Überhitzen des Wasser in der Pumpe zu
verhindern.
HINWEIS:
• Verwenden Sie nur dynamisch ausgewuchtete Motoren mit einer Feder
Abbildungen zur Verdeutlichung der Rohrleitungsanforderungen entneh- halber Baugröße in der Wellenverlängerung (IEC 60034-14) und mit nor-
men Sie bitteAbbildung 12. malen Vibrationsraten (N).
• Die Angaben auf dem Typenschild müssen mit der Netzspannung und -
4.3 Anforderungen an die elektrische Versorgung frequenz übereinstimmen.
• Vor Ort geltende Vorschriften haben vor den hier angegebenen Voraus- • Verwenden Sie nur Einphasen- oder Wechselstrommotoren, deren Größe
setzungen Vorrang. und Leistung den europäischen Normen entspricht.
• Beachten Sie bei Brandbekämpfungssystemen (Hydranten und/oder Allgemein können Motoren an einer Netzspannung mit folgenden Toleran-
Sprinkler) weiterhin die vor Ort geltenden Vorschriften. zen betrieben werden:
Checkliste für den elektrischen Anschluss Frequenz, Hz Phase ~ Un V ± %
Prüfen Sie, dass die folgenden Voraussetzungen erfüllt werden: 50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
• Alle elektrischen Leitungen sind gegen hohe Temperaturen, Vibrationen 3 230/400 ± 10
und mechanische Beschädigung geschützt. 400/690 ± 10
• In den Spannungsversorgungsleitungen sind folgende Komponenten vor- 60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
zusehen:
3 220/380 ± 5
• Eine Sicherung gegen Kurzschlüsse
380/660 ± 10
• Ein hoch empfindlicher Differenzialschalter (30 mA) [FI-Schalter] als
zusätzlicher Schutz gegen elektrischen Schlag
Verwenden Sie ein den Vorschriften entsprechendes 3-adriges Kabel (2 Lei-
• Ein Trennschalter für die Netzversorgung mit einem Kontaktabstand ter + Erde) für einphasige Versionen und 4-adrige Kabel (3 Leiter + Erde)
von mindestens 3 mm für die Drehstromversion.
Die Schalttafel-Checkliste Elektrische Pumpe mit Motor:
HINWEIS: Kabeleinführung
Geeignete Kabel-Außendurchmesser in mm
Die Schalttafel muss den elektrischen Kennwerten der Pumpe entsprechen. Typ
Ungeeignete Kombinationen können dazu führen, dass Schutzfunktionen M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
für den Motor nicht mehr wirksam sind.
SM X – –
PLM X X X
Prüfen Sie, dass die folgenden Voraussetzungen erfüllt werden:
LLM X X X
• Die Schalttafel muss den Motor gegen Überlast und Kurzschluss schüt-
zen.
• Installieren Sie einen geeigneten Überlastschutz (Thermorelais oder Mo-
4.4 Montage der Pumpe
torschutzschalter).
Pumpentyp Schutz
Elektrische Standard-Pumpe, ein- • Integrierte thermische Überlast- 4.4.1 Mechanische Montage
phasige Versorgung ≤ 1,5 kW sicherung, rücksetzbar (Motor-
schutzschalter) Weitere Informationen zu Pumpensockel und Ankerbohrungen entnehmen
• Kurzschlussschutz (vom Mon- Sie bitte den Abbildung 13
teur zu stellen)15
1. Stellen Sie die Pumpe auf einem Betonfundament oder einer ent-
Andere elektrische Pumpen mit • Thermoschütz (vom Monteur zu ssprechenden Metallunterkonstruktion auf.
ein- oder dreiphasiger Versorgung16 stellen) Wenn die Übertragung von Vibrationen zu Störungen führen kann, in-
• Kurzschlussschutz (vom Mon- stallierten Sie Schwindungsdämpfer zwischen Pumpe und Fundament.
teur zu stellen) 2. Entfernen Sie die Verschlussstopfen der Anschlüsse.
• Die Schalttafel muss mit einem Schutzsystem gegen Trockenlauf ausge- 3. Richten Sie die Pumpe und die Rohrflansche auf beiden Seiten der
stattet sein, an das Druckschalter, Schwimmerschalter, Sensoren oder an- Pumpe aus.
dere geeignete Vorrichtungen angeschlossen sind. Prüfen Sie die Ausrichtung der Schrauben.
• Auf der Saugseite der Pumpe werden die folgenden Geräte empfohlen: 4. Befestigen Sie die Rohrleitungen mit den Schrauben an der Pumpe.
Bringen Sie die Rohrleitungen nicht mit Gewalt in ihre Position.
• Wann das Wasser aus einem Wassersystem gepumpt wird, verwenden
Sie einen Druckschalter. 5. Verankern Sie die Pumpe sicher mit Schrauben am Betonfundament
oder der Metallstruktur.
• Wenn das Wasser aus einem Lagertank oder Reservoir gepumpt wird,
verwenden Sie einen Schwimmerschalter oder Schwimmersensoren.
• Wenn Thermorelais verwendet werden, werden Relais empfohlen, die auf
4.4.2 Elektrischer Anschluss
Phasenfehler ansprechen. 1. Um den Anschluss zu erleichtern, kann der Motor in die optimale Po-
sition für den Anschluss gedreht werden:
a) Lösen Sie die vier Schrauben, mit dem der Motor an der Pumpe
befestigt ist.
b) Drehen Sie den Motor in die gewünschte Position. Bauen Sie die
Kupplung zwischen Motor- und Pumpenwelle nicht aus.
c) Bringen Sie die vier Schrauben wieder an und ziehen Sie sie fest.
2. Lösen Sie die Schrauben der Anschlussdosenabdeckung.
15 aM-Sicherungen (Motorstart), oder thermomagnetischer Schalter Kurve C and Icn ≥ 4,5 kA oder vergleichbare Schutzvorrichtung.
16 Thermorelais als Überlastschutz mit Betriebsklasse 10 A + aM-Sicherung (Motorstart) oder thermomagnetischer Schalter mit Betriebsklasse 10 A.
e-SV - Deutsch 29
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
3. Verbinden und befestigen Sie die Stromversorgungskabel gemäß dem 1. Schließen Sie das Auf-/Zu-Ventil hinter der Pumpe. Wählen Sie die
anwendbaren Schaltplan: zutreffenden Schritte:
Der Schaltplan ist in Abbildung 14 abgebildet. Die Anschlussbelegung 2. Modellreihen 1, 3, 5:
ist auch auf der Rückseite der Anschlussdosenabdeckung angegeben.
a) Lösen Sie den Ablassschraubenstift (2).
a) Schließen Sie den Erdungsleiter an. b) Entfernen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1) und öffnen
Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Erdungsleiter länger ist als die Phasen- Sie das Auf-/Zu-Ventil vor der Pumpe, bis Wasser aus der Öff-
leiter. nung austritt.
b) Schließen Sie die Phasenleiter an. c) Ziehen Sie den Ablassschraubenstift (2) fest.
4. Bringen Sie die Anschlussdosenabdeckung wieder an. d) Tauschen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1) aus.
3. Modellreihen 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
HINWEIS:
Ziehen Sie die Kabeleinführungen sorgfältig an, um das Kabel gegen a) Entfernen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1) und öffnen
Verrutschen sowie die Klemmenbox gegen Eindringen von Feuchtig- Sie das Auf/Zu-Ventil vor der Pumpe, bis Wasser aus der Öff-
keit zu schützen. nung austritt.
b) Schließen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1). Anstelle von
5. Wenn der Motor nicht mit einem automatischen, rücksetzbaren Ther- (1) kann ein Füllstopfen (3) verwendet werden.
moschütz ausgestattet ist, stellen Sie den Überlastschutz ein wie in der
Liste unten angegeben. Aufstellung bei einem unterhalb der Pumpe befindlichen
• Wenn der Motor unter Volllast betrieben wird, stellen Sie den Wert Flüssigkeitspegel (Saughöhe)
auf den Nennwert ein (wie auf dem Typenschild angegeben)
• Wenn der Motor unter Teillast betrieben wird, stellen Sie den Wert
auf den Betriebsstrom ein (wie mit z. B. einer Stromzange gemes- Eine Abbildung der Pumpenteile ist in Abbildung 17 gezeigt.
sen). 1. Öffnen Sie das vor der Pumpe befindliche Auf-/Zu-Ventil und schlie-
• Wenn die Pumpe über ein Stern-Dreieck-Anlaufschaltung verfügt, ßen Sie das hinter der Pumpe befindliche Auf-/Zu-Ventil. Wählen Sie
stellen Sie das Thermorelais auf 58 % des Nennstroms oder des Be- die zutreffenden Schritte:
triebsstroms ein (nur für Drehstrommotoren). 2. Modellreihen 1, 3, 5
a) Lösen Sie den Ablassschraubenstift (2).
5 Inbetriebnahme, Anfahren, b) Entfernen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1) und füllen Sie
Betrieb und Abfahren die Pumpe mithilfe eines Trichters, bis Wasser aus der Öffnung
austritt.
c) Tauschen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1) aus.
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen d) Ziehen Sie den Ablassschraubenstift (2) fest.
WARNUNG: 3. Modellreihen 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass die abgelassene Flüssigkeit keine Schä- a) Entfernen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1) und füllen Sie
den oder Verletzungen verursacht. die Pumpe mithilfe eines Trichters (4), bis Wasser aus der Öff-
• Die Schutzvorrichtungen des Motors können zu einem uner- nung austritt.
warteten Anlaufen des Motors führen. Dies kann zu schweren b) Tauschen Sie den Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen (1) aus. Anstelle
Verletzungen führen. von (1) kann ein Füllstopfen (3) verwendet werden.
• Betreiben Sie die Pumpe nie ohne den ordnungsgemäß instal-
lierten Kupplungsschutz.
5.2 Prüfung der Drehrichtung eines
VORSICHT: Drehstrommotors
• Die Außenflächen von Pumpe und MOTOR erreichen im
Betrieb Temperaturen von mehr als 40ºC (104ºF). Berühren Führen Sie for der Inbetriebnahme die folgenden Schritten aus.
Sie keine Gehäuseteile ohne geeignete Schutzvorrichtungen. 1. Bestimmen Sie die Drehrichtung anhand der Pfeile auf Adapter oder
• Halten Sie brennbare Materialien von der Pumpe fern. Motorlüfterabdeckung.
2. Starten Sie den Motor.
HINWEIS: 3. Prüfen Sie die Drehrichtung durch den Kupplungsschutz oder durch
• Betreiben Sie die Pumpe nie unter dem vorgegebenen Mindestdurchfluss, die Motorlüfterabdeckung hindurch.
trocken, oder ohne Vorfüllung. 4. Stoppen Sie den Motor.
• Betreiben Sie die Pumpe nie länger als einige Sekunden mit geschlosse-
nem EIN-AUF-Ventil auf der Auslassseite. 5. Wenn die Drehrichtung falsch ist, gehen Sie wie folgt vor:
• Betreiben Sie die Pumpe nie mit geschlossenem EIN-AUF-Ventil auf der a) Trennen Sie die Stromversorgung.
Ansaugseite. b) Vertauschen Sie an der Klemmenleiste des Motors oder an der
• Um eine Überhitzung der internen Pumpenteile zu verhindern, muss Schalttafel zwei der drei Adern der Versorgungsleitung.
während des Betriebs der Pumpe jederzeit ein Mindestwasserdurchfluss Der Schaltplan ist in Abbildung 14 abgebildet.
sichergestellt sein. Wenn dies nicht möglich ist, wird der Einsatz einer By- c) Prüfen Sie die Drehrichtung erneut.
pass- oder Umlaufleitung empfohlen. Die vorgegebenen Mindestdurchf-
lussraten finden Sie im Anhang.
• Setzen Sie die unbetriebene Pumpe nicht dem Frost aus. Lassen Sie alle 5.3 Inbetriebnahme der Pumpe
Flüssigkeit aus der Pumpe ab. Wenn Sie vorgenannten Punkt nicht beach-
ten, kann das Fördermedium gefrieren und so die Pumpe beschädigen. Stellen Sie vor dem Starten der Pumpe sicher, dass folgende Punkte erfüllt
• Die Summe des Drucks auf der Saugseite (Wassernetz, Schwerkrafttank) sind:
und des maximalen von der Pumpe erzeugten Drucks darf den maxima-
len Arbeitsdruck der Pumpe (Nenndruck PN) nicht überschreiten. • Die Pumpe ist korrekt an die Spannungsversorgung angeschlossen.
• Verwenden Sie die Pumpe nicht, wenn Kavitation auftritt. Kavitation • Die Pumpe ist wie in den Anweisungen unter Anfüllen der Pumpe vorge-
kann die internen Komponenten beschädigen. füllt.
• Wenn die Pumpe heißes Wasser fördert, muss ein Mindestdruck an der • Das Auf-/Zu-Ventil hinter der Pumpe ist geschlossen.
Saugseite sichergestellt werden, um Kavitation zu verhindern. 1. Starten Sie den Motor.
2. Öffnen Sie sukzessive das Auf-/Zu-Ventil auf der Auslassseite der
Geräuschpegel Pumpe.
Weitere Informationen zum abgestrahlten Geräuschpegel von Geräten mit Die Pumpe muss bei den erwarteten Betriebsbedingugen ruhig und
einem von Lowara gelieferten Motor siehe Tabelle 10. rund laufen. Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, siehe Fehlerbehebung.
30 e-SV - Deutsch
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
e-SV - Deutsch 31
de - Übersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung
Ursache Abhilfemaßnahme
Es befindet sich Luft in der • Entlüften Sie.
Pumpe oder in den Rohrlei-
tungen.
Die Pumpe ist nicht korrekt Stoppen Sie die Pumpen und wiederholen Sie
angefüllt. den Anfüllvorgang. Wenn das Problem wei-
terhin besteht:
• Prüfen Sie, dass die Gleitringdichtung
nicht undicht ist.
• Prüfen Sie das Ansaugrohr auf Dichtig-
keit.
• Tauschen Sie alle eventuell undichten Ven-
tile aus.
Die Drosselung an der Aus- Öffnen Sie das Ventil.
lassseite ist zu stark.
Ventile haben sich in ge- Bauen Sie die Ventile aus und reinigen Sie sie.
schlossener bzw. teilweise
geschlossener Position fest-
gesetzt.
Die Pumpe ist verstopft. Wenden Sie sich an die Vertriebs- und Kun-
dendienstabteilung.
Die Rohrleitungen sind ver- Prüfen und reinigen Sie die Rohrleitungen.
stopft.
Die Drehrichtung des Lauf- Vertauschen Sie zwei der Phasen am Klem-
rads ist falsch (Drehstrom- menbrett des Motors oder in der Schalttafel.
version).
Die Saughöhe oder der Prüfen Sie die Betriebsbedingungen der
Durchflusswiderstand im Pumpe. Gehen Sie bei Bedarf wie folgt vor:
Saugrohr ist zu hoch. • Verringern Sie die Saughöhe
• Verwenden Sie ein Ansaugrohr mit größe-
rem Durchmesser
Ursache Abhilfemaßnahme
In einer oder beiden der folgenden Kompo- Reparieren Sie die betroffe-
nenten ist eine Leckage vorhanden: ne Komponente oder tau-
• Ansaugrohr schen Sie sie aus.
• Fußventil oder Rückschlagventil
Ursache Abhilfemaßnahme
In einer oder beiden der folgenden Kom- Reparieren Sie die betroffene
ponenten ist eine Leckage vorhanden: Komponente oder tauschen Sie
• Ansaugrohr sie aus.
• Fußventil oder Rückschlagventil
32 e-SV - Deutsch
es - Traducción del manual original
NOTA:
Guarde este manual para obtener referencia en el futuro y manténgalo dis- Instrucciones
ponible en la ubicación de la unidad. Las instrucciones y advertencias proporcionadas en el manual corresponden
a la versión estándar, como se describe en el documento de venta. Las bom-
bas de versiones especiales pueden suministrarse con folletos de instruccio-
1.1.1 Usuarios sin experiencia nes complementarias. Consulte el contrato de venta para ver si hay alguna
modificación o características especiales de la versión. Para ver instrucciones,
ADVERTENCIA: situaciones o eventos no incluidos en este manual o el documento de venta,
Este producto está diseñado para ser utilizado únicamente por póngase en contacto con el centro de servicio de Lowara más próximo.
personal especializado.
1.3 Desechado del paquete y el producto
Tenga en cuenta las siguientes precauciones:
• Las personas con una capacidad limitada no deben utilizar el producto, a Respete los códigos y las normativas locales en vigor relativos al desechado
menos que sea bajo la supervisión o que se haya recibido la suficiente for- ordenado de residuos.
mación de un profesional.
• Es necesario tener cuidado con los niños para asegurarse de que no jue- 1.4 Garantía
gan con o alrededor del producto.
Para obtener más información sobre la garantía, consulte el contrato de ven-
ta.
1.2 Terminología y símbolos de seguridad
Acerca de los mensajes de seguridad:
1.5 Piezas de recambio
Es fundamental que lea, comprenda y siga los mensajes y las normativas de
seguridad antes de manipular el producto. Se publican con el fin de prevenir ADVERTENCIA:
estos riesgos: Utilice sólo piezas de repuesto originales para reemplazar los
componentes desgastados o defectuosos. El uso de piezas de re-
• Accidentes personales y problemas de salud puesto inadecuados puede producir un funcionamiento incorrec-
• Daños en el producto to, daños y lesiones, así como la anulación de la garantía.
• Funcionamiento defectuoso del producto
e-SV - Español 33
es - Traducción del manual original
CUMPLE LAS PROVISIONES RELEVANTES DE LAS SIGUIENTES Para obtener más información sobre cómo sujetar la unidad de forma segu-
DIRECTIVAS EUROPEAS ra, consulte Imagen 4.
• MAQUINARIA 2006/42/CE (EL ARCHIVO TÉCNICO ESTÁ DIS-
PONIBLE EN LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). Unidad sin motor
Y CON LOS SIGUIENTES ESTÁNDARES TÉCNICOS: Si la unidad no se entrega con motor, el separador calibrado en forma de
tenedor ya está insertado entre el adaptador y el acoplamiento de la transmi-
• EN 809 sión. El separador está insertado para mantener el impulsor sujeto en la po-
sición axial correcta. Para evitar daños durante un transporte, el eje también
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 se mantiene en su sitio con poliestireno y bandas de plástico.
AMEDEO VALENTE El perno y las tuercas usados para sujetar el motor no se incluyen. Para obte-
ner más información sobre cómo acoplar el motor, consulte Imagen 23.
(DIRECTOR ENGINEERING Y R&D)
rev.01 ADVERTENCIA:
Los bombas y motores que se adquieren por separado y se aco-
Lowara es una marca comercial de Lowara SRL Unipersonale, empresa filial plan después representan una nueva máquina sujeta a la directiva
de Xylem Inc. sobre maquinaria 2006/42/EC. La persona que realice el acopla-
miento será la responsable de todo lo relativo a la seguridad de la
unidad combinada.
2 Transporte y
almacenamiento 2.3 Pautas de almacenamiento
2.1 Examinar la entrega
Zona de almacenamiento
1. Compruebe el exterior del paquete para ver si hay signos evidentes de El producto debe almacenarse en un lugar cubierto, seco, fresco y sin sucie-
daños. dad ni vibraciones.
2. Notifique a nuestro distribuidor en un plazo máximo de ocho días tras
la fecha de entrega si el producto presenta signos de daños. NOTA:
• Proteja el producto de la humedad, las fuentes de calor y los daños mecá-
Desempaquetado de la unidad nicos.
1. Elija el paso aplicable: • No coloque elementos pesados sobre el producto empaquetado.
• Si la unidad está empaquetada en una caja de cartón, extraiga las
grapas y abra la caja.
• Si la unidad está empaquetada en una jaula de madera, abra la cu- Temperatura ambiente
bierta teniendo cuidado con los clavos y las bandas. El producto debe almacenarse a una temperatura ambiente entre -5 °C y
2. Extraiga los tornillos de fijación o las bandas de la base de madera. +40 °C (23 °F y 104 °F).
Examinar la unidad
1. Saque todo el material de empaquetado.
3 Descripción del producto
Deseche todos los materiales de empaquetado según las normativas lo-
cales. 3.1 Diseño de la bomba
2. Examine el producto para determinar si faltan piezas o si alguna pieza Esto es unidad es una bomba vertical, multigradual, sin cebado automático y
está dañada. que puede acoplarse a motores eléctricos estándar. La bomba puede usarse
3. Afloje los tornillos, tuercas y cintas del producto en caso necesario. para bombear:
Para su seguridad personal, tenga cuidado cuando manipule clavos y
correas. • Agua fría
4. Póngase en contacto con el departamento de ventas y servicio si algo • Agua tibia
no funciona correctamente. Las piezas metálicas de la bomba que entran en contacto con el agua están
hechas de lo siguiente:
Serie Material
2.2 Directrices para el transporte
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Acero inoxidable
Precauciones 33, 46, 66, 92, Acero inoxidable e hierro fundido
125 Hay una versión especial disponible en la que toda las
ADVERTENCIA: piezas están hechas de acero inoxidable.
• Respete las normativas de prevención de accidentes en vigor.
• Riesgo de aplastamiento. La unidad y los componentes pue- Las bombas SV 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 y 22 están disponibles en diferentes versiones
den ser pesados. Utilice los métodos de elevación adecuados y según la posición de los orificios de impulsión y aspiración y la forma de la
utilice calzado con punta de acero en todo momento. brida de conexión.
El producto se puede suministrar como una unidad de bomba (bomba y
Compruebe el peso bruto indicado en el paquete para seleccionar el equipo motor eléctrico) o solamente como una bomba.
de elevación adecuado.
NOTA:
Posición y ajuste Si ha adquirido una bomba sin motor, compruebe que el motor es el adecua-
Puede transportar la unidad horizontal o verticalmente. Compruebe que esté do para conectarlo a la bomba.
bien sujeta durante el transporte y que no puede rodar ni caerse.
34 e-SV - Español
es - Traducción del manual original
Uso no previsto
ADVERTENCIA:
El uso indebido de la bomba puede originar situaciones peligro- Estándar EPDM -30°C (-22°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
sas y provocar daños personales y materiales.
Especial FPM (FKM) -10°C (14°F) 90°C (194°F) 120 °C18
(248°F)
Un uso no adecuado del producto produce la pérdida de la garantía. Especial PTFE 0 °C (32 °F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
Ejemplos de uso incorrecto:
Para saber los requisitos especiales, póngase en contacto con el departamen-
• Líquidos no compatibles con los materiales de construcción de la bomba to de ventas y servicio.
• Líquidos peligrosos (como el líquidos tóxicos, explosivos, inflamables o
corrosivos) Número máximo de arranques por hora
• Líquidos potables que no sean agua (por ejemplo, vino o leche) En esta tabla se muestra el número de arranques permitido por hora para
Ejemplos de instalación incorrecta: motores suministrados por Lowara:
• Ubicaciones peligrosas (como atmósferas corrosivas o explosivas). kW 0,25 - 4,00 - 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
• Ubicaciones en las que la temperatura del aire es muy alta o la ventilación 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
es escasa.
Arran- 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
• Instalaciones en el exterior en las que no hay protección contra la lluvia o ques por
temperaturas de congelación. hora
PELIGRO:
No utilice la bomba para trabajar con líquidos inflamables o ex- NOTA:
plosivos. Si utiliza un motor distinto al estándar suministrado con la bomba eléctrica,
verifique las instrucciones relevantes para averiguar la cantidad de arranques
permitidos por hora.
NOTA:
• No utilice la bomba para trabajar con líquidos con sustancias abrasivas,
sólidas o fibrosas. 3.3 Placa de características
• No utilice la bomba para tasas de flujo no incluidas dentro de las especifi-
cadas en la placa de características. La placa de características es una etiqueta metálica situada en el adaptador.
En ella aparecen las especificaciones del producto. Para obtener más infor-
mación, consulte Imagen 1.
Aplicaciones especiales
Póngase en contacto con el departamento de ventas y servicios en los si- La placa de características proporciona información relativa al material de la
guientes casos: junta y el sello mecánico. Para obtener más información acerca como inter-
pretar el código en la placa de características, consulte Imagen 2.
• Si el valor de viscosidad y/o densidad del líquido bombeado excede el va-
lor del agua, como agua con glicol; ya que puede ser necesario un motor Denominación del producto
más potente.
• Si el líquido bombeado está tratado químicamente (por ejemplo, suaviza- Consulte la Imagen 3 para ver una explicación sobre el código de identifica-
do, desionizado, desmineralizado, etc.). ción de la bomba y un ejemplo.
• Si la bomba se va a instalar horizontalmente, debe solicitarse una versión
especial y soportes de montaje. Etiqueta WRAS: requisitos y notas de instalación (solamente para el
mercado del Reino Unido)
• Cualquier situación que sea diferente a las descritas y que esté relacionada
con la naturaleza del líquido. Una etiqueta WRAS en la bomba significa que es un producto con aproba-
ción del Esquema consultor de normativas del agua (Water Regulations Ad-
visory Scheme). Este producto debe usarse con agua fría adecuada para el
3.2 Límites de aplicación consumo humano. para obtener más información, consulte IRNs R001 y
R420 en el directorio de materiales y accesorios para agua WRAS (en inglés)
Presión máxima de trabajo (www.wras.co.uk).
En este diagrama se muestra la presión de trabajo máxima según el modelo IMQ o TUV o IRAM u otras marcas (solo para las bombas eléctricas)
de bomba y la temperatura del líquido bombeado. A menos que se especifique lo contrario, para los productos con una marca
de aprobación eléctrica, la aprobación se refiere exclusivamente a la bomba
eléctrica.
4 Instalación
Precauciones
ADVERTENCIA:
• Respete las normativas de prevención de accidentes en vigor.
• Utilice equipo y protección adecuados.
• Consulte siempre las normativas, la legislación y los códigos
La siguiente fórmula es válida para motores provistos de cojinete en el extre- locales y/o nacionales en vigor en lo que respecta a la elec-
mo del motor bloqueado axialmente (como los motores estándar Lowara pa- ción del lugar de instalación y las conexiones eléctricas y de
ra e-SV), consulte la Imagen 6. Para ver otras situacions, póngase en contacto agua.
con el departamento de ventas y servicio.
17 EN 60335-2-41 es la norma acerca de la seguridad de las bombas relacionada con la electricidad para el hogar y aplicaciones similares
18 Máximo 100ºC para agua
e-SV - Español 35
es - Traducción del manual original
36 e-SV - Español
es - Traducción del manual original
Para ver ilustraciones en las que se muestran los requisitos de las tuberías, En general, los motores pueden funcionar con las siguientes tolerancias de
consulte Imagen 12. tensión:
Frecuencia en Hz Fase ~ UN [V] ± %
4.3 Requisitos de electricidad
50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
• Las normativas locales en vigor regulan estos requisitos específicos. 3 230/400 ± 10
• En caso de sistemas de extinción de incendios (bocas de incendio o rocia-
dores), compruebe la normativa local en vigor. 400/690 ± 10
60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
Lista de comprobación de conexiones eléctricas 3 220/380 ± 5
Compruebe que se cumplen los siguientes requisitos: 380/660 ± 10
• Los cables eléctricos están protegidos contra altas temperaturas, vibracio-
nes y colisiones. Utilice cables conforme a las normas con 3 conductores (2+tierra) para las
• La fuente de alimentación dispone lo siguiente: versiones monofase y con 4 conductores (3+tierra) para las versiones trifási-
• Un dispositivo de protección contra cortocircuitos cas.
• Un conmutador diferencial de alta sensibilidad (30 mA) [dispositivo de Bomba eléctrica con motor:
corriente residual RCD] para ofrecer una protección adicional contra
las descargas eléctricas Collarín de cables
• Un interruptor aislante de la red eléctrica con un espacio de contacto Gama de diámetros de cables exteriores en mm
Tipo
de al menos 3 mm
M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
Lista de comprobación del panel de control eléctrico SM X – –
PLM X X X
NOTA: LLM X X X
Los valores nominales del panel de control deben coincidir con los del mo-
tor eléctrico. Unas combinaciones incorrectas podrían no garantizar la pro-
tección del motor. 4.4 Instalar la bomba
19 fusibles aM (arranque de motor) o conmutador magnetotérmico con curva C e Icn ≥ 4,5 kA u otro dispositivo equivalente.
20 Relé térmico de sobrecarga con clase de funcionamiento de 10A + fusibles aM (arranque de motor) o conmutador magnetotérmico de protección del motor con clase de
funcionamiento de 10A.
e-SV - Español 37
es - Traducción del manual original
5. Si el motor no está equipado con una protección térmica de restableci- Instalaciones con nivel de líquido por encima de la bomba (desnivel)
miento automático, ajuste la protección contra sobrecargas conforme a
las siguientes indicaciones. Para ver una ilustración en la que se muestran las piezas de la bomba, con-
• Si se usa el motor con carga completa, ajuste el valor al de la co- sulte Imagen 17.
rriente nominal de la bomba eléctrica (placa de características)
• Si se usa el motor con una carga parcial, ajuste el valor a la corriente 1. Abra la válvula de encendido/apagado situada aguas arriba desde la
de funcionamiento (por ejemplo medida con unas pinzas de co- bomba y cierre la válvula de encendido/apagado aguas abajo. Seleccio-
rriente). ne los pasos aplicables:
• Si la bomba tiene un sistema de arranque en estrella-triángulo, ajus- 2. Series1, 3, 5:
te el relé térmico en 58 % de la corriente nominal o la corriente de
funcionamiento (sólo para motores trifásicos). a) Afloje el pasador del tapón de vaciado (2).
b) Quite el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1) y use un embudo para
llenar la bomba hasta que el agua salga por el orificio.
5 Puesta en marcha, arranque, c) Coloque el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1).
funcionamiento y apagado d) Ajuste el pasador del tapón de vaciado (2).
3. Series 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
Precauciones a) Quite el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1) y use un embudo (4)
para llenar la bomba hasta que el agua salga por el orificio.
ADVERTENCIA: b) Coloque el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1). Se puede usar el ta-
• Asegúrese de que el líquido evacuado no produzca daños o le- pón de llenado (3) en lugar del (1).
siones.
• Los protectores del motor pueden hacer que el motor vuelva 5.2 Compruebe la dirección de la rotación (motor
a arrancar de manera inesperada. Esto puede provocar lesio-
nes graves. trifásico)
• No haga funcionar nunca la bomba sin un protector del aco-
plamiento correctamente instalado. Siga este procedimiento antes de la puesta en marcha.
1. Localice las fechas en el adaptador o en la cubierta del ventilador del
ATENCIÓN: motor para determinar la dirección de rotación correcta.
• Durante el funcionamiento, las superficies externas de la 2. Encienda el motor.
bomba y el motor pueden superar los 40ºC (104ºF). No toque
ninguna parte del cuerpo sin la adecuada protección. 3. Compruebe rápidamente la dirección de la rotación a través del pro-
• No coloque materiales combustibles cerca de la bomba. tector del acoplamiento con la cubierta del ventilador del motor.
4. Detenga el motor.
NOTA: 5. Si la dirección no es correcta, realice lo siguiente:
• No ponga en marcha nunca una bomba por debajo del caudal nominal, a) Desconecte el suministro eléctrico.
en seco o sin la inmersión adecuada. b) En el tablero de terminales del motor o el panel de control eléctri-
• No utilice la bomba con la válvula de descarga cerrada durante más de co, intercambie la posición de dos de los tres hilos del cable de ali-
unos pocos segundos. mentación.
• No ponga en marcha nunca la bomba con la válvula de encendido/apaga- Para ver los esquemas de cables, consulte la Imagen 14.
do de aspiración cerrada. c) Vuelva a comprobar la dirección de la rotación.
• Para evitar el sobrecalentamiento de los componentes internos de la
bomba, asegúrese de que siempre se garantice un caudal de agua mínimo
mientras la bomba esté en funcionamiento. Si esto no puede lograrse, se 5.3 Ponga en marcha la bomba
recomienda una tubería de derivación o de recirculación. Consulte los va-
lores mínimos del caudal nominal proporcionados en el Apéndice. Antes de poner en marcha la bomba, asegúrese de que:
• No exponga una bomba inactiva a condiciones de congelación. Drene el
líquido que está dentro de la bomba. De lo contrario, puede ocurrir que el • La bomba está correctamente conectada a la fuente de alimentación.
líquido se congele y que la bomba se dañe. • La bomba se ceba correctamente, de acuerdo con las instrucciones que
• La suma de la presión en el extremo de explicación (tuberías de agua, tan- aparecen en Cebar la bomba.
que de gravedad) y la presión máxima proporcionada por la bomba no • La válvula de encendido/apagado situada en posición descendente desde
deben exceder de la presión de trabajo máxima permitida (presión nomi- la bomba está cerrada.
nal PN) para la bomba.
1. Encienda el motor.
• No utilice la bomba si se produce cavitación. La cavitación puede dañar
los componentes internos. 2. Abra gradualmente la válvula de encendido/apagado situada en el late-
• Si bombea agua caliente, debe garantizar una presión mínima en el lado ral de descarga de la bomba.
de la aspiración para evitar la cavitación. En las condiciones de funcionamiento previstas, la bomba debe fun-
cionar de un modo suave y silencioso. De no ser así, consulte Resolución
de problemas.
Nivel de ruidos
Para ver información acerca de los niveles de ruido producidos por las uni-
dades equipadas con motores Lowara, consulte la Tabla 10. 6 Mantenimiento
5.1 Cebar la bomba Precauciones
Para ver información sobre la colocación del tapón, consulte la Imagen 15. ADVERTENCIA:
Desconecte y bloquee la energía eléctrica antes de instalar la
bomba o realizar su mantenimiento.
Instalaciones con nivel de líquido por encima de la bomba (cabezal de
aspiración)
ADVERTENCIA:
Para ver una ilustración en la que se muestran las piezas de la bomba, con-
sulte Imagen 16. • El mantenimiento y el servicio deben ser realizados sólo por
personal calificado y especializado.
1. Cierre la válvula de encendido/apagado situada en posición descen- • Respete las normativas de prevención de accidentes en vigor.
dente desde la bomba. Seleccione los pasos aplicables: • Utilice equipo y protección adecuados.
2. Series 1, 3, 5: • Asegúrese de que el líquido evacuado no produzca daños o le-
a) Afloje el pasador del tapón de vaciado (2). siones.
b) Quite el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1) y abra la válvula de en-
cendido/apagado aguas arriba hasta que el agua salga por el orifi-
cio. 6.1 Mantenimiento
c) Ajuste el pasador del tapón de vaciado (2).
d) Coloque el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1). La bomba no requiere ninguna rutina de mantenimiento programada. Si el
3. Series 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: usuario desea programar fechas límite de mantenimiento regulares, depen-
a) Quite el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1) y abra la válvula de en- den del tipo de fluido bombeado y de las condiciones de funcionamiento de
cendido/apagado aguas arriba hasta que el agua salga por el orifi- la bomba.
cio.
b) Cierre el tapón de ventilación y llenado (1). Se puede usar el tapón Póngase en contacto con el departamento de servicio y ventas para cualquier
de llenado (3) en lugar del (1). solicitud de información relativa a la rutina de mantenimiento o el servicio.
38 e-SV - Español
es - Traducción del manual original
Puede ser necesario un mantenimiento extraordinario para limpiar el extre- Causa Solución
mo del líquido y/o reemplazar piezas desgastadas.
El protector térmico incorpora- Espere hasta que la bomba se haya en-
do en la bomba (de haberlo) se friado. El protector térmico se restable-
6.2 Valores del par de apriete ha activado. cerá automáticamente.
Para obtener más información sobre los valores del par de apriete, consulte El relé térmico o el protector del Restablezca la protección térmica.
Tabla 18, Tabla 19 o Tabla 20. motor del panel de control eléc-
trico se ha activado.
Para obtener información sobre los valores de empuje y par de apriete de las El dispositivo de protección Compruebe:
bridas por las tuberías, consulte la Imagen 21. contra funcionamiento en seco • El nivel de agua en el tanque o la pre-
se ha activado. sión de la red eléctrica
6.3 Colocación del motor eléctrico • El dispositivo de protección y los ca-
bles que lo conectan
La bomba se suministra con un separador calibrado en forma de tenedor,
diseñado para facilitar las operaciones de acoplamiento del motor y sustitu- Los fusibles de la bomba o los Reemplace los fusibles.
ción. circuitos auxiliares se han fundi-
do.
• Consulte instrucciones sobre cómo reemplazar el motor en Imagen 23.
Si no hay disponible ningún separador calibrado en forma de horquilla, 7.3 La bomba eléctrica arranca, pero se
use un separador de 5 ± 0,1 mm (0,2 ± 0,004 pulg.). activa el protector térmico o se funden los
fusibles inmediatamente después
6.4 Colocación del sello mecánico
Causa Solución
Serie Instrucciones El cable de la fuente de alimenta- Compruebe el cable y reemplácelo si es
ción está dañado. necesario.
1, 3, 5 Póngase en contacto con el departamento de ventas y ser-
vicio. La protección térmica o los fusi- Compruebe que los componentes y
bles no son los adecuados para la reemplácelos si es necesario.
10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Póngase en contacto con el departamento de ventas y ser- corriente del motor.
kW vicio.
Se produce un cortocircuito en el Compruebe que los componentes y
10, 15, 22: > 4 Vea las instrucciones de la Imagen 24. Utilice alcohol para la motor eléctrico. reemplácelos si es necesario.
kW limpieza y la lubricación.
El motor se sobrecarga. Compruebe las condiciones de funcio-
33, 46, 66, 92, Vea las instrucciones de la Imagen 24. Utilice alcohol para la namiento de la bomba y restablezca la
125 limpieza y la lubricación. protección.
e-SV - Español 39
es - Traducción del manual original
Causa Solución
Hay una fuga en uno o los dos siguientes compo- Repare o cambie el
nentes: componente defectuo-
• La tubería de aspiración so.
• La válvula de pie o la válvula de retención
Causa Solución
Hay una fuga en uno o los dos siguientes Repare o cambie el compo-
componentes: nente defectuoso.
• La tubería de aspiración
• La válvula de pie o la válvula de retención
Causa Solución
Cavitación de la reduzca el flujo necesario Fernando parcialmente la vál-
bomba vula de encendido/apagado situada en posición descen-
dente desde la bomba. Si el problema persiste, com-
pruebe las condiciones de funcionamiento de la bomba
40 e-SV - Español
pt - Tradução do manual original
AVISO:
Guarde este manual para referência futura, e mantenha-o pronto a consultar Instruções
no local da unidade. As instruções e as advertências que são fornecidas neste manual referem-se
à versão padrão, conforme descrito no documento de vendas. Podem ser
fornecidas versões especiais de bombas com panfletos de instruções suple-
1.1.1 Utilizadores sem experiência mentares. Consulte o contrato de vendas para obter todas as modificações
ou características especiais da versão. Para obter instruções, situações ou
ATENÇÃO: eventos que não estejam considerados neste manual ou documento de ven-
Este produto destina-se a ser colocado em funcionamento ape- das, contacte um Centro de assistência da Lowara.
nas por pessoal qualificado.
1.3 Eliminação da embalagem e produto
Esteja atento às seguintes precauções: Observe as regulamentações locais e os códigos em vigor sobre a eliminação
• As pessoas com capacidades reduzidas não deve trabalhar com o produ- de lixo seleccionado.
to, excepto quando supervisionadas ou depois de receberem formação
adequada por um profissional.
• As crianças devem ser supervisionadas para que não brinquem no, ou em 1.4 Garantia
redor do, produto. Para obter informações sobre garantia, consulte o contrato de vendas.
Os perigos eléctricos são indicados pelo seguinte símbolo específico: • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
ATENÇÃO: • EN 60034–30
e-SV - Português 41
pt - Tradução do manual original
CUMPRE TODAS AS CLÁUSULAS RELEVANTES DAS DIRECTIVAS Para obter mais informações sobre como colocar com segurança correias na
EUROPEIAS SEGUINTES: unidade, consulte Figura 4.
• MAQUINARIA 2006/42/EC (O FICHEIRO TÉCNICO ESTÁ DIS-
PONÍVEL NA LOWARA SRL UNIPESSOAL). Unidade sem motor
E COM AS SEGUINTES NORMAS TÉCNICAS: Se a unidade não for fornecida com um motor, o calço em forma de garfo
calibrado já está inserido entre o adaptador e o acoplamento da transmissão.
• EN 809 O calço é inserido para manter a pilha do impulsor na posição axial correcta.
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 Para evitar danos durante o transporte, o eixo é também mantido no lugar
com correias de plástico ou de polistireno expandido.
AMEDEO VALENTE
Os parafusos e as porcas utilizados para fixar o motor não estão incluídos.
(DIRECTOR ENGINEERING E R&D) Para obter mais informações sobre como acoplar o motor, consulte Figura
23.
rev.01
ATENÇÃO:
Lowara é uma marca comercial da Lowara srl Unipessoal, subsidiária da Xy-
lem Inc. Uma bomba e motor que sejam adquiridos separadamente e, de-
pois, juntos resulta numa nova máquina ao abrigo da directiva de
maquinaria 2006/42/EC. A pessoa que faz o acoplamento é res-
2 Transporte e ponsável por todos os aspectos de segurança da unidade combi-
nada.
armazenamento
2.1 Verificar a entrega 2.3 Directrizes de armazenamento
1. Verifique o exterior da embalagem para ver se existem sinais evidentes
de danos. Local de armazenamento
2. Notifique o nosso distribuidor no prazo de oito dias a partir da data de O produto tem de ser armazenado num local coberto e seco, ao abrigo do
entrega, caso o produto apresente sinais visíveis de danos. calor, de sujidade e de vibrações.
Consulte o peso bruto que é indicado na embalagem para seleccionar o equi- O produto pode ser fornecido como uma unidade de bomba (bomba e mo-
pamento adequado de içamento. tor eléctrico) ou apenas como uma bomba.
42 e-SV - Português
pt - Tradução do manual original
Uso indevido
AVISO:
• Não utilize esta bomba para lidar com líquidos que contenham substânci- 3.3 Placa de dados
as abrasivas, sólidas ou fibrosas. A placa de dados é uma etiqueta de metal que está localizada no adaptador.
• Não utilize a bomba para valores de fluxo que ultrapassam os especifica- A placa de dados lista especificações-chave do produto. Para obter mais in-
dos na placa de características. formações, consulte Figura 1.
A placa de dados fornece informações sobre o material do vedante e do ve-
Aplicações especiais dante mecânico. Para obter informações sobre como interpretar o código na
Contacte o Departamento de vendas e assistência: placa de dados, consulte Figura 2.
• Se o valor da densidade e/ou viscosidade do líquido bombeado exceder o Denominação do produto
valor da água, como água com glicol. Pode ser necessário um motor mais
potente. Consulte Figura 3 para obter uma explicação do código de identificação da
• Se o líquido bombeado for tratado quimicamente (por exemplo, amacia- bomba e um exemplo.
do, desionizado, desmineralizado, etc.).
• Se a bomba for instalada horizontalmente, deve ser solicitada uma versão Etiqueta WRAS - Notas e requisitos de instalação (apenas para o
especial e suportes de montagem. mercado do RU)
• Quaisquer situações que sejam diferentes das descritas e relacionadas com Uma etiqueta WRAS na bomba significa que é um produto aprovado pelo
a natureza do líquido. Water Regulations Advisory Scheme. Este produto pode ser utilizado com
água fria potável para consumo humano. Para obter mais informações, con-
sulte IRNs R001 e R420 no Directório de Materiais e Acessórios para Água
3.2 Limites de aplicação da do WRAS (www.wras.co.uk).
Pressão máxima de trabalho IMQ ou TUV ou IRAM ou outras marcas (apenas para bomba
Este gráfico mostra a pressão máxima de trabalho, que está dependente do eléctrica)
Excepto quando especificado o contrário, e para produtos com uma marca
modelo da bomba e da temperatura do líquido bombeado. de aprovação de segurança eléctrica, esta refere-se exclusivamente à bomba
eléctrica.
4 Instalação
Precauções
ATENÇÃO:
• Observe as regulamentações de prevenção de acidentes em vi-
gor.
• Utilize equipamento e protecção adequados.
• Consulte sempre os regulamentos, legislação e códigos em vi-
A fórmula seguinte é válida para motores que são fornecidos com os rola- gor locais e/ou nacionais no que diz respeito à selecção do lo-
mentos da extremidade do accionamento axialmete bloqueados (como os cal de instalação e às ligações de água e electricidade.
motores padrão Lowara para e-SV). Consulte Figura 6. Para outras situações,
contacte o Departamento de vendas e assistência.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
21 EN 60335-2-41 é a norma sobre a segurança eléctrica de bombas para instalações domésticas e semelhantes
22 Máximo de 100ºC para água
e-SV - Português 43
pt - Tradução do manual original
ATENÇÃO:
4.2 Requisitos das instalações • Utilize os canos adequados à pressão máxima de funciona-
mento da bomba. Se não o fizer, o sistema pode entrar em
4.2.1 Localização da bomba ruptura, com riscos de ferimentos.
• Certifique-se de que todas as ligações são efectuadas por téc-
PERIGO: nicos de instalação qualificados e cumprem os regulamentos
Não utilize esta bomba em ambientes que possam conter gases em vigor.
ou pós inflamáveis/explosivos ou quimicamente agressivos.
AVISO:
Directrizes Observe todos os regulamentos emitidos pelas autoridades municipais se a
Observe as directrizes seguintes relativamente à localização do produto: bomba estiver ligada aos serviços municipalizados de águas. Se as autorida-
des o exigirem, instale um dispositivo adequado de prevenção de refluxo no
• Certifique-se de que não existem obstruções que impeçam o fluxo nor- lado de sucção.
mal de ar refrigerado que é fornecido pela ventoinha do motor.
• Certifique-se de que a área da instalação está protegida contra qualquer
fuga de líquido ou inundação. Lista de verificação da tubagem de sucção e de descarga
• Se for possível, coloque a bomba ligeiramente acima do nível do solo. Verifique se os requisitos seguintes são cumpridos:
• A temperatura ambiente deve estar entre 0°C (+32°F) e +40°C (+104°F). • Toda a tubagem é suportada de forma independente. A tubagem não de-
• A humidade relativa do ar ambiente deve ser menor que 50% a +40°C ve constituir um peso na unidade.
(+104°F). • São utilizados tubos ou junções flexíveis, para evitar a transmissão de vi-
• Contacte o Departamento de vendas e assistência se: brações da bomba aos tubos e vice-versa.
• As condições de humidade relativa do ar excederem as directrizes. • Utilize dobras amplas, evitando usar cotovelos que causem uma resistên-
• A temperatura da sala exceder +40°C (+104°F). cia excessiva ao fluxo.
• A unidade estiver colocada a mais de 1000 m (3000 pés) acima do nível • A tubagem de sucção está perfeitamente selada e hermética.
do mar. O desempenho do motor pode necessitar de ser reduzido, ou • Se a bomba for utilizada num circuito aberto, então o diâmetro do tubo
substituído por um motor mais potente. de sucção é adequado às condições da instalação. O tubo de sucção não
Para obter informações sobre qual o valor a utilizar para reduzir o motor, deve ser menor que o diâmetro da porta de sucção.
consulte Tabela 8. • Se a tubagem de sucção necessitar de ser maior que o lado de sucção da
bomba, estão é instalado um redutor de tubagem excêntrico.
Posições da bomba e folga • Se a bomba for colocada acima do nível do líquido, é instalada uma válvu-
la de pé na extremidade da tubagem de sucção.
AVISO: • A válvula de pé está totalmente submersa no líquido de modo que o ar
A montagem horizontal da bomba exige uma adaptação especial. não possa entrar através do turbilhão de sucção, quando o líquido está no
nível mínimo e a bomba está instalada acima da fonte do líquido.
• São instaladas válvulas de ligar-desligar de tamanho adequado na tubagem
Disponibilize a luz e espaço adequados em redor da bomba. Certifique-se de de sucção e na tubagem de abastecimento (a jusante da válvula de verifi-
que ela é de fácil acesso para as operações de instalação e manutenção. cação) para regulação da capacidade da bomba, inspecção da bomba e
manutenção.
Instalação acima da fonte do líquido (içamento de sucção) • Para evitar o retorno do fluxo para a bomba quando ela é desligada, é ins-
A altura teórica máxima de sucção de qualquer bomba é 10,33 m. Na práti- talada uma válvula de verificação na tubagem de abastecimento.
ca, as seguintes situações afectam a capacidade de sucção da bomba:
• Temperatura do líquido ATENÇÃO:
• Elevação acima do nível do mar (num sistema aberto) Não utilize a válvula de ligar-desligar no lado da descarga na po-
sição fechada, para regular o fluxo da bomba durante mais de al-
• Pressão do sistema (num sistema fechado) guns segundos. Se for necessário que a bomba funcione com o
• Resistência das tubagens lado da descarga fechado durante mais de algumns segundos, de-
• Resistência intrínseca do próprio fluxo da bomba ve ser instalado um circuito de bypass para evitar o sobreaqueci-
• Diferença de altura mento da água dentro da bomba.
A equação seguinte é utilizada para calcular a altura máxima acima do nível
do líquido no qual a bomba pode ser instalada: Para obter ilustrações que mostrem os requisitos de tubagem, consulte Figu-
ra 12.
(pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5
44 e-SV - Português
pt - Tradução do manual original
23 fusíveis aM (arranque do motor), ou interruptor magneto-térmico com curva C e Icn ≥ 4,5 kA ou outro dispositivo equivalente.
24 Relé térmico de sobrecarga com fusíveis aM de classe de funcionamento 10A + (arranque do motor), ou interruptor magneto-térmico de protecção do motor com classe
de funcionamento 10A.
e-SV - Português 45
pt - Tradução do manual original
5. Se o motor não estiver equipado com protecção térmica de reposição Instalações com nível de líquido abaixo da bomba (cabeça de sucção)
automática, ajuste a protecção de sobrecarga de acordo com a lista
abaixo. Para obter uma ilustração que mostre as peças da bomba, consulte Figura 17.
• Se o motor for utilizado com carga completa, defina o valor para o
da corrente nominal da bomba eléctrica (placa de dados) 1. Abra a válvula de ligar-desligar localizada a montante a bomba, e feche
• Se o motor for utilizado com carga parcial, defina o valor para a a válvula de ligar-desligar a jusante. Seleccione os passos aplicáveis:
corrente de funcionamento (por exemplo, medido com uma pinça 2. Série 1, 3, 5:
de corrente). a) Desaperte o pino do tampão de drenagem (2).
• Se a bomba tiver um sistema de arranque estrela-delta, ajuste o relé
térmico para 58% da corrente nominal ou corrente de funciona- b) Retire o tampão de enchimento e ventilação (1) e utilize um funil
mento (apenas para motores trifásicos). para encher a bomba até a água fluir pelo orifício.
c) Recoloque o tampão de enchimento e ventilação (1).
d) Aperte o pino do tampão de drenagem (2).
5 Colocação em 3. Série 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
funcionamento, Iniciar, a) Retire o tampão de enchimento (1) e ventilação (4) e utilize um fu-
Operação e Encerramento nil para encher a bomba até a água fluir pelo orifício.
b) Recoloque o tampão de enchimento e ventilação (1). O tampão de
enchimento (3) pode ser utilizado em vez de (1).
Precauções
46 e-SV - Português
pt - Tradução do manual original
e-SV - Português 47
pt - Tradução do manual original
Causa Solução
Existe ar no interior da bom- • Sangre o ar.
ba ou tubagem.
A bomba não está correcta- Pare a bomba e repita o procedimento de
mente escorvada. escorvamento. Se o problema continuar:
• Verifique se o vedante mecânico são
apresenta fugas.
• Verifique se o tubo de sucção está perfei-
tamente vedado.
• Substitua todas as válvulas que apresen-
tem fugas.
A pressão no lado de forneci- Abra a válvula.
mento é demasiado elevada.
As válvulas estão bloqueadas Desmonte e limpe as válvulas.
na posição fechada ou par-
cialmente fechada.
A bomba está obstruída. Contacte o Departamento de vendas e assis-
tência.
A tubagem está obstruída. Verifique e limpe a tubagem.
A direcção da rotação do im- Altere a posição de duas das fases na placa
pulsor é incorrecta (versão de terminais do motor, ou no painel de con-
trifásica). trolo eléctrico.
A altura de sucção é demasia- Verifique as condições de funcionamento da
do alta, ou a resistência do bomba. Se necessário, proceda do seguinte
fluxo nos tubos de sucção é modo:
demasiado grande. • Reduza o içamento de sucção
• Aumente o diâmetro do tubo de sucção
Causa Solução
Existe uma fuga num dos, ou em ambos os, se- Repare ou substitua o
guintes componentes: componente com fa-
• O tubo de sucção lha.
• A válvula de pé ou a válvula de verificação
Causa Solução
Existe uma fuga num dos, ou em ambos os, Repare ou substitua o com-
seguintes componentes: ponente com falha.
• O tubo de sucção
• A válvula de pé ou a válvula de verificação
Causa Solução
Cavitação da bom- Reduza a taxa de fluxo requerida, fechando parcial-
ba mente a válvula de ligar-desligar a jusante da bomba.
Se o problema persistir, verifique as condições de fun-
cionamento da bomba (por exemplo, diferença da altu-
ra, resistência do fluxo, temperatura do líquido,
Os rolamentos do Contacte o Departamento de vendas e assistência.
motor estão gastos.
Existem objectos Contacte o Departamento de vendas e assistência.
estranhos no interi-
or da bomba.
Para qualquer outra situação, consulte o Departamento de vendas e assistên-
cia.
48 e-SV - Português
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
1 Inleiding en veiligheid Dit zijn voorbeelden van andere categorieën die kunnen voorkomen. Ze val-
len onder de gewone gevaarniveaus en er kunnen aanvullende symbolen bij
worden gebruikt:
1.1 Inleiding • Gevaar voor beknelling
• Gevaar voor snijden
Doel van deze handleiding
• Lasergevaar
Het doel van deze handleiding is het bieden van alle benodigde informatie
voor: Heet oppervlak gevaar
• Installatie
• Bediening Gevaren voor een heet oppervlak worden aangegeven door een speciaal
symbool die de gebruikelijke symbolen voor de mate van gevaar vervangt:
• Onderhoud
VOORZICHTIG:
VOORZICHTIG:
Lees deze handleiding zorgvuldig voordat u het product gaat in-
stalleren en gebruiken. Door verkeerd gebruik van het product
kan persoonlijk letsel en materiële schade optreden, en kan de Beschrijving van symbolen voor installateur en gebruiker
garantie vervallen. Specifieke informatie voor personen die belast zijn met de
installatie van het product in het systeem (loodgieterswerk
en-of elektrische aspecten) of belast zijn met onderhoud.
Opmerking:
Bewaar deze handleiding voor toekomstige referentie gereed voor gebruik Specifieke informatie voor gebruikers van het product.
op de locatie van de unit.
e-SV - Nederlands 49
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
Voor meer informatie over het goed vastzetten van de motor, zie Afbeelding
4.
POMP (ZIE LABEL OP DE EERSTE PAGINA)
VOLDOET AAN DE RELEVANTE BEPALINGEN VAN DE VOL- Apparaat zonder motor
GENDE EUROPESE RICHTLIJNEN: Als het apparaat zonder motor geleverd wordt, is de gekalibreerde en vor-
• MACHINERICHTLIJN: 2006/42/EU (HET TECHNISHE BE- kvormige vulling al tussen de adapter en de transmissiekoppeling geplaatst.
STAND IS VERKRIJGBAAR VIA LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). De vulling wordt geplaatst om de waaier in de juiste axiale positie te houden.
EN VAN DE VOLGENDE, TECHNISCEH STANDAARDEN: Ter voorkoming van beschadigingen tijdens transport moet de as ook op
zijn plaats worden gehouden met polystyreenschuim en plastic riemen.
• EN 809
De moeren en bouten om de motor vast te zetten zijn niet inbegrepen. Voor
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 meer informatie over het koppelen van de motor, zie Afbeelding 23.
AMEDEO VALENTE
WAARSCHUWING:
(DIRECTEUR VAN ENGINEERING EN R&D) Een pomp en een motor die afzonderlijk zijn aangeschaft en pas
dan gekoppeld worden, resulteert in een nieuw apparaat volgens
rev.01 de richtlijn voor apparaten 2006/42/EG. De persoon die voor
het aankoppelen zorgt, is verantwoordelijk voor alle veiligheids-
Lowara is rrn handelsmerk van Lowara srl Unipersonale, dochteronderne- aspecten van het combinatieapparaat.
ming van Xylem Inc.
Controleer het brutogewicht op de verpakking om ervoor te zorgen dat u Het product kan geleverd worden als totaalapparaat (pomp met elektramo-
voor de juiste hijsapparatuur zorgt. tor) of alleen als pomp.
50 e-SV - Nederlands
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
Beoogd gebruik standard motoren voor e-SV), zie Afbeelding 6. Neem voor andere situaties
De pomp is geschikt voor: contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Service.
WAARSCHUWING:
Onjuist gebruik van de pomp kan leiden tot gevaarlijke situaties
en kan persoonlijk letsel en schade aan de eigendommen veroor-
zaken.
Standaard EPDM -30°C 90°C 120°C
Onjuist gebruik van het product leidt tot garantieverlies. Speciaal FPM (FKM) -10° C 90°C 120°C26
(248°F)
Voorbeelden van onjuist gebruik: Speciaal PTFE 0°C 90°C 120°C (248°F)
• Vloeistoffen die niet geschikt zijn voor het constructiemateriaal van de
pomp Neem voor bijzonderheden contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Service.
• Gevaarlijke vloeistoffen (zoals giftige, explosieve, ontvlambare, of bijten-
de vloeistoffen) Maximum aantal starts per uur
• Drinkbare vloeistoffen anders dan water (bijvoorbeeld wijn of melk) Deze tabel toont het aantal starts dat per uur is toegestaan voor motoren die
Voorbeelden van onjuiste installatie: door Lowara worden geleverd:
• Gevaarlijke locaties (zoals explosieve, of corrosieve atmosferen). kW 0,25-3,0 4,00-7,5 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
• Locatie waar de luchttemperatuur erg hoog is of die slecht geventileerd 0 0 15,0 22,0 37,0
wordt. Starts 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
• Buiteninstallatie waar geen bescherming is tegen regen of temperaturen per uur
onder nul.
GEVAAR: Opmerking:
Deze pomp niet gebruiken voor ontvlambare en/of explosieve Als u een andere motor gebruikt dan de standaardmotor die bij de elektri-
vloeistoffen. sche pomp is geleverd, moet u in de bijbehorende instructies opzoeken wat
het maximum aantal toegestane inschakelingen per uur is.
Opmerking:
• Gebruik deze pomp niet voor de verwerking van vloeistoffen met schu- 3.3 Gegevensplaatje
rende, vaste, of vezelachtige substanties.
Het gegevensplaatje is een metalen plaatje op de adapter. Het gegevenspla-
• Gebruik de pomp niet voor doorvoersnelheden die de snelheden op het tje bevat belangrijke productinformatie. Voor meer informatie, zie Afbeelding
typeplaatje te boven gaan. 1.
Speciale toepassingen Het gegevensplaatje verstrekt informatie over het materiaal van de pakking
en de mechanische afdichting. Voor informatie over het interpreteren van de
Neem in de volgende situaties contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en servi- code op het gegevensplaatje, zie Afbeelding 2.
ces:
• als de waarde van de dichtheid en/of viscositeit van de gepompte vloei- Productaanduiding
stof de waarde van water overschrijdt, zoals water met glycol; omdat hier- Zie Afbeelding 3 voor een uitleg van de identificatiecode voor de pomp en
voor een sterkere motor nodig is. voor een voorbeeld.
• als de gepompte vloeistof chemisch behandeld is (bijvoorbeeld zachter
gemaakt, gedeïoniseerd, gedemineraliseerd enz.). WRAS-label - Installatieeisen en opmerkingen (alleen voor GB)
• voor het horizontaal plaatsen van de pomp dient een speciale uitvoering Een WRAS-label op de pomp betekent dat het een `Water Regulations Advi-
van de bevestigingsbeugels te worden aangevraagd. sory Scheme` goedgekeurd product is. Dit product is geschikt voor gebruik
• elke situatie die afwijkt van de situaties die beschreven zijn en betrekking met koud, drinkbaar water voor consumptie door mensen. Voor meer infor-
hebben op de aard van de vloeistof. matie, raadpleeg de IRNs R001 en R420 in de WRAS Water Fittings and
Materials Directory (www.wras.co.uk).
3.2 Toepassingsbeperkingen
IMQ, TUV of IRAM of andere aanduidingen (alleen voor elektrische
Maximale werkdruk pomp)
Tenzij anders vermeld, voor producten met een aanduiding van elektrisch-
Dit stroomschema toont de maximale werkdruk afhankelijk van het model gerelateerde veiligheidsgoedkeuring, verwijst de goedkeuring uitsluitend naar
pomp en de temperatuur van de gepompte vloeistof. de elektrische pomp.
4 Installatie
Voorzorgsmaatregelen
WAARSCHUWING:
• Neem de geldende regels ter voorkoming van ongelukken in
acht.
• Gebruik geschikte apparatuur en beschermingsmiddelen.
• Raadpleeg altijd de lokale en/of nationale wet/ en regelge-
ving, en geldende regels met betrekking tot het selecteren van
De volgende formule is van toepassing op motoren waarvan de lagers aan de locatie voor de installatie, en de aansluitingen voor water
het uiteinde van de aandrijving axiaal geblokkeerd zijn (such as the Lowara en stroom.
e-SV - Nederlands 51
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
52 e-SV - Nederlands
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
WAARSCHUWING: Opmerking:
Gebruik de aan-uitklep aan de afvoerkant niet in gesloten stand • Gebruik alleen dynamisch uitgebalanceerde motoren met een halve spie
om de pomp langer dan een aantal seconden af te knijpen. Als in de asverlenging (IEC 60034-14) en met een normale trilsnelheid (N).
de pomp langer dan een aantal seconden met gesloten afvoer- • Het voltage en de frequentie van het net moeten overeenkomen met de
kant moet draaien, moet een omleiding worden aangebracht om specificaties op het gegevensplaatje.
te voorkomen dat het water in de pomp oververhit raakt.
• Gebruik alleen één- of driefasige motoren waarvan de grootte en het ver-
mogen voldoen aan de Europese normen.
Voor illustraties van de eisen aan de leidingen, zie Afbeelding 12.
In het algemeen kunnen motoren werken binnen de volgende toelarantie-
4.3 Eisen aan de elektriciteit waarden van stroomspanning:
• De vigerende lokale voorschriften gelden boven deze vermelde eisen. Frequentie Hz Fase ~ UN [V] ± %
• Controleer in het geval van brandblussystemen (vochtinbrengers en-of 50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
sprinklers), de plaatselijk geldende verordeningen. 3 230/400 ± 10
Controlelijst elektrische aansluitingen 400/690 ± 10
Controleer of aan de volgende vereisten is voldaan: 60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
3 220/380 ± 5
• De elektrische leidingen zijn beschermd tegen hoge temperaturen, vibra-
ties, en stoten van buitenaf. 380/660 ± 10
• De stroomkabel is voorzien van:
• een apparaat ter voorkoming van kortsluiting Gebruik een kabel conform de regelgeving met 3 draden (2+aarde) voor
• Een hoog-sensitieve differentiaalschakelaar (30 mA) [residual current versies met enkele fase en met 4 draden (3+aarde) voor versies met drie fa-
device RCD] (reststroomapparaat) voor extra beveiliging tegen elektri- sen.
sche schok Elektrische pomp met motor:
• een stroomisolatorschakelaar met een contactruimte van minstens 3
mm Draadsok
Reikwijdte buitendiameter kabel in mm
Type
Controlelijst voor het elektrische bedieningspaneel
M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
Opmerking: SM X – –
Het bedieningspaneel moet overeenkomen met de waarden van de elektri- PLM X X X
sche pomp. Onjuiste combinaties kunnen ertoe leiden dat de bescherming LLM X X X
van de motor niet meer gegarandeerd is.
4.4 De pomp installeren
Controleer of aan de volgende vereisten is voldaan:
• Het bedieningspaneel moet de motor beschermen tegen overbelasting en
kortsluiting. 4.4.1 Mechanische installatie
• Installeer de juiste bescherming tegen overbelasting (thermisch relais of
motorbeschermer).
Voor meer informatie over de pompfundering en de ankergaten, zie Afbeel-
Type pomp Bescherming
Enkelfase standaard elektrische ding 13.
• Ingebouwde, automatische reset
pomp ≤ 1,5 kW thermisch-amperometrische be- 1. Plaats de pomp op een ondergrond van beton of vergelijkbare con-
veiliging (motorbeschermer) structie van metaal.
• Bescherming tegen kortsluiting Als de overdracht van trillingen storend is, dient u trillingsdempende
(moet geleverd worden door de steunen tussen de pomp en de fundering te plaatsen.
installateur)27 2. Verwijder de pluggen die de openingen versperren.
Driefasen elektrische pomp en an- • Thermische beveiliging (moet 3. Richt de pomp en de flenzen van de leidingen aan beide kanten van de
dere, enkelfase pompen28 geleverd worden door de instal- pomp.
lateur) Controleer de afstemming van de bouten.
• Bescherming tegen kortsluiting 4. Maak de leidingen met bouten vast aan de pomp.
(moet geleverd worden door de Forceer de leidingen niet tijdens het vastmaken.
installateur) 5. Veranker de pomp stevig met de bouten aan de betonnen of metalen
ondergrond vast.
• Het bedieningspaneel moet uitgerust zijn met een beveiliging tegen
drooglopen waarop een drukschakelaar, drijfschakelaar, sondes, of andere
geschikte apparatuur is aangesloten. 4.4.2 Elektrische installatie
• De volgende apparaten worden aanbevolen voor gebruik aan de aanzuig- 1. Om de koppeling makkelijker te maken, kan de motor worden ge-
kant van de pomp: draaid voor de meest geschikte positie voor de koppeling:
• Gebruik een drukschakelaar wanneer het water vanaf een watersys- a) Verwijder de vier bouten waarmee de motor op de pomp beves-
teem gepompt wordt. tigd is.
• Gebruik een drijfschakelaar of sondes wanneer het water uit een op-
slagtank of reservoir gepompt wordt. b) Draai de motor in de gewenste positie. Verwijder niet de koppe-
ling tussen de motoras en e pompas.
• Wanneer gebruik gemaakt wordt van thermische relais, wordt aanbevolen
om relais te gebruiken die gevoelig zijn voor faseuitval. c) Vervang de vier bouten en draai ze goed aan.
2. Verwijder de schroeven van de klep van de contactdoos.
De controlelijst voor de motor 3. Sluit de stroomkabels aan en bevestig ze conform het toepasselijke be-
dradingschema.
Voor bedradingschema´s, zie Afbeelding 14. De schema´s staan ook
WAARSCHUWING: achter op de klep van de contactdoos.
• Lees de bedieningsinstructies om zeker te weten of een bevei-
ligingsapparaat aanwezig is bij gebruik van een andere motor a) Sluit de aarde aan.
dan de standaard motor. Zorg ervoor dat de aardedraad langer is dan de fasedraden.
• Als de motor is voorzien van automatische thermische be- b) Sluit de fasedraden aan.
schermers, moet u rekening houden met het risico van onver-
wachte inschakelingen als gevolg van overbelasting. Gebruik
dergelijke motoren voor brandbestrijdingstoepassingen en
sprinklersystemen.
27 zekeringen aM (starten v/d motor), of magneet-thermische schakelaar met curve C en Icn ≥ 4,5 kA of ander, vergelijkbaar apparaat.
28 Overbelasting thermisch relais met werkingklasse 10A + zekeringen aM (starten v/d motor) of motorbescherming magneet-thermische schakelaar met werkingklasse 10A.
e-SV - Nederlands 53
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
4. Vervang de beschermkap van de aansluitdoos. 3. Series 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Verwijder de vul- en ventilatieplug (1) en open de aan/uitklep
Opmerking: stroomopwaarts totdat het water uit het gat stroomt.
Draai de kabelwartels voorzichtig aan om te voorkomen dat de kabel b) Sluit de vul- en ventilatieplug (1). Vulplug (3) kan worden gebruikt
kan verschuiven en er vocht in de contactdoos terecht kan komen. in plaats van (1).
5. Als de motor niet is uitgerust met een automatische resetfunctie van
de thermische beveiliging, stel dan de beveiliging tegen overbelasting Installaties met vloeistofniveau onder de pomp (aanzuighoogte)
af volgens onderstaan de lijst.
• Als de motor wordt gebruikt op volledige belasting, zet dan de Voor een illustratie van de pomponderdelen, zie Afbeelding 17.
waarde op de nominale stroom van de elektrische pomp (typepla-
tje) 1. Open de aan-uitklep stroomopwaarts ten opzichte van de pomp en
sluit de aan-uitklep stroomafwaarts. Selecteer de toepasselijke stappen:
• Als de motor wordt gebruikt op gedeeltelijke belasting, zet dan de
waarde op de arbeidsstroom (bijvoorbeeld gemeten met een 2. Series 1, 3, 5:
stroomtang). a) Losdraaien van de afvoerplugpen (2).
• Als de pomp over een star-delta startsysteem beschikt, zet de ther- b) Verwijder de vul- en ventilatieplug (1) en gebruik een trechter om
mische relais dan op 58% van de nominale stroom of de arbeids- de pomp te vullen totdat water uit het gat stroomt.
stroom (alleen voor driefasenmotoren). c) Vervang de vul- en ventilatieplug (1).
d) Vastdraaien van de afvoerplugpen (2).
5 In bedrijf stellen, opstarten, 3. Series 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
bedienen en uitschakelen a) Verwijder de vul- en ventilatieplug (1) en gebruik een trechter (4)
om de pomp te vullen totdat water uit het gat stroomt.
b) Vervang de vul- en ventilatieplug (1). Vulplug (3) kan worden ge-
Voorzorgsmaatregelen bruikt in plaats van (1).
WAARSCHUWING:
• Zorg ervoor dat de afgevoerde vloeistof geen schade of letsel
5.2 Controleer de draairichting (driefasenmotor)
veroorzaakt.
• De motorbeschermers kunnen de motor onverwacht opnieuw Volg deze procedure voor het opstarten.
starten. Dit kan ernstig letsel tot gevolg hebben. 1. Zoek de pijlen op de adapter of de motorventilator om de juiste draai-
• Stel de pomp NOOIT in werking wanneer de koppelingsbe- richting te bepalen.
scherming niet correct is gemonteerd. 2. Start de motor.
3. Controleer snel de draairichting door de koppelingsbeveiliging of door
VOORZICHTIG: de bescherming van de motorventilator.
• Het buitenoppervlak van de pomp en de motor kunnen tij- 4. Stop de motor.
dens werking warmer worden dan 40ºC (104ºF). Raak dit niet 5. Doe het volgende als de draairichting onjuist is:
aan zonder beschermende kleding.
a) Ontkoppel de stroomtoevoer.
• Plaats geen brandbaar materiaal in de buurt van de pomp.
b) Verwissel in het contactbord van de motor of het elektrische be-
sturingspaneel de posities van twee van de drie draden van de aan-
Opmerking: voerkabel.
• Gebruik de pomp nooit wanneer de stroomsnelheid lager is dan het mini- Voor de bedradingschema´s, zie Afbeelding 14.
male nominale niveau, wanneer deze droog is of zonder vulling vooraf. c) Controleer nogmaals de draairichting.
• Bedien de pomp met de aanleverklep ON-OFF gesloten nooit langer dan
een paar seconden. 5.3 De pomp starten
• Bedien de pomp nooit met de aanzuigklep ON-OFF gesloten.
• U voorkomt dat de interne onderdelen van de pomp oververhit raken Zorg voor het starten van de pomp dat:
door te zorgen dat er altijd een minimale waterstroming gegarandeerd is
terwijl de pomp in bedrijf is. Als dit niet mogelijk is, wordt het gebruik • de pomp op de juiste manier op de stroomvoorziening is aangesloten.
van een bypass- of recirculatieleiding aanbevolen. Raadpleeg de minimale • de pomp op de juiste manier is aangezogen conform de instructie in de
nominale doorvoersnelheid in de bijlage. De pomp aanzuigen.
• Stel een stilstaande pomp niet bloot aan vriesomstandigheden. Voer alle • De aan-uitklep stroomafwaarts ten opzichte van de pomp is gesloten.
vloeistof af die zich in de pomp bevindt. Wanneer u dat niet doet, kan de
vloeistof bevriezen en de pomp beschadigen. 1. Start de motor.
• De som van de druk aan de aanvoerkant (waterleiding, zwaartekracht- 2. Open geleidelijk de aan-uitklep aan de afvoerzijde van de pomp.
tank) en de maximale druk die geleverd wordt door de pomp mogen de Onder de verwachte werkomstandigheden moet de pomp soepel en
maximaal toegestane werkdruk voor de pomp niet overschrijden (nomi- stil functioneren. Zo niet, raadpleeg dan Storingen verhelpen.
nale druk PN).
• Gebruik de pomp niet als er cavitatie optreedt. Cavitatie kan leiden tot
schade aan de interne onderdelen. 6 Onderhoud
• Als u warm water pompt, moet u zorgen voor een minimale druk aan de
aanvoerkant om cavitatie te voorkomen. Voorzorgsmaatregelen
WAARSCHUWING:
Geluidsniveau Ontkoppel de netspanning en grendel deze af voordat u de
Voor informatie over het geluidsniveau dat wordt afgegeven door appara- pomp installeert of onderhoudt.
tuur die uitgerust is met een motor van Lowara, zie Tabel 10.
54 e-SV - Nederlands
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
Neem contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Service voor aanvragen van of Oorzaak Oplossing
informatie over routineonderhoud of service.
De in de pomp ingebouwde Wacht totdat de pomp is afgekoeld. De
Er kan bijzonder onderhoud nodig zijn om de vloeistof te reinigen en/of thermische beveiliging is geacti- thermische beveiliging zal automatisch
verslten onderdelen te vervangen. veerd. worden gereset.
De thermische relais of motor- Reset de thermische beveiliging.
6.2 Aanhaalmomenten beschermer in het elektrische be-
dieningspaneel is geactiveerd.
Voor informatie over aanhaalmomentenwaarden, zie Tabel 18, Tabel 19, of Het beveiligingsmechanisme te- Controleer het:
Tabel 20. gen drooglopen is geactiveerd. • waterniveau in de tank, of de span-
Voor informatie over de geldende druk en draaimomenten op de felsranden ningsdruk
door de leidingen, zie Afbeelding 21. • beveiligingsapparaat en de aangesloten
kabels
6.3 Vervang de elektramotor De zekeringen van de pomp of Vervang de zekeringen.
hulpcircuits zijn doorgebrand.
De pomp is voorzien van een gekalibreerde, vorkvormige vulling om het
koppelen van de motor en vervangingswerkzaamheden te vergemakkelijken. 7.3 De elektrische pomp start, maar de
• Zie de instructies voor het vervangen van de motor in Afbeelding 23.
thermische beveiliging wordt geactiveerd
Als de gekalibreerde, vorkvormige vulling niet voorhanden is, dient u of de zekeringen branden meteen daarna
een 5-vulling van ± 0,1 mm te gebruiken. door
Oorzaak Oplossing
6.4 Vervang de mechanische afdichting
De stroomkabel is beschadigd. Controleer en vervang zo nodig de
stroomkabel.
Serie Instructie
De thermische beveiliging of ze- Controleer en vervang zo nodig de on-
1, 3, 5 Neem contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Services. keringen zijn niet geschikt voor derdelen.
10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Neem contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Services. de elektriciteit van de pomp.
kW De elektramotor maakt kortslui- Controleer en vervang zo nodig de on-
10, 15, 22: > 4 Zie de instructies in Afbeelding 24. Gebruik alcohol om te ting. derdelen.
kW reinigen en te smeren. De motor raakt overbelast. Controleer de bedrijfsomstandigheden
33, 46, 66, 92, Zie de instructies in Afbeelding 24. Gebruik alcohol om te van de pomp en reset de beveiliging.
125 reinigen en te smeren.
7.4 De elektrische pomp start, maar de
7 Storingen verhelpen thermische beveiliging wordt geactiveerd
of de zekeringen branden korte tijd daarna
7.1 Problemen oplossen voor gebruikers door
De hoofdschakelaar staan aan, maar de elektrische pomp start niet. Oorzaak Oplossing
Het elektrische besturingspaneel be- Bescherm het elektrische besturings-
Oorzaak Oplossing vindt zich in een overmatig warm paneel tegen de warmtebron en tegen
gedeelte of wordt blootgesteld aan direct zonlicht.
De in de pomp ingebouwde ther- Wacht totdat de pomp is afgekoeld. direct zonlicht.
mische beveiliging is geactiveerd.
De thermische beveiliging zal automa-
tisch worden gereset. Het voltage van de stroomvoorzie- Controleer de bedrijfsomstandighe-
ning valt niet binnen de limieten van den van de motor.
Het beveiligingsmechanisme tegen Controleer het waterniveau in de tank, de motor.
drooglopen is geactiveerd. of de netspanning.
Er ontbreekt een stroomfase. Controleer de
De elektrische pomp start, maar de thermische beveiliging wordt geactiveerd • stroomvoorziening
op verschillende momenten daarna. • elektrische aansluiting
Oorzaak Oplossing
Er bevinden zich vreemde deeltjes Neem contact op met de afdeling Ver- 7.5 De elektrische pomp start, maar de
(vaste bestanddelen of vezelachtige koop en Services. thermische beveiliging wordt op
substanties) in de pump waardoor
de waaier vastzit. verschillende momenten daarna
De pomp is overbelast omdat er Controleer de feitelijke stroomeisen op geactiveerd
vloeistof gepompt is die te dik en basis van de eigenschappen van de ge-
te taai is. pompte vloeistof en neem daarna con- Oorzaak Oplossing
tact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Er bevinden zich vreemde deel- Neem contact op met de afdeling Ver-
Service. tjes (vaste bestanddelen of vezel- koop en Services.
achtige substanties) in de pump
De pomp loopt maar levert te weinig of geen water. waardoor de waaier vastzit.
Oorzaak Oplossing De leversnelheid van de pomp is Sluit de aan-uitklep aan de afvoerzijde
hoger dan de limieten die op hetvan de pomp deels totdat de leversnel-
De pomp is verstopt. Neem contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Servi- gegevensplaatje vermeld stan. heid gelijk of minder is dan de limieten
ces. die op het gegevensplaatje vermeld staan.
De instructies voor het oplossen van problemen in onderstaande tabellen De pomp is overbelast omdat er Controleer de feitelijke stroomvereisten
zijn uitsluitend voor installateurs. vloeistof gepompt is die te dik op basis van de eigenschappen van de ge-
en te taai is. pompte vloeistof en vervang de motor
overeenkomstig deze eigenschappen.
7.2 De hoofdschakelaar staat aan, maar de De motorlagers zijn versleten. Neem contact op met de afdeling Ver-
elektrapomp start niet koop en Services.
e-SV - Nederlands 55
nl - Vertaling van de oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
Oorzaak Oplossing
Er is lucht in de pomp of • Verwijder de lucht.
de leiding aanwezig.
De pomp is niet goed aan- Stop de pomp en herhaal de aanzuigprocedu-
gezogen. re. Als het probleem aanhoudt:
• controleer of de mechanische afdichting
niet lekt.
• controleer of de aanzuigleiding stevig vast-
zit.
• Vervang alle kleppen die lekken.
de vernauwing aan de af- Open de klep.
voerkant is te groot.
Kleppen zijn gesloten of Demonteer en reinig de kleppen.
deels gesloten.
De pomp is verstopt. Neem contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en
Services.
De leiding is verstopt. Controleer en reinig de leiding.
De draairichting van de Verander de positie van twee van de fasen op
waaier is verkeerd (driefa- de contactdoos van motor of in het elektrische
sen uitvoering). bedieningspaneel.
De aanzuiglift is te hoog of Controleer de bedrijfsomstandigheden van de
de doorvoerweerstand in pomp. Doe zo nodig het volgende:
de aanvoerleidingen is te • Verminder de aanzuighoogte
groot. • Vergroot de diameter van de aanzuigleiding
Oorzaak Oplossing
Er is een lekkage in een of beide van de volgende Repareer of vervang het
onderdelen: defecte onderdeel.
• De aanzuigleiding
• De voetklep of de controleklep
Oorzaak Oplossing
Er is een lekkage in een of beide van de vol- Repareer of vervang het de-
gende onderdelen: fecte onderdeel.
• De aanzuigleiding
• De voetklep of de controleklep
Oorzaak Oplossing
Pompcavitatie Verminder de benodigde doorvoersnelheid door de
aan-uitklep aan de afvoerzijde van de pomp deels te
sluiten. Controleer de werkomstandigheden van de
pomp als het probleem aanhoudt (bijv. hoogtever-
schil, doorvoerweerstand, vloeistoftemperatuur).
De motorlagers zijn Neem contact op met de afdeling Verkoop en Servi-
versleten. ces.
56 e-SV - Nederlands
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
Farer pga. varm overflade indikeres med et specifikt symbol, der erstatter de
1.1 Indledning typiske fareniveausymboler:
NOTICE:
Gem denne manual til fremtidig brug, og opbevar den på sammen med en- Instruktioner
heden. Instruktionerne og advarslerne, der gives i denne håndbog, vedrører stan-
dardversionen, som er beskrevet i salgsdokumentet. Specialpumper kan leve-
res med supplerede instruktionsark. Se salgskontrakten for ændringer eller
1.1.1 Uerfarne brugere karakteristika for specialversioner. Kontakt det nærmeste Lowara-service-
center for instruktioner, situationer eller hændelser, der ikke er taget højde
ADVARSEL: for i denne håndbog eller i salgsdokumentet.
Dette produkt er beregnet til kun at blive betjent af kvalificeret
personale. 1.3 Bortskaffelse af emballage og produkt
Overhold de gældende lokale forskrifter og kodekser vedrørende sorteret af-
Vær opmærksom på følgende forholdsregler: faldsbortskaffelse.
• Personer med begrænsede kapaciteter må ikke betjene produktet, med-
mindre de er under overvågning eller er instrueret af erfarent personale. 1.4 Garanti
• Børn skal være under overvågning for at sikre, at de ikke leger på eller
rundt om produktet. Se salgskontrakten for information om garanti.
• Personskader og sundhedsproblemer
• Beskadigelse af produktet FORSIGTIG:
• Produktfejl Specificér altid den nøjagtige produkttype og varenummer, når
du forespørger om teknisk information eller reservedele hos
salgs- og serviceafdelingen.
Fareniveauer
Fareniveau Indikation
Se Figur 25 Figur 26 eller Figur 27 for mere information om produktets reser-
En farlig situation, som medfører vedele.
FARE: dødsfald eller alvorlig personskade,
hvis den ikke undgås.
1.6 EC-OVERENSSTEMMELSESERKLÆRING
En farlig situation, som kan medføre
(OVERSÆTTELSE)
ADVARSEL: dødsfald eller alvorlig personskade, LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, MED HOVEDSÆDE I VIA VITTO-
hvis den ikke undgås RIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE VI - ITA-
LIA, ERKLÆRER HERVED, AT FØLGENDE PRODUKT:
En farlig situation, som kan medføre ELEKTRISK PUMPEENHED (SE ETIKETTEN PÅ FØRSTE SIDE)
FORSIGTIG: dødsfald eller mindre eller moderat
personskade, hvis den ikke undgås OPFYLDER DE RELEVANTE BESTEMMELSER I DE FØLGENDE
EUROPÆISKE DIREKTIVER:
• En potentiel situation, som kan • MASKINDIREKTIVET: 2006/42/EF (DEN TEKNISKE FIL KAN
NOTICE: medføre uønskede forhold, hvis FÅS HOS LOWARA SEL UNIPERSONALE).
den ikke undgås • ELEKTROMAGNETISK KOMPATIBILITET 2004/108/EF
• En praksis, der ikke er relateret til • ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, FORORDNING (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~,
personskade 50 Hz, PN≥ 0,75 kW), MÆRKET IF IE2 eller IE3
OG DE FØLGENDE TEKNISKE STANDARDER
Farekategorier
Farekategorier kan enten falde ind under fareniveauer eller lade bestemte • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
symboler erstatte symbolerne for det normale fareniveau. • EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
• EN 60034–30
Elektriske farer indikeres af følgende bestemte symbol:
Disse er eksempler på andre kategorier, som kan opstå. De falder ind under
almindelige fareniveauer og kan bruge supplerende symboler:
• Knusningsfare.
• Skærefare
• Fare for lyneffekt
e-SV - Dansk 57
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
OPFYLDER DE RELEVANTE BESTEMMELSER I DE FØLGENDE isat for at holde propellen i den korrekte aksiale position. For at undgå be-
EUROPÆISKE DIREKTIVER: skadigelse under transport holdes akslen også på plads med forlængede po-
lystyren- og plastikstropper.
• MASKINERI: 2006/42/EF (DEN TEKNISKE FIL KAN FÅS HOS
LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). Bolten og noterne, der bruges til at spænde motoren, er ikke inkluderet. Se
OG PÅ FØLGENDE TEKNISKE STANDARDER: Figur 23 for yderligere information om, hvordan motoren skal kobles.
• EN 809 ADVARSEL:
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 En pumpe og en motor købes separat og sammenkobles derefter
i en ny maskine i henhold til maskindirektivet 2006/42/EC. Per-
AMEDEO VALENTE sonen, der foretager koblingen, er ansvarlig for alle sikkerhedsa-
(CHEF FOR TEKNISK AFDELING OG F&U) spekter i den kombinerede enhed.
rev.01
2.3 Retningslinjer for opbevaring
Lowara er et varemærke, der tilhører Lowara srl Unipersonale, datterselskab
af Xylem Inc.
Opbevaringsplacering
2 Transport og opbevaring Produktet skal opbevares på et afdækket og tørt sted uden varme, snavs og
vibrationer.
Placering og fastgørelse
Mekanisk akseltætning
Enheden kan transporteres horisontalt eller vertikalt. Sørg for, at enheden er
sikkert fastgjort under transport og ikke kan rulle eller vælte. Serie Grundlæggende karakteristika
1, 3, 5 Nominel diameter 12 mm (0,47 tommer), uafbalanceret, højre-
ADVARSEL: håndsrotering, K-version (EN 12756)
Brug ikke øjebolte, der er skruet på motoren, til håndtering af
hele den elektriske pumpeenhed. 10, 15, 22 Nominel diameter 16 mm (0,63 tommer), uafbalanceret, højre-
håndsrotering, K-version (EN 12756)
Afbalanceret med motorkraft ≥ 5 kW
• Brug stropper, der omgiver motoren, hvis motorkraften er mellem 0,25
kW og 4,0 kW. 33, 46, 66, Nominel diameter 22 mm (0,86 tommer), afbalanceret, højre-
• Rebene eller stropperne, der er forbundet til de to flanger (øjebolte, hvis 92, 125 håndsrotation, K-version (EN 12756)
de er leveret), der er placeret nær koblingszonen mellem motoren og
pumpen, hvis motorkraften er mellem 5,5 kW og 55,0 kW. Beregnet brug
• Øjebolte, der er skruet på motoren, kan udelukkende bruges til at anven-
de den individuelle motor eller, i tilfælde af en ikke afbalanceret distributi- Pumpen er egnet til:
on af vægte, til delvist at løfte enheden vertikalt, startende fra en horison- • Civile og industrielle vanddistributionssystemer
tal fejlplacering.
• For kun at flytte pumpeenheden skal du bruge stropper, der er fast for- • Vanding (for eksempel landbrugs- og sportsfaciliteter)
bundet til motorens adapter. • Vandbehandling
Se Figur 4 for yderligere information om, hvordan enheden bruges sikkert. • Kedeltilførsel
• Vaskeanlæg
Enhed uden motor • Afkøling (for eksempel air conditioning og nedkøling)
Hvis enheden ikke leveres med en motor, er den kalibrerede, gaffelformede • Brandbekæmpelsesudstyr
kile allerede indsat mellem adapteren og transmissionskoblingen. Kilen er
58 e-SV - Dansk
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
4 Installation
Forsigtighedshensyn
ADVARSEL:
• Sørg for at overholde alle gældende bestemmelser for at for-
hindre ulykker.
• Anvend passende udstyr samt beskyttelse.
Den følgende formular gælder for motorer, der leveres med drevendelejet, • Der henvises altid til lokal og/eller national lovgivning, be-
der er aksialt låst (som for eksempel Lowara standardmotorer for e-SV), se stemmelser og gældende normer i forbindelse med valg af in-
Figur 6. Kontakt salgs- og serviceafdelingen for andre situationer. stallationssted samt vand- og strømtilslutninger.
P1maks. + Pmaks≤ PN
ADVARSEL:
P1maks Maksimalt åbningstryk • Sørg for, at alle tilslutninger foretages af en kvalificeret instal-
Pmaks. Maksimalt tryk, genereret af pumpen lationstekniker og i overensstemmelse med gældende bestem-
melser.
PN Maksimalt driftstryk • Før påbegyndelse af arbejde skal du sikre, at enheden og kon-
trolpanelet er isoleret fra strømforsyningen og ikke kan tilfø-
res strøm. Dette gælder også for styrekredsen.
e-SV - Dansk 59
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
60 e-SV - Dansk
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
NOTICE:
Spænd kabelpakningerne omhyggeligt for at sikre beskyttelse mod ka-
NOTICE: belglidning og fugt, der kommer ind i terminalboksen.
• Anvend kun dynamisk balancerede motorer med en lås af halv størrelse i
akselforlængeren (IEC 60034-14) og med normal vibrationshastighed 5. Hvis motoren ikke er udstyret med termisk beskyttelse mod automa-
(N). tisk nulstilling, skal overbelastningsbeskyttelsen justeres i overensstem-
• Netspænding og frekvens skal stemme overens med oplysningerne på melse med listen ovenfor.
pumpens dataskilt. • Hvis motoren bruges med fuld belastning, skal værdien indstilles til
• Anvend kun enkeltfasede eller trefasede motorer, hvis størrelse og effekt den elektriske pumpes (dataplade) nominelle strømværdi
følger europæiske standarder. • Hvis motoren bruges med delvis belastning, skal værdien indstilles
til driftsstrøm (måles for eksempel med en strømknibtang).
Generelt kan motorer drives under følgende spændingstolerancer: • Hvis pumpen har et start-delta-startsystem, skal det termiske relæ
justeres til 58 % af den nominelle strøm eller driftsstrøm (kun for
Frekvens Hz Fase ~ UN [V] ± % trefasede motorer).
50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
3 230/400 ± 10 5 Idriftsættelse, opstart, drift
60 1
400/690 ± 10
220 – 230 ± 6
og nedlukning
3 220/380 ± 5 Forsigtighedshensyn
380/660 ± 10
ADVARSEL:
Brug kabel, der passer med regler med 3 ledere (2+jord/forbindelse) til en- • Kontrollér, at den drænede væske ikke forårsager skade eller
keltfasede versioner og med 4 ledere (3+jord/forbindelse) til trefasede versi- kvæstelser.
oner. • Motorbeskyttelse kan få motoren til at genstarte uventet. Det-
te kan resultere i alvorlig personskade.
Elektrisk pumpe med monitor:
• Kør ALDRIG pumpen uden installeret koblingsbeskyttelse.
Kabelpakning
Udvendigt kabeldiameterområde i mm FORSIGTIG:
Type
M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25 • Pumpens og motorens udvendige overflader kan overskride
40ºC (104ºF) under drift. Berør ikke nogen del af legemet
SM X – – uden beskyttelsesgear.
PLM X X X • Undlad at anbringe brandbart materiale i nærheden af pum-
pen.
31 sikringer aM (motorstart) eller magnet-termisk afbryder med kurve C og Icn ≥ 4,5 kA eller en anden tilsvarende enhed.
32 Termisk overbelastningsrelæ med driftsklasse 10A + sikringer aM (motorstart) eller motorbeskyttelse magnet-termisk afbryder med driftsklasse 10A.
e-SV - Dansk 61
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
62 e-SV - Dansk
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
e-SV - Dansk 63
da - Oversættelse af den originale brugsanvisning
Årsag Afhjælpning
Der er lækage i én eller begge af de følgende Reparér eller udskift fejl-
komponenter: komponenten.
• Indsugningsrøret
• Fodventilen eller kontrolventilen
Årsag Afhjælpning
Pumpekavitation Reducér den nødvendige gennemstrømningshastighed
ved delvist at lukke tænd-sluk-ventilen med strømmen
fra pumpen. Hvis problemet fortsætter, skal du kon-
trollere driftsbetingelserne for pumpen (for eksempel
højdeforskel, gennemstrømningsmodstand, væsketem-
peratur).
Motorlejerne er Kontakt salgs- og serviceafdelingen.
slidte.
Der er fremmedle- Kontakt salgs- og serviceafdelingen.
gemer inden i pum-
pen.
Henvend dig til salgs- og serviceafdelingen i et hvilket som helst andet tilfæl-
de.
64 e-SV - Dansk
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
Fare pga. varm flate angis av et bestemt symbol som erstatter de typiske fa-
1.1 Introduksjon renivåsymbolene:
MERK:
Instruksjoner
Oppbevar denne håndboken for fremtidig referanse, og ha den lett tilgjenge-
lig. Instruksjonene og advarslene i denne håndboken gjelder en standard utgave
slik den beskrives i salgsdokumentet. Spesielle utgaver av pumpen leveres
med hefter som inneholder tilleggsinstruksjoner. Se salgskontrakten for å
1.1.1 Uerfarne brukere finne eventuelle endringer og egenskaper ved en spesiell utgave. Kontakt det
nærmeste Lowara-sevicesenteret når det gjelder instruksjoner, situasjoner el-
ler hendelser som ikke er tatt med i denne håndboken eller i salgsdokumen-
ADVARSEL: tet.
Dette produktet er tiltenkt brukt kun av kvalifisert personell.
1.3 Avhende emballasje og produktet
Vær oppmerksom på følgende forholdsregler:
• Personer med nedsatte evner skal ikke bruke produktet med mindre noen Overhold lokale forskrifter og gjeldende koder om avhending av sortert av-
har tilsyn med dem eller de har fått passende opplæring av en fagperson. fall.
• Barn må være under tilsyn for å sikre at de ikke leker med eller rundt pro-
duktet. 1.4 Garanti
Se salgskontrakten for å finne informasjon om garantien.
1.2 Sikkerhetsterminologi og symboler
Om sikkerhetsmeldinger
1.5 Reservedeler
Det er svært viktig at du leser, forstår og følger sikkerhetsmeldingene og - ADVARSEL:
forskriftene nøye før du håndterer produktet. De er gitt slik at du kan unngå Bruk bare originale reservedeler ved bytte av slitte deler eller de-
følgende farer: ler med feil. Bruk av uegnede reservedeler kan føre til funksjons-
• Personlige ulykker og helseproblemer svikt, skader og personskader i tillegg til at garantien kan bli
ugyldig.
• Skader på produktet
• Funksjonssvikt
FORSIKTIG:
Farenivåer Nøyaktig produkttype og delenummer må alltid spesifiseres når
Farenivå Indikasjon man ber om teknisk informasjon eller reservedeler fra Salgs og
service-avdelingen.
En farlig situasjon som, hvis den ikke
FARE: unngås, vil føre til død eller alvorlige
personskader Se Figur 25, Figur 26 ellerFigur 27 for å finne ytterligere informasjon om re-
servedeler til produktene.
En farlig situasjon som, hvis den ikke
ADVARSEL: unngås, kan føre til død eller alvorli- 1.6 EU-SAMSVARSERKLÆRING
ge personskader (OVERSETTELSE)
LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, MED HOVEDKONTOR I VIA VIT-
En farlig situasjon som, hvis den ikke TORIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE VI -
FORSIKTIG: unngås, kan føre til mindre eller mo- ITALIA, ERKLÆRER HERVED FØLGENDE PRODUKTER:
derate personskader
ELEKTRISK PUMPEENHET (SE MERKET PÅ FØRSTE SIDE)
• En mulig situasjon som, hvis den OPPFYLLER DE RELEVANTE BETINGELSENE I FØLGENDE EU-
MERK: ikke unngås, kan gi uønskede re- ROPEISKE DIREKTIVER:
sultater eller tilstander
• En praksis som ikke er relatert til • MASKIN-DIREKTIV: 2006/42/EF (DEN TEKNISKE FILEN KAN
personskader FÅES HOS LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE).
• ELEKTROMAGNETISK SAMSVAR 2004/108/EF
• ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, REGULERING (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~, 50
Farekategorier Hz, PN≥ 0,75 kW) DERSOM IE2- eller IE3-MERKET
Farekategorier kan enten falle inn under farenivåer eller la bestemte symbo- OG FØLGENDE TEKNISKE STANDARDER
ler erstatte de vanlige farenivåsymbolene.
• EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
Elektriske farer angis av følgende symbol:
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
• EN 60034–30
ADVARSEL:
e-SV - Norsk 65
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
OPPFYLLER DE RELEVANTE BETINGELSENE I FØLGENDE EU- lomlegget legges inn for å holde løpehjulskomponentene på plass i riktig ak-
ROPEISKE DIREKTIVER: sial posisjon. Akselen holdes også på plass med utvidede polystyren- og
plaststropper for å hindre skader under transport.
• MASKINER 2006/42/EF (DEN TEKNISKE FILEN KAN FÅES
HOS LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). Bolten og mutterne som brukes for å feste motoren, følger ikke med. Se
OG FØLGENDE TEKNISKE STANDARDER: Figur 23 for å finne ytterligere informasjon om kopling av motoren.
• EN 809 ADVARSEL:
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 En pumpe og en motor som kjøpes hver for seg og deretter kop-
les sammen, gir ny maskin ifølge Maskindirektivet 2006/42/EF.
AMEDEO VALENTE Vedkommende som kopler dem sammen, er ansvarlig for alle
(DIREKTØR FOR ENGINEERING OG R&D) sikkerhetsaspektene ved den kombinerte enheten.
rev.01
Lowara er et varemerke som tilhører Lowara srl Unipersonale, et dattersel-
2.3 Retningslinjer om oppbevaring
skap av Xylem Inc.
Oppbevaringssted
2 Transport og oppbevaring Pumpen må oppbevares på et tørt sted fritt for varme, skitt og vibrasjoner.
MERK:
2.1 Kontrollere leveransen
• Beskytt produktet mot fuktighet, varmekilder og mekanisk skade.
1. Kontroller pakken utvendig for å se etter tegn til skade. • Ikke plasser tunge vekter på det innpakkede produktet.
2. Gi beskjed til forhandleren vår innen åtte dager etter leveringsdatoen
dersom produkter har synlige tegn til skade.
Omgivelsestemperatur
Pakke ut enheten Produktet må oppbevares ved en omgivelsestemperatur på mellom -5 °C og
1. Følg det aktuelle trinnet: +40 °C (23 °F og 104 °F).
• Dersom enheten er pakket i en kartong, fjern stiftene, og åpne
kartongen.
• Dersom enheten er pakket i en trekasse, åpne lokket og vær opp- 3 Produktbeskrivelse
merksom på spiker og stropper.
2. Fjern festeskruene eller stroppene fra trebunnen. 3.1 Pumpedesign
Kontrollere enheten Dette er en vertikal, flerfaset, ikke selvprimende pumpe, som kan koples til
1. Fjern emballasjematerialene fra produktet. standard elektriske motorer. Pumpen kan brukes til å pumpe:
Kast all emballasje iht. lokale forskrifter.
• Kaldt vann
2. Kontroller produktet for å fastsette om noen deler er skadet eller
mangler. • Varmt vann
3. Løsne produktet ved å fjerne alle skruer, bolter eller stropper. Metalldelene på pumpen som kommer i kontakt med vann, er laget av føl-
Vær forsiktig når du håndterer spiker og stropper. gende:
4. Kontakt vår Salgs og service-avdeling som et finnes noe som ikke er i
orden. Serie Materiale
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Rustfritt stål
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Rustfritt stål og støpejern
2.2 Retningslinjer om transport Det finnes en spesialutgave der alle delene er i rustfritt
stål.
Forholdsregler
SV-pumpene 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 og 22 fåes i forskjellige utgaver etter plassering
ADVARSEL: av sug og tilførselsporter og fasongen på koplingsflensen.
• Ta hensyn til gjeldende ulykkes- og sikkerhetsforskrifter. Produktet kan leveres som en pumpeenhet (pumpe og elektrisk motor) eller
• Knusingsfare. Enheten og komponentene kan være tunge. som bare en pumpe.
Bruk egnede løftemetoder, og bruk alltid vernesko med stål-
tupp.
MERK:
Kontroller bruttovekten som står på emballasjen, for å kunne velge riktig Hvis du har kjøpt en pumpe uten motor, må du forvisse deg om at motoren
løfteutstyr. egner seg for kopling til pumpen.
Posisjon og feste
Mekanisk tetning
Enheten kan transporteres enten horisontalt eller vertikalt. Forviss deg om
at enheten er forsvarlig festet under transport slik at den ikke kan rulle eller Serie Grunnleggende egenskaper
velte.
1, 3, 5 Nominell diameter 12 mm (0,47"), ubalansert, høyrehåndsro-
tasjon, K-utgave (EN 12756)
ADVARSEL:
Ikke bruke øyebolter som er skrudd på motoren for å håndtere 10, 15, 22 Nominell diameter 16 mm (0,63"), ubalansert, høyrehåndsro-
hele den elektriske pumpeenheten. tasjon, K-utgave (EN 12756)
Balansert med motorkraft ≥ 5 kW
• Bruk stropper rundt motoren dersom motorkraften er på mellom 0,25 33, 46, 66, Nominell diameter 22 mm (0,86"), balansert, høyrehåndsrota-
kW og 4,0 kW. 92, 125 sjon, K-utgave (EN 12756)
• Bruk tau eller stropper som er koplet til de to flensene (øyebolter dersom
slike finnes) og som befinner deg i nærheten av berøringsflaten mellom
motoren og pumpen, dersom motorkraften er på mellom 5,5 kW og 55,0 Tilsiktet bruk
kW. Pumpen er egnet til:
• Øyebolter som er skrudd inn i motoren, kan bare brukes for å håndtere
den enkelte motoren eller der fordelingen av vekten ikke er balansert, kan • Felles og industrielle vanndistribusjonssystemer
de brukes for å delvis løfte enheten vertikalt der man starter horisontalt. • Irrigasjon (f.eks. jordbruk og idrettsanlegg)
• Stroppene må sitte godt på plass på motoradapteren for å bare flytte • Avløpsvannbehandling
pumpeenheten. • Matevann
Se Figur 4 for å finne ytterligere informasjon om sikker fastspenning av en- • Vaske anlegg
heten.
• Nedkjøling (f.eks. klimaanlegg og kjølemaskin)
Enhet uten motor • Til bruk ved brannslokking
Dersom pumpen leveres uten motor, er det kalibrerte gaffelformede mel-
lomlegget allerede plassert mellom adapteren og overføringskoplingen. Mel-
66 e-SV - Norsk
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
• Farlige steder (som eksplosive eller etsende atmosfærer). Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen med spesielle krav.
• Sted der lufttemperaturen er svært høy eller sted som er dårlig ventilert.
• Utendørs installasjoner der det ikke finnes vern mot regn eller temperatu- Maksimal antall start per time
rer under 0 °C. Denne tabellen viser antall start som tillates per time på motorer som leveres
av Lowara:
FARE:
Du må ikke bruke denne pumpen til å håndtere antennelige og/ kW 0,25 - 4,00 - 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
eller eksplosive væsker. 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
Opp- 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
start per
MERK: time
• Du må ikke bruke denne pumpen til å håndtere væsker som inneholder
slipende, faste eller fibrete stoffer.
• Ikke bruk pumpen ved strømningshastigheter som er høyere enn de spe- MERK:
sifiserte strømningshastighetene på dataskiltet. Hvis du bruker en annen motor enn standardmotoren som leveres med den
elektriske pumpen, må du se instruksjonene for å finne ut hvor mange gan-
ger den kan startes hver time.
Spesielle bruksområder
Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen i følgende tilfeller:
• Det kan være at det er nødvendig med kraftigere motor dersom tettheten 3.3 Dataskilt
og/eller viskositetsverdien til væsken som pumpes, overstiger vannets Dette dataskiltet er en metalletikett som befinner seg på adapteren. Dataskil-
verdi. tet viser viktige produktspesifikasjoner. Se Figur 1 for å finne ytterligere in-
• Dersom væsken som pumpes, er kjemisk behandlet (f.eks. gjort blødere, formasjon.
deionisert, demineralisert, osv.)
• En spesiell utgave og spesielle monteringsbraketter må brukes dersom Dataskiltet inneholder informasjon om materialet på pakningen og den me-
pumpen skal monteres horisontalt. kaniske tetningen. Se Figur 2 for å finne informasjon om hvordan koden på
• Alle situasjoner som avviker fra dem som beskrives og er relatert til væ- dataskiltet skal tolkes.
skens sammensetning.
Produktspesifisering
3.2 Bruksgrenser Se Figur 3 for å finne en forklaring på pumpens ID-koden og til et eksempel.
IMQ eller TUV eller IRAM eller andre merkinger (kun ved elektrisk
pumpe)
Dersom det ikke står noe annet, henviser produkter med godkjenningsmer-
ke i forbindelse med elektrisk relatert sikkerhet, kun til den elektriske pum-
pen.
4 Installasjon
Følgende formel er gyldig når det gjelder motorer som leveres, der lageret i Forholdsregler
drivenden er aksialt låst (som f.eks. Lowaras standardmotorer for e-SV), se
Figur 6. Kontakt Salgs og service-avdeling i forbindelse med andre saker. ADVARSEL:
P1maks. + Pmaks.≤ PN • Ta hensyn til gjeldende ulykkes- og sikkerhetsforskrifter.
• Bruk egnet utstyr og beskyttelse.
P1maks. Maksimalt inntakstrykk • Følg alltid lokale og/eller nasjonale lover og forskrifter som
Pmaks. Maksimalt trykk som genereres av pumpen gjelder for valg av installasjonssted og vann- og strømtilkop-
linger.
PN Maksimal brukstrykk
ADVARSEL:
• Forviss deg om at alle tilkoplinger er utført av autoriserte in-
stallatører og i samsvar med gjeldende forskrifter.
• Før du begynner å arbeide på enheten må du forvisse deg om
at enheten og kontrollpanelet er isolert fra strømforsyningen
og ikke kan startes. Dette gjelder også for kontrollkretsen.
e-SV - Norsk 67
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
ADVARSEL: Forholdsregler
• Den eksterne vernelederen må alltid være koplet til en jor-
dingsterminal før andre elektriske tilkoplinger utføres. ADVARSEL:
• Alt elektrisk utstyr må jordes. Dette gjelder for pumpeutstyret,
drivverket og eventuelt overvåkingsutstyr. Test jordledningen • Bruk rør som egner seg for det maksimale arbeidstrykket til
for å sikre at den er riktig tilkoplet. pumpen. Hvis du ikke tar hensyn til dette, kan det oppstå
• Hvis motorkabelen rykkes løs ved en feiltakelse, skal jordlede- sprekker i systemet, noe som kan føre til fare for personska-
ren være den siste lederen som skal løsnes fra terminalen. der.
Forviss deg om at jordlederen er lengre enn faselederne. Det- • Forviss deg om at alle tilkoplinger er utført av autoriserte in-
te gjelder for begge endene av motorkabelen. stallatører og i samsvar med gjeldende forskrifter.
• Legg til tilleggsvern mot dødelig støt. Installer en differensial-
bryter (30 mA) med høy sensitivitet [lekkasjestrømsinnretning
RCD]. MERK:
Ta hensyn til alle forskrifter fra lokale myndigheter hvis pumpen er koplet til
det kommunale vannsystemet. Hvis det kreves av myndighetene, må du in-
4.2 Krav til anlegget stallere hensiktsmessig tilbakestrømssperre på sugesiden.
4.2.1 Pumpeplassering
Sjekkliste i forbindelse med suging og avløpsrør
FARE: Kontroller at følgende krav oppfylles:
Bruk ikke denne pumpen i miljøer som kan inneholde brennba-
re/eksplosive eller kjemisk aggressive gasser eller pulvere. • Alle rørene støttes separat. Rørene må ikke påføre belastning på enheten.
• Fleksible rør eller koplinger brukes for å unngå overføring av pumpevi-
brasjoner til rørene og motsatt.
Retningslinjer • Bruk bøy med store vinkler, unngå bruken av vinkelstykker som forårsa-
Overhold følgende retningslinjer når det gjelder plassering av produktet: ker stor strømningsmotstand.
• Sugerørene skal være fullstendig forseglet og lufttette.
• Sørg for å at det ikke finnes noe som hindrer den normale strømmen av
nedkølingsluft fra mortorviften. • Dersom pumpen brukes i en åpen krets, må sugerørets diameter passe in-
• Sørg for at installasjonsområdet er beskyttet mot væskelekkasje eller over- stallasjonsforholdene. Sugerøret må ikke være mindre enn diameteren på
svømmelse. sugeporten.
• Plasser pumpen litt høyere enn gulvnivået dersom det er mulig. • Et eksentrisk overgangsstykke må monteres dersom sugerøret må være
• Omgivelsestemperaturen må være mellom 0 °C og +40 °C. større enn sugedelen på pumpen.
• Den relative fuktigheten i omgivelsesluften må være mindre enn 50 % ved • Dersom pumpen plasseres over væskenivået, installeres en fotventil i en-
+40 °C. den av sugerøret.
• Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen dersom: • Fotventilen er helt nedsenket i væsken slik at det ikke kan komme inn luft
• Den relative luftfuktigheten overstiger retningslinjene. gjennom sugehvirvlen når væsken er ved maksimalt nivå, og pumpen er
• Romtemperaturen overstiger +40 °C. installert over væskekilden.
• Enheten plasseres høyere enn 1000 m.o.h. Verdien på motorytelsen • På-av-ventiler med passende størrelse monteres på sugerøret og på tilfør-
må kanskje endres eller man må skifte til kraftigere motor. selsrøret (nedstrøms fra tilbakeslagsventilen( for å regulere pumpekapasi-
Se Tabell 8 for å finne informasjon om hva den nye ytelsesverdien skal være. teten for å kunne inspisere og vedlikeholde pumpen.
• En tilbakeslagsventil må være installert på tilførselspumpen slik at tilbake-
Pumpeplasseringer og klaringer strømning hindres når pumpen er slått av.
MERK: ADVARSEL:
Horisontal montering av pumpen krever spesialtilpassing. Ikke bruk på-av-ventilen på utløpssiden i lukket stilling i mer enn
noen få sekunder for å strupe pumpen. Dersom pumpen må
Sørg for tilstrekkelig lys og klaring rundt pumpen. Sørg for at det er lett å brukes ved utløpssiden lukket i mer en noen få sekunder, må en
komme til for å utføre monterings- og vedlikeholdsoppgaver. forbikjøringskrets installeres for å hindre at vannet inni pumpen
overopphetes.
Installasjon over væskekilden (sugeløft)
Den teoretiske maksimale sugehøyden til enhver pumpe er 10,33 m. I prak- Se Figur 12 for å finne illustrasjoner som viser pumpekravene.
sis påvirker følgende pumpens sugekapasitet:
• Væskens temperatur 4.3 Elektriske krav
• M.o.h. (i et åpent system)
• Systemtrykk (i et lukket system) • De gjeldende lokale forskriftene overstyrer disse spesifikke kravene.
• Rørmotstand • Sjekk de lokale forskriftene som gjelder i forbindelse med brannsluk-
• Intrinsik strømningsmotstand i pumpen ningssystemer (hydranter og/eller sprinkleranlegg).
• Høyde forskjeller
Følgende ligning brukes for å beregne maks. høye over væskenivået som Sjekkliste i forbindelse med elektriske koplinger
pumpen kan monteres ved: Kontroller at følgende krav oppfylles:
(pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5 • De eletriske ledningene er beskyttet mot høy temperatur, vibrasjoner og
kollisjoner.
pb Barometertrykket i bar (i et lukket system vises systemtrykk) • Strømtilførselen har følgende:
NPSH Verdi i meter som gjelder pumpens intrisik strømningsmotstand • En anordning for å verne mot kortslutning
Hf Samlede tap i meter som er forårsaket av at væsken renner gjen- • En differensialbryter (30 mA) med høy sensitivitet [lekkasjestrømsinn-
retning RCD] for å gi tilleggsvern mot elektrisk støt
nom pumpens sugerør • En isolatorbryter på ledningsnettet med et kontaktgap på minst 3 mm
Hv Damptrykket i meter som tilsvarer væsken Ts temperatur i °C
Sjekkliste i forbindelse med det elektriske kontrollpanelet
0,5 Anbefalt sikkerhetsmargin (m)
Z Maksimal høyde der pumpen kan monteres (m) MERK:
Se Figur 7 for å finne ytterligere informasjon. Det elektriske kontrollpanelet må stemme overens med ytelsene til den elek-
triske pumpen. Feil kombinasjoner kan føre til at motoren ikke beskyttes.
(pb*10,2 - Z) må alltid være et positivt tall.
Se Figur 5 for å finne ytterligere informasjon om ytelsen.
MERK:
Overskrid ikke pumpens sugekapasitet da dette kan forårsake kavitasjon og
skade pumpen.
68 e-SV - Norsk
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
35 sikringer aM (motorstartende) eller magnettermisk bryter med kurve C og Icn ≥ 4,5 kA eller annen tilsvarende innretning.
36 Termisk overbelastningsrelé med driftsklasse 10A + sikringer aM (motorstartende) eller magnettermisk bryter med motorvern med driftsklasse 10A.
e-SV - Norsk 69
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
Støynivå ADVARSEL:
Se Tabell 10 for å finne informasjon om støynivåer som avgis av enheter som • Vedlikehold og service skal bare utføres av erfarne og kvalifi-
er utstyrt med en motor levert av Lowara. serte personer.
• Ta hensyn til gjeldende ulykkes- og sikkerhetsforskrifter.
5.1 Prime pumpen • Bruk egnet utstyr og beskyttelse.
• Forviss deg om at den drenerte væsken ikke forårsaker øde-
Se Figur 15 for å finne informasjon om å plassere pluggene. leggelser eller personskader.
70 e-SV - Norsk
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
Den elektriske pumpen starter, men den termiske bryteren ble utløst på for- Årsak Løsning
skjellige tidspunkter etterpå.
pumpen slik at løpehjulet er kilt
Årsak Løsning fast.
Det finnes fremmedlegemer (faste Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen. Pumpens tilførselshastighet er På-av-ventilen delvis stenges nedstrøms
stoffer eller fibermateriale) inni pum- høyere enn grensene som står på helt til tilførselshastigheten er like eller
pen slik at løpehjulet er kilt fast. dataskiltet. lavere enn grensene som står på data-
skiltet.
Pumpen er overbelastet fordi den Kontroller de faktiske strømkravene
pumper væske som er for tett og vi- basert på egenskapene til væsken Pumpen er overbelastet fordi den Kontroller de aktuelle strømkravene ba-
skøs. som pumpes, og kontakt Salgs- og pumper væske som er for tett og sert på egenskapene til væsken som
service-avdelingen etterpå. viskøs. pumpes, og skift ut motoren deretter.
Motorlagrene er slitt. Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen.
Pumpen går, men leverer for lite vann eller ikke vann i det hele tatt
Årsak Løsning 7.6 Den elektrisk pumpen starter, men
Pumpen er tilstoppet. Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen. systemets generelle beskyttelse ble aktivert
Feilsøkningsinstruksjonene i tabellen nedenfor er beregnet kun på installatø-
rer. Årsak Løsning
Kortslutning i det elektriske systemet. Kontroller det elektriske systemet.
7.2 Hovedbryteren er på, men den
elektriske pumpen starter ikke 7.7 Den elektriske pumpen starter, men
systemet lekkasjestrømsinnretning (RCD)
Årsak Løsning ble aktivert
Det finnes ikke strøm. • Få tilbake strømmen. Årsak Løsning
• Sørg for at alle de elektriske koplinge- Det finnes jordingslekka- Kontroller isolasjonen på komponentene i det
ne til strømforsyningen er på plass. sje. elektriske systemet.
Den termiske bryter som er en Vent til pumpen er nedkjølt. Den termi-
del av pumpen (dersom en slik ske bryteren tilbakestilles automatisk.
finnes), er blitt utløst. 7.8 Pumpen går, men leverer for lite vann
Varmereléet eller motorvernet i Tilbakestill den varmevernet.
eller ikke vann i det hele tatt
det elektriske kontrollpanelet er
blitt utløst. Årsak Løsning
Verneinnretningen mot tørrkjø- Kontroller følgende: Det finnes luft i pumpene el- • Tøm ut luften
ring er blitt utløst. • vannivået i tanken eller trykket på rør- ler i rørene.
nettet
Pumpen er ikke primet riktig. Stopp pumpen, og gjenta primingprosedy-
• verneinnretningen og tilkoplede kab- ren. Dersom problemet vedvarer:
ler
• Kontroller at den mekaniske tetningen
Sikringene på pumpene eller til- Skift ut sikringene. ikke lekker.
leggskretsene har røket. • Kontroller at sugepumpen er strammet
helt til.
7.3 Den elektriske pumpen starter, men • Skift ut alle ventilene som lekker.
den termiske bryteren utløses eller Det må ikke forekomme for Åpne ventilen.
sikringen ryker rett etterpå mye struping på tilførselssi-
den.
Årsak Løsning Ventiler er låst i steng eller Demonter og rengjør ventilene.
Strømkabelen er skadet. Kontroller kabelen, og skift ut om nød- delvis stengt stilling.
vendig. Pumpen er tilstoppet. Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen.
Varmevern eller sikringer er ikke Kontroller komponentene, og skift ut om Rørene er tilstoppet. Kontroller og rengjør rørene.
egnet til motorstrøm. nødvendig.
Feil rotasjonsretning på løpe- Bytt om plasseringen av to av fasene på mo-
Den elektriske motoren har Kontroller komponentene, og skift ut om hjulet (trefaset utgave). torens terminalbord eller det elektriske kon-
kortsluttet. nødvendig. trollpanelet.
Motoren overbelastes. Kontroller pumpens driftsforhold, og til- Sugeløftet er for høy, eller Kontroller pumpens driftforhold. Gjør føl-
bakestill beskyttelsen. strømningsmotstanden i suge- gende om nødvendig:
rørene er for stort. • Reduser sugeløftet
7.4 Den elektriske pumpen starter, men • Øk diameteren på sugerøret
den termiske bryteren utløses eller
sikringen ryker kort tid etterpå 7.9 Den elektriske pumpen stopper, og
Årsak Løsning etterpå roterer den i feil retning.
Det elektriske panelet er plassert i et Beskytt det elektriske panelet mot
svært varmt område, eller er utsatt for varmekilden og direkte sollys. Årsak Løsning
direkte sollys.
Det finnes en lekkasje i én eller flere av følgende Reparer eller bytt ut
Strømspenning ligger ikke innenfor Kontroller pumpens driftforhold. komponenter: den defekte kompo-
motorens arbeidsgrenser. nenten.
• Sugerøret
Det manger en strømfase. Kontroller
• Fotventilen eller tilbakeslagsventilen
• strømforsyningen
• den elektriske tilkoplingen Det finnes luft i sugerøret. Tøm ut luften.
7.5 Den elektriske pumpen starter, men 7.10 Pumpen starter opp for ofte
den termiske bryteren ble utløst på
forskjellige tidspunkter etterpå
Årsak Løsning
Årsak Løsning
Det finnes en lekkasje i én eller flere av følgen- Reparer eller bytt ut den
Det finnes fremmedlegemer (faste Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen. de komponenter: defekte komponenten.
stoffer eller fibermateriale) inni
e-SV - Norsk 71
no - Oversettelse av den originale bruksanvisningen
Årsak Løsning
• Sugerøret
• Fotventilen eller tilbakeslagsventilen
Årsak Løsning
Hulrom i pumpen Reduser den påkrevde strømningshastigheten ved å
delvis stenge av-på-ventilen nedstrøms fra pumpen.
Kontroller driftsforholdene til pumpen (høydefor-
skjell, strømningsmotstand, væsketemperatur, osv.)
dersom problemet vedvarer.
Motorlagrene er Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen.
slitt.
Det finnes frem- Kontakt Salgs og service-avdelingen.
medlegemer inni
pumpen.
Kontakt Salgs- og service-avdelingen vedrørende eventuelle andre forhold.
72 e-SV - Norsk
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
Fara för het yta indikeras med en specifik symbol som ersätter de vanliga
1.1 Inledning faronivåsymbolerna:
OBS!: Anvisningar
Spara denna handbok och håll den enkelt tillgänglig där enheten är placerad. Anvisningarna och varningarna i den här manualen avser standardversionen,
enligt beskrivning i säljkontraktet. Pumpar av specialversion kan levereras
med informationsblad med ytterligare anvisningar. Hänvisa till säljkontraktet
1.1.1 Oerfarna användare för eventuella modifieringar eller specialversionsegenskaper. Kontakta när-
maste Lowara servicecentrum för anvisningar, situationer eller händelser
som inte behandlas i denna manual eller i säljkontraktet.
VARNING:
Denna produkt är endast avsedd för användning av kvalificerad
personal. 1.3 Avyttrande av emballage och produkt
Observera gällande lokala föreskrifter och lagstiftningar angående bortskaf-
Var medveten om följande försiktighetsåtgärder: fande av avfall.
• Personer med nedsatt förmåga ska inte använda produkten utan övervak-
ning eller utan att ha fått korrekt utbildning av yrkesperson. 1.4 Garanti
• Barn måste övervakas för att säkerställa att de inte leker på eller i närhe-
ten av produkten. Information om garanti finns i säljkontraktet.
Om säkerhetsmeddelanden VARNING:
Använd endast originaldelar för att ersätta slitna eller felaktiga
Det är mycket viktigt att du läser, förstår och följer säkerhetsanvisningarna delar. Användning av olämpliga reservdelar kan orsaka felfunk-
och säkerhetsföreskrifterna noggrant innan du använder produkten. Infor- tioner, skada och personskador och kan även göra garantin ogil-
mationen syftar till att förebygga dessa faror: tig.
• olyckor och hälsoproblem för personalen
• skador på produkten AKTSAMHET:
• fel på produkten. Ange alltid exakt produkttyp och artikelnummer när du ber om
teknisk information eller reservdelar från försäljnings- och servi-
Faronivåer ceavdelningen.
Faronivå Indikation
En farlig situation som, om den inte Information om produktens reservdelar finns i Figur 25, Figur 26 eller Figur
FARA: undviks, leder till dödsfall eller allvar- 27.
liga personskador
1.6 EG-FÖRSÄKRAN OM ÖVERENSSTÄMMELSE
En farlig situation som, om den inte (ÖVERSÄTTNING)
VARNING: undviks, leder till dödsfall eller allvar-
liga personskador LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, MED HUVUDKONTOR I VIA VIT-
TORIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE VI -
ITALIA, INTYGAR HÄRMED ATT FÖLJANDE PRODUKT:
En farlig situation som, om den inte
AKTSAMHET: undviks, kan leda till lindriga eller ELEKTRISK PUMPENHET (SE ETIKETT PÅ FÖRSTA SIDAN)
måttliga personskador
UPPFYLLER GÄLLANDE BESTÄMMELSER I FÖLJANDE EUROPE-
ISKA DIREKTIV:
• En möjlig situation som kan leda
OBS!: • MASKINDIREKTIVET: 2006/42/EC (DEN TEKNISKA FILEN
till oönskade tillstånd
• Användning utan risk för persons- FINNS TILLGÄNGLIG FRÅN LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE).
kador • ELEKTROMAGNETISK KOMPATIBILITET 2004/108/EC
• ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, FÖRORDNING (EG) 640/2009 (3 ~,
50 Hz, PN≥ 0,75 kW) OM IE2- ELLER IE3-MÄRKT
Farokategorier
OCH FÖLJANDE TEKNISKA STANDARDER
Farokategorierna kan antingen falla under faronivåer eller låta specifika sym-
boler ersätta de ordinarie faronivåsymbolerna. • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
Elektriska faror indikeras med följande specifika symbol: • EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
• EN 60034–30
VARNING:
PUMP (SE ETIKETT PÅ FÖRSTA SIDAN)
Detta är exempel på andra kategorier som kan inträffa. De faller under ordi-
narie faronivåer och kan använda kompletterande symboler:
• Krossrisk.
• Skärrisk
• Risk för ljusbåge
e-SV - Svenska 73
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
UPPFYLLER GÄLLANDE BESTÄMMELSER I FÖLJANDE EUROPE- fogade för att hålla pumphjulsstapeln i rätt axiellt läge. För att förhindra ska-
ISKA DIREKTIV: da under transport hålls axeln på plats med expanderad polystyren och plast-
band.
• MASKINDIREKTIVET 2006/42/EC (DEN TEKNISKA FILEN
FINNS TILLGÄNGLIG FRÅN LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). Skruvar och muttrar för att fästa motorn medföljer ej. Mer information om
OCH I FÖLJANDE TEKNISKA STANDARDER: hur du kopplar motorn finns i Figur 23.
• EN 809 VARNING:
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 2011-06-16 En pump och motor som inköps separat och sedan kopplas ihop
leder till en ny maskin enligt Maskindirektivet 2006/42/EG. Den
AMEDEO VALENTE person som utför kopplingen är ansvarig för alla säkerhetsaspek-
ter i den kombinerade enheten.
(TEKNISK CHEF OCH FoU-CHEF)
rev.01
2.3 Riktlinjer för förvaring
Lowara är ett varumärke som tillhör Lowara srl Unipersonale, dotterbolag
till Xylem Inc.
Förvaringsplats
Produkten ska förvaras på en övertäckt och torr plats avskild från värme,
2 Transport och förvaring smuts och vibrationer.
74 e-SV - Svenska
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
• Farliga platser (som explosiva eller frätande atmosfärer). Kontakta försäljnings- och serviceavdelningen om särskilda krav föreligger.
• Platser med hög lufttemperatur eller dålig ventilation.
• Utomhusinstallationer som inte är skyddade mot regn eller temperaturer Max. antal starter per timme
under 0 °C. Tabellen visar antalet tillåtna starter per timma för motorer levererade av Lo-
wara:
FARA:
Denna pump får inte användas för hantering av brännbara eller kW 0,25 - 4,00 - 11.0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
explosiva vätskor. 3,00 7,50 15.0 22,0 37,0
Starter 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
per tim-
OBS!: ma
• Använd inte denna pump för att hantera vätskor som innehåller repande
eller solida substanser eller substanser som innehåller fibrer.
• Använd inte pumpen för flödeshastigheter utanför de på märkskylten OBS!:
specificerade flödeshastigheterna. Om du använder en annan motor än standardmotorn som levereras med
den elektriska pumpen bör du kontrollera de relevanta anvisningarna för till-
låtet antal starter per timme.
Specialtillämpningar
Kontakta försäljnings- och serviceavdelningen i följande fall:
• Om densitets- och/eller viskositetsvärdet för vätskan som pumpas över- 3.3 Märkskylt
skrider det för vatten, som vatten med glykol, då en kraftfullare motor Märkskylten är en metalletikett som sitter på adaptern. Märkskylten anger
kan behövas. viktiga produktspecifikationer. Mer information finns i Figur 1.
• Om vätskan som pumpas är kemiskt behandlad (till exempel mjukgjord,
avjoniserad, avmineraliserad). Märkskylten ger information om packningens och den mekaniska tätningens
• Om pumpen installeras horisontalt måste en specialversion och monter- material. Information om hur du tolkar koden på märkskylten finns i Figur 2.
ingsfästen användas.
• Alla situationer som skiljer sig från de beskrivna och som relaterar till Produktbenämning
vätskans beskaffenhet. Se Figur 3 för en förklaring av identifieringskoden för pumpen och ett exem-
pel.
3.2 Begränsningar för användning
WRAS-etikett - Installationskrav och anmärkningar (endast för den
Maximalt arbetstryck brittiska marknaden)
En WRAS-etikett på pumpen innebär att produkten är godkänd av WRAS
Flödesschemat visar det maximala driftstrycket beroende på pumpmodellen (Water Regulations Advisory Scheme). Denna produkt är lämplig att använ-
och temperaturen på vätskan som pumpas. das med kallt drickbart vatten för mänsklig förbrukning. Mer information
finns i IRN R001 och R420 i WRAS-katalogen (WRAS Water Fittings and
Materials Directory) på www.wras.co.uk.
IMQ eller TUV eller IRAM eller andra märken (endast för elektrisk
pump)
För produkter med ett godkännandemärke som är elektricitetsrelaterat, hän-
visar godkännandet enbart till den elpumpen såvida inget annat är angivet.
4 Installation
Säkerhetsåtgärder
Följande formel är giltig för motorer som är försedda med drivändslager VARNING:
som är axialt låst (t.ex. Lowara-standardmotorerna for e-SV), se Figur 6.
Kontakta försäljnings- och serviceavdelningen för alla övriga situationer. • Iaktta gällande förordningar för olycksförebyggande åtgärder.
• Använd lämplig utrustning och skydd.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN • Hänvisa alltid till gällande lokala och/eller nationella föreskrif-
ter och lagstiftningar angående val av installationsplats samt
P1max Maximalt inloppstryck vatten- och strömanslutningar.
Pmax Maximalt tryck genererat av pumpen
PN Maximalt driftstryck VARNING:
• Säkerställ att alla anslutningar är utförda av kvalificerade in-
stallationstekniker och i enlighet med gällande föreskrifter.
• Säkerställ att enheten och manöverpanelen är isolerade från
strömförsörjningen och inte kan spänningsförsörjas innan ar-
bete på enheten påbörjas. Det här gäller även styrkretsen.
37 EN 60335-2-41 är den gällande standarden för elrelaterade säkerhetspumpar för hushåll och liknande användningsområden
38 Maximalt 100 ºC för vatten
e-SV - Svenska 75
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
Tillhandahåll tillräckligt ljus och avstånd runt pumpen. Se till att den lätt kan VARNING:
kommas åt för installations- och underhållsåtgärder. Använd inte på/av-ventilen på utloppssidan i den slutna positio-
nen för att strypa pumpflödet i mer än ett par sekunder. Om
Installation över vätskekälla (suglyft) pumpen måste köras med utloppssidan stängd under mer än ett
Teoretisk maximal sughöjd för valfri pump är 10,33 m. I praktiken är det föl- par sekunder måste det installeras en förbikopplingskrets för att
jande som påverkar pumpens sugkapacitet: förhindra överhettning av vattnet inuti pumpen.
• Temperaturen på vätskan som pumpas
• Höjd över havet (i ett öppet system) Bilder som visar kraven på rörsystemet visas i Figur 12.
• Systemtryck (i ett slutet system)
• Rörmotstånd 4.3 Elektriska krav
• Pumpens egna flödesmotstånd • Gällande lokala föreskrifter upphäver följande specifika krav.
• Höjdskillnader • Kontrollera de gällande lokala föreskrifterna när det gäller brandbekämp-
Använd följande ekvation för att beräkna den maximala höjden ovan vätske- ningssystem (brandposter och/eller vattenspridare).
nivån som pumpen kan installeras:
(pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5 Kontrollista för elektriska anslutningar
Kontrollera att följande krav är uppfyllda:
pb Barometertryck i bar (i slutet system är det systemtrycket)
• De elektriska kablarna är skyddade mot hög temperatur, vibrationer och
NPSH Värdet i meter för pumpens egna flödesmotstånd kollisioner.
Hf Total förlust i meter som skapas när vätskan passerar genom • Strömförsörjningskabeln är försedd med:
• Ett kortslutningsskydd
pumpens sugledning
• En högkänslig differentialbrytare (30 mA) (RCD, residual current devi-
Hv Ångtryck i meter som stämmer överens med vätsketemperaturen ce eller jordfelsbrytare) som ger ytterligare skydd mot elektrisk stöt
T °C • En isolerande huvudfrånskiljare med ett kontaktavstånd på minst 3
mm
0,5 Rekommenderad säkerhetsmarginal (m)
Z Maximal höjd som pumpen kan installeras på (m)
Mer information finns i Figur 7.
76 e-SV - Svenska
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
39 säkringar aM (motorstart), eller brytare med magnetisk och termisk utlösning med kurva C och Icn ≥ 4,5 kA eller annan likvärdig enhet.
40 Termorelä för överbelastning med driftsklass 10A + säkringar aM (motorstart) eller brytare med magnetisk och termisk utlösning som motorskydd med driftsklass 10A.
e-SV - Svenska 77
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
78 e-SV - Svenska
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
e-SV - Svenska 79
sv - Översättning av bruksanvisning i original
Orsak Åtgärd
Det finns ett läckage i en eller båda av följan- Reparera eller byt ut felaktig
de komponenter: komponent.
• Sugledningen
• Bottenventilen eller backventilen
Orsak Åtgärd
Pumpkavitation Minska flödeshastigheten som krävs genom att del-
vis stänga på/av-ventilen nedströms från pumpen.
Kontrollera pumpens driftsvillkor (exempelvis höjd-
skillnad, flödesmotstånd, vätsketemperatur) om pro-
blemet kvarstår.
Motorlagren är slitna. Kontakta försäljnings- och serviceavdelningen.
Det finns främman- Kontakta försäljnings- och serviceavdelningen.
de föremål inuti
pumpen.
Hänvisa till försäljnings- och serviceavdelningen för alla övriga situationer.
80 e-SV - Svenska
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
Ohjeet
HUOMAUTUS:
Tässä käyttöohjeessa annetut ohjeet ja varoitukset koskevat myyntiasiakirjas-
Talleta tämä ohjekirja tulevaa käyttöä varten ja pidä se käsillä yksikön sijoi- sa kuvattua vakioversiota. Erikoispumppuversioiden mukana voidaan toimit-
tuspaikassa. taa lisäohjelehtisiä. Myyntisopimuksessa mainitaan kaikki muutokset ja eri-
koisversio-ominaisuudet. Ota yhteys lähimpään Lowara-huoltokeskukseen,
jos kyseessä ovat ohjeet, tilanteet tai tapahtumat, joita ei käsitellä tässä käyt-
1.1.1 Kokemattomat käyttäjät töohjeessa tai myyntiasiakirjassa.
VAROITUS:
Tämä tuote on tarkoitettu vain pätevien henkilöiden käytettäväk-
1.3 Pakkauksen ja tuotteen hävittäminen
si. Noudata voimassa olevia paikallisia, lajiteltujen jätteiden hävittämistä koske-
via määräyksiä.
Ota seuraavat varotoimet huomioon:
• Henkilöt, joiden kyvyt ovat puutteelliset, eivät saa käyttää tuotetta, ellei 1.4 Takuu
ammattilainen valvo heitä tai ole kouluttanut heitä asianmukaisesti.
• Lapsia on valvottava sen varmistamiseksi, että he eivät leiki tuotteen pääl- Katso takuutiedot myyntisopimuksesta.
lä tai sen lähistöllä.
1.5 Varaosat
1.2 Turvallisuustermit ja turvasymbolit
VAROITUS:
Tietoa turvasanomista Käytä ainoastaan alkuperäisiä varaosia, kun vaihdat kuluneita tai
On ehdottoman tärkeää, että luet huolellisesti varoitukset ja turvallisuusmää- viallisia osia. Sopimattomien varaosien käyttö voi aiheuttaa viko-
räykset sekä ymmärrät ja noudatat niitä, ennen kuin käsittelet tuotetta. Nämä ja, vahinkoja ja vammoja sekä mitätöidä takuun.
on julkaistu estämään seuraavat vaarat:
• Onnettomuudet ja terveydelliset ongelmat HUOMIO:
• Tuotteelle aiheutuvat vauriot Ilmoita aina tarkka tuotetyyppi ja osanumero, kun pyydät teknisiä
• Tuotteen viallinen toiminta tietoja tai varaosia myynti- ja huolto-osastolta.
Vaaratasot Lisätietoja tuotteen varaosista on kohdissa Kuva 25, Kuva 26 tai Kuva 27.
Vaarataso Ongelma
VAARA:
Vaarallinen tilanne, mikä johtaa kuo- 1.6 EY:N VAATIMUSTENMUKAISUUSVAKUUTUS
lemaan tai vakavaan vammaan, jos si- (KÄÄNNÖS)
tä ei vältetä.
LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, PÄÄKONTTORIN OSOITE VIA
Vaarallinen tilanne, mikä saattaa joh- VITTORIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE VI -
VAROITUS: taa kuolemaan tai vakavaan vam- ITALIA, VAKUUTTAA, ETTÄ SEURAAVA TUOTE:
maan, jos sitä ei vältetä. SÄHKÖPUMPPUYKSIKKÖ (KATSO TARRA ENSIMMÄISELLÄ SI-
VULLA)
Vaarallinen tilanne, mikä saattaa joh-
HUOMIO: taa pieneen tai kohtalaiseen vam- TÄYTTÄÄ SEURAAVIEN EUROOPPALAISTEN DIREKTIIVIEN
maan, jos sitä ei vältetä. OLEELLISET VAATIMUKSET:
• KONEDIREKTIIVI: 2006/42/EY (TEKNINEN TIEDOSTO SAA-
• Mahdollinen tilanne, joka voi ai- TAVANA LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE -YHTIÖLTÄ).
HUOMAUTUS: • SÄHKÖMAGNEETTISTA YHTEENSOPIVUUTTA KOSKEVA DI-
heuttaa epätoivottuja tilanteita, jos
sitä ei pystytä välttämään REKTIIVI 2004/108/EY
• Käytäntö, joka ei liity loukkaantu- • ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, MÄÄRÄYS (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~, 50 Hz,
miseen PN≥ 0,75 kW) JOS IE2- tai IE3-MERKINTÄ
JA SEURAAVAT TEKNISET STANDARDIT
Vaaraluokat • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
Vaaraluokat voivat sisältyä vaaratasoihin tai tietyt symbolit voivat korjata ta-
valliset vaaratason symbolit. • EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
• EN 60034–30
Sähköiset vaarat on osoitettu seuraavalla symbolilla:
PUMPPU (KATSO TARRA ENSIMMÄISELLÄ SIVULLA)
VAROITUS:
e-SV - Suomi 81
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
TÄYTTÄÄ SEURAAVIEN EUROOPPALAISTEN DIREKTIIVIEN tarkoituksena on pitää juoksupyöräpino oikeassa aksiaalisessa asennossa.
OLEELLISET VAATIMUKSET: Vaurioiden välttämiseksi kuljetuksen aikana myös akseli on kiinnitetty paikal-
leen polystyreenivaahdolla ja muovisiteillä.
• KONEDIREKTIIVI 2006/42/EY (TEKNINEN TIEDOSTO SAA-
TAVANA LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE -YHTIÖLTÄ). Moottorin kiinnittämiseen käytettävät pultit ja mutterit eivät sisälly toimituk-
JA SEURAAVAT TEKNISET STANDARDIT: seen. Lisätietoja moottorin kytkemisestä on kohdassa Kuva 23.
• EN 809 VAROITUS:
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 Jos pumppu ja moottori ostetaan erikseen ja kytketään sitten yh-
teen, tuloksena on konedirektiivin 2006/42/EY mukaisesti uusi
AMEDEO VALENTE kone. Kytkennän tekevä henkilö on vastuussa kaikista yhdistetyn
yksikön turvallisuusseikoista.
(TEKNINEN JA TUTKIMUS- JA KEHITYSJOHTAJA)
versio 01
2.3 Varastointiohjeita
Lowara on Xylem Inc:n tytäryhtiön Lowara srl Unipersonalen tavaramerkki.
Varastointipaikka
2 Kuljetus ja säilytys Säilytä tuotetta katetussa ja kuivassa ympäristössä suojattuna kuumuudelta,
lialta ja tärinältä.
2.1 Toimituksen tarkistaminen HUOMAUTUS:
1. Tarkista, näkyykö pakkauksen ulkopuolella merkkejä vaurioista. • Suojaa tuote kosteudelta, kuumuudelta ja mekaanisilta vaurioilta.
2. Jos tuotteessa näkyy merkkejä vaurioista, ilmoita asiasta jälleenmyyjälle • Älä aseta raskaita kuormia pakatun tuotteen päälle.
kahdeksan päivän sisällä toimituspäivästä.
Ympäristön lämpötila
Pakkauksen purkaminen
1. Noudata soveltuvaa kohtaa: Tuote täytyy säilyttää ympäristön lämpötilassa -5 °C – +40 °C (23 °F – 104
°F).
• Jos yksikkö on pakattu laatikkoon, irrota niitit ja avaa laatikko.
• Jos yksikkö on pakattu puiseen kuljetuslaatikkoon, avaa kansi va-
roen nauloja ja siteitä. 3 Tuotteen kuvaus
2. Irrota kiinnitysruuvit tai siteet puualustasta.
3.1 Pumpun malli
Yksikön tarkastaminen
1. Poista pakkausmateriaalit tuotteen ympäriltä. Tämä on monivaiheinen, ei-itsetäyttyvä pystypumppu, joka voidaan kytkeä
Vie pakkauksen osat paikallisten jätehuoltomääräysten mukaiseen paik- vakiosähkömoottoreihin. Pumpulla voidaan pumpata:
kaan.
• Kylmää vettä
2. Tarkasta tuote selvittääksesi, onko mikään osa vaurioitunut tai puuttu-
ko jokin osa. • Kuumaa vettä
3. Mikäli mahdollista, irrota tuote irrottamalla kaikki ruuvit, pultit tai hih- Pumpun vettä koskettavien metalliosien valmistusmateriaaleja ovat:
nat.
Turvallisuusmielessä kannattaa olla varovainen irrotettaessa nauloja ja Sarja Materiaali
hihnoja. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Ruostumaton teräs
4. Jos virheitä löytyy, ota yhteys myynti- ja huolto-osastoon. 33, 46, 66, 92, Ruostumaton teräs ja valurauta
125 Saatavana on erikoisversio, jonka kaikki osat on valmis-
tettu ruostumattomasta teräksestä.
2.2 Kuljetusohjeet
SV-pumppuja 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ja 22 on saatavana eri versioina imu- ja lähtö-
Varotoimenpiteet porttien sijainnin ja liitoslaipan muodon mukaan.
Tuote voidaan toimittaa pumppuyksikkönä (pumppu ja sähkömoottori) tai
VAROITUS: pelkästään pumppuna.
• Noudata voimassa olevia turvallisuussääntöjä.
• Puristumisvaara. Yksikkö ja osat voivat olla painavia. Käytä ai- HUOMAUTUS:
na asianmukaisia nostotapoja ja teräskärkisiä jalkineita. Jos olet hankkinut moottorittoman pumpun, varmista, että moottori sopii
kytkettäväksi pumppuun.
Tarkista pakkauksessa ilmoitettu bruttopaino, jotta voit valita asianmukaisen
nostolaitteiston.
Mekaaninen tiiviste
Sijoittelu ja kiinnitys
Sarja Perusominaisuudet
Yksikkö voidaan kuljettaa joko vaakasuorassa tai pystysuorassa asennossa.
Varmista, että yksikkö on kiinnitetty lujasti kuljetuksen ajaksi ja ettei se pääse 1, 3, 5 Nimellishalkaisija 12 mm (0,47 in.), epätasapainoinen, oikean-
liikkumaan tai kaatumaan. puoleinen pyöriminen, versio K (EN 12756)
10, 15, 22 Nimellishalkaisija 16 mm (0,63 tuumaa), epätasapainoinen, oi-
VAROITUS: keanpuoleinen pyöriminen, versio K (EN 12756)
Älä käytä moottoriin ruuvattuja silmukkapultteja koko sähkö- Tasapainotettu moottorin teholla ≥ 5 kW
pumppuyksikön käsittelyyn.
33, 46, 66, Nimellishalkaisija 22 mm (0.86 in.), tasapainotettu, oikeanpuo-
92, 125 leinen pyöriminen, versio K (EN 12756)
• Käytä hihnoja moottorin ympärillä, jos moottorin teho on 0,25 kW – 4,0
kW.
Käyttötarkoitus
• Käytä kahteen laippaan (silmukkapultteihin, jos on) kiinnitettyjä köysiä tai
hihnoja moottorin ja pumpun välisen liitosalueen lähellä, jos moottorin Pumppu sopii seuraaviin tarkoituksiin:
teho on 5,5–55,0 kW. • Yhteiskunnan ja teollisuuden vedenjakelujärjestelmät
• Moottorin ruuvattuja silmukkapultteja saa käyttää ainoastaan yksittäisen • Kastelu (esimerkiksi maanviljely ja urheilutilat)
moottorin käsittelyyn tai – mikäli paino ei ole jakautunut tasaisesti – yksi-
kön nostamiseen osittain pystyyn vaaka-asennosta. • Vedenkäsittely
• Pumppuyksikön siirtämiseen saa käyttää vain tiukasti moottorisovittimeen • Boilerin syöttö
kiinnitettyjä hihnoja. • Laitosten peseminen
Lisätietoja yksikön turvallisesta kiinnityksestä on kohdassa Kuva 4. • Jäähdytys (esimerkiksi ilmastointi ja jäähdytys)
• Sammutustyö
Yksikkö ilman moottoria
Jos yksikön mukana ei toimiteta moottoria, kalibroitu haarukanmuotoinen
välilevy on jo asetettu sovittimen ja voimansiirtokytkimen väliin. Välilevyn
82 e-SV - Suomi
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
4 Asennus
Varotoimenpiteet
VAROITUS:
• Noudata voimassa olevia turvallisuussääntöjä.
Seuraava kaava koskee moottoreita, jotka on toimitettu käyttöpään laakeri • Käytä sopivaa laitetta ja suojausta.
aksiaalisesti lukittuna (esimerkiksi Lowaran vakiomoottorin e-SV:tä varten), • Tarkista aina voimassa olevat paikalliset ja/tai kansalliset asen-
katso Kuva 6. Ota muissa tilanteissa yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon. nuspaikkaa sekä vesi- ja sähköliitäntöjä koskevat säädökset.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
VAROITUS:
P1max Maksimitulopaine • Varmista, että pätevä sähköteknikko on tehnyt kaikki liitännät
Pmax Pumpun tuottama maksimipaine ja että ne ovat voimassa olevien säädösten mukaisia.
• Varmista ennen yksikköön kohdistuvan työn aloittamista, että
PN Suurin käyttöpaine yksikkö ja ohjauspaneeli ovat jännitteettömiä eivätkä voi tulla
jännitteellisiksi. Tämä koskee myös ohjauspiiriä.
e-SV - Suomi 83
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
VAROITUS: Varotoimenpiteet
• Liitä aina ulkoinen suojajohdin maadoitusliittimeen ennen
muiden sähköliitäntöjen tekemistä. VAROITUS:
• Kaikki sähkölaitteet on maadoitettava. Tämä koskee pumppu-
laitetta, voimanlähdettä ja valvontalaitteistoa. Varmista testaa- • Käytä putkia, jotka sopivat pumpun maksimityöpaineelle. Jos
malla, että maajohto on oikein liitetty. näin ei toimita, seurauksena voi olla järjestelmän rikkoutumi-
nen ja siitä aiheutuva vammautumisvaara.
• Jos moottorikaapeli on vahingossa sysätty löysälle, maadoitus-
johtimen tulee olla viimeinen johdin, joka löystyy liitännässä. • Varmista, että pätevä sähköteknikko on tehnyt kaikki liitännät
Varmista, että maadoitusjohdin on vaihejohdinta pitempi. Tä- ja että ne ovat voimassa olevien säädösten mukaisia.
mä ohje koskee moottorikaapelin molempia päitä.
• Käytä lisäsuojausta tappavaa iskua vastaan. Asenna herkkä dif- HUOMAUTUS:
ferentiaalikytkin (30 mA) [jäännösvirtalaite RCD].
Huomioi kaikki paikallisviranomaisten julkaisemat säädökset, jos pumppu on
liitetty kunnalliseen vesijärjestelmään. Jos viranomaiset vaativat, asenna imu-
4.2 Laitoksen vaatimukset puolelle asianmukainen takaisinvirtauksen estolaite.
HUOMAUTUS:
Älä ylitä pumpun imukapasiteettia, sillä se voi aiheuttaa kavitaatiota ja pum-
pun vaurioitumisen.
84 e-SV - Suomi
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
VAROITUS: HUOMAUTUS:
Kiristä kaapeliläpiviennit huolellisesti estääksesi kaapelin luistamisen ja
• Tarkista käyttöohjeista, onko suojalaite toimitettu, kun käyte- kosteuden pääsyn kytkentärasiaan.
tään muuta kuin vakiomoottoria.
• Jos moottori on varustettu automaattisilla lämpösuojaimilla, 5. Jos moottorissa ei ole automaattisesti nollautuvaa lämpösuojaa, säädä
varo odottamattomia käynnistyksiä ylikuormitustilanteissa. ylikuormitussuoja alla olevan luettelon mukaisesti.
Älä käytä sellaisia moottoreita palokuntasovelluksissa ja • Jos moottoria käytetään täydellä kuormalla, aseta arvoksi sähkö-
sprinklerijärjestelmissä. pumpun nimellisvirta-arvo (tietokilpi)
• Jos moottoria käytetään osakuormalla, aseta arvoksi vetovirta (esi-
merkiksi virtapihdeillä mitattu).
HUOMAUTUS: • Jos pumpussa on tähtikolmiokäynnistysjärjestelmä, säädä lämpörele
• Käytä ainoastaan dynaamisesti tasapainotettuja moottoreita, joissa on 58 %:iin nimellis- tai vetovirrasta (vain kolmivaihemoottorit).
puolikokoinen kiila akselin jatkeessa (IEC 60034-14) ja jossa on normaali
värähtelynopeus (N).
• Verkkovirran jännitteen ja taajuuden tulee vastata tietokilvessä olevia tie- 5 Käyttöönotto, käynnistys,
toja.
• Käytä vain yksivaihe- tai kolmivaihemoottoreita, joiden koko ja teho on
käyttö ja sammutus
eurooppalaisten standardien mukaisia.
Varotoimenpiteet
Moottorit voivat yleensä toimia seuraavien verkkojännitetoleranssien mukai-
sesti: VAROITUS:
• Varmista, että poistuva neste ei voi aiheuttaa vahinkoja eikä
Taajuus Hz Vaihe ~ UN [V] ± % loukkaantumisia.
50 1 220 – 240 ± 6 • Moottorin suojaimet saattavat käynnistää sen uudelleen odot-
3 230/400 ± 10 tamatta. Tämä saattaa aiheuttaa vakavan vamman.
400/690 ± 10 • Älä koskaan käytä pumppua ilman, että kytkinsuojus on asen-
nettu asianmukaisesti.
60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
3 220/380 ± 5 HUOMIO:
380/660 ± 10 • Pumpun ja moottorin ulkopintojen lämpötila voi ylittää 40 ºC
(104 ºF) käytön aikana. Älä kosketa mitään rungon osaa ilman
Käytä määräysten mukaista kaapelia, jossa on 3 johdinta (2 + maa) yksivai- suojavarusteita.
heisissa versioissa ja 4 johdinta (3 + maa) kolmivaiheisissa versioissa. • Älä laita mitään palavaa materiaalia pumpun lähelle.
Sähköpumppu ja moottori:
Kaapeliläpivienti
Kaapelin ulkohalkaisija-alue, mm
Tyyppi
M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
SM X – –
PLM X X X
LLM X X X
43 sulakkeet aM (moottorin käynnistys) tai magneettilämpökytkin, käyrä C ja Icn ≥ 4,5 kA, tai muu vastaava laite.
44 Ylikuormituksen lämpörele, toimintaluokka 10 A + sulakkeet aM (moottorin käynnistys), tai moottorin suojauksen magneettilämpökytkin, toimintaluokka 10 A.
e-SV - Suomi 85
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
Melutaso VAROITUS:
Jos haluat tietoja Lowaran toimittamalla moottorilla varustettujen yksiköiden • Huollon saa suorittaa vain ammattitaitoinen ja pätevä henkilö.
melutasoista, katso Taulukko 10. • Noudata voimassa olevia turvallisuussääntöjä.
• Käytä sopivaa laitetta ja suojausta.
5.1 Esitäytä pumppu. • Varmista, että poistuva neste ei voi aiheuttaa vahinkoja eikä
loukkaantumisia.
Lisätietoa tulpan sijoittamisesta on kohdassa Kuva 15.
6.1 Huolto
Asennukset, joissa nesteen pinta on pumpun yläpuolella (imupää)
Pumppu ei tarvitse säännöllistä määräaikaishuoltoa. Jos käyttäjä haluaa mää-
rittää määräaikaishuoltovälit, ne riippuvat pumpattavan nesteen tyypistä ja
Kuva, jossa pumpun osat näkyvät, on kohdassa Kuva 16. pumpun käyttöolosuhteista.
1. Sulje pumpun myötäsuunnassa oleva sulkuventtiili. Valitse soveltuvat Ota yhteys myynti- ja huolto-osastoon, jos sinulla on kysyttävää tai haluat
vaiheet: tietoja määräaikaishuolloista.
2. Sarja 1, 3, 5:
a) Avaa tyhjennystulpan tappia (2). Nestepään puhdistaminen ja/tai kuluneiden osien vaihtaminen saattaa vaatia
b) Irrota täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1) ja avaa vastasuunnassa olevaa sul- ylimääräisiä huoltotoimenpiteitä.
kuventtiiliä, kunnes reiästä virtaa vettä.
c) Kiristä tyhjennystulpan tappi (2). 6.2 Kiristysmomentit
d) Asenna täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1) takaisin.
3. Sarja 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: Lisätietoja kiristysmomenttiarvoista on kohdissa Taulukko 18, Taulukko 19 ja
Taulukko 20.
a) Irrota täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1) ja avaa vastasuunnassa olevaa sul-
kuventtiiliä, kunnes reiästä virtaa vettä. Tietoja putkiston laippoihin kohdistamasta työntö- ja vääntövoimasta: Kuva
b) Sulje täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1). Täyttötulppaa (3) voidaan käyttää 21.
tulpan (1) sijasta.
6.3 Vaihda sähkömoottori
Asennukset, joissa nesteen pinta on pumpun alapuolella (imukorkeus)
Pumpun mukana toimitetaan kalibroitu haarukanmuotoinen välilevy, joka
Kuva, jossa pumpun osat näkyvät, on kohdassa Kuva 17. helpottaa moottorin kytkentää ja vaihtamista.
1. Avaa pumpun vastasuunnassa oleva sulkuventtiili ja sulje myötäsuun-
nassa oleva sulkuventtiili. Valitse soveltuvat vaiheet: • Moottorin vaihto-ohjeet ovat kohdassa Kuva 23.
2. Sarja 1, 3, 5: Jos kalibroitua haarukanmuotoista välilevyä ei ole saatavilla, käytä 5 ±
0,1 mm:n (0,2 ± 0,004 tuuman) välilevyä.
a) Avaa tyhjennystulpan tappia (2).
b) Irrota täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1) ja täytä pumppua suppilon avulla,
kunnes reiästä virtaa vettä. 6.4 Vaihda mekaaninen tiiviste
c) Asenna täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1) takaisin.
d) Kiristä tyhjennystulpan tappi (2). Sarja Ohje
3. Sarja 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: 1, 3, 5 Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon.
a) Irrota täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1) ja täytä pumppua suppilon (4) 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 kW Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon.
avulla, kunnes reiästä virtaa vettä. 10, 15, 22: > 4 kW Katso ohjeet kohdassa Kuva 24. Käytä alkoholia puhdis-
b) Asenna täyttö- ja kennotulppa (1) takaisin. Täyttötulppaa (3) voi- tukseen ja voiteluun.
daan käyttää tulpan (1) sijasta.
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Katso ohjeet kohdassa Kuva 24. Käytä alkoholia puhdis-
tukseen ja voiteluun.
5.2 Tarkista pyörimissuunta (kolmivaihemoottori)
86 e-SV - Suomi
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
Sähköpumppu käynnistyy, mutta lämpösuoja laukeaa vaihtelevan ajan kulut- Syy Korjaustoimi
tua.
tai pienempi kuin tietokilvessä ilmoi-
Syy Korjaustoimi tettu raja.
Pumpussa on vieraita esineitä (kiinteitä Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto- Pumppu on ylikuormittunut, koska Tarkista todelliset tehovaatimukset
tai kuituisia aineita), jotka ovat jumitta- osastoon. pumpattava neste on liian tiheää ja pumpattavan nesteen ominaisuuksien
neet juoksupyörän. viskoosista. mukaan ja vaihda moottori vastaavasti.
Pumppu on ylikuormittunut, koska Tarkista todelliset tehovaatimukset Moottorin laakerit ovat kuluneet. Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osas-
pumpattava neste on liian tiheää ja vis- pumpattavan nesteen ominaisuuk- toon.
koosista. sien mukaan ja ota yhteyttä myynti-
ja huolto-osastoon. 7.6 Sähköpumppu käynnistyy, mutta
Pumppu toimii mutta syöttää liian vähän tai ei lainkaan vettä. järjestelmän yleissuojaus aktivoituu
Syy Korjaustoimi
Pumppu on tukkeutunut. Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon. Syy Korjaustoimi
Oikosulku sähköjärjestelmässä. Tarkista sähköjärjestelmä.
Alla olevien taulukoiden vianmääritysohjeet on tarkoitettu vain asentajille.
7.7 Sähköpumppu käynnistyy, mutta
7.2 Pääkytkin on päällä, mutta järjestelmän jäännösvirtalaite (RCD)
sähköpumppu ei käynnisty aktivoituu
Syy Korjaustoimi
Syy Korjaustoimi
Maavuoto. Tarkista sähköjärjestelmän komponenttien eristys.
Ei virransyöttöä. • Palauta virransyöttö.
• Varmista, että kaikki virransyötön sähkö-
kytkennät ovat kunnossa. 7.8 Pumppu toimii mutta syöttää liian
Pumpussa oleva lämpösuoja Odota, kunnes pumppu on jäähtynyt. Läm-
vähän tai ei lainkaan vettä
(jos on) on lauennut. pösuoja nollautuu automaattisesti.
Sähköohjauspaneelin lämpöre- Nollaa lämpösuoja. Syy Korjaustoimi
le tai moottorin suojakytkin on Pumpussa tai putkistossa on
lauennut. • Poista ilma
ilmaa.
Kuivakäynnin estolaite on Tarkista: Pumppua ei ole esitäytetty oi- Pysäytä pumppu ja suorita esitäyttö uudel-
lauennut. • veden korkeus säiliössä tai vesijohdon kein. leen. Jos ongelma jatkuu:
paine • Tarkista, että mekaaninen tiiviste ei vuo-
• suojalaite ja sen liitäntäkaapelit da.
Pumpun tai apupiirien sulak- Vaihda sulakkeet. • Tarkista, että imuputken tiukkuus on oi-
keet ovat palaneet. kea.
• Vaihda vuotavat venttiilit.
7.3 Sähköpumppu käynnistyy, mutta Päästöpuolta on kuristettu lii- Avaa venttiili.
lämpösuoja laukeaa tai sulake palaa kaa.
välittömästi Venttiilit ovat lukkiutuneet Pura ja puhdista venttiilit.
kiinni tai osittain kiinni.
Syy Korjaustoimi Pumppu on tukkeutunut. Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon.
Virransyöttökaapeli on vaurioitu- Tarkista kaapeli ja vaihda se tarvittaessa. Putkisto on tukkeutunut. Tarkista ja puhdista putket.
nut.
Juoksupyörän pyörimissuunta Vaihda kahden vaiheen paikka moottorin ri-
Lämpösuoja tai sulakkeet eivät Tarkista komponentit ja vaihda tarvit- on väärä (kolmivaiheinen ver- viliittimessä tai sähköohjauspaneelissa.
sovi moottorin virralle. taessa. sio).
Sähkömoottori on oikosulussa. Tarkista komponentit ja vaihda tarvit- Imukorkeus on liian suuri, tai Tarkista pumpun toimintaolosuhteet. Tee
taessa. imuputkien virtausvastus on tarvittaessa seuraavat asiat:
Moottori ylikuormittuu. Tarkista pumpun käyttöolosuhteet ja liian suuri. • Pienennä imukorkeutta
nollaa suoja. • Suurenna imuputken halkaisijaa
e-SV - Suomi 87
fi - Alkuperäisten ohjeiden käännös
Syy Korjaustoimi
Pumpun kavitaatio Pienennä tarvittavaa virtausnopeutta sulkemalla osit-
tain sulkuventtiili pumpun alapuolella. Jos ongelma
ei poistu, tarkista pumpun käyttöolosuhteet (esim.
korkeusero, virtausvastus, nesteen lämpötila).
Moottorin laakerit Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon.
ovat kuluneet.
Pumpun sisällä on Ota yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon.
vieraita esineitä.
Ota muissa tilanteissa yhteyttä myynti- ja huolto-osastoon.
88 e-SV - Suomi
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
Hættur út af heitu yfirborði eru skilgreindar með sérstöku tákni sem kemur í
1.1 Inngangur stað hefðbundinna hættutákna:
ATHUGA:
Leiðbeiningar
Geymið þessa handbók ef það skyldi þurfa að leita í hana síðar. Og hafið
hana alltaf til taks nálægt einingunni. Leiðbeiningar og viðvörun, sem fram koma í þessari handbók, eiga við um
staðlaða gerð eins og lýst er í sölugögnum. Sérútgáfur af dælum kunna að
koma með leiðbeiningarbæklingum til viðbótar. Sjá sölusamning varðandi
1.1.1 Óreyndir notendur breytingar eða eiginleika á sérútgáfum. Varðandi leiðbeiningar, aðstæður eða
tilvik, sem ekki er tekið á, í handbókinni eða í sölugögnum, skal hafa sam-
band við næstu Lowara þjónustumiðstöð.
AÐVÖRUN:
Ætlast er til að eingöngu hæft starfsfólk starfræki dæluna.
1.3 Förgun umbúða og vöru
Athugið eftirfarandi varúðarráðstafanir: Fylgið reglugerðum og reglum sem eru í gildi á hverjum stað varðandi förg-
• Fólk sem er hamlað að einhverju leyti ætti ekki að starfrækja dæluna nema un á rusli.
undir leiðsögn eða eftir rétta þjálfun fagfólks.
• Börn skulu vera undir eftirliti þannig að tryggt sé að þau séu ekki að leik á 1.4 Ábyrgð
eða kringum dæluna.
Varðandi upplýsingar um ábyrgð, sjá sölusamning.
1.2 Öryggishugtök og -tákn
1.5 Viðhald á
Um öryggisskilaboð
AÐVÖRUN:
Það er mjög mikilvægt að þú lesir, skiljir og fylgir öryggisskilaboðum og regl- Notið aðeins upprunalega varahluti til að skipta um slitna eða
um vandlega áður en varan er meðhöndluð. Þau eru birt til að reyna að bilaða íhluti. Ef notaðir eru varahlutir sem ekki eiga við getur
koma í veg fyrir eftirfarandi hættu: það valdið truflunum, skemmdum og líkamstjóni sem og fellt úr
• Líkamstjón og heilbrigðisvandamál gildi ábyrgðina.
• Skemmdir á búnaði
• Bilun í búnaði VARÚÐ:
Tilgreinið ávallt nákvæmlega gerð vöru og íhlutanúmer þegar
Hættustig beðið er um tæknilegar upplýsingar eða varahluti frá sölu- og
Hættustig Ábending þjónustudeild.
Hættulegar aðstæður sem, ef ekkert
HÆTTA: er að gert, munu valda dauða eða al- Varðandi frekari upplýsingar um varahluti vöru, sjá Mynd 25, Mynd 26, eða
varlegum slysum. Mynd 27.
Þetta eru dæmi um aðra flokka sem geta komið upp. Þeir flokkast sem ven-
juleg hættustig og geta notað meðfylgjandi tákn:
• Hætta á að kremjast
• Hætta á skurðum
• Hætta á sprengingu út frá rafmagni
e-SV - Íslenska 89
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
UPPFYLLIR VIÐEIGANDI GREINAR EFTIRFARANDI EVRÓPSK- halda dæluhjólunum í réttri öxulstöðu. Á meðan á flutningi stendur er öxlin-
RA TILSKIPANA: um líka haldið í stöðu með einangrunarplasti og plastólum til að koma í veg
fyrir skemmdir.
• VÉLBÚNAÐUR 2006/42/EC (TÆKNILEG GÖGN ERU FÁANLEG
FRÁ LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). Boltar og rær til að festa vélina fylgja ekki. Varðandi frekari upplýsingar um
OG EFTIRFARANDI TÆKNISTAÐLA: hvernig eigi að tengja vélina, sjá Mynd 23.
• EN 809 AÐVÖRUN:
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 Dælu og vél, sem keypt eru sitt í hvoru lagi og síðan tengd sam-
an, er litið á sem nýja vél undir Vélatilskipuninni 2006/42/EC.
AMEDEO VALENTE Sá sem tengir saman samstæðuna er ábyrgur fyrir öllum öryggisa-
triðum varðandi hana.
(FORSTJÓRI VERKFRÆÐIDEILDAR OG
DEILDAR FYRIR RANNSÓKNIR OG ÞRÓ-
UN)
2.3 Geymsluleiðbeiningar
rev.01
2.2 Viðmiðunarreglur um flutninga SV dælurnar 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, og 22 eru fáanlegar í öðrum útfærslum allt eftir
staðsetningu inntaks- og framrásarops og lögun tengiflangs.
Varúðarráðstafanir Hægt er að afgreiða dælusamstæðuna (dælu og rafvél) eða dæluna sér.
AÐVÖRUN: ATHUGA:
• Fylgið slysavarnarreglum sem eru í gildi. Ef keypt hefur verið dæla án vélar, skal tryggja að vélin henti til að tengjast
• Hætta á að kremjast. Samstæðan og íhlutir geta verið þungir. dælunni.
Notið réttar lyftiaðferðir og klæðist ávallt skóm með stáltá.
Athugið brúttóþyngd sem sýnd er utan á umbúðum til að geta valið réttan Pakkdós
lyftibúnað.
Raðir Helstu dælueiginleikar
Staðsetning og festingar 1, 3, 5 Nafnþvermál 12 mm (0,37 tommur), ójafnvægisstillt, hægrih-
Flytja má samstæðuna annaðhvort lárétt eða lóðrétt. Gangið úr skugga um andar snúningur, K útgáfa (EN12756)
að falliðl sé tryggilega fest meðan hún er flutt og geti hvorki skriðið né oltið. 10, 15, 22 Nafnþvermál 16 mm (0,63 tommur), ójafnvægisstillt, hægrih-
andar snúningur, K útgáfa (EN12756)
AÐVÖRUN: Jafnvægisstillt við vélarafl ≥ 5 kW
Ekki skal nota augabolta sem skrúfaður er á vélina til að lyfta
með allri dælusamstæðunni. 33, 46, 66, Nafnþvermál 22 mm (0,86 in.), jafnvægisstillt, snýst til hægri,
92, 125 K gerð (EN 12756)
• Vefja skal ólum um vélina ef hún er 0,25 - 4,0 kW.
Notkunarsvið
• Nota skal reipi eða ólar sem tengjast flöngsunum tveimur (augaboltunum
ef þeir fylgja) sem eru nálægt samskeytunum milli vélar og dælu, ef vélin Dælan er gerð fyrir:
er 5,5 - 55,0 kW. • Vatnsdreifikerfi fyrir almenning og iðnað.
• Nota má augabolta sem skrúfaðir eru í vélina, eingöngu til að færa til • Vökvun (t.d. akuryrkja og íþróttamannvirki)
staka vélina eða ef ekki er búið að jafnvægisstilla, til að lyfta hluta af sam-
stæðunni lóðrétt úr láréttri stöðu. • Vatnshreinsun
• Ef færa á eingöngu dæluna, skal nota ólar, sem festar eru tryggilega við • Fæðivatn í katla
breytistykkið í vélina. • Þvottaverksmiðjur
Varðandi frekari upplýsingar um hvernig eigi að koma tryggilega böndum á • Kæling (t.d. loftkæling og frysting)
dæluna, sjá Mynd 4. • Slökkvistarf
Samstæða án vélar
Ef samstæðan er ekki afgreidd með vél, er þegar búið að koma fyrir gaffal-
laga skinnu á milli breytistykkis og tengis. Millileggið er sett á milli til að
90 e-SV - Íslenska
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
Röng notkun vörunnar leiðir til að ábyrgðin fellur úr gildi. Séraðstæður FPM (FKM) -10°C (14°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C46
(248°F)
Dæmi um ranga notkun: Séraðstæður PTFE 0°C (32°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
• Vökvar hæfa ekki efninu sem dælan er gerð úr
• Hættulegir vökvar (t.d. eitraðir, sprengifimir, eldfimir eða tærandi vökvar) Varðandi sérþarfi skal hafa samband við sölu- og þjónustudeild.
• Drykkjarföng önnur en vatn (t.d. léttvín eða mjólk)
Dæmi um ranga uppsetningu: Hámarks fjöldi gangsetninga á klst.
Taflan sýnir fjölda leyfilegra gangsetninga á klst fyrir vélar frá Lowara:
• Hættulegir staðir (t.d. sprengifimt eða tærandi andrúmsloft).
• Staður þar sem hitastig er mjög hátt eða loftræsting slæm. kW 0.25 - 4.00 - 11.0 - 18.5 - 30.0 - 45.0 55.0
• Uppsetning utanhúss án varnar gegn regni eða frosti. 3.00 7.50 15.0 22.0 37.0
Gangs- 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
HÆTTA: etningar
Notið ekki þessa dælu til að sjá um eldfima og sprengifima vö- á klst.
kva.
ATHUGA:
ATHUGA: Ef notuð er önnur vél en sú sem kemur stöðluð með rafmagnsdælunni skal
• Notið ekki þessa dælu til að sjá um vökva með slípandi, föstum eða tre- kanna viðeigandi leiðbeiningar til að finna leyfilegan fjölda gangsetninga á
fjaríkum efnum. klst.
• Ekki skal nota dæluna fyrir meira streymi en sagt er fyrir um á merkiplötu.
3.3 Merkiplata
Sérstök notkun
Merkiplatan er málmmerking sem er staðsett á millistykkinu. Á merkiplöt-
Hafið samband við sölu- og þjónustudeild í eftirfarandi tilvikum: unni eru helstu tæknilegu upplýsingar. Varðandi frekari upplýsingar, sjá Mynd
• Ef eðlisþyngd og/eða seigjugildi dæluvökvans verður meira en í vatni, t.d. 1.
vatni með glýkóli; þar eð þá getur þurft aflmeiri vél. Merkiplatan gefur upplýsingar um efni pakkningar og vélarþéttingar [me-
• Ef dæluvökvinn er meðhöndlaður með efnablöndum (til dæmis mýktur, chanical seal]. Varðandi túlkun á kóðanum á merkiplötunni, sjá Mynd 2.
afjónaður, steinefni fjarlægð úr honum o.s.frv.).
• Ef dæla verður sett upp lárétt, skal fara fram á sérstaka útgáfur af festing- Heiti vöru
um.
Sjá Mynd 3 varðandi útskýringar á auðkennistákni fyrir dælu og varðandi
• Allar aðstæður sem víkja frá þeim sem lýst er og tengjast eðli vökvans. dæmi.
4 Uppsetning
Varúðarráðstafanir
AÐVÖRUN:
Eftirfarandi formúla gildir fyrir vélar sem koma með endadrifslegu sem er • Fylgið slysavarnarreglum sem eru í gildi.
læst í ásstefnu (eins og staðlaðar Lowara vélar fyrir (e-SV), sjá Mynd 6. Varð- • Notið viðeigandi búnað og varnir.
andi aðrar aðstæður skal hafa samband við sölu- og þjónustudeild. • Takið ávallt mið af lögum, reglugerðum og stöðlum á hverjum
P1max + Pmax≤ PN stað varðandi val á uppsetningarstað ásamt vatns- og raf-
magnstengingum.
P1max Hámarks inntaksþrýstingur
AÐVÖRUN:
Pmax Hámarksþrýstingur frá dælu
• Tryggið að allar tengingar séu gerðar af viðurkenndum tæk-
PN Hámarks vinnuþrýstingur nimönnum í uppsetningu og séu í samræmi við gildandi regl-
ur.
Hitabil vökva • Áður en farið er að vinna við eininguna skal tryggja að hún og
stýritaflan séu einangruð frá rafmagnsinntaki og ekki sé hægt
Útgáfa Þétting Lágmark Hámark45 Hámark að setja spennu á þau. Þetta á sömuleiðis við um stýrirásina.
e-SV - Íslenska 91
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
4.1 Jarðtenging Z Hámarks hæð þar sem hægt er að setja upp dælu (m)
Leiðbeiningar ATHUGA:
Fylgið eftirfarandi leiðbeiningum varðandi staðsetningu vörunnar: Fylgið öllum reglum sem gefnar eru út af stjórnvöldum sveitarfélaga ef dæl-
• Tryggið að ekkert hindri eðlilegt streymi kæliloftsins sem vélarviftan dreg- an er tengd við vatnskerfi þeirra. Ef stjórnvöld gera kröfur þar um, setjið þá
ur. viðeigandi bakflæðisbúnað á soghliðina.
• Gangið úr skugga um að uppsetningarsvæðið sé varið fyrir vökvalekum
og flóðum.
Gátlisti fyrri soglagnir og frárennslislagnir
• Ef hægt er skal koma dælunni fyrir svolítið yfir gólfhæð.
Athugið hvort eftirfarandi kröfur eru uppfylltar:
• Umhverfishitinn skal vera á milli 0°C (+32°F) og +40°C (+104°F).
• Rakastig andrúmslofts í kring skal vera undir 50% við +40°C (+104°F). • Allar pípulagnir eru með sérundirstöður. Pípulagnir skulu ekki valda álagi
• Hafið samband við sölu- og þjónustudeild ef: á samstæðuna [eininguna]
• Rakastig fer upp fyrir viðmiðunar gildi. • Barkar eða pípusmokkar eru notaðir til að komast hjá að titringur frá
dælu berist í pípulagnir og öfugt.
• Herbergishiti fer yfir +40°C (+104°F).
• Notið langar beygjur, forðist hné sem veita of mikið streymisviðnám.
• Samstæðan er staðsett meira en 1000 m (3000 ft) yfir sjávarmáli. Það
getur þurft að færa niður afköst vélar eða skipta henni út fyrir sterkari • Sogpípulagnir eru fullkomlega vatns- og loftþéttar.
vél. • Ef dælan er tengd við opna rás skal þvermál inntaks fara eftir uppsetning-
Varðandi upplýsingar um hve mikið eigi að færa niður vélina, sjá Tafla 8. araðstæðum. Sogpípulögnin skal ekki vera grennri en þvermál sogopsins.
• Ef inntakslögn þarf að vera stærri en inntak dælu, skal setja upp hjámið-
Dælustöður og rými [millibil?]. juminnkun.
• Ef dæla er staðsett ofan við vökvayfirborð, skal setja upp sogloka á enda
ATHUGA: inntakslagnar.
Lárétt uppsetning dælunnar þarfnast séraðlögunar. • Soglokinn er alveg á kafi í vökvanum þannig að loft kemst sleppur ekki
með í iðukastinu inn í dæluhjólið, þegar vökvayfirborð er í lægstu stöðu
og dælan er uppsett ofan við vökvayfirborð.
Sjáið fyrir nægri birtu og rými í kringum dæluna. Sjáið til að gott aðgengi sé • Stopplokar af réttir stærð eru settir á inntakslögn og á framrásarlögn (af-
til uppsetningar og viðhaldsaðgerða. tan við einstreymislokann) til að stýra afköstum dælunnar, en einnig vegna
skoðunar og viðhaldsvinnu.
Uppsetning ofan við vökvayfirborð (soglyftihæð) • Einstreymisloki er settur upp í framrásarlögn til að hindra bakflæði inn í
Fræðileg hámarks soglyftihæð dælu er 10,33m. Í reynd verður sogkraftur dæluna þegar slökkt er á henni.
dælunnar fyrir áhrifum af eftirfarandi atriðum:
AÐVÖRUN:
• Hitastigi vökvans
Ekki skal nota stopploka á framrásarlögn í lokaðri stöðu til að
• Hæð yfir sjávarmáli (í opnu kerfi) hægja á dælu lengur en nokkrar sekúndur. Ef dælan þarf að vera í
• Kerfisþrýstingi (í lokuðu kerfi) gangi með framrásarlögn lokaða lengur en nokkrar sekúndur,
• Mótstöðu í pípulögnum skal setja upp hjáveitulögn til að hindra yfirhitun á vatni inni í
• Innri mótstaða dælunnar sjálfrar dælunni.
• Hæðarmismun
Eftirfarandi jafna er notuð til að reikna út hve hátt yfir vökvayfirborði megi Varðandi teikningar sem sýna pípulagnakröfur, sjá Mynd 12.
setja upp dælu:
(pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5 4.3 Raftæknilegar kröfur
• Reglur sem eru í gildi á staðnum eru æðri þessum sérkröfum.
pb Loftþrýstingur í börum (í lokuðum kerfum er kerfisþrýst- • Varðandi slökkvikerfi (brunahana og/eða úðakerfi), skal fara eftir gildandi
ingur) reglum.
NPSH [Net Gildi innri mótstöðu dælunnar gefin upp í metrum.
Gaumlisti fyrir raftengingu
Positive Suc- Athugið hvort eftirfarandi kröfur eru uppfylltar:
tion Head]
• Rafleiðarar eru varðir fyrir háum hita, titringi og hnjaski.
Hf Heildartöp í metrum vegna streymis vökvans í gegnum • Á rafveitulögninni er:
sogpípulögn dælunnar • Skammhlaupsvörn
Hv Gufuþrýstingur í metrum sem samsvarar hitastigi vökvans • Mjög næmur mismunarofi (30 mA) [leifastraumstæki RCD] til að veita
viðbótarvörn gegn raflosti.
T °C • Skilrofi á aðallögn með snertibili a.m.k. 3 mm.
0.5 Ráðlögð öryggisfrávik (m)
92 e-SV - Íslenska
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
Gaumlisti fyrir stjórnskápinn 1. Láttu dæluna á steypta undirstöðu eða sambærilega málmundirstöðu.
Ef titringurinn veldur truflunum, þá er hægt að koma fyrir dempandi
ATHUGA: stoðum á milli dælunnar og undirstöðunnar.
Stjórnskápur skal vera í samræmi við afköst rafknúnu dælunnar. Ef málgildin 2. Fjarlægðu tappana sem hylja götin fyrir festingarnar.
eru í ekki í samræmi gæti það gert vörnina á vélinni óvirka. 3. Stilltu saman dæluna og flansana á báðum hliðum dælunnar.
Kannaðu samstillingu boltanna.
4. Notaðu boltana til að festa pípurnar við dæluna.
Athugið hvort eftirfarandi kröfur eru uppfylltar: Ekki neyða pípurnar í festingarnar.
• Stjórnskápur skal verja vélina fyrir yfirálagi og skammhlaupi. 5. Festu dæluna vandlega með boltunum við steypugrunninn eða mál-
• Setjið upp rétta yfirálagsvörn (hitaliða eða vélarálagsvörn) mgrunnvirki.
Dælugerð Vörn
Einfasa stöðluð rafknúin dæla ≤ 1,5 • Innbyggð sjálfvirk hita-straum- 4.4.2 Rafbúnaðar uppsetningar
kW vörn (vélarálagsvörn) 1. Til að auðvelda tengingu er hægt að snúa vélinni til að fá sem þægileg-
• Skammhlaupsvörn (skal fylgja asta stöðu fyrir tengingu:
frá uppsetningaraðila)47 a) Fjarlægðu boltana fjóra sem festir vélina við dæluna.
Þrífasa rafknúin dæla og aðrar ein- • Hitaálagsvörn (skal fylgja frá b) Snúðu vélinni í þá stöðu sem óskað er eftir. Ekki fjarlægja tenging-
fasa dælur48 uppsetningaraðila) una á milli vélarinnar og snúningsáss dælunnar.
• Skammhlaupsvörn (skal fylgja c) Skiptu um boltana fjóra og hertu þá.
frá uppsetningaraðila) 2. Taktu skrúfurnar úr tengjahlífinni.
• Stjórnskápurinn skal búinn varnarkerfi gegn þurrdælingu sem þrýstirofi, 3. Tengdu og festu rafstrengina samkvæmt viðeigandi raftengimynd.
flotrofi, skynjarar og önnur viðlíka tæki eru tengd við. Varðandi raftengimyndir, sjá Mynd 14. Skýringarmyndirnar er einnig að
• Mælt er með eftirfarandi tækjum inntaksmegin á dælunni. finna aftan á tengjahlífinni.
• Ef vatni er dælt úr vatnskerfi skal nota þrýstirofa. a) Tengdu jarðleiðslurnar.
• Þegar dælt er vatni úr geymi eða safngeymi, skal nota flotrofa eða Gakktu úr skugga um að jarðleiðslurnar séu lengri en fasaleiðsl-
skynjara. urnar.
• Þegar hitaliðar eru notaðir, er mælt með rafliðum sem eru næmir fyrir fas- b) Tengdu fasaleiðslurnar.
abilunum.
4. Skiptu um hlíf á tengikassa.
Gátlisti fyrir vél ATHUGA:
Herðið strengþétti vandlega til að hindra að strengurinn renni og raki
AÐVÖRUN: komist inn í tengikassann.
• Lesið notkunarreglur til að tryggja að varnarbúnaður sé fyrir
hendi ef notuð er önnur en stöðluð vél. 5. Ef vélin er ekki búin með sjálfvirkri endurstillingu hitaálagsvarnar, skal
• Ef vélin er búin sjálfvirkri hitavörn, verið þá viðbúin óvænt- stilla yfirálagsvörn í samræmi við skrána hér að neðan.
um gangsetningum við yfirálag. Ekki skal nota slíkar vélar fyr- • Ef vélin er notuð á fullu álagi, skal setja gildið á nafnstraum rafvél-
ir eldvarnir og slökkvikerfi. arinnar (á merkiplötu)
• Ef vélin er notuð á hlutaálagi, skal setja gildið á rekstrarstraum raf-
vélarinnar (t.d. mælt með straummæli)
ATHUGA: • Ef dælan er með störnu-þríhyrnings ræsingu, skal stilla hitaliðann á
• Notið aðeins jafnvægisstilltar vélar með hálfan kíl í öxulframlengingunni 58% af nafnstraumi eða rekstrarstraumi (aðeins fyrir þriggja fasa
(IEC 60034-14) og með eðlilegri titringstíðni (N). vélar).
• Inntaksspenna og tíðni skulu vera í samræmi við tæknilegar upplýsingar á
merkiplötu.
• Notið aðeins einfasa og þrífasa vélar þar sem stærðir og afl uppfylla ev-
5 Útfærsla, ræsing, rekstur og
rópska staðla. stöðvun
Vélar geta venjulega starfað við eftirfarandi spennufrávik: Varúðarráðstafanir
Tíðni Hz Fasi ~ UN [Nafnspenna] [V]
±% AÐVÖRUN:
50 1 220 – 240 ± 6 • Tryggið að aftöppunarvökvi valdi hvorki skemmdum né lík-
amstjóni.
3 230/400 ± 10 • Vélarvörnin getur fengið vélina til að fara í gang óvænt. Það
400/690 ± 10 gæti valdið alvarlegu líkamstjóni.
60 1 220 – 230 ± 6 • Aldrei skal láta dælu vinna án þess að tengihlífin sé rétt sett á.
3 220/380 ± 5
380/660 ± 10 VARÚÐ:
• Yfirborð dælu og vélar getur farið yfir 40ºC (104ºF) í rekstri.
Strengir skulu samkvæmt reglunum vera 3ja þráða (2+jarðtenging) á einfasa Snertið enga hluta samstæðunnar án hlífðarbúnaðar.
gerðunum og 4ra þráða (3+jarðtenging) á þrífasa gerðunum. • Látið ekki eldfimt efni nálægt dælunni.
Rafknúin dæla ásamt vél:
Hringþétti með streng
Ytra þvermál strengs í mm
Gerð
M20 x 1,5; 6–12 M25 x 1,5; 13–18 M32 x 1,5; 18-25
SM X – –
PLM X X X
LLM X X X
4.4.1 Vélauppsetning
47 vör aM (vélræsing), eða rafsegul-hitarofi með línurit C og Icn ≥ 4,5 kA eða sambærilegt tæki.
48 Yfirhitaálagsliði í flokki 10A + vör aM (vélræsing) eða vélarvörn með segulkveikju-hitarofa í flokki 10A.
e-SV - Íslenska 93
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
Hávaðastig
AÐVÖRUN:
Varðandi upplýsingar um hávaðastig, sem samstæður með Lowara vél, gefa
frá sér, sjá Tafla 10. • Viðhaldsvinnu og þjónustu skal aðeins hæft og viðurkennt
starfsfólk framkvæma.
5.1 Virkja dæluna • Fylgið slysavarnarreglum sem eru í gildi.
• Notið viðeigandi búnað og varnir.
Varðandi upplýsingar um staðsetningu tappans sjá Mynd 15. • Tryggið að aftöppunarvökvi valdi hvorki skemmdum né lík-
amstjóni.
Uppsetningar þar sem vökvayfirborð er ofan við dæluna
(inntaksþrýstingur) 6.1 Þjónusta
Þessi dæla þarfnast ekki reglulegs viðhalds. Ef notandi óskar að setja upp
Til að sjá skýringarmynd með dæluhlutunum, sjáMynd 16. reglubundna viðhaldsáætlun skal hún miðuð við tegund dæluvökva og starfs-
1. Lokaðu stopplokanum sem er neðan við dæluna. Veldu viðeigandi skilyrði dælunnar.
skref: Hafðu samband við Sölu- og þjónustudeildina fyrir allar beiðnir eða upplýs-
2. Raðir 1, 3, 5: ingar í tengslum við reglubundið viðhald eða þjónustu.
a) Losaðu um pinnnann (2) á aftöppunartappanum.
b) Fjarlægðu áfyllingar- og loftunartappann (1) og opnaðu stopplok- Mikils viðhalds kann að vera þörf til að þrífa vökvaendann og/eða skipta um
ann ofan við þar til vatn rennur út um gatið. slitna hluta.
c) Hertu pinnnann (2) á aftöppunartappanum.
d) Settu áfyllingar- og loftunartappann (1) á sinn stað. 6.2 Snúningsvægi
3. Röð 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Fjarlægðu áfyllingar- og loftunartappann (1) og opnaðu stopplok- Varðandi tölur um snúningsvægi, sjá Tafla 18, Tafla 19, eða Tafla 20.
ann ofan við þar til vatn rennur út um gatið.
b) Lokaðu áfyllingar- og loftunartappanum (1). Hægt er að nota áfyll- Varðandi þrýsting og snúningsvægi á flangsa frá pípulögnum, sjá Mynd 21.
ingartappa (3) í staðinn fyrir (1).
6.3 Skiptu um rafvélina
Uppsetningar þar sem vökvayfirborð er neðan við dæluna
(soglyftihæð) Með dælunni fylgir kvarðað gaffallaga millilegg sem hannað er til auðvelda
tengingu hreyfilsins og endurnýjunarferli.
Til að sjá skýringarmynd með dæluhlutunum, sjáMynd 17.
• Sjá leiðbeiningar um hvernig á að skipta um hreyfil í Mynd 23.
1. Opnaðu stopplokann sem er framan við dæluna og lokaðu stopplok- Ef kvarðaði gaffallaga millileggið er ekki fáanlegt, er notað 5 ± 0,1 mm
anum neðan við dæluna. Veldu viðeigandi skref: millilegg.
2. Röð 1, 3, 5:
a) Losaðu um pinnnann (2) á aftöppunartappanum.
b) Fjarlægðu áfyllingar- og loftunartappann (1) og notaðu trekt til að 6.4 Skiptu um ásþétti
fylla á dæluna þar til vatn rennur út um gatið.
c) Settu áfyllingar- og loftunartappann (1) á sinn stað. Raðir Leiðbeiningar
d) Hertu pinnnann (2) á aftöppunartappanum. 1, 3, 5 Hafðu samband við sölu- og þjónustudeildina.
3. Röð 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 kW Hafðu samband við sölu- og þjónustudeildina.
a) Fjarlægðu áfyllingar- og loftunartappann (1) og notaðu trekt (4) til
að fylla á dæluna þar til vatn rennur út um gatið. 10, 15, 22: > 4 kW Sjá leiðbeiningar í Mynd 24. Notaðu alkóhól til að
b) Settu áfyllingar- og loftunartappann (1) á sinn stað. Hægt er að hreinsa og smyrja.
nota áfyllingartappa (3) í staðinn fyrir (1). 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Sjá leiðbeiningar í Mynd 24. Notaðu alkóhól til að
hreinsa og smyrja.
5.2 Kannaðu snúningsstefnu snúðs (þriggja fasa
vél) 7 Úrræðaleit
Fylgdu þessu ferli fyrir gangsetningu.
7.1 Bilanaleit fyrir notendur
1. Notið örvarnar á millistykki eða á vélarviftuhlíf til að ákvarða rétta
snúningsstefnu. Kveikt er á aðalrofa en rafknúna dælan fer ekki í
2. Ræstu hreyfilinn. gang.
3. Kannaðu í fljótu bragði snúningsáttina með tiliti til tengjahlífarinnar
eða viftuhlíf hreyfilsins. Orsök Lausn
4. Stöðvaðu hreyfilinn. Hitaálagsvörnin sem innbyggð er í Bíddu þar til dælan hefur kólnað. Hit-
5. Ef snúningsáttin er röng, skal gera sem hér segir: dæluna (ef við á) hefur slegið út. aálagsvörnin endurstillist sjálfkrafa.
a) Taktu búnað úr sambandi við rafmagn. Vörnin gegn þurrdælingu hefur Kannaðu vatnsyfirborð í geyminum
b) Í tengjabretti hreyfilsins eða í stjórnborðinu skaltu víxla stöðunni slegið út. eða þrýsting í aðallögn
á tveim til þrem vírum í rafmagnssnúrunni.
Varðandi raftengimynd, sjá Mynd 14. Rafknúna dælan fer í gang en hitaálagsvörnin slær út misfljótt eftir.
c) Kannaðu snúningsáttina aftur.
94 e-SV - Íslenska
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
7.2 Kveikt er á aðalrofa en rafknúna dælan 7.7 Dælan fer í gang, en leifastraumstækið
fer ekki í gang. (RCD) er virkjað
Orsök Lausn
Orsök Lausn
Það er lekastraumur um jarð- Athugaðu einangrun á einingum rafker-
Það er ekkert rafmagn. • Komið rafmagninu aftur á. tengingu. fisins.
• Gakktu úr skugga um að allar rafleiðsl-
urnar séu í lagi.
7.8 Dælan gengur en flytur of lítið eða
Hitaálagsvörnin sem innbyggð Bíddu þar til dælan hefur kólnað. Hitaá-
er í dæluna (ef við á) hefur slegið lagsvörnin endurstillist sjálfkrafa. ekkert vatn
út.
Hitaliði eða vélarvörn í stjórn- Endursettu hitaálagsvörnina. Orsök Lausn
skáp hefur slegið út.
Það er loft í dælu eða lögn- • Losaðu loftið
Vörnin gegn þurrdælingu hefur Athugaðu: um.
slegið út. • vatnsyfirborð í geyminum eða þrýsting Dælan var ekki rétt gangsett. Stöðvaðu dæluna og endurtaktu gangsetning-
í aðallögn arferlið. Ef vandamálið er viðvarandi:
• varnarbúnað og tengdar snúrur • Kannaðu hvort O-hringurinn lekur.
Öryggi fyrir dælu eða aukarásir Skiptu um öryggi. • Kannaðu hvort inntakslögnin er alveg
eru sprungin. þétt.
• Skiptu um alla loka sem leka.
7.3 Rafknúna dælan fer í gang en Of mikið þrengt að á fram- Opnaðu lokann.
hitaálagsvörnin eða bræðivörin slá út strax rásarlögn.
eftir það Lokar eru læstir í lokaðri eða Taktu í sundur lokana og hreinsaðu.
hálflokaðri stöðu.
Orsök Lausn Dælan er stífluð. Hafðu samband við sölu- og þjónustudeild-
Rafmagnssnúran er skemmd. Farðu yfir snúruna og skiptu um ef þörf ina.
reynist. Pípulögnin er stífluð. Kannaðu og hreinsaðu pípulagnir.
Hitaálagsvörnin eða bræðivörin Farðu yfir einingarnar og skiptu um eftir Dæluhjólið snýst í ranga átt Víxlaðu tveim fösum á tengibretti vélarinnar
henta ekki fyrir vélarstrauminn. þörfum. (þriggja fasa gerð). eða í stjórnskápnum
Rafvélin er skammhleypt. Farðu yfir einingarnar og skiptu um eftir Sogkrafturinn er of hár eða Kannaðu vinnsluaðstæður dælunnar. Ef
þörfum. flæðimótstaðan í sogpípun- nauðsyn krefur skaltu:
Hreyfillinn ofhleðst. Farðu yfir vinnsluaðstæður dælunnar og um er of mikil. • Minnka soglyftihæð
endurræstu vörnina.
• Auka þvermál inntakspípu
e-SV - Íslenska 95
is - Þýðing á upprunalegum leiðbeiningum
Orsök Lausn
Straumtæring dælu Dragðu úr nauðsynlegum flæðihraða með því að
loka að hluta kveikt-slökkt lokanum neðan við dæl-
una. Ef vandamálið er viðvarandi skaltu kanna ásig-
komulag dælu (t.d. hæðarmun, streymismótstöðu,
vökvahitastig).
Legurnar í hreyflinum Hafðu samband við sölu- og þjónustudeildina.
eru slitnar.
Aðskotahlutir eru inni Hafðu samband við sölu- og þjónustudeildina.
í dælunni.
Varðandi önnur atriði skaltu leita til sölu- þjónustudeildar.
96 e-SV - Íslenska
et - Algupärase kasutusjuhendi tõlge
MÄRKUS:
Juhised
Hoidke see kasutusjuhend seadme läheduses vabalt kättesaadavana tuleviku
tarbeks alles. Kasutusjuhendis olevad juhised ja hoiatused puudutavad standardversiooni,
nagu on kirjeldatud müügidokumendis. Pumpade eriversioone võidakse tar-
nida koos täiendavate juhisvoldikutega. Muudatused või eriversioonide oma-
1.1.1 Kogenematud kasutajad dused leiate müügilepingust. Kasutusjuhendis või müügidokumendis puudu-
vate juhiste, tekkinud eriliste olukordade või sündmuste korral pöörduge lä-
hima Lowara teeninduskeskuse poole.
HOIATUS:
See toode on mõeldud kasutamiseks ainult vastava väljaõppe saa-
nud personalile. 1.3 Pakendi ja toote kasutuselt kõrvaldamine
Järgige sorditud jäätmete kasutuselt kõrvaldamisega seotud kohalikke määru-
Pöörake tähelepanu järgmistele ettevaatusabinõudele. si ja seadusi.
• Piiratud võimetega inimesed ei tohi toodet kasutada, v.a juhul, kui neid ju-
hendatakse või nad on saanud vastava väljaõppe professionaali käe all. 1.4 Garantii
• Tuleb jälgida, et lapsed ei mängiks toote peal või selle ümbruses.
Garantiiteabe leiate müügilepingust.
1.2 Ohutusterminoloogia ja tähised
1.5 Varuosad
Teave ohutusteadete kohta
HOIATUS:
Väga oluline on, et loete ohutusteated ja eeskirjad hoolikalt läbi, saate neist Kulunud või vigaste komponentide asendamiseks kasutage ainult
aru ja käitute neist lähtuvalt, enne kui hakkate toodet kasutama. Need on ka- originaalvaruosi. Sobimatute varuosade kasutamine võib põhjus-
sutusel selleks, et hoida ära järgmisi ohte: tada tõrkeid, kahjustusi ja vigastusi ning garantii kehtetuks muu-
• kehavigastused ja terviseprobleemid; ta.
• toote kahjustumine;
• toote rike. ETTEVAATUST:
Kui soovite tehnilist teavet või varuosi müügi- ja teenindusosa-
Ohutasemed konnast, teatage alati täpne toote tüüp ja osanumber.
Ohutase Näit
Ohtlik olukord, mis lõpeb surma või Lisateavet toote varuosade kohta vt siit: Joonis 25, Joonis 26 või Joonis 27.
OHT: tõsise vigastusega, kui seda ära ei hoi-
ta 1.6 EÜ VASTAVUSDEKLARATSIOON (TÕLGE)
Ohtlik olukord, mis võib lõppeda LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, PEAKONTORIGA AADRESSIL
HOIATUS: surma või tõsise vigastusega, kui seda VIA VITTORIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE
ära ei hoita VI - ITALIA, KINNITAB SIIN, ET JÄRGMINE TOODE:
ELEKTRIPUMBA MEHHANISM (VT MÄRGIST ESIMESEL LEHEL)
Ohtlik olukord, mis võib lõppeda
ETTEVAATUST: kerge või mõõduka vigastusega, kui TÄIDAB JÄRGMISTE EUROOPA LIIDU DIREKTIIVIDE ASJAKO-
seda ära ei hoita HASEID SÄTTEID:
e-SV - Eesti 97
et - Algupärase kasutusjuhendi tõlge
TÄIDAB JÄRGMISTE EUROOPA LIIDU DIREKTIIVIDE ASJAKO- komplekti hoidmiseks õiges teljeasendis. Kahjustamise vältimiseks transpor-
HASEID SÄTTEID: timisel hoitakse ka võlli paigal vahtpolüstüreeni ja plastrihmade abil.
• MASINADIREKTIIV: 2006/42/EÜ (TEHNIKAFAIL ON SAADA- Mootori kinnitamiseks vajalikud poldid ja mutrid ei ole kaasas. Lisateavet
VAL ETTEVÕTTEST LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). mootori kinnitamise kohta vt siit: Joonis 23.
JA JÄRGMISI TEHNILISI STANDARDEID:
HOIATUS:
• EN 809 Eraldi ostetud pump ja mootor, mis hiljem ühendatakse, annavad
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 tulemuseks uue masina, lähtudes masinadirektiivist 2006/42/EÜ.
Kombineeritud seadme ohutuse eest vastutab ühendamise teinud
AMEDEO VALENTE isik.
(UURIMIS- JA ARENDUSDIREKTOR)
vers. 01 2.3 Hoiustusjuhised
Lowara on ettevõtte Xylem Inc. tütarettevõtte Lowara srl Unipersonale kau-
bamärk. Hoiustuskoht
Toodet tuleb hoiustada kaetud ning kuivas kohas, kus puudub kuumus, mus-
tus ja vibratsioon.
2 Transport ja hoiustamine
MÄRKUS:
2.1 Tarnitud saadetise kontrollimine • Kaitske toodet niiskuse, soojusallikate ja mehaaniliste kahjustuste eest.
1. Kontrollige pakendit, et poleks nähtavaid kahjustusi. • Ärge asetage pakendis tootele raskeid esemeid.
2. Kui tootel on nähtavaid kahjustusi, teavitage edasimüüjat kaheksa päe-
va jooksul alates kättesaamiskuupäevast. Ümbritsev temperatuur
Toodet tuleb hoiustada temperatuuril vahemikus –5 °C kuni +40° C.
Seadme lahtipakkimine
1. Järgige sobivaid näpunäiteid.
• Kui seade on kartongpakendis, eemaldage kinnitid ja avage kar- 3 Tootekirjeldus
tong.
• Kui seade on puitkastpakendis, avage kaas naelu ja rihmu silmas 3.1 Pumba konstruktsioon
pidades.
2. Eemaldage puitaluselt kinnituskruvid või rihmad. Pump on vertikaalne mitmeastmeline eeltäitepump, mille saab kinnitada
standardsete elektrimootorite külge. Pumbaga saab pumbata:
Seadme ülevaatus • külma vett;
1. Eemaldage tootelt pakkematerjalid. • sooja vett.
Vabanege pakkematerjalidest kooskõlas kohalike eeskirjadega.
2. Vaadake toode üle, et kindlaks määrata, kas mõni osa on saanud kah- Veega kokkupuutuvate pumba metallosade materjal on järgmine.
justada või kadunud. Seeria Materjal
3. Võimalusel vabastage toode, eemaldades kruvid, poldid või rihmad.
Oma isiklikku ohutust silmas pidades olge ettevaatlik, kui tegelete nael- 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Roostevaba teras
te ja rihmadega. 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Roostevaba teras ja malm
4. Kui midagi on korrast ära, pöörduge meie müügi- ja teenindusosakon- Saadaval on eriversioon, kus kõik osad on valmistatud
na poole. roostevabast terasest.
HOIATUS: MÄRKUS:
• Järgige kõiki ohutusnõudeid. Kui olete soetanud mootorita pumba, veenduge, et mootor sobib pumbaga
• Muljumisoht. Seade ja selle komponendid võivad rasked olla. ühendamiseks.
Kasutage nõuetekohaseid tõstemeetodeid ning kandke alati
terasest varbaosaga jalatseid.
Mehaaniline tihend
Õige tõsteseadme valimiseks kontrollige pakendil näidatud brutokaalu.
Seeria Põhiomadused
Asend ja kinnitamine 1, 3, 5 Nimiläbimõõt 12 mm, asümmeetriline, parempöörlemine, K-
Seadet saab transportida horisontaal- või vertikaalasendis. Veenduge, et sea- versioon (EN 12756)
de on transportimisel korralikult kinnitatud, et see ei hakkaks veerema ega 10, 15, 22 Nimiläbimõõt 16 mm, asümmeetriline, parempöörlemine, K-
kukuks ümber. versioon (EN 12756)
Tasakaalustatud mootori võimsusega ≥5 kW
HOIATUS:
Ärge kasutage elektripumba käsitsemiseks mootori külge kruvi- 33, 46, 66, Nimiläbimõõt 22 mm, asümmeetriline, parempöörlemine, K-
tud aaskruvisid. 92, 125 versioon (EN 12756)
98 e-SV - Eesti
et - Algupärase kasutusjuhendi tõlge
MÄRKUS:
MÄRKUS:
Kui kasutate elektripumbaga kaasnevast mootorist erinevat mootorit, lugege
• Ärge kasutage seda pumpa abrasiivseid, tahkeid või kiudjaid aineid sisal- läbi vastavad juhendid, kus on kirjas mootori päevaste töötundide lubatud
davate vedelike käitlemiseks. arv.
• Ärge kasutage pumpa andmesildil määratletud voolukiirustest väiksemate
kiirustega.
3.3 Andmesilt
Erikasutuskohad
Andmesilt on adapteril asuv metallsilt. Andmesildil on kirjas olulisimad toote
Pöörduge müügi- ja teenindusosakonna poole järgmistel juhtudel: üksikasjad. Täiendava teabe saamiseks lugege jaotist Joonis 1.
• kui pumbatava vedeliku tiheduse ja/või viskoossuse väärtus ületab vee Andmesilt sisaldab teavet vahetihendi ja mehaanilise tihendi materjali kohta.
väärtuse (nt glükooliga vesi), see võib vajada võimsamat mootorit; Andmesildil oleva koodi tõlgendamise teavet vt siit: Joonis 2.
• kui pumbatavat vedelikku on keemiliselt töödeldud (nt pehmendatud,
deioonitud, demineraalitud jne); Tootenimi
• kui pump paigaldatakse horisontaalselt; tuleb tellida eriversioon ja paigal- Pumba tunnuskoodi kirjelduse ja näite leiate jaotisest Joonis 3.
dushaagid;
• igas olukorras, mis erineb kirjeldatutest ja on seotud vedelikuga. WRAS-märgis – paigaldamisnõuded ja märkused (ainult
Ühendkuningriigi turu jaoks)
3.2 Kasutamispiirangud Pumbal olev WRAS-märgis tähendab, et tegemist on veeregulatsioonide
nõuandekava (Water Regulations Advisory Scheme) kinnitatud tootega. Seda
Maksimaalne töörõhk toodet sobib kasutada inimeste külma joogi- ja olmevee puhul. Lisateavet
leiate IRN-id R001 ja R420 WRAS-i veeseadmete ja -materjalide kataloogist
Selles vooskeemis näidatakse maksimaalset töörõhku sõltuvalt pumba mude- (www.wras.co.uk).
list ja pumbatava vedeliku temperatuurist.
IMQ või TUV või IRAM või teised tähised (ainult elektripumba
jaoks)
Kui pole määratud teisiti, kehtib elektriga seotud tunnustusmärgiga toodete
puhul tunnustamine ainult elektripumba kohta.
4 Paigaldus
Ettevaatusabinõud
HOIATUS:
• Järgige kõiki ohutusnõudeid.
Järgmine valem kehtib mootoritele, mille ajamiotsa kurss on telje suunas lu- • Kasutage nõuetekohaseid seadmeid ja kaitsmeid.
kustatud (nagu Lowara standardne mootor e-SV jaoks), vt Joonis 6. Muudel • Järgige alati kõiki paigalduskohta ning vee- ja elektriühendusi
juhtudel pöörduge müügi- ja teenindusosakonna poole. puudutavad kohalikke ja/või rahvusvahelisi nõudeid, seadu-
seid ja eeskirju.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
e-SV - Eesti 99
et - Algupärase kasutusjuhendi tõlge
4.1 Maandamine
MÄRKUS:
HOIATUS: Ärge ületage pumba imivõimet, kuna see võib põhjustada kavitatsiooni ning
• Enne muude elektriühenduste loomist ühendage väline kaitse- pumpa kahjustada.
juht alati maandusterminaliga.
• Kõik elektriseadmed peavad olema maandatud. See kehtib nii
pumba seadmete, käituri kui ka jälgimisseadmete puhul. Kat- 4.2.2 Torustikunõuded
setage maandusjuhtme toimivust, et selle ühenduste nõuete-
kohases kindel olla. Ettevaatusabinõud
• Kui mootorikaabel kogemata lahti jõnksatab, peab maandus-
juht olema viimane juhe, mis oma klemmi küljest lahti tuleb. HOIATUS:
Veenduge, et maandusjuht pole faasijuhtidest pikem. See keh-
tib mootorikaabli mõlema otsa puhul. • Kasutage torusid, mis sobivad pumba maksimaalse töörõh-
• Surmavate elektrilöökide kaitseks lisage lisakaitse. Paigaldage uga. Vastasel juhul riskite süsteemi katkemise ning sellest tule-
suure tundlikkusega diferentsiaallüliti (30 mA) [residuaalvoolu nevate võimalike vigastustega.
seade RCD]. • Veenduge, et kõiki ühendustöid teostavad vastava väljaõppe
saanud paigaldustehnikud, kes järgivad kõiki kohalduvaid nõu-
deid.
4.2 Ruumi nõuded
MÄRKUS:
4.2.1 Pumba asukoht Kui pump ühendatakse üldisesse veevõrku, tuleb kindlasti järgida kõiki ko-
halike omavalitsuste kehtestatud eeskirju. Kui omavalitsus seda nõuab, tuleb
OHT: seadme imipoolele paigaldada tagasivoolu tõkestamise seade.
Ärge kasutage pumpa keskkonnas, mis võib sisaldada tule-/plah-
vatusohtlikke või sööbivaid keemilisi aineid või pulbreid.
Imi- ja väljalasketorustiku kontrollkaart
Suunised Veenduge, et järgmised tingimused on täidetud.
Järgige toote asukoha suhtes neid suuniseid. • Kogu torustik on eraldi toenditega, torustik ei tohi seadet koormata.
• Veenduge, et mootori ventilaatori väljastatava jahutusõhu tavavoolu ees • Kasutatakse paindlikke torusid või ühendusi, et vältida pumba võnkumis-
poleks takistusi. te ülekannet torudele ja vastupidi.
• Veenduge, et paigaldusala on kaitstud vedelike lekete või üleujutamiste • Kasutage laiu torupoognaid, hoiduge torupõlvede kasutamisest, sest need
eest. põhjustavad voolu liigse takistuse.
• Võimalusel asetage pump põrandapinnast veidi kõrgemale. • Imitorustik on täielikult tihendatud ja õhukindel.
• Ümbritsev temperatuur peab olema vahemikus 0 °C kuni +40 °C. • Kui pumpa kasutatakse avatud ahelas, sobitatakse imitoru läbimõõt pai-
galdustingimustega. Imitoru ei tohi olla imiava läbimõõdust väiksem.
• Ümbritseva õhu suhteline niiskus peab olema väiksem kui 50% tempera-
tuuril +40 °C. • Kui imitorustik peab olema pumba imiküljest suurem, paigaldatakse eri-
• Pöörduge müügi- ja teenindusosakonna poole, kui: neva keskpunktiga toruvähendi.
• suhteline õhuniiskus ületab juhendis näidatut; • Kui pump pannakse vedelikutasemest kõrgemale, paigaldatakse imitorus-
tiku lõppu põhjaklapp.
• ruumi temperatuur ületab +40 °C';
• Põhjaklapp pannakse täielikult vedelikku, nii et õhk ei pääse läbi imikeeri-
• seade asub enam kui 1000 m merepinnast kõrgemal. Võib olla vaja vä- se, kui vedelik on miinimumtasemel ja pump paigaldatakse vedelikutase-
hendada mootori jõudlust või vahetada mootor võimsama vastu. mest kõrgemale.
Lisateavet mootori nimiandmete vähendamise kohta vt siit: Tabel 8. • Sobiva suurusega sulgeklapid paigaldatakse pumba võimsuse reguleerimi-
seks, ülevaatuseks ja hoolduseks imitorustikule ja survetorustikule (tagasi-
Pumba asendid ja õhkvahemik löögiklapi suhtes allavoolu).
• Tagasivoolu tõkestamiseks paigaldatakse survetorustikule tagasilöögi-
MÄRKUS: klapp, kui pump on välja lülitatud.
Pumba paigutamine horisontaalasendisse nõuab spetsiaalseid kohandusi.
HOIATUS:
Pumba ümber peab olema piisavalt valgust ja ruumi. Veenduge, et paigalda- Ärge kasutage väljalaskeküljel suletud sulgeklappi pumbavoo
miseks ja hooldamiseks oleks hõlpus juurde pääseda. drosseldamiseks kauem kui mõni sekund. Kui pump peab tööta-
ma suletud väljelaskeküljega kauem kui mõni sekund, peab pum-
ba sees oleva vee ülekuumenemise vältimiseks paigaldama möö-
Paigaldamine vedelikutasemest kõrgemale (imikõrgus) davoolu.
Pumpade teoreetiline maksimaalne imikõrgus on 10,33 m. Tegelikkuses mõ-
jutavad pumba imivõimsust järgmised tegurid:
Torustikunõudeid puudutavad joonised leiate siit: Joonis 12.
• vedeliku temperatuur;
• kõrgus üle merepinna (avatud süsteemis); 4.3 Elektrinõuded
• süsteemi rõhk (suletud süsteemis);
• torude takistus; • Kohalikud kehtivad eeskirjad on nimetatud nõuetest üle.
• pumba enda voolutakistus; • Tuletõrjesüsteemide (hüdrandid ja/või vihmutid) puhul kontrollige koha-
• kõrguste erinevused. likke kehtivaid eeskirju.
Järgmist võrrandit kasutatakse vedeliku taset ületava maksimumkõrguse ar-
vutamiseks, kuhu saab paigaldada pumba: Elektriühenduste nimekiri
Veenduge, et järgmised tingimused on täidetud.
(pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5
• Elektrijuhtmed on kaitstud kõrgete temperatuuride, vibratsioonide ja põr-
pb Õhurõhk baarides (suletud süsteemis näitab süsteemi rõhku) kumiste eest.
NPSH Pumbale omase voolutakistuse väärtus meetrites • Toiteallikal on kaasas:
• lühise kaitseseade;
Hf Pumba imitorus vedeliku liikumisest tekkinud kogukadu meetri- • suure tundlikkusega diferentsiaallüliti (30 mA) [residuaalvoolu seade
tes RCD] lisakaitse tagamiseks elektrilöögi eest;
• vooluvõrgu isoleerlüliti vähemalt 3 mm kontaktivahega.
Hv Auru rõhk meetrites vastavalt vedeliku temperatuurile T °C
0,5 Soovitatav kindlusvaru (m) Elektrilise juhtpaneeli kontrollkaart
Z Maksimaalne kõrgus, kuhu saab paigaldada pumba (m)
MÄRKUS:
Täiendava teabe saamiseks lugege jaotist Joonis 7. Juhtpaneel peab säilitama elektripumba nimiandmed. Sobimatud ühendused
ei pruugi mootorikaitset tagada.
(pb*10,2 - Z) peab alati olema positiivne arv.
Lisateavet jõudluse kohta vt siit: Joonis 5.
51 aM-i kaitsmed (mootorikäivitus) või magnetotermiline lüliti C-kurvi ja Icniga ≥ 4,5 kA või muu ekvivalentse seadmega.
52 Ülekoormuse soojusrelee klassiga 10A + aM-i kaitsmed (mootorikäivitus) või mootorikaitse magnetotermiline lüliti klassiga 10A.
Põhjus Lahendus
Ühes või mõlemas alltoodud osas on leke: Parandage või asendage katki-
• imitoru; ne osa.
• põhjaklapp või tagasilöögiklapp.
Põhjus Lahendus
Pumba kavitatsi- Vähendage nõutavat voolukiirust sulgeklapi osalise sulge-
oon misega pumbast allavoolu. Probleemi püsimisel kontrolli-
ge pumba talitlustingimusi (nt kõrguste erinevus, voolu-
takistus, vedeliku temperatuur).
Mootori laagrid Pöörduge müügi- ja teenindusosakonna poole.
on kulunud.
Pumbas on võõr- Pöörduge müügi- ja teenindusosakonna poole.
kehad.
Teiste olukordade puhul pöörduge müügi- ja teenindusosakonna poole.
PAZIŅOJUMS: Instrukcijas
Saglabājiet šo rokasgrāmatu turpmākajam darbam, un uzglabājiet to viegli Rokasgrāmatā dotās instrukcijas un brīdinājumi attiecas uz standarta versiju,
pieejamu iekārtas atrašanās vietā. kā aprakstīts pārdošanas dokumentā. Speciālu versiju sūkņus var piegādāt ar
speciāliem papildu instrukciju materiāliem. Skatiet modifikāciju vai speciālo
versiju raksturlielumus pārdošanas līgumā. Par instrukcijām, situācijām vai
1.1.1 Nepieredzējuši lietotāji notikumiem, kas nav apskatīti šajā rokasgrāmatā vai pārdošanas dokumen-
tos, sazinieties ar tuvāko Lowara servisa centru.
UZMANĪBU:
Šīs ierīce izmantošanu drīkst uzticēt tikai kvalificētam personā- 1.3 Iepakojuma un produkta utilizācija
lam.
Ievērojiet spēkā esošos noteikumus un likumus, kas saistīti ar atkritumu utili-
zāciju.
Īpaša uzmanība jāpievērš sekojošiem apstākļiem:
• Personām ar ierobežotām iespējām nevajadzētu rīkoties ar šo ierīci, ja vien 1.4 Garantija
tas nenotiek citas personās uzraudzībā, vai arī šāda persona izgājusi profe-
sionālās apmācības kursu. Skatiet informāciju par garantiju pārdošanas līgumā.
• Jārūpējas, lai bērni nespēlētos uz šīs ierīces vai tās tuvumā.
1.5 Rezerves daļas
1.2 Drošības terminoloģija un apzīmējumi
UZMANĪBU:
Par drošības ziņojumiem Nodilušu vai nederīgu detaļu nomaiņai izmantojiet tikai oriģinā-
lās rezerves daļas. Nepiemērotu rezerves daļu izmantošana var
Ir ļoti svarīgi, lai jūs pirms darba ar izstrādājumu rūpīgi izlasītu, saprastu un izraisīt nepareizu darbību, bojājumus un traumas, kā arī neļauj iz-
ievērotu drošības ziņojumus un noteikumus. Tie tiek izdoti, lai palīdzētu mantot garantijas.
jums novērst šos riskus:
• darbinieku nelaimes gadījumus un veselības problēmas;
BRĪDINĀJUMS:
• izstrādājumu bojājumus;
Vienmēr norādiet precīzo produkta veidu un identifikācijas kodu,
• izstrādājumu nepareizu darbību. kad pieprasāt tehnisko informāciju vai rezerves daļas no pārdoša-
nas un servisa nodaļas.
Bīstamības līmeņi
Bīstamības līmenis Rādījums Plašāku informāciju par produkta rezerves daļām skatiet Skaitlis 25, Skaitlis
Bīstama situācija, kuru nenovēršot 26 vai Skaitlis 27.
BĪSTAMI: iestāsies nāve vai radīsies būtiskas
traumas. 1.6 EK ATBILSTĪBAS DEKLARĀCIJA
(TULKOJUMS)
Bīstama situācija, kuru nenovēršot
UZMANĪBU: var iestāties nāve vai rasties būtiskas LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, KURAS GALVENĀ MĪTNE ATRO-
traumas. DAS VIA VITTORIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAG-
GIORE VI - ITALIA, AR ŠO APLIECINA, KA ŠIS RAŽOJUMS:
Bīstama situācija, kuru nenovēršot ELEKTRISKĀ SŪKŅA IEKĀRTA (SKATIET MARKU PIRMAJĀ LA-
BRĪDINĀJUMS: var rasties nelielas vai vidējas pakāpes PĀ)
traumas.
ATBILST ŠĀDU EIROPAS DIREKTĪVU ATTIECĪGAJĀM PRASĪBĀM
• Potenciāla situācija, ko nenovēršot • MAŠĪNU DIREKTĪVA: 2006/42/EK (TEHNISKAIS FAILS IR PIE-
PAZIŅOJUMS: EJAMS PIE LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE).
var rasties nevēlami apstākļi.
• Ar traumām nesaistīta prakse. • ELEKTROMAGNĒTISKĀS SADERĪBAS 2004/108/EK
• EKODIZAINS 2009/125/CE, REGULA (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~, 50 Hz,
PN≥ 0,75 kW), JA IR IE2 vai IE3 MARĶĒJUMS
Bīstamības kategorijas
UN ŠĀDIEM TEHNISKAJIEM STANDARTIEM
Bīstamības kategorijas var vai nu atbilst bīstamības līmeņiem, vai ar īpašiem
apzīmējumiem aizvietot parastos bīstamības līmeņu apzīmējumus. • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
Elektrobīstamība ir apzīmēta ar šādu īpašu apzīmējumu: • EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
• EN 60034–30
UZMANĪBU:
SŪKŅI (SKATIET ETIĶETI PIRMAJĀ LAPĀ)
Šie ir piemēri no citām kategorijām, kas var būt. Tie atbilst parastajiem bīsta-
mības līmeņiem un tiem var izmantot papildinošus apzīmējumus:
• Triecienbīstamība
• Sagriešanās bīstamība
• Loka uzliesmojuma bīstamība
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 Motora stiprināšanai nepieciešamās skrūves un uzgriežņi nav iekļauti kom-
plektācijā. Plašākai informācijai par to, kā pieslēgt motoru, skatiet Skaitlis 23.
AMEDEO VALENTE
UZMANĪBU:
(INŽENIERTEHNIKAS UN PĒTNIECĪBAS Ja sūknis un motors tiek iegādāti atsevišķi, pēc to samontešanas
UN ATTĪSTĪBAS DIREKTORS) veidojas jauna ierīce, kurai jaatbilst Darbagaldu direktīvas
red.01 2006/42/EC prasībām. Personai, kas veic montāžu, jāuzņemas
atbildība par jaunās ierīces drošību.
Lowara ir of Lowara srl Unipersonale, of Xylem Inc meitasuzņēmuma tirdz-
niecības zīme.
2.3 Norādījumi par uzglabāšanu
2 Transportēšana un Izstrādājuma uzglabāšanas vieta tā neizmantošanas periodos
uzglabāšana Izstrādājums ir jāuzglabā ar pārsegu sausā vietā bez putekļu un vibrāciju ie-
tekmes.
2.1 Pārbaudiet piegādi
PAZIŅOJUMS:
1. Pārbaudiet iepakojuma ārpusi, vai nav redzami acīmredzami bojājumi.
• Aizsargājiet izstrādājumu pret mitrumu, karstuma avotiem un mehāni-
2. Ja produktam ir redzami bojājumi, paziņojiet par to mūsu izplatītājam skiem bojājumiem.
astoņu dienu laikā no piegādes datuma.
• Nenovietojiet smagumus uz iesaiņotā izstrādājuma.
Izsaiņojiet iekārtu
1. Izpildiet atbilstošo darbību: Vides temperatūra
• Ja iekārta ir iepakota kartona kastē, izņemiet skavas un atveriet Produkts ir jāglabā vides temperatūrā no -5°C līdz +40°C (23°F līdz 104°F).
kartona kasti.
• Ja iekārta ir iepakota koka kastē, atveriet vāku, pievēršot uzmanību
naglām un siksnām. 3 Izstrādājuma apraksts
2. Izņemiet stiprināšanas skrūves vai siksnas no koka pamatnes.
3.1 Sūkņa konstrukcija
Pārbaudiet mezglu Sūknis ir vertikāls, daudzpakāpju, ne pašuzpildošs sūknis, kuru var pieslēgt
1. Noņemiet no izstrādājuma iepakojuma materiālus. standarta elektromotoram. Sūkni var izmantot, lai sūknētu:
Likvidējiet iepakojuma materiālus atbilstoši vietējiem noteikumiem.
2. Pārbaudiet izstrādājumu, lai konstatētu, vai nav bojātas tā daļas vai to • Aukstu ūdeni
netrūkst. • Siltu ūdeni
3. Ja nepieciešams, atlaidiet izstrādājumu vaļīgāk, izņemot no tā visas Sūkņa metāliskās daļas, kas saskaras ar ūdeni, ir izgatavotas no šādiem mate-
skrūves, aizbīdņus vai skavas. riāliem:
Savas personiskās drošības labad esiet uzmanīgs, rīkojoties ar naglām
un skavām. Sērija Materiāls
4. Ja kaut kas nedarbojas, sazinieties ar mūsu pārdošanas un servisa noda- 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Nerūsošais tērauds
ļu. 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Nerūsējošais tērauds un čuguns
Ir pieejama speciāla versija, kurai visas daļas ir izgatavo-
tas no nerūsējošā tērauda.
2.2 Norādījumi par transportēšanu
Sūkņi 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 un 22 ir pieejami dažādās versijās atkarībā no iesūkšanas
Drošības pasākumi un izvades atveru izvietojuma un savienojuma atloka formas.
Ražojumu var piegādāt kā sūkņa iekārtu (sūkni kopā ar elektromotoru) vai
UZMANĪBU: tikai sūkni.
• Ievērojiet spēkā esošo negadījumu novēršanas norādījumus.
• Saspiešanas draudi. Ierīce un tās sastāvdaļas var būt smagas. PAZIŅOJUMS:
Izmantojiet piemērotas pacelšanas metodes un vienmēr valkā- Ja esat iegādājies sūkni bez motora, pārliecinieties, ka motors ir piemērots
jiet apavus ar metāla purniem. pieslēgšanai pie sūkņa.
Pārbaudiet bruto svaru, kas ir norādīts uz iepakojuma, lai izvēlētos atbilstošu
celšanas iekārtas. Mehāniskā blīve
PAZIŅOJUMS: PAZIŅOJUMS:
• Neizmantojiet šo sūkni, lai sūknētu šķidrumus, kas satur abrazīvas, cietas Izmantojot cita veida motoru, kas nav sūkņa komplektācijā iekļautais mo-
vai šķiedrainas vielas. tors, skatiet tā izmantošanas instrukcijas, lai uzzinātu tam atļauto palaides rei-
• Neizmantojiet sūkni sūkšanas ātrumiem, kas pārsniedz datu plāksnītē no- žu skaitu stundā.
rādīto plūsmas ātrumu.
4 Uzstādīšana
Drošības pasākumi
UZMANĪBU:
• Ievērojiet spēkā esošo negadījumu novēršanas norādījumus.
Sekojošā formula ir spēkā motoriem, kuriem piedziņas pusē vārpstas gultnis • Izmantojiet piemērotu aprīkojumu un aizsargierīces.
nostiprināts uz ass (piemēram, tipveida Lowara motoriem, kas paredzēti e- • Vienmēr pārbaudiet spēkā esošos vietējā un valsts līmeņa no-
SV), sk. Skaitlis 6. Citās situācijās sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu. teikumus, likumus un standartus par uzstādīšanas vietas izvēli
un ūdens un strāvas pieslēgumiem.
P1maks. + Pmaks.≤ PN
PAZIŅOJUMS:
Uzmanīgi pievelciet kabeļa blīvslēgus, lai kabelis nevarētu izslīdēt un
PAZIŅOJUMS: sadales kastē nevarētu iekļūt mitrums.
• Izmantojiet tikai dinamiski sabalansētus motorus ar pusizmēra lieluma at-
slēgu vārpstas pagarinājumā (IEC 60034-14) un standarta vibrācijas koefi- 5. Ja motors nav aprīkots ar termisko aizsardzības drošinātaju, kurš auto-
cientu (N). mātiski atiestatās, noregulējiet aizsardzību pret pārslodzēm, vadoties
• Elektrolīnijas spriegumam un frekvencei ir jāatbilst uz informācijas plāks- pēc zemāk rdzamajiem norādījumiem.
nes norādītajai informācijai. • Ja motors tiek izmantots ar pilnu slodzi, iestatiet strāvu, vienādu ar
elektriskā sūkņa strāvas nominālo vērtību (skatīt etiķeti).
• Izmantojiet tikai vienas fāzes vai trīs fāzu motorus, kuru izmērs un jauda
atbilst Eiropas standartiem. • a motors tiek izmantots ar daļēju slodzi, iestatiet strāvu, vienādu ar
darba strāvas vērtību (piemēram, izmērītu ar strāvmaiņa knaiblēm).
• Ja sūknim ir zvaigznes-trīsstūra palaišanas sistēma, noregulējiet ter-
Vispārējos vilcienos - motori spēj darboties šādu maiņstrāvas tīkla parametru moreleju uz 58% no nominālās strāvas vai darba strāvas (tikai trīsfā-
pielaižu robežās: zu motoriem).
Frekvence Hz Fāze ~ UN [V] ± %
50 1 220 – 240 ± 6 5 Nodošana ekspluatācijā,
3 230/400 ± 10
400/690 ± 10
palaišana, ekspluatācija un
60 1 220 – 230 ± 6 izslēgšana
3 220/380 ± 5
Drošības pasākumi
380/660 ± 10
UZMANĪBU:
Vienfāzes variantiem izmantojiet noteikumiem atbilstošu kabeli ar 3 dzīslām • Pārliecinieties, vai izsūknētais šķidrums nerada bojājumus vai
(2 + zemējums), bet trīsfāzu variantiem - kabeli ar 4 dzīslām (3 + zemē- ievainojumus.
jums). • Motora darbības aizsargi var izraisīt negaidītu motora izslēgša-
nos un ieslēgšanos. Tas var izraisīt nopietnus fiziskus ievaino-
Elektriskais sūknis ar motoru: jumus.
Kabeļa blīvslēgs • Nekad nedarbiniet sūkni bez pareizi uzstādīta savienotāja aiz-
Kabeļa ārējā diametra robežas, mm sarga.
Tips
M20 x 1,5; 6–12 M25 x 1,5; 13 - 18 M32 x 1,5; 18 - BRĪDINĀJUMS:
25 • Sūkņa un motora ārējās virsmas temperatūra darba laikā var
SM X – – pārsniegt 40ºC (104ºF). Nepieskarieties virsmai ar ķermeņa
daļām, kas nav tērptas aizsargapģērbā.
PLM X X X
• Nenovietojiet sūkņa tuvumā viegli uzliesmojošus materiālus.
55 drošinātāji aM (motora startēšanai) vai magnētiskais palaidējs ar termālo aizsardzību, "C" līkni un Icn ≥ 4,5 kA, vai kāda cita analoģiska ierīce.
56 10A darba klases pārslodzes termorelejs kopā ar drošinātājiem aM (motora startēšanai) vai 10A darba klases magnētiskais palaidējs ar termālo aizsardzību.
Uzstādīšana apstākļos, kas šķidruma līmenis augstāks par sūkni 6.1 Apkope
(iesūkšanas galvu)
Sūknim nav nepieciešama plānotā profilaktiskā apkope. Ja lietotājs vēlas ie-
plānot regulārās profilaktiskās apkopes grafiku, tas ir atkarīgs no sūknētā šķi-
Attēlu, kurā redzamas sūkņa sastāvdaļas, skatīt Skaitlis 16. druma tipa un sūkņa darba apstākļiem.
1. Aizveriet slēgvārstu, kas atrodas aiz sūkņa. Izvēlieties atbilstošos soļus: Sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu ar prasībām vai pēc informācijas
2. Sērijas 1, 3, 5: par profilaktisko apkope vai servisu.
a) Atslābiniet drenāžas aizgriežņa tapiņu (2).
b) Izskrūvējiet uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1) un atveriet no- Ārpus kārtas apkope var būt nepieciešama, lai notīrītu šķidruma galu un/vai
slēdzošo vārstu pirms sūkņa, līdz ūdens sāk izplūst no atveres. nomainītu nodilušās daļas.
c) Pievelciet drenāžas aizgriežņa tapiņu (2).
d) Uzskrūvējiet atpakaļ vietā uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1). 6.2 Griezes momenta vērtības
3. Sērijas 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Izskrūvējiet uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1) un atveriet no- Skatiet informāciju par griezes momentu vērtībām Tabula 18, Tabula 19 vai
slēdzošo vārstu pirms sūkņa, līdz ūdens sāk izplūst no atveres. Tabula 20.
b) Uzskrūvējiet atpakaļ vietā uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1).
Uzpildes aizgriezni (3) var izmantot aizgriežņa (1) vietā. Detalizētu informāciju par griezes momentu un nospriegojumu uz cauruļva-
du pieslēgšanas atlokiem, sk. Skaitlis 21.
Uzstādīšana apstākļos, kas šķidruma līmenis zemāks par sūkni
(iesūkšanas pacēlēju) 6.3 Elektromotora nomaiņa
Attēlu, kurā redzamas sūkņa sastāvdaļas, skatīt Skaitlis 17. Sūknis ir aprīkots ar kalibrētu dakšas formas starpliku, kas paredzēta, lai vei-
cinātu motora pievienošanas un maiņas darbus.
1. Atveriet noslēdzošo vārstu pirms sūkņa un aizveriet noslēdzošo vārstu
aiz sūkņa. Izvēlieties atbilstošos soļus: • Skatiet instrukcijas par to, kā mainīt motoru, Skaitlis 23.
2. Sērijas 1, 3, 5: Ja kalibrētā dakšveida starplika nav pieejam, izmantojiet 5 ± 0,1 mm (0,2
a) Atslābiniet drenāžas aizgriežņa tapiņu (2). ± 0,004 collu) starplikas.
b) Izskrūvējiet uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1) un, izmantojot
piltuvi, uzpildiet sūkni, līdz ūdens sāk izplūst no atveres.
c) Uzskrūvējiet atpakaļ vietā uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1). 6.4 Nomainiet mehānisko blīvi
d) Pievelciet drenāžas aizgriežņa tapiņu (2).
3. Sērijas 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: Sērija Instrukcija
a) Izskrūvējiet uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1) un, izmantojot 1, 3, 5 Sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu.
piltuvi (4), uzpildiet sūkni, līdz ūdens sāk izplūst no atveres. 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu.
b) Uzskrūvējiet atpakaļ vietā uzpildes un atgaisošanas aizgriezni (1). kW
Uzpildes aizgriezni (3) var izmantot aizgriežņa (1) vietā.
10, 15, 22: > 4 Norādījumus skatīt Skaitlis 24. Tīrīšanai un ieziešanai iz-
kW mantojiet alkoholu.
5.2 Pārbaudiet ass rotācijas virzienu (trīsfāzu
33, 46, 66, 92, Norādījumus skatīt Skaitlis 24. Tīrīšanai un ieziešanai iz-
motoram) 125 mantojiet alkoholu.
Cēlonis Līdzeklis
7.7 Elektriskais sūknis uzsāk darbu, bet
nostrādā sistēmas strāvas starpības ierīce
Nav barošanas no elektroapgādes • Atjaunojiet barošanu.
avota. (RCD).
• Pārliecinieties, ka visi elektriskie sa-
vienojumi ar barošanas avotu ir vese- Cēlonis Līdzeklis
li.
Ir zemējuma noplūde. Pārbaudiet elektriskās sistēmas komponentu izolāci-
Izsists sūknī iebūvētais termiskās Pagaidiet, līdz sūknis ir atdzisis. Pēc brī- ju.
aizsardzības drošinātājs (ja tāds ir). ža termiskais drošinātājs tiks automāti-
sku atiestatīts.
7.8 Sūknis darbojas, bet izvada
Ir nostrādājis termorelejs vai mo- Atiestatiet termoaizsargu.
tora aizsargs elektriskajā vadības nepietiekami ūdens vai vispār to neizvada
panelī.
Ir nostrādājusi aizsargierīce pret Pārbaudiet: Cēlonis Līdzeklis
sauso darbināšanu. • ūdens līmeni tvertnē vai galvenā cau- Sūknī vai cauruļvados iekļu- • Atgaisojiet
ruļvada spiedienu vis gaiss.
• aizsargierīce un tās savienojuma vadi
Sūknis nav pareizi uzpildīts. Apturiet sūkni un atkārtojiet uzpildes proce-
Ir nostrādājuši sūkņa vai papildie- Nomainiet sūkņus. dūru. Ja problēmu novērst neizdodas:
rīču ķēžu drošinātāji. • Pārbaudiet, vai mehāniskajām blīvēm nav
noplūdes.
7.3 Elektriskais sūknis uzsāk darbu, bet • Pārbaudiet, vai iesūkšanas caurule ir her-
tūdaļ nostrādā termiskās aizsardzības mētiska.
relejs vai pārdeg drošinātājs • Nomainiet vārstus, kuriem ir noplūde.
Pārāk ieilgusi droselēšanās Atveriet vārstu.
Cēlonis Līdzeklis patēriņa pusē.
Ir bojāts barošanas vads. Pārbaudiet vadu vai nomainiet, ja nepie- Vārsti ir bloķējušies slēgtā Izjauciet un iztīriet vārstus.
ciešams. vai daļēji slēgtā stāvoklī.
Termālās aizsardzības relejs vai Pārbaudiet komponentus vai nomainiet, Sūknis nosprostojies. Sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu.
drošinātāji neatbilst motora patē- ja nepieciešams. Nosprostojies cauruļvads. Pārbaudiet un iztīriet cauruļvadus.
rētajai strāvai.
Nepareizs darbrata rotācijas Uz motora pieslēguma spaiļu plāksnes vai
Īsslēgums elektromotorā. Pārbaudiet komponentus vai nomainiet, virziens (variants ar trīsfāzu elektriskās vadības panelī apmainiet vietām di-
ja nepieciešams. maotoru). vu fāzu pieslēguma vadus.
Motora pārslodze. Pārbaudiet sūkņa darba apstākļus un Sūkšanas augstums ir pārāk Pārbaudiet sūkņa darba apstākļus. Ja nepiecie-
atiestatiet aizsardzību. liels vai plūsmas pretestība šams, rīkojaties šādi:
sūcvadā ir pārāk liela. • Samaziniet sūknēšanas augstumu
7.4 Elektriskais sūknis uzsāk darbu, bet īsu • Palieliniet iesūkšanas caurules diametru
brīdi vēlāk nostrādā termiskās aizsardzības
relejs vai pārdeg drošinātājs 7.9 Sūknis apstājas un tad vārpsta sāk
Cēlonis Līdzeklis rotēt pretējā virzienā.
Elektriskais panelis atrodas pārāk in- Aizsargājiet elektrisko paneli no sil-
tensīvi apsildītā vietā vai uz to iedarbo- tuma avotiem un tiešiem saulessta-
jas tieši saulesstari. riem. Cēlonis Līdzeklis
Barošanas spriegums neatrodas moto- Pārbaudiet motora darba apstākļus. Noplūde vienā vai abos sekojošajos elementos: Saremontējiet vai nomainiet
ra darba diapazonā. • Iesūkšanas cauruļvadā bojāto elementu.
Trūkst barošanas fāzes. Pārbaudiet • Noslēdzējvārstā vai kontrolvārstā
• barošanu Sūcvadā ir gaiss. Atgaisojiet.
• elektriskais pieslēgums
Cēlonis Līdzeklis
Noplūde vienā vai abos sekojošajos ele- Saremontējiet vai nomainiet bo-
mentos: jāto elementu.
• Iesūkšanas cauruļvadā
• Noslēdzējvārstā vai kontrolvārstā
Cēlonis Līdzeklis
Sūkņa kavitācija Samaziniet vajadzīgo plūsmas ātrumu, daļēji aizverot
slēgvārstu, kas atrodas aiz sūkņa. Ja problēmu neizdo-
das novērst, pārbaudiet sūkņa darba apstākļus (aug-
stuma starpību, plūsmas pretestību, šķidruma tempera-
tūru utt.)
Ir nodiluši motora Sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu.
gultņi.
Sūknī iekļuvis kāds Sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu.
svešķermenis.
Citās situācijās sazinieties ar pārdošanas un servisa nodaļu.
PASTABA: Instrukcija
Pasilikite šį vadovą naudoti ateityje ir laikykite jį lengvai pasiekiamoje vietoje, Kaip nurodyta pardavimo dokumentuose, šiame vadove pateiktos instrukci-
netoli bloko. jos ir įspėjimai yra susiję su standartine versija. Konkrečių versijų siurbliai ga-
li būti tiekiami prie jų pridedant papildomų instrukcijos lapelių. Norėdami
sužinoti apie kokias nors modifikacijas arba tam tikrų versijų charakteristikas
1.1.1 Patirties neturintys naudotojai žr. pardavimo sutartį. Dėl šiame vadove ar pardavimo dokumentuose neap-
rašytų instrukcijų ar atvejų kreipkitės į artimiausią „Lowara“ techninės prie-
žiūros centrą.
PERSPĖJIMAS:
Šis gaminys skirtas naudoti tik kvalifikuotiems darbuotojams.
1.3 Pakuotės ir gaminio išmetimas
Atkreipkite dėmesį į šias atsargumo priemones: Laikykitės galiojančių vietos teisės aktų dėl atliekų rūšiavimo.
• Ribotų galimybių asmenys neturėtų naudoti gaminio, nebent jie būtų pri-
žiūrimi arba apmokyti specialisto. 1.4 Garantija
• Reikia stebėti vaikus, kad šie nežaistų ant arba šalia šio gaminio.
Informacijos apie garantiją ieškokite pardavimo sutartyje.
1.2 Saugos terminija ir simboliai
1.5 Atsarginės dalys
Apie saugos pranešimus
PERSPĖJIMAS:
Labai svarbu prieš pradedant eksploatuoti gaminį atidžiai perskaityti, suvokti Bet kuriuos susidėvėjusius arba sugedusius komponentus keiskite
ir laikytis saugos pranešimų nurodymų ir reglamentų. Jie pateikiami siekiant tik originaliomis atsarginėmis dalimis. Jei bus naudojamos netin-
išvengti toliau nurodytų·pavojų, tai: kamos atsarginės dalys, galimi gedimai, pažeidimai ir traumos,
• Nelaimingi atsitikimai ir sveikatos problemos taip pat gali būti anuliuota garantija.
• Žala gaminiui
• Gaminio gedimai ĮSPĖJIMAS:
Kreipdamiesi į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių dėl tech-
Pavojaus lygiai ninės informacijos arba atsarginių dalių, visada nurodykite tikslų
Pavojaus lygis Požymis gaminio tipą ir dalies numerį.
Pavojinga situacija, kurios nepataisius
PAVOJUS: ištinka mirtis arba patiriama sunki Išsamesnės informacijos apie atsargines gaminio dalis žr. Paveikslėlis 25, Pa-
trauma veikslėlis 26 arba Paveikslėlis 27.
Tai kitų galimų kategorijų pavyzdžiai. Jos atitinka·įprastus pavojaus lygius ir SIURBLYS (ŽR. ĮRAŠĄ PIRMAME PUSLAPYJE)
joms gali būti taikomi tokie papildomi simboliai:
• Sutraiškymo pavojus
• Pjovimo pavojus
• Elektros lanko pavojus
ATITINKA TAIKOMAS TOLIAU IŠVARDYTŲ EUROPOS DIREK- nuotės dėklas būtų išlaikytas tinkamoje ašinėje padėtyje. Siekiant išvengti pa-
TYVŲ NUOSTATAS žeidimų transportuojant velenas irgi išlaikomas savo vietoje naudojant pla-
čius polistireno ir plastiko diržus.
• DIREKTYVOS 2006/42/EB DĖL MAŠINŲ (TECHNINĮ FAILĄ GA-
LIMA GAUTI IŠ „LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE“). Variklio tvirtinimo varžtas ir veržlės nepridedami. Daugiau informacijos,
IR TOLIAU NURODYTUS TECHNINIUS STANDARTUS: kaip prijungti variklį, ieškokite Paveikslėlis 23.
• EN 809 PERSPĖJIMAS:
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 2011-06-16 Jeigu sujungiami atskirai įsigyti siurblys ir variklis, gaunama nauja
mašina, kuriai taikoma Mašinų direktyva 2006/42/EB. Įrangą su-
AMEDEO VALENTE jungiantis asmuo tampa visapusiškai atsakingas už saugumą.
(INŽINERIJOS IR TYRIMŲ BEI PLĖTROS
SKYRIAUS DIREKTORIUS)
2.3 Sandėliavimo rekomendacijos
rev.01
„Lowara“ yra „Xylem Inc.“ filialo „Lowara srl Unipersonale“ prekės ženklas Sandėliavimo vieta
Gaminys turi būti sandėliuojamas pridengtoje ir saugioje vietoje, kurioje ne-
2 Transportavimas ir būtų aukštos temperatūros, nešvarumų ir vibracijos.
sandėliavimas PASTABA:
• Saugokite gaminį nuo drėgmės, šilumos šaltinių ir mechaninių pažeidimų.
2.1 Pristatyto gaminio patikra • Nedėkite ant supakuoto gaminio sunkių daiktų.
1. Patikrinkite pakuotę, ar nėra išorinių pažeidimų.
2. Jei gaminys pažeistas, praneškite mūsų platintojui per aštuonias dienas Aplinkos temperatūra
nuo gaminio pristatymo. Gaminys turi būti laikomas nuo -5 °C iki +40 °C (nuo 23 °F iki 104 °F)
aplinkos temperatūroje.
Bloko išpakavimas
1. Imkitės atitinkamų veiksmų:
• Jei blokas supakuotas kartoninėje dėžėje, nuimkite sankabėles ir 3 Gaminio aprašymas
atidarykite kartoninę dėžę.
• Jei blokas supakuotas medinėje dėžėje, atidarykite dangtį, atkreip- 3.1 Siurblio projektas
dami dėmesį į vinis ir sąvaržas.
2. Pašalinkite apsauginius varžtus arba sąvaržas iš medinio pagrindo. Tai vertikalus, daugiapakopis, užpildomas siurblys, kurį galima jungti prie
standartinio elektrinio variklio. Siurblį galima naudoti tokiems skysčiams
Bloko tikrinimas siurbti:
1. Nuo gaminio nuimkite pakavimo medžiagas.
Visas pakavimo medžiagas išmeskite pagal vietinius reikalavimus. • Šaltam vandeniui
2. Patikrinkite gaminį ir nustatykite, ar nepažeistos dalys ir ar jų netrūksta. • Šiltam vandeniui
3. Atfiksuokite gaminį: atsukite varžtus, nuimkite juostas (jei yra). Metalinės siurblio dalys, kurias veikia vanduo, pagamintos iš toliau nurodytų
Savo asmeniniam saugumui užtikrinti dirbdami su vinimis ir juostomis medžiagų:
būkite atidūs.
4. Jei kas nors neveikia, kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros Serija Medžiaga
skyrių. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Nerūdijantis plienas
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Nerūdijantis plienas ir ketus
Galimas specialus modelis, kurio visos dalys pagamintos
2.2 Transportavimo rekomendacijos iš nerūdijančio plieno.
Atsargumo priemonės 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ir 22 SV siurblių yra įvairių modelių pagal siurbimo ir išleidimo
angų vietą ir jungės formą.
PERSPĖJIMAS:
Galima užsisakyti siurblio bloką (siurblys ir elektrinis variklis) arba tik siurblį.
• Laikykitės galiojančių nelaimingų atsitikimų prevencijos taisy-
klių.
• Sutraiškymo pavojus. Blokas ir jo komponentai gali būti su- PASTABA:
nkūs. Taikykite tinkamus kėlimo metodus ir nuolat avėkite ba- Jei siurblį įsigijote be variklio, įsitikinkite, kad galima prie jo prijungti variklį.
tus plieniniais antgaliais.
Pasižiūrėkite ant pakuotės nurodytą bendrąjį siurblio svorį, kad pasirinktu- Mechaninis sandariklis
mėte tinkamą kėlimo įrangą.
Serija Pagrindinės charakteristikos
Padėtis ir tvirtinimas 1, 3, 5 Vardinis skersmuo 12 mm (0,47 col.), nesubalansuotas, dešini-
Bloką galima transportuoti horizontaliai arba vertikaliai. Įsitikinkite, kad nis sukimasis, K versija (EN 12756)
transportuojant blokas saugiai pritvirtintas ir negalės pakrypti ar nugriūti. 10, 15, 22 Vardinis skersmuo 16 mm (0,63 col.), nesubalansuotas, dešini-
nis sukimasis, K versija (EN 12756)
PERSPĖJIMAS: Subalansuota su variklio galia ≥ 5 kW
Nenaudokite prie variklio prisuktų ąsinių varžtų visam elektrinio
siurblio blokui valdyti. 33, 46, 66, Vardinis skersmuo 22 mm (0,86 col.), subalansuotas, dešininis
92, 125 sukimasis, K versija (EN 12756)
• Naudokite variklį juosiančius diržus, jei variklio maitinimo galia yra 0,25–
4,0 kW. Naudojimo paskirtis
• Naudokite virves arba diržus, nuvestus iki abiejų jungių (ąsinių varžtų, jei Siurblys skirtas naudoti:
tokių yra), esančių šalia variklio ir siurblio susijungimo zonos, jei variklio
maitinimo galia yra 5,5–55,0 kW. • Civilinėse ir pramoninėse vandens paskirstymo sistemose
• Prie variklio prisuktus ąsinius varžtus galima išskirtinai naudoti atskiram • Drėkinimo sistemose (pvz., žemės ūkyje ir sporto aikštynuose)
varikliui valdyti arba, jei svoris nėra paskirstytas tolygiai, dalinai pakelti • Vandens valymo stotyse
bloką vertikaliai, stumiant jį iš horizontalios padėties. • Katilinėse
• Norėdami pajudinti siurblio bloką, naudokite diržus, gerai pritvirtintus • Plovyklose
prie variklio adapterio.
Daugiau informacijos, kaip saugiai pritvirtinti įrenginį, ieškokite Paveikslėlis 4. • Aušinimo sistemose (pvz., oro kondicionavimo ir šaldymo)
• Gaisrų gesinimo vietose
Blokas be variklio
Jei blokas tiekiamas be variklio, sukalibruotas šakės formos pleištas jau yra
sumontuotas tarp adapterio ir transmisijos movos. Jis skirtas tam, kad spar-
4 Montavimas
Toliau pateikta formulė taikoma varikliams, kurių varomojo galo guolis blo- Atsargumo priemonės
kuojamas pagal ašį (pvz., standartiniai „Lowara“ varikliai, skirti e-SV), žr. Pa-
veikslėlis 6. Kitais atvejais kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros sky-
rių. PERSPĖJIMAS:
• Laikykitės galiojančių nelaimingų atsitikimų prevencijos taisy-
P1maks. + Pmaks.≤ PN klių.
• Naudokite tinkamą įrangą ir jos apsaugą.
P1maks. Maksimalus įėjimo slėgis • Būtina laikytis galiojančių vietinių ir (arba) nacionalinių teisi-
Pmaks. Maksimalus siurblio sukurtas slėgis nių nuostatų, teisės aktų ir kodeksų, reglamentuojančių mon-
tavimo vietos parinkimą bei vandens ir elektros tiekimo linijų
PN Maksimalus darbinis slėgis prijungimą.
PERSPĖJIMAS:
• Pasirūpinkite, kad visas jungtis sujungtų kvalifikuoti montuo-
tojai, laikydamiesi galiojančių teisinių nuostatų.
• Prieš pradėdami įrenginio priežiūros darbus patikrinkite, ar jis
ir valdymo skydelis atjungti nuo maitinimo sistemos ir jų
neįmanoma netyčia įjungti. Tai taikoma ir valdymo grandinei.
57 EN 60335-2-41 yra buityje ir panašiais tikslais naudojamų elektrinių siurblių saugos standartas
58 Didžiausia temperatūra naudojant vandenį – 100 ºC
PAVOJUS: PERSPĖJIMAS:
Nenaudokite šio siurblio aplinkoje, kurioje gali būti degių/spro- • Naudokite vamzdžius, kurie tiktų maksimaliam darbiniam
gių ar chemiškai agresyvių dujų arba miltelių. siurblio slėgiui. Kitaip gali sutrūkti sistema ir sukelti sužaloji-
mo pavojų.
Nurodymai • Pasirūpinkite, kad visas jungtis sujungtų kvalifikuoti montuo-
tojai, laikydamiesi galiojančių teisinių nuostatų.
Rinkdamiesi siurblio įrengimo vietą laikykitės toliau pateiktų nurodymų.
• Įsitikinkite, kad niekas neblokuoja įprasto aušinamojo oro srauto, kurį PASTABA:
perduoda variklio ventiliatorius. Jei siurblys jungiamas prie komunalinio vandentiekio, laikykitės savivaldybės
• Įsitikinkite, kad montavimo vieta tinkamai apsaugota nuo pratekančių institucijų šiuo klausimu nurodytos tvarkos. Jei reikalauja kompetentingos in-
skysčių ar užliejimo. stitucijos, siurbimo pusėje sumontuokite atitinkamą atgalinio srauto užkirti-
• Jei įmanoma, siurblį sumontuokite šiek tiek aukščiau grindų lygio. mo įtaisą.
• Aplinkos temperatūra turi būti nuo 0 °C (+32 °F) iki +40 °C (+104 °F).
• Santykinis aplinkos oro drėgnis turi būti mažesnis nei 50 %, kai oro tem-
peratūra +40 °C (+104 °F). Nurodymai dėl siurbimo ir išleidimo vamzdžių
• Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių, jei: Patikrinkite, ar tenkinami toliau nurodyti reikalavimai.
• santykinis oro drėgnis viršija rekomenduojamą drėgnį; • Visi vamzdžiai palaikomi atskirai, todėl jie neturi bloko apkrauti.
• patalpos temperatūra didesnė nei +40 °C (+104 °F); • Naudojami lankstūs vamzdžiai arba jų junginiai, kad siurblio keliama vi-
• blokas yra aukščiau nei 1000 m (3000 ft) virš jūros lygio. Gali reikėti bracija nepasiektų vamzdžių ir atvirkščiai.
sumažinti variklio galią arba jį pakeisti galingesniu varikliu. • Naudokite plačias alkūnines jungtis, nenaudokite alkūnių, dėl kurių gali
Norėdami gauti informacijos, kokia verte sumažinti variklio galią, žr. Lentelė susidaryti per didelis hidraulinis pasipriešinimas.
8. • Siurbimo vamzdžiai visiškai sandarūs ir hermetiški.
• Jei siurblys naudojamas atviroje grandinėje, siurbimo vamzdžio skersmuo
Siurblio padėtys ir tarpai taikomas pagal montavimo sąlygas. Siurbimo vamzdis negali būti mažes-
nis už siurbimo angos skersmenį.
PASTABA: • Jei siurbimo vamzdžiai turi būti didesni už siurblio siurbimo pusę, įmon-
Norint siurblį montuoti horizontaliai, reikia specialiai adaptuoti. tuojamas ekscentrinis vamzdžio reduktorius.
• Jei siurblys yra aukščiau nei skysčio lygis, siurbimo vamzdžio gale įmon-
tuojamas apatinis atgalinis vožtuvas.
Užtikrinkite atitinkamą apšvietimą ir tarpus aplink siurblį. Užtikrinkite, kad
prie jo galima lengvai prieiti, norint atlikti montavimo ir techninės priežiūros • Apatinis atgalinis vožtuvas visiškai panardinamas į skystį, kad siurbiant,
darbus. kai skysčio lygis yra minimalus, o siurblys yra sumontuotas virš skysčio
šaltinio, susidarius sūkuriui nepatektų oro.
Montavimas virš skysčio šaltinio (siurbimas aukštyn) • Tinkamai išmatuoti atidarymo / uždarymo vožtuvai yra įmontuoti siurbi-
mo ir išleidimo vamzdžiuose (srovės kryptimi link atgalinio vožtuvo) ir
Teoriškai didžiausias bet kurio siurblio siurbimo aukštis yra 10,33 m. Toliau yra naudojami siurblio našumui reguliuoti, siurbliui tikrinti bei techninei
išvardinti veiksniai, nuo kurių priklauso siurblio siurbimo galingumas: priežiūrai.
• skysčio temperatūra, • Siekiant išvengti atgalinės srovės į siurblį, kai siurblys išjungtas, išleidimo
• pakilimas virš jūros lygio (atviroje sistemoje), vamzdžiuose įmontuotas atgalinis vožtuvas.
• sistemos slėgis (uždaroje sistemoje),
PERSPĖJIMAS:
• vamzdžių pasipriešinimas,
Nenaudokite uždaryto atidarymo / uždarymo vožtuvo išleidimo
• siurblio vidinis hidraulinis pasipriešinimas, pusėje, kad neužblokuotumėte siurblio srauto ilgiau nei kelias se-
• aukščio skirtumai. kundes. Jei siurblį reikia naudoti ilgiau nei kelias sekundes, kai iš-
Naudojant toliau pateiktą lygtį galima apskaičiuoti maksimalų aukštį virš leidimo pusė uždaryta, reikalinga gretšakė, kad neperkaistų siur-
skysčio lygio, kuriame galima montuoti siurblį: blyje esantis vanduo.
(pb*10,2 – Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5
Brėžinių, kurie rodo vamzdyno reikalavimus, ieškokite Paveikslėlis 12.
pb Barometrinis slėgis barais (uždaroje sistemoje – sistemos
slėgis) 4.3 Elektros sistemai taikomi reikalavimai
NPSH (perte- Vertė metrais, nurodanti siurblio vidinį hidraulinį pasi- • Galiojančių vietos teisės aktų nuostatos turi pirmenybę prieš šiuos nuro-
dytus reikalavimus.
klinis slėginis priešinimą
• Jei naudojamos gaisro gesinimo sistemos (vandens kolonėlės ir (arba)
įsiurbimo purkštuvai), laikykitės vietoje taikomų normų.
aukštis)
Hf Bendras praradimas metrais dėl skysčio perėjimo siurblio
siurbimo vamzdyje
59 aM (variklio užvedimo) saugikliai, magnetinis terminis jungiklis su C formos išlinkiu ir Icn ≥ 4,5 kA arba kitas lygiavertis įrenginys.
60 10A veikimo klasės perkrovos šiluminė relė + aM (variklio užvedimo) saugikliai arba 10A veikimo klasės variklio saugiklio magnetinis terminis jungiklis.
Montavimas, kai skysčio lygis yra žemiau nei siurblys (siurbimas Gali reikėti atlikti specialius techninės priežiūros darbus, siekiant išvalyti hi-
aukštyn) draulinę dalį ir (arba) pakeisti nusidėvėjusias dalis.
Paveikslėlis, kuriame parodytos siurblio dalys, pateiktas Paveikslėlis 17. 6.2 Sukimo momento vertės
1. Atidarykite priešinga srovei nuo siurblio kryptimi esantį atidarymo / Daugiau informacijos apie sukimo momento vertes ieškokite Lentelė 18, Len-
uždarymo vožtuvą ir uždarykite atidarymo / uždarymo vožtuvą, esantį telė 19 arba Lentelė 20.
srovės kryptimi. Atlikite atitinkamus veiksmus.
Informacijos apie tinkamą vamzdžių jungių atramą ir sukimo momentus žr. 7.3 Elektrinis siurblys įsijungia, bet iš karto
Paveikslėlis 21. suveikia šiluminis apsauginis įrenginys
arba perdega saugikliai
6.3 Pakeiskite elektrinį variklį
Priežastis Sprendimas
Kartu su siurbliu pateikiamas kalibruotas šakutės formos pleištas, kuris pa- Pažeistas maitinimo kabelis. Patikrinkite kabelį ir, jei reikia, jį pakeiski-
deda atlikti variklio prijungimo ir pakeitimo veiksmus. te.
Šiluminis apsauginis įrenginys Patikrinkite komponentus ir, jei reikia, pa-
• Žr. instrukcijas, kaip pakeisti variklį, pateiktas Paveikslėlis 23. arba saugikliai netinka dėl varik- keiskite.
Jei nėra kalibruoto šakutės formos pleišto, naudokite 5±0,1 mm lio srovės.
(0,2±0,004 col.) pleištą.
Įvyko elektrinio variklio trum- Patikrinkite komponentus ir, jei reikia, pa-
pasis sujungimas. keiskite.
6.4 Iš naujo uždėkite mechaninį sandariklį Variklis perkraunamas. Patikrinkite siurblio eksploatavimo sąlygas
ir iš naujo nustatykite apsaugą.
Serija Instrukcija
1, 3, 5 Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių. 7.4 Elektrinis siurblys įsijungia, bet praėjus
10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių. neapibrėžtam laikui suveikia šiluminis
kW
apsauginis įrenginys arba netrukus
10, 15, 22: > 4 Instrukciją žr. Paveikslėlis 24. Valykite ir tepkite alkoholiu. perdega saugikliai
kW
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Instrukciją žr. Paveikslėlis 24. Valykite ir tepkite alkoholiu. Priežastis Sprendimas
Elektros valdymo pultas yra per Apsaugokite elektros pultą nuo karščio
daug karštoje vietoje arba jį veikia šaltinių ir tiesioginės saulės šviesos.
7 Trikčių šalinimas tiesioginė saulės šviesa.
Maitinimo įtampa neatitinka varik- Patikrinkite variklio eksploatavimo są-
7.1 Nesklandumų šalinimas naudotojams lio įtampos. lygas.
Maitinimo jungiklis įjungtas, bet elektrinis siurblys neveikia. Nėra maitinimo grandinės fazės. Patikrinkite
• maitinimo tiekimą
Priežastis Sprendimas • elektros jungtis
Suveikė siurblyje įmontuotas šilu- Palaukite, kol siurblys atvės. Šiluminis
minis apsauginis įrenginys (jei toks apsauginis įrenginys bus automatiškai
yra). nustatytas iš naujo. 7.5 Elektrinis siurblys įsijungia, bet praėjus
Suveikė apsauginis įrenginys, nelei- Patikrinkite vandens lygį talpykloje arba
neapibrėžtam laikui suveikia šiluminis
džiantis siurbliui veikti sausąja eiga. hidrostatinį slėgį. apsauginis įrenginys
Elektrinis siurblys įsijungia, bet praėjus neapibrėžtam laikui suveikia šilumi- Priežastis Sprendimas
nis apsauginis įrenginys. Siurblyje yra pašalinių objektų Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiū-
(kietų objektų arba pluoštinių ros skyrių.
Priežastis Sprendimas medžiagų), todėl sparnuotė
Siurblyje yra pašalinių objektų Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės prie- užstrigo.
(kietų objektų arba pluoštinių žiūros skyrių. Siurblio išleidimo srautas virši-
Iš dalies uždarykite atidarymo / uždarymo
medžiagų), todėl sparnuotė už- ja duomenų plokštelėje nuro- vožtuvą, įtaisytą srovės kryptimi nuo siur-
strigo. dytą srautą. blio, kad išleidžiamas srautas būtų lygus ar-
Siurblys perkrautas, nes siurbia- Atsižvelgdami į siurbiamo skysčio savy- ba mažesnis už duomenų plokštelėje nuro-
mas per tirštas ir per klampus bes patikrinkite faktinius galios reikalavi- dytą kiekį.
skystis. mus, tada kreipkitės į pardavimo ir tech- Siurblys perkrautas, nes siur- Patikrinkite faktinius galios reikalavimus,
ninės priežiūros skyrių. biamas per tirštas ir per klam- remdamiesi siurbiamo skysčio savybėmis, ir
pus skystis. atitinkamai pakeiskite variklį.
Siurblys veikia, bet siurbia per mažai vandens arba iš viso nesiurbia.
Nusidėvėjo variklio guoliai. Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiū-
Priežastis Sprendimas ros skyrių.
Siurblys užsikimšęs. Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių.
7.6 Elektrinis siurblys įsijungia, bet
Toliau esančiose lentelėse pateiktos nesklandumų šalinimo instrukcijos yra suaktyvinta bendra sistemos apsauga
skirtos tik montuotojams.
Priežastis Sprendimas
• Patikrinkite, ar mechaninis sandariklis san-
darus.
• Patikrinkite, ar siurbimo vamzdis visiškai
sandarus.
• Pakeiskite visus nesandarius vožtuvus.
Per stiprus droseliavimas iš- Atidarykite vožtuvą.
leidimo pusėje.
Vožtuvai užstrigo uždarytoje Išardykite ir išvalykite vožtuvus.
ar iš dalies uždarytoje padėty-
je.
Siurblys užsikimšęs. Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiū-
ros skyrių.
Vamzdžiai užsikimšę. Patikrinkite vamzdžius ir juos išvalykite.
Netinkama sparnuotės suki- Pakeiskite dviejų fazių padėtį variklio gnybtų
mosi kryptis (trifazė versija). skyde arba elektros valdymo skyde.
Per didelis siurbimo aukštis Patikrinkite siurblio eksploatavimo sąlygas.
arba siurbimo vamzdžiuose Jei reikia, atlikite šiuos veiksmus:
yra per didelis hidraulinis pa- • sumažinkite siurbimą aukštyn,
sipriešinimas. • padidinkite siurbimo vamzdžio skersmenį.
Priežastis Sprendimas
Nuotėkis viename iš šių arba abiejuose kompo- Sutaisykite arba pakeiski-
nentuose: te sugedusį komponentą.
• siurbimo vamzdyje,
• apatiniame atgaliniame vožtuve arba atgalinia-
me vožtuve.
Priežastis Sprendimas
Nuotėkis viename iš šių arba abiejuose kompo- Sutaisykite arba pakeiskite
nentuose: sugedusį komponentą.
• siurbimo vamzdyje,
• apatiniame atgaliniame vožtuve arba atgali-
niame vožtuve.
Slėgio rezervuare įtrūko membrana arba nėra iš Žr. atitinkamas slėgio re-
anksto pripildyto oro. zervuaro vadovo instrukci-
jas.
Priežastis Sprendimas
Siurblio kavitacija Sumažinkite srautą iš dalies uždarydami atidarymo / už-
darymo vožtuvą, įtaisytą srovės kryptimi nuo siurblio. Jei
problema kartojasi, patikrinkite siurblio eksploatavimo
sąlygas (pvz., aukščių skirtumą, hidraulinį pasipriešini-
mą, skysčio temperatūrą).
Nusidėvėjo varik- Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių.
lio guoliai.
Siurblyje yra paša- Kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių.
linių objektų.
Bet kuriuo kitu atveju kreipkitės į pardavimo ir techninės priežiūros skyrių.
UWAGA:
W razie zakupienia pompy bez silnika, należy upewnić się, że silnik przewi-
dziany do użycia nadaje się do sprzężenia z pompą.
Uszczelnienie mechaniczne
Seria Dane podstawowe
1, 3, 5 Średnica nominalna 12 mm (0,47 cala), niewyważone, kierunek
obrotów w prawo, wersja K (EN 12756)
10, 15, 22 Średnica nominalna 16 mm (0,63 cala), niewyważone, kierunek
obrotów w prawo, wersja K (EN 12756)
Wyważone przy mocy silnika ≥ 5 kW Poniższy wzór jest ważny w przypadku silników wyposażonych w łożysko
po stronie napędowej unieruchomione w kierunku osiowym (takich jak stan-
33, 46, 66, Średnica nominalna 22 mm (0,86 cala), wyważone, kierunek ob- dardowe silniki elektryczne Lowara dla s-SV), patrz Rysunek 6. W przypadku
92, 125 rotów w prawo, wersja K (EN 12756) innych sytuacji należy kontaktować się z działem sprzedaży i serwisu.
P1maks + Pmaks≤ PN
Przeznaczenie
Pompa nadaje się do następujących zastosowań: P1maks Maksymalne ciśnienie wlotowe
• systemy dystrybucji wody do celów sanitarnych i przemysłowych, Pmaks Maksymalne ciśnienie wytwarzane przez pompę
• nawadnianie (na przykład rolnictwo i obiekty sportowe),
• uzdatnianie wody, PN Maksymalne ciśnienie robocze
• zasilanie kotłów,
• płuczkownie, Przedziały temperatur cieczy
• chłodzenie (na przykład klimatyzacja i chłodnictwo),
• zastosowania gaśnicze. Wersja Uszczelka Minimalna Maksymal- Maksymalna
na61
Użycie niezgodne z przeznaczeniem
OSTRZEZENIE:
Nieprawidłowe użycie pompy może stwarzać warunki niebez-
pieczne oraz powodować obrażenia ciała i uszkodzenia mienia. Standard EPDM -30°C (-22°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
Wykonanie FPM (FKM) -10°C (14°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C62
Używanie produktu niezgodnie z przeznaczeniem prowadzi do utraty specjalne (248°F)
uprawnień gwarancyjnych. Wykonanie PTFE 0°C (32°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
Przykłady niewłaściwego użycia: specjalne
• ciecze nieodpowiednie ze względu na materiały konstrukcyjne pompy, W celu uzyskania informacji dotyczących specjalnych wymagań należy zwró-
• ciecze niebezpieczne (na przykład ciecze toksyczne, wybuchowe, palne cić się do działu sprzedaży i serwisu.
lub korozyjne),
• płyny spożywcze inne niż woda (na przykład wino lub mleko),
Maksymalna liczba uruchomień na godzinę
Przykłady niewłaściwej instalacji:
Niniejsza tabela przedstawia dopuszczalną liczbę uruchomień na godzinę dla
• lokalizacje niebezpieczne (takie jak lokalizacje z atmosferą wybuchową silników dostarczanych przez Lowara:
lub korozyjną),
• miejsca o wysokiej temperaturze powietrza lub o słabej wentylacji, kW 0,25 - 4,00 - 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
• instalacje poza pomieszczeniami w miejscach, gdzie brak jest zabezpiecze- 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
nia przed deszczem lub ujemnymi temperaturami. Liczba 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
urucho-
NIEBEZPIECZENSTWO: mień na
Nie należy używać pompy do cieczy palnych i/lub wybucho- godzinę
wych.
UWAGA:
UWAGA: Jeśli pompa jest używana z silnikiem innym niż dostarczony standardowy sil-
• Nie należy używać pompy do cieczy zawierających substancje ścierne, cia- nik elektryczny, należy sprawdzić odpowiednie instrukcje, aby ustalić dozwo-
ła stałe lub włókniste. loną liczbę uruchomień na godzinę.
• Nie używać pompy przy natężeniach przepływu niezgodnych z wartościa-
mi podanymi na tabliczce znamionowej.
3.3 Tabliczka znamionowa
Zastosowania specjalne
Kontaktować się z działem sprzedaży i serwisu w następujących przypad- Tabliczka znamionowa to metalowa etykieta, umieszczona na adapterze. Na
kach: tabliczce znamionowej podano główne dane techniczne produktu. Aby uzys-
kać więcej informacji, patrz Rysunek 1.
• jeżeli wartości gęstości i/lub lepkości pompowanej cieczy przekraczają
odpowiednie wartości dla wody (na przykład w przypadku wody z gliko- Na tabliczce znamionowej znajdują się dane dotyczące materiału uszczelki
lem), ponieważ konieczne może być zastosowanie silnika o większej mo- oraz uszczelnienia mechanicznego. Patrz Rysunek 2, aby uzyskać informacje
cy, na temat interpretowania kodu znajdującego się na tabliczce znamionowej.
• jeżeli pompowana ciecz jest poddawana obróbce chemicznej (na przykład
woda zmiękczona, dejonizowana, demineralizowana itp.), Oznaczenia produktu
• jeśli pompa ma być instalowana w pozycji poziomej, konieczne jest zamó- Patrz Rysunek 3, aby zapoznać się z objaśnieniem kodu identyfikacyjnego po-
wienie specjalnej wersji oraz odpowiednich wsporników montażowych, mp oraz jego przykładem.
• w każdej sytuacji odmiennej od opisanych i mającej związek z właściwoś-
ciami płynu. Etykieta WRAS - Wymagania i uwagi na temat instalacji (dotyczy
tylko rynku Wielkiej Brytanii)
3.2 Ograniczenia stosowania Etykieta WRAS umieszczona na pompie oznacza, że jest to produkt zatwier-
dzony do użytkowania przez Water Regulations Advisory Scheme. Niniejszy
Maksymalne ciśnienie robocze produkt jest dostosowany do użytkowania w kontakcie z zimną wodą pitną,
Niniejszy diagram przedstawia maksymalne ciśnienie robocze w zależności przeznaczoną do spożycia przez ludzi. Aby uzyskać więcej informacji, należy
zapoznać się z zasobami IRN R001 i R420 w sekcji WRAS Water Fittings
od modelu pompy oraz temperatury pompowanej cieczy. and Materials Directory (www.wras.co.uk).
61 EN 60335-2-41 jest normą, która dotyczy bezpieczeństwa elektrycznego pomp przeznaczonych dla gospodarstw domowych i innych podobnych zastosowań.
62 Maksimum 100ºC dla wody
IMQ, TUV lub IRAM bądź inne oznaczenia (dotyczy tylko pomp Położenia pompy i odstępy wokół niej
elektrycznych)
W przypadku produktów opatrzonych znakiem zatwierdzenia bezpieczeń- UWAGA:
stwa elektrycznego, zatwierdzenie odnosi się wyłącznie do pompy elektrycz- W celu montażu poziomego pompy wymagane jest specjalne przystosowa-
nej, jeżeli nie określono inaczej. nie.
4 Instalacja Zapewnić odpowiednie oświetlenie oraz odstępy wokół pompy. Zadbać, aby
była łatwo dostępna dla celów instalacji i konserwacji.
Środki ostrożności
Instalacja powyżej źródła cieczy (wysokość ssania)
OSTRZEZENIE: Teoretyczna maksymalna wysokośc ssania każdej pompy wynosi 10,33 m. W
praktyce, na wysokość ssania pompy mają wpływ następujące czynniki:
• Przestrzegać obowiązujących przepisów dotyczących zapobie-
gania wypadkom. • temperatura cieczy,
• Używać odpowiedniego sprzętu i środków ochrony. • wysokość nad poziomem morza ( w przypadku układów otwartych),
• Należy zawsze przestrzegać lokalnych i/lub krajowych przepi- • ciśnienie w układzie (w przypadku układów zamkniętych),
sów, regulacji prawnych i norm dotyczących wyboru miejsca • opory przepływu przez rury,
instalacji oraz przyłączy wody i zasilania. • własna, wewnętrzne opory przepływu pompy.
• różnice wysokości.
OSTRZEZENIE: Poniższy wzór służy do obliczania maksymalnej wysokości nad poziomem
• Sprawdzić, czy wszystkie połączenia zostały wykonane przez cieczy, na jakiej można zainstalować pompę:
technika wykwalifikowanego w zakresie montażu, zgodnie z
obowiązującymi przepisami. (pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5
• Przed rozpoczęciem pracy przy jednostce należy sprawdzić, pb ciśnienie barometryczne w barach (w układzie zamkniętym ozna-
czy jednostka i panel sterowania są odcięte od źródła zasilania
i nie można dostarczać do nich mocy. Powyższa zasada doty- cza ciśnienie w układzie)
czy również obwodów sterujących.
NPSH wartość wewnętrznych oporów przepływu pompy, wyrażona w
metrach
4.1 Uziemianie
Hf wyrażone w metrach całkowite opory spowodowane przepływem
OSTRZEZENIE: cieczy przez rurociąg ssawny pompy
• Zawsze najpierw przyłączać przewód zewnętrznego zabezpie- Hv prężność pary, w metrach, odpowiadająca temperaturze cieczy T
czenia do zacisku uziemienia (masy), zanim zostaną wykonane
inne połączenia elektryczne. °C
• Cały osprzęt elektryczny musi zostać uziemiony (podłączony 0,5 zalecany margines bezpieczeństwa (m)
do masy). Dotyczy to osprzętu pompy, członu napędzającego
i całego sprzętu monitorującego. Sprawdzić przewód uziemie- Z maksymalna wysokość, na jakiej można zainstalować pompę
nia (masy), aby upewnić się, że jest prawidłowo podłączony.
Aby uzyskać dodatkowe informacje, patrz Rysunek 7.
• Jeśli kabel silnika zostanie omyłkowo szarpnięty i poluzowany,
przewód uziemienia (masy) powinien być ostatnim przewo- Wartość (pb*10,2 - Z) zawsze musi być liczbą dodatnią.
dem, który zostanie odłączony od zacisku. Należy sprawdzić,
czy przewód uziemienia jest dłuższy niż przewody fazowe. Patrz Rysunek 5, aby uzyskać więcej informacji na temat osiągów.
Dotyczy to obu końców kabla silnika.
• Wprowadzić dodatkowe zabezpieczenie przed śmiertelnym UWAGA:
porażeniem. Zainstalować wyłącznik różnicowy o wysokiej Nie wolno przekraczać wydajności ssącej pomp, ponieważ może to spowo-
czułości (30 mA) [wyłącznik różnicowo-prądowy RCD]. dować kawitację i uszkodzenie pompy.
• Jeśli pompa została umieszczona nad poziomem cieczy, na końcu prze- Wykaz czynności kontrolnych silnika elektrycznego
wodu ssawnego jest zainstalowany zawór stopowy.
• Zawór stopowy jest całkowicie zanurzony w cieczy, tak aby powietrze nie OSTRZEZENIE:
mogło przedostawać się do wiru ssawnego, gdy poziom cieczy jest mini-
malny, a pompa została zainstalowana ponad źródłem cieczy. • Zapoznać się z instrukcją obsługi, aby upewnić się, czy będzie
• Na przewodzie rurowym po stronie ssawnej oraz po stronie tłocznej (za zapewnione zabezpieczenie, gdy zostanie zastosowany inny
zaworem zwrotnym) są zainstalowane odpowiedniej wielkości zawory od- silnik niż standardowy.
cinające, służące do regulacji wydajności pompy, do przeglądów pompy • Jeśli silnik jest wyposażony w automatyczne ochronniki ciepl-
oraz do jej konserwacji. ne, należy pamiętać o niebezpieczeństwie nieoczekiwanego
• Na tłocznym przewodzie rurowym zainstalowany jest zawór zwrotny, aby uruchomienia w związku z przeciążeniem. Nie należy stoso-
zapobiegać przepływowi zwrotnemu do pompy, gdy zostanie ona wyłą- wać takich silników do celów przeciwpożarowych lub w insta-
czona. lacjach tryskaczowych.
OSTRZEZENIE:
UWAGA:
Nie zamykać dłużej niż na kilka sekund zaworów odcinających
po stronie tłocznej w celu zdławienia przepływu z pompy. Jeżeli • Stosować wyłącznie dynamicznie wyważone silniki z dwukrotnie zmniej-
pompa musi pracować z zamkniętą stroną tłoczną dłużej niż szonym klinem wzdłużnym na przedłużeniu wału (IEC 60034-14) o nor-
przez kilka sekund, należy zainstalować obwód bocznikujący, za- malnej częstości drgań (N).
pobiegający przegrzewaniu się wody wewnątrz pompy. • Napięcie i częstotliwość sieci komunalnej muszą być zgodne ze danymi
na tabliczce znamionowej.
Patrz Rysunek 12, aby zapoznać się z ilustracjami przedstawiającymi wymaga- • Używać wyłącznie silników jednofazowych lub trójfazowych o wielkoś-
nia dotyczące instalacji rurowej. ciach i mocach zgodnych ze standardami europejskimi.
63 Bezpieczniki aM (rozruch silnika) lub przełącznik magnetyczno-termiczny o charakterystyce C oraz Icn ≥ 4,5 kA lub inne równorzędne urządzenie.
64 Przeciążeniowy przekaźnik termoelektryczny o charakterystyce zadziałania klasy 10A + bezpieczniki aM (rozruch silnika) lub przełącznik magnetyczno-termiczny zabez-
pieczenia silnika o charakterystyce zadziałania klasy 10A.
3. Przyłączyć i zamocować przewody zasilające zgodnie z odpowiednim Instalacje z poziomem cieczy powyżej pompy (wysokość ssania)
schematem okablowania.
Patrz Rysunek 14, aby zapoznać się ze schematami okablowania. Sche- Ilustrację przedstawiającą części pompy można znaleźć w podrozdziale Rysu-
maty znajdują się także z tyłu pokrywy skrzynki zaciskowej. nek 16.
a) Przyłączyć przewód uziemienia. 1. Zamknąć zawór odcinający umieszczony na tłoczeniu pompy. Wybrać
Zadbać, aby przewód uziemienia był dłuższy od przewodów fazo- stosowne czynności:
wych. 2. Seria 1, 3, 5:
b) Przyłączyć przewody fazowe.
4. Założyć pokrywę skrzynki zaciskowej. a) Poluzować czop korka spustowego (2).
b) Wyjąć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (1) oraz otworzyć zawór od-
UWAGA: cinający po stronie ssawnej dopóki woda nie zacznie wypływać
Ostrożnie dokręcić dławnice kabli, aby zapewnić zabezpieczenie przed przez otwór.
ślizganiem się kabli i przedostawaniem się wilgoci do skrzynki zacisko- c) Dokręcić czop korka spustu (2).
wej. d) Założyć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (1).
5. Jeżeli silnik nie jest wyposażony w termiczne urządzenie zabezpiecza- 3. Seria 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
jące, ustawić zabezpieczenie przeciążeniowe zgodnie z poniższą listą. a) Wyjąć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (1) oraz otworzyć zawór od-
• Jeżeli silnik jest użytkowany przy pełnym obciążeniu, nastawić war- cinający po stronie ssawnej dopóki woda nie zacznie wypływać
tość równą wartości prądu znamionowego pompy elektrycznej (tab- przez otwór.
liczka znamionowa). b) Założyć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (1). Zamiast korka (1)
• Jeżeli silnik jest użytkowany przy częściowym obciążeniu, nastawić można wykorzystać korek wlewu (3).
wartość równą wartości prądu roboczego (na przykład na wartość
zmierzoną przy użyciu kleszczy prądowych). Instalacje z poziomem cieczy poniżej pompy (wysokość ssania)
• Jeżeli pompa posiada system rozruchowy gwiazda-trójkąt, nastawić
przekaźnik termoelektryczny na wartość 58% wartości prądu zna-
mionowego lub prądu roboczego (dotyczy tylko silników trójfazo- Ilustrację przedstawiającą części pompy można znaleźć w podrozdziale Rysu-
wych). nek 17.
1. Otworzyć zawór odcinający po stronie ssawnej pompy i zamknąć za-
5 Przekazywanie do 2.
wór odcinający po stronie tłocznej. Wybrać stosowne czynności:
Seria 1, 3, 5:
eksploatacji, uruchomienie, a) Poluzować czop korka spustowego (2).
ekploatacja i wyłączenie z b) Zdjąć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (1) i za pomocą lejka napeł-
niać pompę wodą, aż zacznie wypływać przez otwór.
ruchu c) Założyć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (1).
d) Dokręcić czop korka spustu (2).
Środki ostrożności
3. Seria 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
OSTRZEZENIE: a) Zdjąć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (4) i za pomocą lejka napeł-
• Sprawdzić, czy spuszczana ciecz nie powoduje uszkodzeń lub niać pompę wodą, aż zacznie wypływać przez otwór.
obrażeń ciała. b) Założyć korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia (1). Zamiast korka (1)
• Ochronniki silnika mogą spowodować nieoczekiwane ponow- można wykorzystać korek wlewu (3).
ne uruchomienie silnika. Może to spowodować poważne ob-
rażenia ciała. 5.2 Sprawdzanie kierunku obrotów (silnik
• Pompa nie może pracować bez odpowiednio zamontowanej
osłony sprzęgła. trójfazowy)
7.1 Wykrywanie i usuwanie usterek przez 7.4 Pompa elektryczna uruchamia się, lecz
użytkowników krótko po tym następuje zadziałanie
przekaźnika termoelektrycznego lub
Główny wyłącznik jest ustawiony w położeniu włączenia, lecz po- stopienie bezpieczników.
mpa elektryczna nie uruchamia się.
Przyczyna Rozwiązanie
Przyczyna Rozwiązanie
Tablica połączeń elektrycznych znajduje Chronić tablicę połączeń elek-
Zadziałał przekaźnik termoelektrycz- Poczekać na ostygnięcie pompy. się w przestrzeni z nadmiernym wydziela- trycznych przed źródła ciepła
ny w pompie (jeśli jest zainstalowa- Przekaźnik termolektryczny przesta- niem ciepła lub jest wystawiona na działa- oraz bezpośrednim światłem
ny). wi się automatycznie. nie bezpośredniego światła słonecznego. słonecznym.
Zostało uruchomione urządzenie za- Sprawdzić poziom wody w zbiorniku Napięcie zasilania nie mieści się w przed- Sprawdzić warunki robocze sil-
bezpieczające przed pracą pompy na lub ciśnienie w sieci, ziale ograniczeń roboczych silnika. nika.
sucho.
Brakuje fazy zasilania. Sprawdzić
Pompa elektryczna uruchamia się, lecz przekaźnik termoelektryczny uaktyw- • zasilanie
nia się po upływie różnej długości okresów czasu po uruchomieniu. • połączenia elektryczne
Przyczyna Rozwiązanie
Do pompy lub do rurociągu • Odpowietrzyć pompę.
przedostało się powietrze.
Pompa nie została prawidło- Zatrzymać pompę i powtórzyć procedurę
wo zalana. zalewania. Jeśli problem nadal występuje:
• Sprawdzić szczelność uszczelnienia me-
chanicznego.
• Sprawdzić, czy rurociąg ssawny jest do-
skonale szczelny.
• Wymienić wszystkie nieszczelne zawory.
Występuje zbyt silne dławie- Otworzyć zawór.
nie po stronie tłocznej.
Zawory są zablokowane w Rozebrać zawory na części i oczyścić.
pozycji zamkniętej lub częś-
ciowo zamkniętej.
Pompa jest zatkana. Skontaktować się z działem sprzedaży i ser-
wisu.
Rurociąg jest zatkany. Sprawdzić i oczyścić przewody rurowe.
Niewłaściwy kierunek obro- Zmienić położenia dwóch przewodów fazo-
tów wirnika napędzanego wych na płytce zaciskowej silnika elektrycz-
(wersja trójfazowa pompy). nego lub na tablicy połączeń elektrycznych.
Wysokość ssania jest zbyt du- Sprawdzić warunki robocze pompy. W razie
ża lub opory przepływu w ru- potrzeby wykonać następujące czynności:
rowym przewodzie ssawnym • Zmniejszyć wysokość ssania.
są zbyt wysokie. • Zwiększyć średnicę rurociągu ssawnego.
Przyczyna Rozwiązanie
Występuje nieszczelność w jednym lub w obu na- Naprawić lub wymie-
stępujących elementach: nić wadliwy element.
OZNÁMENÍ: Pokyny
Uschovejte tuto příručku pro budoucí použití a nechávejte ji v místě instala- Pokyny a varování obsažené v tomto návodu se vztahují ke standardní verzi
ce jednotky. výrobku, která odpovídá popisu v kupní smlouvě. Speciální čerpadla mohou
být dodávána s dodatečnými pokyny. Informace o úpravách a speciálních ve-
rzích naleznete v kupní smlouvě. Pokyny k situacím nebo způsobům použití,
1.1.1 Nezkušení uživatelé které v tomto návodu nebo kupní smlouvě nejsou obsaženy, získáte od nej-
bližšího servisního střediska společnosti Lowara.
UPOZORNĚNÍ:
Tento výrobek by měl obsluhovat pouze kvalifikovaný personál. 1.3 Likvidace obalu a výrobku
Při likvidaci se řiďte platnými místními předpisy a nařízeními ohledně třídě-
Mějte na paměti následující zásady: ného odpadu.
• Osoby se sníženými schopnostmi by neměly obsluhovat výrobek, pokud
nejsou pod dozorem nebo nebyly řádně vyškoleny odborníkem. 1.4 Záruka
• Je třeba dohlížet na děti, aby si nehrály na výrobku nebo v jeho blízkosti.
Informace o záruce naleznete v kupní smlouvě.
1.2 Bezpečnostní terminologie a symboly
1.5 Náhradní díly
O bezpečnostních sděleních
UPOZORNĚNÍ:
Je velmi důležité, abyste si před manipulací s výrobkem přečetli následující Při výměně jakýchkoliv opotřebených nebo vadných součástí
bezpečnostní upozornění a předpisy, porozuměli jim a dodržovali je. Uvádějí používejte pouze originální náhradní díly. Použití nevhodných dí-
se proto, aby pomohly zabránit těmto rizikům: lů může vést k poruchám, poškození, zranění a rovněž ke zruše-
• Úrazům a zdravotním potížím ní platnosti záruky.
• Poškození výrobku
• Nefunkčnosti výrobku VAROVÁNÍ:
Obracíte-li se na oddělení prodeje a služeb s žádostí týkající se
Úrovně rizika technických informací nebo náhradních dílů, vždy uveďte přesný
Úroveň rizika Sdělení typ výrobku a číslo součásti.
Nebezpečná situace, která povede k
NEBEZPEČÍ: usmrcení nebo vážnému zranění, po- Více informací o náhradních dílech výrobku naleznete v oddílech Obrázek
kud se jí nevyhnete 25, Obrázek 26 a Obrázek 27.
2.
při tom pozor na hřebíky a řemeny).
Odstraňte šrouby nebo řemeny ze spodní části bedny.
3 Popis výrobku
Zkontrolujte jednotku 3.1 Konstrukce čerpadla
1. Odstraňte z výrobku obalové materiály. Toto čerpadlo je vertikální a vícestupňové, nikoli samonasávací, a umožňuje
Všechny obalové materiály zlikvidujte podle místních předpisů. použití se standardními elektrickými motory. Toto čerpadlo lze používat k
2. Prohlédněte výrobek, abyste mohli určit, zda nejsou poškozené nebo čerpání:
nechybí některé součásti.
3. Je-li třeba, odstraňte všechny vruty, šrouby nebo pásy a uvolněte výro- • studené vody,
bek. • teplé vody.
V zájmu vlastní bezpečnosti buďte opatrní při manipulaci s hřebíky a Kovové součásti, které přicházejí do kontaktu s vodou, jsou vyrobeny z ná-
pásy. sledujících materiálů:
4. V případě problémů kontaktujte oddělení prodeje a servisu.
Řada Materiál
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Nerezová ocel
2.2 Pokyny pro přepravu 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Nerezová ocel a litina
K dispozici je také speciální verze, jejíž veškeré součásti
Bezpečnostní opatření jsou vyrobeny z nerezové oceli.
UPOZORNĚNÍ:
Nesprávné používání čerpadla může vést ke vzniku nebezpeč-
ných podmínek a způsobit zranění a škody na majetku. Standardní EPDM -30 °C (-22 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C (248
°F) F) °F)
Nesprávné použití výrobku bude mít za následek ztrátu platnosti záruky. Speciální FPM (FKM) -10 °C (14 °F) 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C66 (248
F) °F)
Příklady nesprávného použití:
Speciální PTFE 0 °C (32 °F) 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C (248
• čerpání kapalin, které nejsou slučitelné s konstrukčními materiály čerpa- F) °F)
dla;
• čerpání nebezpečných kapalin (např. toxických, výbušných, hořlavých ne- Pokud máte zvláštní požadavky, obraťte se na oddělení prodeje a služeb.
bo korozivních kapalin);
• čerpání pitných kapalin jiných než voda (např. víno nebo mléko). Maximální počet startování v hodině
Příklady nesprávné instalace: Tato tabulka udává přípustný počet spuštění motorů Lowara za hodinu:
• instalace v nebezpečných místech (ve výbušných nebo korozivních kW 0,25– 4,00– 11,0– 18,5– 30,0– 45,0 55,0
prostředích); 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
• instalace v místech s vysokou teplotou vzduchu nebo nedostatečným vě- Počet 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
tráním; spuštění
• venkovní instalace s chybějící ochranou před deštěm nebo mrazem. za hodi-
nu
NEBEZPEČÍ:
Nepoužívejte toto čerpadlo k čerpání hořlavých a/nebo výbuš-
ných kapalin. OZNÁMENÍ:
Jestliže používáte jiný motor, než jaký se standardně dodává s elektrickým
čerpadlem, přečtěte si příslušné pokyny, abyste zjistili přípustný počet spu-
OZNÁMENÍ: štění za hodinu.
• Nepoužívejte toto čerpadlo k čerpání kapalin obsahujících brusné, pevné
nebo vláknité látky.
• Nepoužívejte čerpadlo pro průtočné rychlosti převyšující stanovené prů- 3.3 Typový štítek
točné rychlosti uvedené na typovém štítku.
Typový štítek je kovová etiketa umístěná na adaptéru. Na typovém štítku
jsou uvedeny základní specifikace výrobku. Více informací naleznete v oddí-
Speciální použití lu Obrázek 1.
V následujících případech kontaktujte oddělení prodeje a služeb: Typový štítek poskytuje informace o materiálu těsnění a mechanickém těsně-
• Pokud hodnota hustoty a viskozity čerpané kapaliny překračuje příslušné ní. Informace o tom, jak interpretovat kód na typovém štítku, naleznete v
hodnoty vody (např. voda s glykolem), jelikož může být potřebný výkon- oddílu Obrázek 2.
nější motor.
• Pokud je čerpaná kapalina chemicky ošetřena (např. změkčována, deioni- Označení výrobku
zována, demineralizována apod.). Vysvětlení identifikačního kódu čerpadla a příklad naleznete v oddílu Obrá-
• Pokud bude čerpadlo umístěné v horizontální poloze, musíte si vyžádat zek 3.
speciální soupravu montážních konzol.
• Jakákoli situace odlišující se od popsané situace a vztahující se k povaze Štítek WRAS – Požadavky na instalaci a poznámky (pouze pro britský
kapaliny. trh)
Štítek WRAS na čerpadle udává, že se jedná o výrobek schválený podle
3.2 Mezní hodnoty předpisů Water Regulations Advisory Scheme. Tento výrobek lze používat
pro studenou pitnou vodu určenou pro lidskou spotřebu. Další informace
Maximální pracovní tlak naleznete v dokumentech IRN R001 a R420 v části Water Fittings and Mate-
rials Directory na stránkách organizace WRAS (www.wras.co.uk).
Tento postupový diagram zobrazuje maximální pracovní tlak v závislosti na
IMQ, TUV, IRAM nebo jiné značky (pouze pro elektrická čerpadla)
modelu čerpadla a teplotě čerpané kapaliny.
Pokud není uvedeno jinak, u výrobků se značkou elektrického bezpečnostní-
ho schválení se schválení vztahují výhradně na elektrická čerpadla.
4 Instalace
Bezpečnostní opatření
UPOZORNĚNÍ:
• Dodržujte platné předpisy pro prevenci nehod.
• Používejte vhodné vybavení a ochranné prostředky.
• Vždy se řiďte platnými místními a/nebo státními předpisy, zá-
Následující vzorec platí pro motory, které jsou dodávány s axiálně zamčený- kony a nařízeními týkajícími se volby místa a připojení vody a
mi ložisky na straně pohonu (jako jsou například standardní motory Lowara elektřiny.
pro e-SV), viz oddíl Obrázek 6. V ostatních případech se obraťte na oddělení
prodeje a služeb. UPOZORNĚNÍ:
P1max + Pmax≤ PN • Ujistěte se, že veškeré zapojení bylo provedeno kvalifikovaný-
mi instalačními techniky a je v souladu s platnými předpisy.
P1max Maximální vstupní tlak • Než začnete pracovat na jednotce, ujistěte se, že jednotka a
ovládací panel jsou odpojené od napájení a nemohou se za-
Pmax. Maximální tlak vytvářený čerpadlem pnout. To se vztahuje také na řídicí obvod.
Č. součásti Maximální provozní tlak
65 Norma EN 60335-2-41 je elektrotechnická norma o bezpečnostních čerpadlech pro domácnost a podobných aplikacích.
66 Maximálně 100 ºC pro vodu
67 Pojistky aM (rozběhové) nebo magneto-teplotní spínač s křivkou C a Icn ≥ 4,5 kA nebo jiné ekvivalentní zařízení.
68 Tepelné relé proti přetížení s provozní třídou 10A + pojistky aM (rozběhové) nebo ochrana motoru magneto-teplotním spínačem s provozní třídou 10A.
4. Zastavte motor.
VAROVÁNÍ: 5. Pokud je směr otáčení nesprávný, postupujte následovně:
• Vnější plochy čerpadla a motoru mohou při provozu dosáh- a) Odpojte napájení.
nout teplot vyšších než 40 ºC (104 °F). Nedotýkejte se žádné b) Na svorkovnici motoru nebo na elektrickém ovládacím panelu za-
části zařízení bez ochranných pomůcek. měňte polohu dvou ze tří napájecích kabelů.
• Neumisťujte do blízkosti čerpadla žádné hořlavé materiály. Schéma zapojení naleznete v oddílu Obrázek 14.
c) Znovu zkontrolujte směr otáčení.
OZNÁMENÍ:
• Nikdy nespouštějte čerpadlo s nižším než minimálním jmenovitým průto- 5.3 Spuštění čerpadla
kem, na sucho nebo bez náplně.
• Nikdy nepoužívejte čerpadlo s uzavřeným uzavíracím výtlačným ventilem Před spuštěním čerpadla se ujistěte, zda platí následující:
po dobu delší než několik sekund.
• Nikdy nepoužívejte čerpadlo s uzavřeným uzavíracím sacím ventilem. • Čerpadlo je správně připojeno ke zdroji napájení.
• Ujistěte se, že za běhu čerpadla je vždy zaručen minimální průtok vody, • Čerpadlo je správně naplněno dle pokynů v oddílu Plnění čerpadla.
abyste zabránili přehřátí vnitřních součástí čerpadla. Nelze-li to zajistit, • Uzavírací ventil po proudu z čerpadla je uzavřen.
pak se doporučuje obtok nebo recirkulační potrubí. Minimální nominální 1. Spusťte motor.
hodnoty průtoku naleznete v dodatku. 2. Pozvolna otevřete uzavírací ventil na výtlačné straně čerpadla.
• Když čerpadlo běží naprázdno, chraňte ho před mrazem. Vypusťte ve- Při předpokládaných provozních podmínkách musí čerpadlo běžet
škerou kapalinu, která se nachází uvnitř čerpadla. Jinak by mohla za- hladce a tiše. Pokud tomu tak není, postupujte podle pokynů uvede-
mrznout a poškodit čerpadlo. ných v oddílu Řešení problémů.
• Hodnota tlaku na sací straně (vodovodní potrubí či spádová nádrž) a ma-
ximální tlak dodávaný čerpadlem nesmí překročit maximální povolený
pracovní tlak (jmenovitý tlak pro číslo součásti) čerpadla. 6 Údržba
• Pokud dojde ke kavitaci, nepoužívejte čerpadlo. Kavitace by mohla po-
škodit vnitřní součásti. Bezpečnostní opatření
• V případě, že čerpáte horkou vodu, musí být na straně sání zajištěn mini-
mální tlak, čímž se zabrání kavitaci. UPOZORNĚNÍ:
Před instalací nebo servisem čerpadla odpojte a zablokujte elek-
Hladina hluku trické napájení.
Informace o hluku vydávaném jednotkami vybavenými dodávaným moto-
rem Lowara naleznete v oddílu Tabulka 10.
UPOZORNĚNÍ:
• Údržbu a servis musí provádět pouze způsobilý a kvalifikova-
5.1 Plnění čerpadla ný personál.
• Dodržujte platné předpisy pro prevenci nehod.
Informace o umístění zátky naleznete v oddílu Obrázek 15. • Používejte vhodné vybavení a ochranné prostředky.
• Ujistěte se, že čerpaná kapalina nezpůsobí škody ani úraz.
Instalace s hladinou kapaliny nad čerpadlem (sací hlava)
Obrázek, který znázorňuje součásti čerpadla, naleznete v oddílu Obrázek 16. 6.1 Servis
1. Uzavřete uzavírací ventil umístěný směrem k pumpě. Postupujte podle Čerpadlo nevyžaduje pravidelnou údržbu. Pokud uživatel chce pravidelnou
následujících pokynů: údržbu naplánovat, záleží na typu čerpané kapaliny a provozních podmín-
2. Řada 1, 3, 5: kách čerpadla.
a) Uvolněte kolík vypouštěcí zátky (2). Pokud máte nějaké další dotazy nebo chcete získat více informací o běžné
b) Odstraňte plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1) a otevřete uzavírací údržbě nebo servisu, obraťte se na oddělení prodeje a služeb.
ventil proti proudu, dokud nezačne z otvoru vytékat voda.
Může být nezbytné provést mimořádnou údržbu, aby se vysušily stopy kapa-
c) Utáhněte kolík vypouštěcí zátky (2). liny nebo byly vyměněny opotřebované součástí.
d) Nasaďte plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1).
3. Řada 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
6.2 Hodnoty momentů
a) Odstraňte plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1) a otevřete uzavírací
ventil proti proudu, dokud nezačne z otvoru vytékat voda. Informace o hodnotách točivého momentu naleznete v oddílu Tabulka 18,
b) Zavřete plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1). Plnicí zátku (3) lze pou- Tabulka 19 nebo Tabulka 20.
žít namísto odvzdušňovací (1).
Informace o použitelné síle a točivých momentech na přírubách potrubí na-
leznete v oddílu Obrázek 21.
Instalace s hladinou kapaliny pod čerpadlem (sací výška)
Obrázek, který znázorňuje součásti čerpadla, naleznete v oddílu Obrázek 17. 6.3 Výměna elektrického motoru
1. Otevřete uzavírací ventil umístěný proti proudu od čerpadla a zavřete Čerpadlo je dodáno s kalibrovanou vidlicovou vložkou, která byla navržena
uzavírací ventil po proudu. Postupujte podle následujících pokynů: tak, aby usnadnila spojování motoru a výměnu součástí.
2. Řada 1, 3, 5:
a) Uvolněte kolík vypouštěcí zátky (2). • Pokyny k výměně motoru naleznete v oddílu Obrázek 23.
b) Odstraňte plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1) a pomocí trychtýře na- Pokud kalibrovaná vidlicová vložka není dostupná, použijte vložku o
plňte čerpadlo, dokud z otvoru nezačne vytékat voda. rozměrech 5 ± 0,1 mm (0,2 ± 0,004 palce).
c) Nasaďte plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1).
d) Utáhněte kolík vypouštěcí zátky (2). 6.4 Výměna mechanického těsnění
3. Řada 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Odstraňte plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1) a pomocí trychtýře (4) Řada Postup
naplňte čerpadlo, dokud z otvoru nezačne vytékat voda. 1, 3, 5 Obraťte se na oddělení prodeje a služeb.
b) Nasaďte plnicí a odvzdušňovací zátku (1). Plnicí zátku (3) lze pou- 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Obraťte se na oddělení prodeje a služeb.
žít namísto odvzdušňovací (1). kW
10, 15, 22: > 4 Postup naleznete v oddílu Obrázek 24. K čištění a mazá-
5.2 Kontrola směru otáčení (třífázový motor) kW ní použijte alkohol.
33, 46, 66, 92, Postup naleznete v oddílu Obrázek 24. K čištění a mazá-
Před spuštěním proveďte následující postup. 125 ní použijte alkohol.
1. Dle šipek na adaptéru nebo krytu ventilátoru motoru určete správný
směr otáčení.
2. Spusťte motor.
3. Rychle zkontrolujte směr otáčení skrz kryt spojky nebo kryt ventiláto-
ru motoru.
POZNÁMKA: Pokyny
Odložte si tento návod na budúce použitie. Majte ho poruke pri mieste in- Pokyny a varovania, ktoré sú uvedené v tejto príručke, sa týkajú štandardnej
štalácie zariadenia. verzie, tak ako je popísaná v predajnej dokumentácií. Špeciálna verzia môže
byť dodávaná s dodatočnými letákmi s pokynmi. Ohľadom akýchkoľvek
úprav alebo vlastností špeciálnej verzie si pozrite kúpnu zmluvu. Ohľadom
1.1.1 Neskúsení používatelia pokynov, situácií alebo udalostí, ktoré nie sú popísané v tejto príručke, alebo
v predajnej dokumentácií, kontaktujte najbližšie servisné stredisko spoločno-
VAROVANIE: sti Lowara.
Tento výrobok môže obsluhovať iba kvalifikovaný personál.
1.3 Likvidácia obalov a výrobku
Dbajte na tieto preventívne opatrenia: Dodržujte platné miestne predpisy a zákony týkajúce sa likvidácie triedeného
• Osoby s obmedzenými schopnosťami by mali tento výrobok obsluhovať odpadu.
iba pod dozorom alebo po absolvovaní školenia pod odborníkom.
• Deti musia byť pod dozorom, aby sa nehrali s výrobkom, ani okolo neho. 1.4 Záruka
Ohľadom informácií o záruke si pozrite zmluvu o predaji.
1.2 Bezpečnostné názvoslovie a symboly
Informácie o bezpečnostných správach 1.5 Náhradné súčasti
Je extrémne dôležité, aby ste si preštudovali, porozumeli a rešpektovali bez-
pečnostné správy a predpisy už pred manipuláciou s výrobkom. Sú zverejne- VAROVANIE:
né na pomoc pri predchádzaní týmto nebezpečenstvám: Na výmenu všetkých opotrebovaných alebo chybných kompo-
nentov používajte iba pôvodné náhradné diely. Používanie ne-
• Úrazy a zdravotné problémy vhodných náhradných dielov môže spôsobiť chybnú funkciu,
• Poškodenie výrobku poškodenie a úrazy, a takisto stratu platnosti záruky.
• Porucha výrobku
UPOZORNENIE:
Úrovne nebezpečenstva Keď budete požadovať technické údaje alebo náhradné súčiastky
Úroveň nebezpečenstva Indikácia od Oddelenia predaja a servisu, vždy uveďte konkrétny typ vý-
Nebezpečná situácia, ktorá, ak jej ne- robku a číslo dielu.
NEBEZPEČENSTVO: zabránite, spôsobí smrť alebo závaž-
ný úraz Ďalšie informácie o náhradných dieloch výrobkov nájdete tu: Obrázok 25,
Obrázok 26 alebo Obrázok 27.
Nebezpečná situácia, ktorá, ak jej ne-
VAROVANIE: zabránite, môže spôsobiť smrť alebo 1.6 PREHLÁSENIE O ZHODE - EÚ (PREKLAD)
závažný úraz
LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, S ÚSTREDIAMI V VIA VITTORIO
LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE VI - ITALIA,
Nebezpečná situácia, ktorá, ak jej ne- TÝMTO VYHLASUJE, ŽE PRODUKT::
UPOZORNENIE: zabránite, môže spôsobiť drobný ale-
bo menší úraz. JEDNOTKA ELEKTRICKÉHO ČERPADLA (POZRITE SI ŠTÍTOK
NA PRVEJ STRANE)
• Potenciálna situácia, ktorá, ak jej SPĹŇA PRÍSLUŠNÉ USTANOVENIA NASLEDOVNÝCH EURÓP-
POZNÁMKA: nepredídete, môže spôsobiť ne- SKYCH SMERNÍC:
žiaduci stav
• Tento postup nesúvisí s úrazom • SMERNICA O STROJOVÝCH ZARIADENIACH: 2006/42/ES
(TECHNICKÝ SPIS JE DOSTUPNÝ V SPOLOČNOSTI LOWARA
SRL UNIPERSONALE).
Kategórie nebezpečenstva • SMERNICA O ELEKTROMAGNETICKEJ KOMPATIBILITE
Kategórie nebezpečenstva môžu buď spadať pod úrovne nebezpečenstva, 2004/108/ES
alebo viesť k zámene bežných symbolov úrovne nebezpečenstva za špecific- • ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, REGULÁCIA (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~, 50
ké symboly. Hz, PN≥ 0,75 kW) PRI OZNAČENÍ IF IE2 alebo IE3
Elektrické nebezpečenstvá sú označované nasledujúcim špecifickým symbo- A NASLEDOVNÉ TECHNICKÉ NORMY
lom:
• EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
VAROVANIE:
• EN 60034–30
Toto sú príklady iných kategórií, ktoré sa môžu vyskytovať. Spadajú pod ČERPADLO (POZRITE SI ŠTÍTOK NA PRVEJ STRANE)
bežné úrovne nebezpečenstva a môžu používať doplňujúce symboly:
• Nebezpečenstvo pritlačenia.
• Nebezpečenstvo porezania
• Nebezpečenstvo elektrického oblúka
SPĹŇA PRÍSLUŠNÉ USTANOVENIA NASLEDOVNÝCH EURÓP- Ohľadom ďalších informácií o tom, ako bezpečne ukotviť túto jednotku si
SKYCH SMERNÍC: pozrite: Obrázok 4.
• SMERNICA O STROJOVÝCH ZARIADENIACH: 2006/42/ES Zariadenie bez motora
(TECHNICKÝ SPIS JE DOSTUPNÝ V SPOLOČNOSTI LOWARA
SRL UNIPERSONALE). V prípade, že sa zariadenie nedodáva s motorom, kalibrovaná podložka v
A NASLEDOVNÉ TECHNICKÉ NORMY: tvare vidlice je už vložená medzi adaptér a spojky prevodovky. Podložka je
vložená za účelom udržania šachty obežného kolesa v správnej axiálnej polo-
• EN 809 he. Aby sa predišlo poškodeniu počas prepravy, hriadeľ je taktiež pridržova-
ný expandovaným polystyrénom a plastovými pásmi.
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011
Skrutka a matice, ktoré sa používajú na zaistenie motora, nie sú dodávané.
AMEDEO VALENTE Ohľadom ďalších informácií o tom, ako zapojiť motor si pozrite: Obrázok
(RIADITEĽ ENGINEERING A R&D) 23.
rev.01 VAROVANIE:
Čerpadlo a motor zakúpené samostatne a až potom zmontované
Lowara je ochranná známka spoločnosti Lowara srl Unipersonale, ktorá je predstavujú nové zariadenie v zmysle smernice o strojových za-
dcérskou firmou spoločnosti Xylem Inc. riadeniach 2006/42/ES. Osoba vykonávajúca montáž je zodpo-
vedná za všetky bezpečnostné hľadiská zostavovaného zariade-
nia.
2 Preprava a skladovanie
2.1 Kontrola dodávky 2.3 Pokyny na skladovanie
1. Skontrolujte, či sa na vonkajšej strane balenia nenachádzajú zjavné
známky poškodenia. Miesto uskladnenia
2. V prípade, že na výrobku sa nachádzajú viditeľné známky poškodenia, Tento výrobok musí byť uskladnený na krytom a suchom mieste chránenom
oznámte to nášmu distribútorovi do ôsmych dní od dodávky. pred teplom, nečistotami a otrasmi.
Rozbaľte jednotku POZNÁMKA:
1. Postupujte podľa príslušných krokov: • Chráňte výrobok pred vlhkosťou, zdrojmi tepla a mechanickým poškode-
• Ak je jednotka zabalená v krabici, odstráňte sponky a otvorte kra- ním.
bicu. • Na zabalený výrobok neukladajte ťažké predmety.
• Ak je jednotka zabalená v drevenej debne, otvorte kryt, pričom ale
dávajte pozor na klince a remene.
2. Z drevenej základne odskrutkujte zabezpečovacie skrutky alebo reme- Vonkajšia teplota
ne. Výrobok musí byť skladovaný pri vonkajšej teplote od -5 °C do + 40 °C (od
23 °F do 104 °F).
Vizuálne skontrolujte jednotku
1. Odstráňte obalové materiály z výrobku.
Všetky obalové materiály zneškodňujte v súlade s platnými predpismi. 3 Popis výrobku
2. Skontrolujte pohľadom výrobok a zistite, či niektoré diely neboli po-
škodené alebo či nechýbajú. 3.1 Konštrukcia čerpadla
3. Podľa potreby uvoľnite výrobok vybratím skrutiek, svorníkov alebo
pásov. Toto čerpadlo je vertikálnym, viacstupňovým, samostatne sa nenastavujúcim
Pre vlastnú bezpečnosť buďte opatrný pri manipulácii s klincami a čerpadlom, ktoré môže byť spojené so štandardnými elektromotormi. Čer-
pásmi. padlo môže byť použité na čerpanie:
4. Ak nie je čokoľvek v poriadku, kontaktujte Oddelenie predaja a servi- • Studenej vody
su.
• Teplej vody
Kovové časti čerpadla, ktoré prichádzajú do styku s vodou, sú vyrobené z
nasledovných materiálov:
2.2 Pokyny na prepravu
Rad Materiál
Bezpečnostné opatrenia 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Nehrdzavejúca oceľ
33, 46, 66, 92, Nehrdzavejúca oceľ a liatina
VAROVANIE: 125 Je dostupná zvláštna verzia, ktorá ma všetky časti vyrobe-
• Rešpektujte platné predpisy na predchádzanie haváriám. né z nehrdzavejúcej ocele.
• Nebezpečenstvo pomliaždenia. Jednotka a komponenty môžu
byť ťažké. Použite vhodné zdvíhacie metódy a vždy používaj- Čerpadlá SV 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 a 22 sú dostupné v rôznych verziách podľa
te obuv s oceľovými špičkami. umiestnenia sacieho a vypúšťacieho kanála a tvaru pripojovacej obruby.
S ohľadom na výber vhodného vybavenia na zdvíhanie si pozrite celkovú Výrobok sa môže dodávať ako čerpacia jednotka (čerpadlo s elektrickým
hmotnosť, ktorá je uvedená na balení. motorom), alebo iba ako samostatné čerpadlo.
Nesprávne používanie
VAROVANIE:
Nevhodné používanie čerpadla môže vytvoriť nebezpečné pod- Štandardný EPDM -30 °C (-22 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C (248
mienky a spôsobiť úraz a škodu na majetku. °F) F) °F)
Špeciálna FPM (FKM) -10 °C (14 °F) 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C70 (248
Nesprávne používanie tohto výrobku povedie k strate záruky. F) °F)
Príklady nesprávneho používania: Špeciálna PTFE 0 °C (32 °F) 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C (248
F) °F)
• Kvapaliny, ktoré poškodzujú konštrukčné materiály čerpadla
• Nebezpečné kvapaliny (ako napríklad toxické, výbušné, horľavé alebo ko- Ohľadom zvláštnych požiadaviek kontaktujte Oddelenie predaja a servisu.
rozívne kvapaliny)
• Pitné tekutiny iné než voda (napríklad víno alebo mlieko) Maximálny počet štartov za hodinu
Príklady nesprávnej inštalácie: Táto tabuľka zobrazuje povolený počet štartov za hodinu pre motory doda-
• Nebezpečné umiestnenia (ako napríklad výbušné alebo korozívne pro- né spoločnosťou Lowara:
stredie). kW 0,25 - 4,00 - 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
• Umiestnenie na miestach s príliš vysokou teplotu vzduchu alebo nedosta- 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
točným vetraním.
Štarty za 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
• Inštalácia vo vonkajšom prostredí bez ochrany pred dažďom alebo mra- hodinu
zom.
NEBEZPEČENSTVO: POZNÁMKA:
Nepoužívajte toto čerpadlo na manipuláciu s horľavými alebo Ak používate iný motor ako štandardný, dodávaný s elektrickým čerpadlom,
výbušnými tekutinami. skontrolujte príslušné pokyny a zistite dovolený počet zapnutí za hodinu.
POZNÁMKA:
• Nepoužívajte toto čerpadlo na manipuláciu s tekutinami obsahujúcimi
3.3 Typový štítok
brúsne, tuhé alebo vláknité látky a materiály. Typový štítok je kovovou etiketou, nachádzajúcou sa na adaptéri. Typový ští-
• Nepoužívajte toto čerpadlo pre rýchlosti prietoku prekračujúce hodnoty tok uvádza kľúčové technické parametre výrobku. Ohľadom ďalších infor-
rýchlosti prietoku stanovené na typovom štítku. mácií si pozrite: Obrázok 1.
Typový štítok poskytuje informácie týkajúce sa materiálu tesnenia a mecha-
Zvláštne použitia nického tesnenia. Ohľadom informácií o tom, ako interpretovať kód na ty-
V nasledovných prípadoch kontaktujte Oddelenie predaja a servisu: povom štítku, si pozrite: Obrázok 2.
• Ak je hodnota hustoty a/alebo viskozity pre čerpanú kvapalinu vyššia ako Označenie výrobku
hodnota pre vodu, ako napríklad voda s glykolom, keďže môže byť po-
trebný výkonnejší motor. V časti Obrázok 3 je na príklade vysvetlený identifikačný kód čerpadla.
• Ak je čerpaná kvapalina chemicky ošetrovaná (napríklad zmäkčovaná,
deionizovaná, demineralizovaná, atď.). Štítok WRAS - Požiadavky na montáž a poznámky (iba pre trhy
• Ak bude čerpadlo nainštalované v horizontálnej polohe, musíte si vyžia- Spojeného kráľovstva)
dať špeciálnu súpravu montážnych konzol. Štítok WRAS na čerpadle znamená, že sa jedná o výrobok schválený podľa
• Akákoľvek situácia odlišujúca sa od tých, ktoré popísané, a týkajúca sa predpisu Water Regulations Advisory Scheme. Tento výrobok je vhodný na
povahy kvapaliny. používanie pre studenú tečúcu vodu konzumovanú ľuďmi. Ohľadom ďal-
ších informácií si pozrite časti IRN R001 a R420 v registri WRAS Water Fit-
tings and Materials Directory (www.wras.co.uk).
3.2 Aplikačné limity
IMQ, TUV, IRAM alebo iné značky (iba pri elektrických čerpadlách)
Maximálny pracovný tlak
Ak nie je uvedené inak, pri elektrických výrobkoch s označením schválenia
Tento vývojový diagram zobrazuje maximálny pracovný tlak v závislosti od sa toto schválenie týka výhradne elektrického čerpadla.
modelu čerpadla a teploty čerpanej kvapaliny.
4 Inštalácia
Bezpečnostné opatrenia
VAROVANIE:
• Rešpektujte platné predpisy na predchádzanie haváriám.
• Použite vhodné zariadenia a ochranu.
• Vždy si preštudujte a rešpektujte platné miestne alebo vnútro-
štátne predpisy, legislatívu a pravidlá výberu miesta inštalácie a
vodnej a elektrickej prípojky.
69 EN 60335-2-41 je bezpečnostná norma týkajúca sa elektrických bezpečnostných čerpadiel pre domácnosti a pre podobné účely
70 Maximálne 100 ºC pre vodu
Skontrolujte, či sú splnené nasledovné požiadavky: Informácie o základni čerpadla a ukotvovacích otvoroch si pozrite: Obrázok
13.
• Kontrolný panel musí chrániť motor pred preťažením a skratovaním.
• Nainštalujte správnu ochranu proti preťaženiu (tepelné relé alebo ochran- 1. Čerpadlo umiestnite na betónový základ alebo vhodnú kovovú kon-
né zariadenie motora). štrukciu.
V prípade, že prenos vibrácií môže byť rušivý, nainštalujte medzi čer-
Typ čerpadla Ochrana padlo a základňu podpery na tlmenie vibrácií.
Štandardné jednofázové elektrické • Zabudovaná automatická reseto- 2. Odstráňte kolíky zakrývajúce vstupy.
čerpadlo ≤ 1,5 kW vacia tepelná ampérometrická 3. Zarovnajte obruby čerpadla a potrubných rozvodov na oboch stranách
ochrana (ochrana motora) čerpadla.
• Istenie proti skratu (musí dodať Skontrolujte zarovnanie skrutiek.
technik)71 4. Utiahnite skrutkami potrubné rozvody k čerpadlu.
Trojfázové elektrické čerpadlo a iné • Tepelná ochrana (musí dodať Neumiestňujte potrubné rozvody nasilu na ich miesto.
jednofázové čerpadlá72 technik) 5. Skrutkami bezpečne ukotvite čerpadlo k betónovej základni alebo ko-
• Istenie proti skratu (musí dodať vovej konštrukcií.
technik)
• Kontrolný panel musí byť vybavený testovacím ochranným systémom, ku 4.4.2 Elektrická inštalácia
ktorému je pripojený tlakový spínač, plavákový vypínač, sondy alebo iné 1. Motor môžete otočiť tak, aby ste získali čo najpohodlnejšiu polohu
vhodné zariadenia. pre pripojenie:
• Na strane nasávania čerpadla odporúčame používať nasledovné zariade-
nia: a) Odskrutkujte štyri skrutky pripevňujúce motor k čerpadlu.
• V prípade, že čerpáte vodu z vodovodnej siete, použite tlakový spínač. b) Otočte motor do želanej polohy. Neodstraňujte spojky medzi
hriadeľmi motora a čerpadla.
• V prípade, že čerpáte vodu zo zásobníka alebo rezervoára, použite pla-
vákový spínač alebo plavákové snímače. c) Znovu nasaďte štyri skrutky a utiahnite ich.
• Pri použití tepelných relé odporúčame použiť tie, ktoré sú citlivé na po- 2. Odskrutkujte skrutky krytu svorkovnice.
ruchu fázy. 3. Pripojte a upevnite káble napájania podľa príslušnej schémy zapojenia:
Schému zapojenia nájdete v časti Obrázok 14. Schémy si taktiež môžete
Kontrolný zoznam - motor pozrieť na zadnej strane krytu svorkovnice.
a) Pripojte uzemňovací (ukostrovací) vodič.
VAROVANIE: Presvedčite sa, že uzemňovací (ukostrovací) vodič je dlhší ako je
• V prípade, že používate iný motor, než štandardný, prečítajte fázové vodiče.
si prevádzkové pokyny, aby ste sa uistili, či je prítomné b) Pripojte fázové vodiče.
ochranné zariadenie. 4. Namontujte späť kryt svorkovnice.
• Ak je motor vybavený automatickými tepelnými ochranami,
pamätajte na riziko neočakávaných spúšťaní pri pripojení na POZNÁMKA:
preťaženie. Nepoužívajte takéto motory pri protipožiarnych Utiahnite káblové hrdlá tak, aby nemohlo dôjsť k prekĺznutiu káblov a
aplikáciách a v kropiacich systémoch. aby sa do svorkovnice nemohla dostať vlhkosť.
71 poistky aM (na štartovanie motora) alebo magneto-termálny spínač s krivkou C a Icn ≥ 4,5 kA alebo ekvivalentné zariadenie.
72 Tepelné relé proti preťaženiu s prevádzkou triedy 10 A + poistky aM (na štartovanie motora) alebo magneto-termálny spínač na ochranu motora s prevádzkou triedy 10 A.
5 Uvedenie do prevádzky, 3. Séria 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Odmontujte plniacu a ventilačnú zátku (1) a pomocou lievika (4)
spustenie, prevádzka a naplňte čerpadlo, až kým nezačne cez otvor vytekať voda.
vypnutie b) Namontujte späť plniacu a ventilačnú zátku (1). Namiesto (1) mô-
žete použiť plniacu zátku (3).
Bezpečnostné opatrenia
5.2 Skontrolujte smer rotácie (trojfázový motor)
VAROVANIE:
• Presvedčte sa, že vypúšťaná tekutina nespôsobuje škody ani Tento postup zbehnite pred naštartovaním.
úrazy. 1. Aby ste určili správny smer otáčania, vyhľadajte šípky na adaptéri ale-
• Ochranný spínač motora môže zapríčiniť neočakávané opä- bo kryte vrtule motora.
tovné spustenie motora. Môže to spôsobiť aj závažný úraz. 2. Spustite motor.
• Nikdy neuvádzajte čerpadlo do prevádzky bez správne nain-
štalovaného ochranného krytu spojky. 3. Rýchlo skontrolujte cez ochranu spojky alebo cez kryt vrtule motora
smer otáčania.
4. Zastavte motor.
UPOZORNENIE:
5. Ak nie smer otáčania správny, postupujte nasledovne:
• Vonkajší povrch čerpadla a motora môže mať počas prevádz-
ky viac než 40 ºC (104 ºF). Nedotýkajte sa ich žiadnou časťou a) Odpojte sieťové napájanie.
tela bez ochranného odevu. b) Vymeňte polohu dvoch z troch vodičov napájacieho kábla na do-
• V blízkosti čerpadla sa nesmie nachádzať žiadny horľavý ma- ske svorkovnice motora alebo na elektrickom ovládacom paneli.
teriál. Schému zapojenia nájdete v časti Obrázok 14.
c) Znovu skontrolujte smer otáčania.
POZNÁMKA:
• Čerpadlo sa nesmie uvádzať do prevádzky, ak je prietok nižší ako meno- 5.3 Spustite čerpadlo
vitý, nasucho, ani bez naplnenia.
• Čerpadlo nikdy nenechajte spustené s uzatvoreným dvojpolohovým vý- Pred spustením čerpadla sa uistite, že:
tlačným ventilom dlhšie než niekoľko sekúnd.
• Nikdy nespúšťajte čerpadlo s uzatvoreným dvojpolohovým sacím venti- • Čerpadlo je správne zapojené do napájania.
lom. • Čerpadlo je správne nastavené, podľa pokynov v časti Nastavte čerpadlo.
• Na predchádzanie nadmernému ohrevu vnútorných komponentov čer- • Dvojpolohový ventil, ktorý je umiestnený v smere prúdu pod čerpadlom,
padla sa presvedčite, že počas chodu čerpadla je vždy zaručený minimálny je uzatvorený.
prietok vody. Ak sa to nedá dosiahnuť, odporúča sa použiť obtokové ale-
bo recirkulačné vedenie. Pozri minimálne hodnoty menovitého prietoku 1. Spustite motor.
uvedené v prílohe. 2. Postupne otvárajte dvojpolohový ventil strane výpuste čerpadla.
• Čerpadlo bežiace naprázdno nevystavujte podmienkam mrazu. Vysušte V predpokladaných prevádzkových podmienkach musí čerpadlo bežať
všetku vlhkosť v čerpadle. Ak tak neurobíte, môže to spôsobiť zamrznu- hladko a ticho. V opačnom prípade si pozrite časť Riešenie problémov.
tie tekutiny a poškodenie čerpadla.
• Súčet tlaku na strane nasávania (rozvody vody, gravitačná nádrž) a maxi-
málneho tlaku, ktorý je vytváraný čerpadlom, nesmie prekročiť maximál- 6 Údržba
ny povolený prevádzkový tlak (nominálny tlak PN) daného čerpadla.
• Nepoužívajte čerpadlo, ak dochádza ku kavitácii. Kavitácia môže poško- Bezpečnostné opatrenia
diť vnútorné komponenty.
• V prípade, že čerpáte horúcu vodu, musí zaručiť na strane nasávania mi- VAROVANIE:
nimálny tlak, aby sa predišlo kavitácii. Odpojte a uzamknite elektrické napájanie pred inštalovaním ale-
bo servisom čerpadla.
Hladina hluku
Informácie o hlučnosti zariadení vybavených motorom Lowara Tabulka
10nájdete v časti . VAROVANIE:
• Údržba a servis musia vykonávať iba zaškolení a kvalifikovaní
5.1 Nastavte čerpadlo pracovníci.
• Rešpektujte platné predpisy na predchádzanie haváriám.
Informácie o umiestnení zátky nájdete v časti Obrázok 15. • Použite vhodné zariadenia a ochranu.
• Presvedčte sa, že vypúšťaná tekutina nespôsobuje škody ani
úrazy.
Montáž čerpadla pod hladinu kvapaliny (sacia hlava)
MEGJEGYZÉS: Utasítások
Őrizze meg ezt az útmutatót későbbi hivatkozásra, és tartsa elérhető helyen A kézikönyvben közölt utasítások és figyelmeztetések a kereskedelmi doku-
a berendezés közelében. mentumban ismertetett alapkiépítés szerinti verzióra vonatkoznak. A speciá-
lis változatok kiegészítő kezelési ismertetőkkel kerülnek szállításra. Az esetle-
ges módosításokkal vagy a speciális változat jellemzőivel kapcsolatban az ér-
1.1.1 Tapasztalattal nem rendelkező felhasználók tékesítési szerződés nyújt tájékoztatást. Az ebben a kézikönyvben nem is-
mertetett utasításokkal, helyzetekkel vagy eseményekkel kapcsolatban fordul-
FIGYELMEZTETÉS: jon a legközelebbi Lowara Szervizközponthoz.
A termék szakképzett személyek általi üzemeltetésre készült.
1.3 A csomagolás és a termék ártalmatlanítása
Tartsa be az alábbi óvintézkedéseket: Be kell tartani a szelektív hulladék elhelyezésével kapcsolatos hatályos helyi
• A terméket képességeikben korlátozott személyek kizárólag kellő szakér- előírásokat és szabályokat.
telemmel rendelkező személy felügyelete mellett vagy megfelelő képzés
után üzemeltethetik.
• Gondoskodni kell róla, hogy gyermekek ne játszhassanak a termékkel 1.4 Jótállás
vagy körülötte. A jótállással kapcsolatos információkat illetően az értékesítési szerződés ad
tájékoztatást.
1.2 Biztonsági fogalmak és jelzések
1.5 Tartalék alkatrészek
A biztonsági üzenetekről
A termék működtetéséhez kiemelten fontos a biztonsági üzenetek és előírá- FIGYELMEZTETÉS:
sok elolvasása, ismerete és betartása. A biztonsági üzenetk célja a következők A kopott vagy hibás alkatrészek cseréjéhez kizárólag eredeti cse-
megakadályozása: realkatrészeket használjon. A nem megfelelő cserealkatrészek
• Személyi sérülések és egészségkárosodás használata hibás működést, károsodást és sérüléseket okozhat,
• A berendezés károsodása valamint semmissé teheti a jótállást.
• A berendezés hibás működése
VIGYÁZAT:
Veszélyszintek Ha műszaki információt vagy pótalkatrészt kér az Értékesítési és
Veszélyszint Jelzés Szervizszolgálattól, minden esetben határozza meg a pontos tí-
Olyan veszélyes helyzet, amely halált pust és cikkszámot.
VESZÉLY: vagy súlyos sérülést okoz
A termék pótalkatrészeire vonatkozó további információkkal kapcsolatban
lásd Ábra 25, Ábra 26 vagy Ábra 27.
Olyan veszélyes helyzet, amely halált
FIGYELMEZTETÉS: vagy súlyos sérülést okozhat
1.6 EK MEGFELELŐSÉGI NYILATKOZAT
(FORDÍTÁS)
Olyan veszélyes helyzet, amely enyhe A LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, KÖZPONTI IRODÁJÁNAK CÍ-
VIGYÁZAT: vagy közepesen súlyos sérülést okoz- ME: VIA VITTORIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAG-
hat GIORE VI - ITALIA, EZENNEL KIJELENTI, HOGY AZ ALÁBBI
TERMÉK:
• Olyan lehetséges veszélyes hely- VILLAMOS SZIVATTYÚ BERENDEZÉS (LÁSD AZ ELSŐ OLDA-
MEGJEGYZÉS: LON FELTÜNTETETT CÍMKÉT)
zet, amely nem kívánt állapotot
okozhat
ELEGET TESZ A KÖVETKEZŐ EURÓPAI IRÁNYELVEK VONAT-
• Egyéb, nem a személyi biztonság- KOZÓ RENDELKEZÉSEINEK:
hoz kapcsolódó gyakorlat
• A GÉPEKRŐL SZÓLÓ 2006/42/EK IRÁNYELV (A MŰSZAKI DO-
Veszélykategóriák KUMENTÁCIÓ A LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE VÁLLALAT-
A veszélykategóriák egy bizonyos veszély szintbe tartoznak, vagy a szokásos NÁL ÁLL RENDELKEZÉSRE).
veszélyszint jelzések helyett sajátos veszély jelzéssel rendelkeznek. • AZ ELEKTROMÁGNESES ÖSSZEFÉRHETŐSÉGRŐL SZÓLÓ
2004/108/EK IRÁNYELV
Az áramütésveszélyt a következő jelzés jelzi: • ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, 640/2009 EK RENDELKEZÉS (3 ~,
50 Hz, PN≥ 0,75 kW) IE2 vagy IE3 JELÖLÉS ESETÉN
FIGYELMEZTETÉS: VALAMINT A KÖVETKEZŐ MŰSZAKI SZABVÁNYOKNAK:
• EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
Ezek az előforduló kategóriák példái. Az általános veszélyszintek közé tar- • EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
toznak és kiegészítő jelzéseket is használhatnak: • EN 60034–30
• Becsípődésveszély
• Vágásveszély SZIVATTYÚ (LÁSD AZ ELSŐ OLDALON FELTÜNTETETT CÍM-
• Szikrahullás veszély KÉT)
FIGYELMEZTETÉS:
A szivattyú nem megfelelő használata személyi sérüléseket, a be-
rendezés károsodását okozhatja.
A termék mindennemű helytelen használata a jótállás elvesztésével jár. Standard EPDM -30 °C (-22 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C (248
°F) F) °F)
Példák a nem megfelelő használatra: Speciális FPM (FKM) -10 °C (14 °F) 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C74 (248
• A szivattyú alkotóelemeinek anyagával össze nem egyeztethető folyadé- F) °F)
kok Speciális PTFE 0 °C (32 °F) 90 °C (194 ° 120 °C (248
• Veszélyes folyadékok (például mérgező, robbanó hatású, gyúlékony, vagy F) °F)
korrozív folyadékok)
• Víztől eltérő iható folyadékok (pl. bor, tej) Különleges igények esetén vegye fel a kapcsolatot Értékesítési és Szerviz-
Példák a nem megfelelő telepítésre: szolgálatunkkal.
• Veszélyes helyszínek (például robbanásveszélyes vagy korrozív hatású lég- Óránkénti indítások maximális száma
kör). Ez a táblázat a Lowara által szállított motorok megengedett óránkénti indítá-
• Az olyan hely, ahol nagyon magas a levegő hőmérséklete vagy nem meg- sainak számát ismerteti
felelő a szellőzés.
• Olyan kültéri létesítmények, ahol nincs meg a csapadéktól vagy fagypont kW 0,25 – 4,00 – 11,0 – 18,5 – 30,0 – 45,0 55,0
alatti hőmérséklettől való védelem. 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
Órán- 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
VESZÉLY: kénti in-
NE használja a szivattyút gyúlékony vagy robbanásveszélyes fo- dítások
lyadék szivattyúzására. száma
MEGJEGYZÉS: MEGJEGYZÉS:
• NE használja a szivattyút dörzsölő, szemcsés vagy szálas folyadék szivat- Ha a gyári motortól eltérő motort használ az elektromos szivattyúval, olvas-
tyúzására. sa el a vonatkozó utasításokat és nézze meg, hogy óránként hány indítás en-
• Tilos a szivattyút az adattáblán meghatározott szállítási teljesítményt meg- gedélyezett.
haladó teljesítménnyel üzemeltetni.
Különleges alkalmazások
3.3 Adattábla
A következő esetekben forduljon az Értékesítési és Szervizszolgálathoz: Az adattábla az adapteren található fém címke. Az adattáblán találhatók a
termék azonosító adatai. További részletekért lásd: Ábra 1.
• Ha a szivattyúzott folyadék sűrűsége és/vagy viszkozitása meghaladja a
vízre vonatkozó értéket (pl. a glikolt tartalmazó víz esetében); az ilyen Az adattábla a tömítés és a mechanikus tömítés anyagával kapcsolatos infor-
esetben ugyanis nagyobb teljesítményű motor válhat szükségessé. mációkat tartalmaz. Az adattáblán található kód értelmezésével kapcsolatos
• Ha a szivattyúzott folyadék kémiailag kezelt (pl. lágyított, ionmentesített, információval kapcsolatban lásd a következőt: Ábra 2.
ásványi anyagoktól mentesített stb.)
• Ha a szivattyút vízszintesen kívánják beépíteni, ahhoz speciális verzió és Termékleírás
tartókeret szükséges. A szivattyú azonosító kódjának magyarázatával kapcsolatban lásd a példát:
• Minden, az itt ismertetettektől eltérő, és a folyadék jellegével kapcsolatos Ábra 3.
helyzetben.
WRAS címke – Telepítési követelmények és felhívások (csak az
Egyesült Királyság piacára)
3.2 Használati határértékek
A szivattyún elhelyezett WRAS-címke azt jelenti, hogy a termék rendelkezik
Maximális üzemi nyomás a Water Regulations Advisory Scheme szerinti jóváhagyással. A termék alkal-
mas az emberi fogyasztásra szánt hideg ivóvíz esetében való alkalmazásra.
Ez az áramlási diagram a szivattyúmodelltől és a szivattyúzott folyadék hő- További információ a WRAS-(www.wras.co.uk) ivóvízvezeték-szerelvényeket
és -anyagokat ismertető jegyzékének (Water Fittings and Materials Direc-
mérsékletétől függő maximális üzemi nyomást jeleníti meg. tory) R001 és R420 számú, a beépítéssel kapcsolatos követelményeket és
megjegyzéseket (Installation Requirements and Notes, IRN) ismertető részé-
ben található.
4 Beszerelés
Óvintézkedések
A következő egyenlet a meghajtás felőli oldalon axiálisan rögzített tengely-
végcsapággyal rendelkező motorokra vonatkozik (pl. a Lowara e-SV stan- FIGYELMEZTETÉS:
dard motorjai), lásd Ábra 6. Az egyéb helyzetekkel kapcsolatban, kérjük, for- • Tartsa be a hatályos baleset-megelőzési előírásokat.
duljon az Értékesítési és Szállítási részleghez. • Használjon megfelelő védőfelszerelést.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN • Vegye figyelembe a berendezés telepítésére, víz és energia ellá-
tásra vonatkozó helyi és/vagy országos előírásokat, törvény-
P1max Maximális bemeneti nyomás eket és szabványokat.
75 aM (motorindító) biztosíték vagy mágneses-termikus kapcsoló C-görbével és Icn ≥ 4,5 kA védelemmel, esetleg más, ezzel megegyező eszköz.
76 10 A üzemi tartományú túlterhelés ellen védő hőrelé + aM (motorindító) biztosítékok vagy 10 A üzemi tartományú motorvédő mágneses-termikus kapcsoló.
5 Próbaüzemeltetés, elindítás, 3. 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 sorozat:
a) Távolítsa el a feltöltő-/légtelenítődugót (1) és egy tölcsérrel (4)
működtetés és leállítás töltse fel a szivattyút annyira, hogy a víz kifolyjon a furaton.
b) Szerelje vissza a feltöltő-/légtelenítődugót (1). A feltöltődugó (3)
Óvintézkedések is használható az (1) jelű helyett.
Ok Megoldás
A szivattyú eltömődött. Forduljon az Értékesítési és Szervizszolgálat-
hoz.
A csővezeték eltömődött. Ellenőrizze és tisztítsa ki a csővezetéket.
A járókerék forgásiránya Cseréljen meg két fázist a motor sorkapcsán
nem megfelelő (háromfázi- vagy az elektromos kapcsolótáblán.
sú változat).
Az emelési magasság túl Ellenőrizze a szivattyú működési feltételeit.
nagy, vagy túl nagy a szí- Szükség esetén végezze el az alábbi műveletet:
vóoldali csővezeték áramlá- • csökkentse a szívómagasságot
si ellenállása. • növelje a szívócső átmérőjét
Ok Megoldás
Szivárgás az alábbi részegységek egyikénél Javítsa meg, vagy cserélje ki a
vagy mindkettőnél: hibás alkatrészt.
• szívócső
• lábszelep vagy visszacsapó szelep
Ok Megoldás
Szivárgás az alábbi részegységek egyiké- Javítsa meg, vagy cserélje ki a hi-
nél vagy mindkettőnél: bás alkatrészt.
• szívócső
• lábszelep vagy visszacsapó szelep
Ok Megoldás
A szivattyú kavitá- A szivattyú nyomóoldali zárószelepének részleges zárá-
cióban működik sával csökkentse az igényelt kapacitást. Ha a probléma
továbbra is fennáll, ellenőrizze a szivattyú üzemelési
körülményeit (pl. szintkülönbség, áramlási ellenállás, fo-
lyadék-hőmérséklet).
A motor csapágyai Forduljon az Értékesítési és Szervizszolgálathoz.
elkoptak.
Idegen tárgy került Forduljon az Értékesítési és Szervizszolgálathoz.
a szivattyúba.
Bármilyen más esetben forduljon az Értékesítési és Szervizszolgálathoz.
protecţie a muncii Pericolele de suprafeţe fierbinţi sunt indicate de un simbol specific care înlo-
cuieşte simbolurile tipice pentru nivelurile de pericol:
1.1 Introducere PRECAUŢII:
Scopul acestui manual
Scopul acestui manual este de a furniza informaţiile necesare pentru:
Descrierea simbolurilor pentru utilizator şi instalator
• Instalarea
• Exploatarea Informaţii specifice pentru personalul însărcinat cu instala-
• Întreţinerea rea produsului în sistem (aspecte privind instalaţiile de apă-
canalizare şi electrice) sau însărcinat cu întreţinerea.
PRECAUŢII:
Înainte de a instala şi utiliza produsul, citiţi cu atenţie acest ma- Informaţii specifice utilizatorilor produsului.
nual. Utilizarea necorespunzătoare a produsului poate cauza
vătămări corporale şi deteriorarea proprietăţii şi poate anula ga-
ranţia.
Instrucţiuni
NOTĂ: Instrucţiunile şi avertizările furnizate în acest manual se referă la versiunea
Faceţi o copie a acestui manual pentru referiri ulterioare şi păstraţi-o dispo- standard, conform descrierii din documentul de vânzare. Este posibil ca
nibilă la locul de amplasare a unităţii. pompele de versiune specială să fie furnizate cu broşuri de instrucţiuni supli-
mentare. Consultaţi contractul de vânzare pentru orice modificări sau carac-
teristici de versiune specială. Pentru instrucţiuni, situaţii sau evenimente care
1.1.1 Utilizatori amatori nu sunt prevăzute în acest manual sau în documentul de vânzare, contactaţi
cel mai apropiat Centru de service Lowara.
AVERTISMENT:
Acest produs poate fi exploatat numai de către personal calificat. 1.3 Eliminarea ambalajului şi a produsului
Respectaţi codurile şi reglementările locale în vigoare privind eliminarea sor-
Ţineţi cont de următoarele precauţii: tată a deşeurilor.
• Se interzice persoanelor cu dizabilităţi să exploateze acest produs, cu ex-
cepţia cazului în care sunt supravegheate sau au fost instruite cores-
punzător de către un specialist. 1.4 Garanţia
• Copii trebuie supravegeaţi, pentru a vă asigura că nu se joacă cu produsul Pentru informaţii privind garanţia, consultaţi contractul de vânzare.
sau în jurul acestuia.
1.5 Piese de schimb
1.2 Terminologie şi simboluri pentru siguranţă
AVERTISMENT:
Despre mesajele de siguranţă Pentru a înlocui orice componentă uzată sau defectă, utilizaţi nu-
Înainte de a manevra produsul, este extrem de important să citiţi, să vă însu- mai piese de schimb originale Utilizarea pieselor de schimb ne-
şiţi şi să respectaţi cu atenţie mesajele de siguranţă şi reglementările. Acestea adecvate poate cauza disfuncţionalităţi, defecţiuni şi răniri pre-
sunt publicate pentru a preveni pericolele următoare: cum şi pierderea garanţiei.
• Accidente corporale şi probleme de sănătate
• Defecţiuni la produs
• Funcţionarea defectuoasă a produsului PRECAUŢII:
Specificaţi întotdeauna cu exactitate tipul produsului şi reperul
atunci când solicitaţi informaţii tehnice sau piese de schimb de la
Niveluri de pericol Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii.
Nivel de pericol Indicaţie
O situaţie periculoasă care, dacă nu
AVERTIZARE: este evitată, va avea ca rezultat dece- Pentru informaţii suplimentare privind piesele de schimb pentru produse,
sul sau vătămarea gravă consultaţi Figură 25, Figură 26 sau Figură 27.
Acestea sunt exemple de alte categorii care pot surveni. Acestea cad sub ni-
velurile de pericol obişnuit şi pot utiliza simboluri complementare: POMPĂ (CONSULTAŢI ETICHETA DE PE PRIMA PAGINĂ)
• Pericol de strivire
• Pericol de tăiere
• Pericol de strălucire de arc
RESPECTĂ PREVEDERILE RELEVANTE ALE URMĂTOARELOR Pentru informaţii suplimentare despre modul de agăţare în siguranţă a
DIRECTIVE EUROPENE: unităţii, consultaţi Figură 4.
• 2006/42/CE PRIVIND ECHIPAMENTELE TEHNICE (FIŞA TEH-
NICĂ ESTE DISPONIBILĂ DE LA LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONA- Unitate fără motor
LE) Dacă unitatea nu este livrată cu un motor, lamela calibrată în formă de furcă
ŞI URMĂTOARELE STANDARDE TEHNICE: este introdusă deja între adaptor şi cuplajul de transmisie. Lamela este intro-
dusă pentru a menţine ansamblul rotorului în poziţia axială corectă. Pentru a
• EN 809 preveni deteriorarea în timpul transportului, axul este, de asemenea, fixat în
poziţie cu polistiren expandat şi curele de plastic.
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011
Şurubul şi piuliţele utilizate pentru fixarea motorului nu sunt incluse. Pentru
AMEDEO VALENTE informaţii suplimentare despre modul de cuplare a motorului, consultaţi Fi-
(DIRECTOR ENGINEERING şi R&D) gură 23.
rev.01 AVERTISMENT:
O pompă şi un motor achiziţionate separat şi cuplate apoi îm-
Lowara este o marcă comercială a Lowara srl Unipersonale, subsidiară a Xy- preună formează un utilaj nou, conform Directivei utilajelor
lem Inc. 2006/42/EC. Persoana care execută cuplarea răspunde de toate
aspectele privind siguranţa unităţii combinate.
2 Transportul şi depozitarea
2.3 Instrucţiuni pentru depozitare
2.1 Inspectarea livrării
1. Verificaţi exteriorul pachetului pentru semne evidente de deteriorare. Locul de depozitare
2. Notificaţi distribuitorul în termen de opt zile de la data livrării, dacă Produsul trebuie să fie depozitat într-un loc acoperit şi uscat, ferit de
produsul poartă semne vizibile de deteriorare. căldură, murdărie şi vibraţii.
Despachetarea unităţii NOTĂ:
1. Urmaţi pasul aplicabil: • Protejaţi produsul împotriva umidităţii, surselor de căldură şi defecţiunilor
• Dacă unitatea este împachetată într-un carton, scoateţi capsele şi mecanice.
deschideţi cartonul. • Nu plasaţi greutăţi mari pe produsul ambalat.
• Dacă unitatea este împachetată într-o cutie de lemn, deschideţi ca-
pacul având grijă la cuie şi curele.
2. Scoateţi şuruburile de fixare sau curelele de pe baza de lemn. Temperatură ambiantă
Produsul trebuie depozitat la o temperatură ambiantă între -5 °C şi +40 °C
Inspectarea unităţii (între 23 °F şi 104 °F).
1. Înlăturaţi materialele de ambalare de la produs.
Dezafectaţi toate materialele de ambalare în conformitate cu regle-
mentările locale. 3 Descrierea produsului
2. Inspectaţi produsul pentru a determina dacă există componente defec-
te sau lipsă. 3.1 Designul pompei
3. Dacă este aplicabil, demontaţi produsul îndepărtând orice şurub, bulon
sau cordon. Aceasta este o pompă verticală în trepte, fără amorsare autonomă, care se
Pentru protecţia dvs. personală, aveţi grijă când manevraţi cuiele şi cor- poate cupla la motoare electrice standard. Pompa se poate utiliza pentru a
doanele. pompa:
4. Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii dacă există orice fel de • Apă rece
defecţiuni.
• Apă caldă
Părţile metalice ale pompei care intră în contact cu apa sunt fabricate din
următoarele materiale:
2.2 Instrucţiuni pentru transport
Serie Material
Măsuri de prevedere 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Oţel inoxidabil
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Oţel inoxidabil şi fontă
AVERTISMENT: Este disponibilă o versiune specială în care toate părţile
• Respectaţi reglementările în vigoare privind prevenirea acci- sunt fabricate din oţel inoxidabil.
dentelor.
• Pericol de strivire. Unitatea şi componentele pot fi grele. Utili- Pompele SV 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 şi 22 sunt disponibile în diverse versiuni în func-
zaţi metode de ridicare adecvate şi purtaţi tot timpul ţie de poziţia orificiilor de aspiraţie şi alimentare şi de forma flanşei conec-
încălţăminte placată cu oţel la vârfuri. toare.
Verificaţi greutatea brută indicată pe ambalaj pentru a selecta un echipament Produsul se poate furniza ca unitate de pompă (pompă şi motor electric) sau
de ridicare corespunzător. numai ca pompă.
Utilizarea necorespunzătoare
NOTĂ:
• Nu utilizaţi această pompă pentru a manevra lichide care conţin substanţe 3.3 Placa de date
abrazive, solide sau fibroase. Placa de date este o etichetă de metal localizată pe adaptor. Placa de date
• Nu utilizaţi pompa pentru debite care depăşesc debitele specificate pe prezintă specificaţiile cheie ale produsului. Pentru informaţii suplimentare,
placa de date. consultaţi Figură 1.
Placa de date oferă informaţii referitoare la materialul garniturii şi al garnitu-
Aplicaţii speciale rii mecanice. Pentru informaţii privind modul de interpretare a codului de pe
Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii în următoarele cazuri: placa de date, consultaţi Figură 2.
• Dacă valoarea de densitate şi/sau vâscozitate a lichidului pompat Denumire produs
depăşeşte valoarea apei, cum ar fi apa cu glicol; este posibil să necesite un
motor mai puternic. Consultaţi Figură 3 pentru explicarea codului de identificare pentru pompă şi
• Dacă lichidul pompat este tratat chimic (de exemplu, dedurizat, deionizat, pentru un exemplu.
demineralizat etc.).
• Dacă pompa va fi instalată orizontal, trebuie solicitate o versiune specială Etichetă WRAS - Cerinţe de instalare şi note (numai pentru piaţa de
şi suporturi de montare. desfacere din Marea Britanie)
• Orice situaţie diferită de cele descrise mai sus şi legată de natura lichidu- O etichetă WRAS pe pompă semnifică faptul că aceasta este un produs
lui. aprobat de Sistemul Consultativ privind Reglementările din Domeniul Hi-
drologic (Water Regulations Advisory Scheme). Acest produs este adecvat
pentru utilizare cu apă potabilă rece pentru consum uman. Pentru informaţii
3.2 Limite de aplicare suplimentare, consultaţi IRN-urile R001 şi R420 în Directorul de Materiale şi
Armături Hidraulice WRAS (www.wras.co.uk).
Presiune de lucru maximă
Acest grafic al fluxului afişează presiunea maximă de lucru în funcţie de mo- IMQ, TUV, IRAM sau alte marcaje (numai pentru pompa electrică)
Cu excepţia specificaţiilor contrare, pentru produsele cu un marcaj de apro-
delul pompei şi de temperatura lichidului pompat. bare privind siguranţa electrică, aprobarea se referă exclusiv la pompa elec-
trică.
4 Instalarea
Măsuri de prevedere
AVERTISMENT:
• Respectaţi reglementările în vigoare privind prevenirea acci-
dentelor.
• Utilizaţi un echipament şi elemente de protecţie adecvate.
• Ţineţi cont întotdeauna de reglementările, legislaţia şi normele
Formula următoare este valabilă pentru motoare dotate cu lagăr final blocat locale şi/sau naţionale în vigoare cu privire la alegerea ampla-
axial (precum motoarele standard Lowara pentru e-SV), consultaţi Figură 6. samentului instalării şi cu privire la conexiunile de apă şi de
Pentru alte situaţii, contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii. energie electrică.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
77 EN 60335-2-41 reprezintă norma privind siguranţa din domeniul electric a pompelor pentru uz casnic şi alte aplicaţii similare
78 Maximum 100º C pentru apă
• Cablurile electrice sunt protejate împotriva temperaturilor înalte, a vibra- Utilizaţi cabluri conform normelor, cu 3 conductori (2+masă/împământare)
ţiilor şi a coliziunilor. pentru versiunile monofazate şi cu 4 conductori (3+masă/împământare)
• Linia de alimentare electrică este dotată cu: pentru versiunile trifazate.
• Un dispozitiv de protecţie împotriva scurtcircuitelor
• Un întrerupător diferenţial cu sensibilitate ridicată (30 mA) [dispozitiv Pompă electrică cu motor:
curent rezidual RCD] pentru a asigura o protecţie suplimentară împo- Mufă cablu
triva şocurilor electrice Interval diametru cablu exterior în mm
• Un întrerupător izolator de reţea cu o toleranţă de contact de minim 3 Tip
mm M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
SM X – –
Lista de verificare a panoului de control electrical
PLM X X X
NOTĂ: LLM X X X
Panoul de control trebuie să se potrivească cu valorile nominale ale pompei
electrice. Combinaţiile necorespunzătoare pot să nu garanteze protecţia mo- 4.4 Instalarea pompei
torului.
79 siguranţe aM (pornirea motorului) sau întrerupător termomagnetic cu curbă C şi Icn ≥ 4,5 kA sau alt dispozitiv echivalent.
80 Releu termic de suprasarcină cu clasa de funcţionare 10A + siguranţe aM (pornirea motorului) sau întrerupător termomagnetic de protecţie a motorului cu clasa de func-
ţionare 10A.
5 Punerea în funcţiune, 3. Seria 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Scoateţi buşonul de umplere şi aerisire (1) şi utilizaţi o pâlnie (4)
pornirea, exploatarea şi oprirea pentru a umple pompa până când apa curge prin orificiu.
b) Montaţi la loc buşonul de umplere şi aerisire (1). Buşonul de um-
Măsuri de prevedere plere (3) se poate utiliza în loc de (1).
Pentru o imagine care afişează părţile pompei, consultaţi Figură 17. Pentru informaţii privind presiunea axială şi cuplul flanşelor exercitat de tu-
bulatură, consultaţi Figură 21.
1. Deschideţi supapa de deschidere-închidere aflată în amonte faţă de
pompă şi închideţi supapa de deschidere-închidere aflată în aval. Selec- 6.3 Înlocuiţi motorul electric
taţi paşii aplicabili:
2. Seria 1, 3, 5:
Pompa este echipată cu o lamelă calibrată în formă de furcă proiectată pen-
a) Desfaceţi ştiftul buşonului de golire (2). tru a facilita operaţiile de înlocuire şi cuplaj al motorului.
b) Scoateţi buşonul de umplere şi aerisire (1) şi utilizaţi o pâlnie pen-
tru a umple pompa până când apa curge prin orificiu.
c) Montaţi la loc buşonul de umplere şi aerisire (1). • Consultaţi instrucţiunile privind modul de înlocuire a motorului în Fi-
d) Strângeţi ştiftul buşonului de golire (2). gură 23.
Dacă lamela calibrată în formă de furcă nu este disponibilă, utilizaţi o Cauză Remediu
lamelă de 5 ± 0,1 mm (0,2 ± 0,004 in.).
Protecţia termică sau siguran- Verificaţi componentele şi înlocuiţi dacă es-
ţele nu sunt adecvate pentru te necesar.
6.4 Înlocuiţi etanşarea mecanică curentul motorului.
Motorul electric este în scurt- Verificaţi componentele şi înlocuiţi dacă es-
Serie Instrucţiune circuit. te necesar.
1, 3, 5 Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii. Motorul se supraîncarcă. Verificaţi condiţiile de exploatare ale pom-
10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii. pei şi resetaţi dispozitivul de protecţie.
kW
10, 15, 22: > 4 Consultaţi instrucţiunile din Figură 24. Utilizaţi alcool pen- 7.4 Pompa electrică porneşte, dar se
kW tru curăţare şi ungere. declanşează protecţia termică sau sar
33, 46, 66, 92, Consultaţi instrucţiunile din Figură 24. Utilizaţi alcool pen- siguranţele la scurt timp după aceea
125 tru curăţare şi ungere.
Cauză Remediu
Panoul electric este situat într-o zonă Protejaţi panoul electric împotriva
7 Depanarea supraîncălzită sau este expus luminii surselor de căldură şi a luminii solare
solare directe. directe.
7.1 Depanare pentru utilizator Tensiunea sursei de alimentare nu se Verificaţi condiţiile de exploatare ale
încadrează limitelor de lucru ale mo- motorului.
Întrerupătorul principal este pornit, dar pompa electrică nu porneş- torului.
te.
Lipseşte o fază de putere. Verificaţi
Cauză Remediu • sursa de alimentare
S-a declanşat protecţia termică în- Aşteptaţi până când pompa se răceşte. • conexiunea electrică
corporată în pompă (dacă există). Protecţia termică se va reseta automat.
S-a declanşat dispozitivul de protec- Verificaţi nivelul apei din rezervor sau
ţie împotriva funcţionării în gol. presiunea de reţea. 7.5 Pompa elecctrică porneşte, dar
protecţia termică se declanşează după
Pompa elecctrică porneşte, dar protecţia termică se declanşează după aceea aceea la intervale neregulate
la intervale neregulate.
Cauză Remediu
Cauză Remediu
Există corpuri străine (substanţe Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi
Există corpuri străine (substanţe Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi solide sau fibroase) în interiorul servicii.
solide sau fibroase) în interiorul servicii. pompei care au blocat rotorul.
pompei care au blocat rotorul.
Viteza de pompare a pompei es- Închideţi parţial supapa pornit-oprit din
Pompa este în suprasarcină Verificaţi cerinţele de alimentare electrică te mai ridicată decât limitele spe- aval până când viteza de pompare este
deoarece pompează lichid mai efective în funcţie de caracteristicile lichi- cificate pe placa de date. mai mică sau egală cu limitele specificate
dens şi mai vâscos. dului de pompă şi apoi contactaţi Depar- pe placa de date.
tamentul de vânzări şi servicii.
Pompa este în suprasarcină Verificaţi cerinţele de putere efective ba-
Pompa funcţionează, dar livrează prea puţină apă sau deloc. deoarece pompează lichid mai zate pe caracteristicile lichidului pompat şi
dens şi mai vâscos. înlocuiţi motorul în mod corespunzător.
Cauză Remediu Lagărele motorului sunt uzate. Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi
Pompa este înfundată. Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii. servicii.
Instrucţiunile de depanare din tabelul de mai jos se adresează numai instala-
torilor. 7.6 Pompa electrică porneşte, dar este
activată protecţia generală a sistemului
7.2 Întrerupătorul principal este pornit, dar
pompa electrică nu porneşte Cauză Remediu
Un scurtcircuit în sistemul electric. Verificaţi sistemul electric.
Cauză Remediu
Nu există alimentare electrică. • Restabiliţi sursa de alimentare. 7.7 Pompa electrică porneşte, dar
• Asiguraţi-vă că toate conexiunile elec- dispozitivul de curent rezidual al sistemului
trice la sursa de alimentare sunt intac- (RCD) este activat
te.
S-a declanşat protecţia termică Aşteptaţi până când pompa se răceşte. Cauză Remediu
încorporată în pompă (dacă Protecţia termică se va reseta automat. Există o scurgere la sistemul de Verificaţi izolaţia componentelor sis-
există). împământare (legare la pământ). temului electric.
S-a declanşat releul termic sau Resetaţi protecţia termică.
disjunctorul motorului din pa- 7.8 Pompa funcţionează, dar livrează prea
noul de control electric.
puţină apă sau deloc
S-a declanşat dispozitivul de pro- Verificaţi:
tecţie împotriva funcţionării în • nivelul apei din rezervor sau presiunea
gol. de reţea Cauză Remediu
• dispozitivul de protecţie şi cablurile Există aer în pompă sau în • Purjaţi aerul
conectoare conducte.
S-au ars siguranţele pentru cir- Înlocuiţi siguranţele. Pompa nu este amorsată co- Opriţi pompa şi repetaţi procedura de amor-
cuitele auxiliare sau de pompă. rect. sare. Dacă problema persisită:
• Verificaţi dacă garnitura mecanică prezintă
7.3 Pompa electrică porneşte, dar se scurgeri.
declanşează protecţia termică sau sar • Verificaţi dacă este strânsă perfect conduc-
ta de aspiraţie.
siguranţele imediat după aceea • Înlocuiţi orice supapă care prezintă scurge-
Cauză Remediu ri.
Cablul sursei de alimentare es- Verificaţi cablul şi înlocuiţi dacă este nece- Sarcina pe partea de evacua- Deschideţi supapa.
te deteriorat. sar. re este prea mare.
Cauză Remediu
Supapele sunt blocate în po- Demontaţi şi curăţaţi supapele.
ziţie închisă sau parţial în-
chisă.
Pompa este înfundată. Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servi-
cii.
Conductele sunt înfundate. Verificaţi şi curăţaţi conductele.
Direcţia de rotaţie a rotoru- Schimbaţi poziţia a două faze pe regleta mo-
lui este greşită (versiunea tri- torului sau în panoul electric de comandă.
fazată).
Înălţimea de aspiraţie este Verificaţi condiţiile de exploatare ale pompei.
prea ridicată sau rezistenţa Dacă este cazul, efectuaţi următoarele:
hidraulică din conductele de • Reduceţi înălţimea de aspiraţie
aspiraţie este prea mare. • Măriţi diametrul conductei de aspiraţie
Cauză Remediu
Există o scurgere la una sau ambele componente Reparaţi sau înlocuiţi
următoare: componenta defectă.
• Conducta de aspiraţie
• Supapa de admisie sau supapa de control
Cauză Remediu
Există o scurgere la una sau ambele compo- Reparaţi sau înlocuiţi compo-
nente următoare: nenta defectă.
• Conducta de aspiraţie
• Supapa de admisie sau supapa de control
Cauză Remediu
Cavitaţia pompei Reduceţi debitul necesar prin închiderea parţială a supa-
pei pornit-oprit aflată în aval faţă de pompă. Dacă pro-
blema persistă, verificaţi condiţiile de funcţionare a pom-
pei (de exemplu, diferenţa de înălţime, rezistenţa debitu-
lui, temperatura lichidului).
Lagărele motoru- Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii.
lui sunt uzate.
Există obiecte Contactaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii.
străine în pompă.
Pentru orice altă situaţie, consultaţi Departamentul de vânzări şi servicii.
1 Въведение и безопасност Това са примери на други категории риск, които могат да възникнат. Те
могат да се включат в общите степени на риск и да се обозначават със
следните символи:
1.1 Въведение • Риск от смазване
• Риск от порязване
Цел на това ръководство
• Риск от токова дъга
Целта на това ръководство е да предостави необходимата информация
за:
Опасност от гореща повърхност.
• Инсталиране
• Работа Опасностите от гореща повърхност са посочени със специфичен сим-
• Обслужване вол, който заменя тези типични символи за ниво на опасност:
ВНИМАНИЕ: ВНИМАНИЕ:
Прочетете ръководството внимателно, преди да инсталира-
те и използвате продукта. Неправилната употреба на про-
дукта може да причини наранявания и да повреди съоръже- Описание на символите за потребители и лица, извършващи
нието и може да направи гаранцията му невалидна. монтажа
Специфична информация за персонала, отговорен за
ОБЯВЛЕНИЕ: монтиране на продукта в системата (водопроводна и/
или електрическа), или отговарящия по поддръжката.
Запазете това ръководство, за да се консултирате с него в бъдеще и го
съхранявайтена удобно място около оборудването. Специфична информация за потребителите на продук-
та.
1.1.1 Неопитни потребители
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
Инструкции
Този продукт е предназначен за експлоатация само от ква-
лифициран персонал. Инструкциите и предупрежденията, предоставени в този наръчник, са
за стандартната версия, както е описано в документа за продажба. Спе-
циални версии на помпи могат да бъдат доставяни с допълнителни
Имайте предвид следните предпазни мерки: брошури с инструкции. Вижте договора за продажба за всякакви моди-
• Лица с намалени способности не трябва да работят с продукта, ос- фикации или характеристики на специалните версии. За инструкции,
вен ако са под надзор или са правилно обучени от професионалист. ситуации или събития, неописани в този наръчник или документа за
• Децата трябва да са под надзор, за да не играят с или около продук- продажба, свържете се с най-близкия сервиз на Lowara.
та.
1.3 Изхвърляне на опаковката и продукта
1.2 Символи и терминология, свързани със Спазвайте местните разпоредби и правила относно разделното изхвър-
безопасността ляне на отпадъците.
И СЛЕДНИТЕ ТЕХНИЧЕСКИ СТАНДАРТИ: • Шарнирни болтове, завинтени на мотор, може да се използват един-
ствено за манипулиране на единичен мотор или, в случай на неба-
• EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233 лансирано разпределение на теглата, частично да се повдигне ус-
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007 тройството вертикално, започвайки с хоризонтално преместване.
• EN 60034–30 • За да движите само помпената уредба, използвайте ремъци, здраво
прикрепени към адаптора на мотора.
ПОМПА (ВЖ. ЕТИКЕТА НА ПЪРВАТА СТРАНИЦА) За повече информация как да обезопасите уреда, вж. Фигура4
ОТГОВАРЯ НА СЪОТВЕТНИТЕ ИЗИСКВАНИЯ НА СЛЕДНИТЕ
ЕВРОПЕЙСКИ ДИРЕКТИВИ: Комплект без мотор
Ако комплектът се доставя без мотор, калибрираният в-образен клин
• МАШИНИ: 2006/42/ЕС (ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЯТ ФАЙЛ Е НАЛИЧЕН вече е вкаран между адаптера и куплунга за трансмисия. Клинът е вка-
В LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). ран, за да държи перките на ротора в правилната осова позиция. За да
И НА СЛЕДНИТЕ ТЕХНИЧЕСКИ СТАНДАРТИ: предотврати повреда при трнспорт, валът също е застопорен с разши-
рени полистиренови и пластмасови каиши.
• EN 809
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 Болтът и гайките, използвани за затягане на мотора, не са включени. За
повече информация как да свържете мотора, вж. Фигура23
AMEDEO VALENTE
(ДИРЕКТОР НА ENGINEERING и R&D) ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
Помпа и мотор, закупени по отделно и монтирани заедно,
ревизия 01 правят нова машина по Директивата за машини 2006/42/
EC. Лицето, извършило монтажа, носи отговорност за всич-
Lowara е търговска марка на Lowara Unipersonale, филиал на Xylem Inc. ки аспекти на безопасността на комбинирания комплект.
Неправилна употреба
4 Инсталиране
Предпазни мерки
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
• Съблюдавайте стриктното спазване на правилата за безо-
пасност.
• За защита използвайте подходящо оборудване.
• Винаги съблюдавайте местните и/или национални из-
исквания и разпоредби касаещи инсталирането и свърз-
Следната формула е валидна за мотори, които се доставят с краен лагер ването на оборудването.
аксиално блокиран (като стандартните мотори Lowara за e-SV), вж. Фи-
гура6 За други ситуации, свържете се с отдел Продажба и сервиз.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
Списък на мотора
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
Не използвайте вентила за вкл/изкл затворен от нагнетател- ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
ната страна за задвижване на помпата за повече от няколко • Прочетете работните инструкции, за да се уверите дали е
секунди. Ако помпата трябва да работи със затворена нагне- предоставено защитно устройство, ако се използва мо-
тателна страна за повече от няколко секунди, трябва да се тор, различен от стандартния.
инсталира обходна веига, за да се избегне пренагряване на • Ако двигателят е оборудван с автоматични термични
водата в помпата. предпазители, имайте предвид риска от неочаквани стар-
тирания във връзка с претоварването му. Не използвайте
За илюстрации, показващи изискванията за тръбите, вж. Фигура12 подобни двигатели за дейности, свързани с гасене на по-
жари или системи за пръскане.
4.3 Електрически изисквания
• Валидните местни разпоредби са с приоритет над тези специфични ОБЯВЛЕНИЕ:
изисквания. • Използвайте само динамично балансирани двигатели с намален ка-
• Относно противопожарните системи (хидранти и/или разпръсква- нал в удължението на вала (IEC-60034-14) и с нормална стойност на
чи), проверете какви са местните правила в сила. вибрациите (N).
• Напрежението и честотата на мрежата трябва да са в съответствие
Пълен списък на електрическите връзки със спесификациите върху табелките с данни.
Проверете дали са изпълнени следните изисквания: • Използвайте само едно или трифазни двигатели, чиито характери-
стики отговарят на европейските стандарти.
• Електрическите проводници са защитени от високи температури,
вибрации и удари. Като цяло, моторите могат да работят при следните отклонения на
• Захранващият проводник е оборудван с: мрежово напрежение:
• устройство за защита от къси съединения
Честота Hz Фаза ~ UN [V] ± %
• Високо чувствителен диференциален датчик (30 mA) [датчик на
остатъчен ток RCD], който дава допълнителна защита срещу 50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
електрически удар 3 230/400 ± 10
• Изолатор на главното захранване с разстояние за контакт поне 400/690 ± 10
3 mm
60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
Списък за проверка на електрическото контролно табло 3 220/380 ± 5
380/660 ± 10
ОБЯВЛЕНИЕ:
Номиналите на контролно табло трябва да съвпадат с тези на електри- Използвайте кабел в съответствие с правилата с 3 проводника (2+земя/
ческата помпа. Неправилни комбинации могат да развалят защитата на земя) за еднофазни версии и с 4 проводника (3+ земя/земя) за трифаз-
мотора. на версия.
Електрическа помпа с мотор:
Проверете дали са изпълнени следните изисквания:
Кабелна втулка
• Контролното табло трябва да пази мотора от претоварване и къси Диапазон на външен диаметър на кабела в мм
съединения. Тип
• Поставете подходяща защита от претоварване (топлинно реле или M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
защита на мотора). SM X – –
Тип помпа Защита PLM X X X
Еднофазна стандартна електри- • Вградена, с автоматично въз- LLM X X X
ческа помпа ≤ 1,5 kW становяване, термична-ампе-
рометрична защита (защитно
устройство на мотора) 4.4 Инсталирайте помпата
• Защита против късо съедине-
ние (трябва да бъде доставена
от лицето, извършващо мон- 4.4.1 Механичен монтаж
тажа)83
Трифазна електрическа помпа и • Защита против късо съедине- За информация относно основата на помпата и отвори за застопорява-
други еднофазни помпи84 ние (трябва да бъде доставена
от лицето, извършващо мон- не, вж. Фигура13.
тажа) 1. Поставете помпата на бетонен фундамент или еквивалентна ме-
• Защита против късо съедине- тална конструкция.
ние (трябва да бъде доставена Ако предаването на вибрции може да е смущаващо, осигурете ос-
от лицето, извършващо мон- нови, спиращи вибрацията, между помпата и основата.
тажа) 2. Свалете тапите, покриващи портовете.
• Контролното табло трябва да бъде оборудвано със система за защи- 3. Приравнете помпата и фланците на тръбите от двете страни на
та от работа на сухо, към която е свързано реле за налягане, попла- помпата.
въчен прекъсвач или друго подходящо устройство. Проверете центроването на болтовете.
• Следните устройства се препоръчват за употреба от всмукателната 4. Затегнете тръбата за помпата с болтове.
страна на помпата: Не форсирайте тръбата в мястото й.
• Когато водата се изпомпва от водна система, използвайте ключ за 5. Застопорете помпата здраво с болтове към бетонната основа или
налягане. метална структура.
• Когато водата се изпомпва от резервоар, използвайте поплавъчен
прекъсвач или сензори за поток или пробки. 4.4.2 Електрическа инсталация
• Когато се използват термични релета, се препоръчват релета, чув- 1. За да се улесни връзката, моторът може да бъде завъртян за да зае-
ствителни на фазова неизправност. ме най-подходящото положение за връзката:
a) Махнете четирите болта, които закрепят мотора към помпата.
b) Завъртете мотора до желаната позиция. Не сваляйте куплунга
между моторния и помпения валове.
c) Върнете четирите болта и ги затегнете.
2. Свалете винтовете на капака на клемната кутия.
83 предпазители аМ (стартиране на мотора) или магнитно-термичен прекъсвач с крива C и Icn ≥ 4,5 kA или друго еквивалентно устройство.
84 Термично реле за претоварване с работен клас 10A - прекъсвачи аМ (стартиране на мотора) или мганитно-термичен прекъсвач за защита на мотора с работен
клас 10A.
3. Свържете и затегнете захранващите кабели съгласно приложима- Инсталации с ниво на течността над помпата (смукателна
та електрическа схема. височина)
За електрически схеми, вж. Фигура14 Диаграмите са налични също
на гърба на капака на клемната кутия. За илюстрация, показваща частите на помпата, вж. Фигура16.
a) Свържете проводниците за заземяване. 1. затворете клапата за вкл/изкл, намираща се по течението от по-
Уверете се, че проводникът за заземяването е по-дълъг от мпата. Изберете приложимите стъпки:
проводниците за напрежението. 2. Серии 1, 3, 5:
b) Свържете фазовите проводници.
a) Разхлабете винта на пробката за източване (2).
4. Поставете капака на клемната кутия.
b) Отстранете пробката за пълнене и вентилиране (1) и отворе-
ОБЯВЛЕНИЕ: те входния вентил вкл.-изкл. докато водата изтича от отвора.
Затегнете внимателно кабелната муфа, за да осигурите защита c) Затегнете винта на пробката за изпускане (2).
против подхлъзване на кабела и навлизане на влага в клемната ку- d) Поставете отново пробката за пълнене и вентилиране (1).
тия. 3. Серии 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
a) Отстранете пробката за пълнене и вентилиране (1) и отворе-
5. Ако моторът не е оборудван с автоматично възтсановяване на те входния вентил вкл./изкл. докато водата изтича от отвора.
термичната защита, регулирайте защитата срещу претоварване в
съотвтествие със списъка, даден по-долу. b) Поставете отново пробката за пълнене и вентилиране (1).
Вместо (1) може да се използва пробка за пълнене (3).
• Ако моторът се използва с пълно натоварване, задайте стой-
ност на номиналния ток на електрическата помпа (табелка с
данни) Инсталации с ниво на течността под помпата (смукателна
височина)
• Ако моторът се използва с частично натоварване, задайте
стойност на работния ток (например измерен с щипки за ток).
• Ако помпата Ви има стартираща система звезда-делта, регули- За илюстрация, показваща частите на помпата, вж. Фигура17.
райте топлинното реле до 58% от номиналния ток или работ- 1. Отворете входния вентил вкл./изкл., който се намира нагоре от
ния ток (само за трифазни мотори). помпата и затворете входния вкл./изкл. вентил за надолу. Избере-
те приложимите стъпки:
5 Подготовка, стартиране, 2. Серии 1, 3, 5:
a) Разхлабете винта на пробката за източване (2).
работа и изключване b) Отстранете пробката за пълнене и вентилация (1) и използ-
вайте фуния за пълнене на помпата и затворете входния вкл./
Предпазни мерки изкл. вентил за надолу.
c) Поставете отново пробката за пълнене и вентилиране (1).
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: d) Затегнете винта на пробката за изпускане (2).
• Проверете дали няма опасност дренираната течност да 3. Серии 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
причини наранявания или щети.
• Защитните устройства на двигателя могат да го рестарти- a) Отстранете пробката за пълнене и вентилация (1) и използ-
рат непредвидено. Това може да доведе до сериозни нара- вайте фуния (4) за пълнене на помпата и затворете входния
нявания. вкл./изкл. вентил за надолу.
• Никога не манипулирайте с помпата, ако не е поставен b) Поставете отново пробката за пълнене и вентилиране (1).
правилно нейният съединителен предпазител. Вместо (1) може да се използва пробка за пълнене (3).
7.6 Електрическата помпа се стартира, Има скъсана мембрана или няма предва- Вижте съответните ин-
но общата защита на системата е рително зареден въздух в подаващия ре- струкции в наръчника за
зервоар. резервоари за подаване
активирана под налягане.
Причина Решение
Късо съединение в електрическата Проверете електрическата сис- 7.11 Помпата вибрира и генерира твърде
система. тема. много шум
Причина Решение
Има теч в един или два от следните компонен- Ремонтирайте или
ти: сменете дефектния
компонент.
OPOMBA:
Ta priročnik shranite za poznejšo uporabo. Naj bo vedno na voljo in prilo- Navodila
žen napravi. Navodila in opozorila, ki so na voljo v tem priročniku, se nanašajo na stan-
dardno različico, kot je opisano v prodajnem dokumentu. Posebni različici
črpalk so lahko priloženi prospekti z dodatnimi navodili. Glede morebitnih
1.1.1 Neizkušeni uporabniki sprememb ali značilnosti posebne različice glejte prodajno pogodbo. Glede
navodil, situacij ali dogodkov, ki niso omenjene v tem priročniku ali prodaj-
OPOZORILO: nem dokumentu, se obrnite na najbližji servisni center Lowara.
Izdelek je namenjen le za uporabo s strani usposobljenega oseb-
ja. 1.3 Odstranitev embalaže in izdelka
Upoštevajte naslednje varnostne ukrepe: Pri odstranjevanju upoštevajte lokalne predpise in veljavne zakone glede lo-
• Osebe z zmanjšanimi sposobnostmi izdelka ne smejo upravljati razen pod čevanja odpadkov.
nadzorom ali če jih je ustrezno usposobil strokovnjak.
• Otroci morajo biti pod nadzorom in zagotoviti je treba, da se ne igrajo v 1.4 Jamstvo
bližini izdelka.
Za informacije o jamstvu si oglejte prodajno pogodbo.
1.2 Terminologija v zvezi z varnostjo in simboli
1.5 Rezervni deli
O varnostnih opozorilih
Zelo pomembno je, da še pred začetkom uporabe naprave preberete var- OPOZORILO:
nostna opozorila in predpise, jih razumete in upoštevate. Njihov namen je Obrabljene ali pokvarjene komponente zamenjujte samo z origi-
preprečiti naslednje nevarnosti: nalnimi rezervnimi deli. Če boste uporabili neustrezne rezervne
dele, ima to lahko za posledico okvare, poškodbe in telesne po-
• Nesreče in zdravstvene težave oseb škodbe, prav tako pa tudi razveljavitev garancije.
• Poškodovanje naprave
• Napake v delovanju naprave
OPOZORILO:
Ravni nevarnosti Ko Oddelek za prodajo in servis zaprosite za tehnične informa-
cije ali rezervne dele, vedno navedite točen tip izdelka in številko
Raven nevarnosti Oznaka dela.
Nevarna situacija, ki jo morate pre-
NEVARNO: prečiti, ker lahko povzroči smrt ali
hudo poškodbo. Za več informacij o rezervnih delih si oglejte Slika 25, Slika 26 ali Slika 27.
V SKLADU Z USTREZNIMI DOLOČBAMI NASLEDNJIH EVROP- škodo med prevažanjem, je gred med prevažanjem pritrjena tudi z raztegnje-
SKIH DIREKTIV: nim polistirenom in plastičnimi trakovi.
• STROJI 2006/42/ES (TEHNIČNO DATOTEKO DOBITE PRI PO- Vijaki in matice za pritrditev motorja niso priložene. Za več informacij o
DJETJU LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). varnem pripenjanju motorja si oglejte Slika 23
IN NASLEDNJIMI TEHNIČNIMI STANDARDI:
OPOZORILO:
• EN 809 Črpalka in motor, ki ju kupite ločeno in ju nato sestavite, v skla-
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 du z direktivo o strojih 2006/42/ES predstavlja nov stroj. Ose-
ba, ki ju poveže, je odgovorna za vse varnostne vidike kombini-
AMEDEO VALENTE rane enote.
(DIREKTOR R&D IN ENGINEERING)
rev. 01 2.3 Smernice za skladiščenje
Lowara je blagovna znamka podjetja Lowara srl Unipersonale, podružnice Lokacija skladiščenja
družbe Xylem Inc.
Naprava mora biti skladiščena na pokriti in suhi lokaciji, zavarovani pred vr-
očino, umazanijo in vibracijami.
2 Prevoz in skladiščenje OPOMBA:
2.1 Preverite dostavo • Napravo zaščitite pred vlago, vročino in mehanskimi poškodbami.
• Na zapakirano napravo ne odlagajte težkih predmetov.
1. Preverite, če so na zunanji strani embalaže opazne poškodbe.
2. Če je izdelek vidno poškodovan, v osmih dneh po datumu dostave ob- Temperatura okolja
vestite našega distributerja.
Izdelek mora biti skladiščen pri temperaturi okolja od -5 °C do +40 °C (od
Razpakiranje naprave 23 °F do 104 °F).
1. Sledite ustreznemu koraku:
• Če je enota zapakirana v karton, odstranite sponke in odprite kar- 3 Opis izdelka
ton.
• Če je enota zapakirana v leseno gajbo, odprite pokrov, pri tem pa 3.1 Zasnova črpalke
pazite na žeblje in trakove.
2. Z lesene podlage odstranite varnostne vijake ali trakove. Gre za navpično, večstopenjsko, ne-samopolnljivo črpalko, ki jo lahko prik-
ljučite na standarde električne motorje. Črpalka se lahko uporablja za črpa-
Pregled enote nje:
1. Odstranite embalažo. • Hladne vode
Embalažo odvrzite v skladu z lokalnimi predpisi. • Tople vode
2. Preglejte izdelek in preverite, ali je kakšen del poškodovan oziroma Kovinski deli črpalke, ki pridejo v stik z vodo, so iz:
manjka.
3. Če je potrebno, odstranite vijake ali trakove in odprite izdelek. Serija Material
Zaradi lastne varnosti bodite previdni, ko rokujete z žeblji in jermeni. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Nerjavno jeklo
4. Če kaj ni v redu, se obrnite na Oddelek za prodajo in servis.
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Nerjavno jeklo in lito železo
Na voljo je posebna različica, pri kateri so vsi deli iz ne-
rjavnega jekla.
2.2 Smernice za prevoz
Črpalke SV 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, in 22 so na voljo v različnih različicah glede na
Varnostni ukrepi položaj sesanja, odtočna vrata in obliko priključne prirobnice.
OPOZORILO: Izdelek se lahko dobavi kot enota črpalke (črpalka in električni motor) ali sa-
mo kot črpalka.
• Upoštevajte veljavne predpise o preprečevanju nesreč.
• Nevarnost zmečkanin! Enota in komponente so lahko težke. OPOMBA:
Uporabljajte ustrezne metode dvigovanja in vedno imejte Če ste kupili črpalko z zunanjim motorjem, preverite, ali je motor primeren
obute čevlje z jekleno kapico. za montažo na črpalko.
Za izbiro ustrezne dvižne opreme si oglejte bruto težo, ki je označena na pa-
ketu. Mehansko tesnilo
Položaj in pritrjevanje Serija Osnovne značilnosti
Enoto lahko prenašate v vodoravnem ali navpičnem položaju. Poskrbite, da 1, 3, 5 Nominalni premer 12 mm, neuravnoteženo, vrtenje z desno
bo med prevozom čvrsto pritrjena in se ne bo mogla skotaliti ali prevrniti. roko, različica K (EN 12756)
10, 15, 22 Nominalni premer 16 mm, neuravnoteženo, vrtenje z desno
OPOZORILO: roko, različica K (EN 12756)
Ne uporabljajte očesnih vijakov, ki so priviti na motor, za prena- Uravnoteženo z močjo motorja ≥ 5 kW
šanje ali dvigovanje celotne enote električne črpalke.
33, 46, 66, Nominalni premer 22 mm, uravnoteženo, vrtenje z desno roko,
92, 125 različica K (EN 12756)
• Uporabite trakove okrog motorja, če je moč motorja med 0,25 in 4,0 kW.
• Uporabite vrvi ali trakove, ki so povezani z obema prirobnicama (očesne
vijake, če so prisotni) v bližini spojnega območja motorja in črpalke, če je Predvidena uporaba
moč motorja med 5,5 in 55,0 kW. Črpalka je primerna za:
• Očesni vijaki, priviti na motor, se lahko uporabljajo izključno za prenaša- • Zasebne in industrijske distribucijske sisteme za vodo
nje oz. dvigovanje posameznega motorja ali, če uteži niso uravnotežene,
za delno dviganje enote navpično z vodoravnega položaja. • Namakanje (na primer agrikultura in športne površine)
• Za premikanje samo enote črpalke, uporabite trakove, ki morajo biti • Ravnanje z vodo
čvrsto povezani z adapterjem motorja. • Napajanje kotla
Za več informacij o varnem pripenjanju enote si oglejte Slika 4. • Pranje rastlin
• Ohlajevanje (na primer klima in hlajenje)
Enota brez motorja • Uporaba za gašenje požarov
Če enota ni opremljena z motorjem, je med adapter in spojko vstavljena
umerjena izravnalna ploščica v obliki vilice. Izravnalna ploščica je vstavljena
zato, da sklop rotorja ostane v pravilnem osnem položaju. Da bi preprečili
IMQ ali TUV ali IRAM ali druge oznake (samo za električne črpalke)
Če ni določeno drugače, se pri izdelkih z oznako za atest električne opreme
ta atest nanaša zgolj na električno črpalko.
4 Namestitev
Varnostni ukrepi
OPOZORILO:
Naslednja formula velja za motorje, ki imajo pogonske ležaje osno zaklenje-
ne (kot so standardni motorji Lowara za e-SV), glejte Slika 6. V drugih pri- • Upoštevajte veljavne predpise o preprečevanju nesreč.
merih se obrnite na Oddelek za prodajo in servis. • Uporabite ustrezno opremo in zaščito.
• Vedno preberite veljavna lokalna in/ali državna določila, za-
P1 največ + Pnajmanj≤ PN konodajo in predpise o izbiri mesta namestitve ter priključkih
za vodo in napajalnih priključkih.
P1 največ Največji vstopni tlak
Pnajveč Največji tlak, ki ga ustvari črpalka OPOZORILO:
PN Največji delovni tlak • Priključitve naj izvajajo samo usposobljeni tehniki v skladu z
veljavnimi predpisi.
• Pred uporabo enote se prepričajte, da enota in nadzorna ploš-
ča nista v stiku z virom napajanja in da ni nevarnosti vklopa.
To velja tudi za krmilno vezje.
4.1 Ozemljitev
OPOMBA:
OPOZORILO: Ne presezite sesalne zmogljivosti črpalke, saj lahko to povzroči kavitacijo in
• Pretvornik za zunanjo zaščito vedno priključite na ozemljitev poškoduje črpalko.
(tla), preden ustvarite kakršno koli drugo električno povezavo.
• Vsa električna oprema mora biti ozemljena. To velja za opre-
mo črpalke, pogon in nadzorno opremo. Preizkusite ozemljit- 4.2.2 Zahteve za cevovod
veni vodnik in preverite, ali je pravilno priključen.
• Če se kabel motorja po nesreči iztakne, mora biti ozemljitveni Varnostni ukrepi
vodnik zadnji vodnik, ki se iztakne iz priključka. Poskrbite, da
bo ozemljitveni vodnik daljši od faznih vodnikov. To velja za OPOZORILO:
oba konca kabla motorja.
• Namestite dodatno zaščito pred smrtnim udarom. Namestite • Uporabite cevi, ki ustrezajo maksimalnemu delovnemu tlaku
visokoobčutljivo diferencialno stikalo (30 mA) [zaščitno stika- črpalke. V nasprotnem primeru lahko pride do poškodb siste-
lo na diferenčni tok RCD]. ma in telesnih poškodb.
• Priključitve naj izvajajo samo usposobljeni tehniki v skladu z
veljavnimi predpisi.
4.2 Zahteve pripomočka
OPOMBA:
4.2.1 Namestitev črpalke Če je črpalka priključena na občinski sistem za vodo, upoštevajte vse predpi-
se, ki so jih izdali občinski organi. Na sesalni strani namestite ustrezno na-
NEVARNO: pravo za preprečevanje povratnega pretoka, če pristojni organi to zahtevajo.
Te črpalke ne uporabljajte v okoljih, ki lahko vsebujejo vnetljive/
eksplozivne ali kemično agresivne pline ali praške.
Kontrolni seznam cevovoda za črpanje in izpust
Smernice Izpolnjene morajo biti naslednje zahteve:
Pri namestitvi izdelka upoštevajte naslednje smernice: • Vse cevi so neodvisno podprte in ne obremenjujejo enote.
• Prepričajte se, da ni ovir, ki bi preprečevale običajen tok hladnega zraka, • Gibljive cevi ali členi se uporabljajo za preprečevanje oz. zmanjševanje vi-
ki ga proizvaja ventilator motorja. bracij črpalke na cevi in obratno.
• Prepričajte se, da je območje za namestitev zaščiteno pred uhajanjem te- • Uporabite široka kolena in se izognite uporabi ozkih, ki bi povzročila pre-
kočin ali poplavljanjem. velik pretočni upor.
• Če je to možno, črpalko namestite nekoliko nad tlemi. • Sesalne cevi so odlično zatesnjene in nepredušne.
• Temperatura okolice mora biti med 0 °C (+32 °F) in +40 °C (+104 °F). • Če je črpalka uporabljena v odprtem tokokrogu, je premer sesalne cevi
prilagojen pogojem namestitve. Sesalna cev ne sme biti manjša od preme-
• Relativna vlažnost zraka v okolici mora biti nižja od 50 % pri +40°C ra sesalne odprtine.
(+104°F).
• Obrnite se na Oddelek za prodajo in servis, če: • Če mora biti sesalna cev večja od sesalne strani črpalke, je nameščen eks-
centrični reduktor cevi.
• Je relativna vlažnost zraka višja od priporočene.
• Če črpalko postavite nad nivo tekočine, se nožni ventil namesti na konec
• Je temperatura sobe višja od +40 °C (+104 °F). sesalnih cevi.
• Je enota več kot 1000 m (3000 čevljev) nad nadmorsko višino. Je treba • Nožni ventil se popolnoma potopi v tekočino, tako da zrak ne more vsto-
delovanje motorja znižati ali ga zamenjati z močnejšim motorjem. pati skozi sesalni vrtinec, ko nivo tekočine minimalen, črpalka pa je name-
Za več informacij o vrednosti za znižanje delovanja motorja si oglejte Tabela ščena nad vir tekočine.
8 • Ustrezno projektirani vklopni ventili so nameščeni na sesalne cevi in na
odtočnih ceveh (proti protipovratnemu ventilu) za regulacijo zmogljivosti
Položaji črpalke in razmik črpalke, za pregledovanje črpalke in za vzdrževanje.
• Da bi preprečili pretok nazaj v cev, ko je črpalka izklopljena, je na odtoč-
OPOMBA: nih ceveh nameščen kontrolni ventil.
Vodoravna montaža črpalke zahteva posebno prilagoditev.
OPOZORILO:
Poskrbite za ustrezno svetlobo in razmik okoli črpalke. Prepričajte se, da je Za dušenje črpalke vklopnega ventila na izpustni strani ne zaprite
enostavno dostopna za namestitev in vzdrževanje. za dlje kot nekaj sekund. Če mora črpalka delovati z zaprto iz-
pustno stranjo za več kot nekaj sekund, je treba namestiti obhod-
ni krogotok, da se prepreči pregrevanje vode v črpalki.
Namestitev nad vir tekočine (sesalno dviganje)
Teoretična največja višina sesanja katere koli črpalke je 10,33 m. V praksi na
sesalno zmogljivost črpalke vpliva naslednje: Za slike, ki prikazujejo zahteve za cevi, si oglejte Slika 12.
• Temperature tekočine
4.3 Električne zahteve
• Nadmorska višina (pri odprtem sistemu)
• Sistemski tlak (pri zaprtem sistemu) • Veljavni lokalni predpisi prevladajo nad navedenimi zahtevami.
• Upor cevi • V primeru gasilnih sistemov (hidranti in/ali pršilniki) preverite veljavne
• Lasten notranji pretočni upor črpalke lokalne predpise.
• Višinske razlike
Naslednja enačba se uporablja za izračun maksimalne višine za namestitev Kontrolni seznam električnih priključitev
črpalke nad ravnjo tekočine: Izpolnjene morajo biti naslednje zahteve:
(pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5 • Električni vodi so zaščiteni pred visoko temperaturo, vibracijami in trki.
• Napajalna linija je opremljena z:
pb Barometrični tlak v barih (v zaprtem sistemu je tlak sistema) • Napravo za zaščito pred kratkimi stiki
NPSH Vrednost lastnega notranjega pretočnega upora črpalke v metrih • Visokoobčutljivo diferencialno stikalo (30 mA) [zaščitno stikalo na di-
ferenčni tok RCD], ki zagotovi dodatno zaščito pred električnim uda-
Hf Skupna izguba v metrih zaradi prehoda tekočine v sesalni cevi čr- rom
palke • Stikalo izolatorja omrežja s kontaktno odprtino najmanj 3 mm
Hv Tlak pare v metrih, glede na temperaturo tekočine T °C
Kontrolni seznam električne nadzorne plošče
0,5 Priporočena varnostna meja (m)
Z Največja višina, pri kateri se lahko črpalko namesti (m) OPOMBA:
Vrednosti nadzorne plošče se morajo ujemati z vrednostmi električne črpal-
Za več informacij si oglejte Slika 7. ke. Nepravilne kombinacije bi lahko onemogočile zaščito motorja.
(pb*10,2 - Z) mora biti vedno pozitivno število.
Za več informacij o delovanju si oglejte poglavje Slika 5.
Izpolnjene morajo biti naslednje zahteve: 1. Postavite črpalko na betonsko podlago ali ustrezno kovinsko struktu-
ro.
• Nadzorna plošča mora motor ščititi pred preobremenitvijo in kratkimi Če je prenos tresenja lahko moteč, poskrbite za podporo za blaženje
stiki. tresenja med črpalko in podlago.
• Namestite ustrezno zaščito pred preobremenitvijo (toplotni rele ali zaščita 2. Odstranite zatiče, ki prekrivajo vrata.
motorja).
3. Poravnajte črpalko in prirobnice cevi na obeh straneh črpalke.
Vrsta črpalke Zaščita Preverite poravnavo vijakov.
Enofazna standardna električna čr- • Vgrajena samodejno ponastavlji- 4. Z vijaki na črpalko pritrdite cevi.
palka ≤ 1,5 kW vo toplotno-amperometrično va- Pri nameščanju cevi ne uporabljajte prekomerne sile.
rovalo (zaščita za motor) 5. Z vijaki varno zasidrajte črpalko v betonsko podlago ali kovinsko
• Zaščita pred kratkim stikom (za- strukturo.
gotoviti jo mora inštalater)87
Trifazna električna črpalka in druge • Toplotna zaščita (zagotoviti jo 4.4.2 Električna napeljava
enofazne črpalke88 mora inštalater)
1. Za lažje priključevanje lahko motor obrnete v najbolj priročen položaj
• Zaščita pred kratkim stikom (za- za priključevanje:
gotoviti jo mora instalater)
a) Odstranite štiri vijake, s katerimi je motor pritrjen na črpalko.
• Nadzorna plošča mora biti opremljena z zaščitnim sistemom za delovanje b) Motor zavrtite v želeni položaj. Ne odstranite spojke med gredjo
brez medija, na katerega je priključeno tlačno stikalo, plavajoče stikalo, motorja in gredjo črpalke.
sonde ali druge ustrezne naprave.
c) Ponovno namestite in privijte vse štiri vijake.
• Na črpalni strani črpalke je priporočena uporaba naslednjih naprav:
• Pri črpanju vode iz vodnega sistema uporabite tlačno stikalo. 2. Odstranite vijake pokrova škatle s priključki.
• Pri črpanju vode iz zbiralnika ali rezervoarja uporabite stikalo ali son- 3. Napajalne kable priključite in pritrdite v skladu z ustrezno shemo oži-
de. čenja.
Za sheme ožičenja glejte Slika 14. Sheme najdete tudi na zadnji strani
• Pri uporabi toplotnih relejev je priporočena uporaba relejev, ki so občut- pokrova škatle s priključki.
ljivi na fazno okvaro.
a) Priključite ozemljitveni vodnik.
Kontrolni seznam za motor Poskrbite, da bo ozemljitveni vodnik daljši od faznih vodnikov.
b) Povežite fazne vodnike.
OPOZORILO: 4. Ponovno namestite pokrov priključne škatle.
• Preberite si navodila za uporabo in se prepričajte, da je na vo-
ljo zaščitna naprava, če je uporabljen nestandardni motor. OPOMBA:
Previdno zategnite kabelske člene, da zagotovite zaščito pred zdrsom
• Če je motor opremljen s samodejnimi toplotnimi varovali, kabla in vstopom vlage v priključno škatlo.
upoštevajte nevarnost nepričakovanih zagonov pri preobre-
menitvi. Takih motorjev ne uporabljajte za gašenje požarov in
škropilne sisteme. 5. Če motor ni opremljen s samodejno ponastavljivim toplotnim varova-
lom, nastavite zaščito pred preobremenitvijo v skladu s spodnjim se-
znamom.
• Če se motor uporablja s polno obremenitvijo, nastavite vrednost na
OPOMBA: nazivno vrednost toka električne črpalke (nazivna ploščica)
• Uporabljajte samo dinamično uravnotežene motorje s ključem polovične • Če se motor uporablja z delno obremenitvijo, vrednost nastavite na
velikosti v koncu gredi (IEC 60034-14) in običajno stopnjo vibracij (N). delovni tok (npr. izmerjen s tokovnim merilnikom).
• Preverite, ali omrežna napetost in frekvenca ustrezata specifikacijam na • Če ima črpalka zagonski sistem star-delta, toplotni rele nastavite na
tipski ploščici črpalke. 58 % nazivnega ali delovnega tok (samo za trifazne motorje).
• Uporabite le enofazne ali trifazne motorje, katerih velikost in moč sta v
skladu z evropskimi standardi.
5 Priprava na zagon, zagon,
Na splošno lahko motorji delujejo pod naslednjimi tolerancami omrežne na-
petosti: delovanje in zaustavitev
Frekvenca Hz Faza ~ UN [V] ± % Varnostni ukrepi
50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
3 230/400 ± 10 OPOZORILO:
400/690 ± 10 • Poskrbite, da odtočena tekočina ne bo povzročala škode ali
poškodb.
60 1 220 – 230 ± 6 • Varovala motorja lahko povzročijo nepričakovan zagon moto-
3 220/380 ± 5 rja. To lahko povzroči resne poškodbe.
380/660 ± 10 • Črpalka nikoli ne sme delovati brez pravilno montiranega va-
rovala spojke.
Uporabite kabel v skladu s pravili s 3 poli (2+ozemljitev) za enofazne različi-
ce in s 4 poli (3+ozemljitev) za trifazno različico. OPOZORILO:
Električna črpalka z motorjem: • Zunanje površine črpalke in motorja lahko med delovanjem
presežejo 40 °C (104 °F). Ne dotikajte se jih z nobenim de-
Kabelski členek lom telesa brez zaščitne opreme.
Razpon zunanjega premera kabla v mm • V bližino črpalke ne postavljajte vnetljivih materialov.
Vrsta
M20 x 1,5; 6–12 M25 x 1,5; 13–18 M32 x 1,5; 18–25
SM X – –
PLM X X X
LLM X X X
87 Varovalke aM (zagon motorja) ali magnetno-termalno stikalo s krivuljo C in nazivno kratkostično zmogljivostjo lcn ≥ 4,5 kA ali drugo enakovredno napravo.
88 Preobremenitveni toplotni rele z varovalkami delovnega razreda 10 A + (zagon motorja) ali magnetno-termalnim stikalom delovnega razreda 10 A.
Namestitev z nivojem tekočine pod črpalko (sesalno dviganje) 6.3 Zamenjava električnega motorja
Za sliko, ki prikazuje dele črpalke, si oglejte Slika 17. Črpalki so priložene izravnalne ploščice v obliki vilice, ki olajšajo priključitev
motorja in zamenjavo delov.
1. Odprite vklopni ventil, ki se nahaja od črpalke navzgor, in zaprite
vklopni ventil od črpalke navzdol. Izberite ustrezne korake: • Oglejte si navodila o zamenjavi motorja v Slika 23.
2. Serija 1, 3, 5: Če kalibrirana izravnalna ploščica v obliki vilice ni na voljo, uporabite
a) Sprostite zatič odtočnega čepa (2). izravnalno ploščico debeline 5 ± 0,1 mm (0,2 ± 0,004 palca).
b) Odstranite čep za zračenje in polnjenje (1) in z lijakom napolnite
črpalko, dokler iz odprtine ne teče voda. 6.4 Zamenjava mehanskega tesnila
c) Ponovno namestite čep za zračenje in polnjenje (1).
d) Pritrdite zatič odtočnega čepa (2).
Serija Navodila
3. Serije 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
1, 3, 5 Obrnite se na Oddelek za prodajo in servis.
a) Odstranite čep za zračenje in polnjenje (1) in z lijakom (4) napol-
nite črpalko, dokler iz odprtine ne teče voda. 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Obrnite se na Oddelek za prodajo in servis.
b) Ponovno namestite čep za zračenje in polnjenje (1). Namesto (1) kW
lahko uporabite čep za polnjenje (3). 10, 15, 22: > 4 Glejte navodila v Slika 24. Za čiščenje in mazanje upora-
kW bite alkohol.
5.2 Preverite smer vrtenja (trifazni motor) 33, 46, 66, 92, Glejte navodila v Slika 24. Za čiščenje in mazanje upora-
125 bite alkohol.
Pred zagonom sledite temu postopku.
1. Poiščite puščice na adapterju ali pokrovu ventilatorja motorja, da dolo-
čite pravilno smer vrtenja.
7 Odpravljanje težav
2. Zaženite motor.
3. Hitro preverite smer vrtenja skozi varovalo spojke ali skozi pokrov 7.1 Odpravljanje težav za uporabnike
ventilatorja motorja. Glavno stikalo je vklopljeno, vendar se črpalka ne zažene.
4. Ustavite motor.
5. Če smer vrtenja ni pravilna, storite naslednje.
Vzrok Rešitev
a) Izklopite napravo iz napajanja.
b) Na plošči s priključki motorja ali na električni nadzorni plošči za- Toplotno varovalo, nameščeno v Počakajte, da se črpalka ohladi. Toplot-
menjajte položaje dveh ali treh žic napajalnega kabla. črpalki (če je), se je sprožilo. no varovalo se samodejno ponastavi.
Za sheme ožičenja glejte Slika 14.
c) Ponovno preverite smer vrtenja.
Vzrok Rešitev
Prišlo je do uhajanja v eni ali obeh nasled- Popravite ali zamenjajte ok-
njih komponentah: vrajeno komponento.
• Sesalna cev
• Nožni ventil ali protipovratni ventil
Vzrok Rešitev
Kavitacija črpalke Znižajte zahtevano hitrost pretoka, tako da delno zapr-
ete vklopni ventil pod črpalko. Če težave ne morete od-
praviti, preverite pogoje delovanja črpalke (npr. višin-
ska razlika, pretočni upor, temperatura tekočine).
Ležaji motorja so Obrnite se na Oddelek za prodajo in servis.
obrabljeni.
V črpalki so tujki. Obrnite se na Oddelek za prodajo in servis.
Za katero koli drugo situacijo se obrnite na Oddelek za prodajo in servis.
NAPOMENA:
Spremite ovaj priručnik za buduću uporabu i držite ga lako dostupnim na Upute
mjestu na kome se jedinica nalazi. Upute i upozorenja koje se nalaze u priručniku odnose se na standardnu ve-
rziju, kao što je opisano u kupoprodajnom ugovoru. Posebne verzije pumpi
mogu se isporučivati uz dodatne brošure s uputama. Pogledajte kupopro-
1.1.1 Neiskusni korisnici dajni ugovor u vezi bilo kakvih izmjena ili karakteristika posebne verzije. Za
upute, situacije ili događaje koji nisu uzeti u obzir u ovom priručniku ili
UPOZORENJE: kupoprodajnom ugovoru, obratite se najbližem Lowara servisnom centru.
Ovaj proizvod je namijenjen za rukovanje samo od strane kvalifi-
ciranog osoblja. 1.3 Odlaganje pakiranja i proizvoda
Poštujte lokalne propise i pravila koji su na snazi u vezi s odlaganjem sortira-
Pripazite na sljedeće mjere opreza: nog otpada.
• Osobe s invaliditetom ne bi trebale rukovati proizvodom osim ako su pod
nadzorom ili su pravilno obučene od strane stručnjaka. 1.4 Jamstvo
• Djeca moraju biti pod nadzorom kako bi se osiguralo da se ne igraju na
proizvodu ili oko njega. Za informacije o jamstvu, pogledajte kupoprodajni ugovor.
Električne opasnosti označene su sljedećim specifičnim simbolom: • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
UPOZORENJE: • EN 60034–30
ISPUNJAVA RELEVANTNE ODREDBE SLJEDEĆIH EUROPSKIH Za više informacija o tome kako sigurno upregnuti jedinicu, pogledajte Slika
DIREKTIVA: 4.
• DIREKTIVE ZA STROJEVE 2006/42/EZ (TEHNIČKA DOKU-
MENTACIJA MOŽE SE DOBITI OD LOWARA SRL UNIPERSO- Jedinica bez motora
NALE). Ako se jedinica ne isporučuje s motorom, kalibrirana podloška u obliku
I SLJEDEĆE TEHNIČKE STANDARDE: vilica već je umetnuta između prilagodnika i spojke za prijenos. Podloška je
umetnuta kako bi se rotor zadržao u ispravnom aksijalnom položaju. Kako
• EN 809 bi se spriječila oštećenja tijekom transporta, osovina se također drži u mjestu
pomoću ekspandiranog polistirena i plastičnih traka.
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011.
Vijak i matice koji se koriste za učvršćivanje motora nisu uključeni. Za više
AMEDEO VALENTE informacija o tome kako spojiti motor, pogledajte Slika 23.
(DIREKTOR ENGINEERING R&D)
UPOZORENJE:
rev.01 Pumpa i motor koji su kupljeni zasebno, a zatim međusobno
spojeni formiraju novi stroj prema Direktivi o strojevima
Lowara je zaštitni znak tvrtke Lowara srl Unipersonale, podružnice tvrtke 2006/42/EC. Osoba koja provodi spajanje odgovorna je za sve
Xylem Inc. sigurnosne aspekte kombinirane jedinice.
Nepravilno korištenje
UPOZORENJE:
Nepravilno korištenje pumpe može stvoriti opasne uvjete i pro- Standard EPDM -30°C (-22°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
uzročiti osobne ozljede i oštećenje imovine. Specijalan FPM (FKM) -10°C (14°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C90
(248°F)
Nepravilno korištenje proizvoda dovodi do gubitka jamstva. Specijalan PTFE 0°C (32°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
Primjeri nepravilnog korištenja:
Za posebne zahtjeve, obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
• Tekućine koje nisu kompatibilne s materijalima od kojih je pumpa izrađe-
na Najveći broj pokretanja na sat
• Opasne tekućine (kao što su otrovne, eksplozivne, zapaljive ili korozivne Ova tablica pokazuje broj dozvoljenih pokretanja po satu za motore koje
tekućine) isporučuje Lowara:
• Pitke tekućine osim vode (na primjer, vino ili mlijeko)
Primjeri nepravilne instalacije: kW 0,25 - 4,00 - 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
• Opasna mjesta (kao što su eksplozivne ili korozivne atmosfere). Pokre- 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
• Mjesta gdje je temperatura zraka vrlo visoka ili gdje postoji slabo tanja na
provjetravanje. sat
• Vanjske instalacije gdje ne postoji zaštita od kiše ili od temperatura smrza-
vanja.
NAPOMENA:
OPASNOST: Ako koristite motor drugačiji od standardnog koji se isporučuje s električ-
Ne koristite ovu pumpe za obradu zapaljivih i/ili eksplozivnih nom pumpom, provjerite odgovarajuće upute da biste saznali dopušteni broj
tekućina. pokretanja na sat.
Najveći radni tlak IMQ ili TUV ili IRAM or ili druge oznake (samo za električne
pumpe)
Ovaj dijagram toka pokazuje najveći radni tlak ovisno o modelu pumpe i Osim ako je drugačije navedeno, za proizvode s oznakom odobrenja koja se
odnosi na električnu sigurnost, odobrenje se odnosi isključivo na električnu
temperaturi upumpane tekućine. pumpu.
4 Instalacija
Mjere opreza
UPOZORENJE:
• Obratite pažnju da li se poštivaju propisi za sprječavanje ne-
zgoda.
• Koristite prikladnu opremu i zaštite.
• Uvijek se pridržavajte važećih lokalnih i/ili nacionalnih odred-
bi, zakona i pravilnika koji se odnose na odabir mjesta
Sljedeća formula vrijedi za motore koji se isporučuju s aksijalno zaključanim ugradnje i priključivanja vode i struje.
ležajem pogonskog kraja (poput Lowara standardnih motora za e-SV).
Pogledajte Slika 6. Za ostale situacije, obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
91 osigurači aM (pokretanje motora) ili magnetsko-toplinska sklopka s krivuljom C i Icn ≥ 4,5 kA ili drugi odgovarajući uređaj.
92 Toplinski relej s klasom rada od 10A + osigurači aM (pokretanje motora) ili magnetsko-toplinska sklopka za zaštitu motora s klasom rada od 10A.
3. Brzo provjerite smjer okretanja kroz štitnik spojke ili kroz poklopac
OPREZ: ventilatora motora.
• Temperatura vanjskih površina pumpe i motora tijekom rada 4. Zaustavite motor.
može prelaziti 40ºC (104°F). Ne dodirujte bilo kojim dijelom 5. Ako je smjer okretanja pogrešan, učinite kako slijedi:
tijela bez zaštitne opreme. a) Odspojite napajanje.
• Ne stavljajte nikakve zapaljive materijale u blizini pumpe. b) Na priključnoj ploči motora ili na električnoj upravljačkoj ploči,
izmijenite položaj dvije od tri žice kabela napajanja.
NAPOMENA: Za sheme ožičavanja pogledajte Slika 14.
• Nikad ne koristite pumpu ispod najmanjeg nazivnog protoka, kada je su- c) Ponovno provjerite smjer okretanja.
ha, ili bez punjenja.
• Nikada ne radite s pumpom kada je dopremni ON-OFF ventil zatvoren 5.3 Pokrenite pumpu
dulje od nekoliko sekundi.
• Nikad ne koristite pumpu kada je usisni on-off ventil zatvoren. Prije pokretanja pumpe, pobrinite se da je:
• Kako bi spriječili pregrijavanje unutarnjih dijelova pumpe, pobrinite se da • Pumpa ispravno spojena na napajanje.
je minimalni protok vode uvijek zajamčen kada pumpa radi. Ako se to ne
može postići, onda se preporučuje zaobilaženje ili ponovna cirkulacija vo- • Pumpa ispravno napunjena sukladno uputama u Napunite pumpu.
da. Pogledajte vrijednosti za minimalni nazivni protok, navedene u • On-off ventil smješten nizvodno od pumpe zatvoren.
poglavlju Dodatak. 1. Pokrenite motor.
• Ne izlažite pumpu u mirovanju uvjetima zamrzavanja. Ispustite svu 2. Postupno otvorite on-off ventil na odvodnoj strani pumpe.
tekućinu koja se nalazi unutar pumpe. Ako to ne učinite, može doći do U očekivanim radnim uvjetima, pumpa mora raditi ravnomjerno i tiho.
zamrzavanja tekućine i oštećenja pumpe. U protivnom, pogledajte Rješavanje problema.
• Zbroj tlaka na usisnoj strani (vodovod, gravitacijski spremnik) i najvećeg
tlaka koji pumpa predaje ne smije preći najveći radni tlak (nazivni tlak
PN) koji je dopušten za pumpu. 6 Održavanje
• Ne koristite pumpu ako dođe do kavitacije. Kavitacija može oštetiti unu-
tarnje komponente. Mjere opreza
• Ako crpite toplu vodu, morate jamčiti najmanji tlak na usisnoj strani kako
biste spriječili kavitaciju. UPOZORENJE:
Odspojite i zaključajte električno napajanje prije instaliranja ili
Razina buke servisiranja pumpe.
Za informacije o razinama buke koje emitiraju jedinice opremljene s mot-
orom Lowara, pogledajte Tablica 10. UPOZORENJE:
• Održavanje i servisiranje mora obavljati samo iskusno i struč-
5.1 Napunite pumpu no osoblje.
• Obratite pažnju da li se poštivaju propisi za sprječavanje ne-
Za informacije o postavljanju priključaka pogledajte Slika 15. zgoda.
• Koristite prikladnu opremu i zaštite.
Instalacija kada je razina tekućine iznad pumpe (usisna visina) • Provjerite da drenirana tekućina ne uzrokuje oštećenja ili
ozljede.
Za ilustraciju koja pokazuje dijelove pumpe, pogledajte Slika 16.
1. Zatvorite on-off ventil smješten nizvodno od pumpe. Odaberite 6.1 Servisiranje
primjenjive korake: Pumpa ne zahtijeva bilo kakvo planirano redovito održavanje. Ako korisnik
2. Serija 1, 3, 5: želi isplanirati rokove redovitog održavanja, oni ovise o vrsti upumpane
a) Popustite klin drenažnog priključka (2). tekućine i uvjetima rada pumpe.
b) Skinite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1) i otvorite on-off ven- Obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa za bilo kakve zahtjeve ili informacije koje
til uzvodno dok voda ne protječe iz otvora. se odnose na redovito održavanje ili servisiranje.
c) Zategnite klin drenažnog priključka (2).
d) Zamijenite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1). Izvanredno održavanje može biti potrebno radi čišćenja kraja s tekućinom i/
3. Serija 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: ili zamjene istrošenih dijelova.
a) Skinite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1) i otvorite on/off ven-
til uzvodno dok voda ne protječe iz otvora. 6.2 Vrijednosti zateznog momenta
b) Zatvorite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1). Priključak za ispu- Za informacije u vezi vrijednosti zateznog momenta, pogledajte Tablica 18,
nu (3) može se koristi namjesto (1). Tablica 19 ili Tablica 20.
Instalacija kada je razina tekućine iznad pumpe (usisna visina) Za informacije o primjenjivom potisku i zateznim momentima na prirubni-
cama cijevi, pogledajte Slika 21.
Za ilustraciju koja pokazuje dijelove pumpe, pogledajte Slika 17.
6.3 Zamijenite električni motor
1. Otvorite on-off ventil smješten uzvodno od pumpe i zatvorite on-off
ventil nizvodno od pumpe. Odaberite primjenjive korake:
Pumpa se isporučuje s kalibriranom podloškom u obliku vilica koja je di-
2. Serija 1, 3, 5: zajnirana da olakša spajanje motora i operacije zamjene.
a) Popustite klin drenažnog priključka (2).
b) Skinite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1) i za punjenje pumpe • Pogledajte upute o tome kako zamijeniti motor u Slika 23.
koristite lijevak dok voda ne protječe iz otvora. Ako kalibrirana podloška u obliku vilica nije dostupna koristite
c) Zamijenite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1). podlošku od 5 ± 0,1 mm (0,2 ± 0,004 in.).
d) Zategnite klin drenažnog priključka (2).
3. Serija 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: 6.4 Zamijenite mehanički zatvarač
a) Skinite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1) i koristite lijevak (4)
za punjenje pumpe dok voda ne protječe iz otvora. Serija Upute
b) Zamijenite priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje (1). Priključak za 1, 3, 5 Obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
ispunu (3) može se koristi namjesto (1). 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 kW Obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
10, 15, 22: > 4 kW Pogledajte upute u Slika 24. Za čišćenje i podmazivanje
5.2 Provjeriti smjer okretanja (trofazni motor) koristite alkohol.
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Pogledajte upute u Slika 24. Za čišćenje i podmazivanje
Slijedite ovaj postupak prije stavljanja u rad. koristite alkohol.
1. Pronađite strelice na prilagodniku ili poklopcu ventilatora motora kako
bi se utvrdio ispravan smjer okretanja.
2. Pokrenite motor.
Pumpa radi ali predaje premalo ili nimalo vode. 7.6 Električna pumpa se pokreće, ali je
Uzrok Rješenje aktivirana opća zaštita sustava
Pumpa je začepljena. Obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
Uzrok Rješenje
Upute za otklanjanje problema u donjoj tablici su samo za instalatere.
Kratak spoj u električnom sustavu. Provjerite električni sustav.
7.2 Glavna sklopka je uključena, ali se
električna pumpa ne pokreće 7.7 Električna pumpa se pokreće, ali se
aktvira sklopka na diferencijalnu struju
(RCD) sustava
Uzrok Rješenje
Nema napajanja. • Vratite napajanje. Uzrok Rješenje
• Provjerite jesu li svi električni priključ- Postoji propuštanje na uzemljenje. Provjerite izolaciju dijelova električnog
ci za napajanje netaknuti. sustava.
Toplinska zaštita ugrađena u Pričekajte dok se pumpa ne ohladi.
pumpu (ako postoji) je isključe- Toplinska zaštita će se automatski reseti- 7.8 Pumpa radi ali predaje premalo ili
na. rati. nimalo vode
Isključen je toplinski relej ili za- Ponovno postavite toplinsku zaštitu.
štita motora u električnoj
upravljačkoj ploči. Uzrok Rješenje
Isključen je uređaj za zaštitu od Provjerite sljedeće: Unutar pumpe ili cijevi po- • Odzračite
rada na suho. • razinu vode u spremniku ili mrežni stoji zrak.
tlak Pumpa nije ispravno na- Zaustavite pumpu i ponovite postupak
• uređaj za zaštitu i njegove kabele za punjena. punjenja. Ako se problem nastavi:
spajanje • Provjerite da li mehanički zatvarač curi.
Osigurači za pumpu ili pomoćni Zamijenite osigurače. • Provjerite da li je usisna cijev savršeno
krugovi su pregorijeli. zaptivena.
• Zamijenite sve ventile koji cure.
7.3 Električna pumpa se pokreće, ali se Prigušenje na dopremnoj Otvorite ventil.
toplinska zaštita isključuje ili osigurači strani previše je veliko.
pregorijevaju odmah nakon toga Ventili su zaključani u zatvo- Rastavite i očistite ventile.
renom ili djelomično zatvore-
Uzrok Rješenje nom položaju.
Kabel za napajanje je oštećen. Provjerite kabel i zamijenite prema Pumpa je začepljena. Obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
potrebi. Cijevi su začepljene. Provjerite i očistite cijevi.
Toplinska zaštita ili osigurači nisu Provjerite dijelove i zamijenite prema Smjer okretanja rotora je po- Promijenite položaj dvije faze na priključnoj
pogodni za struju motora. potrebi. grešan (trofazna verzija). ploči motora ili na električnoj upravljačkoj
Električni motor je u kratkom Provjerite dijelove i zamijenite prema ploči.
spoju. potrebi. Usisni podizač je previsok ili Provjerite uvjete rada pumpe. Ako je potreb-
Motor je preopterećen. Provjerite uvjete rada pumpe i ponov- je otpornost na protok u usis- no, učinite sljedeće:
no postavite zaštitu. nim cijevima prevelika. • Smanjite usisnu visinu
• Povećajte promjer usisne cijevi
7.4 Električna pumpa se pokreće, ali se
toplinska zaštita isključuje ili osigurači 7.9 Električna pumpa se zaustavlja, a zatim
pregorijevaju ubrzo nakon toga se okreće u pogrešnom smjeru
Uzrok Rješenje
Električna ploča se nalazi u pretjerano Zaštitite električnu ploču od izvora Uzrok Rješenje
grijanom području ili je izložena izrav- topline i izravne sunčeve svjetlosti. Jedna ili obje sljedeće komponente cure: Popravite ili zamijenite neispravnu
noj sunčevoj svjetlosti. • Usisna cijev komponentu.
Napon napajanja nije unutar radnih Provjerite uvjete rada motora. • Nožni ventil ili kontrolni ventil
ograničenja motora.
Uzrok Rješenje
U usisnoj cijevi postoji zrak. Odzračite.
Uzrok Rješenje
Jedna ili obje sljedeće komponente cure: Popravite ili zamijenite neisprav-
• Usisna cijev nu komponentu.
• Nožni ventil ili kontrolni ventil
Uzrok Rješenje
Kavitacija pumpe Smanjite zahtijevanu brzinu protoka djelomičnim
zatvaranjem on-off ventila nizvodno od pumpe.
Ako se problem nastavi provjerite uvjete rada
pumpe (visinsku razliku, otpornost na protok,
temperaturu tekućine itd.).
Ležajevi motora su po- Obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
habani.
Unutar pumpe postoje Obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
strani predmeti.
U bilo kojoj drugoj situaciji obratite se odjelu prodaje i servisa.
NAPOMENA:
Sačuvajte ovaj priručnik za buduću upotrebu i držite ga lako dostupnim na Uputstva
mestu na kome se jedinica nalazi. Uputstva i upozorenja koja se nalaze u ovom priručniku odnose se na stan-
dardnu verziju, kao što je opisano u kupoprodajnom ugovoru. Pumpe po-
sebne verzije mogu se isporučivati uz dodatne brošure sa uputstvima.
1.1.1 Korisnici bez iskustva Pogledajte kupoprodajni ugovor u vezi bilo kakvih izmena ili karakteristika
posebne verzije. Za uputstva, situacije ili događaje koji nisu uzeti u obzir u
UPOZORENJE: ovom priručniku ili kupoprodajnom ugovoru, kontaktirajte najbliži Lowara
servisni centar.
Ovaj proizvod je namenjen za rukovanje isključivo od strane
kvalifikovanog osoblja.
1.3 Odlaganje pakovanja i proizvoda
Pripazite na sledeće mere opreza: Poštujte lokalne propise i zakone koji su na snazi u pogledu odlaganja sorti-
• Osobe sa invaliditetom ne bi trebalo da rukuju proizvodom ukoliko to ne ranog otpada.
čine pod nadzorom ili ako nisu pravilno obučene od strane stručnjaka.
• Deca moraju biti pod nadzorom kako bi se obezbedilo da se ne igraju na 1.4 Garancija
proizvodu ili oko njega.
Za informacije o garanciji pogledajte kupoprodajni ugovor.
1.2 Terminologija i simboli u vezi sigurnosti
1.5 Rezervni delovi
O sigurnosnim porukama
Izuzetno je važno da pre rukovanja proizvodom pažljivo pročitate, razumete UPOZORENJE:
i poštujete sigurnosne poruke i propise. One se objavljuju radi sprečavanja Koristite samo originalne rezervne delove za zamenu bilo kojih
sledećih opasnosti: istrošenih ili neispravnih komponenti. Upotreba neodgovarajućih
rezervnih delova može uzrokovati kvarove, oštećenja i povrede,
• Lične povrede i zdravstveni problemi kao i poništenje garancije.
• Oštećenja proizvoda
• Neispravnost proizvoda
OPREZ:
Uvek navedite tačan tip proizvoda i broj dela kada od Službe
Nivoi opasnosti prodaje i servisa zahtevate tehničke informacije ili rezervne
Nivo opasnosti Indikacija delove.
Opasna situacija koja će, ako se ne iz-
OPASNOST: begne, dovesti do smrti ili ozbiljne Za više informacija o rezervnim delovima proizvoda, pogledajte Slika 25,
povrede Slika 26 ili Slika 27.
UPOZORENJE:
Opasna situacija koja, ako se ne iz- 1.6 EZ IZJAVA O USKLAĐENOSTI (PREVOD)
begne, može dovesti do smrti ili oz-
biljne povrede LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE, SA SEDIŠTEM U VIA VITTORIO
LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE VI - ITALIA,
OVIME IZJAVLJUJE DA SLEDEĆI PROIZVOD:
Opasna situacija koja, ako se ne iz-
OPREZ: begne, može dovesti do manje ili ELEKTRIČNA PUMPA (POGLEDATI NALEPNICU NA PRVOJ
umerene povrede STRANICI)
ISPUNJAVA RELEVANTNE ODREDBE SLEDEĆIH EVROPSKIH DI-
• Moguća situacija koja, ako se ne REKTIVA:
NAPOMENA: izbegne, može dovesti do ne-
željenih uslova • MAŠINSKE DIREKTIVE: 2006/42/EZ (TEHNIČKA DOKUMEN-
• Radnja koja nije u vezi sa ličnim TACIJA MOŽE SE DOBITI OD LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE).
povredama • DIREKTIVE O ELEKTROMAGNETNOJ KOMPATIBILNOSTI
2004/108/EZ
Kategorije opasnosti • ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, REGULATIVA (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~, 50
Hz, PN≥ 0,75 kW) AKO POSTOJI OZNAKA IE2 ili IE3
Kategorije opasnosti mogu potpasti pod nivoe opasnosti ili specijalni
simboli mogu zameniti obične simbole nivoa opasnosti. I SLEDEĆE TEHNIČKE STANDARDE:
Električne opasnosti su označene sledećim specijalnim simbolom: • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
UPOZORENJE: • EN 60034–30
ISPUNJAVA RELEVANTNE ODREDBE SLEDEĆIH EVROPSKIH DI- Za više informacija o tome kako da sigurno upregnete jedinicu, pogledajte
REKTIVA: Slika 4.
• MAŠINSKE DIREKTIVE 2006/42/EZ (TEHNIČKA DOKUMEN-
TACIJA MOŽE SE DOBITI OD LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). Jedinica bez motora
I SLEDEĆE TEHNIČKE STANDARDE: Ako se jedinica ne isporučuje sa motorom, kalibrisana račvasta podloška već
je umetnuta između adaptera i spojke za prenos. Podloška je umetnuta kako
• EN 809 bi rotor čvrsto stajao u ispravnom aksijalnom položaju. Da bi se sprečila
oštećenja u toku transporta, osovina se takođe drži u položaju pomoću
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011. ekspandiranog polistirena i plastičnih traka.
AMEDEO VALENTE Zavrtanj i navrtke koji se koriste za učvršćivanje motora nisu uključeni. Za
više informacija o tome kako da upregnete pumpu, pogledajte Slika 23.
(DIREKTOR ENGINEERING R&D)
rev.01 UPOZORENJE:
Pumpa i motor koji su kupljeni odvojeno a zatim međusobno
priključeni predstavljaju novu mašinu prema Mašinskoj direktivi
Lowara je zaštitni znak kompanije Lowara srl Unipersonale, podružnice 2006/42/EC. Osoba koja obavlja priključivanje odgovorna je za
kompanije Xylem Inc. sve bezbednosne aspekte kombinovane jedinice.
2 Transport i skladištenje
2.3 Smernice za skladištenje
2.1 Proverite isporuku
1. Proverite spoljašnji deo pakovanja na vidne znakove oštećenja. Lokacija za skladištenje
2. Ako na proizvodu postoje vidljivi znaci oštećenja, obavestite našeg di- Proizvod se mora skladištiti na pokrivenom i suvom mestu na kome nema
stributera u roku od osam dana od dana isporuke. visokih temperatura, prašine i vibracija.
Proverite jedinicu
1. Uklonite materijal za pakovanje sa proizvoda.
3 Opis proizvoda
Odložite u otpad sav materijal za pakovanje u skladu sa lokalnim pro-
pisima. 3.1 Dizajn pumpe
2. Pregledajte proizvod da biste utvrdili da li postoje delovi koji su ošte-
ćeni ili nedostaju. Ovo je vertikalna, višestepena pumpa koja se ne puni sama, i koja se može
povezati na standardne električne motore. Pumpa se može koristiti za
3. Ako je moguće, oslobodite proizvod uklanjajući bilo koje zavrtnje, reze pumpanje:
ili trake.
Radi vaše lične bezbednosti, vodite računa prilikom rukovanja ekse- • Hladne vode
rima i trakama. • Tople vode
4. Ako nešto nije u redu, kontaktirajte Službu prodaje i servisa. Metalni delovi koji dolaze u kontakt sa vodom izrađeni su od sledećeg:
Serija Materijal
2.2 Smernice za transport 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Nerđajući čelik
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Nerđajući čelik i liveno gvožđe
Mere opreza Dostupna je posebna verzija kod koje su svi delovi izra-
đeni od nerđajućeg čelika.
UPOZORENJE:
• Obratite pažnju da li se poštuju propisi za sprečavanje nezgo- SV pumpe 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 i 22 su dostupne u različitim verzijama prema
da. položaju usisnog i dopremnog priključka i oblika spojne prirubnice.
• Opasnost od drobljenja. Jedinica i komponente mogu biti Proizvod se isporučuje kao jedinica pumpe (pumpa i električni motor) ili
teški. Koristite odgovarajuće metode podizanja i uvek nosite samo kao pumpa.
cipele sa čeličnim vrhom.
NAPOMENA:
Proverite bruto težinu navedenu na ambalaži da biste izabrali odgovarajuću
opremu za dizanje. Ako ste kupili pumpu bez motora, uverite se da je motor prikladan za
spajanje sa pumpom.
Položaj i učvršćivanje
Jedinica se može transportovati horizontalno ili vertikalno. Uverite se da je Mehanički zatvarač
jedinica bezbedno učvršćena tokom transporta, i da ne može da se preokre-
ne ili ispadne. Serija Osnovne karakteristike
1, 3, 5 Nazivni prečnik 12 mm (0,47 in.), neuravnotežena, rotacija
UPOZORENJE: udesno, K verzija (EN 12756)
Ne koristite ušice koje su za motor učvršćene zatezanjem za 10, 15, 22 Nazivni prečnik 16 mm (0,63 in.), neuravnotežena, rotacija
rukovanje celom jedinicom električne pumpe. udesno, K verzija (EN 12756)
Uravnotežena sa motorom snage ≥ 5 kW,
• Koristite trake koje okružuju motor ako je snaga motora između 0,25 kW
i 4,0 kW. 33, 46, 66, Nazivni prečnik 22 mm (0,86 in.), neuravnotežena, rotacija
92, 125 udesno, K verzija (EN 12756)
• Koristite užad ili trake koje su povezane na dve prirubnice (ušice, ako po-
stoje) koje se nalaze u blizini zone spajanja motora i pumpe, ukoliko je
snaga motora između 5,5 kW i 55,0 kW. Namena
• Ušice koje su za motor učvršćene zatezanjem mogu se koristiti isključivo Pumpa je pogodna za:
za rukovanje pojedinačnim motorom ili, u slučaju da težina nije rav-
nomerno raspoređena, za delimično vertikalno podizanje jedinice • Civilne i industrijske sisteme za distribuciju vode
prilikom horizontalnog pomeranja. • Navodnjavanje (na primer, poljoprivredu i sportske objekte)
• Da biste pomerili samo jedinicu pumpe, koristite trake koje su čvrsto po- • Obradu vode
vezane za adapter motora. • Snabdevanje napojnom vodom
Nepravilno korišćenje
UPOZORENJE:
Nepravilno korišćenje pumpe može stvoriti opasne uslove i uz- Standard EPDM -30°C (-22°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
rokovati lične povrede i oštećenje imovine. Specijalan FPM (FKM) -10°C (14°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C94
(248°F)
Nepravilno korišćenje proizvoda dovodi do gubitka garancije. Specijalan PTFE 0°C (32°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
Primeri nepravilnog korišćenja:
Za posebne zahteve kontaktirajte Službu prodaje i servisa.
• Tečnosti koje nisu kompatibilne sa materijalima od kojih je pumpa izrađe-
na Maksimalni broj pokretanja na sat
• Opasne tečnosti (kao što su otrovne, eksplozivne, zapaljive ili korozivne Ova tabela pokazuje broj dozvoljenih pokretanja na sat za motore koje ispo-
tečnosti) ručuje Lowara:
• Pitke tečnosti različite od vode (na primer vino ili mleko)
Primeri nepravilne instalacije: kW 0,25 4,00 11,0 18,5 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
-3,00 -7,50 -15,0 -22,0 37,0
• Opasne lokacije (kao što su eksplozivne ili korozivne atmosfere). Pokre- 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
• Lokacije na kojima je temperatura vazduha veoma visoka ili gde postoji tanja na
slabo provetravanje. sat
• Spoljne instalacije gde ne postoji zaštita od kiše ili od temperatura
mržnjenja.
NAPOMENA:
OPASNOST: Ako koristite motor drugačiji od standardnog koji se isporučuje sa električ-
Ne koristite pumpu za obradu zapaljivih i/ili eksplozivnih tečno- nom pumpom, proverite odgovarajuća uputstva da biste saznali dozvoljeni
sti. broj pokretanja na sat.
Maksimalni radni pritisak IMQ ili TUV ili IRAM ili druge oznake (samo za električnu pumpu)
Osim ako nije drugačije navedeno, za proizvode sa oznakom odobrenja za
Ovaj dijagram toka pokazuje maksimalni radni pritisak u zavisnosti od električnu bezbednost, odobrenje se odnosi isključivo na električnu pumpu.
modela pumpe i temperature upumpane tečnosti.
4 Instalacija
Mere opreza
UPOZORENJE:
• Obratite pažnju da li se poštuju propisi za sprečavanje nezgo-
da.
• Koristite prikladnu opremu i zaštitu.
• Uvek poštujte lokalne i/ili nacionalne propise, zakonodavstvo
i pravilnike koji su na snazi, u vezi izbora mesta instalacije i
priključka vode i struje.
Sledeća formula važi za motore koji su opremljeni aksijalno blokiranim
ležajem na pogonskom kraju (kao što su Lowara standardni motori ua e-SV). UPOZORENJE:
Pogledajte Slika 6. Za ostale zahteve kontaktirajte Službu prodaje i servisa. • Pobrinite se da sve spojeve formiraju kvalifikovani tehničari
za instalaciju i da su u skladu sa propisima na snazi.
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
• Pre početka rada na jedinici, uverite se da su jedinica i kon-
P1max Maksimalni ulazni pritisak trolna tabla izolovani od napajanja i da se ne mogu napajati.
To se odnosi i na kontrolno kolo.
Pmax Maksimalni pritisak koji generiše pumpa
PN Maksimalni radni pritisak
Hf Ukupni gubici u metrima uzrokovani prolaskoom tečnosti u usis- • Električni izvodi su zaštićeni od visoke temperature, vibracija i sudara.
• Vod za napajanje je opremljen:
nu cev pumpe
• Uređajem za zaštitu od kratkog spoja
Hv Pritisak pare u metrima koji odgovara temperaturi tečnosti od T • Diferencijalnim prekidačem visoke osetljivosti·(30 mA) [uređaj za rezi-
°C dualnu struju (RCD)] za dodatnu zaštitu od električnog udara
• Prekidačem za odvajanje od mreže sa minimalnim razmakom kon-
takata od 3 mm
Kablovska uvodnica
Opseg spoljašnjeg prečnika kabla u mm
Tip
M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
SM X – –
PLM X X X
LLM X X X
95 osigurači aM (pokretanje motora) ili magnetno-termički prekidač sa krivom C i strujom Icn ≥ 4,5 kA ili drugi ekvivalentni uređaj.
96 Termički relej preopterećenja·klase 10 A + osigurači aM (pokretanje motora) ili magnetno-termički prekidač za zaštitu motora klase 10 A.
Uzrok Rešenje
Jedna ili obe navedene komponente cure: Popravite ili zamenite neisprav-
• Usisna cev nu komponentu.
• Nožni ventil ili kontrolni ventil
Uzrok Rešenje
Kavitacija pumpe Smanjite zahtevanu brzinu protoka delimičnim za-
tvaranjem on-off ventila nizvodno od pumpe. Ako
se problem nastavi proverite uslove rada pumpe (na
primer, razliku u visini, otpornost na protok,
temperaturu tečnosti).
Ležajevi motora su Kontaktirajte Službu prodaje i servisa.
pohabani.
Unutar pumpe se Kontaktirajte Službu prodaje i servisa.
nalaze strani predmeti.
Za bilo koje druge situacije obratite se Službi prodaje i servisa.
1 Εισαγωγή και ασφάλεια Τα παρακάτω είναι παραδείγματα άλλων κατηγοριών που μπορεί να υπάρχουν.
Αυτές υπάγονται στα συνήθη επίπεδα κινδύνου και μπορεί να υποδεικνύονται
με συμπληρωματικά σύμβολα.
1.1 Εισαγωγή • Κίνδυνος σύνθλιψης
• Κίνδυνος κοψίματος
Σκοπός του παρόντος εγχειριδίου
• Κίνδυνος ηλεκτρικού τόξου
Ο σκοπός του παρόντος εγχειριδίου είναι να παρέχει τις απαραίτητες πληρο-
φορίες για:
Κίνδυνος καυτής επιφάνειας
• Εγκατάσταση
• Λειτουργία Οι κίνδυνοι καυτής επιφάνειας υποδεικνύονται με ένα συγκεκριμένο σύμβολο
• Συντήρηση που αντικαθιστά τα τυπικά σύμβολα του επιπέδου του κινδύνου:
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ:
Διαβάστε προσεκτικά το παρόν εγχειρίδιο, πριν από την εγκατά-
σταση και τη χρήση του προϊόντος. Η μη ενδεδειγμένη χρήση του
προϊόντος μπορεί να προκαλέσει τραυματισμό και υλικές ζημιές Περιγραφή συμβόλων για χρήστη και υπεύθυνο εγκατάστασης
και, ενδεχομένως, να ακυρώσει την εγγύηση.
Συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες για το προσωπικό που είναι υπεύ-
θυνο για την εγκατάσταση του προϊόντος στο σύστημα
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: (υδραυλικά και/ή ηλεκτρικά θέματα) ή για το προσωπικό που
είναι υπεύθυνο για τη συντήρηση.
Φυλάξτε το παρόν εγχειρίδιο για τυχόν μελλοντική παραπομπή και φροντίστε
να είναι ανά πάσα στιγμή διαθέσιμο στην περιοχή όπου είναι εγκατεστημένη η Συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες για χρήστες του προϊόντος.
μονάδα.
ΚΑΙ ΤΩΝ ΑΚΟΛΟΥΘΩΝ ΤΕΧΝΙΚΩΝ ΠΡΟΤΥΠΩΝ • Οι βιδοθηλιές που βιδώνονται επάνω στον κινητήρα ενδέχεται να χρησιμο-
ποιούνται αποκλειστικά για τον χειρισμό του μεμονωμένου κινητήρα, ή σε
• EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233 περίπτωση μη ισοσκελισμένης κατανομής του βάρους, ώστε να ανασηκωθεί
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007 μερικώς η μονάδα κάθετα, ξεκινώντας από οριζόντια τοποθέτηση.
• EN 60034–30 • Για να μετακινήσετε μόνο τη μονάδα της αντλίας, χρησιμοποιήστε τις λωρί-
δες σφικτά συνδεδεμένες στον προσαρμογέα του κινητήρα.
ΑΝΤΛΙΑ (ΒΛ. ΕΤΙΚΕΤΑ ΣΤΗΝ ΠΡΩΤΗ ΣΕΛΙΔΑ) Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με τον ασφαλή τρόπο ελέγχου της μο-
νάδας, δείτε στην ενότητα Σχήμα 4
ΠΛΗΡΟΙ ΤΙΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΚΟΛΟΥΘΩΝ ΕΥΡΩ-
ΠΑΪΚΩΝ ΟΔΗΓΙΩΝ:
Μονάδα χωρίς κινητήρα
• ΜΗΧΑΝΗΜΑΤΑ: 2006/42/ΕΚ (ΤΟ ΤΕΧΝΙΚΟ ΑΡΧΕΙΟ ΕΙΝΑΙ Αν η μονάδα δεν παραδοθεί με κινητήρα, ένας βαθμονομημένος αντισταθμι-
ΔΙΑΘΕΣΙΜΟ ΑΠΟ ΤΗΝ LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE). στής σε σχήμα τρίαινας έχει ήδη εισαχθεί ανάμεσα στον προσαρμογέα και τη
ΚΑΙ ΤΩΝ ΑΚΟΛΟΥΘΩΝ ΤΕΧΝΙΚΩΝ ΠΡΟΤΥΠΩΝ: σύζευξη μετάδοσης. Ο αντισταθμιστής έχει εισαχθεί για να διατηρεί τη φτερω-
τή κολλημένη στη σωστή αξονική θέση. Για να αποτρέψετε τυχόν ζημιά κατά
• EN 809 τη μεταφορά, ο άξονας πρέπει επίσης να συγκρατείται στη θέση του με επεκτει-
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 νόμενους ιμάντες πολυστυρενίου, καθώς και πλαστικό.
AMEDEO VALENTE Το μπουλόνι και τα παξιμάδια που χρησιμοποιούνται για το δέσιμο του κινη-
τήρα δεν περιλαμβάνονται. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με τον τρό-
(ΔΙΕΥΘΥΝΤΗΣ ENGINEERING και R&D ) πο σύζευξης του κινητήρα, δείτε στην ενότητα Σχήμα 23
αναθ.01
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ:
Η ονομασία Lowara είναι εμπορικό σήμα της Lowara srl Unipersonale, θυγα- Μια αντλία και ένας κινητήρας που αγοράζονται ξεχωριστά και στη
τρική της Xylem Inc. συνέχεια, ενώνονται, έχουν ως αποτέλεσμα ένα νέο μηχάνημα σύμ-
φωνα με την Οδηγία περί μηχανημάτων 2006/42/ΕΚ. Το άτομο
που πραγματοποιεί τη σύζευξη είναι υπεύθυνο για όλα τα θέματα
2 Μεταφορά και αποθήκευση ασφαλείας της συνδυασμένης μονάδας.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ:
Μην χρησιμοποιείτε βιδοθηλιές βιδωμένες επάνω στον κινητήρα Εάν έχετε αγοράσει μια αντλία χωρίς κινητήρα, βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο κινητήρας
για χειρισμό ολόκληρης της μονάδας της ηλεκτρικής αντλίας. είναι κατάλληλος για τη σύζευξη με την αντλία.
• Χρησιμοποιήστε λωρίδες που περιβάλλουν τον κινητήρα εάν η ισχύς του Μηχανική στεγανοποίηση
κινητήρα είναι μεταξύ 0,25 kW και 4,0 kW.
• Χρησιμοποιήστε σκοινιά ή λωρίδες που είναι συνδεδεμένα στις δύο φλάν- Σειρά Βασικά χαρακτηριστικά
τζες (βιδοθηλιές εάν παρέχονται) που βρίσκονται κοντά στη ζώνη συναρμο- 1, 3, 5 Ονομαστική διάμετρος 12 mm (0,47 in.), μη ισοσκελισμένη, δε-
γής ανάμεσα στον κινητήρα και την αντλία, εάν ο κινητήρας βρίσκεται μετα- ξιά περιστροφή, έκδοση Κ (EN 12756)
ξύ 5,5 kW και 55,0 kW.
97 Ο EN 60335-2-41 είναι ο κανόνας σχετικά με την ασφάλεια του ηλεκτρικού περί αντλιών για νοικοκυριά και παρόμοιες εφαρμογές
98 Μέγιστη θερμοκρασία 100ºC για νερό
4 Εγκατάσταση Παρέχετε τον κατάλληλο φωτισμό και διάκενο γύρω από την αντλία. Βεβαιω-
θείτε ότι η αντλία είναι εύκολα προσβάσιμη για εγκατάσταση και λειτουργίες
συντήρησης.
Μέτρα προφύλαξης
Εγκατάσταση πάνω από την πηγή υγρού (ανύψωση αναρρόφησης)
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Το θεωρητικό μέγιστο ύψος αναρρόφησης οποιασδήποτε αντλίας είναι 10,33m.
• Τηρήστε τους ισχύοντες κανονισμούς πρόληψης ατυχημάτων. Στην πράξη, τα ακόλουθα επηρεάζουν την ικανότητα αναρρόφησης της αν-
• Χρησιμοποιήστε κατάλληλο εξοπλισμό και μέσα προστασίας. τλίας:
• Να συμβουλεύεστε πάντοτε τους ισχύοντες τοπικούς και/ή εθνι-
κούς κανονισμούς, νόμους και κώδικες αναφορικά με την επιλο- • Θερμοκρασία του υγρού
γή του χώρου εγκατάστασης και τις συνδέσεις νερού και ηλεκ- • Ανύψωση πάνω από τη στάθμη της θάλασσας (σε ανοικτό σύστημα)
τρικής τροφοδοσίας. • Πίεση συστήματος (σε κλειστό σύστημα)
• Αντίσταση των σωληνών
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: • Εγγενής αντίσταση της ροής της αντλίας
• Βεβαιωθείτε ότι όλες οι συνδέσεις εκτελούνται από εξειδικευμέ- • Διαφορές ύψους
νους τεχνικούς εγκατάστασης και σε συμμόρφωση με τους Η ακόλουθη εξίσωση χρησιμοποιείται για να υπολογίσετε το μέγιστο ύψος πά-
ισχύοντες κανονισμούς. νω από τη στάθμη του υγρού, στο οποίο μπορεί να τοποθετηθεί η αντλία:
• Πριν ξεκινήσετε να εργάζεστε με τη μονάδα, βεβαιωθείτε ότι η
μονάδα και ο πίνακας ελέγχου έχουν απομονωθεί από την ηλεκ- (pb*10,2 - Z) ≥ NPSH + Hf + Hv + 0,5
τρική τροφοδοσία και ότι δεν υπάρχει περίπτωση να τεθούν υπό
τάση. Αυτό ισχύει και για το κύκλωμα ελέγχου. pb Βαρομετρική πίεση σε μπαρ (σε κλειστό σύστημα είναι η πίεση του
συστήματος)
4.1 Γείωση NPSH Τιμή σε μέτρα της εγγενούς αντίστασης ροής της αντλίας
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Hf Οι συνολικές απώλειες σε μέτρα προκαλούνται από το πέρασμα
• Συνδέετε πάντα τον αγωγό εξωτερικής προστασίας με τον ακρο- υγρού στον σωλήνα αναρρόφησης της αντλίας
δέκτη της γείωσης πριν δημιουργήσετε άλλες ηλεκτρικές συνδέ-
σεις. Hv Η πίεση ατμού σε μέτρα αντιστοιχεί στη θερμοκρασία του υγρού T
• Ολόκληρος ο ηλεκτρικός εξοπλισμός πρέπει να είναι γειωμένος. °C
Αυτό ισχύει για τον εξοπλισμό της αντλίας, τον άξονα μετάδο-
σης κίνησης και οποιονδήποτε εξοπλισμό παρακολούθησης. 0,5 Συνιστώμενο περιθώριο ασφαλείας (m)
Ελέγξτε τον αγωγό γείωσης με κατάλληλα όργανα δοκιμών, για Ζ Μέγιστο ύψος στο οποίο μπορεί να εγκατασταθεί η αντλία (m)
να βεβαιωθείτε ότι είναι συνδεδεμένος σωστά.
• Εάν το καλώδιο του κινητήρα αποσπαστεί κατά λάθος, π.χ. από Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, βλ. Σχήμα 7.
κάποιο τράνταγμα, ο αγωγός γείωσης θα πρέπει να είναι ο τε-
λευταίος αγωγός που αποσυνδέεται από τον ακροδέκτη του. Βε- (pb*10,2 - Z) πρέπει πάντα να είναι θετικός αριθμός.
βαιωθείτε ότι ο αγωγός γείωσης είναι μεγαλύτερος σε μήκος
από τους αγωγούς φάσης. Αυτό ισχύει και για τα δύο άκρα του Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με τις αποδόσεις, βλ. Σχήμα 5.
καλωδίου του κινητήρα.
• Προσθέστε επιπλέον προστασία από θανατηφόρα ηλεκτροπλη- ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ:
ξία. Εγκαταστήστε ένα διακόπτη διαφορικού υψηλής ευαισθη- Μην υπερβαίνετε την αναρροφητική ικανότητα της αντλίας, καθώς αυτό μπορεί
σίας (30 mA) [μηχανισμός προστασίας από διαρροή ρεύματος να προκαλέσει σπηλαίωση και ζημιές στην αντλία.
RCD].
• Η ποδοβαλβίδα είναι πλήρως εμβαπτισμένη στο υγρό ώστε να μην μπορεί Λίστα ελέγχου του κινητήρα
να εισχωρήσει αέρας στη δίνη αναρρόφησης, όταν το υγρό βρίσκεται στη
χαμηλότερη στάθμη και η αντλία έχει εγκατασταθεί πάνω από την πηγή του ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ:
υγρού.
• Πραγματοποιείται εγκατάσταση βαλβίδων διακοπής κυκλώματος (on-off) • Διαβάστε τις οδηγίες λειτουργίας για να διασφαλίσετε εάν παρέ-
στο σωστό μέγεθος πάνω στις σωληνώσεις αναρρόφησης και στις σωληνώ- χεται συσκευή προστασίας σε περίπτωση χρήσης άλλου κινητή-
σεις παροχής (κατευθυντικά στη βαλβίδα ελέγχου) για ρύθμιση της χωρητι- ρα από τον πρότυπο.
κότητας της αντλίας, για έλεγχο της αντλίας και για συντήρηση. • Εάν ο κινητήρας διαθέτει αυτόματες διατάξεις θερμικής προ-
• Για να αποφύγετε την ανάποδη ροή στην αντλία όταν αυτή είναι απενεργο- στασίας, έχετε υπόψη σας τον κίνδυνο απότομων εκκινήσεων σε
ποιημένη, πρέπει να εγκαταστήσετε μια βαλβίδα ελέγχου στις σωληνώσεις περίπτωση υπερφόρτωσης. Μη χρησιμοποιείτε τέτοιου είδους
παροχής. κινητήρες για εφαρμογές πυρόσβεσης και συστήματα καταιονι-
σμού.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ:
Μην χρησιμοποιείτε τη βαλβίδα διακοπής κυκλώματος (on-off)
κλειστή στην πλευρά εκκένωσης ώστε να επιταχύνετε τη ροή της ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ:
αντλίας για περισσότερα από μερικά δευτερόλεπτα. Εάν η αντλία • Χρησιμοποιήστε μόνο δυναμικά ζυγοσταθμισμένους κινητήρες με μισή
πρέπει να λειτουργήσει με την πλευρά εκκένωσης κλειστή για πε- σφήνα στην προέκταση του άξονα (IEC 60034-14) και με κανονικό επίπεδο
ρισσότερο από μερικά δευτερόλεπτα, πρέπει να εγκατασταθεί ένα κραδασμών (N).
κύκλωμα παράκαμψης ώστε να αποτραπεί η υπερθέρμανση του νε- • Η τάση και η συχνότητα του δικτύου ηλεκτροδότησης πρέπει να συμφωνούν
ρού στο εσωτερικό της αντλίας. με τα τεχνικά χαρακτηριστικά που αναγράφονται στην πινακίδα στοιχείων.
• Χρησιμοποιήστε μόνο μονοφασικούς ή τριφασικούς κινητήρες, με στοιχεία
Για εικόνες που δείχνουν τις απαιτήσεις των σωληνώσεων, βλ. Σχήμα 12 μεγέθους και ισχύος που συμμορφώνονται με τα Ευρωπαϊκά πρότυπα.
4.3 Ηλεκτρικές απαιτήσεις Γενικά, οι κινητήρες μπορούν να λειτουργήσουν κάτω από τις ακόλουθες ανο-
χές τάσης δικτύου ρεύματος:
• Οι ισχύοντες τοπικοί κανονισμοί υπερισχύουν αυτών των συγκεκριμένων
απαιτήσεων. Συχνότητα Hz Φάση ~ UN [V] ± %
• Σε περίπτωση πυροσβεστικών συστημάτων (πυροσβεστικοί κρουνοί και/ή 50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
ψεκαστήρες), ελέγξτε τους ισχύοντες τοπικούς κανονισμούς. 3 230/400 ± 10
400/690 ± 10
Λίστα ελέγχου ηλεκτρικής σύνδεσης
Ελέγξτε ότι ισχύουν οι ακόλουθες απαιτήσεις: 60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
3 220/380 ± 5
• Τα καλώδια ρεύματος προστατεύονται από υψηλές θερμοκρασίες, δονήσεις
και προσκρούσεις. 380/660 ± 10
• Η γραμμή τροφοδοσίας παρέχεται με τα εξής:
• Μια συσκευή προστασίας από βραχυκυκλώματα Χρησιμοποιείτε καλώδιο σύμφωνα με τους κανόνες με 3 ακροδέκτες (2+γείω-
• Διακόπτης διαφορικού υψηλής ευαισθησίας (30 mA) [μηχανισμός προ- ση) για μονοφασικές εκδόσεις και με 4 ακροδέκτες (3+γείωση) για τριφασική
στασίας από διαρροή ρεύματος RCD] για παροχή επιπλέον προστασίας έκδοση.
από ηλεκτροπληξία Ηλεκτρική αντλία με κινητήρα:
• Έναν κύριο διακόπτη απομόνωσης με κενό επαφής τουλάχιστον 3 mm
Στυπιοθλίπτης καλωδίου
Η λίστα ελέγχου του ηλεκτρικού πίνακα για τον έλεγχο Εύρος εξωτερικής διαμέτρου καλωδίου σε mm
Τύπος
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
Ο πίνακας ελέγχου πρέπει να έχει τις ίδιες αξιολογήσεις με εκείνες της ηλεκτρι- SM X – –
κής αντλίας. Οι ακατάλληλοι συνδυασμοί θα μπορούσαν να οδηγήσουν σε αθέ- PLM X X X
τηση της εγγύησης όσον αφορά την προστασία του κινητήρα. LLM X X X
99 ασφάλειες aM (εκκίνηση κινητήρα), ή μαγνητικός-θερμικός διακόπτης με καμπύλη C και Icn ≥ 4,5 kA ή άλλη ισοδύναμη συσκευή.
100 Ρελέ θερμικής υπερφόρτωσης με λειτουργία κλάσης 10A + ασφάλειες aM (εκκίνηση κινητήρα) ή προστασία κινητήρα με μαγνητικό-θερμικό διακόπτη με λειτουργία κλάσης
10A.
1. Βρείτε τα βέλη του προσαρμογέα ή το κάλυμμα του ανεμιστήρα του 6.4 Αντικατάσταση της μηχανικής
κινητήρα για να καθορίσετε τη σωστή κατεύθυνση περιστροφής. στεγανοποίησης
2. Εκκινήστε τον κινητήρα.
3. Αμέσως ελέγξτε την κατεύθυνση περιστροφής μέσω του προστατευτικού Σειρά Οδηγία
σύζευξης ή μέσω του καλύμματος του ανεμιστήρα του κινητήρα.
4. Σταματήστε τον κινητήρα. 1, 3, 5 Επικοινωνήστε με το Τμήμα Πωλήσεων και Εξυπηρέτησης.
5. Εάν η κατεύθυνση περιστροφής είναι σωστή, κάντε τα εξής: 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Επικοινωνήστε με το Τμήμα Πωλήσεων και Εξυπηρέτησης.
kW
a) Αποσυνδέστε την ηλεκτρική τροφοδοσία.
b) Στον τερματικό πίνακα του κινητήρα ή στον ηλεκτρικό πίνακα ελέγ- 10, 15, 22: > 4 Δείτε τις οδηγίες στην εικόνα Σχήμα 24. Χρησιμοποιήστε
χου, ανταλλάξτε τη θέση των δύο από τα τρία καλώδια παροχής. kW αλκοόλη για καθαρισμό και λίπανση.
Για τα διαγράμματα καλωδίωσης, βλ.Σχήμα 14. 33, 46, 66, 92, Δείτε τις οδηγίες στην εικόνα Σχήμα 24. Χρησιμοποιήστε
c) Ελέγξτε ξανά την κατεύθυνση περιστροφής. 125 αλκοόλη για καθαρισμό και λίπανση.
7.3 Η ηλεκτρική αντλία αρχίζει να 7.8 Η αντλία λειτουργεί αλλά παρέχει πολύ
λειτουργεί, αλλά η θερμική προστασία λίγο ή καθόλου νερό
ενεργοποιείται ή οι ασφάλειες καίγονται
αμέσως μετά Αιτία Διορθωτική ενέργεια
Αιτία Διορθωτική ενέργεια Υπάρχει αέρας στο εσωτερι- • Βγάλτε τον αέρα
Το καλώδιο παροχής ρεύματος Ελέγξτε το καλώδιο και αντικαταστήστε, κό της αντλίας ή στις σωλη-
έχει υποστεί ζημιά εφόσον απαιτείται. νώσεις.
Η θερμική προστασία ή οι ασφά- Ελέγξτε τα εξαρτήματα και αντικαταστή- Δεν έχει γίνει σωστά η πρώτη Διακόψτε τη λειτουργία της αντλίας και επανα-
λειες δεν είναι κατάλληλες για το στε, εφόσον απαιτείται. προετοιμασία της αντλίας. λάβετε την αρχική διαδικασία. Εάν το πρόβλη-
ρεύμα του κινητήρα. μα συνεχίζεται:
• Ελέγξτε ότι το σημείο μηχανικής στεγανο-
Υπάρχει βραχυκύκλωμα στον Ελέγξτε τα εξαρτήματα και αντικαταστή- ποίησης δεν παρουσιάζει διαρροές.
ηλεκτρικό κινητήρα. στε, εφόσον απαιτείται.
• Ελέγξτε τον σωλήνα αναρρόφησης για τέ-
Ο κινητήρας υπερφορτώνεται. Ελέγξτε τις συνθήκες λειτουργίας της αν- λεια σύσφιξη.
τλίας και επανεκκινήστε την προστασία.
• Αντικαταστήστε όποιες βαλβίδες παρουσιά-
ζουν διαρροή.
7.4 Η ηλεκτρική αντλία αρχίζει να Η επιτάχυνση στην πλευρά Ανοίξτε τη βαλβίδα.
λειτουργεί, αλλά η θερμική προστασία παροχής είναι εξαιρετικά
ενεργοποιείται ή οι ασφάλειες καίγονται εκτεταμένη.
μετά από λίγο Οι βαλβίδες είναι κλειστές ή Αποσυναρμολογήστε και καθαρίστε τις βαλβί-
σχεδόν κλειστές. δες.
Αιτία Διορθωτική ενέργεια Η αντλία έχει φράξει. Επικοινωνήστε με το Τμήμα Πωλήσεων και
Ο ηλεκτρικός πίνακας βρίσκεται σε Προστατεύστε τον ηλεκτρικό πίνακα Εξυπηρέτησης.
μέρος με υπερβολική θερμότητα ή εί- από την πηγή θερμότητας και το άμε- Οι σωληνώσεις έχουν φράξει. Ελέγξτε και καθαρίστε τους σωλήνες.
ναι εκτεθειμένος σε άμεσο φως. σο φως.
Η κατεύθυνση περιστροφής Αλλάξτε τη θέση των δύο από τις φάσεις στον
Η τάση της παροχής ρεύματος δεν εί- Ελέγξτε τις συνθήκες λειτουργίας του της φτερωτής είναι λάθος πίνακα ακροδεκτών του κινητήρα ή στον ηλεκ-
ναι μέσα στα όρια λειτουργίας του κινητήρα. (τριφασική έκδοση). τρικό πίνακα ελέγχου.
κινητήρα.
Το ύψος αναρρόφησης είναι Ελέγξτε τις συνθήκες λειτουργίας της αντλίας.
Λείπει μια φάση ρεύματος. Ελέγξτε την πολύ υψηλό ή η αντίσταση Εάν απαιτείται, προβείτε στα παρακάτω:
• παροχή ρεύματος της ροής στους σωλήνες • Μειώστε την ανύψωση αναρρόφησης
• ηλεκτρική σύνδεση αναρρόφησης είναι πολύ με- • Αυξήστε τη διάμετρο του σωλήνα αναρρό-
γάλη. φησης
7.5 Η ηλεκτρική αντλία αρχίζει να
λειτουργεί, αλλά η θερμική προστασία 7.9 Η ηλεκτρική αντλία διακόπτει τη
ενεργοποιείται σε άλλο χρόνο μετά την λειτουργία της, και στη συνέχεια,
έναρξη λειτουργίας περιστρέφεται στη λάθος κατεύθυνση
Αιτία Διορθωτική ενέργεια Αιτία Διορθωτική ενέργεια
Υπάρχουν ξένα αντικείμενα (στε- Επικοινωνήστε με το Τμήμα Πωλήσεων Υπάρχει διαρροή σε ένα ή δύο από τα ακόλου- Επισκευάστε ή αντικαταστή-
ρεές ή ινώδεις ουσίες) μέσα στην και Εξυπηρέτησης. θα εξαρτήματα: στε το ελαττωματικό εξάρ-
αντλία που έχουν μεταπηδήσει • Στον σωλήνα αναρρόφησης τημα.
στη φτερωτή. • Στην ποδοβαλβίδα ή τη βαλβίδα ελέγχου
Το πεδίο παροχής της αντλίας εί- Κλείστε σταδιακά τη βαλβίδα διακοπής
ναι μεγαλύτερο από τα όρια που παροχής προς τη φορά κίνησης μέχρι το Υπάρχει αέρας στον σωλήνα αναρρόφησης. Βγάλτε τον αέρα.
καθορίζονται στην πινακίδα στοι- πεδίο παροχής να είναι ίσο ή μικρότερο
χείων. από τα όρια που καθορίζονται στην πινακί- 7.10 Η αντλία τίθεται σε λειτουργία πολύ
δα στοιχείων.
συχνά
Η αντλία υπερφορτώνεται επειδή Ελέγξτε τις πραγματικές απαιτήσεις του
το υγρό άντλησης είναι ιδιαίτερα ρεύματος με βάση τα χαρακτηριστικά του
πυκνό και παχύρρευστο. υγρού που αντλείται και αντικαταστήστε Αιτία Διορθωτική ενέργεια
τον κινητήρα αναλόγως.
Υπάρχει διαρροή σε ένα ή δύο από τα ακό- Επισκευάστε ή αντικαταστήστε
Τα ρουλεμάν του κινητήρα έχουν Επικοινωνήστε με το Τμήμα Πωλήσεων λουθα εξαρτήματα: το ελαττωματικό εξάρτημα.
φθαρεί. και Εξυπηρέτησης.
• Στον σωλήνα αναρρόφησης
• Στην ποδοβαλβίδα ή τη βαλβίδα ελέγχου
7.6 Η ηλεκτρική αντλία αρχίζει να
λειτουργεί, αλλά η γενική προστασία του Υπάρχει μια διερρηγμένη μεμβράνη ή δεν Δείτε τις σχετικές οδηγίες στο
συστήματος είναι ενεργοποιημένη υπάρχει αέρας από πριν στη δεξαμενή πίεσης. εγχειρίδιο δεξαμενής πίεσης.
Sıcak yüzey tehlikeleri, tipik tehlike seviyesi sembollerinin yerine geçen özel
1.1 Giriş bir sembol tarafından belirtilir:
UYARI:
Talimatlar
Bu el kitabını gelecekte başvurmak üzere saklayın ve ünitenin yakınında hazır
bulundurun. Bu kılavuzda yer alan talimatlar ve uyarılar, satış belgesinde belirtildiği şekilde
standart versiyonu ilgilendirir. Özel pompa versiyonları ilave talimat broşür-
leriyle verilebilir. Değişiklikler veya özel versiyon özellikleri için satış sözleş-
1.1.1 Deneyimsiz kullanıcılar mesine başvurun. Bu kılavuzda veya satış belgesinde yer almayan talimatlar,
durumlar veya olaylar için en yakın Lowara Servis Merkezine başvurun.
UYARI:
Bu ürün sadece kalifiye personel tarafından kullanılmalıdır. 1.3 Ambalaj ve ürünün atılması
Ayrılan atıkların imhasıyla ilgili yerel yönetmeliklere ve kanunlara uyun.
Aşağıdaki uyarılara dikkat edin:
• Gözetmenlik yapılmadığı ve bir profesyonel tarafından eğitilmediği süre- 1.4 Garanti
ce, donanımsız kişilerin ürünü kullanmaması gerekir.
• Çocukların ürün üzerinde ya da çevresinde oynamadıklarından emin olun- Garanti hakkında bilgi için satış sözleşmesine bakın.
malıdır.
1.5 Yedek parçalar
1.2 Güvenlik terminolojisi ve sembolleri
UYARI:
Güvenlik mesajları hakkında Aşınmış veya arızalı bileşenleri değiştirmek için sadece orijinal
parçalar kullanın. Uygun olmayan parçalarının kullanılması yanlış
Ürünü kullanmadan önce emniyet mesajlarını ve yönetmelikleri okumanız, çalışma, hasar ve yaralanmalara yol açtığı gibi garantiyi de geçer-
anlamanız ve bunları takip etmeniz son derece önemlidir. Bunlar aşağıdaki siz kılar.
tehlikelerin önlenmesine yardımcı olmak için yayınlanmışlardır:
• Kişisel kazalar ve sağlık sorunları
DİKKAT:
• Ürünün hasar görmesi
Satış ve Servis Bölümünden teknik bilgi veya yedek parça ister-
• Ürünün arızalanması ken her zaman ürün türünü ve parça numarasını eksiksiz olarak
belirtin.
Tehlike seviyeleri
Tehlike seviyesi Gösterim Ürünün yedek parçaları hakkında daha fazla bilgi için bkz. Şekil 25, Şekil 26
Önlenmezse ölüm veya ağır yaralan- veya Şekil 27.
TEHLİKE: mayla sonuçlanacak tehlikeli bir du-
rum 1.6 AB UYGUNLUK BEYANI (TERCÜMESİ)
VIA VITTORIO LOMBARDI 14 - 36075 MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE
Önlenmezse ölüm veya ağır yaralan- VI - ITALIAADRESİNDE BULUNAN LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONA-
UYARI: mayla sonuçlanabilecek tehlikeli bir LE AŞAĞIDAKİ ÜRÜNÜN:
durum
ELEKTRİKLİ POMPA ÜNİTESİ (İLK SAYFADAKİ ETİKETE BA-
Önlenmezse hafif veya orta derecede KIN) ÜRÜNÜNÜN
DİKKAT: yaralanmayla sonuçlanabilecek tehli- AŞAĞIDAKİ AVRUPA DİREKTİFLERİNİN İLGİLİ HÜKÜMLERİNİ
keli bir durum KARŞILADIĞINI BEYAN EDER:
• Önlem alınmazsa istenmeyen du- • 2006/42/EC MAKİNE DİREKTİFİ (TEKNİK DOSYA, LOWARA
UYARI: SRL UNİPERSONALE ŞİRKETİNDEN ALINABİLİR).
rumlara yol açabilecek, olası bir
durum • 2004/108/EC ELEKTROMANYETİK UYGUNLUK
• Kişisel yaralanmaya yol açmayan • ECO-DESIGN 2009/125/CE, YÖNETMELİK (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~, 50
bir uygulama Hz, PN≥ 0,75 kW) IF IE2 ya da IE3 İŞARETLİ
VE AŞAĞIDAKİ TEKNİK STANDARTLARA UYGUNLUĞUNU BE-
YAN EDER:
Tehlike kategorileri
Tehlike kategorileri tehlike seviyelerine dahil olabilir veya belirli semboller • EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233
olağan tehlike seviye sembollerinin yerine geçebilir. • EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007
Elektrik riskleri aşağıdaki sembolle gösterilir: • EN 60034–30
AŞAĞIDAKİ AVRUPA DİREKTİFLERİNİN İLGİLİ HÜKÜMLERİNİ doğru eksenel pozisyonda tutmak için ayar pulu takılır. Nakliye sırasında ha-
KARŞILADIĞINI BEYAN EDER: sar oluşmasını önlemek için gövde de genişletilmiş polisitren ve plastik şerit-
lerle yerine sabitlenir.
• 2006/42/EC MAKİNE (TEKNİK DOSYA, LOWARA SRL UNİPER-
SONALE ŞİRKETİNDEN ALINABİLİR). Motoru sabitlemek için kullanılan cıvata ve somunlar dahil değildir. Motoru
VE AŞAĞIDAKİ TEKNİK STANDARTLARA UYGUNLUĞUNU BE- birleştirmek için daha fazla bilgi almak üzere bkz. Şekil 23.
YANINDA BULUNUR:
UYARI:
• EN 809 Ayrı olarak satın alınan ve birleştirilen pompa ile motor,
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 2006/42/EC nolu Makine direktifine göre yeni bir makine oluş-
turur. Bağlantıyı yapan kişi birleşen ünitenin tüm güvenliğinden
AMEDEO VALENTE sorumludur.
(MÜHENDİSLİK ve AR-GE MÜDÜRÜ)
rev.01 2.3 Depolama talimatları
Lowara, Xylem Inc. iştiraki olan Lowara srl Unipersonale'nin bir ticari mar-
kasıdır. Depolama konumu
Ürün üzeri örtülü bir şekilde ısı, kir ve titreşimin bulunmadığı kuru yerlerde
depolanmalıdır.
2 Taşıma ve Depolama
UYARI:
2.1 Sevkiyatı kontrol etme • Ürünü nem, ısı kaynakları ve mekanik hasarlara karşı koruyun.
• Ambalajlı ürünün üzerine ağır yükler koymayın.
1. Hasar belirtileri için ambalajın dışını kontrol edin.
2. Üründe gözle görülür hasar belirtileri varsa, teslimat tarihinden sonraki
sekiz gün içinde distribütörümüzü bilgilendirin. Ortam sıcaklığı
Ürün, -5°C ila +40°C (23°F ila 104°F) arasında ortam sıcaklığında saklanma-
Üniteyi ambalajdan çıkartma lıdır.
1. İlgili adımı uygulayın:
• Ünite karton kutuda ise, zımbaları çıkarın ve kutuyu açın.
• Ünite ahşap sandıkta ise, çivilere ve şeritlere dikkat etmek suretiyle
3 Ürün Açıklaması
kapağını açın.
2. Sabitleme vidalarını veya şeritleri ahşap tabandan çıkarın. 3.1 Pompa tasarımı
Bu, standart elektrikli motorlarla birleştirilebilen dikey, çok aşamalı, kendi-
Üniteyi kontrol etme liğinden beslenmeyen bir pompadır. Pompa aşağıdakileri pompalamak için
1. Ambalaj malzemelerini üründen ayırın. kullanılabilir:
Tüm ambalaj malzemesi yerel yönetmeliklere göre elden çıkartılmalıdır.
• Soğuk su
2. Herhangi bir parçanın hasarlı ve eksik olup olmadığını kontrol edin.
• Sıcak su
3. Uygulanabiliyorsa, tüm vidaları, cıvataları veya kemerleri sökerek ürünü
serbest bırakın. Pompanın su ile temas eden metal kısımları aşağıdakilerden yapılmıştır:
Emniyetiniz için çivileri veya kayışları kullanırken dikkatli olun.
Seriler Malzeme
4. Yolunda gitmeyen bir durum varsa Satış ve Hizmet Biriminizle bağlantı
kurun. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Paslanmaz çelik
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Paslanmaz çelik ve dökme demir
Tüm parçaların paslanmaz çelikten yapıldığı özel bir ver-
siyonu da mevcuttur.
2.2 Taşıma talimatları
Önlemler 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ve 22 SV pompaları, emme ve dağıtım portlarının konumuna
ve bağlantı flanşının şekline göre farklı versiyonlarda mevcuttur.
UYARI: Ürün, bir pompa ünitesi (pompa ve elektrik motoru) ya da sadece bir pompa
• Yürürlükteki kaza önleme yönetmeliklerine uyun. olarak sağlanabilir.
• Ezilme tehlikesi. Ünite ve bileşenleri ağır olabilir. Doğru kal-
dırma yöntemlerini kullanın emin olun ve her zaman çelik par- UYARI:
mak destekli ayakkabılar giyin. Motorsuz bir pompa satın aldıysanız, motorun pompa kuplajına uygun ol-
duğundan emin olun.
Doğru kaldırma ekipmanını seçmek için paket üzerinde belirtilen brüt ağır-
lığı kontrol edin.
Mekanik keçe
Konum ve sabitleme
Seriler Basic özellikleri
Ünite ya yatay ya da dikey olarak taşınabilir. Nakliye sırasında ürünün sağlam
bir şekilde sabitlendiğinden ve yuvarlanıp düşmeyeceğinden emin olun. 1, 3, 5 Nominal çap 12 mm (0,47 inç), dengesiz, sağa dönüş, K ver-
siyonu (EN 12756)
UYARI: 10, 15, 22 Nominal çap 16 mm (0,63 inç), dengesiz, sağa dönüş, K ver-
Tüm elektrikli pompa ünitesini taşımak için motorda vidalı halka siyonu (EN 12756)
cıvataları kullanmayın. ≥ 5 kW motor gücü ile dengelenmiş
33, 46, 66, Nominal çap 22 mm (0.86 inç), dengeli, sağa dönüş, K versi-
• Motorun gücü 0,25 kW ile 4,0 kW arasındaysa motoru çevreleyen kayışlar 92, 125 yonu (EN 12756)
kullanın.
• Motorun gücü 5,5 kW ile 55,0 kW arasındaysa, motor ile pompa arasında Kullanım amacı
bulunan eşleşme bölgesinin yanındaki iki flanşa (varsa halka cıvata) bağla-
nan halat ya da kayışları kullanın. Pompa şunlar için uygundur:
• Motora vidalanan halka cıvatalar belli bir motoru kaldırmak için, ya da • Kamusal ve endüstriyel su dağıtım sistemleri
ağırlığın dengelenmemiş olması durumunda, yatay bir deplasmandan baş- • Sulama (örneğin tarım ve spor tesisleri)
lamak suretiyle dikey olarak üniteyi kısmen kaldırmak için kullanılabilir.
• Sadece pompa ünitesini taşımak için, motor adaptörüne sıkıca bağlı olan • Su arıtma
kayışları kullanın. • Kazan besleme
Üniteyi güvenli bir şekilde kullanma konusundaki talimatlar için bkz. Şekil 4. • Yıkama tesisleri
• Soğutma (örneğin havalandırma ve soğutma)
Motorsuz ünite • İtfaiye uygulamaları
Ünite motorla birlikte verilmemişse, kalibre edilen çatal şeklindeki ayar pulu
adaptör ile transmisyon kuplajı arasına zaten takılmıştır. Pervane kümesini
IMQ, TUV, IRAM veya diğer işaretler (sadece elektrikli pompa için)
Aksi belirtilmedikçe, elektrik güvenliği onay işareti olan ürünler için, onay
özellikle elektrik pompasına işaret eder.
4 Montaj
Önlemler
UYARI:
Aşağıdaki formül, eksenel kilitli tahrik sonu rulmanı olan motorlar için ge- • Yürürlükteki kaza önleme yönetmeliklerine uyun.
çerlidir (e-SV için Lowara'nın standart motorları gibi), bkz. Şekil 6. Diğer du-
rumlar için lütfen Satış ve Servis Bölümüne başvurun. • Uygun ekipmanlar ve korumalar kullanın.
• Montaj yerini, su ve güç bağlantılarını seçerken her zaman yü-
P1maks + Pmaks≤ PN rürlükteki yerel ve/veya ulusal yönetmeliklere, yasa ve kuralla-
ra başvurun.
P1maks Maksimum giriş basıncı
Pmaks Pompanın ürettiği maksimum basınç UYARI:
PN Maksimum çalışma basıncı • Tüm bağlantıların kalifiye bir elektrik teknisyeni tarafından ve
yürürlükteki yönetmeliklere uygun olarak yapıldığından emin
olun.
• Birim üzerinde çalışmaya başlamadan önce birimin ve kuman-
da panelinin güç beslemesinden yalıtıldığından ve çalışmaya-
cağından emin olun. Bu kumanda devresi için de geçerlidir.
101 EN 60335-2-41, ev kullanımı ve benzeri uygulamalar için elektrik güvenliği olan pompaların normudur
102 Su için maksimum 100ºC
4.1 Topraklama Performans hakkında daha fazla bilgi için bkz. Şekil 5.
UYARI: UYARI:
• Diğer elektrik bağlantılarını yapmadan önce her zaman harici Kavitasyona yol açabileceği ve pompaya zarar verebileceği için pompa emme
koruma kondüktörünü toprak terminaline bağlayın. kapasitesi aşmayın.
• Tüm elektrikli ekipmanları topraklamanız zorunludur. Bu,
pompa ekipmanı, sürücü ve herhangi bir izleme ekipmanı için
geçerlidir. Doğru bağlanmış olduğunu doğrulamak için toprak 4.2.2 Boru tesisatı gereklilikleri
ucunu test edin.
• Motor kablosu yanlışlıkla sarsıntıyla gevşerse, terminalinde Önlemler
gevşeyecek son iletken toprak kablosu olmalıdır. Toprak ilet-
keninin faz iletkenlerinden daha uzun olmasını sağlayın. Bu, UYARI:
motor kablosunun her iki ucu için geçerlidir.
• Ölümcül çarpmaya karşı ilave koruma ekleyin. Yüksek hassasi- • Pompanın maksimum çalışma basıncına uygun borular kulla-
yetli bir fark svici (30 mA) takın [kalıntı akım aygıtı RCD]. nın. Aksi halde sistem delinebilir ve yaralanma riski oluşabilir.
• Tüm bağlantıların kalifiye bir elektrik teknisyeni tarafından ve
yürürlükteki yönetmeliklere uygun olarak yapıldığından emin
4.2 Tesis gereklilikleri olun.
Aşağıdaki gerekliliklerin karşılandığından emin olun: 3. Pompanın her iki tarafındaki pompa ve boru flanşlarını hizalayın.
Cıvataların hizalamasını kontrol edin.
• Kontrol paneli, motoru aşırı yüke ve kısa devreye karşı korumalıdır. 4. Boruları cıvatalarla pompaya sabitleyin.
• Doğru aşırı yük korumasını takın (termal röle veya motor koruyucu). Boruyu yerine zorla itmeyin.
Pompa Türü Koruma 5. Pompayı cıvatalarla beton kaideye veya metal yapıya sabit bir şekilde
Tek fazlı standart elektrikli pompa • Dahili otomatik sıfırlamalı ter- tutturun.
≤ 1,5 kW mal amperometrik koruma (mo-
tor koruyucu) 4.4.2 Elektrik montajı
• Kısa devre koruması (montaj ya-
pan tarafından sağlanmalıdır)103 1. Bağlantıyı kolaylaştırmak için, bağlantı için en uygun konumu elde edi-
lecek şekilde motor çevrilebilir:
Üç fazlı elektrikli pompa ve diğer • Termal koruma (montaj yapan
tek fazlı pompalar104 tarafından sağlanmalıdır) a) Motoru pompaya bağlayan dört cıvatayı çıkarın.
• Kısa devre koruması (montaj ya- b) Motoru istenilen yöne çevirin. Motor şaftı ile pompa şaftı arasın-
pan tarafından sağlanmalıdır) daki kuplajı çıkarmayın.
c) Dört cıvatayı takın ve sıkın.
• Kontrol paneli, bir basınç şalteri, şamandıra svici, problar ya da diğer uy- 2. Terminal kutu kapağının vidalarını çıkarın.
gun aygıtların bağlanabileceği kuru çalışan bir koruma sistemi ile donatıl-
malıdır. 3. Güç kablolarını mevcut kablo şemasına göre bağlayın ve sıkın.
Kablo şemaları için, bkz. Şekil 14. Şekiller, terminal kutu kapağının ar-
• Pompanın emiş tarafında aşağıdaki aygıtların kullanılması önerilir: kasında da mevcuttur.
• Su bir su sisteminden pompalandığında, bir basınç anahtarı kullanın.
• Su bir depolama tankından veya rezervuarından pompalandığında, bir a) Toprak ucunu bağlayın.
şamandıra svici veya probları kullanın. Toprak ucunun faz uçlarından daha uzun olmasını sağlayın.
• Termal röleler kullanıldığında, faz hatasına hassas röleler önerilir. b) Faz uçlarını bağlayın.
4. Terminal kutusu kapağını değiştirin.
Motor kontrol listesi
UYARI:
UYARI: Kablo kaydırmaya ve terminal kutusuna giren neme karşı koruma için
kablo kovanlarını dikkatlice sıkın.
• Standart dışı bir motor kullanıldığında bir koruma cihazının
sağlanıp sağlanmadığından emin olmak için çalıştırma talimat- 5. Motor, otomatik sıfırlama termal koruması ile donatılmış ise aşağıdaki
larını okuyun. listeye göre aşırı yük korumasını ayarlayın.
• Motor otomatik termik koruyucularla donatılmışsa, aşırı yük- • Motor, tam yük ile kullanılırsa, değeri elektrikli pompanın nominal
lemeyle bağlantılı olarak beklenmeyen çalışmaya başlama du- akım değerine ayarlayın (veri plakası)
rumlarının bilincinde olun. Bu tip motorları yangın söndürme • Motor, kısmi yük ile kullanılırsa, değeri çalışma akımına ayarlayın
uygulamalarında ve sprinkler sistemlerinde kullanmayın. (örneğin, bir akım cihazı ile ölçülmüş).
• Pompada yıldız-delta başlatma sistemi varsa, termal röleyi nominal
akımın veya çalışma akımının %58'ine ayarlayın (yalnız üç fazlı mo-
UYARI: torlarda).
• Mil uzantısında yarım boyutlu anahtarı dinamik olarak dengelenmiş (IEC
60034-14) ve normal titreşim değerli (N) motorlar kullanın.
• Şebeke voltajı ve frekansı veri plakasındaki spesifikasyonlara uygun olma- 5 Devreye alma, Başlatma,
lıdır.
• Yalnızca boyutu ve gücü Avrupa standartlarına uygun olan tek fazlı veya
Çalıştırma ve Kapatma
üç fazlı motorlar kullanın.
Önlemler
Genel olarak, motorlar aşağıdaki şebeke voltajlarında çalışabilir:
UYARI:
Frekans Hz Faz ~ % UN [V] ± • Boşaltılan sıvının yaralanmalara veya maddi hasara yol açması-
50 1 220 – 240 ± 6 nı önleyin.
3 230/400 ± 10 • Motor koruyucuları motorun beklenmedik şekilde çalışmasına
sebep olabilir. Bu ciddi yaralanmalara yol açabilir.
400/690 ± 10 • Asla pompayı kaplin koruması doğru bir şekilde takılmamış
60 1 220 – 230 ± 6 olarak çalıştırmayın.
3 220/380 ± 5
380/660 ± 10 DİKKAT:
• Çalışma sırasında pompa ve motorun dış yüzeyleri 40ºC'yi
Tek fazlı modeller için 3 tel (2+şase/toprak) ve üç fazlı modeller için de 4 tel (104ºF) aşabilir. Koruyucu giysi olmadan vücudunuzun her-
(2+şase/toprak) kurallarına göre kablo kullanın. hangi bir yeriyle dokunmayın.
Motorlu elektrikli pompa: • Pompa yakınında alev alan hiçbir materyal olmamasını sağla-
yın.
Kablo kovanı
mm olarak dış kablo çapı aralığı
Tip
M20 x 1,5, 6–12 M25 x 1,5, 13–18 M32 x 1,5, 18–25
SM X – –
PLM X X X
LLM X X X
Pompa tabanı ve ankraj delikleri hakkında bilgi için bkz. Şekil 13.
1. Pompayı beton yapı ya da eşdeğer metal yapı üzerine koyun.
Titreşimlerin iletimi rahatsız edici olursa, pompa ve kaide arasına titre-
şim hafifletme destekleri koyun.
2. Portları kapatan tapaları çıkarın.
103 aM (motor çalıştırma) sigortaları ya da C eğrili manyeto-termal sviç ve Icn ≥ 4,5 kA ya da diğer eşdeğer aygıt.
104 Çalışma sınıfı 10A olan aşırı yük termal rölesi + sigortalar aM (motor çalıştırma) ya da çalışma sınıfı 10A olan motor koruması manyeto-termal svici.
2.
daki okları bulun.
Motoru çalıştırın.
7 Sorun giderme
3. Kuplaj muhafazası veya motor fanı kapağı yoluyla dönüş yönünü hızlı
bir şekilde kontrol edin. 7.1 Kullanıcılar için sorun giderme
4. Motoru durdurun. Ana şalter açılır, fakat elektrikli pompa çalışmaz.
5. Dönüş yönü hatalıysa, aşağıdakileri uygulayın:
a) Güç kaynağını kapatın. Sebep Çözüm
b) Motorun terminal bloğunda veya elektrik kontrol panelinde, besle-
me kablolarından ikisinin veya üçünün konumunu değiştirin. Pompadaki termal koruyucu Pompa soğuyana kadar bekleyin. Termal
Kablo şemaları için, bkz. Şekil 14. (varsa) tetiklenmiş. koruyucu otomatik sıfırlanacaktır.
c) Dönüş yönünü tekrar kontrol edin.
Sebep Çözüm
Aşağıdaki bileşenlerin birinde ya da ikisinde Arızalı bileşeni tamir edin ve-
bir kaçak var: ya değiştirin.
• Emiş borusu
• Ayak valfı ya da kontrol valfı
Bir membran delinmiştir veya basınç tankın- Basınç tankı kılavuzundaki il-
da ön hava yükü yoktur. gili talimatlara bakın.
Sebep Çözüm
Pompa kavitasyonu Pompanın akış yönündeki açma kapama valfini kıs-
men kapatarak gerekli akış hızını azaltın. Sorun de-
vam ederse, pompanın çalışma koşullarını (yükseklik
farkı, akışı direnci, sıvı sıcaklığı) kontrol edin.
Motor yatakları yıp- Satış ve Servis Bölümüne başvurun.
ranmıştır.
Pompa içinde yaban- Satış ve Servis Bölümüne başvurun.
cı cisimler var.
Diğer durumlar için lütfen Satış ve Servis Bölümüne başvurun.
ОТВЕЧАЕТ ТРЕБОВАНИЯМ СООТВЕТСТВУЮЩИХ ПОЛОЖЕ- Проверьте вес брутто, указанный на упаковке, чтобы выбрать соответ-
НИЙ СЛЕДУЮЩИХ ЕВРОПЕЙСКИХ ДИРЕКТИВ: ствующее подъемное оборудование.
• ДИРЕКТИВА ПО МАШИННОМУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЮ: 2006/42/
EC (ТЕХНИЧЕСКУЮ ДОКУМЕНТАЦИЮ МОЖНО ПОЛУ- Положение и закрепление
ЧИТЬ В КОМПАНИИ LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE) Допускается транспортировка устройства как в горизонтальном, так и
• ДИРЕКТИВА ПО ЭЛЕКТРОМАГНИТНОЙ СОВМЕСТИМО- вертикальном положении. Убедитесь в том, что во время транспорти-
СТИ: 2004/108/EC ровки устройство надежно закреплено, чтобы предотвратить его сме-
щение или падение.
• ДИРЕКТИВА ДЛЯ УСТРОЙСТВ, ИСПОЛЬЗУЮЩИХ ЭЛЕК-
ТРОЭНЕРГИЮ 2009/125/EС, СТАНДАРТ (EC) 640/2009 (3 ~, 50
ГЦ, PN≥ 0,75 кВТ) IF IE2 ИЛИ IE3 МАРКИРОВАНО ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
И СЛЕДУЮЩИМ ТЕХНИЧЕСКИМ СТАНДАРТАМ: Не используйте болты с проушиной, привинченные к дви-
гателю для манипуляций с целым блоком электрического
• EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233 насоса.
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007.
• EN 60034–30 • Используйте ремни вокруг двигателя, если мощность двигателя в
диапазоне от 0,25 кВт до 4,0 кВт.
НАСОС (СМ. МАРКИРОВКУ НА ПЕРВОЙ СТРАНИЦЕ) • Используйте веревки или ремни, присоединенные к двум фланцам
(болтам с проушинами, если есть), расположенные возле зоны сое-
ОТВЕЧАЕТ ТРЕБОВАНИЯМ СООТВЕТСТВУЮЩИХ ПОЛОЖЕ- динения между двигателем и насосом, если мощность двигателя от
НИЙ СЛЕДУЮЩИХ ЕВРОПЕЙСКИХ ДИРЕКТИВ: 5,5 кВт до 55,0 кВт.
• Болты с проушинами, привинченные на двигателе, можно исполь-
• ДИРЕКТИВА ПО МАШИННОМУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЮ: 2006/42/ зовать исключительно для манипуляций с двигателем или, в случае
EC (ТЕХНИЧЕСКУЮ ДОКУМЕНТАЦИЮ МОЖНО ПОЛУ- несбалансированного распределения веса, для частичного поднима-
ЧИТЬ В КОМПАНИИ LOWARA SRL UNIPERSONALE) ния блока вертикально, начиная с горизонтального смещения.
И СЛЕДУЮЩИМ ТЕХНИЧЕСКИМ СТАНДАРТАМ: • Чтобы переместить только блок насоса, используйте ремни, прочно
• EN 809 присоединенные с крепежной скобой двигателя.
Подробную информацию о безопасном креплении устройства см. в
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 г. рисунок 4.
AMEDEO VALENTE
Блок без двигателя
(ДИРЕКТОР ИНЖИНИРИНГА И ИССЛЕ- Если блок поставляется без двигателя, откалиброванная вилкообразная
ДОВАНИЙ И РАЗВИТИЯ) регулировочная прокладка уже вставлена между адаптером и муфтой
трансмиссии. Регулировочная прокладка вставлена, чтобы сохранить
ред. 01 пакет крыльчатки в правильном осевом положении. Чтобы предотвра-
тить повреждения во время транспортировки, вал также удерживается
Lowara является торговой маркой компании Lowara srl Unipersonale, до- на месте с помощью ремней из полистирола и пластика.
черней компании Xylem Inc.
Болт и гайки, используемые для крепления двигателя, в комплект не
входят. Информацию о соединении двигателя см. в рисунок 23.
2 Транспортирование и
хранение ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
Если насос и двигатель приобретены отдельно, а затем сое-
динены вместе, они образуют новую машину, согласно Ди-
2.1 Осмотр при получении груза рективе о машинном оборудовании 2006/42/EC. Лицо, осу-
ществляющее соединение, несет ответственность за все во-
1. Проверьте внешнюю сторону упаковки на наличие признаков просы техники безопасности комбинированного устрой-
возможных повреждений. ства.
2. Сообщите нашему распространителю в течение восьми дней с
момента доставки, если на изделии присутствуют заметные при-
знаки повреждений. 2.3 Указания по хранению
Распаковывание изделия
1. Выполните соответствующие шаги: Место хранения
• Если агрегат упакован в картонную коробку, уберите скобы и Изделие должно храниться в закрытом и сухом месте, защищенном от
откройте коробку. тепла, загрязнений и вибраций.
• Если агрегат упакован в деревянный ящик, откройте крышку,
обращая внимание на гвозди и ремни. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ:
2. Снимите крепежные винты или ремни с деревянного основания. • Изделие следует защищать от воздействия влажности, теплового
воздействия и механических повреждений.
Осмотр изделия • Ставить тяжелые предметы на изделие в упаковке запрещено.
1. Распакуйте изделие.
Утилизируйте все упаковочные материалы в соответствии с мест- Температура окружающей среды
ными нормами.
2. Осмотрите изделие на предмет возможных повреждений. Про- Хранить изделие при температуре окружающей среды от -5°C до
верьте комплектность по комплектовочной ведомости. +40°C (от 23°F до 104°F).
3. Если изделие закреплено винтами, болтами или ремнями, осво-
бодите его от них.
Из соображений безопасности следует соблюдать осторожность
3 Описание изделия
при работе с гвоздями и ремнями.
4. В случае неисправности обратитесь в отдел продаж и обслужива- 3.1 Конструкция насоса
ния.
Насос является вертикальным, многоступенчатым, не самозаливным на-
сосом, который можно соединять со стандартными электрическими
двигателями. Насос можно использовать для нагнетания:
2.2 Рекомендации по транспортированию • холодной воды;
Меры предосторожности • теплой воды.
Металлические детали насоса, которые контактируют с водой, изгото-
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: влены из следующих материалов.
• Соблюдайте действующие нормы по предотвращению Серия Материал
несчастных случаев на производстве.
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Нержавеющая сталь
• Опасность повреждений. Изделие и детали могут оказать-
ся достаточно тяжелыми. Используйте подходящие спо- 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Нержавеющая сталь и чугун
собы подъема и надевайте ботинки со стальным носком.
Механическое уплотнение
Серия Основные характеристики
1, 3, 5 Номинальный диаметр 12 мм (0,47 дюйма), несбалансиро-
ванный, правостороннее вращение, версия K (EN 12756)
10, 15, 22 Номинальный диаметр 16 мм (0,63 дюйма), несбалансиро-
ванный, правостороннее вращение, версия K (EN 12756)
Сбалансированный с мощностью двигателя ≥ 5 кВт,
33, 46, 66, Номинальный диаметр 22 мм (0,86 дюйма), сбалансирован- Следующая формула действительна для двигателей, оснащенных под-
92, 125 ный, правостороннее вращение, версия K (EN 12756) шипниками конца ведущего вала, блокированными по оси (например,
стандартные двигатели Lowara для e-SV), см. рисунок 6. В прочих ситуа-
Области применения циях обращайтесь в отдел продаж и обслуживания.
Насос подходит для: P1max + Pmax≤ PN
• систем общественного и промышленного водоснабжения;
• ирригации (например, в сельскохозяйственных и спортивных ком- P1max Максимальное входное давление
плексах); Pmax Максимальное давление, создаваемое насосом
• водоочистки;
• питания бойлеров; PN Максимальное рабочее давление
• моечных установок;
• охлаждения (например, для кондиционирования воздуха и замора- Диапазон температуры жидкости
живания);
• систем пожаротушения. Версия Прокладка Минималь- Максималь- Максималь-
ный ный105 ный
Ненадлежащее использование
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
При неправильном использовании насоса может возни-
кнуть опасная ситуация с последующими травмами и повре-
ждением имущества. Стандарт Этилен-про- -30°C (-22°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
пилен
(EPDM)
Ненадлежащее использование изделия приводит к аннулированию га- Специаль- FPM (FKM - -10°C (14°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C106
рантии. ный фторсодер- (248°F)
Примеры применения не по назначению: жащий эла-
стомер)
• Жидкости, не совместимые с материалами, из которых состоит на- Специаль- Тефлон 0°C (32°F) 90°C (194°F) 120°C (248°F)
сос ный
• Опасные жидкости (токсические, взрывоопасные, огнеопасные или
коррозийные жидкости)
• Пищевые жидкости кроме воды (например, вино или молоко) Относительно специальных требований обратитесь в отдел продаж и
Примеры неправильной установки: обслуживания.
• Опасные места (например, взрывоопасная или коррозионная атмо- Максимальное количество пусков в час
сфера). В данной таблице показано количество пусков, разрешенных в час для
• Место с высокой температурой воздуха или плохой вентиляцией. двигателей, поставляемых компанией Lowara:
• Открытые места без защиты от дождя или низких температур.
kW 0,25-3,0 4,00-7,5 11,0-15, 18,5-22, 30,0-37, 45,0 55,0
ОПАСНОСТЬ: 0 0 0 0 0
Не используйте насос для огнеопасных и/или взрывоопас- Пусков 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
ных жидкостей. в час
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ:
• Не используйте насос для жидкостей, содержащих абразивные, твер- При использовании двигателя, который отличается от стандартного
дые или волокнистые вещества. двигателя, входящего в комплект поставки электронасоса, обратитесь к
• Не используйте насос при скорости потока вне пределов, указанных соответствующим инструкциям, где приведено допустимое количество
на табличке технических данных. запусков в час.
Специальное применение
Обращайтесь в отдел продаж и обслуживания в следующих случаях: 3.3 Табличка технических данных
• если значение плотности и/или вязкости прокачиваемой жидкости Табличка технических данных – это металлическая этикетка, располо-
превышает значение воды (например, вода с гликолем), поскольку женная на адаптере. Она содержит информацию о спецификациях из-
может понадобиться более мощный двигатель; делия. Для получения дополнительной информации см. рисунок 1.
• если прокачиваемая жидкость обработана химическим способом
(например, смягчена, деионизирована, деминерализована и т. д.);
105 EN 60335-2-41 – это стандарт о насосах, связанных с электрической безопасностью в домашнем хозяйстве и для подобных целей
106 Максимум 100ºC для воды
Табличка технических данных содержит информацию о материале • По возможности расположите насос немного выше уровня пола.
прокладки и механического уплотнения. Для получения информации • Температура окружающей среды должна составлять от 0°C (+32°F)
о кодах на табличке технических данных см. рисунок 2. до +40°C (+104°F).
• Относительная влажность окружающего воздуха должна быть мень-
Система условных обозначений изделия ше 50% при +40°C (+104°F).
См. в рисунок 3 объяснения идентификационного кода для насоса и • Обращайтесь в отдел продаж и обслуживания в следующих случаях.
пример.
• Относительная влажность воздуха не соответствует указаниям.
Маркировка WRAS - Требования к установке и примечания • Комнатная температура превышает +40°C (+104°F).
(только для рынка Великобритании) • Устройство расположено на высоте более 1000 м (3000 футов)
Этикетка WRAS на насосе обозначает, что изделие одобрено организа- над уровнем моря. Может понадобиться сокращение производи-
цией по нормативному регулированию вопросов водных ресурсов. тельности двигателя или замена более мощным двигателем.
Данное изделие подходит для использования с холодной питьевой во- Информацию о том, на сколько сокращать производительность двига-
дой для потребления людьми. Подробную информацию см. в теля см. в таблица 8.
IRN R001 и R420 руководства WRAS "Water Fittings and Materials" ("Ин-
вентарь и материалы для водоснабжения") (www.wras.co.uk). Положение насоса и свободные промежутки
IMQ или TUV или IRAM или другие отметки (только для ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ:
электрического насоса) Для горизонтального монтажа насоса требуется специальная модифи-
Если не указано иначе, для изделия с отметкой одобрения электриче- кация.
ской безопасности, одобрение касается исключительно электрического
насоса.
Обеспечьте соответствующее освещение и свободные промежутки во-
круг насоса. Убедитесь в том, что существует простой доступ к насосу
4 Установка для установки и техобслуживания.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Сальник
Панель управления должна соответствовать техническим характеристи- Диапазон внешнего диаметра кабеля в миллиметрах
Тип
кам электрического насоса. (неправильные сочетания не гарантируют
защиту двигателя); M20 x 1,5; 6–12 M25 x 1,5; 13–18 M32 x 1,5; 18–25
SM X – –
107 плавкие предохранители aM (запуск двигателя), или магнето-термовыключатель с кривой C и Icn ≥ 4,5 кA или другими аналогичными устройствами.
108 Термическое реле перегрузки с классом работы 10А + плавкие предохранители аМ (запуск двигателя) или магнето-термический переключатель защиты двига-
теля с классом работы 10А.
Сальник
Диапазон внешнего диаметра кабеля в миллиметрах ОСТОРОЖНО:
Тип
• Внешние поверхности насоса и двигателя могут нагре-
M20 x 1,5; 6–12 M25 x 1,5; 13–18 M32 x 1,5; 18–25 ваться выше 40ºC (104ºF) во время эксплуатации. Не при-
PLM X X X касайтесь ни какими частями тела без защитного снаря-
LLM X X X жения.
• Не помещайте рядом с насосом горючие материалы.
4.4 Установка насоса
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ:
• Эксплуатация насоса при недостижении минимального номиналь-
ного расхода, на сухом ходу или без заливки строго запрещена.
4.4.1 Механическая установка
• Никогда не эксплуатируйте насос с закрытым клапаном подачи дол-
ьше нескольких секунд.
Информацию об основании насоса и анкерных отверстиях см. в рисунок • Эксплуатация насоса при перекрытом впускном клапане строго за-
13. прещена.
1. Установите насос на бетонный фундамент или аналогичную ме- • Во избежание перегрева внутренних элементов насоса при эксплуа-
таллическую конструкцию. тации установки поддерживайте постоянный минимальный поток
Если передача вибрации может помешать, обеспечьте опоры, аб- воды. Если это невозможно, рекомендуется установка обводной ли-
сорбирующие вибрацию, между насосом и фундаментом. нии или обратного трубопровода. См. минимальные значения но-
минального потока, приведенные в Приложении.
2. Снимите пробки с портов.
• Не подвергайте неработающий насос воздействию низких темпера-
3. Выровняйте насос и фланцы трубопровода с обеих сторон насо- тур. Сливайте всю жидкость, находящуюся в насосе. В противном
са. случае жидкость может замерзнуть и повредить насос.
Проверьте выравнивание болтов.
• Сумма давления на стороне всасывания (водопроводная магистраль,
4. Прикрепите трубопровод болтами к насосу. напорный резервуар) и максимальное давление, обеспечиваемое на-
Не устанавливайте трубопровод с усилием. сосом, не должны превышать максимальное допустимое для насоса
5. Надежно закрепите насос болтами на бетонном фундаменте или рабочее давление (номинальное давление PN).
металлической конструкции. • Прекратите эксплуатацию насоса в случае возникновения кавита-
ции. Кавитация может привести к повреждению внутренних элемен-
4.4.2 Электрооборудование тов.
1. Чтобы упростить соединение, двигатель можно вращать, чтобы • Если нагнетается горячая вода, для предотвращения кавитации необ-
получить самое удобное положение для подключения. ходимо поддерживать постоянное минимальное давление со сторо-
ны всасывания.
a) Снимите четыре болта, крепящие двигатель к насосу.
b) Поверните двигатель в необходимое положение. Не снимай-
те муфту между валом двигателя и валом насоса. Уровень шума
c) Установите на место четыре винта и затяните их. Информацию об уровнях шума, выделяемых блоками, оборудованны-
2. Снимите винты крышки клеммной коробки. ми двигателями, поставляемыми Lowara см. в таблица 10.
3. Соедините и закрепите силовые кабели в соответствии с электри-
ческой схемой. 5.1 Выполните заливку насоса
Электрические схемы см. в рисунок 14. Схемы также доступны сза-
ди крышки клеммной коробки. Информацию о установке пробки см. в рисунок 15.
a) Подключите провод заземления.
Убедитесь в том, что длина заземляющего провода больше, Установки с уровнем жидкости над насосом (напор)
чем длина фазных проводов.
b) Присоедините провода фазы. Иллюстрации деталей насоса см. рисунок 16.
4. Установите на место крышку распределительной коробки.
1. Закройте двухпозиционный клапан после насоса. Выберите соот-
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: ветствующие этапы:
Аккуратно затяните сальники кабелей, чтобы гарантировать за- 2. Серия 1, 3, 5:
щиту от проскальзывания кабеля и попадания влаги в распредели- a) Отвинтите штифт сливной пробки (2).
тельную коробку. b) Извлеките пробку заливки и вентиляции (1) и откройте двух-
позиционный клапан выше по линии, пока вода не потечет
5. Если двигатель не оборудован автоматическим сбросом термоза- из отверстия.
щиты, тогда отрегулируйте защиту от перегрузки в соответствии
со списком ниже. c) Затяните винт сливного отверстия (2).
d) Установите на место пробку заливки и вентиляции (1).
• Если двигатель используется с полной нагрузкой, установите
значение на номинальное значение тока электрического двига- 3. Серия 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
теля (табличка технических данных) a) Снимите пробку заливки и вентиляции (1) и откройте двух-
• Если двигатель используется с частичной нагрузкой, установи- позиционный клапан выше по линии, пока пода не начнет
те значение на рабочий ток (например, измеряемое специаль- вытекать из отверстия.
ным пинцетом). b) Закройте пробку заливки и вентиляции (1). Заливную пробку
• Если у насоса пусковая система звезда-треугольник, отрегули- (3) можно использовать вместо (1).
руйте термореле на 58% номинального или рабочего тока
(только для трехфазных двигателей). Установка с уровнем жидкости ниже насоса (высота всасывания)
3. Серия 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125: • См. инструкции о замене двигателя в рисунок 23.
a) Снимите пробку заливки и вентиляции (1) и используйте во- Если откалиброванная вилкообразная регулировочная прокладка
ронку (4) для заполнения насоса, пока вода не начнет выте- отсутствует, используйте регулировочную прокладку 5 ± 0,1 мм
кать из отверстия. (0,2 ± 0,004 дюйма).
b) Установите на место пробку заливки и вентиляции (1). Залив-
ную пробку (3) можно использовать вместо (1).
6.4 Замена механического уплотнения
5.2 Проверить направление вращения
Серия Инструкция
(трехфазный двигатель)
1, 3, 5 Обратитесь в отдел продаж и обслуживания.
Перед запуском выполнить следующие действия. 10, 15, 22: ≤ 4 Обратитесь в отдел продаж и обслуживания.
кВт
1. Найдите стрелки на адаптере или крышке вентилятора двигателя,
чтобы определить правильное направление вращения. 10, 15, 22: > 4 См. инструкции в рисунок 24. Для чистки и смазки
2. Включите двигатель. кВт используйте спирт.
3. Быстро проверьте направление вращения через кожух муфты или 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 См. инструкции в рисунок 24. Для чистки и смазки
крышку вентилятора двигателя. используйте спирт.
4. Отключите двигатель.
5. Если направление вращения неправильное, выполните следую-
щее:
a) Обесточьте устройство.
7 Устранение неисправностей
b) В клеммной коробке двигателя или в электрической панели
управления поменяйте положение двух или трех проводов 7.1 Поиск и устранение неисправностей
силового кабеля. для пользователей
Электрические схемы см. в рисунок 14.
c) Снова проверьте направление вращения. Главный выключатель включен, но электрический насос не за-
пускается.
5.3 Пуск насоса Причина Устранение
Сработала термозащита Подождите, пока насос остынет.
Перед запуском насоса убедитесь в том, что: встроенная в насос (если есть). Термозащита будет сброшена авто-
• насос правильно подключен к электропитанию, матически.
• насос правильно наполнен в соответствии с инструкциями в Выпол- Сработало предохранительное Проверить уровень воды в баке или
ните заливку насоса, устройство от сухого хода. давление магистрали.
• двухпозиционный клапан, расположенный после насоса, закрыт.
1. Включите двигатель. Электрический насос запускается, но с различным интервалом после
2. Плавно откройте двухпозиционный клапан на стороне выпуска этого срабатывает термическая защита.
насоса.
При ожидаемых рабочих условиях насос должен работать ровно Причина Устранение
и тихо. В противном случае см. Устранение неисправностей. Присутствуют инородные тела Обратитесь в отдел продаж и об-
(твердые или волокнистые мате- служивания.
риалы) внутри насоса, которые
6 Техническое обслуживание засорили крыльчатку.
Насос перегружен, поскольку он Проверить фактические требова-
Меры предосторожности качает более плотную или вяз- ния на основе характеристик качае-
кую жидкость. мой насосом жидкости, а затем об-
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: ратиться в отдел продаж и обслужи-
Перед установкой или техобслуживанием насоса следует от- вания.
ключить и заблокировать подачу электропитания.
Насос работает, но подает слишком мало воды или вообще не подает
воду.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
Причина Устранение
• К техническому обслуживанию и сервисному обслужива-
нию следует допускать только квалифицированный Насос засорен. Обратитесь в отдел продаж и обслуживания.
опытный персонал.
• Соблюдайте действующие нормы по предотвращению Поиск и устранение неисправностей в таблицах ниже только для мон-
несчастных случаев на производстве. тажников.
• Следует использовать подходящее оборудование и за-
щитные устройства. 7.2 Главный переключатель включен, но
• Убедитесь в том, что сливаемая жидкость не может вы- электрический насос не запускается
звать повреждений и травм.
Причина Устранение
7.11 Насос вибрирует и создает сильный
Короткое замыкание электрической Проверьте электрическую си- шум
системы. стему.
1 Вступ і техніка безпеки Це приклади інших категорій, які можуть трапитися. Вони діляться на
звичайні рівні небезпеки і можуть використовувати додаткові символи:
ТА НАСТУПНИМ ТЕХНІЧНИМ СТАНДАРТАМ • Використовуйте ремені навколо двигуна, якщо потужність двигунів у
діапазоні від 0,25 кВт до 4,0 кВт.
• EN 809, EN 60335-1, EN 60335-2-41, EN 62233 • Використовуйте мотузки або ремені, приєднані до двох фланців
• EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007 (болтів з вушками, якщо є), розташовані біля зони з'єднання між дви-
• EN 60034–30 гуном та насосом, якщо потужність двигуна від 5,5 кВт до 55,0 кВт.
• Болти з вушками, пригвинчені на двигун, можна використовувати
НАСОС (ДИВ. ЕТИКЕТКУ НА ПЕРШІЙ СТОРІНЦІ) винятково для маніпуляцій з двигуном або, у випадку незбалансова-
ного розподілення ваги, для часткового піднімання блоку вертикаль-
ВІДПОВІДАЄ ПОЛОЖЕННЯМ НАСТУПНИХ ЄВРОПЕЙСЬКИХ но, починаючи з горизонтального суміщення.
ДИРЕКТИВ: • Щоб перемістити лише блок насоса, використовуйте ремені, міцно
приєднані до кріпильної скоби двигуна.
• ДИРЕКТИВА ПРО МАШИНИ: 2006/42/EC (ТЕХНІЧНУ ДОКУ-
МЕНТАЦІЮ МОЖНА ОТРИМАТИ В КОМПАНІЇ LOWARA SRL Докладну інформацію щодо безпечного кріплення агрегату див. в Рису-
UNIPERSONALE). нок 4.
І НАСТУПНИМ ТЕХНІЧНИМ СТАНДАРТАМ:
Блок без двигуна
• EN 809 Якщо блок постачається без двигуна, відрегульована вилкоподібна ре-
MONTECCHIO MAGGIORE, 16.06.2011 гулювальна прокладка вже вставлена між адаптером та муфтою транс-
місії. Регулювальна прокладка вставлена, щоб зберегти робоче колесо в
AMEDEO VALENTE правильному осьовому положенні. Щоб запобігти ушкодженням під
час транспортування, вал також утримується на місці за допомогою ре-
(КЕРІВНИК ТЕХНІЧНОГО ТА ДОСЛІД- менів з полістиролу та пластику.
НО-КОНСТРУКТОРСЬКОГО ВІДДІЛУ)
Гвинт і гайки, що використовуються для кріплення двигуна, в комплект
ред.01 не входять. Інформацію щодо сполучення двигуна див. в Рисунок 23.
ПРИМІТКА:
Розпакування виробу
1. Виконайте відповідні кроки: • Захищайте виріб від вологи, джерел нагрівання та механічного пош-
кодження.
• Якщо агрегат упаковано в картонну коробку, вийміть скоби і
відкрийте коробку. • Не встановлювати важкі вантажі на упакований виріб.
• Якщо агрегат упаковано в дерев'яний ящик, відкрийте криш-
ку, звертаючи увагу на цвяхи та ремені. Температура зовнішнього середовища
2. Зніміть кріпильні гвинти або ремені з дерев'яної основи. Зберігати виріб за температури зовнішнього середовища від -5 °C до
+40 °C (від 23 °F до 104 °F).
Перевірка установки
1. Звільніть виріб від пакувального матеріалу.
Утилізуйте пакувальні матеріали у відповідності до місцевих нор- 3 Опис виробу
мативів.
2. Перевірте виріб на наявність і цілісність усіх деталей. 3.1 Конструкція насоса
3. Якщо виріб закріплено гвинтами, болтами чи ременями, звільніть
його від них. Насос є вертикальним, багатоступеневим, не самозаливним насосом,
Будьте обережні, працюючи з ременями та цвяхами. який можна сполучати зі стандартними електричними двигунами. На-
сос можна використовувати для транспортування:
4. У випадку виявлення несправностей, зверніться до відділу прода-
жу та обслуговування. • холодної води;
• теплої води.
Металеві деталі насоса, що контактують з водою, виготовлені з наступ-
2.2 Вказівки щодо транспортування них матеріалів:
ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ:
Не використовуйте болти з вушками, пригвинчені до двигу-
на, для маніпуляцій з цілим блоком електричного насоса.
Механічне ущільнення
Серія Основні характеристики
1, 3, 5 Номінальний діаметр 12 мм (0,47 дюйма), незбалансований,
обертання в правий бік, версія, K (EN 12756)
10, 15, 22 Номінальний діаметр 16 мм (0,63 дюйма), незбалансований,
обертання в правий бік, версія, K (EN 12756)
Збалансований з потужністю двигуна ≥ 5 кВт
Використання за призначенням Наступна формула дійсна для двигунів, які оснащено підшипниками
Насос придатний для: кінця повідного вала, блокованими по осі (наприклад, стандартні двигу-
ни Lowara для e-SV), див. Рисунок 6 В інших ситуаціях звертайтеся у від-
• систем суспільного та промислового водопостачання; діл продажу та сервісу.
• іригації (наприклад, сільськогосподарські та спортивні комплекси);
P1max + Pmax≤ PN
• водоочищення;
• живлення бойлерів; P1max Максимальний тиск на вході
• мийних установок;
Pmax Максимальний тиск, що створюється насосом
• охолодження (наприклад, кондиціонування повітря та заморожуван-
ня); PN Максимальний робочий тиск
• систем гасіння пожежі.
Діапазон температури рідини
Використання не за призначенням
Версія Прокладка Мінімум Макси- Максимум
мум109
ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ:
Використання насоса не за призначенням може створити
небезпечну ситуацію і спричинити травми та матеріальні
збитки.
Використання виробу не за призначенням призводить до анулювання Стандарт Етилен-про- -30 °C (-22 90 °C (194 120 °C (248
гарантії. пілен °F) °F) °F)
(EPDM)
Приклади застосування не за призначенням:
Спеціальний FPM (FKM -10 °C (14 °F) 90 °C (194 120 °C110
• Рідини, не сумісні з матеріалами, з яких складається насос еластомер, °F) (248°F)
• Небезпечні рідини (наприклад, токсичні, вибухонебезпечні, займи- що містить
сті або корозійні рідини) фтор)
• Питні рідини, крім води (наприклад, вино або молоко) Спеціальний тефлон 0 °C (32 °F) 90 °C (194 120 °C (248
Приклади неправильного встановлення: °F) °F)
• Небезпечні місцезнаходження (наприклад, вибухонебезпечна або Стосовно спеціальних вимог зверніться у відділ продажу та сервісу.
корозійна атмосфера).
• Місця з високою температурою повітря або поганою вентиляцією. Максимальна кількість пусків на годину
• Встановлення поза приміщенням без захисту від дощу або темпера- У цій таблиці показана кількість пусків, дозволених на годину для дви-
тур замерзання. гунів, що постачаються компанією Lowara:
НЕБЕЗПЕЧНО: кВт 0,25 - 4,00 - 11,0 - 18,5 - 30,0 - 45,0 55,0
Не використовувати цей насос для роботи з займистими та/ 3,00 7,50 15,0 22,0 37,0
або вибухонебезпечними речовинами. Пусків 60 40 30 24 16 8 4
на го-
дину
ПРИМІТКА:
• Не використовувати цей насос для роботи з рідинами, що містять
абразивні, тверді або волокнисті речовини. ПРИМІТКА:
• Не використовувати насос для швидкості потоку, що не входить у Якщо використовується інший двигун, а не стандартний, що поста-
діапазон, зазначений на табличці технічних даних. чається з електричним насосом, перевірте відповідні інструкції і з'ясуй-
те дозволену кількість пусків на годину.
Спеціальне застосування
Звертайтесь у відділ продажу і сервісу в таких випадках: 3.3 Заводська табличка технічних даних
• Якщо значення щільності та/або в'язкості рідини, що прокачується, Табличка технічних даних – це металева етикетка, розташована на
перевищує значення води (наприклад, вода з гліколем); оскільки мо- адаптері. Вона містить інформацію про специфікації. Детальну інфор-
же знадобитися потужніший двигун. мацію див. у Рисунок 1.
• Якщо рідина, що прокачується, оброблена хімічним способом (на-
приклад, пом'якшена, деіонізована, демінералізована тощо). На табличці технічних даних зазначається інформація про матеріал, з
• Якщо насос встановлюватиметься горизонтально, необхідно замови- якого виготовлено прокладку та механічне ущільнення. Щоб отримати
ти спеціальні монтажні кронштейни. інформацію про коди таблички технічних даних, див Рисунок 2.
• У разі виникнення ситуацій, відмінних від описаних, які не є харак-
терними для рідин, що прокачуються. Система умовних позначень виробу
Див. в Рисунок 3 пояснення ідентифікаційного коду для насосу та при-
3.2 Обмеження застосування клад.
109 EN 60335-2-41 є стандартом про насоси, пов'язані з електричними побутовими приладами тощо.
110 Максимум 100ºC для води
живання. Докладна інформація міститься в документах IRN R001 та Положення насоса та вільні проміжки
R420 в розділі WRAS Water Fittings and Materials Directory (фітинги та
матеріали для водопостачання)(www.wras.co.uk). ПРИМІТКА:
Для горизонтального монтажу насоса потрібна спеціальна адаптація.
IMQ або TUV або IRAM чи інші відмітки (лише для електричного
насоса)
Якщо не зазначено інакше, для виробу з відміткою дозволу електричної Забезпечити відповідне освітлення та вільні проміжки навколо насоса.
безпеки дозвіл стосується винятково електричного насоса. Переконатися в тому, що є простий доступ до насоса для встановлення
та техобслуговування.
ПРИМІТКА:
Вказівки
Дотримуватися всіх норм, виданих муніципальними органами влади,
Дотримуйтеся наступних вказівок стосовно розташування виробу: якщо насос підключено до муніципальної системи водопостачання. Як-
що потрібно за вимогами органів влади, встановіть відповідні запобіжні
• Переконайтеся, що ніякі перешкоди не заважають нормальному по- пристрої для зворотного потоку на стороні всмоктування.
току повітря охолодження, що подається вентилятором двигуна.
• Переконайтеся, що площа установки захищена від течі рідини або
затоплення. Список перевірок всмоктувального та випускного трубопроводу
• Якщо можливо, розташуйте насос трохи вище від рівня підлоги.
Дотримуйтеся наступних правил:
• Температура зовнішнього середовища повинна становити від 0 °C
(+32 °F) до +40 °C (+104 °F). • У всього трубопроводу є незалежна опора, трубопровід не створює
• Відносна вологість навколишнього повітря повинна бути не менше навантаження на пристрій.
50% при +40 °C (+104 °F). • Гнучкі труби або сполучення використовуються, щоб уникнути пе-
• Зверніться у відділ продажу та сервісу, якщо: редачі вібрації насосу трубам або навпаки.
• відносна вологість повітря не відповідає вказівкам; • Використовувати широкі коліна, уникати використання вигинів, що
• температура в приміщенні перевищує +40 °C (+104 °F); створюють надлишковий опір потоку.
• пристрій розташовано на висоті понад 1000 м (3000 футів) над • Трубопровід всмоктування ідеально герметичний і повітронепро-
рівнем моря. Може знадобитися скорочення продуктивності дви- никний.
гуна або заміна більш потужним двигуном. • Якщо насос використовується у відкритому контурі, переконатися в
Інформацію про те, на скільки скорочувати продуктивність двигуна тому, що діаметр труби всмоктування відповідає умовам встановлен-
див. в Таблиця 8. ня. Труба всмоктування не повинна бути менше, ніж діаметр отвору
всмоктування.
• Якщо трубопровід всмоктування повинен бути більшим, ніж сторо- Список перевірок двигуна
на всмоктування насоса, встановлюється ексцентрична перехідна
муфта труби. ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ:
• Якщо насос розташовується над рівнем рідини, ножний клапан вста-
новлюється в кінці труби всмоктування. • Прочитайте інструкції з експлуатації, щоб переконатися в
• Ножний клапан повністю занурюється в рідину таким чином, щоб забезпеченні запобіжного пристрою, якщо використо-
повітря не могло потрапити через воронку всмоктування, коли ріди- вується інший двигун, а не стандартний.
на знаходиться на мінімальному рівні і насос встановлений над рів- • Якщо двигун обладнано автоматичними термозапобіжни-
нем джерела рідини. ками, враховуйте ризик раптового запуску через переван-
• Двохпозиційні клапани відповідного розміру встановлені на всмок- таження. Не використовувати такі двигуни для гасіння по-
тувальному трубопроводі та на трубопроводі подачі (нижче по пото- жеж та систем розбризкування.
ку за зворотним клапаном) для регулювання продуктивності насоса,
для огляду насоса та для технічного обслуговування.
• Щоб уникнути зворотного потоку в насос, коли насос вимкнено, ПРИМІТКА:
встановлюється зворотний клапан на трубопроводі подачі.
• Використовувати лише динамічно збалансовані двигуни з ключем
половини розміру в насадці вала (IEC 60034-14) та зі звичайним по-
ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ: казником вібрації (N).
Не використовувати закритий двопозиційний клапан на ви- • Напруга мережі та частота мають відповідати специфікаціям, зазна-
пускній стороні, щоб переривати потік насоса довше, ніж на ченим в заводській таблиці.
кілька секунд. Якщо насос повинен працювати з закритого
випускного боку довше кількох секунд, необхідно встанови- • Використовувати лише одно- та трьохфазні двигуни, розмір та по-
ти обвідний контур, щоб уникнути перегрівання води всере- тужність яких відповідають європейським стандартам.
дині насоса.
Загалом, двигун може працювати з наступними допусками напруги в
мережі:
Ілюстрації вимог до трубопроводу див. в Рисунок 12.
Частота, Гц Фаза ~ UN [В] ± %
4.3 Вимоги до електрообладнання 50 1 220 – 240 ± 6
• Чинні місцеві нормативи скасовують зазначені вимоги. 3 230/400 ± 10
• Для систем гасіння пожежі (гідранти та/або спринклери) перевірте 400/690 ± 10
діючі місцеві норми. 60 1 220 – 230 ± 6
3 220/380 ± 5
Список перевірок електричного підключення
Дотримуйтеся наступних правил: 380/660 ± 10
• електричні провідники захищені від високих температур, вібрації та Використання кабелю відповідно до правил з 3 контактами (2+зазе-
зіштовхування. млення) для версій з однією фазою та з 4 контактами (3+ заземлення)
• Силова лінія оснащена: для трьохфазної версії.
• пристроєм захисту від короткого замикання;
• Високочутливий диференціальний перемикач (30 мA) [пристрій Електричний насос з двигуном:
залишкового струму RCD] для забезпечення додаткового захисту
від ураження електрострумом Сальник
• Мережевий ізолюючий вимикач з контактним зазором мінімум 3 Діапазон зовнішнього діаметра кабелю в міліметрах
Тип
мм
M20 x 1,5; 6–12 M25 x 1,5; 13–18 M32 x 1,5; 18–25
Список перевірок електричної панелі керування SM X – –
PLM X X X
ПРИМІТКА: LLM X X X
Панель керування має відповідати технічним характеристикам елек-
тричного насоса. (неправильне сполучення не гарантує захист двигуна); 4.4 Встановлення насоса
Дотримуйтеся наступних правил:
• Панель керування має захищати двигун від перевантаження та корот- 4.4.1 Механічна установка
кого замикання.
• Встановіть правильний захист від перевантаження (термічне реле Інформацію про основу насоса та анкерні отвори див. в Рисунок 13.
або запобіжник двигуна).
1. Встановіть насос на бетонний фундамент або аналогічну металеву
Тип насоса Захист конструкцію.
Однофазний стандартний елек- • Вбудоване автоматичне ски- Якщо передача вібрації може заважати, забезпечте опори, що аб-
тричний насос ≤ 1,5 кВт дання термо-амперометрично- сорбують вібрацію, між насосом та фундаментом.
го запобіжника (захист двигу- 2. Зніміть пробки з портів.
на) 3. Вирівняйте насос та фланці трубопроводу з обох боків насоса.
• Захист від короткого замикан- Перевірити вирівнювання гвинтів.
ня (надається монтажником)111 4. Прикріпіть трубопровід гвинтами до насоса.
Трьохфазний електричний насос • Термічний захист (забезпе- Не встановлюйте трубопровід з зусиллям.
та інші однофазні насоси112 чується монтажником) 5. Закріпіть надійно насос гвинтами на бетонному фундаменті або
• Захист від короткого замикан- металевій конструкції.
ня (забезпечується монтажни-
ком) 4.4.2 Електрообладнання
• Панель керування повинна бути обладнана системою захисту від ро-
боти всуху, до якої підключається реле тиску, плавальний перемикач, 1. Щоб спростити з'єднання, двигун можна обертати, щоб отримати
щупи або інші придатні пристрої. найзручніше положення для підключення.
• Рекомендується використовувати наступні пристрої на боці всмокту- a) Зніміть чотири болта, якими двигун кріпиться до насоса
вання насоса: b) Оберніть двигун в необхідне положення. Не знімайте муфту
• У разі нагнітання води з системи водопостачання використовуйте між валом двигуна та валом насоса.
реле тиску. c) Встановіть на місце чотири гвинта та затягніть їх.
• У разі нагнітання води з накопичувального баку або резервуара 2. Зніміть гвинти кришки клемної коробки.
використовуйте поплавцевий перемикач або датчик.
• При використанні термореле рекомендується використовувати реле,
чутливі до зникнення фази.
111 плавкі запобіжники aM (запуск двигуна), або магнето-термовимикач з кривою C та Icn ≥ 4,5 кA або іншими аналогічними пристроями.
112 Термічне реле перевантаження з класом роботи 10А + плавкі запобіжники аМ (запуск двигуна) або магнето-термічний перемикач захисту двигуна з класом
роботи 10А.
3. Сполучіть та закріпіть силові кабелі відповідно до електричних 1. Закрийте двохпозиційний клапан після насоса. Виберіть відповід-
схем. ні етапи:
Електричні схеми див. в Рисунок 14. Схеми також доступні ззаду 2. Серія 1, 3, 5:
кришки клемної коробки.
a) Викрутіть штифт зливної пробки (2).
a) Приєднайте провід заземлення. b) Вийміть пробку заливання та вентиляції (1) і відкрийте двох-
Переконатися, що провід заземлення довше, ніж проводи позиційний клапан вище по лінії, поки вода не потече з отво-
фаз. ру.
b) Приєднайте проводи фаз. c) Затягніть гвинт зливного отвору (2).
4. Встановіть на місце кришку розподільної коробки. d) Встановіть на місце пробку заливки і вентиляції (1).
3. Серія 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
ПРИМІТКА:
Акуратно затягніть сальники кабелів, щоб гарантувати захист від a) Зніміть пробку заливки і вентиляції (1) і відкрийте двохпози-
прослизання кабелю і потрапляння вологи в розподільну короб- ційний клапан вище по лінії, поки вода не почне витікати з
ку. отвору.
b) Закрийте пробку заливки і вентиляції (1). Заливну пробку (3)
5. Якщо двигун не обладнаний автоматичним скиданням термозахи- можна використовувати замість (1).
сту, тоді відрегулюйте захист від перевантаження відповідно до
переліку нижче. Установка з рівнем рідини нижче насоса (висота всмоктування)
• Якщо двигун використовується з повним навантаженням, вста-
новіть значення на номінальне значення струму електричного
двигуна (табличка технічних даних) Ілюстрації деталей насоса див. в Рисунок 17.
• Якщо двигун використовується з частковим навантаженням, 1. Відкрийте двохпозиційний клапан, розташований перед насосом,
встановіть значення на робочий струм (наприклад, вимірюване і закрийте двохпозиційний клапан після насоса. Виберіть відпо-
спеціальним пінцетом). відні етапи:
• Якщо в насоса пускова система зірка-трикутник, відрегулюйте 2. Серія 1, 3, 5:
термореле на 58% номінального або робочого струму (лише
для трьохфазних двигунів). a) Послабте штифт зливної пробки (2).
b) Зніміть пробку заливки і вентиляції (1) та використовуйте во-
ронку для заповнення насоса, поки вода не стане витікати з
5 Пусконалагоджувальні отвору.
роботи, запуск, експлуатація c) Установіть на місце пробку заливки та вентиляції (1).
d) Затягніть гвинт зливного отвору (2).
та вимкнення 3. Серія 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125:
Застережні заходи a) Зніміть пробку заливки і вентиляції (1) та використовуйте во-
ронку (4) для заповнення насоса, поки вода не почне витікати
з отвору.
ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ:
b) Встановіть на місце пробку заливки і вентиляції (1). Заливну
• Переконайтеся, що рідина, яка зливається, не спричиняє пробку (3) можна використовувати замість (1).
травм та збитків.
• Запобіжники двигуна можуть викликати раптовий переза-
пуск двигуна. Це може призвести до серйозних травм. 5.2 Перевірити напрямок обертання
• Ніколи не експлуатувати насос без правильно встановле- (трьохфазний двигун)
ного кожуха муфти.
Перед запуском виконати наступні дії.
ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕННЯ:
• Зовнішні поверхні насоса та двигуна можуть нагріватися 1. Знайдіть стрілки на адаптері або кришці вентилятора двигуна,
вище 40ºC (104ºF) під час експлуатації. Не торкайтеся нія- щоб визначити правильний напрямок обертання.
кими частинами тіла без захисного спорядження. 2. Увімкніть двигун.
• Не залишати займисті матеріали поруч з насосом. 3. Швидко перевірте напрямок обертання кожухом муфти та кри-
шкою вентилятора двигуна.
ПРИМІТКА: 4. Зупиніть двигун.
• Ніколи не експлуатувати насос зі швидкістю нижче мінімальної но- 5. Якщо напрямок обертання неправильний, виконайте наступне:
мінальної швидкості, насухо або без першого наповнення. a) Відключіть подачу живлення.
• Ніколи не експлуатуйте насос з закритим клапаном подачі довше b) У клемній коробці двигуна або в електричній панелі керуван-
кількох секунд. ня поміняйте положення двох або трьох проводів силового
• Ніколи не експлуатувати насос з закритим впускним клапаном. кабеля.
• Щоб уникнути перегрівання внутрішніх елементів насоса при екс- Електричні схеми див. в Рисунок 14
плуатації установки, підтримуйте постійний мінімальний потік води.
Якщо цього досягти неможливо, тоді рекомендовано виконати обвід c) Перевірити напрямок обертання знову.
та рециркуляційну лінію Див. значення мінімальної номінальної
швидкості в Додатку. 5.3 Запуск насоса
• Не піддавайте насос, який не працює, впливу низьких температур.
Зливайте всю рідину, що знаходиться в насосі. Інакше рідина може Перед запуском насоса переконайтеся в тому, що:
замерзнути і пошкодити насос.
• Сума тиску на боці всмоктування (водопровідна магістраль, напірний • насос правильно підключений до електроживлення,
резервуар) та максимальний тиск, що забезпечується насосом, не по- • насос правильно наповнений відповідно до інструкцій в Виконати по-
винні перевищувати максимальний робочий тиск, дозволений для чаткове заливання насоса.,
насоса (номінальний тиск PN). • двохпозиційний клапан, розташований після насоса, закритий.
• Не використовувати насос, якщо виникла кавітація. Кавітація може
пошкодити внутрішні компоненти. 1. Увімкніть двигун.
• Якщо перекачується гаряча вода, потрібно гарантувати мінімальний 2. Плавно відкрийте двухпозиційний клапан на стороні випуску на-
тиск на стороні всмоктування, щоб запобігти кавітації. соса.
В очікуваних робочих умовах насос повинен працювати рівно і
тихо. Якщо це не так, див. Пошук та усунення несправностей.
Рівень шуму
Інформацію про рівні шуму, що виділяються блоками, обладнаними
двигунами, що постачаються Lowara див. в Таблиця 10 6 Технічне обслуговування
5.1 Виконати початкове заливання насоса. Застережні заходи
تنبيه:
225 - e-SVالعربية
- arترجمة التعليمات الأصلية
,92 ,66 ,46 ,33القطر الأسمي 22مم ) 0.86بوصة( ،متوازن ،دوران جهة اليمين ،النوع الوضع والتثبيت
(EN 12756) K 125 يمكن نقل الوحدة أفقيًا أو رأسيًا .تأكد من تثبيت الوحدة جيداً أثناء النقل ومن أنه لا يمكن أن
يتدحرج أو ينقلب.
الاستخدام المقصود
المضخة مناسبة للتالي: تحذير:
لا تستخدم العراوي المربوطة على الموتور لنقل وحدة المضخة الكهربائية بأكملها.
أنظمة توزيع المياه المدنية والصناعية •
الري )على سبيل المثال ،لأغراض الزراعة والمرافق الرياضية( • • استخدم أشرطة الربط المحيطة بالموتور إذا كانت طاقة الموتور بين 0.25كيلو وات و 4.0
معالجة المياه • كيلو وات.
تغذية الغلاية • • استخدم الأحبال أو الأشرطة المتصلة بالشفتين )المسامير ذات العروة في حال توفرها(
محطات الغسيل • بالقرب من المنطقة المقابلة بين الموتور والمضخة ،إذا كانت طاقة الموتور بين 5.5كيلو
التبريد )على سبيل المثال ،أنظمة التكييف والتبريد( • وات و 55.0كيلو وات.
• من الممكن استخدام المسامير ذات العراوي المربوطة على الموتور بشكل حصري لنقل
تطبيقات مكافحة الحرائق • الموتور بمفرده ،أو في حالة عدم توازن توزيع الأثقال ،لرفع الوحدة رأسيًا بشكل جزئي بداية
من الإزاحة الأفقية.
الاستخدام غير السليم • لتحريك وحدة المضخة فقط ،استخدم الأشرطة المربوطة بقوة بمهايئ الموتور.
للمزيد من المعلومات عن كيفية ربط الوحدة بإحكام ،انظر شكل .4
تحذير:
قد يؤدى الاستخدام غير السليم للمضخة إلى أوضاع خطرة ويتسبب في إصابة الوحدة غير المزودة بموتور
شخصية وتلف بالممتلكات. في حالة استلام الوحدة بدون موتور ،تكون رقيقة الضبط المقومة التي على شكل شوكة مركبة
بالفعل بين المهايئ وقارنة النقل .يتم تركيب رقيقة الضبط لإبقاء حزمة الدفاعة في الموضع
يؤدي الاستخدام غير السليم للمنتج إلى فقدان الضمان. المحوري الصحيح .من أجل تفادي التلف أثناء النقل ،يتم أيضًا تثبيت العمود باستخدام أربطة
موسعة من البوليستر والبلاستيك.
أمثلة على الاستخدام غير السليم:
المسمار والصامولات المستخدم لربط الموتور غير مضمنة .لمزيد من المعلومات عن كيفية ربط
• السوائل غير المتوافقة مع مواد بناء المضخة الموتور ،انظر شكل .23
• السوائل الخطرة )مثل السوائل السامة أو المتفجرة أو القابلة للاشتعال أو الأكالة(
• السوائل الصالحة للشرب غير الماء )مثل ،النبيذ أو الحليب( تحذير:
أمثلة على التركيب غير السليم: ينشأ عن شراء مضخة وموتور بشكل منفصل ،ثم تجميعهما معًا ،آلة جديدة تخضع
لتوجيه الآلات .EC/2006/42يتحمل الشخص الذي يقوم بالتجميع المسؤولية
• المواقع الخطرة )مثل البيئات المنفجرة أو الأكالة(. عن كافة جوانب الأمان الخاصة بالوحدة المجمعة.
• الموقع الذي تكون درجة الحرارة فيه مرتفعة جدًا أو رديء التهوية.
• التركيبات الخارجية حيث لا توجد حماية ضد الأمطار أو درجات الحرارة شديدة الانخفاض.
2.3إرشادات التخزين
خطر:
لا تستخدم هذه المضخة للتعامل مع السوائل القابلة للاشتعال و/أو الانفجارية.
موقع التخزين
يجب تخزين المنتج في مكان جاف مغطى خالي من الحرارة والقاذورات والاهتزازات.
ملاحظة:
ملاحظة:
• لا تستخدم هذه المضخة للتعامل مع السوائل التي تحتوي على مواد كاشطة أو صلبة أو ليفية.
• قم بحماية المنتج من الرطوبة ومصادر الحرارة والتلف الميكانيكي.
• لا تستخدم المضخة لمعدلات الضح الني ننجاوز معدلات الضخ المحددة في لوح البيانات.
• لا تضع أوزانًا ثقيلة على المنتج المعبأ.
- e-SVالعربية 226
- arترجمة التعليمات الأصلية
يوفر لوح البيانات معلومات بخصوص المادة المصنوع منها الجوان ومانع التسرب الميكانيكي. التطبيقات الخاصة
للحصول على معلومات عن كيفية تفسير الكود الموجود على لوح البيانات ،انظر شكل .2 اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة في الحالات التالية:
اسم المنتج إذا تجاوزت قيمة الكثافة و/أو قيمة اللزوجة للسائل المضخوخ قيمة الماء )مثل الماء مع •
الجليكول(؛ حيث قد يتطلب الأمر موتورًا أكثر قوة
انظر شكل 3للحصول على شرح لكود تعريف المضخة والإطلاع على مثال.
إذا تمت معالجة السائل المضخوخ بطريقة كيميائية )على سبيل المثال تم تخفيف أو إلغاء •
تأيينه أو تخليصه من المعادن ،إلخ(.
ملصق - WRASمتطلبات وملاحظات التركيب )لسوق المملكة المتحدة فقط(
في حالة تركيب المضخة بشكل أفقي ،يجب طلب نوع خاص ودعامات تثبيت. •
وجود ملصق WRASعلى المضخة يعني أن المنتج معتمد للمخطط الاستشاري للوائح المياه.
هذا المنتج مناسب للاستخدام مع ماء الشرب البارد المخصص للاستهلاك الآدمي .للحصول على أي حالة أخرى خلاف الحالات التي تم ذكرها وتتعلق بطبيعة السائل. •
مزيد من المعلومات ،ارجع إلى IRNs R001و R420في دليل تركيبات المياه والمواد التي
تحمل ملصق .(WRAS (www.wras.co.uk 3.2حدود الاستخدام
IMQأو TUVأو IRAMأو العلامات الأخرى )للمضخة الكهربائية فقط( الحد الأقصى لضغط العمل
بالنسبة للمنتجات التي تحمل علامة اعتماد السلامة الكهربائية ،وما لم يُنص على غير ذلك ،فإن
الاعتماد يشير إلى المضخة الكهربائية بشكل حصري. يوضح مخطط التضخ هذا الحد الأقصى لضغط العمل بناءً على طراز المضخة ودرجة حرارة
السائل المضخوخ.
4التركيب
الاحتياطات
تحذير:
• التزم باللوائح التنظيمية المعمول بها لتفادي الحوادث.
• استخدم المعدات وأدوات الحماية الملائمة.
• احرص دائمًا على مراعاة اللوائح والتشريعات والقوانين المحلية و/أو الوطنية
المعمول بها فيما يتعلق بتحديد موقع التركيب وتوصيلات الماء والطاقة.
تحذير:
الصيغة التالية صالحة لكل المواتير المزودة بمحمل طرف إدارة مثبت محوريًا )مثل مواتير
• تأكد أن جميع التوصيلات منجزة من قبل فني مختص بالتركيب وبالتوافق مع Lowaraالقياسية لطراز ،(e-SVانظر شكل .6بالنسبة للمواقف الأخرى ،يُرجى الاتصال بقسم
اللوائح المعمول بها. المبيعات والخدمة.
• تأكد قبل بدء العمل بالوحدة من عزل الوحدة ولوحة التحكم عن مصدر الطاقة
الكهربائية وتعذر إمدادهما بالطاقة .ينطبق ذلك على دائرة التحكم أيضًا. P1max + Pmax≤ PN
إن EN 60335-2-41هو المعيار الخاص بالسلامة الكهربائية للمضخات المخصصة للأغراض المنزلية والأغراض المشابهة. 113
227 - e-SVالعربية
- arترجمة التعليمات الأصلية
للإطلاع على الصور التي توضح متطلبات الأنابيب ،انظر شكل .12 تعيين أوضاع وخلوص المضخة
مصاهر ) aMبدء تشغيل الموتور( ،أو مفتاح حراري مغناطيسي مزود بمنحنى Cو Icn ≥ 4.5كيلو أمبير أو أي جهاز آخر مكافئ. 115
مرحل حراري لزيادة الحمل بفئة تشغيل 10أمبير +مصاهر ) aMبدء تشغيل الموتور( أو مفتاح حراري مغناطيسي لوقاية الموتور بفئة تشغيل 10أمبير. 116
- e-SVالعربية 228
- arترجمة التعليمات الأصلية
229 - e-SVالعربية
- arترجمة التعليمات الأصلية
العلاج الأسباب انظر التعليمات حول كيفية استبدال الموتور في شكل .23 •
إذا لم تكن رقيقة الضبط التي على شكل شوكة تمت معايرتها متوفرة ،استخدم رقيقة ضبط
قم بحماية اللوح الكهربائي من مصدر الحرارة وجود اللوح الكهربائي في منطقة شديدة 0.1 ± 5مم ) 0.004 ± 0.2بوصة(.
الحرارة أو تعرضه لضوء الشمس المباشر .وضوء الشمس المباشر.
فولتية مصدر الطاقة ليست ضمن حدود العمل تحقق من ظروف تشغيل الموتور.
الخاصة بالموتور. 6.4أعد تركيب مانع التسرب الميكانيكي
تحقق من أحد أطوار الطاقة مفقود.
التعليمات الفئة
• مصدر الطاقة
• التوصيلات الكهربائية اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة. 5 ,3 ,1
4 ≥ :22 ,15 ,10كيلو وات اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة.
4 < :22 ,15 ,10كيلو وات انظر التعليمات في شكل .24استخدم الكحول للتنظيف والتشحيم.
7.5يبدأ تشغيل المضخة الكهربائية ،ولكن الواقي الحراري يعمل انظر التعليمات في شكل .24استخدم الكحول للتنظيف والتشحيم. 125 ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33
بعد وقت متفاوت
العلاج الأسباب
7حل المشاكل
اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة. توجد أجسام غريبة )مواد صلبة أو ليفية(
داخل المضخة والتي أدت بدورها إلى انحشار 7.1تحري الخلل وإصلاحه بالنسبة للمستخدمين
الدفاعة. المفتاح الرئيسي في وضع التشغيل ،ومع ذلك لم يبدأ تشغيل المضخة الكهربائية.
معدل التسليم الخاص بالمضخات أعلى من قم بغلق جزئي لصمام الفتح/الغلق القادم من
المضخة حتى يصبح معدل التسليم مساويًا الحدود المبينة على لوح البيانات. العلاج الأسباب
للحدود المبينة على لوح البيانات أو أقل منها.
انتظر حتى تبرد المضخة .سُيعاد ضبط الواقي تم تشغيل الواقي الحراري المدمج في
تتعرض المضخة لحمل زائد نظرًا لأنها تضخ تحقق من متطلبات الطاقة الفعلية بناءً على الحراري تلقائيًا. المضخة )إن وجد(.
خصائص السائل المضخوخ واستبدل الموتور سائل كثيف ولزج للغاية.
حسب ذلك. تم تشغيل الجهاز الواقي من التشغيل الجاف .تحقق من مستوى الماء في الخزان أو ضغط
الموصلات.
اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة. محامل الموتور بالية.
يبدأ تشغيل المضخة الكهربائية ،ولكن الواقي الحراري يعمل بعد وقت متفاوت.
7.6يبدأ تشغيل المضخة الكهربائية ،ولكن يتم تنشيط الوقاية العلاج الأسباب
العامة للنظام اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة. توجد أجسام غريبة )مواد صلبة أو ليفية( داخل
المضخة والتي أدت بدورها إلى انحشار الدفاعة.
العلاج الأسباب
افحص النظام الكهربائي. حدوث دائرة قصر في النظام الكهربائي.
- e-SVالعربية 230
- arترجمة التعليمات الأصلية
العلاج الأسباب
تحقق من عزل مكونات النظام الكهربائي. يوجد تسرب في وصلة التأريض )الأرضي(.
العلاج الأسباب
• تصفية الهواء يوجد هواء داخل المضخة أو
الأنابيب.
قم بإيقاف تشغيل المضخة وتكرار إجراءات التحضير .إذا لم يتم تحضير المضخة بشكل
استمرت المشكلة: صحيح.
• تحقق من عدم وجود تسريب في مانع التسرب
الميكانيكي.
• افحص أنبوب الشفط للتحقق من إحكام الربط.
• استبدل أي صمامات يوجد بها تسريب.
افتح الصمام. الخنق على جانب التوصيل مكثف
للغاية.
قم بتفكيك الصمامات وتنظيفها. الصمامات تبدو في وضع مغلق أو
مغلق جزئيًا.
اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة. انسداد المضخة.
قم بفحص الأنابيب وتنظيفها. انسداد الأنابيب.
قم بتغيير الموضع لطورين من الأطوار على اللوحة اتجاه دوران الدفاعة غير صحيح
الطرفية للموتور أو في لوحة التحكم الكهربائية. )النوع ثلاثي الطور(.
تحقق من ظروف تشغيل المضخة .قم بما يلي عند رفع الشفط مرتفع للغاية أو مقاومة
الضرورة: الضخ في أنابيب الشفط كبيرة للغاية.
• تقليل رفع الشفط
• زيادة قطر أنبوب الشفط
العلاج الأسباب
إصلاح أو استبدال المكون المعيب. يوجد تسرب في أحد المكونين التاليين أو كليهما:
• أنبوب الشفط
• الصمام القدمي أو صمام عدم الإرجاع
العلاج الأسباب
إصلاح أو استبدال المكون يوجد تسرب في أحد المكونين التاليين أو كليهما:
المعيب. • أنبوب الشفط
• الصمام القدمي أو صمام عدم الإرجاع
انظر التعليمات ذات الصلة في يوجد غشاء متمزق أو عدم وجود شحن مسبق في خزان
دليل خزان الضغط. الضغط.
العلاج الأسباب
قلل معدل الضخ المطلوب عن طريق الغلق الجزئي لصمام الفتح/ تكون تجاويف بالمضخة
الغلق القادم من المضخة .إذا استمرت المشكلة ،تحقق من ظروف
تشغيل المضخة )على سبيل المثال ،اختلاف الارتفاع ،مقاومة
الضخ ،درجة حرارة السائل(.
اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة. محامل الموتور بالية.
اتصل بقسم المبيعات والخدمة. توجد أجسام غريبة داخل
المضخة.
لأي موقف آخر ،ارجع إلى قسم المبيعات والخدمة.
231 - e-SVالعربية
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
t max
120 C
168280020
17
1 9 9 1 10 7 11 13
2 11
3 10
4 14 2 14
5 13 3 5
7 12 6
6 15
8 8 12 4 16 15
16
1 10 9 7 11 13
11
9
1
10
3
2
14
4
5
7
13
16
3 2 16 5 4 14
05922_C_SC
232 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
e-SV 233
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
13. Vedeliku maksimaalne temperatuur tööta- 13. Maksimālā sūknējamā šķidruma temperatū- 13. Didžiausia darbinė skysčio temperatūra (nau-
misel (IEC 60335–2–41) ra (pielietojumos atbilstoši IEC 60335–2– dojant, kaip nurodyta IEC 60335–2–41)
14. Mootori nimivõimsus 41) 14. Vardinė variklio galia
15. Nimipinge vahemik 14. Motora nominālā jauda 15. Vardinės įtampos ribos
16. Seerianumber (kuupäev + kasvav number) 15. Nominālā sprieguma diapazons 16. Serijos numeris (data + didėjantis skaičius)
17. Vedeliku maksimaalne temperatuur tööta- 16. Sērijas numurs (datums + ierīces kārtas Nr.) 17. Didžiausia darbinė skysčio temperatūra (nau-
misel (muu kui IEC 60335–2–41) 17. Maksimālā sūknējamā šķidruma temperatū- dojant, kaip nenurodyta IEC 60335–2–41)
ra (pielietojumos, kas neatbilst IEC 60335–
2–41)
234 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
Англійська العربية
1. Ідентифікаційний код матеріалу كود تعريف مواد مانع التسرب الميكانيكي .1
механічного ущільнення نطاق السعة .2
2. Діапазон потужності نطاق الرأس .3
3. Діапазон напору (IEC 60335–2–41) الحد الأدنى للرأس .4
4. Мінімальний напір (IEC 60335–2–41) السرعة .5
5. Швидкість التردد .6
6. Частота الحد الأقصى لضغط التشغيل .7
7. Максимальний робочий тиск الطاقة الممتصة لوحدة المضخة الكهربائية .8
8. Потужність агрегату електричного نوع وحدة المضخة الكهربائية/المضخة .9
насоса, що поглинається كود تعريف مواد الحلقة الدائرية .10
9. Тип насоса/електричної насосної المضخة/رقم القطعة لوحدة المضخة الكهربائية .11
установки فئة الحماية .12
10. Ідентифікаційний код матеріалу الحد الأقصى لدرجة حرارة سائل التشغيل )استخدامات .13
ущільнювального кільця круглого (IEC 60335–2–41 مثل
перетину الطاقة الاسمية للموتور .14
11. Номер деталі вузла електричного نطاق الجهد المقدر .15
насоса/ насоса ( الرقم التقدمي+ الرقم التسلسلي )التاريخ .16
12. Клас захисту الحد الأقصى لدرجة حرارة سائل التشغيل )استخدامات .17
13. Максимальна температура робочої (IEC 60335–2–41 أخرى خلاف
рідини (використовується як IEC 60335–
2–41)
14. Номінальна потужність двигуна
15. Номінальний діапазон напруги
16. Серійний номер (дата + номер по
порядку)
17. Максимальна температура робочої
рідини (використовується крім IEC
60335–2–41)
2.
Q1 B E G G E
1 2 3 4
SV1125_M0005_A_sc
e-SV 235
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
236 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
Англійська العربية
1. Механічне ущільнення مانع تسرب ميكانيكي .1
A Вугілля, просякнуте металом كربون مشرب بمعدن A
B Вугілля, просякнуте смолою كربون مشبع براتينج B
C Спеціальне вугілля, просякнуте كربون مشبع براتينج خاص C
смолою كربيد السيليكون Q1
Q1 Карбід кремнію EPDM E .2
2. E EPDM PTFE T
T PTFE (FPM (FKM V
V FPM (FKM)
e-SV 237
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
3.
5 SV 09 F L 110 4 6 T
1 3 5 7 8 9
2 4 6 SV1125_M0039_D_sc
238 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 G AISI 304/Støpejern, runde flenser
N AISI 316, runde flenser
G AISI 304/Gietijzer, ronde flenzen G AISI 304/Cast Iron, runde flanger P AISI 316, runde flens (PN40)
N AISI 316, ronde flenzen N AISI 316, runde flanger
P AISI 316, ronde flenzen (PN40) P AISI 316, runde flanger (VN40)
e-SV 239
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 G AISI 304/valurauta, pyöreät laipat G AISI 304/steypujárn, hringflangsar
N AISI 316, pyöreät laipat N AISI 316, hringflangsar
G AISI 304/gjutjärn, runda flänsar P AISI 316, pyöreät laipat (PN40) P AISI 316, hringflangsar (PN40)
N AISI 316, runda flänsar 5. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 5. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22
P AISI 316, runda flänsar (PN40)
5. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Tyhjä Vakioversio Autt Stöðluð gerð
L Matala NPSH, pyöreät laipat, L Lág NPSH (nettó soglyftihæð stærri
Blank Standardversion PN25 (versiot F, N) en 0), hringflangsar, PN25 (F, N
L Lågt NPSH, runda flänsar, PN25 H Korkea lämpötila, 150 ºC, pyöreät gerðir)
(F-, N-versioner) laipat, PN25 (versiot F, N) H Hátt hitastig, 150ºC, hringflangsar,
H Hög temperatur, 150 ºC, runda B Korkea lämpötila, 180 ºC, pyöreät PN25 (F, N gerðir)
flänsar, PN25 (F-, N-versioner) laipat, PN25 (versio N) B Hátt hitastig, 180ºC, hringflangsar,
B Hög temperatur, 180 ºC, runda E Passivoitu ja sähkökiillotettu (ver- PN25 (N gerðir)
flänsar, PN25 (N-version) siot N, V, C, K) E Yfirborðsvörn með rafslípun (N, V,
E Passiverad och elektropolerad C, K gerð)
(N-, V-, C-, K-versioner) 33, 46, 66, 92, 125
33, 46, 66, 92, 125
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 Tyhjä Vakioversio
L Matala NPSH, pyöreät laipat, Autt Stöðluð gerð
Blank Standardversion (versiot G, N) L Lág NPSH (nettó soglyftihæð stærri
L Lågt NPSH, runda flänsar (G-, H Korkea lämpötila, 150 ºC, pyöreät en 0), hringflangsar (G, N gerðir)
N-versioner) laipat, PN25 (versiot G, N) H Hátt hitastig, 150ºC, hringflangsar,
H Hög temperatur, 150 ºC, runda B Korkea lämpötila, 180 ºC, pyöreät PN25 (G, N gerðir)
flänsar, PN25 (G-, N-versioner) laipat, PN25 (versio N) B Hátt hitastig, 180ºC, hringflangsar,
B Hög temperatur, 180 ºC, runda E Passivoitu ja sähkökiillotettu (ver- PN25 (N gerðir)
flänsar, PN25 (N-version) sio N) E Yfirborðsvörn með rafslípun (N
E Passiverad och elektropolerad 6. Moottorin nimellisteho (kW x 10) gerð)
(N-version) 7. Tyhjä 2-napainen 6. Nafnafköst vélar (kW x 10)
6. Märkt motoreffekt (kW x 10) 4 4-napainen 7. Autt 2-póla
7. Blank 2-polig 4 4-póla
4 4-polig
240 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 G AISI 304 / ketus, apvalios jungės
N AISI 316, apvalios jungės
G AISI 304 / malm, ümaräärikud G AISI 304/čuguns, apaļi atloki P AISI 316, apvalios jungės (PN40)
N AISI 316, ümaräärikud N AISI 316, apaļi atloki 5. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22
P AISI 316, ümaräärikud (PN40) P AISI 316, apaļi atloki (PN40)
5. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 5. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 Tu- Standartinė versija
ščia
Tühi Standardversioon Tukšs Standarta variants L Žemas NPSH, apvalios jungės,
L Madal NPSH, ümaräärikud, PN25 L Zems NPSH, apaļi atloki, PN25 PN25 (F, N versijos)
(versioonid F, N) (versijas F, N) H Aukšta temperatūra, 150 ºC, apva-
H Kõrge temperatuur, 150 ºC, üma- H Augsta temperatūra, 150ºC, apaļi lios jungės, PN25 (F, N versijos)
räärikud, PN25 (versioonid F, N) atloki, PN25 (versijas F, N) B Aukšta temperatūra, 180 ºC, apva-
B Kõrge temperatuur, 180 ºC, üma- B Augsta temperatūra, 180ºC, apaļi lios jungės, PN25 (N versija)
räärikud, PN25 (versioon N) atloki, PN25 (versija N) E Pasyvintas ir poliruotas elektroche-
E Passiveeritud ja elekterpoleeritud E Pasivizēti un elektriski pulēti (ver- miniu būdu (N, V, C, K versijos)
(versioonid N, V, C, K) sijas N, V, C, K)
33, 46, 66, 92, 125
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 33, 46, 66, 92, 125
Tu- Standartinė versija
Tühi Standardversioon Tukšs Standarta variants ščia
L Madal NPSH, ümaräärikud (ver- L Zems NPSH, apaļi atloki (versi- L Žemas NPSH, apvalios jungės (G,
sioonid G, N) jas G, N) N versijos)
H Kõrge temperatuur, 150 ºC, üma- H Augsta temperatūra, 150ºC, apaļi H Aukšta temperatūra, 150 ºC, apva-
räärikud, PN25 (versioonid G, N) atloki, PN25 (versijas G, N) lios jungės, PN25 (G, N versijos)
B Kõrge temperatuur, 180 ºC, üma- B Augsta temperatūra, 180ºC, apaļi B Aukšta temperatūra, 180 ºC, apva-
räärikud, PN25 (versioon N) atloki, PN25 (versija N) lios jungės, PN25 (N versija)
E Passiveeritud ja elekterpoleeritud E Pasivizēti un elektriski pulēti (ver- E Pasyvintas ir poliruotas elektroche-
(versioon N) sija N) miniu būdu (N versija)
6. Mootori nimivõimsus (kW x 10) 6. Motora nominālā jauda (kW x 10) 6. Vardinė variklio galia (kW x 10)
7. Tühi 2-pooluseline 7. Tukšs 2 polu 7. Tuščia 2 poliai
4 4-pooluseline 4 4 polu 4 4 poliai
8. Tühi 50 Hz 8. Tukšs 50 Hz 8. Tuščia 50 Hz
6 60 Hz 6 60 Hz 6 60 Hz
9. M Ühefaasiline 9. M Vienfāzes 9. M Vienos fazės
T Kolmefaasiline T Trīsfāzu T Trijų fazių
Victaulic® on ettevõtte Victaulic Company Victaulic® ir Victaulic Company piederoša „Victaulic®“ yra „Victaulic Company“ prekės
kaubamärk tirdzniecības zīme ženklas
e-SV 241
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
242 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
e-SV 243
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
244 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
Англійська العربية
1. Витрати в м3/год. ساعة/3معدل الضخ بالمتر .1
2. Назва серії اسم الفئة .2
3. Кількість робочих коліс: عدد الدفاعات .3
مع قطر خارجي مخفض2 ، دفاعات8 8/2A
8/2A 8 робочих коліс, 2 зі نوع التخفيضB أوA
зменшеним зовнішнім
діаметром 22 ,15 ,10 ,5 ,3 ,1 .4
A або B Тип зменшення (PN 25) شفات مستديرة،AISI 304 F
4. 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 (PN16) شفات بيضاوية،AISI 304 T
شفات، منفذ التفريغ أعلى الشفط،AISI 304 R
F AISI 304, круглі фланці (PN25) (PPN25) مستديرة
T AISI 304, овальні фланці (PN16) (PN25) شفات مستديرة،AISI 316 N
R AISI 304, випускний порт над ®
(Victaulic (PN25 قارنات،AISI 316 V
всмоктуванням, круглі фланці (Victaulic® (PN40 قارنات،AISI 316 P
(PPN25) DIN32676 قارنات ربط،AISI 316 C
N AISI 316, круглі фланці (PN25) ((PN25
V AISI 316, муфти Victaulic® (PN25) DIN11851 قارنات ملولبة،AISI 316 K
P AISI 316, муфти Victaulic® (PN40) ((PN25
C AISI 316, затискні сполучення 125 ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33
DIN32676 (PN25) شفات مستديرة،حديد زهر/AISI 304 G
K AISI 316, різьбові сполучення شفات مستديرة،AISI 316 N
DIN11851 (PN25)
(PN40) شفات مستديرة،AISI 316 P
33, 46, 66, 92, 125 22 ,15 ,10 ,5 ,3 ,1 .5
فارغ نوع قياسي
G AISI 304/чавун, круглі фланці
PN25 ، شفات مستديرة، منخفضNPSH L
N AISI 316, круглі фланці (F، N )نسخة
P AISI 316, круглі фланці (PN40) ، درجة مئوية150 ، درجة حرارة مرتفعةH
(F، N )النوعانPN25 ،شفات مستديرة
، درجة مئوية180 ،درجة حرارة مرتفعة B
(N )النوعPN25 ،شفات مستديرة
N، كبت الفعالية وصقل كهربائي )الأنواع E
(V، C، K
125 ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33
فارغ نوع قياسي
PN ، شفات مستديرة، منخفضNPSH L
(G، N )نسخة
، درجة مئوية150 ، درجة حرارة مرتفعةH
(G، N )النوعانPN25 ،شفات مستديرة
، درجة مئوية180 ،درجة حرارة مرتفعة B
(N )النوعPN25 ،شفات مستديرة
(N كبت الفعالية وصقل كهربائي )النوع E
e-SV 245
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
4.
= 5,5kW
< 5,5kW
SV1125_M0 043_B_sc
246 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
5.
50 Hz ~ 2900 [rpm] 60 Hz ~ 3500 [rpm]
1SV
3SV
5SV
10SV
15SV
22SV
33SV
46SV
66SV
92SV
125SV
e-SV 247
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
SV1125_M0002_A_sc
248 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
6. 7.
T [°C] Hv [m] + °C
20 0.2 HV
30 0.4
40 0.7
50 1.2
60 2.0 Hf
-Z
70 3.1
80 4.8
90 7.1
100 10.3
110 14.6
pmax
120 20.2
+Z
p1max p1max + p max pb pb
SV1125_M0006_B_sc
SV1125_M0007_B_sc
8.
H (m) 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C
0 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,80
500 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,80
1000 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,80
1500 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,92 0,87 0,82 0,78
2000 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,80 0,76
9.
k [%]
45
40
35
30
25
20
15 NN SV XX X...XXX.... ...X
10
5 Qmin = NN • k [m3/h]
0
SV1125_M0027_B_sc
10.
P2 (kW) dB ± 2
50 Hz 2900 min-1 50 Hz 1450 min-1 60 Hz 3500 min-1 60 Hz 1750 min-1
IEC LpA* IEC LpA* IEC LpA* IEC LpA*
0,25 - <70 71 <70 - - 71 <70
0,37 71R <70 71 <70 - - 71 <70
0,55 71 <70 80 <70 71 <70 80 <70
0,75 80R <70 80 <70 80R <70 80 <70
1,00 80 <70 90 <70 80 <70 90 <70
1,50 90R <70 90 <70 90R <70 90 <70
2,20 90R <70 100 <70 90R 70 100 <70
3,00 100R <70 100 <70 100R 70 100 <70
4,00 112R <70 112 <70 112R 71 112 <70
e-SV 249
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
P2 (kW) dB ± 2
5,50 132R <70 132 <70 132R 73 132 <70
7,50 132R <70 132 <70 132R 73 132 <70
11,00 160R 73 - - 160R 79 160 <70
15,00 160 75 - - 160 80 160 <70
18,50 160 75 - - 160 80 - -
22,00 180R 75 - - 180R 80 - -
30,00 200 74 - - 200 78 - -
37,00 200 74 - - 200 78 - -
45,00 225 78 - - 225 83 - -
55,00 250 84 - - 250 89 - -
*Livello di pressione acustica misurato in campo libero a 1 m di distanza dall'elettropompa. — Sound pressure level measured in a free field at 1 m distance
from the electric pump. — Niveau de pression acoustique mesurée en champ libre à une distance de 1 m de la pompe électrique. — Der Schalldruck
wurde unter Freifeldbedingungen in einem Abstand von 1 Meter von der elektrischen Pumpe gemessen. — Nivel de presión de sonido medido en un
campo libre a 1 m de distancia de la bomba eléctrica. — Nível de pressão sonora medida num campo livre a 1 m de distância da bomba eléctrica. —
Geluidsdrukniveau gemeten in een vrij veld op 1 m afstand van de elektrische pomp. — Lydtryksniveauet, der måles på et frit felt ved 1 m afstand fra den
elektriske pumpe. — Lydtrykksnivået måles i et fritt felt 1 m fra den elektriske pumpen. — Ljudtrycksnivå mätt i ett öppet område på ett avstånd på 1 m
från den elektriska pumpen. — Äänenpainetaso, joka on mitattu vapaassa kentässä 1 m:n etäisyydellä sähköpumpusta. — Hljóðþrýstingur mældur á
opnu svæði í 1 m fjarlægð frá rafmagnsdælunni. — Helirõhu tase mõõdetuna tühjal väljal 1 m kauguselt elektripumbast. — Skaņas spiediena līmenis,
mērot bez ierobežojumiem, 1 m attālumā no elektriskā sūkņa. — Garso įtampos lygis matuojamas nepriklausomoje zonoje 1 m atstumu nuo elektrinio
siurblio. — Poziom ciśnienia akustycznego mierzony w warunkach pola swobodnego w odległości 1 m od pompy elektrycznej. — Hladina akustického
tlaku měřená na volném prostranství ve vzdálenosti 1m od elektrického čerpadla. — Hladina akustického tlaku meraná na voľnom priestranstve vo vzdia-
lenosti 1 m od elektrického čerpadla. — Hangnyomásszint szabad térben, a szivattyútól 1 m távolságban mérve. — Nivelul de putere acustică măsurat în
câmp liber la 1 m distanţă de pompa electrică. — Нивото на налягане на звука, измерено в свободно поле на 1 м разстояние от електрическата
помпа. — Raven zvočnega tlaka, izmerjena v prostem polju na razdalji 1 metra od električne črpalke. — Razina zvučnog tlaka izmjerena u slobodnom
prostoru na udaljenosti od 1 m od električne pumpe. — Nivo zvučnog pritiska izmeren u slobodnom prostoru na udaljenosti od 1 m od električne pum-
pe. — Το επίπεδο της πίεσης του ήχου μετρημένο σε ελεύθερο πεδίο σε απόσταση 1 m από την ηλεκτρική αντλία. — Elektrik pompasından 1 m mesafede
serbest bir alanda ölçülen ses basınç seviyesi. — Уровень давления звука измерен в свободном поле на расстоянии 1 м от электрического насоса.
— Рівень тиску звуку визначено у вільному полі на відстані 1 м від електричного насоса. — متر1 مستوى الضغط المناسب المقاس في مجال خالي على مسافة
من المضخة الكهربائية.
11.
SV1125_M0010_A_sc
250 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
12.
5
--- -
--- -
6
1 2 3 3 4 2 1
10
9 8
10
13
13
14
11
14
12
SV1125_M0012_A_sc
e-SV 251
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
6. Plaats de ellebogen niet in de buurt van de 6. Installér ikke vinkelrør tæt på pumpen. 6. Ikke monter bøy i nærheten av pumpen
pomp 7. Bypass-kredsløb 7. Forbikjøringskrets
7. Omleidingscircuit 8. Særlig reduktør 8. Eksentrisk overgangsrør
8. Excentrische reducer 9. Bruge vide hjørner 9. Bruk bøy med stor vinkel
9. Gebruik brede bochten 10. Positiv hældning 10. Positiv gradient
10. Positieve helling 11. Rør med lige stor eller større diameter end 11. Rør med samme eller større diameter enn su-
11. Leiding met gelijke of grotere diameter dan indsugningsporten geporten
aanzuigpoort 12. Brug fodventil 12. Bruk fotventil
12. Gebruik voetklep 13. Overskrid ikke den maksimale højdediffe- 13. Ikke overstig den maksimale høydeforskjellen
13. Overschrijd niet het maximale hoogtever- rence 14. Sørg for tilstrekkelig nedsenkingsdybde
schil 14. Sørg for tilstrækkelig neddypningsdybde
14. Zorg voor voldoende diepte voor onder-
dompeling
252 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
Англійська العربية
1. Опора трубопроводу سند الأنابيب .1
2. Запірний (двухпозиційний) клапан غلق/صمام فتح .2
3. Гнучка труба або сполучення أنبوبة أو وصلة مرنة .3
4. Зворотний клапан صمام عدم الإرجاع .4
5. Панель керування لوحة التحكم .5
6. Не встановлювати повороти близько від لا تقم بتركيب أكواع بالقرب من المضخة .6
насоса تجاوز الدائرة .7
7. Обвідний контур مخفض لا مركزي .8
8. Ексцентричний перехідник استخدم عقدات واسعة .9
9. НЕ використовувати круті вигини ميل إيجابي .10
10. Позитивний градієнт أنابيب بقطر مساوي لمنفذ الشفط أو أكبر منه .11
11. Трубопровід з рівним або більшим استخدم صمام قدمي .12
діаметром لا تتجاوز الحد الأقصى للاختلاف في الارتفاع .13
12. Використовувати нижній клапан تأكد من عمق الغمر المناسب .14
13. Не перевищувати максимальну різницю
висот
14. Забезпечити відповідну глибину
занурення
13.
øAxN
L1
L3 SV1125_M0030_B_ot
e-SV 253
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
14.
01042E_B_SC
15.
3 1
CH 24 CH 10/24
CH 10/24 1
5
CH 16
2 4
CH 24
2
CH24
CH 24
2a 2b
1a 1b 6 7 8
SV1125_M0019_C_sc
4
254 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
e-SV 255
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
256 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
4. Čep za boben, če je na voljo (ne odvijajte 4. Priključak za bubanj, ako je ugrađen (ne 4. Priključak za bubanj, ako je ugrađen (ne odvr-
ga) odvrtati) tati)
5. Priključek za merilnik, samo 33, 46, 66, 92, 5. Priključak spoja mjerača, samo 33, 46, 66, 5. Priključak za povezivanje manometra, samo
125 SV: G 3/8 92, 125 SV: G 3/8 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV: G 3/8
6. Različica brez priključka in bobna, samo 33, 6. Verzija bez priključka i bubnja, samo 33, 46, 6. Verzija bez priključka i bubnja, samo 33, 46,
46, 66, 92, 125 SV 66, 92, 125 SV 66, 92, 125 SV
7. Različica s priključkom vendar brez bobna 7. Verzija sa priključkom i bez bubnja (ne od- 7. Verzija sa priključkom i bez bubnja (ne odvr-
(ne odvijte), samo 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV vijati), samo 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV tati), samo 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV
8. Različica s priključkom in bobnom (ne od- 8. Verzija s priključkom i bubnjem (ne odvija- 8. Verzija sa priključkom i bubnjem (ne odvrtati),
vijte), samo 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV ti), samo 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV samo 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV
Англійська العربية
1. Пробка для заповнення та вентиляції (а: فتحة: ب، فتحة مفتوحة:سدادة التعبئة والتنفيس )أ .1
отвір відкритий; б: отвір закритий) (مغلقة
• 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 SV: G 3/8 SV: G 3/8 22 ,15 ,10 ,5 ,3 ,1 •
• 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV: G 1/2 SV: G 1/2 125 ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33 •
2. Пробка зливного отвору (а: центральний : ب، المسمار المركزي مفتوح:سدادة التصريف )أ .2
штифт відкритий, б: центральний (المسمار المركزي مغلق
штифт закритий) SV: G 3/8 22 15 ,10 ,5 ,3 ,1 •
• 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 22 SV: G 3/8 SV: G 1/2 125 ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33 •
• 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV: G 1/2 سدادة التعبئة .3
3. Заливна пробка SV: G 3/8 22 ,15 ,10 •
• 10, 15, 22 SV: G 3/8 SV: G 1/2 125 ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33 •
• 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV: G 1/2 ( إن وجدت )لا تفك،سدادة للأسطوانة .4
4. Пробка для барабана, якщо є (не SV: 125 ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33 فقط،سدادة وصلة المقياس .5
відкручувати) G 3/8
5. Пробка сполучення датчика, лише 33, ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33 فقط،نوع بدون سدادة أو أسطوانة .6
46, 66, 92, 125 SV: G 3/8 SV 125
6. Версія без пробки і барабана, лише 33, ,33 فقط،(نوع بسدادة ولكن بدون أسطوانة )لا تفك .7
46, 66, 92, 125 SV SV 125 ,92 ,66 ,46
7. Версія з пробкою, але без барабана (не ,92 ,66 ,46 ,33 فقط،(نوع بسدادة وبأسطوانة )لا تفك .8
відкручувати), тільки 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV 125
SV
8. Версія з пробкою і барабаном (не
відкручувати), тільки 33, 46, 66, 92, 125
SV
e-SV 257
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
16.
1, 3, 5SV 10, 15, 22, 33, 46, 66, 92, 125SV
3 1
2
2
SV1125_M0014_A_sc
SV1125_M0014_A_sc
17.
1
4
3 1
SV1125_M0015_A_sc 2
SV1125_M0015_A_sc
258 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
Англійська العربية
1. Пробка для заповнення та випуску سدادة تعبئة وتنفيس .1
повітря سدادة التصريف .2
2. Пробка дренажного отвору سدادة التعبئة .3
3. Заливна пробка قمع .4
4. Вирва
18.
A B C D E F G H I
Ø Nm Ø Nm Ø Nm Ø Nm Ø Nm Ø Nm Ø Nm Ø Nm Ø Nm
1SV M8 20 M12 25 - - - - - - G3/8 25 - - M12 50 M10 30
3SV
5SV M16 100
10SV M10 35 M14 30 M8 25 M12 50
15SV
22SV
33SV M12 55 M16 60 M6 8 M10 35 G1/2 40 G1/2 40 R3/8 40 M16 100 - -
46SV
66SV-
PN16
66SV- M20 200
PN25
92SV- M16 100
PN16
92SV- M20 200
PN25
125SV- M16 100
PN16
125SV- M24 350
PN25
A Vite bloccaggio giranti — Impeller locking screws — Vis d'arrêt de roue — Laufrad-Sicherungsschrauben — Tornillos de bloqueo del impulsor
— Parafusos de bloqueio do impulsor — Vergrendelschroeven waaier — Låseskruer til kompressorhjul — Låseskruer på løpehjulet — Låsskru-
var för pumphjul — Juoksupyörän lukitusruuvit — Lásskrúfur dæluhjóls — Tiiviku lukustuskruvid — Darbrata stiprinājuma skrūves — Spar-
nuotės fiksavimo varžtai — Śruby zabezpieczające wirnika napędzanego — Zajišťovací šrouby oběžného kola — Zaisťovacie skrutky rotora —
Járókereket rögzítő csavarok — Şuruburi de fixare a rotorului — Крепежни болтове на ротора — Vijaki za zaklep rotorja — Sigurnosni vijci
rotora — Zavrtnji za učvršćivanje rotora — Βίδες ασφάλισης φτερωτής — Pervane kilit vidaları — Блокирующие винты крыльчатки —
Гвинти блокування робочого колеса — لوالب تثبيت الدفاعة
B Dadi tiranti — Tie rod nuts — Écrous de biellette — Zugstrebenmuttern — Tuercas de los tirantes — Porcas do tirante — Trekstangmoe-
ren — Noter til gevindstang — Strekkstangmuttere — Stagbultmuttrar — Liitostangon mutterit — Snittteinarær — Sidusvarraste mutrid —
Enkura uzgriežņi — Įtempimo trauklių veržlės — Nakrętki ściągu — Matice spojovací tyče — Matice spojovacej tyče — Összekötőrúd anyák
— Piuliţe tirant — Гайки на дистационния прът — Matice končnikov — Matice krajnice — Navrtke spone — Παξιμάδια συνδετικής
ράβδου — Bağlama rodu somunları — Гайки тяги — Гайки тяги — صامولات قضيب الربط
C Viti piastrine bloccaggio tamburo (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) e boccole diffusori (125 SV) — Drum (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) and diffuser bushings (125
SV) locking plate screws — Vis de plaque d'arrêt de tambour (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) et de bague de diffuseur (125 SV) — Trommel (33, 46, 66, 92,
125 SV)- und Diffuserbuchsen (125 SV)- Sicherungsblechschrauben — Tambor (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) y tornillos de la placa de fijación de los ca-
e-SV 259
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
squillos del difusor (125 SV) — Parafusos do prato de bloqueio do casquilho do tambor (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) e difusor (125 SV) — Trommel (33,
46, 66, 92, 125 SV) en lagerbussen afvoerbuis (125 SV) vergrendelplaatschroeven — Tromle (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) og diffusorbøsninger (125 SV)
låsepladeskruer — Sylinder (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) og hylse ledeapparat (125 SV) låseplateskruer — Trumma (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) och diffusör-
bussningar (125 SV) låsplattskruvar — Rumpu (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ja diffuusoriholkkien (125 SV) lukkolaatan ruuvit — Hólkur (33, 46, 66, 92,
125 SV) og dæluhringsmúffur (125 SV) lásplötuskrúfur — Vaadi (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ja difuusori läbiviikude (125 SV) lukustuskruvid — Cilindra
(33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) un izkliedētāja bukses (125 SV) stiprinājuma plāksnes skrūves — Cilindro (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ir difuzoriaus įvorių (125 SV)
fiksuojančios plokštės varžtai — Śruby płyty ustalającej bębna (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) i tulei dyfuzora (125 SV) — Zajišťovací šrouby desky bubnu
(33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) a pouzdra difúzéru (125 SV) — Bubon (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) a zaisťujúce nastavovacie skrutky kief difuzéra (125 SV) —
Dob (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) és diffúzor perselyek (125 SV) zárólemezcsavarok — Şuruburi placă de fixare tambur (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) şi lagăr
difuzor (125 SV) — Барабан (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) и втулки на дифузерни (125 SV) задържащи планката болтове — Vijaki za zaklepno
ploščico bobna (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) in puše difuzorja (125 SV) — Zavrtnji sigurnosne ploče bubnja (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) i čahure difuzora (125
SV) — Zavrtnji osigurača bubnja (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) i čaure difuzora (125 SV) — Βίδες ασφάλισης πλάκας τυμπάνου (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) και
εδράνων διάχυσης (125 SV) — Tambur (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ve difüzör burçları (125 SV) kilit plakası vidaları — Барабан (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV)
и втулки диффузора (125 SV) винты стопорной пластины — Барабан (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) і втулки дифузора (125 SV) гвинти стопорної
пластини — 125 , 92 , 66 , 46 , 33) لوالب لوحة التثبيت للأسطوانةSV) 125) وجلبات المنظمSV)
D Viti bloccaggio sede tenuta meccanica (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) e diffusori (125 SV) — Mechanical seal housing (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) and diffuser
(125 SV) locking screws — Vis d'arrêt de boîtier de joint mécanique (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) et de diffuseur (125 SV) — Gleitringdichtungsgehäuse
(33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV)- und Diffuser (125 SV)- Sicherungsschrauben — Carcasa del sello mecánico (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) y tornillos de fijación del
difusor (125 SV) — Parafusos de blqueio do compartimento do vedante mecânico (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) e difusor (125 SV) — Behuizing mechani-
sche afdichting (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) en afvoerbuis (125 SV) vergrendelschroeven — Mekanisk forseglingskabinet (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) og diffu-
sor (125 SV) låseskruer — Mekanisk tetningshus (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) og ledeapparat (125 SV) låseskruer — Mekaniskt tätningshus (33, 46, 66,
92, 125 SV) och diffusör (125 SV) låsskruvar — Mekaaninen tiivistekotelo (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ja diffuusorin (125 SV) lukitusruuvit — Ásþétti-
hús (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) og dæluhringur (125 SV) lásskrúfur — Mehaanilise tihendi ümbrise (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ja difuusori (125 SV) luku-
stuskruvid — Mehāniskā blīvējuma korpusa (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) un uzkliedētāja (125 SV) stiprinājuma skrūves — Mechaninio sandariklio korpu-
so (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ir difuzoriaus (125 SV) fiksavimo varžtai — Śruby ustalające obudowy uszczelnienia mechanicznego (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV)
i dyfuzora (125 SV) — Zajišťovací šrouby mechanických ucpávek (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) a difúzéru (125 SV) — Kryt mechanického tesnenia (33,
46, 66, 92, 125 SV) a zaisťovacie skrutky difuzéra (125 SV) — Mechanikus tömítés ház (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) és diffúzor (125 SV) rögzítő csavarok
— Şuruburi fixare carcasă garnitură mecanică (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) şi difuzor (125 SV) — Механично уплътнение (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) и
дифусерни (125 SV) опорни болтове — Zaklepni vijaki za ohišje mehanskega tesnila (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) in difuzorja (125 SV) — Sigurnosni
vijci mehaničkog zatvarača (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) i difuzora (125 SV) — Sigurnosni zavrtnji kućišta mehaničkog zatvarača (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) i
difuzora (125 SV) — Βίδες ασφάλισης χιτωνίου μηχανικής στεγανοποίησης (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) και μηχανισμού διάχυσης (125 SV) — Mekanik
keçe yuvası (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) ve difüzör (125 SV) kilit vidaları — Кожух механического уплотнения (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) и блокирующие
винты диффузора (125 SV) — Кожух механічного ущільнення (33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV) та гвинти блокування дифузора (125 SV) — لوالب تثبيت
125 , 92 , 66 , 46 , 33) مانع التسرب الميكانيكيSV) 125) والمنظمSV)
E Tappo di riempimento e sfiato — Fill and vent plug — Bouchon de remplissage et de mise à l'air libre — Füll- und Entlüftungsstopfen —
Tapón de ventilación y llenado — Tampão de enchimento e ventilação — Vul- en ventilatieplug — Fyld- og ventilationsprop — Fyll- og ventil-
plugg — Påfyllnings- och ventilationsplugg — Täyttö- ja kennotulppa — Áfyllingar- og loftunartappi — Täite- ja ventilatsioonikork — Uzpil-
des un atgaisošanas aizgrieznis — Užpildymo angos ir ventiliacijos angos kamštis — Korek wlewu i odpowietrzenia — Plnicí a odvzdušňovací
zátka — Plniaca a ventilačná zátka — Feltöltő- és légtelenítődugó — Buşon de umplere şi ventilaţie — Пробка за наливане и пробка за
вентилация — Čep za zračenje in polnjenje — Priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje — Priključak za ispunu i ventiliranje — Τάπα πλήρωσης και
αέρα — Dolum ve hava tapası — Пробка для заполнения и выпуска воздуха — Пробка для заповнення та випуску повітря — سدادة تعبئة
وتنفيس
F Tappi di carico o scarico — Fill or drain plugs — Bouchon de remplissage ou de vidange — Füll- oder Ablassstopfen — Tapones de vaciado y
llenado — Tampões de enchimento e drenagem — Vul- of afvoerpluggen — Fyld- eller tømningspropper — Fyll- og dreneringsplugger —
Påfyllnings- eller avtappningspluggar — Täyttö- tai tyhjennystulpat — Áfyllingar eða aftöppunartappar — Täite- või tühjenduskorgid — Uzpil-
des vai drenāžas aizgriežņi — Užpildymo angos arba išleidimo angos kamščiai — Korki wlewu lub spustu — Plnicí nebo vypouštěcí zátky —
Plniace alebo vypúšťacie zátky — Feltöltő- vagy ürítődugók — Buşoane de umplere şi golire — Пробки за наливане или изпускане — Čep za
polnjenje in praznjenje — Priključci za ispunu ili dreniranje — Priključci za ispunu i dreniranje — Τάπες πλήρωσης και αποστράγγισης — Dolum
ve tahliye tapaları — Пробки заполнения или слива — Пробка заповнення та зливання — سدادات التعبئة أو التنفيس
G Tappi della presa manometrica — Gauge connection plugs — Bouchons de branchement de manomètre — Stopfen für Manometeranschluss —
Tapones de la conexión del calibrador — Tampões de ligação do calibrador — Meetkoppelpluggen — Pakningsforbindelsespropper — Måleko-
plingsplugger — Manometerledningspluggar — Mittaliitäntätulpat — Tappar á mælistúta — Mõõdiku ühenduskorgid — Līmeņrāža pieslēgvie-
tas aizgriežņi — Matuoklio jungties kamščiai — Korki przyłącza miernika — Konektory pro připojení manometru — Spojovacie kolíky merača
— Műszer csatlakozási pont — Buşoane conectare aparat de măsură — Пробки при съединение с манометър — Priključki merilnika —
Priključci za spajanje mjerača — Priključci za povezivanje manometra — Τάπες ηλεκτρικής σύνδεσης — Sayaç bağlantı tapaları — Пробки
соединения датчика — Пробки сполучення датчика — سدادات وصلة المقياس
H Viti controflange tonde — Round counter flange screws — Vis de contre-bride ronde — Schrauben für runden Gegenflansch — Tornillos de la
brida del contador redondo — Parafusos da flange do contador redondo — Ronde tegenflensschroeven — Runde kontraflangeskruer — Runde
flenssenkeskruer — Flänsskruvar för rund räknare — Laskurin pyöreän laipan ruuvit — Skrúfur fyrir hringlaga mótiflans — Ümarad vastasääri-
kute kruvid — Apaļa skaitītāju atloka skrūves — Apvalios priešpriešinės jungės varžtai — Śruby okrągłego przeciwkołnierza — Šrouby kulaté
protipříruby — Okrúhle skrutky obruby počítadla — Kerek ellen-karimacsavarok — Şuruburi contraflanşă rotundă — Кръгли винтове на
260 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
контрафланеца — Okrogli nasprotni vijaki prirobnice — Vijci prirubnice okruglog brojača — Zavrtnji prirubnice okruglog brojača —
Στρογγυλές βίδες αντίθετης φλάντζας — Yuvarlak sayaç flanşı vidaları — Круглые винты контрфланца — Круглі гвинти контрфланця —
لوالب بشفة عكسية مستديرة
I Viti controflange ovali — Oval counter flange screws — Vis de contre-bride ovale — Schrauben für ovalen Gegenflansch — Tornillos de la
brida del contador ovalado — Parafusos da flange do contador oval — Ovale tegenflensschroeven — Ovale kontraflangeskruer — Ovale flens-
senkeskruer — Flänsskruvar för oval räknare — Laskurin soikean laipan ruuvit — Skrúfur fyrir sporöskjulaga mótiflans — Ovaalsed vastasääri-
kute kruvid — Ovāla skaitītāja atloka skrūves — Ovalios priešpriešinės jungės varžtai — Śruby owalnego przeciwkołnierza — Šrouby oválné
protipříruby — Oválne skrutky obruby počítadla — Ovális ellen-karimacsavarok — Şuruburi contraflanşă ovală — Овални винтове на
контрафланеца — Ovalni nasprotni vijaki prirobnice — Vijci prirubnice ovalnog brojača — Zavrtnji prirubnice ovalnog brojača — Οβάλ βίδες
αντίθετης φλάντζας — Oval sayaç flanşı vidaları — Овальные винты контрфланца — Овальні гвинти контрфланця — لوالب بشفة عكسية بيضاوية
Ø Diametro — Diameter — Diamètre — DURCHMESSER — Diámetro — Diâmetro — doorsnede — Diameter — Diameter —
Diameter — Halkaisija — Þvermál — Läbimõõt — Diametrs — Skersmuo — Średnica — Průměr — Priemer — Átmérő — Dia-
metru — Диаметър — Premer — Promjer — Prečnik — Διάμετρος — Çap — Диаметр — Діаметр — القطر
NmCoppia di serraggio — Driving torque — Couple d'entraînement — Antriebsdrehmoment — Par motor — Torque de accionamento —
Aandrijfmoment — Drevspændingsmoment — Drivmoment — Drivande vridmoment — Käyttömomentti — Drifsnúningsvægi — Ajami-
moment — Piedziņas griezes moments — Sukimo momentas — Moment dokręcania — Hnací točivý moment — Hnací točivý moment —
Meghajtó nyomaték — Cuplu activ — Движеща тяга — Pogonski navor — Pogonski moment — Pogonski moment — Κινούσα ροπή —
Tahrik torku — Крутящий момент — Крутний момент — عزم الإدارة
19.
A 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250
B Ø M6 M8 M12 M16
Nm 6 15 50 75
CH 10 13 19 24
20.
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 SV 1, 3, 5 10, 15, 22 SV 33, 46, 66, 92, 125 SV
SV
A 71 80 90 100 112 132 132 160 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250
C Ø M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12
Nm 15 25 25 50 50 75
CH 5 6 6 8 8 10
A Grandezza del motore — Motor size — Dimension de moteur — Motorgröße — Tamaño del motor — Dimensão do motor — Motor-
grootte — Motorstørrelse — Motorstørrelse — Motorstorlek — Moottorin koko — Hreyfilsstærð — Mootori suurus — Motora izmērs
— Variklio dydis — Wielkość silnika — Velikost motoru — Veľkosť motora — Motorméret — Dimensiune motor — Размер на мотора
— Velikost motorja — Veličina motora — Veličina motora — Μέγεθος κινητήρα — Motor büyüklüğü — Типоразмер двигателя —
Розмір двигуна — حجم الموتور
B Vite lanterna/motore — Adapter/motor screw — Vis d'adaptateur/moteur — Adapter/Motorschraube — Tornillo del motor/adaptador —
Parafuso do adaptador/motor — Adapter/motorschroef — Adapter-/motorskrue — Adapter/Motorskrue — Adapter/motorskruv — Sovi-
tin/moottorin ruuvi — Millistykki/hreyfilsskrúfa — Adapteri/mootori kruvi — Adaptera/motora skrūve — Adapterio / variklio varžtas —
Śruba łącznika pośredniego/silnika — Šroub adaptéru/motoru — Skrutka adaptéra/motora — Adapter/motor csavar — Şurub adaptor/motor
— Винт на адаптера/мотора — Vijak adapterja/motorja — Vijak prilagodnika/motora — Zavrtanj adaptera/motora — Βίδα προσαρμογέα/
κινητήρα — Adaptör/motor vidası — Винт адаптера/двигателя — Гвинт адаптера/двигуна — لولب الموتور/الوصلة
C Vite giunto — Coupling screw — Vis d'accouplement — Kupplungsschraube — Tornillo de acoplamiento — Parafuso do acoplamento —
Koppelingschroef — Koblingsskrue — Koplingssskrue — Kopplingsskruv — Kytkinruuvi — Tengjaskrúfa — Ühenduslüli kruvi — Sa-
vienojuma skrūve — Movos varžtas — Śruba sprzęgła stałego — Šroub spojky — Skrutka spojky — Összekapcsoló csavar — Şurub de
cuplare — Винт на куплунга — Vijak spojke — Spojni vijak — Zavrtanj spojnice — Βίδα ζεύξης — Kuplaj vidası — Стяжной винт —
Гвинт стягнення — لولب القارنة
Ø Diametro — Diameter — Diamètre — DURCHMESSER — Diámetro — Diâmetro — doorsnede — Diameter — Diameter —
Diameter — Halkaisija — Þvermál — Läbimõõt — Diametrs — Skersmuo — Średnica — Průměr — Priemer — Átmérő — Dia-
metru — Диаметър — Premer — Promjer — Prečnik — Διάμετρος — Çap — Диаметр — Діаметр — القطر
NmCoppia di serraggio — Driving torque — Couple d'entraînement — Antriebsdrehmoment — Par motor — Torque de accionamento —
Aandrijfmoment — Drevspændingsmoment — Drivmoment — Drivande vridmoment — Käyttömomentti — Drifsnúningsvægi — Ajami-
moment — Piedziņas griezes moments — Sukimo momentas — Moment dokręcania — Hnací točivý moment — Hnací točivý moment —
Meghajtó nyomaték — Cuplu activ — Движеща тяга — Pogonski navor — Pogonski moment — Pogonski moment — Κινούσα ροπή —
Tahrik torku — Крутящий момент — Крутний момент — عزم الإدارة
e-SV 261
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
21.
22.
1, 3, 5, 10, 15SV 33, 46, 66, 92, 125SV
Ø 16
5 mm Ø 12
5 mm
Ø 22
SV1125_M 0020_A _sc
262 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
23.
3.1
1,1
1,2 2
1
3.2
4
5 6
SV1125_M5926_A_sc
e-SV 263
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
24.
3
2
1
6.1
6.2 6.3
5
4
7.2
7.1
9
8
11
10 13
11.1 11.2
12
SV1125_M0044_B_SC
264 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
25.
05925_B_DE
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 22 SV
e-SV 265
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
26.
05102_D_DE
266 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
27.
05930_B_DE
4
23
19
26
2
8
22
11
15
20
5
34 9
30
12
31 27 7 10
32
18
29
35
28
21
14
125 SV
1 Motore — Motor — Adaptateur de moteur — Motor — Motor — Motor — Motor — Motor — Motor — Motor — Moottori
— Hreyfill — Mootor — Motors — Variklis — Silnik — Motor — Motor — Motor — Motor — Мотор — Motor — Motor
— Motor — Κινητήρας — Motor — Двигатель — Двигун — الموتور
e-SV 267
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
2 Lanterna — Adapter — — Passstück — Adaptador — Adaptador — Adapter — Adapter — Adapter — Adapter — Sovitin —
Millistykki — Adapter — Adapteris — Adapteris — Łącznik pośredni — Adaptér — Adaptér — Adapter — Adaptor — Адаптер
— Adapter — Prilagodnik — Adapter — Προσαρμογέας — Adaptör — Адаптер — Адаптер — الوصلة
3 Base — Base — Socle — Sockel — Base — Base — Voet — Base — Sokkel — Bas — Perustus — Grunnur — Alus —
Pamatne — Pagrindas — Podstawa — Základna — Základňa — Alap — Bază — Основа — Baza — Baza — Osnova — Βάση
— Taban — Основание — Основа — الأساس
4 Kit tappo + o-ring — Plug + o-ring kit — Bouchon + kit joint torique — Stopfen + O-Ringsatz — Kit de tapón + junta tórica — Kit do
tampão + o-ring — Plug + o-ring pakket — Prop + O-ringssæt — Plugg + o-ring-sett — Plugg + o-ringskit — Tulppa + O-rengassarja —
Tappi + O-hringasett — Kork + O-rõnga komplekt — Aizgrieznis + blīvgredzenu komplekts — Kamščio ir O tipo žiedo rinkinys — Zestaw
korka z pierścieniem uszczelniającym typu O-ring — Zátka + sestava o-kroužku — Zátka + súprava tesniaceho krúžku — Dugó + O-gyűrű
készlet — Buşon + set garnitură inelară — Комплект пробка + о-пръстен — Komplet čepov in tesnilnih obročkov — Komplet priključak +
o-prsten — Priključak + komplet o-prstena — Κιτ δακτυλίου κυκλικής διατομής — Tapa + o-ring kiti — Пробка + набор уплотнений
круглого сечения — Пробка + набір ущільнень круглого перетину — طقم الحلقة الدائرية+ السدادة
5 Disco porta tenuta — Seal housing plate — Plaque de boîtier de joint — Dichtungsgehäuse-Platte — Placa de la cubierta del sello — Placa
do compartimento do vedante — Plaat voor afdichtingsbehuizing — Plomberingshusplade — Tetningshusplate — Tätningshusplåt — Tiivi-
stekotelon levy — Þéttihúsplata — Tihendi katteplaat — Blīves korpusa plāksne — Riebokšlio sandarinimo plokštelė — Płytka obudowy
uszczelnienia — Deska tělesa těsnění — Platnička skrine tesnenia — Tömítésház lemez — Placă carcasă garnitură — Плоча за кожух на
уплътнението — Ploščica ohišja tesnila — Brtvena ploča — Brtvena ploča — Πινακίδα μηχανικής στεγανοποίησης — Keçe yuvası plakası
— Диск уплотнения — Диск ущільнення — لوح مبيت مانع التسرب
6 Testata superiore — Upper head — Tête supérieure — Oberer Kopf — Carga hidráulica superior — Cabeça superior — Bovenste korf —
Øverste hoved — Øvre trykkhøyde — Övre huvud — Ylempi painekorkeus — Efri haus — Ülemine surukõrgus — Augšējais augstum-
spiediens — Viršutinė galvutė — Górna głowica — Horní hlavice — Horná hlavica — Felső nyomómagasság — Cap superior — Горна
глава — Zgornja glava — Gornja glava — Gornja glava — Επάνω κεφαλή — Üst kafa — Верхняя головка — Верхня голівка —
الرأس العلوي
7 Molla precarica diffusori — Diffusers stack spring — Ressort de pile de diffuseurs — Diffuserstapelfeder — Muelle de la pila de difusores —
Mola da pilha de difusores — Diffusers stapelveer — Diffusorholdefjeder — Vertikal fjær på ledeapparatet — Fjäder för diffuserarstapel —
Hajottimen pakettijousi — Dreifarafjöður — Difuusorite komplekti vedru — Difuzoru atspere — Difuzinio dėklo spyruoklė — Sprężyna
zestawu dyfuzorów — Pružina zásobníku difúzéru — Pružina zásobníka difúzora — Diffúzor szelencerugója — Arc ansamblu difuzoare —
Пружина на групата дифузери — Listnata vzmet difuzerjev — Opruga difuzora — Opruga difuzora — Ρυθμιστές προφόρτισης ελατηρίων
— Difüzör yığın yayı — Пружина комплекта диффузоров — Пружина комплекту дифузорів — زنبرك مكدس المنظمات
8 Girante (diametro ridotto) — Impeller (reduced diameter) — Roue (petit diamètre) — Laufrad (reduzierter Durchmesser) — Impulsor (diáme-
tro reducido) — Impulsor (diâmetro reduzido) — Rotor (verkleinde doorsnede) — Propel (reduceret diameter) — Løpehjul (redusert diameter)
— Pumphjul (reducerad diameter) — Juoksupyörä (pienennetty halkaisija) — Dæluhjól (minnkað þvermál) — Tiivik (vähendatud läbimõõt) —
Darbrats (samazināts diametrs) — Sparnuotė (mažesnio skersmens) — Wirnik napędzany (średnica zmniejszona) — Oběžné kolo (zmenšený
průměr) — Obežné koleso (zmenšený priemer) — Járókerék (csökkentett átmérőjű) — Rotor (diametru redus) — Ротор (намален диаметър)
— Rotor (zmanjšan premer) — Rotor (smanjeni promjer) — Rotor (smanjeni prečnik) — Φτερωτή (μειωμένη διάμετρος) — Pervane (azaltıl-
mış çap) — Крыльчатка (уменьшенный диаметр) — Крильчатка (зменшений діаметр) — ) الدفاعة )قطر مخفض
9 Girante (diametro nominale) — Impeller (full diameter) — Roue (grand diamètre) — Laufrad (voller Durchmesser) — Impulsor (diámetro
completo) — Impulsor (diâmetro total) — Rotor (volledige doorsnede) — Propel (fuld diameter) — Løpehjul (full diameter) — Pumphjul
(fullstängig diameter) — Juoksupyörä (täysi halkaisija) — Dæluhjól (fullt þvermál) — Tiivik (täisläbimõõt) — Darbrats (pilns diametrs) —
Sparnuotė (viso skersmens) — Wirnik napędzany (pełna średnica) — Oběžné kolo (plný průměr) — Obežné koleso (plný priemer) — Járóke-
rék (teljes átmérőjű) — Rotor (diametru complet) — Ротор (пълен диаметър) — Rotor (cel premer) — Rotor (puni promjer) — Rotor (puni
prečnik) — Φτερωτή (πλήρης διάμετρος) — Pervane (tam çap) — Крыльчатка (полный диаметр) — Крильчатка (повний діаметр) —
) الدفاعة )القطر بالكامل
10, Camicia — Sleeve — Manchon — Hülse — Manguito — Luva — Mof — Foring — Hylse — Hylsa — Holkki — Múffa —
10R Muhv — Uzmava — Įvorė — Tuleja — Pouzdro — Objímka — Hüvely — Manşon — Втулка — Obojka — Rukavac —
Rukavac — Δακτύλιος — Kovan — Втулка — Втулка — جلبة
11 Albero — Shaft — Arbre — Welle — Eje — Eixo — As — Aksel — Aksel — Axel — Akseli — Skaft — Võll — Vārpsta
— Velenas — Wał — Hřídel — Hriadeľ — Tengely — Ax — Вал — Gred — Osovina — Osovina — Άξονας — Mil — Вал
— Вал — العمود
12 Coperchio per bloccaggio boccola — Bush locking cover — Capot de verrouillage de bague — Buchsensicherungsabdeckung — Cubierta de
bloqueo del buje — Tampa de bloqueio do casquilho — Drukbus vergrendelkap — Dæksel til lejebøsning — Hylselåsende dekseø — Lå-
slock för bussning — Holkin lukituskansi — Læsihlíf fyrir einangrun — Hülsi lukustuskate — Ieliktņa fiksācijas pārsegs — Įvorės fiksuoja-
masis gaubtas — Pokrywa ustalająca tulei — Uzamykací kryt pouzdra — Uzamykací kryt puzdra — Hüvelyzáró fedél — Capac fixare bucşe
— Капак на заключващата втулка — Zaklepni pokrov ležajne blazine — Poklopac za blokadu čahure — Poklopac za blokadu čaure —
Κάλυμμα ασφάλισης δακτυλίου — Burç kilitleme kapağı — Крышка блокирования втулки — Кришка блокування втулки — غطاء تثبيت الجلبة
13 Disco stampato superiore con manicotti — Upper pressed holder with connections — Support embouti supérieur avec raccordements — Oberer
Druck-Halter mit Anschlüssen — Soporte con presión superior con conexiones — Suporte premido superior com ligações — Bovendrukhouder
met aansluitingen — Trykket overholder med forbindelser — Øvre presset holder med koplinger — Övre pressad hållare med anslutningar —
Ylempi puristettu pidin ja liitännät — Efripressuhaldari með tengjum — Ülemine ühendustega presshoidik — Augšējais presētais turētājs ar savie-
nojumiem — Viršutinis prispaudžiamas laikiklis su jungtimis — Górna obsada prasowana z przyłączami — Horní lisovaný držák s připojeními
268 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
— Horný lisovaný držiak s pripojeniami — Felső nyomott tartó csatlakozókkal — Suport presat superior cu conectori — Горен пресован
държач с връзки — Zgornji stisnjeni držaj s priključki — Okomito pritisnut držač s spojevima — Vertikalno pritisnut držač sa spojevima —
Επάνω πρεσαριστό στήριγμα — Bağlantıları içeren üst basılı tutucu — Верхний зажатый держатель с подключениями — Верхній затиснутий
тримач із підключеннями — حامل مضغوط علوي مزود بتوصيلات
14 Corpo pompa F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Pump body F, N, R, K, C, V, T type — Corps de pompe type F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Pumpengehäuse
Ausführungen F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Cuerpo de la bomba, tipo F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Corpo da bomba do tipo F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Pomp F, N,
R, K, C, V, T type — Pumpelegeme F-, N-, R-, K-, C-, V-, T-type — Pumpehus type F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Pumpkropp, typer F, N, R, K, C, V, T
— Pumpun runko, tyyppi F, N, R, K, C, T — Dæluyfirbygging F, N, R, K, C, V, T type — Pumba korpuse tüüp F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Sūkņa
korpuss F, N, R, K, C, V, T tipa — Siurblio korpusas F, N, R, K, C, V, T tipas — Korpus pompy typu F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Těleso čerpadla, typ
F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Telo čerpadla - typ F, N, R, K, C, V, T — F, N, R, K, C, V, T szivattyúház — Corp pompă tip F, N, R, K, C, V, T —
Корпус на помпата тип F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Telo črpalke tipa F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Tijelo pumpe F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Telo pumpe F, N, R,
K, C, V, T — Κορμός αντλίας τύπου F, N, R, K, C, V, T — Pompa gövdesi F, N, R, K, C, V, T tipi — Корпус насоса типа F, N, R, K, C, V, T —
Корпус насоса типу F, N, R, K, C, V, T — جسم المضخة من النوعF، N، R، K، C، V، T
15 Kit diffusore — Diffuser kit — Kit de diffuseur — Diffusersatz — Kit del difusor — Kit do difusor — Diffuserpakket — Diffusorsæt
— Ledeapparatsett — Diffuserarsats — Hajotinsarja — Dreifisett — Difuusorikomplekt — Difuzora komplekts — Difuzoriaus rinkinys
— Zestaw dyfuzora — Sestava difúzéru — Zostava difúzora — Diffúzorkészlet — Set difuzoare — Комплект дифузер — Oprema z
difuzerjem — Komplet difuzora — Komplet difuzora — Κιτ ρυθμιστών — Difüzör kiti — Комплект диффузора — Комплект
дифузора — طقم المنظم
16 Kit diffusore finale — Last stage diffuser kit — Kit de diffuseur de dernier étage — Diffusersatz, letzte Stufe — Kit del difusor de la última
fase — Kit do difusor de fase final — Laatste fase diffuserpakket — Sidste stadie diffusorsæt — Ledeapparatsett til siste fase — Diffuserar-
sats vid sista steget — Viimeisen vaiheen hajotinsarja — Dreifisett fyrir lokastig — Viimase astme difuusorikomplekt — Pēdējās pakāpes difu-
zora komplekts — Paskutinio etapo difuzoriaus rinkinys — Zestaw dyfuzora ostatniego stopnia — Poslední článek sestavy difúzéru — Posled-
ný článok zostavy difúzora — Utolsó szakasz diffúzorkészlete — Set difuzoare treaptă finală — Комплект дифузер последен етап — Opre-
ma z difuzerjem zadnje stopnje — Pribor završnog difuzora — Komplet završnog difuzora — Κιτ ρυθμιστών τελευταίου στάδιου — Son aşama
difüzör kiti — Комплект диффузора последнего этапа — Комплект дифузора останнього етапу — طقم منظم المرحلة الأخيرة
17 Scatola stadio iniziale — First stage box — Carter d'aspiration — Erste Stufe Diffuser — Caja de la primera fase — Caixa de fase inicial —
Eerste fase doos — Boks til første stadie — Boks til første fase — Grundstegsbox — Ensimmäisen vaiheen rasia — Fyrsta þreps hringur —
Esimese astme kast — Pirmās pakāpes korpuss — Pirmo etapo dėžė — Komora pierwszego stopnia — Skříň prvního stupně — Skriňa
prvého stupňa — Első fokozat szekrénye — Cutie prima treaptă — Кутия първо стъпало — Škatla prve stopnje — Prvostepena kutija —
Početna kutija — Κουτί πρώτου σταδίου — İlk aşama kutusu — Коробка первого этапа — Коробка першого етапу — صندوق المرحلة الأولى
18 Anello adattatore — Adapter ring — Bague d'adaptateur — Adapterring — Anillo del adaptador — Anel do adaptador — Adapterring —
Adapterring — Adapterring — Adapterring — Sovitinrengas — Hringur fyrir millistykki — Adapteri rõngas — Adaptera gredzens —
Adapterio žiedas — Pierścień adaptera — Kroužek adaptéru — Krúžok adaptéra — Adaptergyűrű — Inel adaptor — Пръстен на
адаптера — Obroček adapterja — Prsten prilagodnika — Prsten adaptera — Δακτύλιος προσαρμογέα — Adaptör halkası — Кольцо
адаптера — Кільце адаптера — حلقة المهايئ
19 Kit viti diffusore — Diffuser bolts kit — Kit de vis de diffuseur — Diffuser-Schraubensatz — Kit de pernos del difusor — Kit de parafusos
do difusor — Diffuser boutenpakket — Diffusorboltsæt — Ledeboltersett — Diffuserarskruvsats — Hajottimen pulttisarja — Boltasett
fyrir dreifara — Difuusoripoltide komplekt — Difuzora skrūvju komplekts — Difuzoriaus varžtų rinkinys — Zestaw śrub dyfuzora — Sesta-
va šroubů difúzéru — Zostava skrutiek difúzora — Diffúzorcsavar-készlet — Set şuruburi difuzor — Комплект болтове на дифузера —
Oprema z vijaki difuzerja — Komplet vijaka difuzora — Komplet zavrtnja difuzora — Κιτ μπουλονιών ρυθμιστών — Difüzör cıvata kiti —
Комплект болтов диффузора — Комплект болтів дифузора — طقم مسامير المنظم
*20, Tenuta meccanica — Mechanical seal — Joint mécanique — Gleitringdichtung — Sello mecánico — Vedante mecânico — Mechanische
20A afdichting — Mekanisk akseltætning — Mekanisk tetning — Mekanisk tätning — Mekaaninen tiiviste — Vélaþétti — Mehaaniline tihend
— Mehāniskā blīve — Mechaninis sandariklis — Uszczelnienie mechaniczne — Mechanické těsnění — Mechanické tesnenie — Mechanikus
tömítés — Garnitură mecanică — Механично уплътнение — Mehansko tesnilo — Mehanički zatvarač — Mehanički zatvarač —
Μηχανική στεγανοποίηση — Mekanik keçe — Механическое уплотнение — Механічне ущільнення — مانع التسرب الميكانيكي
*21 Kit o-ring — o-ring kit — Kit de joints toriques — O-Ringsatz — Kit de junta tórica — kit do o-ring — o-ringpakket — o-ringssæt —
o-ring-sett — O-ringskit — O-rengassarja — Sett fyrir o-laga þétti — O-rõngaste komplekt — blīvgredzenu komplekts — O tipo žiedas
— Zestaw pierścienia uszczelniającego typu O-ring — Souprava o-kroužků — Zostava o-krúžku — O-gyűrű készlet — Set inel de etanşare
— Комплект о-пръстен — Oprema z O-obročkom — komplet o-prstenova — komplet o-prstenova — Κιτ δακτυλίου κυκλικής διατομής —
o-ring kiti — Комплект уплотнительного кольца — комплект ущільнювального кільця — طقم الحلقة الدائرية
22 Anello per sede rasamento diffusore — Diffuser wear ring support ring — Bague d'appui de bague d'usure de diffuseur — Diffuser-Versch-
leißring-Stützring — Anillo de soporte de desgaste del difusor — Anel de suporte do anel de desgaste to difusor — Diffuser slijtring draagring
— Diffusorslidring støttering — Støttering til ledesliteringen — Stödring för diffuserarens slitring — Hajottimen kulumisrenkaan tukirengas —
Stoðhringur fyrir slithring dreifara — Difuusori tihendusrõnga tugirõngas — Difuzoru nodilumgredzena atbalsta gredzens — Difuzoriaus susidė-
vinčiojo žiedo atraminis žiedas — Pierścień oporowy pierścienia ciernego dyfuzora — Podpěrný kroužek kroužku opotřebení difúzéru — Pod-
porný krúžok krúžku opotrebenia difúzora — Diffúzor kopógyűrű támasztógyűrű — Inel de suport pentru inel de uzură difuzor — Опорен
пръстен на носещия пръстен на дифузера — Podporni obroček nosilnega obročka difuzerja — Potporni prsten podmetača difuzora — Pot-
porni prsten podmetača difuzora — Δακτύλιος υποστήριξης δακτυλίου φθοράς ρυθμιστών — Difüzör aşınma halkası destek halkası — Опорное
кольцо компенсационного кольца диффузора — Опорне кільце компенсаційного кільця дифузора — الحلقة الساندة لحلقة البلى بالمنظم
e-SV 269
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
23 Anello di sollevamento — Lifting ring — Bague de levage — Hebeöse — Anillo de elevación — Anel de içamento — Hijsring —
Løftering — Løftering — Lyftring — Nostorengas — Lyftihringur — Tõsterõngas — Pacelšanas gredzens — Kėlimo kilpa — Pier-
ścień nośny — Zvedací kroužek — Zdvíhací krúžok — Emelőgyűrű — Inel de ridicare — Повдигащ пръстен — Obroček za dvigovanje
— Prsten za podizanje — Prsten za podizanje — Δακτύλιος ανύψωσης — Kaldırma halkası — Подъемное кольцо — Підйомне кільце —
حلقة الرفع
24 Flangia per motore — Flange for motor — Bride pour moteur — Flansch für Motor — Brida para motor — Junta do motor — Flens voor
motor — Flange til motor — Motorflens — Fläns för motor — Moottorin laippa — Flangs fyrir vél — Mootori äärik — Atloks motora
nostiprināšanai — Varikliui skirta jungė — Kołnierz do mocowania silnika — Příruba pro motor — Príruba pre motor — Motor karima —
Flanşă pentru motor — Фланец за мотор — Prirobnica za motor — Prirubnica za motor — Prirubnica motora — Φλάντζα για κινητήρα
— Motor flanşı — Фланец для двигателя — Фланець для двигуна — شفة للموتور
25 Kit controflange ovali + o-ring (per tipo T) — Oval counterflanges + o-rings kit (for T-type) — Contre-brides ovales + kit joint torique (pour type
T) — Ovale Gegenflansche + O-Ringesatz (für T-Typ) — Kit de contrabridas ovaladas + juntas tóricas (para el tipo T) — Kit de contra-juntas
ovais + o-rings (para tipo T) — Ovale tegenflenzen + o-rings pakket (voor T-type) — Ovale kontraflanger + O-ringssæt (til T-type) — Oval
motflens + o-ring-sett (til T-type) — Ovala motflänsar + o-ringskit (för T-typ) — Soikeat vastalaipat + O-rengassarja (T-tyyppi) — Ávalir mót-
flangsar + O-hringjasett (fyrir gerð T) — Ovaalsed vastasäärikud + O-rõngaste komplekt (T-tüübi jaoks) — Ovālie kontratloki + blīvgredzenu
komplekts (tipam "T") — Ovalių priešpriešinių jungių ir O tipo žiedo rinkinys (skirta T tipui) — Zestaw przeciwkołnierzy owalnych + pierścieni
uszczelniających typu O-ring (dla typu T) — Oválné protipříruby + sestava o-kroužků (pro typ T) — Oválne protipríruby + súprava tesniacich
krúžkov (pre typ T) — Ovális ellenkarima + O-gyűrű készlet (T típushoz) — Contraflanşe ovale + set garnituri inelare (pentru tipul T) —
Комплект овални контрафланци + о-пръстени (за Т-тип) — Ovalne protiprirobnice in komplet tesnilnih obročkov (za T-tip) — Ovalne protu-
prirubnice + komplet o-prstenova (za T-tip) — Ovalne protivprirubnice+ komplet o-prstenova (za T tip) — Οβάλ αριστερόστροφες φλάντζες + κιτ
δακτυλίου κυκλικής διατομής (για τύπο T) — Oval ters flanşlar + o-ring kiti (T-tipi için) — Овальные контрфланцы + комплект уплотнительных
колец (для типа Т) — Овальні контрфланці + комплект ущільнюючих кілець (для типу Т) — طقم الحلقات الدائرية )للنوع+ الشفات المقابلة البيضاوية
T)
26 Kit coppia di semigiunti — Pair of halfcouplings kit — Kit paire de demi-accouplements — Halbkupplungspaar-Satz — kit de par de medioa-
coplamiento — Kit de par de meios-acoplamentos — Paar halfkoppelingen pakket — Sæt med et par halvkoblinger — Sett med et par halvko-
plinger — Par med halvkopplingssatser — Puolikytkinparisarja — Tvö hálftengjasett — Poolühenduslülide paari komplekt — Pussavienoju-
mu pāra komplekts — Pusinių movų poros rinkinys — Zestaw pary półsprzęgieł — Sestava páru polovičních spojek — Zostava páru polovič-
ných spojok — Félkapcsoló pár készlet — Set pereche de semicuplaje — Комплект двойка полукуплунги — Opreme s parom polspojk —
Par kompleta poluspojki — Par kompleta poluspojnica — Κιτ με ζεύγος από ημισυνδέσμους πέδης — Çift yarım manşon kiti — Комплект пар
полумуфт — Комплект пар напівмуфт — طقم زوج من القارنات النصفية
27 Protezioni giunto — Coupling guards — Protecteurs d'accouplement — Kupplungsschutz — Protectores de acoplamiento — Protecções do
acoplamento — Koppelingsbescherming — Koblingsværn — Koplingsbeskyttelse — Kopplingsskydd — Kytkinsuojat — Tengihlífar —
Sidestuskaitsmed — Sajūga pārsegi — Movos apsaugos — Osłony sprzęgła stałego — Spojovací kryty — Ochrany spojky — Csatlakozó
burkolatok — Protecţii cuplaj — Защити за куплунги — Ščitnika za spoj — Zaštita spojki — Štitnik spojke — Προστατευτικά σύνδεσης
— Kuplaj korumaları — Кожухи муфт — Кожухи муфт — واقيات القارنة
28 Kit tamburo reggispinta e bloccaggio pacco giranti — Thrust drum and impeller stack locking kit — Kit d'immobilisation de roues et butée axiale
— Drucktrommel und Laufradsicherungssatz — Kit de bloqueo de la pila del impulsor y el tambor de empuje — Tambor de impulso e kit de
bloqueio da pilha do impulsor — Stuwdrum en waaieraccumulatie vergrendelpakket — Trykkraftstromme- og propelholderlåsesæt — Trykksylin-
der og sett med vertikal låseinnretning til løpehjulet — Låssats för trycktrumma och pumphjulsstapel — Painerumpu- ja juoksupyöräpinon lukitus-
sarja — Læsisett fyrir þrýstitunnu og dæluhjólastakk — Survevaadi ja tiivikute lukustuskomplekt — Slodzes trumuļa un darbrata fiksācijas kom-
plekts — Atraminio būgno ir sparnuotės dėklo fiksavimo rinkinys — Bęben oporowy i zestaw ustalający zespołu wirników — Pojistná sestava
tlakového bubnu a šachty oběžného kola — Zaisťovacia zostava tlakového bubna a šachty obežného kolesa — Nyomóedény és járókerék egység
rögzítőkészlet — Set fixare ansamblu rotor şi tambur de contrapresiune — Комплект за заключване на тласкащия барабан и групата ротори
— Odbojni boben in oprema za zaklep sklopa rotorja — Potisni bubanj i komplet za blokadu rotora — Potisni bubanj i komplet za blokadu
rotora — Κύλινδρος προώθησης και κιτ ασφάλισης προφόρτισης φτερωτής — İtici silindir ve pervane yığın kilitleme kiti — Комплект фиксатора
упорного барабана и пакета крыльчатки — Комплект фіксатора опорного барабана і пакета крильчатки — طقم تثبيت الاسطوانة الدفعية ومكدس
الدفاعة
29 Kit di bloccaggio pacco giranti — Impeller stack locking kit — Kit d'immobilisation des roues — Laufradsicherungssatz — Kit de bloqueo de
la pila del impulsor — Kit de bloqueio da pilha do impulsor — Rotorstapelvergrendelingsset — Propelholderlåsesæt — Sett med vertikal lå-
seinnretning til løpehjulet — Låssats för pumphjulsstapel — Juoksupyöräpinon lukitussarja — Læsisett fyrir dæluhjólastakk — Tiivikute luku-
stuskomplekt — Darbrata fiksācijas komplekts — Sparnuotės dėklo fiksavimo rinkinys — Zestaw ustalający zespołu wirników — Pojistná se-
stava šachty oběžného kola — Zaisťovacia zostava šachty obežného kolesa — Járókerék egység rögzítőkészlet — Set fixare ansamblu rotor —
Заключващ комплект за групата ротори — Oprema za zaklep sklopa rotorja — Komplet za blokadu rotora — Komplet za blokadu rotora —
Κιτ ασφάλισης προφόρτισης φτερωτής — Pervane yığın kilitleme kiti — Комплект фиксатора пакета крыльчатки — Комплект фіксатора
пакета крильчатки — طقم تثبيت مكدس الدفاعة
30 Kit boccole per tenute meccaniche — Mechanical seal bush kit — Kit de bague de joint mécanique — Gleitringdichtungsbuchsensatz — Kit
del buje del sello mecánico — Kit do casquilho do vedante mecânico — Bush kit mechanische afdichting — Mekanisk plomberingsemnesæt —
Mekanisk tetningshylsesett — Mekanisk tätningsbussningskit — Mekaaninen tiivisteholkkisarja — Ásþétti múffusett — Mehaanilise tihendi
hülsside komplekt — Mehāniskā blīvējuma slīdgultņu bukšu komplekts — Mechaninio sandariklio įvorių rinkinys — Zestaw tulei uszczelnienia
mechanicznego — Sestava pouzdra mechanických ucpávek — Mechanické tesnenie — Mechanikus tömítőpersely-készlet — Set bucşă garni-
tură mecanică — Механично уплътнение — Sklop puše mehanskega tesnila — Komplet čahura mehaničkog zatvarača — Komplet čaure
270 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
mehaničkog zatvarača — Κιτ εδράνων μηχανικής στεγανοποίησης — Mekanik keçe burcu kiti — Комплект втулки механического уплотнения
— Комплект втулки механічного ущільнення — طقم جلبة مانع التسرب الميكانيكي
31 Kit tiranti — Tie rods kit — Kit de biellettes — Zugstrebensatz — Kit del tirante — Kit dos tirantes — Set trekstaven — Styrestangssæt
— Strekkstangsett — Dragstångssats — Liitostankosarja — Millistangasett — Sidusvarraste komplekt — Savilcēju komplekts — Įtempi-
mo trauklių rinkinys — Zestaw ściągów — Sestava spojovacích tyčí — Zostava tyčí riadenia — Kapcsolórúd készlet — Set tije de legătură
— Комплект анкерни болтове — Komplet končnikov — Komplet krajnice — Komplet spona — Κιτ με μπουλόνια σύσφιξης — Rot kolu
kiti — Комплект стяжек — Комплект хомутів — طقم قضبان الربط
32 Kit supporto inferiore con boccola — Lower support and bush kit — Kit de support inférieur et bague — Untere Halterung und Buchsensatz
— Kit del buje y soporte inferior — Suporte inferior e kit de casquilhos — Ondersteun en drukbus pakket — Laveste støtte- og bøsningssæt
— Nedre sett og hylsesett — Sats för nedre stöd och bussning — Alatuki- ja holkkisarja — Neðri stoð og einangrunarsett — Alumine tugi ja
hülsside komplekt — Apakšējais balsts un ieliktņu komplekts — Apatinės atramos ir įvorių rinkinys — Zestaw dolnego podparcia z tuleją —
Sestava spodní podpěry a pouzdra — Zostava spodnej podpery a puzdra — Alsó konzol és hüvelykészlet — Set bucşe şi suport inferior —
Комплект долна опора и втулка — Spodnja podpora in oprema z ležajno blazino — Komplet donje potpore i čahure — Komplet donje potpo-
re i čaure — Χαμηλή στήριξη και κιτ στεγανοποίησης — Alt destek ve burç kiti — Нижняя опора и комплект втулки — Нижня опора і
комплект втулки — السنادة السفلية وطقم الجلب
33 Kit diffusore con boccola — Diffuser and bush kit — Kit diffuseur et bague — Diffuser- und Buchsensatz — Kit del buje y difusor —
Difusor e kit de casquilhos — Diffuser en drukbuspakket — Diffusor- og bøsningssæt — Ledeapparat og hylsesett — Sats för diffuserare och
bussning — Hajotin- ja holkkisarja — Dreifari og einangrunarsett — Difuusori ja hülsside komplekt — Difuzoru un ieliktņu komplekts —
Difuzoriaus ir įvorių rinkinys — Zestaw dyfuzora z tuleją — Sestava difúzéru a pouzdra — Zostava difúzora a puzdra — Diffúzor és hüvely-
készlet — Set bucşe şi difuzoare — Комплект дифузер и втулка — Difuzer in oprema z ležajno blazino — Komplet difuzora i čahure —
Komplet difuzora i čaure — Ρυθμιστής και κιτ στεγανοποίησης — Difüzör ve burç kiti — Диффузор и комплект втулки — Дифузор і
комплект втулки — المنظم وطقم الجلب
34 Kit parti di usura — Wear parts kit — Kit de pièces d'usure — Verschleißteilesatz — Kit de piezas con desgaste — Kit das peças de desgaste
— Pakket voor versleten onderdelen — Slitagedelssæt — Sett med slitasjedeler — Slitagedelskit — Kulutusosasarja — Slithlutasett —
Kulumisosade komplekt — Dilstošo elementu komplekts — Susidėvinčių dalių rinkinys — Zestaw części eksploatacyjnych — Sestava pro
opotřebené součásti — Súprava pre opotrebované diely — Kopóalkatrész készlet — Set piese uzate — Комплект части, подложени на
износване — Komplet obrabnih delov — Komplet potrošnih dijelova — Komplet potrošnih delova — Κιτ για εξαρτήματα με φθορά —
Aşınma parçaları kiti — Комплект изнашиваемых деталей — Комплект зношуваних деталей — طقم قطع البلى
35 Anello per camicia — Ring for sleeve — Bague pour manchon — Ring für Hülse — Anillo para el manguito — Anel para camisa — Ring
voor mof — Ring til muffe — Ring til hylse — Hylsring — Holkin rengas — Hringur fyrir múffu — Muhvirõngas — Uzmavas gredzens
— Įvorės žiedas — Pierścień do tulei — Kroužek pouzdra — Krúžok puzdra — Hüvelygyűrű — Inel pentru manşon — Пръстен за
ръкава — Obroček za objemko — Prsten rukavca — Prsten rukavca — Δακτύλιος για περίβλημα — Manşon halkası — Кольцо втулки
— Кільце втулки — حلقة للجلبة
* Parti di ricambio consigliate — Recommended spare parts — Pièces de rechange conseillées — Empfohlene Ersatzteile — Piezas de repuesto
recomendadas — Peças sobressalentes recomendadas — Aanbevolen reserveonderdelen — Anbefalede reservedele — Anbefalte reservedeler
— Rekommenderade reservdelar — Suositeltavat varaosat — Ráðlagðir aukahlutir — Soovituslikud varuosad — Ieteicamās rezerves daļas —
Rekomenduojamos atsarginės dalys — Zalecane części zapasowe — Doporučené náhradní díly — Odporúčané náhradné diely — Javasolt pó-
talkatrészek — Piese de schimb recomandate — Препоръчвани резервни части — Priporočeni nadomestni deli — Preporučeni zamjenski
dijelovi — Preporučeni rezervni delovi — Προτεινόμενα ανταλλακτικά — Önerilen yedek parçalar — Рекомендуемые запасные части —
Рекомендовані запасні частини — قطع الغيار الموصى بها
28.
T T
50 Hz 2900 min-1 50 Hz 2900 min-1
1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
1SV02F003M 12,2 1SV02F003T 12,2 5SV13F022M 98,3 5SV13F022T 98,3
1SV03F003M 18 1SV03F003T 18 5SV14F022M 105,7 5SV14F022T 105,7
1SV04F003M 23,7 1SV04F003T 23,7 5SV15F022M 113,1 5SV15F022T 113,1
1SV05F003M 29,3 1SV05F003T 29,3 5SV16F022M 120,5 5SV16F022T 120,5
1SV06F003M 34,8 1SV06F003T 34,8 - - 5SV18F030T 135,8
1SV07F003M 40,2 1SV07F003T 40,2 - - 5SV21F030T 157,9
1SV08F005M 48,1 1SV08F005T 48,1 - - 5SV23F040T 174,4
1SV09F005M 53,7 1SV09F005T 53,7 - - 5SV25F040T 189,2
1SV10F005M 59,4 1SV10F005T 59,4 - - 5SV28F040T 211,5
1SV11F005M 65,1 1SV11F005T 65,1 - - 5SV30F055T 227
1SV12F007M 73,3 1SV12F007T 73,3 - - 5SV33F055T 249,2
1SV13F007M 79,2 1SV13F007T 79,2 10SV01F007M 11,8 10SV01F007T 11,8
1SV15F007M 90,9 1SV15F007T 90,9 10SV02F007M 23,6 10SV02F007T 23,6
1SV17F011M 105,2 1SV17F011T 105,2 10SV03F011M 35,7 10SV03F011T 35,7
1SV19F011M 117 1SV19F011T 117 10SV04F015M 47,7 10SV04F015T 47,7
1SV22F011M 134,6 1SV22F011T 134,6 10SV05F022M 60 10SV05F022T 60
1SV25F015M 152,6 1SV25F015T 152,6 10SV06F022M 71, 10SV06F022T 71,8
1SV27F015M 164,3 1SV27F015T 164,3 - - 10SV07F030T 83,6
e-SV 271
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
T T
50 Hz 2900 min-1 50 Hz 2900 min-1
1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
1SV30F015M 181,7 1SV30F015T 181,7 - - 10SV08F030T 95,3
1SV32F022M 197,2 1SV32F022T 197,2 - - 10SV09F040T 106,3
1SV34F022M 209,2 1SV34F022T 209,2 - - 10SV10F040T 118
1SV37F022M 225,9 1SV37F022T 225,9 - - 10SV11F040T 129,6
3SV02F003M 14,9 3SV02F003T 14,9 - - 10SV13F055T 156
3SV03F003M 22 3SV03F003T 22 - - 10SV15F055T 179,5
3SV04F003M 28,9 3SV04F003T 28,9 - - 10SV17F075T 205
3SV05F005M 37,2 3SV05F005T 37,2 - - 10SV18F075T 216,9
3SV06F005M 44,4 3SV06F005T 44,4 - - 10SV20F075T 240,6
3SV07F007M 52,5 3SV07F007T 52,5 - - 10SV21F110T 253,6
3SV08F007M 60 3SV08F007T 60 15SV01F011M 14 15SV01F011T 14
3SV09F011M 67,7 3SV09F011T 67,7 15SV02F022M 28,7 15SV02F022T 28,7
3SV10F011M 75 3SV10F011T 75 - - 15SV03F030T 43,3
3SV11F011M 82,3 3SV11F011T 82,3 - - 15SV04F040T 58,4
3SV12F011M 89,6 3SV12F011T 89,6 - - 15SV05F040T 72,7
3SV13F015M 98,1 3SV13F015T 98,1 - - 15SV06F055T 87,6
3SV14F015M 105,6 3SV14F015T 105,6 - - 15SV07F055T 101,9
3SV16F015M 119,9 3SV16F015T 119,9 - - 15SV08F075T 117,4
3SV19F022M 144,3 3SV19F022T 144,3 - - 15SV09F075T 131,9
3SV21F022M 159,3 3SV21F022T 159,3 - - 15SV10F110T 147,7
3SV23F022M 174 3SV23F022T 174 - - 15SV11F110T 162,3
3SV25F022M 188,5 3SV25F022T 188,5 - - 15SV13F110T 191,3
- - 3SV27F030T 204,4 - - 15SV15F150T 222,1
- - 3SV29F030T 219,3 - - 15SV17F150T 251,6
- - 3SV31F030T 233,8 22SV01F011M 14,7 22SV01F011T 14,7
- - 3SV33F030T 248,5 22SV02F022M 30,4 22SV02F022T 30,4
5SV02F003M 14,8 5SV02F003T 14,8 - - 22SV03F030T 45,4
5SV03F005M 21,8 5SV03F005T 21,8 - - 22SV04F040T 60,9
5SV04F005M 30 5SV04F005T 30 - - 22SV05F055T 76
5SV05F007M 38 5SV05F007T 38 - - 22SV06F075T 93,2
5SV06F011M 45,3 5SV06F011T 45,3 - - 22SV07F075T 108,5
5SV07F011M 52,7 5SV07F011T 52,7 - - 22SV08F110T 124,6
5SV08F011M 60,1 5SV08F011T 60,1 - - 22SV09F110T 140,1
5SV09F015M 68 5SV09F015T 68 - - 22SV10F110T 155,4
5SV10F015M 75,5 5SV10F015T 75,5 - - 22SV12F150T 186,1
5SV11F015M 82,8 5SV11F015T 82,8 - - 22SV14F150T 216,6
5SV12F022M 90,8 5SV12F022T 90,8 - - 22SV17F185T 263,5
T T
50 Hz 2900 min-1 50 Hz 1,450 min-1
3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
33SV1/1AG022T 17,4 46SV9/2AG300T 224,8 1SV02F0024T 3,1 22SV14F0224T 53,9
33SV1G030T 23,8 46SV9G370T 240,9 1SV05F0024T 7,7 22SV17F0304T 65,3
33SV2/2AG040T 35,1 46SV10/2AG370T 252,7 1SV08F0024T 12,2 33SV3/2AG0114T 14,4
33SV2/1AG040T 40,8 46SV10G370T 267,6 1SV11F0024T 16,7 33SV4/1AG0114T 21,8
33SV2G055T 47,8 46SV11/2AG450T 280,4 1SV15F0024T 22,6 33SV5G0154T 29,4
33SV3/2AG055T 57,7 46SV11G450T 295,5 1SV19F0024T 28,8 33SV6G0224T 35,9
33SV3/1AG075T 64,5 46SV12/2AG450T 307,3 1SV22F0024T 33,2 33SV7G0224T 41,6
33SV3G075T 71,5 46SV12G450T 321,8 1SV27F0024T 40,1 33SV8G0304T 47,9
33SV4/2AG075T 82 46SV13/2AG450T 332,5 1SV30F0024T 44,4 33SV9G0304T 53,3
33SV4/1AG110T 88,9 66SV1/1AG040T 23,8 1SV34F0024T 50 33SV10G0304T 59
33SV4G110T 95,9 66SV1G055T 29,2 1SV37F0024T 54,2 33SV11G0404T 65,7
33SV5/2AG110T 106 66SV2/2AG075T 47,5 3SV02F0024T 3,8 33SV12G0404T 71,5
33SV5/1AG110T 112,7 66SV2/1AG110T 54,2 3SV05F0024T 9,5 33SV13G0404T 77,2
33SV5G150T 120,4 66SV2G110T 60,4 3SV08F0024T 15,1 46SV2G0114T 13
33SV6/2AG150T 131,2 66SV3/2AG150T 78,4 3SV11F0024T 20,6 46SV3G0154T 19,8
33SV6/1AG150T 139,1 66SV3/1AG150T 84,7 3SV14F0024T 26,1 46SV4G0224T 26,3
33SV6G150T 145,6 66SV3G185T 91,4 3SV19F0024T 33,3 46SV5G0224T 32,6
33SV7/2AG150T 156 66SV4/2AG185T 108,9 3SV23F0024T 42,2 46SV6G0304T 39,3
33SV7/1AG185T 163,3 66SV4/1AG220T 115,2 3SV27F0034T 49,7 46SV7G0304T 45,5
33SV7G185T 170,3 66SV4G220T 121,6 3SV33F0034T 60,2 46SV8G0404T 52,5
33SV8/2AG185T 180,6 66SV5/2AG300T 139,1 5SV03F0024T 5,7 46SV9G0404T 58,9
33SV8/1AG185T 187,4 66SV5/1AG300T 145,6 5SV06F0024T 11,3 46SV10G0554T 66,2
33SV8G220T 194,1 66SV5G300T 152 5SV09F0024T 16,8 46SV11G0554T 72,6
33SV9/2AG220T 202,1 66SV6/2AG300T 169,5 5SV12F0024T 22,2 46SV12G0554T 78,9
33SV9/1AG220T 210,2 66SV6/1AG300T 176 5SV15F0034T 27,5 66SV1G0114T 7,3
272 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
T T
50 Hz 2900 min-1 50 Hz 1,450 min-1
3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
33SV9G220T 216,8 66SV6G370T 182,4 5SV18F0034T 33,1 66SV2G0154T 14,8
33SV10/2AG220T 226,4 66SV7/2AG370T 199,9 5SV21F0034T 38,4 66SV3G0224T 22,3
33SV10/1AG300T 234,5 66SV7/1AG370T 206,4 5SV25F0054T 45,3 66SV4G0304T 29,7
33SV10G300T 241,8 66SV7G450T 212,8 5SV28F0054T 51,7 66SV5G0404T 37,5
33SV11/2AG300T 252 66SV8/2AG450T 230,3 5SV33F0074T 60,5 66SV6G0404T 44,7
33SV11/1AG300T 259 66SV8/1AG450T 236,8 10SV03F0054T 9 66SV7G0554T 52,8
33SV11G300T 265,7 66SV8G450T 243,2 10SV04F0054T 12 66SV8G0554T 60,1
33SV12/2AG300T 275,9 92SV1/1AG055T 24,5 10SV06F0054T 17,9 92SV1G0114T 8,3
33SV12/1AG300T 282,8 92SV1G075T 33,5 10SV08F0054T 23,6 92SV2G0224T 16,3
33SV12G300T 289,8 92SV2/2AG110T 49,4 10SV10F0054T 28,9 92SV3G0304T 24,4
33SV13/2AG300T 300,5 92SV2G150T 67,8 10SV13F0074T 37,9 92SV4G0404T 32,9
33SV13/1AG300T 306,9 92SV3/2AG185T 82,4 10SV15F0074T 44,1 92SV5G0554T 41,6
46SV1/1AG030T 19,5 92SV3G220T 102,2 10SV17F0114T 49,6 92SV6G0554T 49,5
46SV1G040T 27,2 92SV4/2AG300T 115,7 10SV19F0114T 55,2 92SV7G0754T 58
46SV2/2AG055T 38,8 92SV4G300T 133,1 10SV21F0114T 62,8 92SV8G0754T 65,9
46SV2G075T 52,6 92SV5/2AG370T 149 15SV03F0054T 10,7 125SV1G0114T 6,9
46SV3/2AG110T 64,7 92SV5G370T 166,4 15SV05F0054T 17,8 125SV2G0224T 13,5
46SV3G110T 80,8 92SV6/2AG450T 183,3 15SV07F0074T 24,6 125SV3/3BG0224T 17,5
46SV4/2AG150T 92,4 92SV6G450T 200,9 15SV09F0114T 32,8 125SV4/4BG030T 23,3
46SV4G150T 107,3 92SV7/2AG450T 216,8 15SV11F0114T 40,1 125SV5/5AG040T 31,4
46SV5/2AG185T 117,2 125SV1G075T 27,6 15SV13F0154T 47,6 125SV6G055T 40,4
46SV5G185T 134,5 125SV2G150T 53,8 15SV15F0154T 54,8 125SV7G075T 47,1
46SV6/2AG220T 143,7 125SV3G220T 80,7 15SV17F0224T 62,5 125SV8G075T 53,8
46SV6G220T 161 125SV4G300T 107,6 22SV04F0054T 14,9
46SV7/2AG300T 171,3 125SV5G370T 134,5 22SV06F0114T 22,6
46SV7G300T 188,6 125SV6G450T 161,4 22SV08F0114T 30,8
46SV8/2AG300T 198,2 125SV7G550T 188,3 22SV10F0154T 38,6
46SV8G300T 213,1 125SV8/2AG550T 211,5 22SV12F0224T 46
T T
60 Hz 3500 min-1 60 Hz 3500 min-1
1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
1SV02F0036M 17,4 1SV02F0036T 17,4 - - 5SV10F0306T 109,2
1SV03F0036M 25,7 1SV03F0036T 25,7 - - 5SV11F0306T 119,9
1SV04F0036M 33,9 1SV04F0036T 33,9 - - 5SV12F0306T 130,6
1SV05F0056M 43,6 1SV05F0056T 43,6 - - 5SV13F0406T 142,5
1SV06F0056M 52,1 1SV06F0056T 52,1 - - 5SV14F0406T 153,4
1SV07F0076M 61 1SV07F0076T 61 - - 5SV15F0406T 164,2
1SV08F0076M 69,4 1SV08F0076T 69,4 - - 5SV16F0406T 174,9
1SV09F0076M 77,9 1SV09F0076T 77,9 - - 5SV17F0556T 186,4
1SV10F0116M 87,6 1SV10F0116T 87,6 - - 5SV19F0556T 208
1SV11F0116M 96,2 1SV11F0116T 96,2 - - 5SV21F0556T 229,6
1SV12F0116M 104,7 1SV12F0116T 104,7 - - 5SV23F0556T 251
1SV13F0116M 113,2 1SV13F0116T 113,2 10SV01F0076M 17 10SV01F0076T 17
1SV15F0156M 131,2 1SV15F0156T 131,2 10SV02F0156M 34,2 10SV02F0156T 34,2
1SV17F0156M 148,3 1SV17F0156T 148,3 10SV03F0226M 51,8 10SV03F0226T 51,8
1SV18F0226M 158,4 1SV18F0226T 158,4 - - 10SV04F0306T 69,2
1SV20F0226M 175,7 1SV20F0226T 175,7 - - 10SV05F0406T 87,3
1SV22F0226M 192,9 1SV22F0226T 192,9 - - 10SV06F0406T 104,5
1SV24F0226M 210,1 1SV24F0226T 210,1 - - 10SV07F0556T 122,1
1SV26F0226M 227,3 1SV26F0226T 227,3 - - 10SV08F0556T 139,2
1SV28F0306M 245,4 1SV28F0306T 245,4 - - 10SV09F0756T 157,4
3SV02F0036M 21,3 3SV02F0036T 21,3 - - 10SV10F0756T 174,7
3SV03F0056M 32,6 3SV03F0056T 32,6 - - 10SV11F0756T 192
3SV04F0076M 43,4 3SV04F0076T 43,4 - - 10SV13F1106T 226,7
3SV05F0116M 54,7 3SV05F0116T 54,7 - - 10SV15F1106T 261,2
3SV06F0116M 65,4 3SV06F0116T 65,4 15SV01F0156M 19,9 15SV01F0156T 19,9
3SV07F0116M 76,1 3SV07F0116T 76,1 - - 15SV02F0306T 41,9
3SV08F0156M 87,2 3SV08F0156T 87,2 - - 15SV03F0406T 63
3SV09F0156M 97,8 3SV09F0156T 97,8 - - 15SV04F0556T 83,9
3SV10F0226M 109,5 3SV10F0226T 109,5 - - 15SV05F0756T 105,4
3SV11F0226M 120,3 3SV11F0226T 120,3 - - 15SV06F1106T 126,7
3SV12F0226M 131 3SV12F0226T 131 - - 15SV07F1106T 147,6
3SV13F0226M 141,8 3SV13F0226T 141,8 - - 15SV08F1506T 171,9
3SV14F0226M 152,5 3SV14F0226T 152,5 - - 15SV09F1506T 193,2
- - 3SV15F0306T 164,4 - - 15SV10F1506T 214,4
e-SV 273
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
T T
60 Hz 3500 min-1 60 Hz 3500 min-1
1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 1~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
- - 3SV17F0306T 185,9 - - 15SV11F1856T 236,4
- - 3SV19F0306T 207,3 - - 15SV12F1856T 257,8
- - 3SV21F0406T 230,9 22SV01F0226M 22,2 22SV01F0226T 22,2
- - 3SV23F0406T 252,5 - - 22SV02F0406T 44,5
5SV02F0056M 21,9 5SV02F0056T 21,9 - - 22SV03F0556T 66,7
5SV03F0076M 32,7 5SV03F0076T 32,7 - - 22SV04F0756T 89
5SV04F0116M 43,9 5SV04F0116T 43,9 - - 22SV05F1106T 111,5
5SV05F0156M 55 5SV05F0156T 55 - - 22SV06F1106T 133,5
5SV06F0156M 65,9 5SV06F0156T 65,9 - - 22SV07F1506T 156,4
5SV07F0226M 76,5 5SV07F0226T 76,5 - - 22SV08F1506T 178,6
5SV08F0226M 87,2 5SV08F0226T 87,2 - - 22SV09F1856T 201,3
5SV09F0226M 97,8 5SV09F0226T 97,8 - - 22SV10F1856T 223,5
T T
60 Hz 3500 min-1 60 Hz 3500 min-1
3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
33SV1/1AG0306T 24,5 33SV7/1AG3006T 233,9 46SV5G3706T 194,6 66SV5/2AG4506T 191,9
33SV1G0556T 34,5 33SV7G3006T 243,3 46SV6/2AG3706T 210,5 66SV5/1AG4506T 202
33SV2/2AG0556T 49,6 33SV8/2AG3706T 259,3 46SV6/1AG3706T 222 66SV5G4506T 212,2
33SV2/1AG0756T 59,6 33SV8/1AG3706T 268,7 46SV6G3706T 233,6 92SV1/1AG1106T 36,4
33SV2G1106T 69,4 33SV8G3706T 278,1 46SV7/2AG4506T 250,3 92SV1G1506T 49,5
33SV3/2AG1106T 86 46SV1/1AG0556T 29,1 46SV7/1AG4506T 261,8 92SV2/2AG1856T 69,9
33SV3/1AG1106T 94,7 46SV1G0756T 39,9 46SV7G4506T 273,4 92SV2/1AG2206T 83,6
33SV3G1506T 104,2 46SV2/2AG1106T 56,7 66SV1/1AG0756T 31,4 92SV2G3006T 97,9
33SV4/2AG1506T 119,8 46SV2/1AG1106T 67,8 66SV1G1106T 43,8 92SV3/2AG3706T 117,4
33SV4/1AG1506T 128,9 46SV2G1506T 78,2 66SV2/2AG1506T 64,5 92SV3/1AG3706T 131,5
33SV4G1856T 138,3 46SV3/2AG1856T 95,5 66SV2/1AG1856T 74,9 92SV3G4506T 144,9
33SV5/2AG1856T 155,8 46SV3/1AG1856T 106,1 66SV2G1856T 85,4 92SV4/2AG4506T 163
33SV5/1AG2206T 163,9 46SV3G1856T 117,2 66SV3/2AG2206T 106,6 125SV1G1506T 40,1
33SV5G2206T 173 46SV4/2AG2206T 134,1 66SV3/1AG3006T 117,4 125SV2/2AG2206T 73
33SV6/2AG2206T 189 46SV4/1AG3006T 144,2 66SV3G3006T 127,8 125SV3/3BG3006T 101,9
33SV6/1AG3006T 199,2 46SV4G3006T 155,7 66SV4/2AG3706T 149,1 125SV3G3706T 117,5
33SV6G3006T 208,5 46SV5/2AG3006T 171,6 66SV4/1AG3706T 159,2 125SV4/4AG4506T 146,1
33SV7/2AG3006T 224,6 46SV5/1AG3006T 183,1 66SV4G3706T 169,3 125SV5/5AG5506T 182,6
T T
60 Hz 1,750 min-1 60 Hz 1,750 min-1
3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)* 3~ H (m)*
1SV03F00246T 6,6 5SV07F00246T 18,8 22SV04F01146T 22,2 46SV11G11046T 105,7
1SV05F00246T 11 5SV09F00346T 24 22SV05F01546T 27,7 46SV12G11046T 115,3
1SV07F00246T 15,3 5SV11F00346T 29,5 22SV06F01546T 33,3 46SV13G11046T 124,9
1SV09F00246T 19,6 5SV13F00546T 34,7 22SV07F02246T 39,1 66SV1G01546T 10,8
1SV11F00246T 23,9 5SV15F00546T 40,4 22SV08F02246T 44,6 66SV2G03046T 21,1
1SV13F00246T 28,2 5SV17F00546T 45,6 22SV09F02246T 50,1 66SV3G04046T 31,4
1SV15F00246T 32,4 5SV19F00746T 50,8 22SV10F03046T 55,6 66SV4G05546T 42
1SV17F00246T 36,6 5SV21F00746T 56,7 33SV2G01146T 17 66SV5G07546T 52,5
1SV18F00246T 38,7 5SV23F00746T 61,9 33SV3G01546T 25,7 66SV6G07546T 62,7
1SV20F00246T 42,9 10SV03F00546T 13 33SV4G02246T 34 66SV7G11046T 73,2
1SV22F00246T 47 10SV05F00546T 21,6 33SV5G03046T 42,7 66SV8G11046T 83,7
1SV24F00246T 51,1 10SV07F00746T 29,9 33SV6G03046T 51,5 92SV1G01546T 11,8
1SV26F00346T 55,2 10SV09F00746T 38,5 33SV7G04046T 59,9 92SV2G03046T 23,4
1SV28F00346T 60 10SV11F01146T 47,8 33SV8G05546T 69 92SV3G05546T 35,4
3SV02F00246T 5,5 10SV13F01146T 56,2 33SV9G05546T 77,5 92SV4G07546T 47,2
3SV04F00246T 10,9 10SV15F01546T 65,1 33SV10G05546T 85,9 92SV5G07546T 58,5
3SV06F00246T 16,3 15SV03F00546T 15,4 33SV11G07546T 94,9 92SV6G11046T 70,2
3SV08F00246T 21,6 15SV04F00746T 20,6 33SV12G07546T 103,3 92SV7G11046T 81,9
3SV10F00246T 26,8 15SV05F01146T 26,2 33SV13G07546T 111,8 92SV8G15046T 93,6
3SV12F00246T 32 15SV06F01146T 31,3 46SV2G01546T 19 125SV1G02246T 10
3SV14F00346T 37,6 15SV07F01546T 36,7 46SV3G02246T 28,8 125SV2/2AG03046T 18,3
3SV15F00346T 40,4 15SV08F01546T 42,4 46SV4G03046T 37,9 125SV3/3BG04046T 25,5
3SV17F00346T 45,5 15SV09F02246T 48 46SV5G04046T 47,6 125SV4/4AG05546T 36,5
3SV19F00346T 50,7 15SV10F02246T 53,3 46SV6G05546T 57,7 125SV5/5AG07546T 45,6
3SV21F00546T 55,8 15SV11F02246T 58,5 46SV7G05546T 67,1 125SV6G11046T 58,7
3SV23F00546T 61,9 15SV12F02246T 63,8 46SV8G07546T 77 125SV7G11046T 68,5
5SV03F00246T 8,3 22SV02F00546T 11 46SV9G07546T 86,4 125SV8G15046T 78,3
5SV05F00246T 13,7 22SV03F00746T 16,5 46SV10G07546T 95,7
274 e-SV
it en fr de es pt nl da no sv fi is et lv lt pl cs sk hu ro bg sl hr sr el tr ru uk ar
T Tipologia — Type — Type — Typ — Tipo — Tipo — Type — Type — Type — Typ — Tyyppi — Gerð — Tüüp — Tips —
Tipas — Typ układu — Typ — Typ — Típus — Tip — Тип — Vrsta — Vrsta — Tip — Τύπος — Tip — Тип — Тип —
النوع
HPrevalenza massima — Maximum Head — Pression maximale — Maximale Förderhöhe — Cabezal máximo — Pressã0 máxima — Maximale
hoogte — Maksimumshoved — Maks. trykkhøyde — Maximal tryckhöjd — Suurin nostokorkeus — Hámarks dæluhæð — Maksimaalne suru-
kõrgus — Maksimālais spiediens — Didžiausia patvanka — Maksymalna wysokość podnoszenia — Maximální tlak — Maximálna výtlačná výška
— Maximális nyomómagasság — Cap maxim — Максимална височина — Največja višina črpalke — Najveći tlak — Maksimalna visina —
Μέγιστη κεφαλή — Maksimum Başlık — Максимальный напор — Максимальний напір — أقصى رأس
* Si applica anche per altre versioni — Also applies to the other versions — Applicable aussi aux autres versions — Gilt auch für andere Ausführun-
gen — También se aplica a otras versiones — Também se aplica a outras versões — Geldt ook voor de andere versies — Gælder også for de andre
versioner — Gjelder også andre utgaver — Gäller även de andra versionerna — Koskee myös muita versioita — Á líka við aðrar gerðri —
Kehtib ka teiste versioonide puhul — Ir spēkā arī citām versijām — Taikoma ir kitoms versijoms — Dotyczy także innych wersji — Platí i pro
ostatní verze — Platí aj pre ostatné verzie — A további változatokra is érvényes — Se aplică şi celorlalte versiuni — Отнася се също и за другите
версии — Velja tudi za druge različice — Također vrijedi za ostale verzije — Takođe važi za ostale verzije — Επίσης ισχύει στις άλλες εκδόσεις —
Diğer versiyonlar için de geçerlidir — Также касается других версий — Також стосується інших версій — كما ينطبق أيضًا على الأنواع الأخرى
e-SV 275
LOWARA S.r.l. UNIPERSONALE
Via Vittorio Lombardi 14
36075 Montecchio Maggiore VI
Italia
Tel. (+39) 0444 707111
Fax (+39) 0444 492166
E-mail: lowara.mkt@xyleminc.com
www.lowara.com © 2012 Xylem Inc
Preface, Contents
Product Overview 1
Getting Started 2
SIMATIC Installing the S7-200 3
PLC Concepts 4
S7-200
Programming Concepts,
Programmable Controller Conventions and Features 5
System Manual S7-200 Instruction Set 6
Communicating over a Network 7
Hardware Troubleshooting Guide
and Software Debugging Tools 8
Open Loop Motion Control with 9
the S7-200
Creating a Program for the 10
Modem Module
Using the USS Protocol Library to 11
Control a MicroMaster Drive
Using the Modbus Protocol 12
Library
Using Recipes 13
Using Data Logs 14
PID Auto-Tune and the PID
Tuning Control Panel 15
Appendices
Index
This manual has the order number:
6ES7298-8FA24-8BH0
Edition 08/2005
A5E00307987-- 02
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as
well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the
manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Danger
Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Warning
Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Caution
Caution used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Caution
Caution used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, may result in property damage.
Notice
Notice indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or
state.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified per-
sons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,
equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog
or the technical descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other
manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and
installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
SIMATIC9, SIMATIC HMI9 and SIMATIC NET9 are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Some of other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner’s rights may be
violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
Siemens AG
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems . Siemens AG 2004
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
ii
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft 6ES7298-8FA24-8BH0
Preface
This manual provides information about installing and programming the S7-200 Micro PLCs and
is designed for engineers, programmers, installers, and electricians who have a general
knowledge of programmable logic controllers.
S7-200 CPU models CPU 221, CPU 222, CPU 224, CPU 224XP, and CPU 226 to include:
New CPU hardware support: option to turn off run mode edit to get more program memory,
CPU 224XP supports onboard analog I/O and two communication ports. CPU 226 includes
additional input filters and pulse catch.
New memory cartridge support: S7-200 Explorer browser utility, memory cartridge transfers,
compares, and programming selections
STEP 7--Micro/WIN, version 4.0, a 32-bit programming software package for the S7-200 to
include:
New and improved tools that support the latest CPU enhancements: PID Auto-Tuning
Control Panel, PLCs built-in Position Control Wizard, Data Log Wizard, and Recipe Wizard
New diagnostic tool: configuring diagnostic LED
New instructions: Daylight Savings time (READ_RTCX and SET_RTCX), Interval Timers
(BITIM, CITIM), Clear Interrupt Event (CLR_EVNT), and Diagnostic LED (DIAG_LED)
POU and library enhancements: new string constants, added indirect addressing support
on more memory types, improved support of the USS library read and write parametization
for Siemens master drives
Improved Data Block: Data Block Pages, Data Block auto-increment
Improved usability of STEP 7--Micro/WIN
iii
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Certification
The SIMATIC S7-200 products have the following certification:
Tip
The SIMATIC S7-200 series meets the CSA standard.
The cULus logo indicates that the S7-200 has been examined and certified by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) to standards UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142.
CE Labeling
The SIMATIC S7-200 products fulfill the requirements and protection guidelines of the following
EU directives:
C-Tick
The SIMATIC S7-200 products are compliant with requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 (Australian)
standard.
Standards:
The SIMATIC S7-200 products fulfill the requirement and criteria of IEC 61131--2, Programmable
controllers -- Equipment requirements.
iv
Preface
The S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual is organized according to the following
topics:
Chapter 1 (Product Overview) provides an overview of some of the features of the S7-200
family of Micro PLC products.
Chapter 2 (Getting Started) provides a tutorial for creating and downloading a sample
control program to an S7-200.
Chapter 3 (Installing the S7-200) provides the dimensions and basic guidelines for installing
the S7-200 CPU modules and expansion I/O modules.
Chapter 4 (PLC Concepts) provides information about the operation of the S7-200.
Chapter 5 (Programming Concepts, Conventions, and Features) provides information about
the features of STEP 7--Micro/WIN, the program editors and types of instructions
(IEC 1131-3 or SIMATIC), S7-200 data types, and guidelines for creating programs.
Chapter 6 (S7-200 Instruction Set) provides descriptions and examples of programming
instructions supported by the S7-200.
Chapter 7 (Communicating over a Network) provides information for setting up the different
network configurations supported by the S7-200.
Chapter 8 (Hardware Troubleshooting Guide and Software Debugging Tools) provides
information for troubleshooting problems with the S7-200 hardware and about the
STEP 7--Micro/WIN features that help you debug your program.
Chapter 9 (Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200) provides information about three
methods of open loop motion control: Pulse Width Modulation, Pulse Train Output, and the
EM 253 Position Control Module.
Chapter 10 (Creating a Program for the Modem Module) provides information about the
instructions and wizard used to create a program for the EM 241 Modem module.
Chapter 11 (Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive) provides
information about the instructions used to create a control program for a MicroMaster drive.
It also provides information about how to configure the MicroMaster 3 and MicroMaster 4
drives.
Chapter 12 (Using the Modbus Protocol Library) provides information about the instructions
used to create a program that uses the Modbus protocol for communications.
Chapter 13 (Using Recipes) provides information about organizing and loading automation
program recipes in the memory cartridge.
Chapter 14 (Using Data Logs) provides information about storing process measurement
data in the memory cartridge.
Chapter 15 (PID Auto-Tune and the PID Tuning Control Panel) provides information about
using these features to greatly enhance the utility and ease of use of the PID function
provided by the S7-200.
Appendix A (Technical Specifications) provides the technical information and data sheets
about the S7-200 hardware.
The other appendices provide additional reference information, such as descriptions of the error
codes, descriptions of the Special Memory (SM) area, part numbers for ordering S7-200
equipment, and STL instruction execution times.
In addition to this manual, STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides extensive online help for getting started
with programming the S7-200. Included with the purchase of the STEP 7--Micro/WIN software is a
free documentation CD. On this CD you can find application tips, an electronic version of this
manual and other information.
v
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Online Help
Help is only a keystroke away! Pressing F1 accesses the extensive online help for
STEP 7--Micro/WIN. The online help includes useful information about getting started with
programming the S7-200, as well as many other topics.
Electronic Manual
An electronic version of this S7-200 System Manual is available on the documentation CD. You
can install the electronic manual onto your computer so that you can easily access the information
in the manual while you are working with the STEP 7--Micro/WIN software.
Programming Tips
The documentation CD includes Programming Tips, a set of application examples with sample
programs. Reviewing or modifying these examples can help you find efficient or innovative
solutions for your own application. You can also find the most current version of Programming Tips
on the S7-200 Internet site.
Additional Support
Local Siemens Sales Office or Distributor
For assistance in answering any technical questions, for training on the S7-200 products, or for
ordering S7-200 products, contact your Siemens distributor or sales office. Because your sales
representatives are technically trained and have the most specific knowledge about your
operations, process and industry, as well as about the individual Siemens products that you are
using, they can provide the fastest and most efficient answers to any problems that you might
encounter.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Technical Services
The highly trained staff of the S7-200 Technical Services center is also available to help you solve
any problems that you might encounter. You can call on them 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
vi
Preface
Nuernberg
Johnson City
Beijing
Technical Support
vii
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
viii
Contents
1 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
S7-200 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
S7-200 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STEP 7--Micro/WIN Programming Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Communications Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Display Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Connecting the S7-200 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Creating a Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Downloading the Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Placing the S7-200 in RUN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 PLC Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Understanding How the S7-200 Executes Your Control Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Accessing the Data of the S7-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Understanding How the S7-200 Saves and Restores Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting the Operating Mode for the S7-200 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using the S7-200 Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Features of the S7-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ix
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
x
Contents
xi
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Monitoring the Position Module with the EM 253 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Error Codes for the Position Module and the Position Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Understanding the RP Seek Modes Supported by the Position Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
xii
Contents
xiii
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
xiv
Product Overview
The S7-200 series of micro-programmable logic controllers (Micro PLCs) can control a wide
variety of devices to support your automation needs.
The S7-200 monitors inputs and changes outputs as controlled by the user program, which can
include Boolean logic, counting, timing, complex math operations, and communications with other
intelligent devices. The compact design, flexible configuration, and powerful instruction set
combine to make the S7-200 a perfect solution for controlling a wide variety of applications.
In This Chapter
What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
S7-200 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
S7-200 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STEP 7--Micro/WIN Programming Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Communications Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Display Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
What’s New?
The new features of the SIMATIC S7-200 include the following. Table 1-1 shows the S7-200 CPUs
that support these new features.
- S7-200 CPU models CPU 221, CPU 222, CPU 224, CPU 224XP, and CPU 226 to include:
New CPU hardware support: option to turn off run mode edit to get more program memory,
CPU 224XP supports onboard analog I/O and two communication ports. CPU 226 includes
additional input filters and pulse catch.
- New memory cartridge support: S7-200 Explorer browser utility, memory cartridge transfers,
compares, and programming selections
- STEP 7--Micro/WIN, version 4.0, a 32-bit programming software package for the S7-200 to
include:
New and improved tools that support the latest CPU enhancements: PID Auto-Tuning
Control Panel, PLCs built-in Position Control Wizard, Data Log Wizard, and Recipe Wizard.
New diagnostic tool: configuring diagnostic LED
New instructions: Daylight Savings time (READ_RTCX and SET_RTCX), Interval Timers
(BITIM, CITIM), Clear Interrupt Event (CLR_EVNT), and Diagnostic LED (DIAG_LED).
POU and library enhancements: new string constants, added indirect addressing support
on more memory types, improved support of the USS library read and write parametization
for Siemens master drives
Improved Data Block: Data Block Pages, Data Block auto-increment
Improved usability of STEP 7--Micro/WIN
Table 1-1 S7-200 CPUs
S7-200 CPU Order Number
CPU 221 DC/DC/DC 6 Inputs/4 Outputs 6ES7 211--0AA23--0XB0
CPU 221 AC/DC/Relay 6 Inputs/4 Relays 6ES7 211--0BA23--0XB0
CPU 222 DC/DC/DC 8 Inputs/6 Outputs 6ES7 212--1AB23--0XB0
CPU 222 AC/DC/Relay 8 Inputs/6 Relays 6ES7 212--1BB23--0XB0
CPU 224 DC/DC/DC 14 Inputs/10 Outputs 6ES7 214--1AD23--0XB0
CPU 224 AC/DC/Relay 14 Inputs/10 Relays 6ES7 214--1BD23--0XB0
CPU 224XP DC/DC/DC 14 Inputs/10 Outputs 6ES7 214--2AD23--0XB0
CPU 224XP AC/DC/Relay 14 Inputs/10 Relays 6ES7 214--2BD23--0XB0
CPU 226 DC/DC/DC 24 Inputs/16 Outputs 6ES7 216--2AD23--0XB0
CPU 226 AC/DC/Relay 24 Inputs/16 Relays 6ES7 216--2BD23--0XB0
S7-200 CPU
The S7-200 CPU combines a microprocessor, an integrated power supply, input circuits, and
output circuits in a compact housing to create a powerful Micro PLC. See Figure 1-1. After you
have downloaded your program, the S7-200 contains the logic required to monitor and control the
input and output devices in your application.
2
Product Overview Chapter 1
Siemens provides different S7-200 CPU models with a diversity of features and capabilities that
help you create effective solutions for your varied applications. Table 1-2 briefly compares some of
the features of the CPU. For detailed information about a specific CPU, see Appendix A.
1 You must calculate your power budget to determine how much power (or current) the S7-200 CPU can provide for your configuration. If the CPU
power budget is exceeded, you may not be able to connect the maximum number of modules. See Appendix A for CPU and expansion module
power requirements, and Appendix B to calculate your power budget.
3
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Computer Requirements
STEP 7--Micro/WIN runs on either a personal computer or a Siemens programming device, such
as a PG 760. Your computer or programming device should meet the following minimum
requirements:
- Operating system:
Windows 2000, Windows XP
(Professional or Home)
- At least 100M bytes of free hard
disk space
- Mouse (recommended)
Tip
To install STEP 7--Micro/WIN on a Windows 2000, or Windows XP (Professional or Home)
operating system, you must log in with Administrator privileges.
Communications Options
Siemens provides two programming options for connecting your computer to your S7-200: a direct
connection with a PPI Multi-Master cable, or a Communications Processor (CP) card with an MPI
cable.
The PPI Multi-Master programming cable is the most common and economical method of
connecting your computer to the S7-200. This cable connects the communications port of the
S7-200 to the serial communications of your computer. The PPI Multi-Master programming cable
can also be used to connect other communications devices to the S7-200.
4
Product Overview Chapter 1
Display Panels
Text Display Unit (TD 200 and TD 200C)
The TD 200 and TD 200C are 2-line, 20-character, text display devices that can be connected to
the S7-200. Using the TD 200 wizard, you can easily program your S7-200 to display text
messages and other data pertaining to your application.
The TD 200 Configuration Wizard in STEP 7--MicroWIN helps you configure TD 200 messages
quickly and easily. To start the TD 200 Wizard, select the Tools > TD 200 Wizard menu
TD 200 command.
5
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
6
Getting Started
STEP 7--Micro/WIN makes it easy for you to program your S7-200. In just a few short steps using
a simple example, you can learn how to connect, program, and run your S7-200.
All you need for this example is a PPI Multi-Master cable, an S7-200 CPU, and a programming
device running the STEP 7--Micro/WIN programming software.
In This Chapter
Connecting the S7-200 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Creating a Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Downloading the Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Placing the S7-200 in RUN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Before you install or remove any electrical device, ensure that the power to that equipment has
been turned off. Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to the
S7-200 is disabled before attempting to install or remove the S7-200.
Warning
Attempts to install or wire the S7-200 or related equipment with power applied could cause
electric shock or faulty operation of equipment. Failure to disable all power to the S7-200 and
related equipment during installation or removal procedures could result in death or serious
injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to the S7-200 is disabled
before attempting to install or remove the S7-200 or related equipment.
DC Installation AC Installation
8
Getting Started Chapter 2
Tip
Examples in this manual use the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable. The RS-232/PPI Multi-Master
cable replaces the previous PC/PPI cable. A USB/PPI Multi-Master cable is also available.
Refer to Appendix E for order numbers.
9
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
10
Getting Started Chapter 2
Example: Sample Program for getting started with STEP 7-- Micro/WIN
Timing Diagram
current = 100
current = 40
T33 (bit)
M0.0
Q0.0
11
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
1. Double-click the Compare icon to display the compare instructions. Select the >=I
instruction (Greater-Than-Or-Equal-To-Integer ).
2. Hold down the left mouse button
and drag the compare instruction
onto the second network.
3. Click on the “???” above the
contact and enter the address for
the timer value: T33
4. Press the Return key to enter the
timer number and to move the
focus to the other value to be
compared with the timer value.
5. Enter the following value to be
compared
p with the timer value: 40
6. Press the Return key to enter the Figure 2-8 Network 2
value.
To enter the instruction for turning on output Q0.0:
1. Double-click the Bit Logic icon to display the bit logic instructions and select the output coil.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the coil onto the second network.
3. Click on the “???” above the coil and enter the following address: Q0.0
4. Press the Return key to enter the address for the coil.
12
Getting Started Chapter 2
13
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
You can monitor the program by selecting the Debug > Program Status menu command.
STEP 7--Micro/WIN displays the values for the instructions. To stop the program, place the S7-200
in STOP mode by clicking the STOP icon or by selecting the PLC > STOP menu command.
14
Installing the S7-200
The S7-200 equipment is designed to be easy to install. You can use the mounting holes to attach
the modules to a panel, or you can use the built-in clips to mount the modules onto a standard
(DIN) rail. The small size of the S7-200 allows you to make efficient use of space.
This chapter provides guidelines for installing and wiring your S7-200 system.
In This Chapter
Guidelines for Installing S7-200 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing and Removing the S7-200 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Guidelines for Grounding and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
15
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Separate the S7-200 Devices from Heat, High Voltage, and Electrical
Noise
As a general rule for laying out the devices of your system, always separate the devices that
generate high voltage and high electrical noise from the low-voltage, logic-type devices such as
the S7-200.
When configuring the layout of the S7-200 inside your panel, consider the heat-generating
devices and locate the electronic-type devices in the cooler areas of your cabinet. Operating any
electronic device in a high-temperature environment will reduce the time to failure.
Consider also the routing of the wiring for the devices in the panel. Avoid placing low voltage
signal wires and communications cables in the same tray with AC power wiring and high-energy,
rapidly-switched DC wiring.
Tip
For vertical mounting, the maximum allowable ambient temperature is reduced by 10° C. Mount
the S7-200 CPU below any expansion modules.
When planning your layout for the S7-200 system, allow enough clearance for the wiring and
communications cable connections. For additional flexibility in configuring the layout of the S7-200
system, use the I/O expansion cable.
Clearance 35 mm
1 mm
7.5 mm
DIN Rail
25 mm
75 mm
Vertical Panel
Mounting
Side View
Horizontal DIN Rail Mounting with Optional
Expansion Cable (limit one per system)
16
Installing the S7-200 Chapter 3
Power Budget
All S7-200 CPUs have an internal power supply that provides power for the CPU, the expansion
modules, and other 24 VDC user power requirements.
The S7-200 CPU provides the 5 VDC logic power needed for any expansion in your system. Pay
careful attention to your system configuration to ensure that your CPU can supply the 5V power
required by your selected expansion modules. If your configuration requires more power than the
CPU can supply, you must remove a module or select a CPU with more power capability. Refer to
Appendix A for information about the 5 VDC logic budget supplied by your S7-200 CPU and the
5 VDC power requirements of the expansion modules. Use Appendix B as a guide for determining
how much power (or current) the CPU can provide for your configuration.
All S7-200 CPUs also provide a 24 VDC sensor supply that can supply 24 VDC for input points,
for relay coil power on the expansion modules, or for other requirements. If your power
requirements exceed the budget of the sensor supply, then you must add an external 24 VDC
power supply to your system. Refer to Appendix A for the 24 VDC sensor supply power budget for
your particular S7-200 CPU.
If you require an external 24 VDC power supply, ensure that the power supply is not connected in
parallel with the sensor supply of the S7-200 CPU. For improved electrical noise protection, it is
recommended that the commons (M) of the different power supplies be connected.
Warning
Connecting an external 24 VDC power supply in parallel with the S7-200 24 VDC sensor supply
can result in a conflict between the two supplies as each seeks to establish its own preferred
output voltage level.
The result of this conflict can be shortened lifetime or immediate failure of one or both power
supplies, with consequent unpredictable operation of the PLC system. Unpredictable operation
could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
The S7-200 DC sensor supply and any external power supply should provide power to different
points.
Prerequisites
Before you install or remove any electrical device, ensure that the power to that equipment has
been turned off. Also, ensure that the power to any related equipment has been turned off.
Warning
Attempts to install or remove S7-200 or related equipment with the power applied could cause
electric shock or faulty operation of equipment.
Failure to disable all power to the S7-200 and related equipment during installation or removal
procedures could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to the S7-200 is disabled
before attempting to install or remove S7-200 CPUs or related equipment.
Always ensure that whenever you replace or install an S7-200 device you use the correct module
or equivalent device.
Warning
If you install an incorrect module, the program in the S7-200 could function unpredictably.
Failure to replace an S7-200 device with the same model, orientation, or order could result in
death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Replace an S7-200 device with the same model, and be sure to orient and position it correctly.
17
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Mounting Dimensions
The S7-200 CPUs and expansion modules include mounting holes to facilitate installation on
panels. Refer to Table 3-1 for the mounting dimensions.
Table 3-1 Mounting Dimensions
Mounting
holes (M4
or No. 8)
96 mm 88 mm 80 mm
B
4 mm
4 mm A
S7-200 Module Width A Width B
CPU 221 and CPU 222 90 mm 82 mm
CPU 224 120.5 mm 112.5 mm
CPU 224XP 140 mm 132 mm
CPU 226 196 mm 188 mm
Expansion modules: 4- and 8-point DC and Relay I/O (8I, 4Q, 8Q, 4I/4Q) 46 mm 38 mm
and Analog Out (2 AQ)
Expansion modules: 16-point digital I/O (16I, 8I/8Q), Analog I/O (4AI, 4AI/1AQ), 71.2 mm 63.2 mm
RTD, Thermocouple, PROFIBUS, Ethernet, Internet,
AS-Interface, 8-point AC (8I and 8Q), Position, and Modem
Expansion modules: 32-point digital I/O (16I/16Q) 137.3 mm 129.3 mm
Panel Mounting
1. Locate, drill, and tap the mounting holes (M4 or American Standard number 8), using the
dimensions in Table 3-1.
2. Secure the module(s) to the panel, using the appropriate screws.
3. If you are using an expansion module, connect the expansion module ribbon cable into the
expansion port connector under the access door.
DIN Rail Mounting
1. Secure the rail to the mounting panel every 75 mm.
2. Snap open the DIN clip (located on the bottom of the module) and hook the back of the
module onto the DIN rail.
3. If you are using an expansion module, connect the expansion module ribbon cable into the
expansion port connector under the access door.
4. Rotate the module down to the DIN rail and snap the clip closed. Carefully check that the
clip has fastened the module securely onto the rail. To avoid damage to the module, press
on the tab of the mounting hole instead of pressing directly on the front of the module.
Tip
Using DIN rail stops could be helpful if your S7-200 is in an environment with high vibration
potential or if the S7-200 has been installed vertically.
If your system is in a high-vibration environment, then panel-mounting the S7-200 will provide a
greater level of vibration protection.
18
Installing the S7-200 Chapter 3
19
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Prerequisites
Before you ground or install wiring to any electrical device, ensure that the power to that
equipment has been turned off. Also, ensure that the power to any related equipment has been
turned off.
Ensure that you follow all applicable electrical codes when wiring the S7-200 and related
equipment. Install and operate all equipment according to all applicable national and local
standards. Contact your local authorities to determine which codes and standards apply to your
specific case.
Warning
Attempts to install or wire the S7-200 or related equipment with power applied could cause
electric shock or faulty operation of equipment. Failure to disable all power to the S7-200 and
related equipment during installation or removal procedures could result in death or serious
injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to the S7-200 is disabled
before attempting to install or remove the S7-200 or related equipment.
Always take safety into consideration as you design the grounding and wiring of your S7-200
system. Electronic control devices, such as the S7-200, can fail and can cause unexpected
operation of the equipment that is being controlled or monitored. For this reason, you should
implement safeguards that are independent of the S7-200 to protect against possible personal
injury or equipment damage.
Warning
Control devices can fail in an unsafe condition, resulting in unexpected operation of controlled
equipment. Such unexpected operations could result in death or serious injury to personnel,
and/or damage to equipment.
Use an emergency stop function, electromechanical overrides, or other redundant safeguards
that are independent of the S7-200.
All low voltage circuits connected to an S7-200, such as 24V power, must be supplied from an
approved source that provides safe isolation from AC line and other high voltages. Such sources
include double insulation as defined in international electrical safety standards and have outputs
that are rated as SELV, PELV, Class 2, or Limited Power according to various standards.
Warning
Use of non-isolated or single insulation supplies to supply low voltage circuits from an AC line
can result in hazardous voltages appearing on circuits that are expected to be touch safe, such
as communications circuits and low voltage sensor wiring.
Such unexpected high voltages could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or
damage to equipment.
Only use high voltage to low voltage power converters that are approved as sources of touch
safe, limited voltage circuits.
20
Installing the S7-200 Chapter 3
For improved electrical noise protection, it is recommended that all DC common returns be
connected to the same single-point earth ground. Connect the 24 VDC sensor supply common
(M) to earth ground.
All ground wires should be as short as possible and should use a large wire size, such as 2 mm2
(14 AWG).
When locating grounds, remember to consider safety grounding requirements and the proper
operation of protective interrupting devices.
Install appropriate surge suppression devices for any wiring that could be subject to lightning
surges.
Avoid placing low-voltage signal wires and communications cables in the same wire tray with AC
wires and high-energy, rapidly switched DC wires. Always route wires in pairs, with the neutral or
common wire paired with the hot or signal-carrying wire.
Use the shortest wire possible and ensure that the wire is sized properly to carry the required
current. The connector accepts wire sizes from 2 mm2 to 0.3 mm2 (14 AWG to 22 AWG). Use
shielded wires for optimum protection against electrical noise. Typically, grounding the shield at
the S7-200 gives the best results.
When wiring input circuits that are powered by an external power supply, include an overcurrent
protection device in that circuit. External protection is not necessary for circuits that are powered
by the 24 VDC sensor supply from the S7-200 because the sensor supply is already
current-limited.
Most S7-200 modules have removable connectors for user wiring. (Refer to Appendix A to
determine if your module has removable connectors.) To prevent loose connections, ensure that
the connector is seated securely and that the wire is installed securely into the connector. To avoid
damaging the connector, be careful that you do not over-tighten the screws. The maximum torque
for the connector screw is 0.56 N-m (5 inch-pounds).
To help prevent unwanted current flows in your installation, the S7-200 provides isolation
boundaries at certain points. When you plan the wiring for your system, you should consider these
isolation boundaries. Refer to Appendix A for the amount of isolation provided and the location of
the isolation boundaries. Isolation boundaries rated less than 1500 VAC must not be depended on
as safety boundaries.
Tip
For a communications network, the maximum length of the communications cable is 50 m
without using a repeater. The communications port on the S7-200 is non-isolated. Refer to
Chapter 7 for more information.
21
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
The effectiveness of a given suppression circuit depends on the application, and you must verify
it for your particular use. Always ensure that all components used in your suppression circuit are
rated for use in the application.
Notice
When relay expansion modules are used to switch 230 VAC inductive loads, the external
resistor/capacitor noise suppression circuit must be placed across the AC load as shown in
Figure 3-4.
22
PLC Concepts
The basic function of the S7-200 is to monitor field inputs and, based on your control logic, turn on
or off field output devices. This chapter explains the concepts used to execute your program, the
various types of memory used, and how that memory is retained.
In This Chapter
Understanding How the S7-200 Executes Your Control Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Accessing the Data of the S7-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Understanding How the S7-200 Saves and Restores Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting the Operating Mode for the S7-200 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using the S7-200 Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Features of the S7-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
23
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The S7-200 Relates Your Program to the Physical Inputs and Outputs
The basic operation of the S7-200 is very simple: Start_PB E_Stop M_Starter
24
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
Analog inputs: The S7-200 does not update analog inputs from expansion modules as part of the
normal scan cycle unless filtering of analog inputs is enabled. An analog filter is provided to allow
you to have a more stable signal. You can enable the analog filter for each analog input point.
When analog input filtering is enabled for an analog input, the S7-200 updates that analog input
once per scan cycle, performs the filtering function, and stores the filtered value internally. The
filtered value is then supplied each time your program accesses the analog input.
When analog filtering is not enabled, the S7-200 reads the value of the analog input from
expansion modules each time your program accesses the analog input.
Analog inputs AIW0 and AIW2 included on the CPU 224XP are updated every scan with the most
recent result from the analog-to-digital converter. This converter is an averaging type (sigma-delta)
and those values will usually not need software filtering.
Tip
Analog input filtering is provided to allow you to have a more stable analog value. Use the
analog input filter for applications where the input signal varies slowly with time. If the signal is a
high-speed signal, then you should not enable the analog filter.
Do not use the analog filter with modules that pass digital information or alarm indications in the
analog words. Always disable analog filtering for RTD, Thermocouple, and AS-Interface Master
modules.
If you use interrupts in your program, the interrupt routines that are associated with the interrupt
events are stored as part of the program. The interrupt routines are not executed as part of the
normal scan cycle, but are executed when the interrupt event occurs (which could be at any point
in the scan cycle).
25
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 4-1 Decimal and Hexadecimal Ranges for the Different Sizes of Data
Representation Byte (B) Word (W) Double Word (D)
Unsigned Integer 0 to 255 0 to 65,535 0 to 4,294,967,295
0 to FF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF FFFF
Signed Integer --128 to +127 --32,768 to +32,767 --2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
80 to 7F 8000 to 7FFF 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
Real Not applicable Not applicable +1.175495E--38 to +3.402823E+38 (positive)
IEEE 32-bit --1.175495E--38 to --3.402823E+38 (negative)
Floating Point
To access a bit in a memory area, you specify the address, which includes the memory area
identifier, the byte address, and the bit number. Figure 4-3 shows an example of accessing a bit
(which is also called “byte.bit” addressing). In this example, the memory area and byte address
(I = input, and 3 = byte 3) are followed by a period (“.”) to separate the bit address (bit 4).
I 3 . 4
Process-image Input (I) Memory Area
Bit of byte, or bit number:
bit 4 of 8 (0 to 7) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Period separates the Byte 0
byte address from the bit Byte 1
number Byte 2
Byte address: byte 3 (the Byte 3
fourth byte) Byte 4
Memory area identifier Byte 5
You can access data in most memory areas (V, I, Q, M, S, L, and SM) as bytes, words, or double
words by using the byte-address format. To access a byte, word, or double word of data in the
memory, you must specify the address in a way similar to specifying the address for a bit. This
includes an area identifier, data size designation, and the starting byte address of the byte, word,
or double-word value, as shown in Figure 4-4.
26
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
Data in other memory areas (such as T, C, HC, and the accumulators) are accessed by using an
address format that includes an area identifier and a device number.
MSB LSB
VB100 7 VB100 0
MSB = most significant bit
LSB = least significant bit
Most significant byte Least significant byte
MSB LSB
VW100 15 VB100 8 7 VB101 0
Figure 4-4 Comparing Byte, Word, and Double-Word Access to the Same Address
27
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- Current value: this 16-bit signed integer stores the amount of time counted by the timer.
- Timer bit: this bit is set or cleared as a result of comparing the current and the preset value.
The preset value is entered as part of the timer instruction.
You access both of these variables by using the timer address (T + timer number). Access to
either the timer bit or the current value is dependent on the instruction used: instructions with bit
operands access the timer bit, while instructions with word operands access the current value. As
shown in Figure 4-5, the Normally Open Contact instruction accesses the timer bit, while the Move
Word instruction accesses the current value of the timer.
I2.1 MOV_ T3
Current Value Timer Bits
EN W
T0 T0
T3 IN OUT VW200
T1 T1
T2 T2
15 (MSB) T3 0 (LSB) T3
Accesses the current value
Accesses the timer bit
Figure 4-5 Accessing the Timer Bit or the Current Value of a Timer
- Current value: this 16-bit signed integer stores the accumulated count.
- Counter bit: this bit is set or cleared as a result of comparing the current and the preset
value. The preset value is entered as part of the counter instruction.
You access both of these variables by using the counter address (C + counter number). Access to
either the counter bit or the current value is dependent on the instruction used: instructions with bit
operands access the counter bit, while instructions with word operands access the current value.
As shown in Figure 4-6, the Normally Open Contact instruction accesses the counter bit, while the
Move Word instruction accesses the current value of the counter.
I2.1 MOV_W C3
Current Value Counter Bits
EN
C0 C0
C3 IN OUT VW200
C1 C1
C2 C2
15 (MSB) C3 0 (LSB) C3
Accesses the current value Accesses the counter bit
Figure 4-6 Accessing the Counter Bit or the Current Value of a Counter
28
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
High-Speed Counters: HC
The high-speed counters count high-speed events independent of the CPU scan. High-speed
counters have a signed, 32-bit integer counting value (or current value). To access the count
value for the high-speed counter, you specify the address of the high-speed counter, using the
memory type (HC) and the counter number (such as HC0). The current value of the high-speed
counter is a read-only value and can be addressed only as a double word (32 bits).
Accumulators: AC
The accumulators are read/write devices that can be used like memory. For example, you can use
accumulators to pass parameters to and from subroutines and to store intermediate values used
in a calculation. The S7-200 provides four 32-bit accumulators (AC0, AC1, AC2, and AC3). You
can access the data in the accumulators as bytes, words, or double words.
The size of the data being accessed is determined by the instruction that is used to access the
accumulator. As shown in Figure 4-7, you use the least significant 8 or 16 bits of the value that is
stored in the accumulator to access the accumulator as bytes or words. To access the
accumulator as a double word, you use all 32 bits.
For information about how to use the accumulators within interrupt subroutines, refer to the
Interrupt Instructions in Chapter 6.
Byte 1 Byte 0
29
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Special Memory: SM
The SM bits provide a means for communicating information between the CPU and your program.
You can use these bits to select and control some of the special functions of the S7-200 CPU,
such as: a bit that turns on for the first scan cycle, a bit that toggles at a fixed rate, or a bit that
shows the status of math or operational instructions. (For more information about the SM bits, see
Appendix D.) You can access the SM bits as bits, bytes, words, or double words:
Tip
If you are programming in either LAD or FBD, STEP 7--Micro/WIN reserves the last four bytes of
local memory for its own use.
Local memory is similar to V memory with one major exception. V memory has a global scope
while L memory has a local scope. The term global scope means that the same memory location
can be accessed from any program entity (main program, subroutines, or interrupt routines). The
term local scope means that the memory allocation is associated with a particular program entity.
The S7-200 allocates 64 bytes of L memory for the main program, 64 bytes for each subroutine
nesting level, and 64 bytes for interrupt routines.
The allocation of L memory for the main program cannot be accessed from subroutines or from
interrupt routines. A subroutine cannot access the L memory allocation of the main program, an
interrupt routine, or another subroutine. Likewise, an interrupt routine cannot access the L memory
allocation of the main program or of a subroutine.
The allocation of L memory is made by the S7-200 on an as-needed basis. This means that while
the main portion of the program is being executed, the L memory allocations for subroutines and
interrupt routines do not exist. At the time that an interrupt occurs or a subroutine is called, local
memory is allocated as required. The new allocation of L memory might reuse the same L
memory locations of a different subroutine or interrupt routine.
The L memory is not initialized by the S7-200 at the time of allocation and might contain any
value. When you pass formal parameters in a subroutine call, the values of the parameters being
passed are placed by the S7-200 in the appropriate L memory locations of the called subroutine. L
memory locations, which do not receive a value as a result of the formal parameter passing step,
will not be initialized and might contain any value at the time of allocation.
Analog Inputs: AI
The S7-200 converts an analog value (such as temperature or voltage) into a word-length (16-bit)
digital value. You access these values by the area identifier (AI), size of the data (W), and the
starting byte address. Since analog inputs are words and always start on even-number bytes
(such as 0, 2, or 4), you access them with even-number byte addresses (such as AIW0, AIW2, or
AIW4). Analog input values are read-only values.
30
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
Analog Outputs: AQ
The S7-200 converts a word-length (16-bit) digital value into a current or voltage, proportional to
the digital value (such as for a current or voltage). You write these values by the area identifier
(AQ), size of the data (W), and the starting byte address. Since analog outputs are words and
always start on even-number bytes (such as 0, 2, or 4), you write them with even-number byte
addresses (such as AQW0, AQW2, or AQW4). Analog output values are write-only values.
31
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
The S7-200 CPU does not support “data typing” or data checking (such as specifying that the
constant is stored as an integer, a signed integer, or a double integer). For example, an Add
instruction can use the value in VW100 as a signed integer value, while an Exclusive Or
instruction can use the same value in VW100 as an unsigned binary value.
Tip
Process-image register space for digital I/O is always reserved in increments of eight bits (one
byte). If a module does not provide a physical point for each bit of each reserved byte, these
unused bits cannot be assigned to subsequent modules in the I/O chain. For input modules, the
unused bits are set to zero with each input update cycle.
Analog I/O points are always allocated in increments of two points. If a module does not provide
physical I/O for each of these points, these I/O points are lost and are not available for
assignment to subsequent modules in the I/O chain.
32
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
Figure 4-10 provides an example of the I/O numbering for a particular hardware configuration. The
gaps in the addressing (shown as gray italic text) cannot be used by your program.
4 Analog In 4 Analog In
CPU 224XP 4 In / 4 Out 8 In 8 Out
1 Analog Out 1 Analog Out
Figure 4-10 Sample I/O Addresses for Local and Expansion I/O (CPU 224XP)
The S7-200 allows pointers to access the following memory areas: I, Q, V, M, S, AI, AQ, SM,
T (current value only), and C (current value only). You cannot use indirect addressing to access
an individual bit or to access HC or L memory areas.
To indirectly access the data in a memory address, you create a pointer to that location by
entering an ampersand (&) and the memory location to be addressed. The input operand of the
instruction must be preceded with an ampersand (&) to signify that the address of a memory
location, instead of its contents, is to be moved into the location identified in the output operand of
the instruction (the pointer).
Entering an asterisk (*) in front of an operand for an instruction specifies that the operand is a
pointer. As shown in Figure 4-11, entering *AC1 specifies that AC1 is a pointer to the word-length
value being referenced by the Move Word (MOVW) instruction. In this example, the values stored
in both VB200 and VB201 are moved to accumulator AC0.
AC1
V199
address of VW200 MOVD &VW200, AC1
V200 12 Creates the pointer by moving the address of VB200
V201 34 (address of the initial byte for VW200) to AC1.
V202 56 AC0
1234 MOVW *AC1, AC0
V203 78
Moves the word value pointed to by AC1 to AC0.
Figure 4-11 Creating and Using a Pointer
33
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
As shown in Figure 4-12, you can change the value of a pointer. Since pointers are 32-bit values,
use double-word instructions to modify pointer values. Simple mathematical operations, such as
adding or incrementing, can be used to modify pointer values.
AC1
V199
address of VW200 MOVD &VW200, AC1
V200 12 Creates the pointer by moving the address of
V201 34 AC0
VB200 (address of VW200’s initial byte) to AC1.
V202 56 1234 MOVW *AC1, AC0
V203 78 Moves the word value pointed to by
AC1 (VW200) to AC0.
AC1
V199
address of VW202 +D +2, AC1
V200 12 Adds 2 to the accumulator to point to the
AC0
V201 34 next word location.
5678 MOVW *AC1, AC0
V202 56
Moves the word value pointed to by
V203 78 AC1 (VW202) to AC0.
Tip
Remember to adjust for the size of the data that you are accessing: to access a byte, increment
the pointer value by 1; to access a word or a current value for a timer or counter, add or
increment the pointer value by 2; and to access a double word, add or increment the pointer
value by 4.
34
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
35
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- Retentive Data Memory -- Areas of data memory the user selects to remain unchanged
over a power cycle, as long as the super capacitor and the optional battery cartridge have
not been discharged. V, M, Timer Currents, and Counter Currents are the only data memory
areas that are configurable to be retentive.
- Permanent Memory -- Non-volatile memory used to store the program block, data block,
system block, forced values, M memory configured to be saved on loss of power, and
selected values written under user program control
- Memory Cartridge -- Removable non-volatile memory used to store the program block, data
block, system block, recipes, data logs, and forced values
You can use the S7-200 Explorer to store documentation files (doc, text, pdf, etc.) into the
cartridge. You can also use the S7-200 Explorer to perform general file maintenance on the
memory cartridge (copy, delete, directory and launch).
To install a memory cartridge, remove the plastic slot cover from the S7-200 CPU and insert the
memory cartridge in the slot. The memory cartridge is keyed for proper installation.
Caution
Electrostatic discharge can damage the memory cartridge or the receptacle on the S7-200 CPU.
Make contact with a grounded conductive pad and/or wear a grounded wrist strap when you
handle the cartridge. Store the cartridge in a conductive container.
- Program block
- Data block (optional)
- System block (optional)
- Recipes (optional)
- Data log configurations (optional)
When you download a project, the program block, data block and system block are stored in
permanent memory for safekeeping. Recipes and data log configurations are stored in the
memory cartridge, and replace any existing recipes and data logs. Any program elements not
included in the download operation are left unchanged in permanent memory and the memory
cartridge.
36
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
When you upload a project to your computer using STEP 7--Micro/WIN, the S7-200 uploads the
program block, data block and system block from permanent memory. The recipes and data log
configurations are uploaded from the memory cartridge. The data from the data logs is not
uploaded to your computer using STEP7--Micro/WIN. The S7-200 Explorer is used to upload the
data from the data logs (see Chapter 14).
Before copying any program elements to the memory cartridge, STEP 7--Micro/WIN deletes all
program elements (including recipes and data logs) except for user files on the memory cartridge.
If your program will not fit because of the size of your files, you can do one of two things to create
enough storage space for your program. You can either erase the memory cartridge using the
PLC > Erase Memory Cartridge menu command. Or, you can open the S7-200 Explorer and
remove user files that are no longer needed.
The program block, system block, data block, and any forced values are copied from permanent
memory in the S7-200 to the memory cartridge. The recipes and data log configurations are
copied from STEP 7--Micro/WIN to the memory cartridge.
37
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- If a program block was transferred from the memory cartridge, the program block in
permanent memory is replaced.
- If a data block was transferred from the memory cartridge, the data block in permanent
memory is replaced, all of V memory is cleared, and V memory is initialized with the
contents of the data block.
- If a system block was transferred from the memory cartridge, the system block and force
values in the permanent memory are replaced and all retentive memory is cleared.
Once the transferred program has been stored to permanent memory you can remove the
memory cartridge. However, if recipes or data logs are present in the cartridge, you must leave
the memory cartridge installed. Leaving the memory cartridge installed will delay entry to RUN
mode on subsequent power cycles.
Notice
Powering on an S7-200 CPU with an installed memory cartridge that was programmed by a
different model of S7-200 CPU can cause an error. Memory cartridges that are programmed by
a lower model number CPU can be read by a higher model number CPU. However, the
opposite is not true. For example, memory cartridges that are programmed by a CPU 221 or
CPU 222 can be read by a CPU 224, but memory cartridges that are programmed by a
CPU 224 are rejected by a CPU 221 or CPU 222.
For a complete list of memory cartridge usage restrictions, see Optional Cartridges (Memory
Cartridge) in Appendix A.
38
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
If the contents of RAM were not maintained (such as after an extended power failure), the S7-200
clears all user data areas, sets the Retentive Data Lost memory bit (SM0.2), restores V memory
from the contents of the data block in permanent memory, and restores the first 14 bytes of
M memory from permanent memory if these bytes were previously configured as retentive.
The save to permanent memory operation does not update the data in the memory cartridge.
Tip
Since the number of save operations to the permanent memory (EEPROM) is limited (100,000
minimum, and 1,000,000 typical), you should ensure that only necessary values are saved.
Otherwise, the EEPROM can wear out and the CPU can fail. Typically, you should perform save
operations at the occurrence of specific events that occur rather infrequently.
For example, if the scan time of the S7-200 is 50 ms and a value was saved once per scan, the
EEPROM would last a minimum of 5,000 seconds, which is less than an hour and a half. On the
other hand, if a value were saved once an hour, the EEPROM would last a minimum of 11
years.
39
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
40
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
- The S7-200 provides a mode switch for changing the mode of operation. You can use the
mode switch (located under the front access door of the S7-200) to manually select the
operating mode: setting the mode switch to STOP mode stops the execution of the
program; setting the mode switch to RUN mode starts the execution of the program; and
setting the mode switch to TERM (terminal) mode does not change the operating mode.
If a power cycle occurs when the mode switch is set to either STOP or TERM, the S7-200
goes automatically to STOP mode when power is restored. If a power cycle occurs when
the mode switch is set to RUN, the S7-200 goes to RUN mode when power is restored.
- STEP 7--Micro/WIN allows you to change the operating mode of the online S7-200. To
enable the software to change the operating mode, you must manually set the mode switch
on the S7-200 to either TERM or RUN. You can use the PLC > STOP or PLC > RUN menu
commands or the associated buttons on the toolbar to change the operating mode.
- You can insert the STOP instruction in your program to change the S7-200 to STOP mode.
This allows you to halt the execution of your program based on the program logic. For more
information about the STOP instruction, see Chapter 6.
The S7-200 Explorer can also be used to read or write user files to the memory cartridge. These
can be any type of files, Word documents, bitmap files, jpeg files, or STEP 7--Micro/WIN projects.
41
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The S7-200 Allows Your Program to Immediately Read or Write the I/O
The S7-200 instruction set provides instructions that immediately read from or write to the physical
I/O. These immediate I/O instructions allow direct access to the actual input or output point, even
though the image registers are normally used as either the source or the destination for I/O
accesses.
The corresponding process-image input register location is not modified when you use an
immediate instruction to access an input point. The corresponding process-image output register
location is updated simultaneously when you use an immediate instruction to access an output
point.
Tip
The S7-200 handles reads of analog inputs as immediate data, unless you enable analog input
filtering. When you write a value to an analog output, the output is updated immediately.
It is usually advantageous to use the process-image register rather than to directly access inputs
or outputs during the execution of your program. There are three reasons for using the image
registers:
- The sampling of all inputs at the start of the scan synchronizes and freezes the values of
the inputs for the program execution phase of the scan cycle. The outputs are updated from
the image register after the execution of the program is complete. This provides a stabilizing
effect on the system.
- Your program can access the image register much more quickly than it can access I/O
points, allowing faster execution of the program.
- I/O points are bit entities and must be accessed as bits or bytes, but you can access the
image register as bits, bytes, words, or double words. Thus, the image registers provide
additional flexibility.
Interrupts are serviced by the S7-200 on a first-come-first-served basis within their respective
priority assignments. See the Interrupt instructions in Chapter 6 for more information.
42
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
The S7-200 Allows You to Allocate Processing Time for Run Mode Edit
and Execution Status
You can configure a percentage of the scan cycle to be dedicated for processing a run mode edit
compilation or execution status. (Run mode edit and execution status are options provided by
STEP 7--Micro/WIN to make debugging your program easier.) As you increase the percentage of
time that is dedicated to these two tasks, you increase the scan time, which makes your control
process run more slowly.
The default percentage of the scan dedicated to processing run mode edits and execution status
is set to 10%. This setting was chosen to provide a reasonable compromise for processing the
compilation and status operations while minimizing the impact to your control process. You can
adjust this value by 5% increments up to a maximum of 50%. To set the scan cycle time-slice for
background communications:
The S7-200 Allows You to Set the States of Digital Outputs for Stop
Mode
The output table of the S7-200 allows you to determine whether to set the state of the digital
output points to known values upon a transition to the STOP mode, or to leave the outputs in the
state they were in before the transition to the STOP mode. The output table is part of the system
block that is downloaded and stored in the S7-200.
43
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Only the current values for timers and counters can be retained: the timer and counter bits are not
retentive.
Tip
Changing the range MB0 to MB13 to be retentive enables a special feature that automatically
saves these locations to the permanent memory on power down.
To define the retentive memory:
44
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
The filter has a fast response feature to allow large changes to be quickly reflected in the filter
value. The filter makes a step function change to the latest analog input value when the input
exceeds a specified change from the current value. This change, called the deadband, is
specified in counts of the digital value of the analog input.
45
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
Do not use the analog filter with modules that pass digital information or alarm indications in the
analog words. Always disable analog filtering for RTD, Thermocouple, and AS-Interface Master
modules.
Tip
AIW0 and AIW2 on the CPU 224XP are filtered by the analog to digital converter, and usually
will not need the additional software filter.
Figure 4-25 shows the basic operation of the S7-200 with and without pulse catch enabled.
Physical Input
Output from The S7-200 misses this pulse because the input
pulse catch turned on and off before the S7-200 updated the
process-image input register
Disabled
Figure 4-25 Operation of the S7-200 with the Pulse Catch Feature Enabled and Disabled
46
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
Because the pulse catch function operates on the input after it passes through the input filter, you
must adjust the input filter time so that the pulse is not removed by the filter. Figure 4-26 shows a
block diagram of the digital input circuit.
External
Digital Input Pulse Catch Enable
Figure 4-27 shows the response of an enabled pulse catch function to various input conditions. If
you have more than one pulse in a given scan, only the first pulse is read. If you have multiple
pulses in a given scan, you should use the rising/falling edge interrupt events. (For a listing of
interrupt events, see Table 6-46.)
Figure 4-27 Responses of the Pulse Catch Function to Various Input Conditions
47
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
48
PLC Concepts Chapter 4
Having one user authorized to access restricted functions does not authorize other users to
access those functions. Only one user is allowed unrestricted access to the S7-200 at a time.
Tip
After you enter the password, the authorization level for that password remains effective for up
to one minute after the programming device has been disconnected from the S7-200. Always
exit STEP 7-Micro/WIN before disconnecting the cable to prevent another user from accessing
the privileges of the programming device.
1. Select the PLC > Clear menu command to display the Clear dialog box.
2. Select all three blocks and confirm your action by clicking OK.
3. If a password had been configured, STEP 7--Micro/WIN displays a password-authorization
dialog box. To clear the password, enter CLEARPLC in the password-authorization dialog
box to continue the Clear All operation. (The CLEARPLC password is not case sensitive.)
The Clear All operation does not remove the program from a memory cartridge. Since the memory
cartridge stores the password along with the program, you must also reprogram the memory
cartridge to remove the lost password.
Warning
Clearing the S7-200 memory causes the outputs to turn off (or in the case of an analog output,
to be frozen at a specific value).
If the S7-200 is connected to equipment when you clear the memory, changes in the state of the
outputs can be transmitted to the equipment. If you had configured the “safe state” for the
outputs to be different from the factory settings, changes in the outputs could cause
unpredictable operation of your equipment, which in turn could cause death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that your process is in a safe state
before clearing the S7-200 memory.
49
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The PTO function provides a square wave (50% duty cycle) output for a specified number of
pulses (from 1 to 4,294,967,295 pulses) and a specified cycle time (in either microsecond or
millisecond increments. You can program the PTO function to produce either one train of pulses or
a pulse profile consisting of multiple trains of pulses. For example, you can use a pulse profile to
control a stepper motor through a simple ramp up, run, and ramp down sequence or more
complicated sequences.
The PWM function provides a fixed cycle time with a variable duty cycle output, with the cycle time
and the pulse width specified in either microsecond or millisecond increments. When the pulse
width is equal to the cycle time, the duty cycle is 100 percent and the output is turned on
continuously. When the pulse width is zero, the duty cycle is 0 percent and the output is turned off.
For more information on the high-speed pulse output instruction, see Chapter 6. For more
information about using PTO in open loop motion control, see Chapter 9.
50
Programming Concepts, Conventions,
and Features
The S7-200 continuously executes your program to control a task or process. You use
STEP 7--Micro/WIN to create this program and download it to the S7-200. STEP 7--Micro/WIN
provides a variety of tools and features for designing, implementing, and debugging your program.
In This Chapter
Guidelines for Designing a Micro PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Basic Elements of a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using STEP 7--Micro/WIN to Create Your Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Choosing Between the SIMATIC and IEC 1131--3 Instruction Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Understanding the Conventions Used by the Program Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using Wizards To Help You Create Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Handling Errors in the S7-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Assigning Addresses and Initial Values in the Data Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using the Symbol Table for Symbolic Addressing of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the Status Chart to Monitor Your Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating an Instruction Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Features for Debugging Your Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
51
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- Overview showing the location of each operator station in relation to the process or
machine
- Mechanical layout of the devices, such as display, switches, and lights, for the operator
station
- Electrical drawings with the associated I/O of the S7-200 CPU or expansion module
52
Programming Concepts, Conventions, and Features Chapter 5
- Overview showing the location of each S7-200 in relation to the process or machine
- Mechanical layout of the S7-200 and expansion I/O modules (including cabinets and other
equipment)
- Electrical drawings for each S7-200 and expansion I/O module (including the device model
numbers, communications addresses, and I/O addresses)
The following example shows a program that includes a subroutine and an interrupt routine. This
sample program uses a timed interrupt for reading the value of an analog input every 100 ms.
Main Program
The main body of the program contains the instructions that control your application. The S7-200
executes these instructions sequentially, once per scan cycle. The main program is also referred
to as OB1.
53
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Subroutines
These optional elements of your program are executed only when called: by the main program, by
an interrupt routine, or by another subroutine. Subroutines are useful in cases where you want to
execute a function repeatedly. Rather than rewriting the logic for each place in the main program
where you want the function to occur, you can write the logic once in a subroutine and call the
subroutine as many times as needed during the main program. Subroutines provide several
benefits:
Tip
Using V memory addresses can limit the portability of your subroutine, because it is possible for
V memory address assignment from one program to conflict with an assignment in another
program. Subroutines that use the local variable table (L memory) for all address assignments,
by contrast, are highly portable because there is no concern about address conflicts between
the subroutine and another part of the program when using local variables.
Interrupt Routines
These optional elements of your program react to specific interrupt events. You design an interrupt
routine to handle a pre-defined interrupt event. Whenever the specified event occurs, the S7-200
executes the interrupt routine.
The interrupt routines are not called by your main program. You associate an interrupt routine with
an interrupt event, and the S7-200 executes the instructions in the interrupt routine only on each
occurrence of the interrupt event.
Tip
Because it is not possible to predict when the S7-200 might generate an interrupt, it is desirable
to limit the number of variables that are used both by the interrupt routine and elsewhere in the
program.
Use the local variable table of the interrupt routine to ensure that your interrupt routine uses only
the temporary memory and does not overwrite data used somewhere else in your program.
There are a number of programming techniques you can use to ensure that data is correctly
shared between your main program and the interrupt routines. These techniques are described
in Chapter 6 with the Interrupt instructions.
System Block
System
The system block allows you to configure different hardware options for the S7-200.
Block
Data Block
The data block stores the values for different variables (V memory) used by your program. You
Data can use the data block to enter initial values for the data.
Block
54
Programming Concepts, Conventions, and Features Chapter 5
55
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Consider these main points when you select the LAD editor:
The logic “1” path through FBD elements is called power flow. The origin of a power flow input and
the destination of a power flow output can be assigned directly to an operand.
The program logic is derived from the connections between these box instructions. That is, the
output from one instruction (such as an AND box) can be used to enable another instruction (such
as a timer) to create the necessary control logic. This connection concept allows you to solve a
wide variety of logic problems.
Consider these main points when you select the FBD editor:
- The graphical logic gate style of representation is good for following program flow.
- The FBD editor can be used with both the SIMATIC and IEC 1131--3 instruction sets.
- You can always use the STL editor to display a program created with the SIMATIC FBD
editor.
56
Programming Concepts, Conventions, and Features Chapter 5
Your S7-200 offers two instruction sets that allow you to solve a wide variety of automation tasks.
The IEC instruction set complies with the IEC 1131--3 standard for PLC programming, and the
SIMATIC instruction set is designed specifically for the S7-200.
Tip
When STEP 7--Micro/WIN is set to the IEC mode, it displays a red diamond 〈♦) in the Instruction
Tree beside the instructions that are not defined by the IEC 1131--3 standard.
There are a few key differences between the SIMATIC instruction set and the IEC instruction set:
- The IEC instruction set is restricted to those instructions that are standard among PLC
vendors. Some instructions that are normally included in the SIMATIC set are not standard
instructions in the IEC 1131--3 specification. These are still available for use as
non-standard instructions, but if you use them, the program is no longer strictly IEC 1131--3
compatible.
- Some IEC box instructions accept multiple data formats. This practice is often referred to as
overloading. For example, rather than have separate ADD_I (Add Integer) and ADD_R (Add
Real), math boxes, the IEC ADD instruction examines the format of the data being added
and automatically chooses the correct instruction in the S7-200. This can save valuable
program design time.
- When you use the IEC instructions, the instruction parameters are automatically checked
for the proper data format, such as a signed integer versus an unsigned integer. For
example, an error results if you try to enter an integer value for an instruction that expected
a bit value (on/off). This feature helps to minimize programming syntax errors.
Consider these points when you select either the SIMATIC or the IEC instruction set:
- SIMATIC instructions usually have the shortest execution times. Some IEC instructions
might have longer execution times.
- Some IEC instructions, such as timers, counters, multiply, and divide, operate differently
than their SIMATIC counterparts.
- You can use all three program editors (LAD, STL, FBD) with the SIMATIC instruction set.
You can use only the LAD and FBD program editors for IEC instructions.
- The operation of the IEC instructions is standard for different brands of PLCs, and the
knowledge about creating an IEC-compliant program can be leveraged across PLC
platforms.
- While the IEC standard defines fewer instructions than are available in the SIMATIC
instruction set, you can always include SIMATIC instructions in your IEC program.
- IEC 1131--3 specifies that variables must be declared with a type, and supports system
checking of data type.
57
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- A # in front of a symbol name (#var1) indicates that the symbol is of local scope.
- For IEC instructions, the % symbol indicates a direct address.
- The operand symbol “?.?” or “????” indicates that an operand configuration is required.
LAD programs are divided into segments called networks. A network is an ordered arrangement
of contacts, coils, and boxes that are all connected to form a complete circuit: no short circuits, no
open circuits, and no reverse power flow conditions exist. STEP 7--Micro/WIN allows you to create
comments for your LAD program on a network-by-network basis. FBD programming uses the
network concept for segmenting and commenting your program.
STL programs do not use networks; however, you can use the NETWORK keyword to segment
your program.
- The symbol “------>>” on an EN operand is a power flow or operand indicator. It can also
depict an open circuit or a required power flow connection.
- The symbol “ ” indicates that the output is an optional power flow for an instruction that
can be cascaded or connected in series.
- The symbols “<<” and “>>” indicate that you
Logical NOT
can use either a value or power flow.
Condition
- Negation bubbles: The logical NOT condition
or inverted condition of the operand or power Immediate
flow is shown by the small circle on the input. Condition
In Figure 5-5, Q0.0 is equal to the NOT of I0.0
AND I0.1. Negation
g bubbles are onlyy valid for
B l
Boolean signals,
i l which
hi h can be
b specified
ifi d as Figure 5-5 FBD Conventions
parameters or power flow.
- Immediate indicators: As shown in Figure 5-5, the FBD editor displays an immediate
condition of a Boolean operand with a vertical line on the input to an FBD instruction. The
immediate indicator causes an immediate read from the specified physical input. Immediate
operators are only valid for physical inputs.
- Box with no input or output: A box with no input indicates an instruction that is independent
of power flow.
Tip
The number of operands can be expanded up to 32 inputs for AND and OR instructions. To add
or subtract operand tics, use the “+” and “--” keys on your keyboard.
58
Programming Concepts, Conventions, and Features Chapter 5
ENO (Enable Out) is a Boolean output for boxes in LAD and FBD. If the box has power flow at the
EN input and the box executes its function without error, then the ENO output passes power flow
to the next element. If an error is detected in the execution of the box, then power flow is
terminated at the box that generated the error.
In STL, there is no ENO output, but the STL instructions that correspond to the LAD and FBD
instructions with ENO outputs do set a special ENO bit. This bit is accessible with the AND ENO
(AENO) instruction and can be used to generate the same effect as the ENO bit of a box.
Tip
The EN/ENO operands and data types are not shown in the valid operands table for each
instruction because the operands are the same for all LAD and FBD instructions. Table 5-1 lists
these operands and data types for LAD and FBD. These operands apply to all LAD and FBD
instructions shown in this manual.
Table 5-1 EN/ENO Operands and Data Types for LAD and FBD
Program Editor Inputs/Outputs Operands Data Types
LAD EN, ENO Power Flow BOOL
FBD EN, ENO I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L BOOL
Conditional/Unconditional Inputs
In LAD and FBD, a box or a coil that is dependent upon power flow is shown with a connection to
any element on the left side. A coil or box that is independent of power flow is shown with a
connection directly to the left power rail. Table 5-2 shows an example of both a conditional and an
unconditional input.
Compare Instructions
The compare instruction is executed regardless of the state of power flow. If power flow is false,
the output is false. If power flow is true, the output is set depending upon the result of the
compare. SIMATIC FBD, IEC Ladder, and IEC FBD compare instructions are shown as boxes,
although the operation is performed as a contact.
59
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Instruction
Wizard
Non-Fatal Errors
Non-fatal errors are those indicating problems with the construction of the user program, with the
execution of an instruction in the user program, and with expansion I/O modules. You can use
STEP 7--Micro/WIN to view the error codes that were generated by the non-fatal error. There are
three basic categories of non-fatal errors.
Program-compile errors
The S7-200 compiles the program as it downloads. If the S7-200 detects that the program violates
a compilation rule, the download is aborted and an error code is generated. (A program that was
already downloaded to the S7-200 would still exist in the permanent memory and would not be
lost.) After you correct your program, you can download it again. Refer to Appendix C for a list of
compile rule violations.
I/O errors
At startup, the S7-200 reads the I/O configuration from each module. During normal operation, the
S7-200 periodically checks the status of each module and compares it against the configuration
obtained during startup. If the S7-200 detects a difference, the S7-200 sets the configuration error
bit in the module error register. The S7-200 does not read input data from or write output data to
that module until the module configuration again matches the one obtained at startup.
60
Programming Concepts, Conventions, and Features Chapter 5
The module status information is stored in special memory (SM) bits. Your program can monitor
and evaluate these bits. Refer to Appendix D for more information about the SM bits used for
reporting I/O errors. SM5.0 is the global I/O error bit and remains set while an error condition
exists on an expansion module.
The S7-200 does not change to STOP mode when it detects a non-fatal error. It only logs the
event in SM memory and continues with the execution of your program. However, you can design
your program to force the S7-200 to STOP mode when a non-fatal error is detected. The following
sample program shows a network of a program that is monitoring two of the global non-fatal error
bits and changes the S7-200 to STOP whenever either of these bits turns on.
Fatal Errors
Fatal errors cause the S7-200 to stop the execution of your program. Depending upon the severity
of the fatal error, it can render the S7-200 incapable of performing any or all functions. The
objective for handling fatal errors is to bring the S7-200 to a safe state from which the S7-200 can
respond to interrogations about the existing error conditions. When a fatal error is detected, the
S7-200 changes to STOP mode, turns on the SF/DIAG (Red) and the STOP LED, overrides the
output table, and turns off the outputs. The S7-200 remains in this condition until the fatal error
condition is corrected.
Once you have made the changes to correct the fatal error condition, use one of the following
methods to restart the S7-200:
Some error conditions can render the S7-200 incapable of communication. In these cases, you
cannot view the error code from the S7-200. These types of errors indicate hardware failures that
require the S7-200 to be repaired; they cannot be fixed by changes to the program or clearing the
memory of the S7-200.
61
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The data block editor assigns an appropriate amount of V memory based on your previous
address allocations and the size (byte, word, or double word) of the data value(s).
The first line of the data block must have an explicit address assignment. Subsequent lines can
have explicit or implicit address assignments. An implicit address assignment is made by the
editor when you type multiple data values after a single address assignment, or type a line that
contains only data values.
The data block editor accepts uppercase or lowercase letters and allows commas, tabs, or spaces
to serve as separators between addresses and data values.
You can identify the operands of the instructions in your program absolutely or symbolically. An
absolute reference uses the memory area and bit or byte location to identify the address. A
symbolic reference uses a combination of alphanumeric characters to identify the address.
1. Click on the Symbol Table icon in the navigation bar to open the symbol table.
2. Enter the symbol name (for example, Input1) in the Symbol Name column. The maximum
symbol length is 23 characters.
3. Enter the address (for example, I0.0) in the Address column.
4. For an IEC global variable table, enter a value in the Data Type column or select one from
the listbox.
You can create multiple symbol tables; however, you cannot use the same string more than once
as a global symbol assignment, neither within a single table nor among several tables.
62
Programming Concepts, Conventions, and Features Chapter 5
You can create multiple status charts in order to view elements from different portions of your
program.
To access the status chart, select the View > Component > Status Chart menu command or
click the Status Chart icon in the navigation bar.
1. Enter the address for each desired value in the Address field.
2. Select the data type in the Format column.
3. To view the status of the process variables in your S7-200, select the Debug > Chart
Status menu command.
4. To continuously sample the values, or to perform a single read of the status, click the button
on the toolbar. The Status Chart also allows you to modify or force values for the different
process variables.
You can insert additional rows in your Status Chart by selecting the Edit > Insert > Row menu
command.
Tip
You can create multiple status charts to divide the variables into logical groups so that each
group can be viewed in a shorter and separate status chart.
63
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
To create a library of instructions, you create standard STEP 7--Micro/WIN subroutine and
interrupt routines and group them together. You can hide the code in these routines to prevent
accidental changes or to protect the technology (know-how) of the author.
1. Add the Libraries directory to the instruction tree by selecting the File > Add Libraries
menu command.
2. Select the specific instruction and insert it into your program (as you would any standard
instruction).
If the library routine requires any V memory, STEP 7--Micro/WIN prompts you when the
project is compiled to assign a block of memory. Use the Library Memory Allocation dialog
box to assign blocks of memory.
- Bookmarks in your program to make it easy to move back and forth between lines of a long
program.
- Cross Reference table allow you to check the references used in your program.
- RUN-mode editing allows you to make small changes to your program with minimal
disturbance to the process controlled by the program. You can also download the program
block when you are editing in RUN mode.
For more information about debugging your program, refer to Chapter 8.
64
S7-200 Instruction Set
This chapter describes the SIMATIC and IEC 1131 instruction set for the S7-200 Micro PLCs.
In This Chapter
Conventions Used to Describe the Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
S7-200 Memory Ranges and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Bit Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Logic Stack Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Set and Reset Dominant Bistable Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Network Read and Network Write Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Transmit and Receive Instructions (Freeport) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Get Port Address and Set Port Address Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Compare Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Comparing Numerical Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Compare String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Standard Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
ASCII Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
String Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Encode and Decode Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
SIMATIC Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
IEC Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
High-Speed Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Pulse Output Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Add, Subtract, Multiply, and Divide Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Multiply Integer to Double Integer and Divide Integer with Remainder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Numeric Functions Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID) Loop Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Interrupt Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Logical Operations Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Invert Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
AND, OR, and Exclusive OR Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Move Byte, Word, Double Word, or Real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Move Byte Immediate (Read and Write) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Block Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
65
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
66
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
EN/ENO operands and data types are not shown in the instruction operand table because the
operands are the same for all LAD and FBD instructions.
- For LAD: EN and ENO are power flow and are BOOL data types.
- For FBD: EN and ENO are I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, or power flow and are BOOL data
types.
67
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
68
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
69
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Immediate Contacts
An immediate contact does not rely on the S7-200 scan
cycle to update; it updates immediately. The Normally Open
Immediate contact instructions (LDI, AI, and OI) and
Normally Closed Immediate contact instructions (LDNI, ANI,
and ONI) obtain the physical input value when the
instruction is executed, but the process-image register is
not updated.
The Normally Open Immediate contact is closed (on) when
the physical input point (bit) is 1, and the Normally Closed
Immediate contact is closed (on) when the physical input
point (bit) is 0. The Normally Open instructions immediately
Load, AND, or OR the physical input value to the top of the
stack, and the Normally Closed instructions immediately
Load, AND, or OR the logical NOT of the value of the
physical input point to the top of the stack.
NOT Instruction
The Not instruction (NOT) changes the state of power flow
input (that is, it changes the value on the top of the stack
from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0).
70
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
For run mode editing (when you edit your program in RUN mode), you must enter a parameter for
the Positive Transition and Negative Transition instructions. Refer to Chapter 5 for more
information about editing in RUN mode.
Table 6-3 Valid Operands for the Bit Logic Input Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
Bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow
Bit (immediate) BOOL I
As shown in Figure 6-2, the S7-200 uses a logic stack to resolve the control logic. In these
examples, “iv0” to “iv7” identify the initial values of the logic stack, “nv” identifies a new value
provided by the instruction, and “S0” identifies the calculated value that is stored in the logic stack.
Load (LD, LDI, Before After And (A, AI, AN, Before After Or (O, OI, ON, Before After
LDN, LDNI) iv0 nv
ANI) iv0 S01
ONI) iv0 S01
Loads a new ANDs a new ORs a new
iv1 iv0 value (nv) with iv1 iv1 value (nv) with iv1 iv1
value (nv) onto
the stack. iv2 iv1 the initial value iv2 iv2 the initial value iv2 iv2
(iv) at the top of (iv) at the top of
iv3 iv2 iv3 iv3 iv3 iv3
the stack. the stack.
iv4 iv3 S0=iv0 AND nv iv4 iv4 S0=iv0 OR nv iv4 iv4
iv5 iv4 iv5 iv5 iv5 iv5
iv6 iv5 iv6 iv6 iv6 iv6
iv7 iv6 iv7 iv7 iv7 iv7
iv82 iv7 iv8 iv8 iv8 iv8
Tip
Because the Positive Transition and Negative Transition instructions require an on-to-off or an
off-to-on transition, you cannot detect an edge-up or edge-down transition on the first scan.
During the first scan, the S7-200 sets the state of the bit specified by these instructions. On
subsequent scans, these instructions can then detect transitions for the specified bit.
71
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
I0.1
Q0.0
Q0.1
Network 2
I0.2
I0.3
Q0.2
Network 3
I0.4
Q0.3
72
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Coils
Output
The Output instruction (=) writes the new value for the
output bit to the process-image register. When the Output
instruction is executed, the S7-200 turns the output bit in the
process-image register on or off. For LAD and FBD, the
specified bit is set equal to power flow. For STL, the value
on the top of the stack is copied to the specified bit.
Output Immediate
The Output Immediate instruction (=I) writes the new value
to both the physical output and the corresponding
process-image register location when the instruction is
executed.
When the Output Immediate instruction is executed, the
physical output point (Bit) is immediately set equal to power
flow. For STL, the instruction immediately copies the value
on the top of the stack to the specified physical output bit
(STL). The “I” indicates an immediate reference; the new
value is written to both the physical output and the
corresponding process-image register location when the
instruction is executed. This differs from the non-immediate
references, which write the new value to the process-image
register only.
If the Reset instruction specifies either a timer bit (T) or counter bit (C), the instruction resets the
timer or counter bit and clears the current value of the timer or counter.
Table 6-4 Valid Operands for the Bit Logic Output Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
Bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Bit (immediate) BOOL Q
N BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
73
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
I0.0
Q0.0, Q0.1, V0.0
Networks 2 and 3
I0.1 (Set)
I0.2 (Reset)
Networks 4 and 5
I0.3
I0.4 (Set)
I0.5 (Reset)
I0.6
Q1.0
Network 5 Output bit (=) instruction overwrites the first bit (Q1.0) Set/Reset in
Network 4 because the program scan executes the Network 5 assignment last
74
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
OR Load
The OR Load instruction (OLD) combines the values in the
first and second levels of the stack, using a logical OR
operation. The result is loaded in the top of the stack. After
the OLD is executed, the stack depth is decreased by one.
Logic Push
The Logic Push instruction (LPS) duplicates the top value on the stack and pushes this value onto
the stack. The bottom of the stack is pushed off and lost.
Logic Read
The Logic Read instruction (LRD) copies the second stack value to the top of stack. The stack is
not pushed or popped, but the old top-of-stack value is destroyed by the copy.
Logic Pop
The Logic Pop instruction (LPP) pops one value off of the stack. The second stack value becomes
the new top of stack value.
AND ENO
The AND ENO instruction (AENO) performs a logical AND of the ENO bit with the top of the stack
to generate the same effect as the ENO bit of a box in LAD or FBD. The result of the AND
operation is the new top of stack.
ENO is a Boolean output for boxes in LAD and FBD. If a box has power flow at the EN input and
is executed without error, the ENO output passes power flow to the next element. You can use the
ENO as an enable bit that indicates the successful completion of an instruction. The ENO bit is
used with the top of stack to affect power flow for execution of subsequent instructions. STL
instructions do not have an EN input. The top of the stack must be a logic 1 for conditional
instructions to be executed. In STL there is also no ENO output. However, the STL instructions
that correspond to LAD and FBD instructions with ENO outputs set a special ENO bit. This bit is
accessible with the AENO instruction.
Load Stack
The Load Stack instruction (LDS) duplicates the stack bit (N) on the stack and places this value
on top of the stack. The bottom of the stack is pushed off and lost.
75
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
As shown in Figure 6-3, the S7-200 uses a logic stack to resolve the control logic. In these
examples, “iv0” to “iv7” identify the initial values of the logic stack, “nv” identifies a new value
provided by the instruction, and “S0” identifies the calculated value that is stored in the logic stack.
76
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Table 6-6 Valid Operands for the Set Dominant Bistable and Reset Dominant Bistable
Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
S1, R BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, Power Flow
S, R1, OUT BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow
Bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, S
Set I0.0
Reset I0.1
SR Q0.0
RS Q0.1
Table 6-7 Truth Table for the Set and Reset Dominant Bistable Instructions
Instruction S1 R Out (Bit)
Set Dominant Bistable instruction 0 0 Previous state
(SR)
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1
Instruction S R1 Out (Bit)
Reset Dominant Bistable instruction 0 0 Previous state
(RS)
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
77
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Clock Instructions
Read Real-Time Clock and Set Real-Time
Clock
The Read Real-Time Clock (TODR) instruction reads the
current time and date from the hardware clock and loads it
in an 8-byte Time buffer starting at address T. The Set
Real-Time Clock (TODW) instruction writes the current time
and date to the hardware clock, beginning at the 8-byte
Time buffer address specified by T.
You must code all date and time values in BCD format (for
example, 16#97 for the year 1997). Figure 6-4 shows the
format of the 8-Byte Time buffer (T).
The time-of-day (TOD) clock initializes the following date
and time after extended power outages or when memory
has been lost:
Date: 01--Jan--90
Time: 00:00:00
Day of Week: Sunday
Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0006 (indirect address)
H 0007 (TOD data error) Set Real-Time Clock only
H 000C (clock not present)
78
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Tip
The S7-200 CPU does not perform a check to verify that the day of week is correct based upon
the date. Invalid dates, such as February 30, could be accepted. You should ensure that the
date you enter is correct.
Do not use the TODR/TODW instruction in both the main program and in an interrupt routine. A
TODR/TODW instruction in an interrupt routine that attempts to execute while another
TODR/TODW instruction is in process cannot be executed. SM4.3 is set indicating that two
simultaneous accesses to the clock were attempted (non-fatal error 0007).
The time-of-day clock in the S7-200 uses only the least significant two digits for the year, so for
the year 2000, the year is represented as 00. The S7-200 PLC does not use the year
information in any way. However, user programs that use arithmetic or compares with the year’s
value must take into account the two-digit representation and the change in century.
Leap year is correctly handled through year 2096.
Read Real Time Clock Extended Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0006 (indirect address)
The Read Real Time Clock Extended (TODRX) instruction
reads the current time, date, and daylight savings H 000C (clock cartridge not present)
configuration from the PLC and loads it in a 19-byte buffer H 0091 (range error)
beginning at the address specified by T.
Set Real Time Clock Extended Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0006 (indirect address)
The Set Real Time Clock (TODWX) instruction writes the
current time, date, and daylight savings configuration to the H 0007 (TOD data error)
PLC beginning at the 19-byte buffer address specified by T. H 000C (clock cartridge not present)
You must code all date and time values in BCD format (for H 0091 (range error)
example, 16#02 for the year 2002). Table 6-9 shows the
format of the 19-Byte Time Buffer (T).
Date: 01--Jan--90
The time-of-day clock initializes the following date and time Time 00:00:00
after extended power outages or memory has been lost: Day of Week: Sunday
79
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
80
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Communications Instructions
Network Read and Network Write Instructions
The Network Read instruction (NETR) initiates a
communications operation to gather data from a remote
device through the specified port (PORT), as defined by the
table (TBL). The Network Write instruction (NETW) initiates
a communications operation to write data to a remote
device through the specified port (PORT), as defined by the
table (TBL).
Error conditions that set ENO = 0:
H 0006 (indirect address)
H If the function returns an error and sets the E bit of table status
byte (see Figure 6-5)
Table 6-10 Valid Operands for the Network Read and Network Write Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
TBL BYTE VB, MB, *VD, *LD, *AC
PORT BYTE Constant for CPU 221, CPU 222, CPU 224: 0
for CPU 224XP, CPU 226: 0 or 1
81
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Figure 6-5 describes the table that is referenced by the TBL parameter, and Table 6-11 lists the
error codes.
Figure 6-5 TBL Parameter for the Network Read and Network Write Instructions
Figure 6-6 shows an example to illustrate the utility of the Network Read and Network Write
instructions. For this example, consider a production line where tubs of butter are being filled and
sent to one of four boxing machines (case packers). The case packer packs eight tubs of butter
into a single cardboard box. A diverter machine controls the flow of butter tubs to each of the case
packers. Four S7-200s control the case packers, and an S7-200 with a TD 200 operator interface
controls the diverter.
82
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
VB100 Control VB100 Control VB100 Control VB100 Control VB200 Rcv VB300 Xmt
VW101 Status VW101 Status VW101 Status VW101 Status Buffers Buffers
Figure 6-6 Example of the Network Read and Network Write Instructions
Figure 6-7 shows the receive buffer (VB200) and transmit buffer (VB300) for accessing the data in
station 2. The S7-200 uses a Network Read instruction to read the control and status information
on a continuous basis from each of the case packers. Each time a case packer has packed 100
cases, the diverter notes this and sends a message to clear the status word using a Network Write
instruction.
Receive Buffer for reading from Transmit Buffer for clearing the count of
Case Packer #1 Case Packer #1
7 0
7 0
VB200 D A E 0 Error Code
VB300 D A E 0 Error Code
VB201 Remote station address = 2
VB301 Remote station address = 2
VB202 Pointer to the
VB302 Pointer to the
VB203 data area
VB303 data area
VB204 in the
VB304 in the
VB205 Remote station = (&VB100)
VB305 Remote station = (&VB101)
VB206 Data length = 3 bytes
VB306 Data length = 2 bytes
VB207 Control
VB307 0
VB208 Status (MSB)
VB308 0
VB209 Status (LSB)
Figure 6-7 Sample TBL Data for the Network Read/Write Example
83
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
84
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
85
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 6-12 Valid Operands for the Transmit and Receive Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
TBL BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, *VD, *LD, *AC
PORT BYTE Constant for CPU 221, CPU 222, CPU 224: 0
for CPU 224XP, CPU 226: 0 or 1
For more information about using Freeport mode, see the section Creating User-Defined
Protocols with Freeport Mode on page 226 in Chapter 7.
The Freeport mode is disabled and normal communications are re-established (for example,
programming device access) when the S7-200 is in STOP mode.
In the simplest case, you can send a message to a printer or a display using only the Transmit
(XMT) instruction. Other examples include a connection to a bar code reader, a weighing scale,
and a welder. In each case, you must write your program to support the protocol that is used by
the device with which the S7--200 communicates while in Freeport mode.
Freeport communications are possible only when the S7-200 is in RUN mode. Enable the
Freeport mode by setting a value of 01 in the protocol select field of SMB30 (Port 0) or SMB130
(Port 1). While in Freeport mode, communications with the programming device are not possible.
Tip
Freeport mode can be controlled using special memory bit SM0.7, which reflects the current
position of the operating mode switch. When SM0.7 is equal to 0, the switch is in TERM
position; when SM0.7 = 1, the operating mode switch is in RUN position. If you enable Freeport
mode only when the switch is in RUN position, you can use the programming device to monitor
or control the S7-200 operation by changing the switch to any other position.
86
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
MSB LSB
7 0
bbb: Freeport baud rate
p p d b b b m m 000 = 38,400 baud
001 = 19,200 baud
SMB30 = Port 0
010 = 9,600 baud
SMB130 = Port 1
011 = 4,800 baud
100 = 2,400 baud
pp: Parity select 101 = 1,200 baud
1 Requires S7-200
00 = no parity 110 = 115.2 kbaud1
01 = even parity 111 = 57.6 kbaud1 CPUs version 1.2
10 = no parity or later
mm: Protocol selection
11 = odd parity 00 = PPI/slave mode
d: Data bits per character 01 = Freeport protocol
0= 8 bits per character 10 = PPI/master mode
1= 7 bits per character 11 = Reserved (defaults to PPI/slave mode)
Transmitting Data
The Transmit instruction lets you send a buffer of one or more characters, up to a maximum of
255.
You can use the Transmit instruction to generate a BREAK condition by setting the number of
characters to zero and then executing the Transmit instruction. This generates a BREAK condition
on the line for 16-bit times at the current baud rate. Transmitting a BREAK is handled in the same
manner as transmitting any other message, in that a Transmit interrupt is generated when the
BREAK is complete and SM4.5 or SM4.6 signals the current status of the Transmit operation.
Receiving Data
The Receive instruction lets you receive a buffer of one or more characters, up to a maximum of
255.
87
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
As shown in Table 6-13, the Receive instruction allows you to select the message start and
message end conditions, using SMB86 through SMB94 for port 0 and SMB186 through SMB194
for port 1.
Tip
The receive message function is automatically terminated in case of an overrun or a parity error.
You must define a start condition and an end condition (maximum character count) for the
receive message function to operate.
Table 6-13 Bytes of the Receive Buffer (SMB86 to SMB94, and SM1B86 to SMB194)
Port 0 Port 1 Description
SMB86 SMB186 Receive message MSB LSB
7 0
status byte
n r e 0 0 t c p
n: 1= Receive message function terminated: user issued
disable command.
r: 1= Receive message function terminated: error in input
parameters or missing start or end condition.
e: 1= End character received.
t: 1= Receive message function terminated: timer expired.
c: 1= Receive message function terminated: maximum
character count achieved.
p 1= Receive message function terminated: a parity error.
SMB87 SMB187 Receive message MSB LSB
7 0
control byte
en sc ec il c/m tmr bk 0
88
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Tip
If there is traffic present on the communications port from other devices when the Receive
instruction is executed, the receive message function could begin receiving a character in the
middle of that character, resulting in a possible parity error and termination of the receive
message function. If parity is not enabled the received message could contain incorrect
characters. This situation can occur when the start condition is specified to be a specific start
character or any character, as described in item 2. and item 6. below.
The Receive instruction supports several message start conditions. Specifying a start condition
involving a break or an idle line detection avoids this problem by forcing the receive message
function to synchronize the start of the message with the start of a character before placing
characters into the message buffer.
1. Idle line detection: The idle line condition is defined as a quiet or idle time on the
transmission line. A receive is started when the communications line has been quiet or idle
for the number of milliseconds specified in SMW90 or SMW190. When the Receive
instruction in your program is executed, the receive message function initiates a search for
an idle line condition. If any characters are received before the idle line time expires, the
receive message function ignores those characters and restarts the idle line timer with the
time from SMW90 or SMW190. See Figure 6-11. After the idle line time expires, the receive
message function stores all subsequent characters received in the message buffer.
The idle line time should always be greater than the time to transmit one character (start bit,
data bits, parity and stop bits) at the specified baud rate. A typical value for the idle line time
is three character times at the specified baud rate.
You use idle line detection as a start condition for binary protocols, protocols where there is
not a particular start character, or when the protocol specifies a minimum time between
messages.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 0, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = idle line timeout in milliseconds
Characters Characters
Figure 6-11 Using Idle Time Detection to Start the Receive Instruction
2. Start character detection: The start character is any character which is used as the first
character of a message. A message is started when the start character specified in SMB88
or SMB188 is received. The receive message function stores the start character in the
receive buffer as the first character of the message. The receive message function ignores
any characters that are received before the start character. The start character and all
characters received after the start character are stored in the message buffer.
Typically, you use start character detection for ASCII protocols in which all messages start
with the same character.
Setup: il = 0, sc = 1, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = don’t care, SMB88/SMB188 = start
character
89
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
3. Idle line and start character: The Receive instruction can start a message with the
combination of an idle line and a start character. When the Receive instruction is executed,
the receive message function searches for an idle line condition. After finding the idle line
condition, the receive message function looks for the specified start character. If any
character but the start character is received, the receive message function restarts the
search for an idle line condition. All characters received before the idle line condition has
been satisfied and before the start character has been received are ignored. The start
character is placed in the message buffer along with all subsequent characters.
The idle line time should always be greater than the time to transmit one character (start bit,
data bits, parity and stop bits) at the specified baud rate. A typical value for the idle line time
is three character times at the specified baud rate.
Typically, you use this type of start condition when there is a protocol that specifies a
minimum time between messages, and the first character of the message is an address or
something which specifies a particular device. This is most useful when implementing a
protocol where there are multiple devices on the communications link. In this case the
Receive instruction triggers an interrupt only when a message is received for the specific
address or devices specified by the start character.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 1, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 > 0, SMB88/SMB188 = start
character
4. Break detection: A break is indicated when the received data is held to a zero value for a
time greater than a full character transmission time. A full character transmission time is
defined as the total time of the start, data, parity and stop bits. If the Receive instruction is
configured to start a message on receiving a break condition, any characters received after
the break condition are placed in the message buffer. Any characters received before the
break condition are ignored.
Typically, you use break detection as a start condition only when a protocol requires it.
Setup: il = 0, sc = 0, bk = 1, SMW90/SMW190 = don’t care, SMB88/SMB188 =
don’t care
5. Break and a start character: The Receive instruction can be configured to start receiving
characters after receiving a break condition, and then a specific start character, in that
sequence. After the break condition, the receive message function looks for the specified
start character. If any character but the start character is received, the receive message
function restarts the search for an break condition. All characters received before the break
condition has been satisfied and before the start character has been received are ignored.
The start character is placed in the message buffer along with all subsequent characters.
Setup: il = 0, sc = 1, bk = 1, SMW90/SMW190 = don’t care,
SMB88/SMB188 = start character
6. Any character: The Receive instruction can be configured to immediately start receiving any
and all characters and placing them in the message buffer. This is a special case of the idle
line detection. In this case the idle line time (SMW90 or SMW190) is set to zero. This forces
the Receive instruction to begin receiving characters immediately upon execution.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 0, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = 0, SMB88/SMB188 = don’t care
Starting a message on any character allows the message timer to be used to time out the
receiving of a message. This is useful in cases where Freeport is used to implement the
master or host portion of a protocol and there is a need to time out if no response is
received from a slave device within a specified amount of time. The message timer starts
when the Receive instruction executes because the idle line time was set to zero. The
message timer times out and terminates the receive message function if no other end
condition is satisfied.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 0, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = 0, SMB88/SMB188 = don’t care
c/m = 1, tmr = 1, SMW92 = message timeout in milliseconds
90
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
The Receive instruction supports several ways to terminate a message. The message can be
terminated on one or a combination of the following:
1. End character detection: The end character is any character which is used to denote the
end of the message. After finding the start condition, the Receive instruction checks each
character received to see if it matches the end character. When the end character is
received, it is placed in the message buffer and the receive is terminated.
Typically, you use end character detection with ASCII protocols where every message ends
with a specific character. You can use end character detection in combination with the
intercharacter timer, the message timer or the maximum character count to terminate a
message.
Setup: ec = 1, SMB89/SMB189 = end character
2. Intercharacter timer: The intercharacter time is the time measured from the end of one
character (the stop bit) to the end of the next character (the stop bit). If the time between
characters (including the second character) exceeds the number of milliseconds specified
in SMW92 or SMW192, the receive message function is terminated. The intercharacter
timer is restarted on each character received. See Figure 6-12.
You can use the intercharacter timer to terminate a message for protocols which do not
have a specific end-of-message character. This timer must be set to a value greater than
one character time at the selected baud rate since this timer always includes the time to
receive one entire character (start bit, data bits, parity and stop bits).
You can use the intercharacter timer in combination with the end character detection and
the maximum character count to terminate a message.
Setup: c/m = 0, tmr = 1, SMW92/SMW192 = timeout in milliseconds
Characters Characters
Figure 6-12 Using the Intercharacter Timer to Terminate the Receive Instruction
3. Message timer: The message timer terminates a message at a specified time after the start
of the message. The message timer starts as soon as the start condition(s) for the receive
message function have been met. The message timer expires when the number of
milliseconds specified in SMW92 or SMW192 have passed. See Figure 6-13.
Typically, you use a message timer when the communications devices cannot guarantee
that there will not be time gaps between characters or when operating over modems. For
modems, you can use a message timer to specify a maximum time allowed to receive the
message after the message has started. A typical value for a message timer would be
about 1.5 times the time required to receive the longest possible message at the selected
baud rate.
You can use the message timer in combination with the end character detection and the
maximum character count to terminate a message.
Setup: c/m = 1, tmr = 1, SMW92/SMW192 = timeout in milliseconds
91
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Characters Characters
Figure 6-13 Using the Message Timer to Terminate the Receive Instruction
4. Maximum character count: The Receive instruction must be told the maximum number of
characters to receive (SMB94 or SMB194). When this value is met or exceeded, the receive
message function is terminated. The Receive instruction requires that the user specify a
maximum character count even if this is not specifically used as a terminating condition.
This is because the Receive instruction needs to know the maximum size of the receive
message so that user data placed after the message buffer is not overwritten.
The maximum character count can be used to terminate messages for protocols where the
message length is known and always the same. The maximum character count is always
used in combination with the end character detection, intercharacter timer, or message
timer.
5. Parity errors: The Receive instruction is automatically terminated when the hardware
signals a parity error on a received character. Parity errors are only possible if parity is
enabled in SMB30 or SMB130. There is no way to disable this function.
6. User termination: The user program can terminate a receive message function by executing
another Receive instruction with the enable bit (EN) in SMB87 or SMB187 set to zero. This
immediately terminates the receive message function.
When the character interrupt is used at high baud rates (38.4 kbaud to 115.2 kbaud), the time
between interrupts is very short. For example, the character interrupt for 38.4 kbaud is
260 microseconds, for 57.6 kbaud is 173 microseconds, and for 115.2 kbaud is 86 microseconds.
Ensure that you keep the interrupt routines very short to avoid missing characters, or else use the
Receive instruction.
Tip
SMB2 and SMB3 are shared between Port 0 and Port 1. When the reception of a character on
Port 0 results in the execution of the interrupt routine attached to that event (interrupt event 8),
SMB2 contains the character received on Port 0, and SMB3 contains the parity status of that
character. When the reception of a character on Port 1 results in the execution of the interrupt
routine attached to that event (interrupt event 25), SMB2 contains the character received on
Port 1 and SMB3 contains the parity status of that character.
92
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
93
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
94
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Table 6-14 Valid Operands for the Get Port Address and Set Port Address Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
ADDR BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
(A constant value is valid only for the Set Port Address instruction.)
PORT BYTE Constant for CPU 221, CPU 222, CPU 224: 0
for CPU 224XP, CPU 226: 0 or 1
95
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Compare Instructions
Comparing Numerical Values
The compare instructions are used to compare two values:
IN1 = IN2 IN1 >= IN2 IN1 <= IN2
IN1 > IN2 IN1 < IN2 IN1 <> IN2
Compare Byte operations are unsigned.
Compare Integer operations are signed.
Compare Double Word operations are signed.
Compare Real operations are signed.
For LAD and FBD: When the comparison is true, the
Compare instruction turns on the contact (LAD) or output
(FBD).
For STL: When the comparison is true, the Compare
instruction Loads, ANDs, or ORs a 1 with the value on the
top of the stack (STL).
When you use the IEC compare instructions, you can use
various data types for the inputs. However, both input
values must be of the same data type.
Notice
The following conditions are fatal errors and cause your
S7-200 to immediately stop the execution of your
program:
H Illegal indirect address is encountered (any Compare
instruction)
H Illegal real number (for example, NAN) is encountered
(Compare Real instruction)
To prevent these conditions from occurring, ensure that
you properly initialize pointers and values that contain real
numbers before executing compare instructions that use
these values.
Compare instructions are executed regardless of the state
of power flow.
96
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
97
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Compare String
The Compare String instruction compares two strings of
ASCII characters:
IN1 = IN2 IN1 <> IN2
When the comparison is true, the Compare instruction turns
the contact (LAD) or output (FBD) on, or the compare
instruction Loads, ANDs or ORs a 1 with the value on the
top of the stack (STL).
Notice
The following conditions are fatal errors and cause your
S7-200 to immediately stop the execution of your
program:
H Illegal indirect address is encountered (any compare
instruction)
H A string with a length greater than 254 characters is
encountered (Compare String instruction)
H A string whose starting address and length are such
that it will not fit in the specified memory area
(Compare String instruction)
To prevent these conditions from occurring, ensure that
you properly initialize pointers and memory locations that
are intended to hold ASCII strings prior to executing
compare instructions that use these values. Ensure that
the buffer reserved for an ASCII string can reside
completely within the specified memory area.
Compare instructions are executed regardless of the state
of power flow.
98
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Conversion Instructions
Standard Conversion Instructions
Numerical Conversions
The Byte to Integer (BTI), Integer to Byte (ITB), Integer to
Double Integer (ITD), Double Integer to Integer (DTI),
Double Integer to Real (DTR), BCD to Integer (BCDI) and
Integer to BCD (IBCD) instructions convert an input value IN
to the specified format and stores the output value in the
memory location specified by OUT. For example, you can
convert a double integer value to a real number. You can
also convert between integer and BCD formats.
Segment
The Segment instruction (SEG) allows you to generate a bit
pattern that illuminates the segments of a seven-segment
display.
99
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
To change an integer to a real number, use the Integer to Double Integer instruction and then
use the Double Integer to Real instruction.
100
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
101
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The illuminated segments represent the character in the Error conditions that set ENO = 0
least significant digit of the input byte. Figure 6-14 shows the H 0006 (indirect address)
seven-segment display coding used by the Segment
instruction.
(display character)
102
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
SM bits affected:
H SM1.7 (illegal ASCII)
103
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Figure 6-15 describes the format operand for the Integer to ASCII instruction. The size of the
output buffer is always 8 bytes. The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in the output
buffer is specified by the nnn field. The valid range of the nnn field is 0 to 5. Specifying 0 digits to
the right of the decimal point causes the value to be displayed without a decimal point. For values
of nnn bigger than 5, the output buffer is filled with ASCII spaces. The c bit specifies the use of
either a comma (c=1) or a decimal point (c=0) as the separator between the whole number and
the fraction. The upper 4 bits must be zero.
Figure 6-15 shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c=0) with three
digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn=011). The output buffer is formatted according to the
following rules:
FMT
Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out
MSB LSB +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 in=12 0 . 0 1 2
0 0 0 0 c n n n in=--123 -- 0 . 1 2 3
c = comma (1) or decimal point (0) in=1234 1 . 2 3 4
nnn = digits to right of decimal point in = --12345 -- 1 2 . 3 4 5
Figure 6-15 FMT Operand for the Integer to ASCII (ITA) Instruction
Figure 6-16 describes the format operand for the Double Integer to ASCII instruction. The number
of digits to the right of the decimal point in the output buffer is specified by the nnn field. The valid
range of the nnn field is 0 to 5. Specifying 0 digits to the right of the decimal point causes the value
to be displayed without a decimal point. For values of nnn bigger than 5, the output buffer is filled
with ASCII spaces. The c bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a decimal point (c=0) as
the separator between the whole number and the fraction. The upper 4 bits must be zero.
Figure 6-16 shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c=0) with four
digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn=100). The output buffer is formatted according to the
following rules:
104
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
FMT
Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out
MSB LSB
+1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
in=--12 -- 0 . 0 0 1 2
0 0 0 0 c n n n
in=1234567 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 7
c = comma (1) or decimal point (0)
nnn = digits to right of decimal point
Figure 6-16 FMT Operand for the Double Integer to ASCII (DTA) Instruction
The real-number format used by the S7-200 supports a maximum of 7 significant digits.
Attempting to display more than 7 significant digits produces a rounding error.
Figure 6-17 describes the format operand (FMT) for the RTA instruction. The size of the output
buffer is specified by the ssss field. A size of 0, 1, or 2 bytes is not valid. The number of digits to
the right of the decimal point in the output buffer is specified by the nnn field. The valid range of
the nnn field is 0 to 5. Specifying 0 digits to the right of the decimal point causes the value to be
displayed without a decimal point. The output buffer is filled with ASCII spaces for values of nnn
bigger than 5 or when the specified output buffer is too small to store the converted value. The c
bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a decimal point (c=0) as the separator between
the whole number and the fraction.
Figure 6-17 also shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c=0) with
one digit to the right of the decimal point (nnn=001) and a buffer size of six bytes (ssss=0110). The
output buffer is formatted according to the following rules:
Figure 6-17 FMT Operand for the Real to ASCII (RTA) Instruction
105
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
106
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Figure 6-18 also shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c= 0) with
three digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn = 011).The value at OUT is the length of the
string.
Table 6-19 Valid Operands for the Instructions That Convert Numerical Values to Strings
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
IN INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
FMT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
107
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
FMT
Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out
MSB LSB +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 in=12 8 0. . 0 1 2
0 0 0 0 c n n n in=--123 8 0. . 1 2 3
c = comma (1) or decimal point (0) in=1234 8 1 . 2 3 4
nnn = digits to right of decimal point in = --12345 8 -- 1 2 . 3 4 5
Figure 6-19 also shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c= 0) with
four digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn = 100). The value at OUT is the length of the string.
The output string is formatted according to the following rules:
FMT
Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out
MSB LSB +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 in=12 12 . -- 0 . 0 0 1 2
0 0 0 0 c n n n in=--1234567 12 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 7
c = comma (1) or decimal point (0)
nnn = digits to right of decimal point
Figure 6-19 FMT Operand for the Double Integer to String Instruction
108
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
The real-number format used by the S7-200 supports a maximum of 7 significant digits.
Attempting to display more than the 7 significant digits produces a rounding error.
Figure 6-20 describes the format operand for the Real to String instruction. The length of the
output string is specified by the ssss field. A size of 0, 1, or 2 bytes is not valid. The number of
digits to the right of the decimal point in the output buffer is specified by the nnn field. The valid
range of the nnn field is 0 to 5. Specifying 0 digits to the right of the decimal point causes the value
to be displayed without a decimal point. The output string is filled with ASCII space characters
when nnn is greater than 5 or when the specified length of the output string is too small to store
the converted value. The c bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a decimal point (c=0)
as the separator between the whole number and the fraction.
Figure 6-20 also shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c= 0) with
one digit to the right of the decimal point (nnn = 001) and a output string length of 6 characters
(ssss = 0110). The value at OUT is the length of the string. The output string is formatted
according to the following rules:
FMT
Out Out Out Out Out Out Out
MSB LSB +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 in=1234.5 6 1 2 3 4 . 5
s s s s c n n n in= --0.0004 6 0. . 0
ssss = length of output string in= --3.67526 6 -- 3 . 7
c = comma (1) or decimal point (0) in = 1.95 6 2 . 0
nnn = digits to right of decimal point
109
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The overflow error (SM1.1) is set whenever the conversion produces an integer value that is too
large for the output value. For example, the Substring to Integer instruction sets the overflow error
if the input string produces a value greater than 32767 or less than --32768.
The overflow error (SM1.1) is also set if no conversion is possible when the input string does not
contain a valid value. For example, if the input string contains ‘A123’, the conversion instruction
sets SM1.1 (overflow) and the output value remains unchanged.
Table 6-20 Valid Operands for the Instructions That Convert Substrings to Numerical Values
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
IN STRING IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
INDX BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT INT VW, IW, QW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
DINT, REAL VD, ID, QD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
110
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
VB0 VB11
11 ’T’ ’e’ ’m’ ’p’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’9’ ’8’ ’.’ ’6’ ’F’
111
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Decode
The Decode instruction (DECO) sets the bit in the output
word OUT that corresponds to the bit number represented
by the least significant “nibble” (4 bits) of the input byte IN.
All other bits of the output word are set to 0.
Table 6-21 Valid Operands for the Encode and Decode Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
IN BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
15
DECO 3 0 ENCO
VW40 0000 0000 0000 1000 VB50 9
112
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Counter Instructions
SIMATIC Counter Instructions
Count Up Counter
The Count Up instruction (CTU) counts up from the current
value each time the count up (CU) input makes the
transition from off to on. When the current value Cxx is
greater than or equal to the preset value PV, the counter bit
Cxx turns on. The counter is reset when the Reset (R) input
turns on, or when the Reset instruction is executed. The
counter stops counting when it reaches the maximum value
(32,767).
STL operation :
H Reset input: Top of stack
H Count Up input: Value loaded in the second stack location
113
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
Since there is one current value for each counter, do not assign the same number to more than
one counter. (Up Counters, Up/Down Counters, and Down counters with the same number
access the same current value.)
When you reset a counter using the Reset instruction, the counter bit is reset and the counter
current value is set to zero. Use the counter number to reference both the current value and the
counter bit of that counter.
1 You can select that the current value for the counter be retentive. See Chapter 4 for information about memory
retention for the S7-200 CPU.
114
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Timing Diagram
I0.0 Down
I0.1 Load
3 3
2 2
1
0 0
C1 (current)
C1 (bit) Q0.0
Timing Diagram
I0.0 (up)
I0.1 (down)
I0.2 (reset)
5 5
4 4 4
3 3
2
1
C48 (current) 0 0
115
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Down Counter
The Count Down instruction (CTD) counts down from the
preset value (PV) on the rising edges of the Count Down
(CD) input. When the current value (CV) is equal to zero, the
counter output bit (Q) turns on. The counter resets and
loads the current value with the preset value when the load
input (LD) is enabled. The Down Counter stops counting
when it reaches zero.
Up/Down Counter
The Count Up/Down instruction (CTUD) counts up or down
from the current value (CV) on the rising edges of the Count
Up (CU) or Count Down (CD) input. When the current value
is equal to preset, the up output (QU) turns on. When the
current value is equal to zero, the down output (QD) turns
on. The counter loads the current value with the preset
value (PV) when the load (LD) input is enabled. Similarly,
the counter resets and loads the current value with 0 when
the reset (R) is enabled. The counter stops counting when it
reaches preset or 0.
Tip
Since there is one current value for each counter, do not assign the same number to more than
one counter. (Up Counters, Down Counters, and Up/Down Counters access the same current
value.)
116
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
I3.0
CD --
Down
I2.0
R --
Reset
I1.0
LD -- Load
4 4 4 4
VW0 3 3 3
CV --
Current 2 2
Value 1
0 0
Q0.0
QU -- Up
Q0.1
QD -- Down
117
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
High-Speed Counter
The High-Speed Counter (HSC) instruction configures and
controls the high-speed counter, based on the state of the
HSC special memory bits. The parameter N specifies the
high-speed counter number.
The high-speed counters can be configured for up to twelve different modes of operation. See
Table 6-26.
Each counter has dedicated inputs for clocks, direction control, reset, and start, where these
functions are supported. For the two-phase counters, both clocks can run at their maximum
rates. In quadrature modes, you can select one times (1x) or four times (4x) the maximum
counting rates. All counters run at maximum rates without interfering with one another.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0001 (HSC before HDEF)
H 0005 (simultaneous HSC/PLS)
Refer to the Programming Tips on the documentation CD for programs that use high-speed
counters. See Tip 4 and Tip 29.
Programming
Tips
High-speed counters count high-speed events that cannot be controlled at S7-200 scan rates.
The maximum counting frequency of a high-speed counter depends upon your S7-200 CPU
model. Refer to Appendix A for more information.
Tip
CPU 221 and CPU 222 support four high-speed counters: HSC0, HSC3, HSC4, and HSC5.
These CPUs do not support HSC1 and HSC2.
CPU 224, CPU 224XP, and CPU 226 support six high-speed counters: HSC0 to HSC5.
118
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Typically, a high-speed counter is used as the drive for a drum timer, where a shaft rotating at a
constant speed is fitted with an incremental shaft encoder. The shaft encoder provides a specified
number of counts per revolution and a reset pulse that occurs once per revolution. The clock(s)
and the reset pulse from the shaft encoder provide the inputs to the high-speed counter.
The high-speed counter is loaded with the first of several presets, and the desired outputs are
activated for the time period where the current count is less than the current preset. The counter is
set up to provide an interrupt when the current count is equal to preset and also when reset
occurs.
Since the interrupts occur at a much lower rate than the counting rates of the high-speed
counters, precise control of high-speed operations can be implemented with relatively minor
impact to the overall PLC scan cycle. The method of interrupt attachment allows each load of a
new preset to be performed in a separate interrupt routine for easy state control. (Alternatively, all
interrupt events can be processed in a single interrupt routine.)
- When you activate the reset input, it clears the current value and holds it clear until you
deactivate reset.
- When you activate the start input, it allows the counter to count. While start is deactivated,
the current value of the counter is held constant and clocking events are ignored.
- If reset is activated while start is inactive, the reset is ignored and the current value is not
changed. If the start input becomes active while the reset input is active, the current value is
cleared.
Before you use a high-speed counter, you use the HDEF instruction (High-Speed Counter
Definition) to select a counter mode. Use the first scan memory bit, SM0.1 (this bit is turned on for
the first scan and is then turned off), to call a subroutine that contains the HDEF instruction.
To program a high-speed counter, you must perform the following basic tasks:
119
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 6-26 shows the inputs used for the clock, direction control, reset, and start functions
associated with the high-speed counters. The same input cannot be used for two different
functions, but any input not being used by the present mode of its high-speed counter can be
used for another purpose. For example, if HSC0 is being used in mode 1, which uses I0.0 and
I0.2, I0.1 can be used for edge interrupts or for HSC3.
Tip
Note that all modes of HSC0 (except mode 12) always use I0.0 and all modes of HSC4 always
use I0.3, so these points are never available for other uses when these counters are in use.
120
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
121
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
When you use counting modes 6, 7, or 8, and rising edges on both the up clock and down clock
inputs occur within 0.3 microseconds of each other, the high-speed counter could see these
events as happening simultaneously. If this happens, the current value is unchanged and no
change in counting direction is indicated. As long as the separation between rising edges of the
up and down clock inputs is greater than this time period, the high-speed counter captures each
event separately. In either case, no error is generated and the counter maintains the correct count
value.
Current value loaded to 0, preset loaded to 4, initial counting direction set to up.
Counter enable bit set to enabled.
PV=CV interrupt generated
PV=CV interrupt generated and
Count 1
Direction Changed interrupt generated
Up
0
Clock
Count 1
Down
Clock 0
5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Counter 1 1
Current
Value 0
Current value loaded to 0, preset loaded to 3, initial counting direction set to up.
Counter enable bit set to enabled.
Phase B 1
Clock
0
4
3 3
2 2
Counter
Current 1
Value 0
122
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Current value loaded to 0, preset loaded to 9, initial counting direction set to up.
Counter enable bit set to enabled.
Direction Changed
PV=CV interrupt generated interrupt generated
PV=CV
interrupt generated
Phase A 1
Clock 0
Phase B 1
Clock
0
12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5
4
3
2
Counter Current 1
Value
0
Start 1
(Active High)
0
Reset 1
Reset interrupt
(Active High)
generated 0
Reset 1
(Active High)
0
+2,147,483,647
+2,147,483,647
Current Current
Counter
Counter 0 value value
0 Current Value
Current Value frozen frozen
--2,147,483,648
--2,147,483,648
Counter value is somewhere in this range. Counter value is somewhere in this range.
Figure 6-27 Operation Examples Using Reset with and without Start
123
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Four counters have three control bits that are used to configure the active state of the reset and
start inputs and to select 1x or 4x counting modes (quadrature counters only). These bits are
located in the control byte for the respective counter and are only used when the HDEF instruction
is executed. These bits are defined in Table 6-27.
Tip
You must set these three control bits to the desired state before the HDEF instruction is
executed. Otherwise, the counter takes on the default configuration for the counter mode
selected.
Once the HDEF instruction has been executed, you cannot change the counter setup unless
you first place the S7-200 in STOP mode.
Table 6-27 Active Level for Reset, Start, and 1x/4x Control Bits
HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC4 Description (used only when HDEF is executed)
Active level control bit for Reset1:
SM37.0 SM47.0 SM57.0 SM147.0
0 = Reset is active high 1 = Reset is active low
Active level control bit for Start1:
------ SM47.1 SM57.1 ------
0 = Start is active high 1 = Start is active low
Counting rate selection for quadrature counters:
SM37.2 SM47.2 SM57.2 SM147.2
0 = 4X counting rate 1 = 1X counting rate
1 The default setting of the reset input and the start input are active high, and the quadrature counting rate is 4x
(or four times the input clock frequency).
124
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Examination of the control byte and associated current and preset values is invoked by the
execution of the HSC instruction. Table 6-28 describes each of these control bits.
Table 6-28 Control Bits for HSC0, HSC1, HSC2, HSC3, HSC4, and HSC5
HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC3 HSC4 HSC5 Description
Counting direction control bit:
SM37.3 SM47.3 SM57.3 SM137.3 SM147.3 SM157.3
0 = Count down 1 = Count up
Write the counting direction to the HSC:
SM37.4 SM47.4 SM57.4 SM137.4 SM147.4 SM157.4 0 = No update 1 = Update
direction
Write the new preset value to the HSC:
SM37.5 SM47.5 SM57.5 SM137.5 SM147.5 SM157.5
0 = No update 1 = Update preset
Write the new current value to the HSC:
SM37.6 SM47.6 SM57.6 SM137.6 SM147.6 SM157.6 0 = No update 1 = Update current
value
Enable the HSC:
SM37.7 SM47.7 SM57.7 SM137.7 SM147.7 SM157.7
0 = Disable the HSC 1 = Enable the HSC
In addition to the control bytes and the new preset and current holding bytes, the current value of
each high-speed counter can only be read using the data type HC (High-Speed Counter Current)
followed by the number (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) of the counter as shown in Table 6-29. The current
value is directly accessible for read operations, but can only be written with the HSC instruction.
Table 6-29 New Current and New Preset Values of HSC0, HSC1, HSC2, HSC3, HSC4, and
HSC5
Table 6-30 Current Values of HSC0, HSC1, HSC2, HSC3, HSC4, and HSC5
Value HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC3 HSC4 HSC5
Current value HC0 HC1 HC2 HC3 HC4 HC5
125
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
MSB LSB
HC 2 31 0
High-speed counter number Most significant Least significant
Area identifier (high-speed counter) Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0
Assigning Interrupts
All counter modes support an interrupt event when the current value of the HSC is equal to the
loaded preset value. Counter modes that use an external reset input support an interrupt on
activation of the external reset. All counter modes except modes 0, 1, and 2 support an interrupt
on a change in counting direction. Each of these interrupt conditions can be enabled or disabled
separately. For a complete discussion on the use of interrupts, see the section on
Communications and Interrupt instructions.
Notice
A fatal error can occur if you attempt either to load a new current value or to disable and then
re-enable the high-speed counter from within the external reset interrupt routine.
Status Byte
A status byte for each high-speed counter provides status memory bits that indicate the current
counting direction and whether the current value is greater or equal to the preset value. Table 6-31
defines these status bits for each high-speed counter.
Tip
Status bits are valid only while the high-speed counter interrupt routine is being executed. The
purpose of monitoring the state of the high-speed counter is to enable interrupts for the events
that are of consequence to the operation being performed.
Table 6-31 Status Bits for HSC0, HSC1, HSC2, HSC3, HSC4, and HSC5
HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC3 HSC4 HSC5 Description
SM36.0 SM46.0 SM56.0 SM136.0 SM146.0 SM156.0 Not used
SM36.1 SM46.1 SM56.1 SM136.1 SM146.1 SM156.1 Not used
SM36.2 SM46.2 SM56.2 SM136.2 SM146.2 SM156.2 Not used
SM36.3 SM46.3 SM56.3 SM136.3 SM146.3 SM156.3 Not used
SM36.4 SM46.4 SM56.4 SM136.4 SM146.4 SM156.4 Not used
SM36.5 SM46.5 SM56.5 SM136.5 SM146.5 SM156.5 Current counting direction status bit:
0 = Counting down
1 = Counting up
SM36.6 SM46.6 SM56.6 SM136.6 SM146.6 SM156.6 Current value equals preset value status bit:
0 = Not equal
1 = Equal
SM36.7 SM46.7 SM56.7 SM136.7 SM146.7 SM156.7 Current value greater than preset value
status bit:
0 = Less than or equal
1 = Greater than
126
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Tip
Although the following sequences show how to change direction, current value, and preset
value individually, you can change all or any combination of them in the same sequence by
setting the value of SMB47 appropriately and then executing the HSC instruction.
Initialization Modes 0, 1, or 2
The following steps describe how to initialize HSC1 for Single Phase Up/Down Counter with
Internal Direction (Modes 0, 1, or 2).
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operation is
performed. Since you use a subroutine call, subsequent scans do not make the call to the
subroutine, which reduces scan time execution and provides a more structured program.
2. In the initialization subroutine, load SMB47 according to the desired control operation. For
example:
SMB47 = 16#F8 Produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Writes a new current value
Writes a new preset value
Sets the direction to count up
Sets the start and reset inputs to be active high
3. Execute the HDEF instruction with the HSC input set to 1 and the MODE input set to one of
the following: 0 for no external reset or start, 1 for external reset and no start, or 2 for both
external reset and start.
4. Load SMD48 (double-word-sized value) with the desired current value (load with 0 to clear
it).
5. Load SMD52 (double-word-sized value) with the desired preset value.
6. In order to capture the current value equal to preset event, program an interrupt by
attaching the CV = PV interrupt event (event 13) to an interrupt routine. See the section that
discusses the Interrupt Instructions for complete details on interrupt processing.
7. In order to capture an external reset event, program an interrupt by attaching the external
reset interrupt event (event 15) to an interrupt routine.
8. Execute the global interrupt enable instruction (ENI) to enable interrupts.
9. Execute the HSC instruction to cause the S7-200 to program HSC1.
10. Exit the subroutine.
127
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Initialization Modes 3, 4, or 5
The following steps describe how to initialize HSC1 for Single Phase Up/Down Counter with
External Direction (Modes 3, 4, or 5):
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operation is
performed. Since you use a subroutine call, subsequent scans do not make the call to the
subroutine, which reduces scan time execution and provides a more structured program.
2. In the initialization subroutine, load SMB47 according to the desired control operation. For
example:
SMB47 = 16#F8 Produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Writes a new current value
Writes a new preset value
Sets the initial direction of the HSC to count up
Sets the start and reset inputs to be active high
3. Execute the HDEF instruction with the HSC input set to 1 and the MODE input set to one of
the following: 3 for no external reset or start, 4 for external reset and no start, or 5 for both
external reset and start.
4. Load SMD48 (double-word-sized value) with the desired current value (load with 0 to clear
it).
5. Load SMD52 (double-word-sized value) with the desired preset value.
6. In order to capture the current-value-equal-to-preset event, program an interrupt by
attaching the CV = PV interrupt event (event 13) to an interrupt routine. See the section that
discusses the Interrupt Instructions for complete details on interrupt processing.
7. In order to capture direction changes, program an interrupt by attaching the direction
changed interrupt event (event 14) to an interrupt routine.
8. In order to capture an external reset event, program an interrupt by attaching the external
reset interrupt event (event 15) to an interrupt routine.
9. Execute the global interrupt enable instruction (ENI) to enable interrupts.
10. Execute the HSC instruction to cause the S7-200 to program HSC1.
11. Exit the subroutine.
Initialization Modes 6, 7, or 8
The following steps describe how to initialize HSC1 for Two Phase Up/Down Counter with
Up/Down Clocks (Modes 6, 7, or 8):
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operations are
performed. Since you use a subroutine call, subsequent scans do not make the call to the
subroutine, which reduces scan time execution and provides a more structured program.
2. In the initialization subroutine, load SMB47 according to the desired control operation. For
example:
SMB47 = 16#F8 Produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Writes a new current value
Writes a new preset value
Sets the initial direction of the HSC to count up
Sets the start and reset inputs to be active high
3. Execute the HDEF instruction with the HSC input set to 1 and the MODE set to one of the
following: 6 for no external reset or start, 7 for external reset and no start, or 8 for both
external reset and start.
4. Load SMD48 (double-word-sized value) with the desired current value (load with 0 to clear
it).
5. Load SMD52 (double-word-sized value) with the desired preset value.
128
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operations are
performed. Since you use a subroutine call, subsequent scans do not make the call to the
subroutine, which reduces scan time execution and provides a more structured program.
2. In the initialization subroutine, load SMB47 according to the desired control operation.
Example (1x counting mode):
SMB47 = 16#FC Produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Writes a new current value
Writes a new preset value
Sets the initial direction of the HSC to count up
Sets the start and reset inputs to be active high
Example (4x counting mode):
SMB47 = 16#F8 Produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Writes a new current value
Writes a new preset value
Sets the initial direction of the HSC to count up
Sets the start and reset inputs to be active high
3. Execute the HDEF instruction with the HSC input set to 1 and the MODE input set to one of
the following: 9 for no external reset or start, 10 for external reset and no start, or 11 for both
external reset and start.
4. Load SMD48 (double-word-sized value) with the desired current value (load with 0 to clear
it).
5. Load SMD52 (double-word-sized value) with the desired preset value.
6. In order to capture the current-value-equal-to-preset event, program an interrupt by
attaching the CV = PV interrupt event (event 13) to an interrupt routine. See the section on
enabling interrupts (ENI) for complete details on interrupt processing.
7. In order to capture direction changes, program an interrupt by attaching the direction
changed interrupt event (event 14) to an interrupt routine.
8. In order to capture an external reset event, program an interrupt by attaching the external
reset interrupt event (event 15) to an interrupt routine.
9. Execute the global interrupt enable instruction (ENI) to enable interrupts.
10. Execute the HSC instruction to cause the S7-200 to program HSC1.
11. Exit the subroutine.
129
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Initialization Mode 12
The following steps describe how to initialize HSC0 for counting pulses generated by PTO0
(Mode 12).
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operation is
performed. Since you use a subroutine call, subsequent scans do not make the call to the
subroutine, which reduces scan time execution and provides a more structured program.
2. In the initialization subroutine, load SMB37 according to the desired control operation. For
example:
SMB37 = 16#F8 Produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Writes a new current value
Writes a new preset value
Sets the direction to count up
Sets the start and reset inputs to be active high
3. Execute the HDEF instruction with the HSC input set to 0 and the MODE input set to 12.
4. Load SMD38 (double-word-sized value) with the desired current value (load with 0 to clear
it).
5. Load SMD42 (double-word-sized value) with the desired preset value.
6. In order to capture the current value equal to preset event, program an interrupt by
attaching the CV = PV interrupt event (event 13) to an interrupt routine. See the section that
discusses the Interrupt Instructions for complete details on interrupt processing.
7. Execute the global interrupt enable instruction (ENI) to enable interrupts.
8. Execute the HSC instruction to cause the S7-200 to program HSC0.
9. Exit the subroutine.
130
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
The following steps describe how to change the counter current value of HSC1 (any mode):
131
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
LD SM0.1
MOVB 16#F8, SMB47
HDEF 1, 11
MOVD +0, SMD48
MOVD +50, SMD52
ATCH INT_0, 13
ENI
HSC 1
132
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
PWM provides a continuous, variable duty cycle output with user control of the cycle time and the
pulse width.
The S7-200 has two PTO/PWM generators that create either a high-speed pulse train or a pulse
width modulated waveform. One generator is assigned to digital output point Q0.0, and the other
generator is assigned to digital output point Q0.1. A designated special memory (SM) location
stores the following data for each generator: a control byte (8-bit value), a pulse count value (an
unsigned 32-bit value), and a cycle time and pulse width value (an unsigned 16-bit value).
The PTO/PWM generators and the process-image register share the use of Q0.0 and Q0.1. When
a PTO or PWM function is active on Q0.0 or Q0.1, the PTO/PWM generator has control of the
output, and normal use of the output point is inhibited. The output waveform is not affected by the
state of the process-image register, the forced value of the point, or the execution of immediate
output instructions. When the PTO/PWM generator is inactive, control of the output reverts to the
process-image register. The process-image register determines the initial and final state of the
output waveform, causing the waveform to start and end at a high or low level.
Tip
Before enabling PTO or PWM operation, set the value of the process-image register for Q0.0
and Q0.1 to 0.
Default values for all control bits, cycle time, pulse width, and pulse count values are 0.
The PTO/PWM outputs must have a minimum load of at least 10% of rated load to provide
crisp transitions from off to on, and from on to off.
Refer to the Programming Tips on the documentation CD for programs that use the PLS
instruction for PTO/PWM operation. See Tip 7, Tip 22, Tip 23, Tip 30, and Tip 50.
Programming
Tips
133
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 6-33 Pulse Count and Cycle Time in the PTO function
The PTO function allows the “chaining” or “pipelining” of pulse trains. When the active pulse train
is complete, the output of a new pulse train begins immediately. This allows continuity between
subsequent output pulse trains.
Smooth transitions between pulse trains occur unless there is a change in the time base or the
active pulse train completes before a new pulse train setup is captured by the execution of the
PLS instruction.
134
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Each segment entry is 8 bytes in length, and is composed of a 16-bit cycle time value, a 16-bit
cycle time delta value, and a 32-bit pulse count value. Table 6-34 shows the format of the profile
table. You can increase or decrease the cycle time automatically by programming a specified
amount for each pulse. A positive value in the cycle time delta field increases cycle time, a
negative value in the cycle time delta field decreases cycle time, and 0 results in an unchanging
cycle time.
While the PTO profile is operating, the number of the currently active segment is available in
SMB166 (or SMB176).
1 Entering a value of 0 for the number of segments generates a non-fatal error. No PTO output is generated.
Table 6-35 Pulse Width Time and Cycle Time and Reactions in the PWM Function
135
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
There are two different ways to change the characteristics of a PWM waveform:
- Synchronous Update: If no time base changes are required, you can use a synchronous
update. With a synchronous update, the change in the waveform characteristics occurs on
a cycle boundary, providing a smooth transition.
- Asynchronous Update: Typically with PWM operation, the pulse width is varied while the
cycle time remains constant so time base changes are not required. However, if a change
in the time base of the PTO/PWM generator is required, an asynchronous update is used.
An asynchronous update causes the PTO/PWM generator to be disabled momentarily,
asynchronous to the PWM waveform. This can cause undesirable jitter in the controlled
device. For that reason, synchronous PWM updates are recommended. Choose a time
base that you expect to work for all of your anticipated cycle time values.
Tip
The PWM Update Method bit (SM67.4 or SM77.4) in the control byte specifies the update type
used when the PLS instruction is executed to invoke changes.
If the time base is changed, an asynchronous update occurs regardless of the state of the PWM
Update Method bit.
You can change the characteristics of a PTO or PWM waveform by modifying the locations in the
SM area (including the control byte) and then executing the PLS instruction. You can disable the
generation of a PTO or PWM waveform at any time by writing 0 to the PTO/PWM enable bit of the
control byte (SM67.7 or SM77.7) and then executing the PLS instruction.
The PTO Idle bit in the status byte (SM66.7 or SM76.7) is provided to indicate the completion of
the programmed pulse train. In addition, an interrupt routine can be invoked upon the completion
of a pulse train. (Refer to the descriptions of the Interrupt instructions and the Communications
instructions.) If you are using the multiple segment operation, the interrupt routine is invoked upon
completion of the profile table.
The following conditions set SM66.4 (or SM76.4) and SM66.5 (or SM76.5):
- Specifying a cycle time delta value that results in an illegal cycle time after a number of
pulses generates a mathematical overflow condition that terminates the PTO function and
sets the Delta Calculation Error bit (SM66.4 or SM76.4) to 1. The output reverts to image
register control.
- Manually aborting (disabling) a PTO profile in progress sets the User Abort bit (SM66.5 or
SM76.5) to 1.
- Attempting to load the pipeline while it is full sets the PTO overflow bit (SM66.6 or SM76.6)
to 1. You must clear this bit manually after an overflow is detected if you want to detect
subsequent overflows. The transition to RUN mode initializes this bit to 0.
Tip
When you load a new pulse count (SMD72 or SMD82), pulse width (SMW70 or SMW80), or
cycle time (SMW68 or SMW78), also set the appropriate update bits in the control register
before you execute the PLS instruction. For a multiple segment pulse train operation, you must
also load the starting offset (SMW168 or SMW178) of the profile table and the profile table
values before you execute the PLS instruction.
136
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
137
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
For this example: The starting and final pulse frequency is 2 kHz, the maximum pulse frequency is
10 kHz, and 4000 pulses are required to achieve the desired number of motor revolutions. Since
the values for the profile table are expressed in terms of period (cycle time) instead of frequency,
you must convert the given frequency values into cycle time values. Therefore, the starting (initial)
and final (ending) cycle time is 500 µs, and the cycle time corresponding to the maximum
frequency is 100 µs. During the acceleration portion of the output profile, the maximum pulse
frequency should be reached in approximately 200 pulses. The deceleration portion of the profile
should be completed in approximately 400 pulses.
You can use the following formula to determine the delta cycle time value for a given segment that
the PTO/PWM generator uses to adjust the cycle time of each pulse:
Using this formula to calculate the delta Table 6-38 Profile Table Values
cycle time values for the sample
Address Value Description
application:
VB500 3 Total number of segments
Segment 1 (acceleration):
VW501 500 Initial cycle time
Delta cycle time = --2
VW503 --2 Initial delta cycle time Segment
g 1
Segment 2 (constant speed):
VD505 200 Number of pulses
Delta cycle time = 0
VW509 100 Initial cycle time
Segment 3 (deceleration):
VW511 0 Delta cycle time Segment
g 2
Delta cycle time = 1
VD513 3400 Number of pulses
Table 6-38 lists the values for generating
the example waveform (assumes that the VW517 100 Initial cycle time
profile table is located in V memory, starting VW519 1 Delta cycle time Segment
g 3
at V500). You can include instructions in
VD521 400 Number of pulses
your program to load these values into
V memory, or you can define the values of
the profile in the data block.
138
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
In order to determine if the transitions between waveform segments are acceptable, you need to
determine the cycle time of the last pulse in a segment. Unless the delta cycle time is 0, you must
calculate the cycle time of the last pulse of a segment, because this value is not specified in the
profile. Use the following formula to calculate the cycle time of the last pulse:
Cycle time of the last pulse for a segment = Init_CTseg + ( Deltaseg * ( Quantityseg -- 1 ))
While the simplified example above is useful as an introduction, real applications can require more
complicated waveform profiles. Remember that the delta cycle time can be specified only as an
integer number of microseconds or milliseconds, and the cycle time modification is performed on
each pulse.
The effect of these two items is that calculation of the delta cycle time value for a given segment
could require an iterative approach. Some flexibility in the value of the ending cycle time or the
number of pulses for a given segment might be required.
The duration of a given profile segment can be useful in the process of determining correct profile
table values. Use the following formula to calculate the length of time for completing a given profile
segment:
139
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Math Instructions
Add, Subtract, Multiply, and Divide
Instructions
Add Subtract
IN1 + IN2 = OUT IN1 -- IN2 = OUT LAD and
FBD
IN1 + OUT = OUT OUT -- IN1 = OUT STL
The Add Integer (+I) or Subtract Integer (--I) instructions add
or subtract two 16-bit integers to produce a 16-bit result. The
Add Double Integer (+D) or Subtract Double Integer (--D)
instructions add or subtract two 32-bit integers to produce a
32-bit result. The Add Real (+R) and Subtract Real (--R)
instructions add or subtract two 32-bit real numbers to
produce a 32-bit real number result.
Multiply Divide
IN1 * IN2 = OUT IN1 / IN2 = OUT LAD and
FBD
IN1 * OUT = OUT OUT / IN1 = OUT STL
Table 6-39 Valid Operands for Add, Subtract, Multiply, and Divide Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
IN1, IN2 INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, LW, T, C, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
Real (or floating-point) numbers are represented in the format described in the ANSI/IEEE 754--1985 standard
(single-precision). Refer to that standard for more information.
140
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
141
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
In STL, the least-significant word (16 bits) of the 32-bit OUT is used as the dividend.
Table 6-40 Valid Operands for Multiply Integer to Double Integer and Divide Integer with
Remainder
Example: Multiply Integer to Double Integer Instruction and Divide Integer with Remainder Instruction
Network 1
LD I0.0
MUL AC1, VD100
DIV VW10, VD200
Multiply Integer to 400 * 200 = 80000
Double Integer
AC1 VW102 VD100
rem. quot.
Divide Integer 4000 41 23 97
/ =
with Remainder VW200 VW202
VW202 VW10
VD200
Note: VD100 contains: VW100 and VW102, and VD200 contains: VW200 and VW202.
142
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Square Root
The Square Root instruction (SQRT) takes the square root of a real number (IN) and produces a real
number result OUT.
SQRT (IN)= OUT
To obtain other roots: 5 cubed = 5^3 = EXP(3*LN(5)) = 125
The cube root of 125 = 125^(1/3) = EXP((1/3)*LN(125))= 5
The square root of 5 cubed = 5^(3/2) = EXP(3/2*LN(5)) = 11.18034
143
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Decrement
IN -- 1 = OUT LAD and FBD
OUT -- 1 = OUT STL
The Increment and Decrement instructions add or subtract
1 to or from the input IN and place the result into the
variable OUT.
Increment Byte (INCB) and Decrement Byte (DECB)
operations are unsigned.
Increment Word (INCW) and Decrement Word (DECW)
operations are signed.
Increment Double Word (INCD) and Decrement Double
Word (DECD) operations are signed.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0:
H SM1.1 (overflow)
H 0006 (indirect address)
Table 6-42 Valid Operands for the Increment and Decrement Instructions
144
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Eight PID instructions can be used in a program. If two or more PID instructions are used with the
same loop number (even if they have different table addresses), the PID calculations will interfere
with one another and the output will be unpredictable.
The loop table stores nine parameters used for controlling and monitoring the loop operation and
includes the current and previous value of the process variable, the setpoint, output, gain, sample
time, integral time (reset), derivative time (rate), and the integral sum (bias).
To perform the PID calculation at the desired sample rate, the PID instruction must be executed
either from within a timed interrupt routine or from within the main program at a rate controlled by a
timer. The sample time must be supplied as an input to the PID instruction via the loop table.
Auto-Tune capability has been incorporated into the PID instruction. Refer to Chapter 15 for a
detailed description of auto-tuning. The PID Tuning Control Panel only works with PID loops
created by the PID wizard..
STEP 7-Micro/WIN offers the PID Wizard to guide you in defining a PID algorithm for a
closed-loop control process. Select the Tools > Instruction Wizard menu command and then
Instruction select PID from the Instruction Wizard window.
Wizard
Tip
The setpoint of the low range and the setpoint of the high range should correspond to the
process variable low range and high range.
145
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
M(t) = KC * e + K
C
q e dt + M initial
+ KC * de/dt
0
where: M(t) is the loop output as a function of time
KC is the loop gain
e is the loop error (the difference between setpoint and process variable)
Minitial is the initial value of the loop output
In order to implement this control function in a digital computer, the continuous function must be
quantized into periodic samples of the error value with subsequent calculation of the output. The
corresponding equation that is the basis for the digital computer solution is:
n
Mn = Kc * en + KI * 51 ex + Minitial + KD * (en - en- 1)
From this equation, the integral term is shown to be a function of all the error terms from the first
sample to the current sample. The differential term is a function of the current sample and the
previous sample, while the proportional term is only a function of the current sample. In a digital
computer, it is not practical to store all samples of the error term, nor is it necessary.
Since the digital computer must calculate the output value each time the error is sampled
beginning with the first sample, it is only necessary to store the previous value of the error and the
previous value of the integral term. As a result of the repetitive nature of the digital computer
solution, a simplification in the equation that must be solved at any sample time can be made. The
simplified equation is:
Mn = Kc * en + KI * en + MX + KD * (en - en- 1)
output = proportional term + integral term + differential term
where: Mn is the calculated value of the loop output at sample time n
KC is the loop gain
en is the value of the loop error at sample time n
en -- 1 is the previous value of the loop error (at sample time n -- 1)
KI is the proportional constant of the integral term
MX is the previous value of the integral term (at sample time n -- 1)
KD is the proportional constant of the differential term
146
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
The S7-200 uses a modified form of the above simplified equation when calculating the loop
output value. This modified equation is:
The integral sum or bias (MX) is the running sum of all previous values of the integral term. After
each calculation of MIn, the bias is updated with the value of MIn which might be adjusted or
clamped (see the section “Variables and Ranges” for details). The initial value of the bias is
typically set to the output value (Minitial) just prior to the first loop output calculation. Several
constants are also part of the integral term, the gain (KC), the sample time (TS), which is the cycle
time at which the PID loop recalculates the output value, and the integral time or reset (T I), which
is a time used to control the influence of the integral term in the output calculation.
147
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
To avoid step changes or bumps in the output due to derivative action on setpoint changes, this
equation is modified to assume that the setpoint is a constant (SPn = SPn -- 1). This results in the
calculation of the change in the process variable instead of the change in the error as shown:
The process variable rather than the error must be saved for use in the next calculation of the
differential term. At the time of the first sample, the value of PVn -- 1 is initialized to be equal to
PVn.
If you do not want integral action (no “I” in the PID calculation), then a value of infinity “INF”, should
be specified for the integral time (reset). Even with no integral action, the value of the integral term
might not be zero, due to the initial value of the integral sum MX.
If you do not want derivative action (no “D” in the PID calculation), then a value of 0.0 should be
specified for the derivative time (rate).
If you do not want proportional action (no “P” in the PID calculation) and you want I or ID control,
then a value of 0.0 should be specified for the gain. Since the loop gain is a factor in the equations
for calculating the integral and differential terms, setting a value of 0.0 for the loop gain will result
in a value of 1.0 being used for the loop gain in the calculation of the integral and differential
terms.
148
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Both the setpoint and the process variable are real world values whose magnitude, range, and
engineering units could be different. Before these real world values can be operated upon by the
PID instruction, the values must be converted to normalized, floating-point representations.
The first step is to convert the real world value from a 16-bit integer value to a floating-point or real
number value. The following instruction sequence is provided to show how to convert from an
integer value to a real number.
The next step is to convert the real number value representation of the real world value to a
normalized value between 0.0 and 1.0. The following equation is used to normalize either the
setpoint or process variable value:
The following instruction sequence shows how to normalize the bipolar value in AC0 (whose span
is 64,000) as a continuation of the previous instruction sequence:
149
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The following instruction sequence shows how to scale the loop output:
Next, the scaled, real number value representing the loop output must be converted to a 16-bit
integer. The following instruction sequence shows how to do this conversion:
The output value is generated by the PID calculation, so the output value field in the loop table is
updated at the completion of each PID calculation. The output value is clamped between 0.0 and
1.0. The output value field can be used as an input by the user to specify an initial output value
when making the transition from manual control to PID instruction (auto) control of the output. (See
the discussion in the “Modes” section below).
If integral control is being used, then the bias value is updated by the PID calculation and the
updated value is used as an input in the next PID calculation. When the calculated output value
goes out of range (output would be less than 0.0 or greater than 1.0), the bias is adjusted
according to the following formulas:
The bias value in the loop table can be modified by the user prior to execution of the PID
instruction in order to address bias value problems in certain application situations. Care must be
taken when manually adjusting the bias, and any bias value written into the loop table must be a
real number between 0.0 and 1.0.
A comparison value of the process variable is maintained in the loop table for use in the derivative
action part of the PID calculation. You should not modify this value.
150
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Modes
There is no built-in mode control for S7-200 PID loops. The PID calculation is performed only
when power flows to the PID box. Therefore, “automatic” or “auto” mode exists when the PID
calculation is performed cyclically. “Manual” mode exists when the PID calculation is not
performed.
The PID instruction has a power-flow history bit, similar to a counter instruction. The instruction
uses this history bit to detect a 0-to-1 power-flow transition. When the power-flow transition is
detected, it will cause the instruction to perform a series of actions to provide a bumpless change
from manual control to auto control. In order for change to auto mode control to be bumpless, the
value of the output as set by the manual control must be supplied as an input to the PID
instruction (written to the loop table entry for Mn) before switching to auto control. The PID
instruction performs the following actions to values in the loop table to ensure a bumpless change
from manual to auto control when a 0-to-1 power-flow transition is detected:
Error Conditions
When it is time to compile, the CPU will generate a compile error (range error) and the compilation
will fail if the loop table start address or PID loop number operands specified in the instruction are
out of range.
Certain loop table input values are not range checked by the PID instruction. You must take care
to ensure that the process variable and setpoint (as well as the bias and previous process
variable if used as inputs) are real numbers between 0.0 and 1.0.
If any error is encountered while performing the mathematical operations of the PID calculation,
then SM1.1 (overflow or illegal value) is set and execution of the PID instruction is terminated.
(Update of the output values in the loop table could be incomplete, so you should disregard these
values and correct the input value causing the mathematical error before the next execution of the
loop’s PID instruction.)
151
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Loop Table
The loop table is 80 bytes long and has the format shown in Table 6-44.
152
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Interrupt Instructions
Enable Interrupt and Disable Interrupt
The Enable Interrupt instruction (ENI) globally enables
processing of all attached interrupt events. The Disable
Interrupt instruction (DISI) globally disables processing of all
interrupt events.
When you make the transition to RUN mode, interrupts are
initially disabled. In RUN mode, you can enable interrupt
processing by executing the Enable Interrupt instruction.
Executing the Disable Interrupt instruction inhibits the
processing of interrupts; however, active interrupt events will
continue to be queued.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0:
H 0004 (attempted execution of ENI, DISI, or HDEF instructions in
an interrupt routine)
Attach Interrupt
The Attach Interrupt instruction (ATCH) associates an
interrupt event EVNT with an interrupt routine number INT
and enables the interrupt event.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0:
H 0002 (conflicting assignment of inputs to an HSC)
Detach Interrupt
The Detach Interrupt instruction (DTCH) disassociates an
interrupt event EVNT from all interrupt routines and disables
the interrupt event.
153
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
When you attach an interrupt event to an interrupt routine, that interrupt is automatically enabled. If
you disable all interrupts using the global disable interrupt instruction, each occurrence of the
interrupt event is queued until interrupts are re-enabled, using the global enable interrupt
instruction, or the interrupt queue overflows.
You can disable individual interrupt events by breaking the association between the interrupt
event and the interrupt routine with the Detach Interrupt instruction. The Detach Interrupt
instruction returns the interrupt to an inactive or ignored state. Table 6-46 lists the different types of
interrupt events.
154
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
155
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
There are a number of programming techniques you can use to ensure that data is correctly
shared between your main program and interrupt routines. These techniques either restrict the
way access is made to shared memory locations or prevent interruption of instruction sequences
using shared memory locations.
- For an STL program that is sharing a single variable: If the shared data is a single byte,
word, or double word variable and your program is written in STL, then correct shared
access can be ensured by storing the intermediate values from operations on shared data
only in non-shared memory locations or accumulators.
- For a LAD program that is sharing a single variable: If the shared data is a single byte,
word, or double word variable and your program is written in LAD, then correct shared
access can be ensured by establishing the convention that access to shared memory
locations be made using only Move instructions (MOVB, MOVW, MOVD, MOVR). While
many LAD instructions are composed of interruptible sequences of STL instructions, these
Move instructions are composed of a single STL instruction whose execution cannot be
affected by interrupt events.
- For an STL or LAD program that is sharing multiple variables: If the shared data is
composed of a number of related bytes, words, or double words, then the interrupt
disable/enable instructions (DISI and ENI) can be used to control interrupt routine
execution. At the point in your main program where operations on shared memory locations
are to begin, disable the interrupts. Once all actions affecting the shared locations are
complete, re-enable the interrupts. During the time that interrupts are disabled, interrupt
routines cannot be executed and therefore cannot access shared memory locations;
however, this approach can result in delayed response to interrupt events.
- Communications port interrupts: The S7-200 generates events that allow your program to
control the communications port.
- I/O interrupts: The S7-200 generates events for different changes of state for various I/O.
These events allow your program to respond to the high-speed counters, the pulse outputs,
or to rising or falling states of the inputs.
- Time-based interrupts: The S7-200 generates events that allow your program to react at
specific intervals.
I/O Interrupts
I/O interrupts include rising/falling edge interrupts, high-speed counter interrupts, and pulse train
output interrupts. The S7-200 can generate an interrupt on rising and/or falling edges of an input
(either I0.0, I0.1, I0.2, or I0.3). The rising edge and the falling edge events can be captured for
each of these input points. These rising/falling edge events can be used to signify a condition that
must receive immediate attention when the event happens.
The high-speed counter interrupts allow you to respond to conditions such as the current value
reaching the preset value, a change in counting direction that might correspond to a reversal in
the direction in which a shaft is turning, or an external reset of the counter. Each of these
high-speed counter events allows action to be taken in real time in response to high-speed events
that cannot be controlled at programmable logic controller scan speeds.
156
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
The pulse train output interrupts provide immediate notification of completion of outputting the
prescribed number of pulses. A typical use of pulse train outputs is stepper motor control.
You can enable each of the above interrupts by attaching an interrupt routine to the related I/O
event.
Time-Based Interrupts
Time-based interrupts include timed interrupts and the timer T32/T96 interrupts. You can specify
actions to be taken on a cyclic basis using a timed interrupt. The cycle time is set in 1-ms
increments from 1 ms to 255 ms. You must write the cycle time in SMB34 for timed interrupt 0, and
in SMB35 for timed interrupt 1.
The timed interrupt event transfers control to the appropriate interrupt routine each time the timer
expires. Typically, you use timed interrupts to control the sampling of analog inputs or to execute a
PID loop at regular intervals.
A timed interrupt is enabled and timing begins when you attach an interrupt routine to a timed
interrupt event. During the attachment, the system captures the cycle time value, so subsequent
changes to SMB34 and SMB35 do not affect the cycle time. To change the cycle time, you must
modify the cycle time value, and then re-attach the interrupt routine to the timed interrupt event.
When the re-attachment occurs, the timed interrupt function clears any accumulated time from the
previous attachment and begins timing with the new value.
After being enabled, the timed interrupt runs continuously, executing the attached interrupt routine
on each expiration of the specified time interval. If you exit RUN mode or detach the timed
interrupt, the timed interrupt is disabled. If the global disable interrupt instruction is executed, timed
interrupts continue to occur. Each occurrence of the timed interrupt is queued (until either
interrupts are enabled or the queue is full).
The timer T32/T96 interrupts allow timely response to the completion of a specified time interval.
These interrupts are only supported for the 1-ms resolution on-delay (TON) and off-delay (TOF)
timers T32 and T96. The T32 and T96 timers otherwise behave normally. Once the interrupt is
enabled, the attached interrupt routine is executed when the active timer’s current value becomes
equal to the preset time value during the normal 1-ms timer update performed in the S7-200. You
enable these interrupts by attaching an interrupt routine to the T32/T96 interrupt events.
Table 6-48 shows the three interrupt queues and the maximum number of interrupts they can
store.
Potentially, more interrupts can occur than the queue can hold. Therefore, queue overflow
memory bits (identifying the type of interrupt events that have been lost) are maintained by the
system. Table 6-49 shows the interrupt queue overflow bits. You should use these bits only in an
interrupt routine because they are reset when the queue is emptied, and control is returned to the
main program.
157
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 6-50 shows all interrupt events, with their priority and assigned event number.
158
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
S Network 1 //1. Set the interval for the timed interrupt 0 to 100 ms.
B //2. Attach timed interrupt 0 (Event 10) to INT_0.
R //3. Global interrupt enable.
0 LD SM0.0
MOVB 100, SMB34
ATCH INT_0, 10
ENI
159
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
LD SM0.0
MOVB 16#A0, SMB47
//Set control bits:
//write preset;
ATCH HSC1
HSC1_STEP1,
STEP1 13
//Interrupt HSC1_STEP1: CV = PV for HC1
LD SM0.0
CEVNT 13
160
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
SM bits affected:
H SM1.0 (zero)
161
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
SM bits affected:
H SM1.0 (zero)
Table 6-52 Valid Operands for the AND, OR, and Exclusive OR Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
IN1, IN2 BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
DWORD ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
DWORD ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
162
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Exclusive OR Word
AC1 0001 1111 0110 1101
XOR
AC0 0001 0011 0110 0100
equals
AC0 0000 1100 0000 1001
163
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Move Instructions
Move Byte, Word, Double Word, or Real
The Move Byte (MOVB), Move Word (MOVW), Move
Double Word (MOVD), and Move Real (MOVR) instructions
move a value from a memory location IN to a new memory
location OUT without changing the original value.
Use the Move Double Word instruction to create a pointer.
For more information, refer to the section on pointers and
indirect addressing in Chapter 4.
For the IEC Move instruction, the input and output data
types can vary, but must be of the same size.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0006 (indirect address)
164
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Table 6-54 Valid Operands for the Move Byte Immediate Read Instruction
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
IN BYTE IB, *VD, *LD, *AC
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
Table 6-55 Valid Operands for the Move Byte Immediate Write Instruction
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
IN BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE QB, *VD, *LD, *AC
165
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
166
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Stop
The Stop instruction (STOP) terminates the execution of
your program by causing a transition of the S7-200 CPU
from RUN to STOP mode.
If the Stop instruction is executed in an interrupt routine, the
interrupt routine is terminated immediately, and all pending
interrupts are ignored. Remaining actions in the current
scan cycle are completed, including execution of the main
user program, and the transition from RUN to STOP mode is
made at the end of the current scan.
Watchdog Reset
The Watchdog Reset instruction (WDR) retriggers the system watchdog timer of the S7-200 CPU
to extend the time that the scan is allowed to take without getting a watchdog error.
You should use the Watchdog Reset instruction carefully. If you use looping instructions either to
prevent scan completion or to delay excessively the completion of the scan, the following
processes are inhibited until the scan cycle is completed:
167
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
If you expect your scan time to exceed 500 ms, or if you expect a burst of interrupt activity that
could prevent returning to the main scan for more than 500 ms, you should use the Watchdog
Reset instruction to retrigger the watchdog timer.
Each time you use the Watchdog Reset instruction, you should also use an immediate write to
one output byte (QB) in each discrete expansion module to reset each expansion module
watchdog.
If you use the Watchdog Reset instruction to allow the execution of a program that requires a
long scan time, changing the mode switch to the STOP position causes the S7-200 to transition
to STOP mode within 1.4 seconds.
168
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
1, 2, 3, ...10.
If the starting value is greater than the final value, the loop is not executed. After each execution of
the instructions between the For instruction and the Next instruction, the INDX value is
incremented and the result is compared to the final value. If the INDX is greater than the final
value, the loop is terminated.
If the top of stack is 1 when your program enters the For--Next loop, then the top of stack will be 1
when your program exits the For--Next loop.
Table 6-57 Valid Operands for the For and Next Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
INDX INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
INIT, FINAL INT VW, IW, QW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC,
Constant
169
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
170
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Jump Instructions
The Jump to Label instruction (JMP) performs a branch to
the specified label N within the program.
The Label instruction (LBL) marks the location of the jump
destination N.
You can use the Jump instruction in the main program, in
subroutines, or in interrupt routines. The Jump and its
corresponding Label instruction must always be located
within the same segment of code (either the main program,
a subroutine, or an interrupt routine).
You cannot jump from the main program to a label in either
a subroutine or an interrupt routine. Likewise, you cannot
jump from a subroutine or interrupt routine to a label outside
that subroutine or interrupt routine.
You can use a Jump instruction within an SCR segment, but
the corresponding Label instruction must be located within
the same SCR segment.
171
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The Load SCR instruction (LSCR) loads the SCR and logic
stacks with the value of the S bit referenced by the
instruction N.
The SCR segment is energized or de-energized by the
resulting value of the SCR stack. The value of the SCR
stack is copied to the top of the logic stack so that boxes or
output coils can be tied directly to the left power rail without
an intervening contact.
Restrictions
When using SCRs, be aware of the following restrictions:
- You cannot use the same S bit in more than one
routine. For example, if you use S0.1 in the main
program, do not use it in a subroutine.
- You cannot jump into or out of an SCR segment;
however, you can use Jump and Label instructions to
jump around SCR segments or to jump within an SCR
segment.
- You cannot use the END instruction in an SCR segment.
Table 6-59 Valid Operands for the Sequence Control Relay Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
S_bit BOOL S
172
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Figure 6-32 shows the S stack and the logic stack and the effect of executing the Load SCR
instruction. The following is true of Sequence Control Relay instructions:
- The Load SCR instruction (LSCR) marks the beginning of an SCR segment, and the SCR
End instruction (SCRE) marks the end of an SCR segment. All logic between the Load SCR
and the SCR End instructions are dependent upon the value of the S stack for its execution.
Logic between the SCR End and the next Load SCR instruction is not dependent on the
value of the S stack.
- The SCR Transition instruction Load the value of Sx.y onto the SCR and logic stacks.
(SCRT) provides the means to S stack ivS Sx.y
transfer control from an active SCR S bit
segment to another SCR segment. iv0 Sx.y
iv1 iv1
Execution of the SCR Transition Logic stack iv2 iv2
instruction when it has power flow iv3 iv3
will reset the S bit of the currently iv4 iv4
active segment and will set the S iv5 iv5
bit of the referenced segment.
iv6 iv6
Resetting the S bit of the active
iv7 iv7
segment does not affect the S Before After
iv8 iv8
stack at the time the SCR
Transition instruction executes.
C
Consequently, tl the
th SCR segmentt Figure 6-32 Effect of LSCR on the Logic Stack
remains energized until it is exited.
- The Conditional SCR End instruction (CSCRE) provides a means to exit an active SCR
segment without executing the instructions between the Conditional SCR End and the
SCR End instructions. The Conditional SCR End instruction does not affect any S bit nor
does it affect the S stack.
In the following example, the first scan bit SM0.1 sets S0.1, which will be the active State 1 on the
first scan. After a 2-second delay, T37 causes a transition to State 2. This transition deactivates
the State 1 SCR (S0.1) segment and activates the State 2 SCR (S0.2) segment.
173
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
174
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Divergence Control
In many applications, a single stream of sequential states must be split into two or more different
streams. When a control stream diverges into multiple streams, all outgoing streams must be
activated simultaneously. This is shown in Figure 6-33.
State L
Transition Condition
State M State N
The divergence of control streams can be implemented in an SCR program by using multiple
SCRT instructions enabled by the same transition condition, as shown in the following example.
Network 2
LD M2.3
A I2.1
SCRT S3.5 //Transition to State M
SCRT S6.5 //Transition to State N
Convergence Control
A situation similar to divergence control arises when two or more streams of sequential states
must be merged into a single stream. When multiple streams merge into a single stream, they are
said to converge. When streams converge, all incoming streams must be complete before the
next state is executed. Figure 6-34 depicts the convergence of two control streams.
The convergence of control streams can be implemented in an SCR program by making the
transition from state L to state L’ and by making the transition from state M to state M’. When both
SCR bits representing L’ and M’ are true, state N can the enabled as shown in the following
example.
175
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
State L State M
Transition Condition
State N
176
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
In other situations, a control stream might be directed into one of several possible control streams,
depending upon which transition condition comes true first. Such a situation is depicted in Figure
6-35, which shows an equivalent SCR program.
State L
State M State N
177
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Network 2
LD SM0.0
DLED VB100
178
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
179
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Rotate Shift
Before rotate Overflow Before shift Overflow
AC0 0100 0000 0000 0001 x VW200 1110 0010 1010 1101 x
180
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
SM bits affected:
H SM1.1 (overflow)
Table 6-62 Valid Operands for the Shift Register Bit Instruction
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
DATA, S_Bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
N BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
181
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Use the following equation to compute the address of the most significant bit of the Shift Register
(MSB.b):
For example: if S_BIT is V33.4 and N is 14, the Shift Minus, S_BIT
following calculation shows that the MSB.b is V35.1. Length = --14 MSB LSB
V33 7 4 0
MSB.b = V33 + ([14] -- 1 +4)/8
= V33 + 17/8
= V33 + 2 with a remainder of 1 V34 7 0
= V35.1
On a Shift Minus, indicated by a negative value of V35 7 1 0
length (N), the input data shifts into the most
significant bit of the Shift Register, and shifts out of
MSB of Shift Register
the least significant bit (S_BIT). The data shifted out
is then placed in the overflow memory bit (SM1.1). Shift Plus, S_BIT
MSB LSB
Length = 14
On a Shift Plus, indicated by a positive value of V33 7 4 0
length (N), the input data (DATA) shifts into the least
significant bit of the Shift Register, specified by the V34 7 0
S_BIT, and out of the most significant bit of the Shift
Register. The data shifted out is then placed in the
V35 7 1 0
overflow memory bit (SM1.1).
The maximum length of the shift register is 64 bits, MSB of Shift Register
positive or negative.
g Figure
g 6-36 shows bit shifting
g
f negative
for ti and d positive
iti values
l off N.
N Figure 6-36 Shift Register Entry and Exit
182
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Swap D6 C3
VW50 VW50 C3 D6
183
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
String Instructions
String Length
The String Length instruction (SLEN) returns the length of
the string specified by IN.
Copy String
The Copy String instruction (SCPY) copies the string
specified by IN to the string specified by OUT.
Concatenate String
The Concatenate String instruction (SCAT) appends the
string specified by IN to the end of the string specified by
OUT.
Table 6-65 Valid Operands for the Copy String and Concatenate String Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
IN STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC , Constant String
OUT STRING VB, LB, *VD, *AC, *LD
184
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
VB100 VB111
11 ’H’ ’E’ ’L’ ’L’ ’O’ ’ ’ ’W’ ’O’ ’R’ ’L’ ’D’
AC0
11
185
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 6-66 Valid Operands for the Copy Substring from String Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
IN STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant String
OUT STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
INDX, N BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
186
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Table 6-67 Valid Operands for Find String Within String and Find First Character Within String
Instructions
187
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
VB0 VB12
12 ’T’ ’u’ ’r’ ’n’ ’ ’ ’P’ ’u’ ’m’ ’p’ ’ ’ ’O’ ’n’
VB0 VB11
11 ’T’ ’e’ ’m’ ’p’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’9’ ’8’ ’.’ ’6’ ’F’
VB20 VB32
12 ’1’ ’2’ ’3’ ’4’ ’5’ ’6’ ’7’ ’8’ ’9’ ’0’ ’+’ ’--’
188
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Table Instructions
Add To Table
The Add To Table instruction adds word values (DATA) to a
table (TBL). The first value of the table is the maximum table
length (TL). The second value is the entry count (EC), which
specifies the number of entries in the table. New data are
added to the table after the last entry. Each time new data
are added to the table, the entry count is incremented.
A table can have up to 100 data entries.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H SM1.4 (table overflow)
H 0006 (indirect address)
H 0091 (operand out of range)
SM bits affected:
H SM1.4 is set to 1 if you try to overfill the table
Network 2
LD I0.0
ATT VW100, VW200
VW200 0006 TL (max. no. of entries) VW200 0006 TL (max. no. of entries)
VW202 0002 EC (entry count) VW202 0003 EC (entry count)
VW204 5431 d0 (data 0) VW204 5431 d0 (data 0)
VW206 8942 d1 (data 1) VW206 8942 d1 (data 1)
VW208 xxxx VW208 1234 d2 (data 2)
VW210 xxxx VW210 xxxx
VW212 xxxx VW212 xxxx
VW214 xxxx VW214 xxxx
189
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
First-In-First-Out
The First-In-First-Out instruction (FIFO) moves the oldest (or
first) entry in a table to the output memory address by
removing the first entry in the table (TBL) and moving the
value to the location specified by DATA. All other entries of
the table are shifted up one location. The entry count in the
table is decremented for each instruction execution.
Last-In-First-Out
The Last-In-First-Out instruction (LIFO) moves the newest
(or last) entry in the table to the output memory address by
removing the last entry in the table (TBL) and moving the
value to the location specified by DATA. The entry count in
the table is decremented for each instruction execution.
Table 6-69 Valid Operands for the First-In-First-Out and Last-In-First-Out Instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Types Operands
TBL WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, *VD, *LD, *AC
DATA INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
VW200 0006 TL (max. no. of entries) VW200 0006 TL (max. no. of entries)
VW202 0003 EC (entry count) VW202 0002 EC (entry count)
VW204 5431 d0 (data 0) VW204 8942 d0 (data 0)
VW206 8942 d1 (data 1) VW206 1234 d1 (data 1)
VW208 1234 d2 (data 2) VW208 xxxx
VW210 xxxx VW210 xxxx
VW212 xxxx VW212 xxxx
VW214 xxxx VW214 xxxx
190
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
VW200 0006 TL (max. no. of entries) VW200 0006 TL (max. no. of entries)
VW202 0003 EC (entry count) VW202 0002 EC (entry count)
VW204 5431 d0 (data 0) VW204 5431 d0 (data 0)
VW206 8942 d1 (data 1) VW206 8942 d1 (data 1)
VW208 1234 d2 (data 2) VW208 xxxx
VW210 xxxx VW210 xxxx
VW212 xxxx VW212 xxxx
VW214 xxxx VW214 xxxx
191
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Memory Fill
The Memory Fill instruction (FILL) writes N consecutive
words, beginning at address OUT, with the word value
contained in address IN.
N has a range of 1 to 255.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0006 (indirect address)
H 0091 (operand out of range)
192
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Table Find
The Table Find instruction (FND) searches a table for data
that matches certain criteria. The Table Find instruction
searches the table TBL, starting with the table entry INDX,
for the data value or pattern PTN that matches the search
criteria defined by CMD. The command parameter CMD is
given a numeric value of 1 to 4 that corresponds to =, <>, <,
and >, respectively.
If a match is found, the INDX points to the matching entry in
the table. To find the next matching entry, the INDX must be
incremented before invoking the Table Find instruction
again. If a match is not found, the INDX has a value equal to
the entry count.
A table can have up to 100 data entries. The data entries
(area to be searched) are numbered from 0 to a maximum
value of 99.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0006 (indirect address)
H 0091 (operand out of range)
Tip
When you use the Table Find instruction with tables generated with the Add to Table,
Last-In-First-Out, and First-In-First-Out instructions, the entry count and the data entries
correspond directly. The maximum-number-of-entries word required for the Add to Table,
Last-In-First-Out, or First-In-First-Out instructions is not required by the Table Find instruction.
See Figure 6-37.
Consequently, you should set the TBL operand of a Find instruction to one-word address (two
bytes) higher than the TBL operand of a corresponding the Add to Table, Last-In-First-Out, or
First-In-First-Out instruction.
Table format for ATT, LIFO, and FIFO Table format for TBL_FIND
Figure 6-37 Different Table Formats between the Table Find Instruction and the ATT, LIFO, and FIFO
Instructions
193
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
When I2.1 is on, search the table for AC1 0 AC1 must be set to 0 to
a value equal to 3130 HEX. search from the top of table.
Execute table search AC1 contains the data entry
VW202 0006 EC (entry count)
AC1 2 number corresponding to the
VW204 3133 d0 (data 0)
first match found in the table (d2).
VW206 4142 d1 (data 1)
VW208 3130 d2 (data 2)
VW210 3030 d3 (data 3) Increment the INDX by one,
AC1 3 before searching the
VW212 3130 d4 (data 4)
VW214 4541 d5 (data 5) remaining entries of the table.
Execute table search AC1 contains the data entry number
AC1 4 corresponding to the second
If the table was created using ATT, match found in the table (d4).
LIFO, and FIFO instructions, VW200
contains the maximum number of Increment the INDX by one, before
allowed entries and is not required by AC1 5 searching the remaining entries
the Find instructions. of the table.
Execute table search AC1 contains a value equal to the entry
AC1 6 count. The entire table has been searched
without finding another match.
194
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
195
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Timer Instructions
SIMATIC Timer Instructions
On-Delay Timer
Retentive On-Delay Timer
The On-Delay Timer (TON) and Retentive On-Delay Timer
(TONR) instructions count time when the enabling input is
on. The timer number (Txx) determines the resolution of the
timer, and the resolution is now shown in the instruction box.
Off-Delay Timer
The Off-Delay Timer (TOF) is used to delay turning an
output off for a fixed period of time after the input turns off.
The timer number (Txx) determines the resolution of the
timer, and the resolution is now shown in the instruction box.
Tip
You cannot share the same timer number (Txx) for an off-delay timer (TOF) and an on-delay
timer (TON). For example, you cannot have both a TON T32 and a TOF T32.
As shown in Table 6-73, the three types of timers perform different types of timing tasks:
Type Current >= Preset State of the Enabling Input (IN) Power Cycle/First Scan
TON Timer bit on ON: Current value counts time Timer bit off
Current continues counting OFF: Timer bit off, current value = 0 Current value = 0
to 32,767
TONR Timer bit on ON: Current value counts time Timer bit off
Current continues counting OFF: Timer bit and current value Current value can be
to 32,767 maintain last state maintained1
TOF Timer bit off ON: Timer bit on, current value = 0 Timer bit off
Current = Preset, stops OFF: Timer counts after on-to-off Current value = 0
counting transition
1 The retentive timer current value can be selected for retention through a power cycle. See Chapter 4 for
information about memory retention for the S7-200 CPU.
196
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Refer to the Programming Tips on the documentation CD for a sample program that uses the
on-delay timer (TON). See Tip 31
Programming
Tips
The TON and TONR instructions count time when the enabling input is on. When the current
value is equal to or greater than the preset time, the timer bit is on.
- The current value of a TON timer is cleared when the enabling input is off, whereas the
current value of the TONR timer is maintained when the input is off.
- You can use the TONR timer to accumulate time when the input turns on and off. Use the
Reset instruction (R) to clear the current value of the TONR.
- Both the TON and the TONR timers continue counting after the preset is reached, and they
stop counting at the maximum value of 32,767.
The TOF instruction is used to delay turning an output off for a fixed period of time after the input
turns off. When the enabling input turns on, the timer bit turns on immediately, and the current
value is set to 0. When the input turns off, the timer counts until the elapsed time reaches the
preset time.
- When the preset is reached, the timer bit turns off and the current value stops incrementing;
however, if the input turns on again before the TOF reaches the preset value, the timer bit
remains on.
- The enabling input must make an on-to-off transition for the TOF to begin counting time
intervals.
- If the TOF timer is inside an SCR region and the SCR region is inactive, then the current
value is set to 0, the timer bit is turned off, and the current value does not increment.
Tip
You can reset a TONR only by using the Reset (R) instruction. You can also use the Reset
instruction to reset any TON or TOF. The Reset instruction performs the following operations:
H Timer Bit = off
H Timer Current = 0
After a reset, TOF timers require the enabling input to make the transition from on to off in order
for the timer to restart.
197
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
To guarantee a minimum time interval, increase the preset value (PV) by 1. For example: To
ensure a minimum timed interval of at least 2100 ms for a 100-ms timer, set the PV to 22.
For a timer with a resolution of 10 ms, the timer bit and the current value are updated at the
beginning of each scan cycle. The timer bit and current value remain constant throughout the
scan, and the time intervals that accumulate during the scan are added to the current value at the
start of each scan.
For a timer with a resolution of 100 ms, the timer bit and current value are updated when the
instruction is executed; therefore, ensure that your program executes the instruction for a 100-ms
timer only once per scan cycle in order for the timer to maintain the correct timing.
Timing Diagram
I0.0
1s
Maximum
current = 10
value = 32767
T37 (current)
T37 (bit)
Q0.0
198
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Tip
To guarantee that the output of a self-resetting timer is turned on for one scan each time the
timer reaches the preset value, use a normally closed contact instead of the timer bit as the
enabling input to the timer.
current = 40
T33 (bit)
M0.0
Q0.0
Timing Diagram
I0.0
1s 0.8 s
current = 100
T33 (current)
199
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Timing Diagram
I0.0
0.6 s 0.4 s 1s
100 (Current)
60 (Current)
T1 (Current)
T1 (bit), Q0.0
I0.1(Reset)
200
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Off-Delay Timer
The Off-Delay Timer (TOF) delays turning an output off for a
fixed period of time after the input turns off.
Pulse Timer
The Pulse Timer (TP) generates pulses for a specific
duration.
Tip
You cannot share the same timer numbers for TOF, TON, and TP. For example, you cannot
have both a TON T32 and a TOF T32.
- The TON instruction counts time intervals up to the preset value when the enabling input
(IN) becomes true. When the elapsed time (ET) is equal to the Preset Time (PT), the timer
output bit (Q) turns on. The output bit resets when the enabling input turns off. When the
preset is reached, timing stops and the timer is disabled.
- The TOF instruction delays setting an output to off for a fixed period of time after the input
turns off. It times up to the preset value when the enabling input (IN) turns off. When the
elapsed time (ET) is equal to the preset time (PT), the timer output bit (Q) turns off. When
the preset is reached, the timer output bit turns off and the elapsed time is maintained until
the enabling input makes the transition to on. If the enabling input sets the transition to off
for a period of time shorter than the preset time, the output bit remains on.
- The TP instruction generates pulses for a specific duration. As the enabling input (IN) turns
on, the output bit (Q) turns on. The output bit remains on for the pulse specified within the
preset time (PT). When the elapsed time (ET) reaches preset (PT), the output bit turns off.
The elapsed time is maintained until the enabling input turns off. When the output bit turns
on, it remains on until the pulse time has elapsed.
Each count of the current value is a multiple of the time base. For example, a count of 50 on a
10-ms timer represents 500 ms. The IEC timers (TON, TOF, and TP) are available in three
resolutions. The resolution is determined by the timer number, as shown in Table 6-76.
201
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
VW100
(current)
PT = 3 PT = 3
Output (Q)
VW100
(current)
PT = 3 PT = 3
Output (Q)
VW100
(current)
PT = 3
Output
202
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Interval Timers
Beginning Interval Time
The Beginning Interval Time (BITIM) instruction reads the
current value of the built-in 1 millisecond counter and stores
the value in OUT. The maximum timed interval for a
DWORD millisecond value is 2 raised to the 32 power or
49.7 days.
LD Q0.0
EU
BITIM VD0
LD Q0.0
CITIM VD0, VD4
203
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Subroutine Instructions
The Call Subroutine instruction (CALL) transfers control to
the subroutine SBR_N. You can use a Call Subroutine
instruction with or without parameters. After the subroutine
completes its execution, control returns to the instruction that
follows the Call Subroutine.
The Conditional Return from Subroutine instruction (CRET)
terminates the subroutine based upon the preceding logic.
To add a subroutine, select the Edit > Insert > Subroutine
menu command.
Error conditions that set ENO = 0
H 0008 (maximum subroutine nesting exceeded)
H 0006 (indirect address)
A subroutine call cannot be placed in any subroutine called from an interrupt routine. Recursion (a
subroutine that calls itself) is not prohibited, but you should use caution when using recursion with
subroutines.
Tip
STEP 7--Micro/WIN automatically adds an unconditional return from each subroutine.
When a subroutine is called, the entire logic stack is saved, the top of stack is set to one, all other
stack locations are set to zero, and control is transferred to the called subroutine. When this
subroutine is completed, the stack is restored with the values saved at the point of call, and
control is returned to the calling routine.
Accumulators are common to subroutines and the calling routine. No save or restore operation is
performed on accumulators due to subroutine use.
When a subroutine is called more than once in the same cycle, the edge/up, edge/down, timer
and counter instructions should not be used.
204
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
The variable type field in the local variable table defines whether the variable is passed into the
subroutine (IN), passed into and out of the subroutine (IN_OUT), or passed out of the subroutine
(OUT). Table 6-79 describes the parameter types for a subroutine. To add a parameter entry,
place the cursor on the variable type field of the type (IN, IN_OUT, or OUT) that you want to add.
Click the right mouse button to get a menu of options. Select the Insert option and then the Row
Below option. Another parameter entry of the selected type appears below the current entry.
As shown in Figure 6-38, the data type field in the local variable table defines the size and format
of the parameter. The parameter types are listed below:
205
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Address parameters such as IN4 (&VB100) are passed into a subroutine as a DWORD (unsigned
double word) value. The type of a constant parameter must be specified for the parameter in the
calling routine with a constant descriptor in front of the constant value. For example, to pass an
unsigned double word constant with a value of 12,345 as a parameter, the constant parameter
must be specified as DW#12345. If the constant describer is omitted from the parameter, the
constant can be assumed to be a different type.
There are no automatic data type conversions performed on the input or output parameters. For
example, if the local variable table specifies that a parameter has the data type REAL, and in the
calling routine a double word (DWORD) is specified for that parameter, the value in the subroutine
will be a double word.
When values are passed to a subroutine, they are placed into the local memory of the subroutine.
The left-most column of the local variable table shows the local memory address for each passed
parameter. Input parameter values are copied to the subroutine’s local memory when the
subroutine is called. Output parameter values are copied from the subroutine’s local memory to
the specified output parameter addresses when the subroutine execution is complete.
The data element size and type are represented in the coding of the parameters. Assignment of
parameter values to local memory in the subroutine is as follows:
- Parameter values are assigned to local memory in the order specified by the call subroutine
instruction with parameters starting at L.0.
- One to eight consecutive bit parameter values are assigned to a single byte starting with
Lx.0 and continuing to Lx.7.
- Byte, word, and double word values are assigned to local memory on byte boundaries (LBx,
LWx, or LDx).
In the Call Subroutine instruction with parameters, parameters must be arranged in order with
input parameters first, followed by input/output parameters, and then followed by output
parameters.
If you are programming in STL, the format of the CALL instruction is:
206
S7-200 Instruction Set Chapter 6
Network2 //
LD I0.1
SSCPY “string2”, VB200
AENO
MOVD &VB200, VD0
Network3 //
LD I0.2
CALL SBR_0, *VD0
S Network 1 //
B LD SM0.0
R SSCPY *LD0, VB300
0
207
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
208
Communicating over a Network
The S7-200 is designed to solve your communications and networking needs by supporting not
only the simplest of networks but also supporting more complex networks. The S7-200 also
provides tools that allow you to communicate with other devices, such as printers and weigh
scales which use their own communications protocols.
STEP 7--Micro/WIN makes setting up and configuring your network simple and straightforward.
In This Chapter
Understanding the Basics of S7-200 Network Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Selecting the Communications Protocol for Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Installing and Removing Communications Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Building Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Creating User-Defined Protocols with Freeport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Using Modems and STEP 7--Micro/WIN with Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Configuring the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable for Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
209
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
Please note that only one USB cable can be used at a time.
Tip
Examples in this manual use the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable. The RS-232/PPI Multi-Master
cable replaces the previous PC/PPI cable. A USB/PPI Multi-Master cable is also available.
Refer to Appendix E for order numbers.
210
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
Masters
A device that is a master on a network can initiate a request to another device on the network. A
master can also respond to requests from other masters on the network. Typical master devices
include STEP 7--Micro/WIN, human-machine interface devices such as a TD 200, and S7-300 or
S7-400 PLCs. The S7-200 functions as a master when it is requesting information from another
S7-200 (peer-to-peer communications).
Tip
A TP070 will not work on a network with another master device.
Slaves
A device that is configured as a slave can only respond to requests from a master device; a slave
never initiates a request. For most networks, the S7-200 functions as a slave. As a slave device,
the S7-200 responds to requests from a network master device, such as an operator panel or
STEP 7--Micro/WIN.
Every device that communicates over a Table 7-1 Baud Rates Supported by the
given network must be configured to S7-200
transmit data at the same baud rate.
Network Baud Rate
Therefore, the fastest baud rate for the
network is determined by the slowest Standard Network 9.6 kbaud to 187.5 kbaud
device connected to the network. Using an EM 277 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Table 7-1 lists the baud rates supported by Freeport Mode 1200 baud to 115.2 kbaud
the S7-200.
The network address is a unique number Table 7-2 Default Addresses for S7-200
that you assign to each device on the Devices
network. The unique network address
S7-200 Device Default Address
ensures that the data is transferred to or
retrieved from the correct device. The STEP 7--Micro/WIN 0
S7-200 supports network addresses from 0 HMI (TD 200, TP, or OP) 1
to 126. For an S7-200 with two ports, each
S7-200 CPU 2
port has a network address. Table 7-2 lists
the default (factory) settings for the S7-200
devices.
211
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Setting the Baud Rate and Network Address for STEP 7--Micro/WIN
You must configure the baud rate and network address for STEP 7--Micro/WIN. The baud rate
must be the same as the other devices on the network, and the network address must be unique.
Typically, you do not change the network address (0) for STEP 7--Micro/WIN. If your network
includes another programming package, you might need to change the network address for
STEP 7--Micro/WIN.
4.
Setting the Baud Rate and Network Address for the S7-200
You must also configure the baud rate and network address for the S7-200. The system block of
the S7-200 stores the baud rate and network address. After you select the parameters for the
S7-200, you must download the system block to the S7-200.
Tip
Selection of all baud rate options is permitted. STEP 7--Micro/WIN validates this selection
during the download of the System Block. Baud rate selections that would prevent
STEP 7--Micro/WIN from communicating with the S7-200 are prevented from being downloaded.
212
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
213
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Ethernet is also available for the S7-200 CPU with expansion modules CP243--1 and CP243--1 IT.
PPI Protocol
PPI is a master-slave protocol: the master devices STEP 7--Micro/WIN:
send requests to the slave devices, and the slave Master
devices respond. See Figure 7-7. Slave devices do
not initiate messages, but wait until a master sends
them a request or polls them for a response. S7-200
Masters communicate to slaves by means of a
shared connection which is managed by the PPI
HMI: Master
protocol. PPI does not limit the number of masters
that can communicate with any one slave; however,
you cannot install more than 32 masters on the
Figure 7-7 PPI Network
network.
S7-200 CPUs can act as master devices while they are in RUN mode, if you enable PPI master
mode in the user program. (See the description of SMB30 in Appendix D.) After enabling PPI
master mode, you can use the Network Read or the Network Write instructions to read from or
write to other S7-200s. While the S7-200 is acting as a PPI master, it still responds as a slave to
requests from other masters.
PPI Advanced allows network devices to establish a logical connection between the devices. With
PPI Advanced, there are a limited number of connections supplied by each device. See Table 7-3
for the number of connections supported by the S7-200.
All S7-200 CPUs support both PPI and PPI Advanced protocols, while PPI Advanced is the only
PPI protocol supported by the EM 277 module.
Table 7-3 Number of Connections for the S7-200 CPU and EM 277 Modules
Module Baud Rate Connections
S7-200 CPU Port 0 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, or 187.5 kbaud 4
Port 1 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, or 187.5 kbaud 4
EM 277 Module 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud 6 per module
214
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
MPI Protocol
MPI allows both master-master and master-slave STEP 7--Micro/WIN:
S7-200: Slave
communications. See Figure 7-8. To communicate Master
with an S7-200 CPU, STEP 7--Micro/WIN
establishes a master--slave connection. MPI
protocol does not communicate with an S7-200
CPU operating as a master. S7-300: Master
For MPI protocol, the S7-300 and S7-400 PLCs use the XGET and XPUT instructions to read and
write data to the S7-200 CPU. For information about these instructions, refer to your S7-300 or
S7-400 programming manual.
PROFIBUS Protocol
The PROFIBUS protocol is designed for high-speed S7-200 (EM 277): Slave
communications with distributed I/O devices (remote
I/O). There are many PROFIBUS devices available
from a variety of manufacturers. These devices S7-300: Master
range from simple input or output modules to motor
controllers and PLCs.
ET 200: Slave
PROFIBUS networks typically have one master and
several slave I/O devices. See Figure 7-9. The
master device is configured to know what types of
I/O slaves are connected and at what addresses.
The master initializes the network and verifies that
the slave devices on the network match the
configuration. The master continuously writes output Figure 7-9 PROFIBUS Network
data to the slaves and reads input data from them.
When a DP master configures a slave device successfully, it then owns that slave device. If there
is a second master device on the network, it has very limited access to the slaves owned by the
first master.
TCP/IP Protocol
The S7-200 can support TCP/IP Ethernet communication through the use of an Ethernet (CP
243--1) or Internet (CP 243--1 IT) expansion module. Table 7-4 shows the baud rate and number
of connections supported by these modules.
Table 7-4 Number of Connections for the Ethernet (CP 243--1) and the Internet (CP 243--1 IT) Modules
Module Baud Rate Connections
Ethernet (CP 243--1) Module 8 general purpose connections
10 to 100 Mbaud
Internet (CP 243--1 IT) Module 1 STEP 7--Micro/WIN connection
Refer to the SIMATIC NET CP 243--1 Communications Processor for Industrial Ethernet Manual
or the SIMATIC NET CP 243--1 IT Communications Processor for Industrial Ethernet and
Information Technology Manual for additional information.
215
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
For a network with multiple masters and one or more slaves, configure STEP 7--Micro/WIN to use
PPI protocol and check the Multiple Master Network and the PPI Advanced check boxes if they
are available. If you are using a PPI Multi-Master cable, the Multiple Master Network and PPI
Advanced check boxes are ignored.
216
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
217
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
STEP 7--Micro/WIN
218
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
Configure STEP 7--Micro/WIN to use PROFIBUS protocol for a CP card. Select the DP or
Standard profile if there are only DP devices present on the network. Select the Universal
(DP/FMS) profile for all master devices if there are any non--DP devices on the network, such as
TD 200s. All masters on the network must be set up to use the same PROFIBUS profile (DP,
Standard or Universal) for the network to operate.
The PPI Multi-master cables will function on networks up to 187.5 kbaud only if all master devices
are using the Universal (DP/FMS) profile.
For Ethernet networks, you configure Figure 7-19 10/100 Mbaud Ethernet Network
STEP 7--Micro/WIN to use TCP/IP protocol.
Tip
In the Set PG/PC Interface dialog, there are at least two TCP/IP choices. The selection
TCP/IP --> NdisWanlp is not supported by the S7-200.
- In the Set PG/PC Interface dialog box, the option(s) depend upon the type of Ethernet
interface provided in your PC. Choose the one that connects your computer to the Ethernet
network where the CP 243--1 or CP 243--1 IT module is connected.
- On the Communications dialog, you must enter the Remote IP address(es) of each of the
Ethernet/Internet modules with which you wish to communicate.
219
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
1. In the Set PG/PC Interface dialog box, click Select to access the Installing/Uninstalling
Interfaces dialog box.
The Selection box lists the interfaces that are available, and the Installed box displays the
interfaces that have already been installed on your computer.
2. To add a communications interface: Select the communications hardware installed on your
computer and click Install. When you close the Installing/Uninstallling Interfaces dialog box,
the Set PG/PC Interface dialog box displays the interface in the Interface Parameter
Assignment Used box.
3. To remove a communications interface: Select the interface to be removed and click
Uninstall. When you close the Installing/Uninstallling Interfaces dialog box, the Set PG/PC
Interface dialog box removes the interface from the Interface Parameter Assignment Used
box.
1. 2. 3.
Figure 7-20 Set PG/PC Interface and Installing/Uninstalling Interfaces Dialog Boxes
If you are using the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable in PPI/Freeport mode for communication
between an S7-200 CPU and STEP 7--Micro/WIN on an operating system that supports the PPI
Multi-Master configuration (Windows NT does not support the PPI Multi-Master), you might need
to adjust the port settings on your computer:
1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop and select the Properties menu command.
2. Select the Device Manager tab. For Windows 2000, select first the Hardware tab and then
Device Manager button.
3. Double-click the Ports (COM & LPT).
4. Select the communications port that you are currently using (for example, COM1).
5. On the Port Settings tab, click the Advanced button.
6. Set the Receive Buffer and the Transmit Buffer controls to the lowest value (1).
7. Click OK to apply the change, close all the windows, and reboot the computer to make the
new settings active.
220
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
Avoid placing low-voltage signal wires and communications cables in the same wire tray with AC
wires and high-energy, rapidly switched DC wires. Always route wires in pairs, with the neutral or
common wire paired with the hot or signal-carrying wire.
The communications port of the S7-200 CPU is not isolated. Consider using an RS-485 repeater
or an EM 277 module to provide isolation for your network.
Caution
Interconnecting equipment with different reference potentials can cause unwanted currents to
flow through the interconnecting cable.
These unwanted currents can cause communications errors or can damage equipment.
Be sure all equipment that you are about to connect with a communications cable either shares
a common circuit reference or is isolated to prevent unwanted current flows. See the information
about grounding and circuit reference points for using isolated circuits in Chapter 3.
Isolation is required when you connect devices at different ground potentials. Different ground
potentials can exist when grounds are physically separated by a long distance. Even over short
distances, load currents of heavy machinery can cause a difference in ground potential.
Table 7-5 Maximum Length for a Network Cable
Baud Rate Non-Isolated CPU Port1 CPU Port with Repeater or EM 277
9.6 kbaud to 187.5 kbaud 50 m 1,000 m
500 kbaud Not supported 400 m
1 Mbaud to 1.5 Mbaud Not supported 200 m
3 Mbaud to 12 Mbaud Not supported 100 m
1 The maximum distance allowed without using an isolator or repeater is 50 m. You measure this distance from
the first node to the last node in the segment.
221
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- To increase the length of a network: Adding a repeater to your network allows you to extend
the network another 50 m. If you connect two repeaters with no other nodes in between (as
shown in Figure 7-21), you can extend the network to the maximum cable length for the
baud rate. You can use up to 9 repeaters in series on a network, but the total length of the
network must not exceed 9600 m.
- To add devices to a network: Each segment can have a maximum of 32 devices connected
up to 50 m at 9600 baud. Using a repeater allows you to add another segment (32 devices)
to the network.
- To electrically isolate different network segments: Isolating the network improves the quality
of the transmission by separating the network segments which might be at different ground
potentials.
A repeater on your network counts as one of the nodes on a segment, even though it is not
assigned a network address.
RS-485 RS-485
Repeater Repeater
50 m Up to 1000 m 50 m
222
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
Both connectors have two sets of terminal screws to allow you to attach the incoming and
outgoing network cables. Both connectors also have switches to bias and terminate the network
selectively. Figure 7-22 shows typical biasing and termination for the cable connectors.
Cable must be terminated Switch position = On Switch position = Off Switch position = On
Terminated and biased No termination or bias Terminated and biased
and biased at both ends.
On Off On
ABAB ABAB A B AB
Bare shielding: approximately 12 mm (1/2 in.) must contact the metal guides of all locations.
223
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
For baud rates up to 187.5 kbaud the PPI Multi-Master cables provide the simplest and most
cost-effective connection between STEP 7--Micro/WIN and one S7-200 CPU or an S7-200
network. Two types of PPI Multi-Master cables are available and both can be used for local
connection between STEP 7--Micro/WIN and an S7-200 network.
The USB/PPI Multi-Master cable is a plug and play device that can be used with PCs that support
the USB Version 1.1. It provides isolation between your PC and the S7-200 network while
supporting PPI communication at baud rates up to 187.5 kbaud. There are no switches to set; just
connect the cable, choose the PC/PPI cable as the interface, select PPI protocol, and set the port
to USB in the PC Connection tab. Only one USB/PPI Multi-Master cable can be connected to the
PC at a time for use by STEP 7--Micro/WIN.
The RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable has eight DIP switches: two of these switches are used to
configure the cable for operation with STEP 7--Micro/WIN.
- If you are connecting the cable to the PC, select PPI mode (switch 5 = 1) and Local
operation (switch 6 = 0).
- If you are connecting the cable to a modem, select PPI mode (switch 5 = 1) and Remote
operation (switch 6 = 1).
The cable provides isolation between your PC and the S7-200 network. Choose the PC/PPI cable
as the interface and select the RS-232 port that you want to use under the PC Connection tab.
Under the PPI tab, select the station address and the network baud rate. You do not need to make
any other selections because protocol selection is automatic with the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master
cable.
Both the USB/PPI and the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cables have LEDs that provide an indication
of the communication activity with the PC as well as network communication activity.
- The Tx LED indicates that the cable is transmitting information to the PC.
- The Rx LED indicates that the cable is receiving information from the PC.
- The PPI LED indicates that the cable is transmitting data on the network. Since the
Multi-Master cables are token holders, the PPI LED is on continuously once communication
has been initialized by STEP 7--Micro/WIN. The PPI LED is turned off when the connection
with STEP 7--Micro/WIN is closed. The PPI LED will also flash at 1 Hz rate while waiting to
join the network.
The CP cards contain dedicated hardware to assist the programming station in managing a
multi-master network and can support different protocols at several baud rates.
Each CP card provides a single RS-485 port for connection to the network. The CP 5511 PCMCIA
card has an adapter that provides the 9-pin D port. You connect one end of the cable to the
RS-485 port of the card and connect the other end to a programming port connector on your
network.
If you are using a CP card with PPI communications, STEP 7--Micro/WIN will not support two
different applications running on the same CP card at the same time. You must close the other
application before connecting STEP 7--Micro/WIN to the network through the CP card. If you are
using MPI or PROFIBUS communication, multiple STEP 7--Micro/WIN applications are permitted
to communicate over the network at the same time.
Caution
Using a non-isolated RS-485-to-RS-232 converter can damage the RS-232 port of your
computer.
The Siemens RS-232/PPI and USB/PPI Multi-Master cables (order number 6ES7
901--3CB30--0XA0 or 6ES7 901--3DB30--0XA0, respectively) provide electrical isolation
between the RS-485 port on the S7-200 CPU and the RS-232 or USB port that connects to your
computer. If you do not use the Siemens Multi-Master cable, you must provide isolation for the
RS-232 port of your computer.
224
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
If your HMI device allows you to select the communications protocol, consider the following
guidelines:
- For an HMI device connected to the communications port of the S7-200 CPU, with no other
devices on the network, select either the PPI or the MPI protocol for the HMI device.
- For an HMI device connected to an EM 277 PROFIBUS module, select either the MPI or
the PROFIBUS protocol.
-- If the network with the HMI device includes S7-300 or S7-400 PLCs, select the MPI
protocol for the HMI device.
-- If the network with the HMI device is a PROFIBUS network, select the PROFIBUS
protocol for the HMI device and select a profile consistent with the other masters on
the PROFIBUS network.
- For an HMI device connected to the communications port of the S7-200 CPU which has
been configured as a master, select the PPI protocol for the HMI device. PPI Advanced is
optimal. The MPI and PROFIBUS protocols do not support the S7-200 CPU as a master.
225
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
To enable Freeport mode, you use special memory bytes SMB30 (for Port 0) and SMB130 (for
Port 1). Your program uses the following to control the operation of the communications port:
- Transmit instruction (XMT) and the transmit interrupt: The Transmit instruction allows the
S7-200 to transmit up to 255 characters from the COM port. The transmit interrupt notifies
your program in the S7-200 when the transmission has been completed.
- Receive character interrupt: The receive character interrupt notifies the user program that a
character has been received on the COM port. Your program can then act on that character,
based on the protocol being implemented.
- Receive instruction (RCV): The Receive instruction receives the entire message from the
COM port and then generates an interrupt for your program when the message has been
completely received. You use the SM memory of the S7-200 to configure the Receive
instruction for starting and stopping the receiving of messages, based on defined
conditions. The Receive instruction allows your program to start or stop a message based
on specific characters or time intervals. Most protocols can be implemented with the
Receive instruction.
Freeport mode is active only when the S7-200 is in RUN mode. Setting the S7-200 to STOP mode
halts all Freeport communications, and the communications port then reverts to the PPI protocol
with the settings which were configured in the system block of the S7-200.
226
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
The RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable is in Transmit mode when data is transmitted from the RS-232
port to the RS-485 port. The cable is in Receive mode when it is idle or is transmitting data from
the RS-485 port to the RS-232 port. The cable changes from Receive to Transmit mode
immediately when it detects characters on the RS-232 transmit line.
The RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable supports baud rates between 1200 baud and 115.2 kbaud.
Use the DIP switches on the housing of the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable to configure the cable
for the correct baud rate. Table 7-10 shows the baud rates and switch positions.
The cable switches back to Receive mode Table 7-10 Turnaround Time and Settings
when the RS-232 transmit line is in the idle
Baud Rate Turnaround Time Settings (1 =
state for a period of time defined as the
Up)
turnaround time of the cable. The baud rate
selection of the cable determines the 115200 0.15 ms 110
turnaround time, as shown in Table 7-10. 57600 0.3 ms 111
227
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
228
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
Adding a Connection
Use the Connection wizard to add a new connection, remove, or edit a connection as shown in
Connection Figure 7-24.
Wizard
1. Double-click the icon in the Communications Setup window.
2. Double-click the PC/PPI cable to open the PG/PC interface. Select the PPI cable and click
the Properties button. On the Local Connection tab, check the Modem Connection box.
3. Double-click the modem Connect icon in the Communications dialog.
4. Click the Settings button to display the Modem Connections Settings dialog box.
5. Click the Add button to start the Add Modem Connection wizard.
6. Configure the connection as prompted by the wizard.
4. 5. 6.
229
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
While configuring the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable with STEP 7--Micro/WIN, you must connect
the RS-485 connector to an S7-200 CPU. This is the source of the 24V power required for the
cable to operate. Be sure to supply power to the S7-200 CPU.
After exiting the STEP 7--Micro/WIN configuration of the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable,
disconnect the cable from the PC and connect it to the modem. Power cycle both the modem and
the cable. You are now ready to use the cable for remote operation in a PPI multi-master network.
Tip
Your modem must be at the factory default settings for use with a PPI Multi-Master cable.
230
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
While configuring the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable with STEP 7--Micro/WIN, you must connect
the RS-485 connector to an S7-200 CPU. This is the source of the 24V power required for the
cable to operate. Be sure to supply power to the S7-200 CPU.
After exiting the STEP 7--Micro/WIN configuration of the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable,
disconnect the cable from the PC and connect it to the modem. Power cycle both the modem and
the cable. You are now ready to use the cable for remote operation in a PPI multi-master network.
Tip
Your modem must be at the factory default settings for use with a PPI Multi-Master cable.
Kbaud 123
115.2K 110 8 Spare
- Switches 1, 2, and 3 set the baud rate. 57.6K 111 7 1=10 Bit
38.4K 000 0=11 Bit
- Switch 5 selects PPI or PPI/Freeport mode. 19.2K 001 6 1=Remote
9.6K 010 0= Local
- Switch 6 select either Local (equivalent to the 4.8K 011 5 1=PPI
Data Communications Equipment -- DCE) or 2.4K 100 0=PPI/Freeport
remote (equivalent to Data Terminal 1.2K 101 4 Spare
Equipment
q p -- DTE)) mode.
- Switch 7 selects either 10-bit or 11-bit PPI Figure 7-29 Settings for the RS-232/PPI
Multi-Master Cable
protocol.
Switch 5 selects operation in PPI mode or in PPI/Freeport mode. If you are using STEP
7--Micro/WIN to communicate with the S7-200 through modems, select PPI mode (switch 5 = 1).
Otherwise, select PPI/Freeport mode (switch 5 = 0).
Switch 7 of the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable selects either a 10--bit or 11--bit mode for
PPI/Freeport mode. Use switch 7 only when the S7-200 is connected to STEP 7--Micro/WIN with a
modem in PPI/Freeport mode. Otherwise, set switch 7 for 11--bit mode to ensure proper operation
with other devices.
231
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
This eliminates the need to install a null modem adapter between the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master
cable and the modem. Depending on the connector on the modem, you might still need to use a
9-pin-to-25-pin adapter.
Figure 7-30 shows the pin assignment for a common modem adapter.
See Appendix A for more information about the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable. The pin numbers
and functions for the RS-485 and RS-232 ports of the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable in Local
(DCE) mode are shown in Table A-66. Table A-67 shows the pin numbers and functions for the
RS-485 and RS-232 ports of the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable in Remote (DTE) mode. The
RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable supplies RTS only when it is in Remote (DTE) mode.
PPI Mode
With the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable set for PPI mode (switch 5 = 1), you would normally
select remote mode (switch 6 = 1) for operation with a modem. However, selecting the remote
mode causes the cable to send the character string ’AT’ and wait for the modem to reply with ’OK’
on each power up. While telephone modems use this sequence to establish the baud rate, radio
modems do not generally accept AT commands.
Therefore, for operation with radio modems you must select local mode (switch 6 = 0) and use a
null modem adapter between the RS-232 connector of the cable and the RS-232 port on your
radio modem. Null modem adapters are available in either 9-pin-to-9 pin or 9-pin-to-25 pin
configurations.
Configure the radio modem to operate at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6 or 115.2 kbaud. The RS-232/PPI
Multi-Master cable will automatically adjust to any one of these baud rates on the first character
transmitted by the radio modem.
PPI/Freeport Mode
With the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable set for PPI/Freeport mode (switch 5 = 0), select remote
mode (switch 6 = 1) for operation with a radio modem. Configure the cable so that it will not send
any AT commands to setup the modem.
Switches 1, 2, and 3 on the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable set the baud rate. See Figure 7--29.
Select the baud rate setting that corresponds to the baud rate of the PLC and the radio modem.
232
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
Advanced Topics
Optimizing the Network Performance
The following factors affect network performance (with baud rate and number of masters having
the greatest effect):
- Baud rate: Operating the network at the highest baud rate supported by all devices has the
greatest effect on the network.
- Number of masters on the network: Minimizing the number of masters on a network also
increases the performance of the network. Each master on the network increases the
overhead requirements of the network; having fewer masters lessens the overhead.
- Selection of master and slave addresses: The addresses of the master devices should be
set so that all of the masters are at sequential addresses with no gaps between addresses.
Whenever there is an address gap between masters, the masters continually check the
addresses in the gap to see if there is another master wanting to come online. This
checking requires time and increases the overhead of the network. If there is no address
gap between masters, no checking is done and so the overhead is minimized. You can set
the slave addresses to any value without affecting network performance, as long as the
slaves are not between masters. Slaves between masters increase the network overhead
in the same way as having address gaps between masters.
- Gap update factor (GUF): Used only when an S7-200 CPU is operating as a PPI master,
the GUF tells the S7-200 how often to check the address gap for other masters. You use
STEP 7--Micro/WIN to set the GUF in the CPU configuration for a CPU port. This configures
the S7-200 to check address gaps only on a periodic basis. For GUF=1, the S7-200 checks
the address gap every time it holds the token; for GUF=2, the S7-200 checks the address
gap once every two times it holds the token. If there are address gaps between masters, a
higher GUF reduces the network overhead. If there are no address gaps between masters,
the GUF has no effect on performance. Setting a large number for the GUF causes long
delays in bringing masters online, because the addresses are checked less frequently. The
default GUF setting is 10.
- Highest station address (HSA): Used only when an S7-200 CPU is operating as a PPI
master, the HSA defines the highest address at which a master should look for another
master. You use STEP 7--Micro/WIN to set the HSA in the CPU configuration for a CPU
port. Setting an HSA limits the address gap which must be checked by the last master
(highest address) in the network. Limiting the size of the address gap minimizes the time
required to find and bring online another master. The highest station address has no effect
on slave addresses: masters can still communicate with slaves which have addresses
greater than the HSA. As a general rule, set the highest station address on all masters to
the same value. This address should be greater than or equal to the highest master
address. The default value for the HSA is 31.
Figure 7-31 provides a sample network as an example for calculating the token rotation time for a
multiple-master network. In this example, the TD 200 (station 3) communicates with the CPU 222
(station 2), the TD 200 (station 5) communicates with the CPU 222 (station 4), and so on. The two
CPU 224 modules use the Network Read and Network Write instructions to gather data from the
other S7-200s: CPU 224 (station 6) sends messages to stations 2, 4, and 8, and the CPU 224
(station 8) sends messages to stations 2, 4, and 6. In this network, there are six master stations
(the four TD 200 units and the two CPU 224 modules) and two slave stations (the two CPU 222
modules).
233
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Refer to the Programming Tips on the documentation CD for a discussion about token rotation.
See Tip 42.
Programming
Tips
CPU 222 CPU 222 CPU 224 CPU 224 TD 200 TD 200 TD 200 TD 200
Station 2 Station 4 Station 6 Station 8 Station 9 Station 7 Station 5 Station 3
In order for a master to send a message, it must hold the token. For example: When station 3 has
the token, it initiates a request message to station 2 and then it passes the token to station 5.
Station 5 then initiates a request message to station 4 and then passes the token to station 6.
Station 6 then initiates a message to station 2, 4, or 8, and passes the token to station 7. This
process of initiating a message and passing the token continues around the logical ring from
station 3 to station 5, station 6, station 7, station 8, station 9, and finally back to station 3. The
token must rotate completely around the logical ring in order for a master to be able to send a
request for information. For a logical ring of six stations, sending one request message per token
hold to read or write one double-word value (four bytes of data), the token rotation time is
approximately 900 ms at 9600 baud. Increasing the number of bytes of data accessed per
message or increasing the number of stations increases the token rotation time.
The token rotation time is determined by how long each station holds the token. You can
determine the token rotation time for your multiple-master network by adding the times that each
master holds the token. If the PPI master mode has been enabled (under the PPI protocol on your
network), you can send messages to other S7-200s by using the Network Read and Network
Write instructions with the S7-200. If you send messages using these instructions, you can use
the following formula to calculate the approximate token rotation time, based on the following
assumptions: each station sends one request per token hold, the request is either a read or write
request for consecutive data locations, there is no conflict for use of the one communications
buffer in the S7-200, and there is no S7-200 that has a scan time longer than about 10 ms.
Token hold time (Thold) = (128 overhead + n data char) x 11 bits/char x 1/baud rate
Token rotation time (Trot) = Thold of master 1 + Thold of master 2 + . . . + Thold of master m
where n is the number of data characters (bytes)
m is the number of masters
The following equations calculate the rotation times (one “bit time” equals the duration of one
signaling period) for the example shown in Figure 7-31:
Tip
SIMATIC NET COM PROFIBUS software provides an analyzer to determine network
performance.
234
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
- The PPI protocol utilizes one shared connection among all of the network devices.
- The PPI Advanced, MPI, and PROFIBUS protocols utilize separate connections between
any two devices communicating with each other.
When using PPI Advanced, MPI, or PROFIBUS, a second master cannot interfere with a
connection that has been established between a master and a slave. S7-200 CPUs and EM 277s
always reserve one connection for STEP 7--Micro/WIN and one connection for HMI devices. Other
master devices cannot use these reserved connections. This ensures that you can always
connect at least one programming station and at least one HMI device to the S7-200 CPU or EM
277 when the master is using a protocol that supports connections, such as PPI Advanced.
235
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
As shown in Table 7-12, the S7-200 CPU or EM 277 provide a specific number of connections.
Each port (Port 0 and Port 1) of an S7-200 CPU supports up to four separate connections. (This
allows a maximum of eight connections for the S7-200 CPU.) This is in addition to the shared PPI
connection. An EM 277 supports six connections.
If the network is running at a lower baud rate (such as 9.6 kbaud or 19.2 kbaud), then each master
completes the transaction (read or write) before passing the token. At 187.5 kbaud, however, the
master issues a request to a slave and then passes the token, which leaves an outstanding
request at the slave.
Figure 7-33 shows a network with potential communications conflicts. In this network, Station 1,
Station 2, and Station 3 are masters, using the Network Read or Network Write instructions to
communicate with Station 4. The Network Read and Network Write instructions use PPI protocol
so all of the S7-200s share the single PPI connection in Station 4.
In this example, Station 1 issues a request to Station 1 Master Station 2 Master Station 3 Master
To avoid this conflict for the communications port on Station 1 Slave Station 2 Slave Station 3 Slave
236
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
For some applications, however, reducing Table 7-13 HSA and Target Token Rotation
the number of masters on the network is Time
not an option. When there are several
HSA 9.6 kbaud 19.2 kbaud 187.5 kbaud
masters, you must manage the token
rotation time and ensure that the network HSA=15 0.613 s 0.307 s 31 ms
does not exceed the target token rotation HSA=31 1.040 s 0.520 s 53 ms
time. (The token rotation time is the amount
HSA=63 1.890 s 0.950 s 97 ms
of time that elapses from when a master
passes the token until that master receives HSA=126 3.570 s 1.790 s 183 ms
the token again.)
If the time required for the token to return to the master is greater than a target token rotation time,
then the master is not allowed to issue a request. The master can issue a request only when the
actual token rotation time is less than the target token rotation time.
The highest station address (HSA) and the baud rate settings for the S7-200 determine the target
token rotation time. Table 7-13 lists target rotation times.
For the slower baud rates, such as 9.6 kbaud and 19.2 kbaud, the master waits for the response
to its request before passing the token. Because processing the request/response cycle can take
a relatively long time in terms of the scan time, there is a high probability that every master on the
network can have a request ready to transmit every time it holds the token. The actual token
rotation time would then increase, and some masters might not be able to process any requests.
In some situations, a master might only rarely be allowed to process requests.
For example: Consider a network of 10 masters that transmit 1 byte at 9.6 kbaud that is
configured with an HSA of 15. For this example, each of the masters always has a message ready
to send. As shown in Table 7-13, the target rotation time for this network is 0.613 s. However,
based on the performance data listed in Table 7-11, the actual token rotation time required for this
network is 1.48 s. Because the actual token rotation time is greater than the target token rotation
time, some of the masters will not be allowed to transmit a message until some later rotation of the
token.
You have two basic options for improving a situation where the actual token rotation time is
greater than the target token rotation time:
- You can reduce actual token rotation time by reducing the number of masters on your
network. Depending on your application, this might not be a feasible solution.
- You can increase the target token rotation time by increasing the HSA for all of the master
devices on the network.
Increasing the HSA can cause a different problem for your network by affecting the amount of time
that it takes for a S7-200 to switch to master mode and enter the network. If you use a timer to
ensure that the Network Read or Network Write instruction completes its execution within a
specified time, the delay in initializing master mode and adding the S7-200 as a master on the
network can cause the instruction to time out. You can minimize the delay in adding masters by
reducing the Gap Update Factor (GUF) for all masters on the network.
Because of the manner in which requests are posted to and left at the slave for 187.5 kbaud, you
should allow extra time when selecting the target token rotation time. For 187.5 kbaud, the actual
token rotation time should be approximately half of the target token rotation time.
To determine the token rotation time, use the performance data in Table 7-11 to determine the time
required for completing the Network Read and Network Write operations. To calculate the time
required for HMI devices (such as the TD 200), use the performance data for transferring
16 bytes. Calculate the token rotation time by adding the time for each device on the network.
Adding all of the times together describes a worst-case scenario where all devices want to
process a request during the same token rotation. This defines the maximum token rotation time
required for the network.
237
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
For example: Consider a network running at 9.6 kbaud with four TD 200s and four S7-200s, with
each S7-200 writing 10 bytes of data to another S7-200 every second. Use Table 7-11 to calculate
the specific transfer times for the network:
To allow enough time for this network to process all requests during one token rotation, set the
HSA to 63. (See Table 7-13.) Selecting a target token rotation (1.89 s) that is greater than the
maximum token rotation time (1.29 s) ensures that every device can transfer data on every
rotation of the token.
To help improve the reliability of a multi-master network, you should also consider the following
actions:
- Change the update rate for the HMI devices to allow more time between updates. For
example, change the update rate for a TD 200 from “As fast as possible” to “Once per
second.”
- Reduce the number of requests (and the network overhead for processing the requests) by
combining the operations of Network Read or Network Write operations. For example,
instead of using two Network Read operations that read 4 bytes each, use one Network
Read operation that reads 8 bytes. The time to process the two requests of 4 bytes is much
greater than the time to process one request for 8 bytes.
- Change the update rate of the S7-200 masters so that they do not attempt to update faster
than the token rotation time.
238
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
While configuring the RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable with HyperTerminal, you must connect the
RS-485 connector to an S7-200 CPU. This is the source of the 24V power required for the cable
to operate. Be sure to supply power to the S7-200 CPU.
239
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
240
Communicating over a Network Chapter 7
The RS232/PPI Cable Setup for Remote Operation display guides you through the steps required
to configure the cable for the type of remote operation you desire.
Pack 4 or later.
Modem
The HyperTerminal display shown in
Figure 7-41 indicates the switch settings Telephone
Line
HMI: Master
If you are using a cell modem that requires a PIN, use the second AT command to supply the PIN
(refer to your modem manual for the AT commands supported by your modem). If you need to
modify the AT commands, make the selection and enter the commands required as you are
prompted for them. The prompts include example AT command strings to help you with the
formatting of the commands.
The RS-232/PPI Multi-Master cable will send these AT strings to the modem each time the cable
powers up. Make sure that the modem is powered up before or very close to the same time the
cable is powered up. Also, if you power cycle the modem, be sure to power cycle the cable. This
allows the cable to properly configure the modem and operate at the highest available baud rate.
241
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
242
Hardware Troubleshooting Guide and
Software Debugging Tools
STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides software tools to help you debug and test your program. These
features include viewing the status of the program as it is executed by the S7-200, selecting to run
the S7-200 for a specified number of scans, and forcing values.
Use Table 8-1 as a guide for determining the cause and possible solution when troubleshooting
problems with the S7-200 hardware.
In This Chapter
Features for Debugging Your Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Displaying the Program Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Using a Status Chart to Monitor and Modify the Data in the S7-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Forcing Specific Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Running Your Program for a Specified Number of Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Hardware Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
243
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
Double-clicking on an element in the cross reference table takes you to that part of your
program or block.
Warning
When you download changes to an S7-200 in RUN mode, the changes immediately affect
process operation. Changing the program in RUN mode can result in unexpected system
operation, which could cause death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Only authorized personnel who understand the effects of RUN mode edits on system operation
should perform a RUN mode edit.
To perform a program edit in RUN mode, the online S7-200 CPU must support RUN mode edits
and must be in RUN mode.
244
Hardware Troubleshooting Guide and Software Debugging Tools Chapter 8
Tip
Positive (EU) and Negative (ED) transition instructions are shown with an operand. To view
information about edge instructions, select the Cross Reference icon in the View. The Edge
Usage tab lists numbers for the edge instructions in your program. Be careful not to assign
duplicate edge numbers as you edit your program.
- If you deleted the control logic for an output, the S7-200 maintains the last state of the
output until the next power cycle or transition to STOP mode.
- If you deleted a high-speed counter or pulse output functions which were running, the
high-speed counter or pulse output continues to run until the next power cycle or transition
to STOP mode.
- If you deleted an Attach Interrupt instruction but did not delete the interrupt routine, the
S7-200 continues to execute the interrupt routine until a power cycle or a transition to STOP
mode. Likewise, if you deleted a Detach Interrupt instruction, the interrupts are not shut
down until the next power cycle or transition to STOP mode.
- If you added an Attach Interrupt instruction that is conditional on the first scan bit, the event
is not activated until the next power cycle or STOP-to-RUN mode transition.
- If you deleted an Enable Interrupt instruction, the interrupts continue to operate until the
next power cycle or transition from RUN to STOP mode.
- If you modified the table address of a receive box and the receive box is active at the time
that the S7-200 switches from the old program to the modified program, the S7-200
continues to write the data received to the old table address. Network Read and Network
Write instructions function in the same manner.
- Any logic that is conditional on the state of the first scan bit will not be executed until the
next power cycle or transition from STOP to RUN mode. The first scan bit is set only by the
transition to RUN mode and is not affected by a RUN-mode edit.
Tip
Before you can download your program in RUN mode, the S7-200 must support RUN mode
edits, the program must compile with no errors, and the communications between
STEP 7--Micro/WIN and the S7-200 must be error-free.
You can download only the program block.
To download your program in RUN mode, click on the Download button or select the File >
Download menu command. If the program compiles successfully, STEP 7--Micro/WIN downloads
the program block to the S7-200.
245
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
To display the status, click the Program Status button or select the Debug > Program Status
menu command.
- End of scan status: STEP 7--Micro/WIN acquires the values for the status display across
multiple scan cycles and then updates the status screen display. The status display does
not reflect the actual status of each element at the time of execution. The end-of-scan
status does not show status for L memory or for the accumulators.
For end of scan status, the status values are updated in all of the CPU operating modes.
- Execution status: STEP 7--Micro/WIN displays the values of the networks as the elements
are executed in the S7-200. For displaying the execution status, select the Debug > Use
Execution Status menu command.
For execution status, the status values are updated only when the CPU is in RUN mode.
Tip
STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides a simple method for changing the state of a variable. Simply select
the variable and right-click to display a menu of options.
Configuring How the Status is Displayed in the LAD and FBD Program
STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides a variety of
options for displaying the status in the
program.
To configure the display option for the
status screen, select the Tools >
Options menu command, select
Program Editor and click on the Program
Editor tab, as shown in Figure 8-2.
246
Hardware Troubleshooting Guide and Software Debugging Tools Chapter 8
STEP 7--Micro/WIN gathers status information from the S7-200, beginning from the first STL
statement at the top of the editor window. As you scroll down the editor window, new information is
gathered from the S7-200.
247
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Because the forced data might be changed during the scan cycle (either by the program, by the
I/O update cycle, or by the communications- processing cycle), the S7-200 reapplies the forced
values at various times in the scan cycle.
- Reading the inputs: The S7-200 applies the forced values to the inputs as they are read.
- Executing the control logic in the program:
Writes to the outputs
The S7-200 applies the forced values to all
immediate I/O accesses. Forced values are
applied for up to 16 memory values after the
program has been executed.
Perform the CPU Diagnostics
- Processing any communications requests:
The S7-200 applies the forced values to all Process any Communications
Requests
read/write communications accesses.
- Writing to the outputs: The S7-200 applies the
forced values to the outputs as they are Execute the Program
Scan Cycle
written.
You can use the Status Chart to force values. To
force a new value, enter the value in the New Value
Reads the inputs
column of the Status Chart, then press the Force
button on the toolbar. To force an existing value,
highlight the value in the Current Value column,
column then Figure 8-5 S7-200 Scan Cycle
press the Force button.
Tip
The Force function overrides a Read Immediate or Write Immediate instruction. The Force
function also overrides the output table that was configured for transition to STOP mode. If the
S7-200 goes to STOP mode, the output reflects the forced value and not the value that was
configured in the output table.
You can have the S7-200 execute only the first scan. This allows you to monitor the data in the
S7-200 after the first scan. Select the Debug > First Scan menu command to run the first scan.
You can have the S7-200 execute your program for a limited number of scans (from 1 scan to
65,535 scans). This allows you to monitor the program as it changes variables. Select the
Debug > Multiple Scans menu command to specify the number of scans to be executed.
248
Hardware Troubleshooting Guide and Software Debugging Tools Chapter 8
249
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
250
Open Loop Motion Control with the
S7-200
- Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) -- built into the S7-200 for speed, position or duty cycle
control
- Pulse Train Output (PTO) -- built into the S7-200 for speed and position control
- EM 253 Position Module -- an add on module for speed and position control
To simplify the use of position control in your application, STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides a Position
Control wizard that allows you to completely configure the PWM, PTO or Position module in
minutes. The wizard generates position instructions that you can use to provide dynamic control of
speed and position in your application. For the Position module STEP 7--Micro/WIN also provides
a control panel that allows you to control, monitor and test your motion operations.
In This Chapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Using the PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Basic Information for Open Loop Position Control Using Steppers or Servos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Instructions Created by the Position Control Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Error Codes for the PTO Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Features of the Position Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Configuring the Position Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Instructions Created by the Position Control Wizard for the Position Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Sample Programs for the Position Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Monitoring the Position Module with the EM 253 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Error Codes for the Position Module and the Position Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Understanding the RP Seek Modes Supported by the Position Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
251
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Overview
The S7-200 provides three methods of open loop motion control:
- Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) -- built into the S7-200 for speed, position or duty cycle
control
- Pulse Train Output (PTO) -- built into the S7-200 for speed and position control
- EM 253 Position Module -- an add on module for speed and position control
The S7-200 provides two digital outputs (Q0.0 and Q0.1) that can be configured using the Position
Control Wizard for use as either PWM or a PTO outputs. The Position Control Wizard can also be
used to configure the EM 253 Position Module.
Position
Control
When an output is configured for PWM operation, the cycle time of the output is fixed and the
pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse is controlled by your program. The variations in pulse width
can be used to control the speed or position in your application.
When an output is configured for PTO operation, a 50% duty cycle pulse train is generated for
open loop control of the speed and position for either stepper motors or servo motors. The built in
PTO function only provides the pulse train output. Direction and limit controls must be supplied by
your application program using I/O built into the PLC or provided by expansion modules.
The EM 253 Position Module provides a single pulse train output with integrated direction control,
disable and clear outputs. It also includes dedicated inputs which allow the module to be
configured for several modes of operation including automatic reference point seek. The module
provides a unified solution for open loop control of the speed and position for either stepper
motors or servo motors.
To simplify the use of position control in your application, STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides a Position
Control wizard that allows you to completely configure the PWM, PTO or Position module in
minutes. The wizard generates position instructions that you can use to provide dynamic control of
speed and position in your application. For the Position module STEP 7--Micro/WIN also provides
a control panel that allows you to control, monitor and test your motion operations.
252
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
253
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
PWMx_RUN Instruction
The PWMx_RUN instruction allows you to control the duty
cycle of the output by varying the pulse width from 0 to the
pulse width of the cycle time.
The Cycle input is a word value that defines the cycle time
for the PWM output. The allowed range is from 2 to 65535
units of the time base (microseconds or milliseconds) that
was specified within the wizard.
The Duty_Cycle input is a word value that defines the pulse
width for the PWM output. The allowed range of values is
from 0.0 to 65535 units of the time base (microseconds or
milliseconds) that was specified within the wizard.
The Error is a byte value returned by the PWMx_RUN
instruction that indicates the result of execution. See Table
for a description of the possible error codes.
254
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
Using the PTO or the module for open loop position control requires expertise in the field of motion
control. This chapter is not meant to educate the novice in this subject. However, it provides
fundamental information that will help as you use the STEP 7--Micro/WIN Position Control wizard
to configure the PTO or module for your application.
- MAX_SPEED: Enter the value for the optimum operating speed of your application within
the torque capability of your motor. The torque required to drive the load is determined by
friction, inertia, and the acceleration/deceleration times.
- The Position Control wizard calculates and displays the minimum speed that can be
controlled by the Position module based on the MAX_SPEED you specify.
- For the PTO output you must specify the desired start/stop speed. Since at least one cycle
at the start/stop speed is generated each time a move is executed, use a start/stop speed
whose period is less than the acceleration/deceleration time.
- SS_SPEED: Enter a value within Speed
the capability of your motor to drive
your load at low speeds. If the MAX_SPEED
SS_SPEED value is too low, the
motor and load could vibrate or
move in short jumps at the SS_SPEED
beginning and end of travel. If the
SS_SPEED value is too high, the Distance
motor could lose pulses on start
up and the load could overdrive
up,
Figure 9-3 Maximum Speed and Start/Stop Speed
the motor when attempting to stop.
255
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Motor data sheets have different ways of specifying the start/stop (or pull--in/pull--out ) speed for a
motor and given load. Typically, a useful SS_SPEED value is 5% to 15% of the MAX_SPEED
value. To help you select the correct speeds for your application, refer to the data sheet for your
motor. Figure 9-4 shows a typical motor torque/speed curve.
Motor
Torque Start/Stop speed versus torque
This curve moves towards lower
speed as the load inertia increases.
Motor Speed
Start/Stop speed
(SS_SPEED) for this load Maximum speed that the motor can drive the load
MAX_SPEED should not exceed this value.
Tip
Motor acceleration and deceleration times are determined by trial and error. You should start by
entering a large value. Optimize these settings for the application by gradually reducing the
times until the motor starts to stall.
256
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
The PTO supports a maximum of 100 profiles, while the module supports a maximum of 25
profiles.
257
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
258
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
1. Select the option to configure the onboard PTO/PWM operation for the S7-200 PLC.
2. Choose the output Q0.0 or Q0.1 that you wish to configure as a PTO output.
3. Select Linear Pulse Train Output (PTO) from the drop down dialog box.
4. If you wish to monitor the number of pulses generated by the PTO, select the use High
Speed Counter by clicking the check box.
5. Enter the MAX_SPEED and the SS_SPEED in the designated edit boxes.
6. Enter the acceleration and deceleration times in the designated edit boxes.
7. In the motion profile definition screen, click the new profile button to enable defining the
profile. Choose the desired mode of operation.
For a relative position profile:
Fill in the target speed and the number of pulses. You may then click the plot step
button to see a graphical representation of the move.
If more than one step is needed, click the new step button and fill in the step
information as required.
For a single speed, continuous rotation:
Enter the single speed value in the edit box.
If you wish to terminate the single speed, continuous rotation move, click the Program
a Subroutine check box and and enter the number of pulses to move after the Stop
event.
8. Define as many profiles and steps as you need to perform the desired movement
9. Then select Finish to complete the wizard.
259
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
PTOx_CTRL Subroutine
The PTOx_CTRL subroutine (Control) enables and
initializes the PTO output for use with a stepper or servo
motor. Use this subroutine only once in your program and
ensure that it is executed every scan. Always use SM0.0 as
the input for the EN input.
The I_STOP (Immediate STOP) input is a Boolean input.
When this input is low, the PTO function operates normally.
When this input goes high, the PTO terminates the issuance
of pulses immediately.
The D_STOP (Decelerated STOP) input is a Boolean input.
When this input is low, the PTO function operates normally.
When this input goes high, the PTO generates a pulse train
that decelerates the motor to a stop.
The Done output is a Boolean output. When the Done bit is
set high, it indicates the subroutine has been executed by
the CPU.
When the Done bit is high, the Error byte reports normal completion with no error or with an error
code. See Table 9-7 for definitions of the error codes.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the module as the number of pulses if the
HSC was enabled in the wizard. Otherwise the current position is always 0.
260
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
PTOx_RUN Subroutine
The PTOx_RUN subroutine (Run Profile) commands the
PLC to execute the motion operation in a specific profile
stored in the configuration/profile table.
Turning on the EN bit enables the subroutine. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the subroutine has completed.
Turning on the START parameter initiates execution of the
profile. For each scan when the START parameter is on and
the PTO is not currently active, the instruction activates the
PTO. To ensure that only one command is sent, use an
edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The Profile parameter contains the number or the symbolic
name for the motion profile.
Turning on the Abort parameter commands the Position
module to stop the current profile and decelerate until the
motor comes to a stop.
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes
this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction.
See Table 9-7 for definitions of the error codes.
The C_Profile parameter contains the profile currently being executed by the Position module.
The C_Step parameter contains the step of the profile currently being executed.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the module as the number of pulses if the
HSC was enabled in the wizard. Otherwise the current position is always 0.
261
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
PTOx_MAN Subroutine
The PTOx_MAN subroutine (Manual Mode) puts the PTO
output in manual mode. This allows the motor to be started,
stopped and run at different speeds. While the PTOx_MAN
subroutine is enabled, no other PTO subroutine is allowed
to execute.
Enabling the RUN (Run/Stop) parameter commands the
PTO to accelerate to the specified speed (Speed
parameter). You can change the value for the Speed
parameter while the motor is running. Disabling the RUN
parameter commands the PTO to decelerate until the motor
comes to a stop.
The Speed parameter determines the speed when RUN is
enabled. The speed is a DINT value for pulses/second. You
can change this parameter while the motor is running.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction.
See Table 9-7 for definitions of the error codes.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the module as the number of pulses if the
HSC was enabled in the wizard. Otherwise the current position is always 0.
Tip
The PTO may not react to small changes in the Speed parameter, especially if the configured
acceleration or deceleration time is short and the difference between the configured maximum
speed and start/stop speed is large.
262
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
PTOx_LDPOS Instruction
The PTOx_LDPOS instruction (Load Position) changes the
current position value of the PTO pulse counter to a new
value. You can also use this instruction to establish a new
zero position for any move command.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter loads a new position into
the PTO pulse counter. For each scan when the START
parameter is on and the PTO is not currently busy, the
instruction loads a new position into the PTO pulse counter.
To ensure that only one command is sent, use an edge
detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The New_Pos parameter provides the new value to replace
the current position value that is reported. The position
value is expressed as a number of pulses.
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction. See Table 9-7 for definitions of the error
codes.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the module as the number of pulses if the
HSC was enabled in the wizard. Otherwise the current position is always 0.
263
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
PTOx_ADV Subroutine
The PTOx_ADV subroutine stops the current continuous
motion profile and advances the number of pulses specified
in the wizard profile definition. This subroutine is created if
you have specified at least one single speed continuous
rotation with the PTOx_ADV option enabled in the Position
Control Wizard.
264
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
- Provides high-speed control, with a range from 20 pulses per second up to 200,000 pulses
per second
- Supports both jerk (S curve) or linear
acceleration and deceleration
- Provides a configurable measuring system
that allows you to enter data either as
engineering units (such as inches or
centimeters) or as a number of pulses
- Provides configurable backlash compensation
- Supports absolute, relative, and manual
methods of position control
- Provides continuous operation
- Provides up to 25 motion profiles, with up to 4
speed changes per profile
- Provides four different reference-point seek
modes, with a choice of the starting seek
direction and the final approach direction for
each sequence
- Provides removable field wiring connectors for
easy installation and removal Figure 9-9 EM 253 Position Module
You use STEP 7--Micro/WIN to create all of the configuration and profile information used by the
Position module. This information is downloaded to the S7-200 with your program blocks.
Because all the information required for position control is stored in the S7-200, you can replace a
Position module without having to reprogram or reconfigure the module.
The S7-200 reserves 8 bits of the process image output register (Q memory) for the interface to
the Position module. Your application program in the S7-200 uses these bits to control the
operation of the Position module. These 8 output bits are not connected to any of the physical
field outputs of the Position module.
The Position module provides five digital inputs and four digital outputs that provide the interface
to your motion application. See Table 9-8. These inputs and outputs are local to the Position
module. Appendix A provides the detailed specifications for the Position module and also includes
wiring diagrams for connecting the Position module to some of the more common motor
driver/amplifier units.
265
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
1. Configure the Position module. STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides a Position Control wizard for
creating the configuration/profile table and the position instructions. See Configuring the
Position Module on page 270 for information about configuring the Position module.
2. Test the operation of the Position Module. STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides an EM 253 control
panel for testing the wiring of the inputs and outputs, the configuration of the Position
module, and the operation of the motion profiles. See page 290 for information about the
EM 253 control panel.
3. Create the program to be executed by the S7-200. The Position Control wizard
automatically creates the position instructions that you insert into your program. See
page 273 for information about the position instructions. Insert the following instructions into
your program:
-- To enable the Position module, insert a POSx_CTRL instruction. Use SM0.0 (Always
On) to ensure that this instruction is executed every scan.
-- To move the motor to a specific location, use a POSx_GOTO or a POSx_RUN
instruction. The POSx_GOTO instruction move to a location specified by the inputs
from your program. The POSx_RUN instruction executes the motion profiles you
configured with the Position Control wizard.
-- To use absolute coordinates for your motion, you must establish the zero position for
your application. Use the a POSx_RSEEK or a POSx_LDPOS instruction to establish
the zero position.
-- The other instructions that are created by the Position Control wizard provide
functionality for typical applications and are optional for your specific application.
4. Compile your program and download the system block, data block, and program block to
the S7-200.
Tip
Refer to Appendix A for information about connecting the Position module to several common
stepper motor controllers.
Tip
To match the default settings in the Position Control wizard, set the DIP switches on the stepper
motor controller to 10,000 pulses per revolution.
266
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
- STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides an EM253 Control Panel that allows you to modify the number
of units per revolution after the Position module has been configured.
- If you change the measurement system later, you must delete the entire configuration
including any instructions generated by the Position Control wizard. You must then enter
your selections consistent with the new measurement system.
267
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- Use the Input Active Levels tab to select the active level (High or Low). When the level is
set to High, a logic 1 is read when current is flowing in the input. When the level is set to
Low, a logic 1 is read when there is no current flow in the input. A logic 1 level is always
interpreted as meaning the condition is active. The LEDs are illuminated when current flows
in the input, regardless of activation level. (Default = active high)
- Use the Input Filter Times tab to select the filter time constant (0.20 ms to 12.80 ms) for the
STP, RPS, LMT+, and LMT-- inputs. Increasing the filter time constant eliminates more
noise, but it also slows down the response time to a signal state change. (Default = 6.4 ms)
- Use the Pulse and Directional Outputs tab to select the polarity of the outputs and to select
the direction control method. See Figures 9-11 and 9-12 to see the effects of polarity and
direction control method selections.
P0 P0
P1 P1 ² 0.5 Ns
P0 P0
P1 P1 ² 0.5 Ns
Warning
Control devices can fail in unsafe conditions, and can result in unpredictable operation of
controlled equipment. Such unpredictable operations could result in death or serious personal
injury, and/or equipment failure.
The limit and stop functions in the Position Module are electronic logic implementations that do
not provide the level of protection provided by electromechanical controls. Consider using an
emergency stop function, electromechanical overrides, or redundant safeguards that are
independent of the Position module and the S7-200 CPU.
268
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
- JOG_SPEED: The JOG_SPEED (Jog speed for the motor) is the maximum speed that can
be obtained while the JOG command remains active.
- JOG_INCREMENT: Distance that the tool is moved by a momentary JOG command.
Figure 9-13 shows the operation of the Jog command. When the Position module receives a Jog
command, it starts a timer. If the Jog command is terminated before 0.5 seconds has elapsed, the
Position module moves the tool the amount specified in the JOG_INCREMENT at the speed
defined by SS_SPEED. If the Jog command is still active when the 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the
Position module accelerates to the JOG_SPEED. Motion continues until the Jog command is
terminated. The Position module then performs a decelerated stop. You can enable the Jog
command either from the EM 253 control panel or with a position instruction.
Speed
MAX_SPEED
JOG command terminated
JOG_SPEED
SS_SPEED
Distance
Jerk time compensation is also known as ”S curve profiling.” This compensation is applied equally
to the beginning and ending portions of both the acceleration and deceleration curve. Jerk
compensation is not applied to the initial and final step between zero speed and SS_SPEED.
269
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
A good first value for JERK_TIME is 40% of ACCEL_TIME.
270
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
- The Position Control wizard provides advanced reference point options that allow you to
specify an RP offset (RP_OFFSET), which is the distance from the RP to the zero position.
See Figure 9-15.
RP_OFFSET: Distance from the Work
RP to the zero position of the Zone
physical measuring system.
Default = 0
Backlash compensation: RP Zero Position
Distance that the motor must move RP_OFFSET
to eliminate the slack (backlash) in
the system
y on a direction change.
g
B kl h compensation
Backlash ti isi always
l Figure 9-15 Relationship Between RP and Zero Position
a positive value. Default = 0
Choose a Reference Point search sequence.
- The Position module provides a reference point switch (RPS) input that is used when
seeking the RP. The RP is identified by a method of locating an exact position with respect
to the RPS. The RP can be centered in the RPS Active zone, the RP can be located on the
edge of the RPS Active zone, or the RP can be located a specified number of zero pulse
(ZP) input transitions from the edge of the RPS Active zone.
You can configure the sequence that the Position module uses to search for the reference
point. Figure 9-16 shows a simplified diagram of the default RP search sequence. You can
select the following options for the RP search sequence:
RP Seek mode 0: Does not perform a RP seek sequence
RP Seek mode 1: The RP is where the RPS input goes active on the approach from the
work zone side. (Default)
RP Seek mode 2: The RP is RP Seek Mode 1
RP Seek Direction
centered within the active region of LMT-- RPS
the RPS input. RP Approach Direction
Active Active
RP Seek mode 3: The RP is Work Zone
located outside the active region of
the RPS input. RP_Z_CNT
specifies how many ZP (Zero
Pulse) input counts should be
received after the RPS becomes
inactive.
RP Seek mode 4: The RP is
generally within the active region
of the RPS input. RP_Z_CNT
specifies how many ZP (Zero
Pulse) input counts should be Figure 9-16 Default RP Search Sequence (Simplified)
received after the RPS becomes
active.
Tip
The RPS Active region (which is the distance that the RPS input remains active) must be
greater than the distance required to decelerate from the RP_FAST speed to the RP_SLOW
speed. If the distance is too short, the Position module generates an error.
271
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Command byte
Next enter the Q byte address for the command byte. The command byte is the address of the 8
digital outputs reserved in the process image register for the interface to the Position Module. See
Figure 4-10 in Chapter 4 for a description of the I/O numbering.
- Inserts the module configuration and profile table into the data block for your S7-200
program
- Creates a global symbol table for the motion parameters
- Adds the motion instruction subroutines into the project program block for you to use in your
application
You can run the Position Control wizard again in order to modify any configuration or profile
information.
Tip
Because the Position Control wizard makes changes to the program block, the data block and
the system block, be sure to download all three blocks to the S7-200 CPU. Otherwise, the
Position module might not have all the program components that it needs for proper operation.
272
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
Tip
The position instructions increase the amount of memory required for your program by up to
1700 bytes. You can delete unused position instructions to reduce the amount of memory
required. To restore a deleted position instruction, simply run the Position Control wizard again.
You can execute the POSx_RUN and POSx_GOTO from an interrupt routine. However, it is very
important that you do not attempt to start an instruction in an interrupt routine if the module is busy
processing another command. If you start an instruction in an interrupt routine, then you can use
the outputs of the POSx_CTRL instruction to monitor when the Position module has completed
the movement.
The Position Control wizard automatically configures the values for the speed parameters (Speed
and C_Speed) and the position parameters (Pos or C_Pos) according to the measurement
system that you selected. For pulses, these parameters are DINT values. For engineering units,
the parameters are REAL values for the type of unit that you selected. For example: selecting
centimeters (cm) stores the position parameters as REAL values in centimeters and stores the
speed parameters as REAL values in centimeters per second (cm/sec).
The following position instructions are required for specific position control tasks:
- Insert the POSx_CTRL instruction in your program and use the SM0.0 contact to execute it
every scan.
- To specify motion to an absolute position, you must first use either an POSx_RSEEK or a
POSx_LDPOS instruction to establish the zero position.
- To move to a specific location, based on inputs from your program, use the POSx_GOTO
instruction.
- To run the motion profiles you configured with the Position Control wizard, use the
POSx_RUN instruction.
The other position instructions are optional.
273
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
POSx_CTRL Instruction
The POSx_CTRL instruction (Control) enables and
initializes the Position module by automatically commanding
the Position module to load the configuration/profile table
each time the S7-200 changes to RUN mode.
Use this instruction only once in your project, and ensure
that your program calls this instruction every scan. Use
SM0.0 (Always On) as the input for the EN parameter.
The MOD_EN parameter must be on to enable the other
position instructions to send commands to the Position
module. If the MOD_EN parameter turns off, then the
Position module aborts any command that is in progress.
The output parameters of the POSx_CTRL instruction
provide the current status of the Position module.
The Done parameter turns on when the Position module
completes any instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction.
See Table 9-20 for definitions of the error codes.
The C_Pos parameter is the current position of the module. Based of the units of measurement,
the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of engineering units (REAL).
The C_Speed parameter provides the current speed of the module. If you configured the
measurement system for the Position module for pulses, C_Speed is a DINT value containing the
number of pulses/second. If you configured the measurement system for engineering units,
C_Speed is a REAL value containing the selected engineering units/second (REAL).
Tip
The Position module reads the configuration/profile table only at power-up or when commanded
to load the configuration.
H If you use the Position Control wizard to modify the configuration, then the POSx_CTRL
instruction automatically commands the Position module to load the configuration/profile
table every time the S7-200 CPU changes to RUN mode.
H If you use the EM 253 Control Panel to modify the configuration, clicking the Update
Configuration button commands the Position module to load the new configuration/profile
table.
H If you use another method to modify the configuration, then you must also issue a Reload
the Configuration command to the Position module to load the configuration/profile table.
Otherwise, the Position module continues to use the old configuration/profile table.
274
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
POSx_MAN Instruction
The POSx_MAN instruction (Manual Mode) puts the
Position module into manual mode. This allows the motor to
be run at different speeds or to be jogged in a positive or
negative direction. While the POSx_MAN instruction is
enabled, only the POSx_CTRL and POSx_DIS instructions
are allowed.
You can enable only one of the RUN, JOG_P, or JOG_N
inputs at a time.
Enabling the RUN (Run/Stop) parameter commands to the
Position module to accelerate to the specified speed
(Speed parameter) and direction (Dir parameter). You can
change the value for the Speed parameter while the motor
is running, but the Dir parameter must remain constant.
Disabling the RUN parameter commands the Position
module to decelerate until the motor comes to a stop.
Enabling the JOG_P (Jog Positive Rotation) or the JOG_N
(Jog Negative Rotation) parameter commands the Position
module to jog in either a positive or negative direction. If the
JOG_P or JOG_N parameter remains enabled for less than
0.5 seconds, the Position module issues pulses to travel the
distance specified in JOG_INCREMENT. If the JOG_P or
JOG_N parameter remains enabled for 0.5 seconds or
longer, the motion module begins to accelerate to the
specified JOG_SPEED.
The Speed parameter determines the speed when RUN is enabled. If you configured the
measuring system of the Position module for pulses, the speed is a DINT value for pulses/second.
If you configured the measuring system of the Position module for engineering units, the speed is
a REAL value for units/second. You can change this parameter while the motor is running.
Tip
The Position module may not react to small changes in the Speed parameter, especially if the
configured acceleration or deceleration time is short and the difference between the configured
maximum speed and start/stop speed is large.
The Dir parameter determines the direction to move when RUN is enabled. You cannot change
this value when the RUN parameter is enabled.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction. See Table 9-20 for definitions of the
error codes.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the module. Based of the units of
measurement selected, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of
engineering units (REAL).
The C_Speed parameter contains the current speed of the module. Based of the units of
measurement selected, the value is either the number of pulses/second (DINT) or the engineering
units/second (REAL).
The C_Dir parameter indicates the current direction of the motor.
Table 9-10 Parameters for the POSx_MAN Instruction
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands
RUN, JOG_P, JOG_N BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow
Speed DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Dir, C_Dir BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Error BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
C_Pos, C_Speed DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
275
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
POSx_GOTO Instruction
The POSx_GOTO instruction commands the Position
Module to go to a desired location.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the DONE bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter sends a GOTO command
to the Position module. For each scan when the START
parameter is on and the Position module is not currently
busy, the instruction sends a GOTO command to the
Position module. To ensure that only one GOTO command
is sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START
parameter on.
The Pos parameter contains a value that signifies either the
location to move (for an absolute move) or the distance to
move (for a relative move). Based of the units of
measurement selected, the value is either a number of
pulses (DINT) or the engineering units (REAL).
The Speed parameter determines the maximum speed for
this movement. Based of the units of measurement, the
value is either a number of pulses/second (DINT) or the
engineering units/second (REAL).
The Mode parameter selects the type of move:
0 -- Absolute position
1 -- Relative position
2 -- Single--speed, continuous positive rotation
3 -- Single--speed, continuous negative rotation
The Done parameter turns on when the Position module completes this instruction.
Turning on the Abort parameter commands the Position module to stop the current profile and
decelerate until the motor comes to a stop.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction. See Table 9-20 for definitions of the
error codes.
The C_Pos parameter contains current position of the module. Based of the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of engineering units
(REAL).
The C_Speed parameter contains the current speed of the module. Based of the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses/second (DINT) or the engineering
units/second (REAL).
276
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
POSx_RUN Instruction
The POSx_RUN instruction (Run Profile) commands the
Position module to execute the motion operation in a
specific profile stored in the configuration/profile table.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter sends a RUN command
to the Position module. For each scan when the START
parameter is on and the Position module is not currently
busy, the instruction sends a RUN command to the Position
module. To ensure that only one command is sent, use an
edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The Profile parameter contains the number or the symbolic
name for the motion profile. You can also select the
advanced motion commands (118 to 127). For information
about the motion commands, see Table 9-26.
Turning on the Abort parameter commands the Position
module to stop the current profile and decelerate until the
motor comes to a stop.
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes
this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction.
See Table 9-20 for definitions of the error codes.
The C_Profile parameter contains the profile currently being executed by the Position module.
The C_Step parameter contains the step of the profile currently being executed.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the module. Based of the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of engineering units
(REAL).
The C_Speed parameter contains the current speed of the module. Based of the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses/second (DINT) or the engineering
units/second (REAL).
277
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
POSx_RSEEK Instruction
The POSx_RSEEK instruction (Seek Reference Point
Position) initiates a reference point seek operation, using
the search method in the configuration/profile table. When
the Position module locates the reference point and motion
has stopped, the Position module loads the RP_OFFSET
parameter value into the current position and generates a
50-millisecond pulse on the CLR output.
The default value for RP_OFFSET is 0. You can use the
Position Control wizard, the EM253 Control Panel, or the
POSx_LDOFF (Load Offset) instruction to change the
RP_OFFSET value.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter sends a RSEEK
command to the Position module. For each scan when the
START parameter is on and the Position module is not
currently busy, the instruction sends a RSEEK command to
the Position module. To ensure that only one command is
sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START
parameter on.
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction. See Table 9-20 for definitions of the
error codes.
278
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
POSx_LDOFF Instruction
The POSx_LDOFF instruction (Load Reference Point
Offset) establishes a new zero position that is at a different
location from the reference point position.
Before executing this instruction, you must first determine
the position of the reference point. You must also move the
machine to the starting position. When the instruction sends
the LDOFF command, the Position module computes the
offset between the starting position (the current position)
and the reference point position. The Position module then
stores the computed offset to the RP_OFFSET parameter
and sets the current position to 0. This establishes the
starting position as the zero position.
In the event that the motor loses track of its position (such
as on loss of power or if the motor is repositioned
manually), you can use the POSx_RSEEK instruction to
re-establish the zero position automatically.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter sends a LDOFF command to the Position module. For each
scan when the START parameter is on and the Position module is not currently busy, the
instruction sends a LDOFF command to the Position module. To ensure that only one command is
sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction. See Table 9-20 on for definitions of the
error codes.
279
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
POSx_LDPOS Instruction
The POSx_LDPOS instruction (Load Position) changes the
current position value in the Position module to a new
value. You can also use this instruction to establish a new
zero position for any absolute move command.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter sends a LDPOS
command to the Position module. For each scan when the
START parameter is on and the Position module is not
currently busy, the instruction sends a LDPOS command to
the Position module. To ensure that only one command is
sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START
parameter on.
The New_Pos parameter provides the new value to replace
the current position value that the Position module reports
and uses for absolute moves. Based of the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT)
or the engineering units (REAL).
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes
this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction. See Table 9-20 for definitions of the
error codes.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the module. Based of the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of engineering units
(REAL).
280
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
POSx_SRATE Instruction
The POSx_SRATE instruction (Set Rate) commands the
Position module to change the acceleration, deceleration,
and jerk times.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter copies the new time
values to the configuration/profile table and sends a SRATE
command to the Position module. For each scan when the
START parameter is on and the Position module is not
currently busy, the instruction sends a SRATE command to
the Position module. To ensure that only one command is
sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START
parameter on.
The ACCEL_Time, DECEL_Time, and JERK_Time
parameters determine the new acceleration time,
deceleration time, and jerk time in milliseconds (ms).
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes
this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction.
See Table 9-20 for definitions of the error codes.
281
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
POSx_DIS Instruction
The POSx_DIS instruction turns the DIS output of the
Position module on or off. This allows you to use the DIS
output for disabling or enabling a motor controller. If you use
the DIS output on the Position module, then this instruction
can be called every scan or only when you need to change
the value of the DIS output.
When the EN bit turns on to enable the instruction, the
DIS_ON parameter controls the DIS output of the Position
module. For more information about the DIS output, see
Table 9-8 or refer to the specifications for the Position
module in Appendix A.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction.
See Table 9-20 for definitions of the error codes.
282
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
POSx_CLR Instruction
The POSx_CLR instruction (Pulse the CLR Output)
commands the Position module to generate a 50-ms pulse
on the CLR output.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter sends a CLR command to
the Position module. For each scan when the START
parameter is on and the Position module is not currently
busy, the instruction sends a CLR command to the Position
module. To ensure that only one command is sent, use an
edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes
this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction.
See Table 9-20 for definitions of the error codes.
283
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
POSx_CFG Instruction
The POSx_CFG instruction (Reload Configuration)
commands the Position module to read the configuration
block from the location specified by the configuration/profile
table pointer. The Position module then compares the new
configuration with the existing configuration and performs
any required setup changes or recalculations.
Turning on the EN bit enables the instruction. Ensure that
the EN bit stays on until the Done bit signals that the
execution of the instruction has completed.
Turning on the START parameter sends a CFG command to
the Position module. For each scan when the START
parameter is on and the Position module is not currently
busy, the instruction sends a CFG command to the Position
module. To ensure that only one command is sent, use an
edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The Done parameter turns on when the module completes
this instruction.
The Error parameter contains the result of this instruction. See Table 9-20 for definitions of the
error codes.
284
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
285
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
286
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
Sample Program 2: Program with POSx_CTRL, POSx_RUN, POSx_SEEK, and POSx_MAN, continued
Network 4 //Emergency Stop
//Disable the module and auto mode
LD I0.1
R M0.0, 1
R S0.1, 9
R Q0.3, 3
Network 6
LSCR S0.1
Network 9
SCRE
Network 10
LSCR S0.2
287
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Sample Program 2: Program with POSx_CTRL, POSx_RUN, POSx_SEEK, and POSx_MAN, continued
Network 11 //Use profile 1 to move into position.
LD S0.2
= L60.0
LD S0.2
= L63.7
LD L60.0
CALL POS0_RUN, L63.7, VB228, I0.1,
M1.2, VB940, VB941, VB942,
VD944, VD948
Network 12 //When positioned, turn
//on the cutter and go to
//the next step.
LD M1.2
LPS
AB= VB940, 0
S Q0.4, 1
R T33, 1
SCRT S0.3
LPP
AB<> VB940, 0
SCRT S1.0
Network 13
SCRE
Network 15
LD S0.3
TON T33, +200
288
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
Sample Program 2: Program with POSx_CTRL, POSx_RUN, POSx_SEEK, and POSx_MAN, continued
Network 16 //Unless STOP is on, restart
//when the cut is finished.
LD T33
LPS
R Q0.3, 1
R Q0.4, 1
AN I0.2
SCRT S0.1
LPP
A I0.2
R M0.0, 4
Network 17
SCRE
Network 18
LSCR S1.0
Network 22
SCRE
289
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Use the EM 253 Control Panel to verify that the Position module is wired correctly, to adjust the
configuration data, and to test each movement profile.
- Seek to a Reference Point. This command finds the reference point by using the configured
search mode.
- Load Reference Point Offset. After you use the manual controls to jog the tool to the new
zero position, you then load the Reference Point Offset.
- Reload Current Position. This command updates the current position value and establishes
a new zero position.
- Activate the DIS output and Deactivate the DIS output. These commands turn the DIS
output of the Position module on and off.
- Pulse the CLR output. This command generates a 50 ms pulse on the CLR output of the
Position module.
- Teach a Motion Profile. This command allows you to save the target position and speed for
a motion profile and step as you manually position the tool. The control panel displays the
status of the profile which is being executed by the Position module.
- Load Module Configuration. This command loads a new configuration by commanding the
Position module to read the configuration block from the V memory of the S7-200.
290
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
- Move to an Absolute Position. This command allows you to move to a specified position at
a target speed. Before using this command, you must have already established the zero
position.
- Move by a Relative Amount. This command allows you to move a specified distance from
the current position at a target speed. You can enter a positive or negative distance.
- Reset the Command Interface. This command clears the command byte for the Position
module and sets the Done bit. Use this command if the Position module appears to not be
responding to commands.
291
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
292
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
293
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Advanced Topics
Understanding the Configuration/Profile Table
The Position Control wizard has been developed to make motion applications easy by
automatically generating the configuration and profile information based upon the answers you
give about your position control system. Configuration/profile table information is provided for
advanced users who want to create their own position control routines.
The configuration/profile table is located in the V memory area of the S7-200. As shown in
Table 9-22, the configuration settings are stored in the following types of information:
- The configuration block contains information used to set up the module in preparation for
executing motion commands.
- The interactive block supports direct setup of motion parameters by the user program.
- Each profile block describes a predefined move operation to be performed by the Position
module. You can configure up 25 profile blocks.
Tip
To create more than 25 motion profiles, you can exchange configuration/profile tables by
changing the value stored in the configuration/profile table pointer.
294
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
295
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
296
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
297
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 9-24 Special Memory Area Definition for the EM 253 Position Module
SM Address Description
SMB200 to Module name (16 ASCII characters). SMB200 is the first character: “EM253 Position”
SMB215
SMB216 to Software revision number (4 ASCII characters). SMB216 is the first character.
SMB219
SMW220 Error code for the module. See Table 9-21 for a description of the error codes.
SMB222 Input/output status. Reflects the MSB LSB
status of the inputs and outputs 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
of the module. DIS 0 0 STP LMT-- LMT+ RPS ZP
298
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
After an operation has completed, the module must see a transition to idle before a new command
is accepted. If an operation is aborted, then the module must complete any deceleration before a
new command is accepted. Any change in the Command_code value while a command is active
is ignored.
-- If the R bit is turned on when going to STOP: The Position module completes any
command that is in progress. If no command is in progress, the Position module
executes the command which is specified by the Command_code bits.
-- If the R bit is held in its last state: The Position module completes any motion in
progress.
- If the S7-200 detects a fatal error and turns off all discrete outputs: The Position module
decelerates any motion in progress to a stop.
The Position module implements a watchdog timer that turns the outputs off if communications
with the S7-200 are lost. If the output watchdog timer expires, the Position module decelerates
any motion in progress to a stop.
If a fatal error in the hardware or firmware of the module is detected, the Position module sets the
P0, P1, DIS and CLR outputs to the inactive state.
299
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Command 121 When this command is executed, the Position module sets the current position to
Reloads the Current Position the value found in the TARGET_POS field of the interactive block.
300
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
301
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Command 122 (Execute the motion specified in the interactive block ) does not use cache
memory to store the execution data, but always reads the interactive block from the
configuration/profile table in the S7-200 and calculates the execution data for the motion.
Reconfiguring the Position module deletes all of the execution data stored in the cache memory.
This example uses an S7-200 CPU 224 with a Position module located in slot 0. The Position module is
configured on power-up. CMD_STAT is a symbol for SMB234, CMD is a symbol for QB2, and NEW_CMD is a
symbol for the profile.
Network 3
SCRE
Network 5 //If the command is complete without error, go to the idle state.
LDB= CMD_STAT, 16#80
SCRT Idle_State
Network 6 //If the command is complete with an error, go to the error handling state.
LDB> CMD_STAT, 16#80
SCRT Error_State
Network 7
SCRE
302
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
- Figure 9-21 shows two of the options for RP seek mode 1. This mode locates the RP
where the RPS input goes active on the approach from the work zone side.
- Figure 9-22 shows two of the options for RP seek mode 2. This mode locates the RP in the
center within the active region of the RPS input.
- Figure 9-23 shows two of the options for RP seek mode 3. This mode locates the RP a
specified number of zero pulses (ZP) outside the active region of the RPS input.
- Figure 9-24 shows two of the options for RP seek mode 4. This mode locates the RP a
specified number of zero pulses (ZP) within the active region of the RPS input.
For each mode, there are four combinations of RP Seek direction and RP Approach direction.
(Only two of the combinations are shown.) These combinations determine the pattern for the RP
seek operation. For each of the combinations, there are also four different starting points:
The work zones for each diagram have been located so that moving from the reference point to
the work zone requires movement in the same direction as the RP Approach Direction. By
selecting the location of the work zone in this way, all the backlash of the mechanical gearing
system is removed for the first move to the work zone after a reference point seek.
Positive motion
Negative motion
Positive motion
Negative motion
303
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Positive motion
Negative motion
Positive motion
Negative motion
Negative motion
Negative motion
304
Open Loop Motion Control with the S7-200 Chapter 9
Negative motion
Number of
Positive motion
ZP pulses
Negative motion
305
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Backlash is eliminated
RP Seek Direction: Negative
RP Approach Direction: Negative LMT-- RPS
Active RP Active
Work Zone
Positive motion
Negative motion
Positive motion
Negative motion
Figure 9-25 Placement of the Work Zone with and without the Elimination of Backlash
306
Creating a Program for the
Modem Module
The EM 241 Modem module allows you to connect your S7-200 directly to an analog telephone
line, and supports communications between your S7-200 and STEP 7--Micro/WIN. The Modem
module also supports the Modbus slave RTU protocol. Communications between the Modem
module and the S7-200 are made over the Expansion I/O bus.
STEP 7--Micro/WIN provides a Modem Expansion wizard to help set up a remote modem or a
Modem module for connecting a local S7-200 to a remote device.
In This Chapter
Features of the Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Using the Modem Expansion Wizard to Configure the Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Overview of Modem Instructions and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Instructions for the Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Sample Program for the Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
S7-200 CPUs that Support Intelligent Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Special Memory Location for the Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Messaging Telephone Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Text Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
CPU Data Transfer Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
307
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
308
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
Follow these steps to use the Modem module with STEP 7--Micro/WIN:
1. Remove the power from the S7-200 CPU and attach the Modem module to the I/O
expansion bus. Do not attach any I/O modules while the S7-200 CPU is powered up.
2. Connect the telephone line to the Modem module. Use an adapter if necessary.
3. Connect 24 volts DC to the Modem module terminal blocks.
4. Connect the Modem module terminal block ground connection to the system ground.
5. Set the country code switches.
6. Power up the S7-200 CPU and the Modem module.
7. Configure STEP 7--Micro/WIN to communicate to a 10-bit modem.
Tip
If the Modem module is configured to respond as a Modbus RTU slave, STEP 7--Micro/WIN is
not able to communicate to the Modem module over the telephone line.
The Modem module supports the Modbus functions shown in Table 10-2.
Modbus functions 4 and 16 allow reading or Table 10-2 Modbus Functions Supported by Modem
writing a maximum of 125 holding registers Module
(250 bytes of V memory) in one request. Function Description
Functions 5 and 15 write to the output Function 01 Read coil (output) status
image register of the CPU. These values
Function 02 Read input status
can be overwritten by user program.
Function 03 Read holding registers
Modbus addresses are normally written as Function 04 Read input (analog input) registers
5 or 6 character values containing the data Function 05 Write single coil (output)
type and the offset. The first one or two
Function 06 Preset single register
characters determine the data type, and the
last four characters select the proper value Function 15 Write multiple coils (outputs)
within the data type. The Modbus master Function 16 Preset multiple registers
device maps the addresses to the correct
Modbus functions.
309
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 10-3 shows the Modbus addresses Table 10-3 Mapping Modbus Addresses to the S7-200
supported by the Modem module, and the CPU
mapping of Modbus addresses to the Modbus Address S7-200 CPU Address
S7-200 CPU addresses. 000001 Q0.0
000002 Q0.1
Use the Modem Expansion wizard to create 000003 Q0.2
a configuration block in for the Modem ... ...
module to support Modbus RTU protocol. 000127 Q15.6
The Modem module configuration block 000128 Q15.7
must be downloaded to the CPU data block
010001 I0.0
before you can use the Modbus protocol. 010002 I0.1
010003 I0.2
... ...
010127 I15.6
010128 I15.7
030001 AIW0
030002 AIW2
030003 AIW4
... ...
030032 AIW62
040001 VW0
040002 VW2
040003 VW4
... ...
04xxxx VW 2*(xxxx--1)
Numeric Paging
Numeric paging uses the tones of a touch tone telephone to send numeric values to a pager. The
Modem module dials the requested paging service, waits for the voice message to complete, and
then sends the tones corresponding to the digits in the paging message. The digits 0 through 9,
asterisk (*), A, B, C and D are allowed in the paging message. The actual characters displayed by
a pager for the asterisk and A, B, C, and D characters are not standardized, and are determined
by the pager and the paging service provider.
Text Paging
Text paging allows alphanumeric messages to be transmitted to a paging service provider, and
from there to a pager. Text paging providers normally have a modem line that accepts text pages.
The Modem module uses Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP) to transmit the text messages
to the service provider. Many providers of text paging use this protocol to accept messages.
310
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
The telephone number of the messaging provider, the message, and the variables embedded
within the message are read from the CPU over multiple CPU scan cycles. Your program should
not modify telephone numbers or messages while a message is being sent. The variables
embedded within a message can continue to be updated during the sending of a message. If a
message contains multiple variables, those variables are read over multiple scan cycles of the
CPU. If you want all of the embedded variables within a message to be consistent, the you must
not change any of the embedded variables after you send a message.
Data Transfers
The Modem module allows your program to transfer data to another CPU or to a Modbus device
over the telephone line. The data transfers and telephone numbers are configured with the
Modem Expansion wizard, and are stored in the Modem module configuration block. The
configuration block is then downloaded to the data block in the S7-200 CPU. The Modem
Expansion wizard also creates program code to allow your program to initiate the data transfers.
A data transfer can be either a request to read data from a remote device, or a request to write
data to a remote device. A data transfer can read or write between 1 and 100 words of data. Data
transfers move data to or from the V memory of the attached CPU.
The Modem Expansion wizard allows you to create a data transfer consisting of a single read from
the remote device, a single write to the remote device, or both a read from and a write to the
remote device.
Data transfers use the configured protocol of the Modem module. If the Modem module is
configured to support PPI protocol (where it responds to STEP 7--Micro/WIN), the Modem module
uses the PPI protocol to transfer data. If the Modem module is configured to support the Modbus
RTU protocol, data transfers are transmitted using the Modbus protocol.
The telephone number of the remote device, the data transfer request and the data being
transferred are read from the CPU over multiple CPU scan cycles. Your program should not
modify telephone numbers or messages while a message is being sent. Also, you should not
modify the data being transferred while a message is being sent.
If the remote device is another Modem module, the password function can be used by the data
transfers by entering the password of the remote Modem module in the telephone number
configuration. The callback function cannot be used with data transfers.
Password Protection
The password security of the Modem module is optional and is enabled with the Modem
Expansion wizard. The password used by the Modem module is not the same as the CPU
password. The Modem module password is a separate 8-character password that the caller must
supply to the Modem module before being allowed access to the attached CPU. The password is
stored in the V memory of the CPU as part of the Modem module configuration block. The Modem
module configuration block must be downloaded to the data block of the attached CPU.
If the CPU has the password security enabled in the System Data Block, the caller must supply
the CPU password to gain access to any password protected functions.
311
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Security Callback
The callback function of the Modem module is optional and is configured with the Modem
Expansion wizard. The callback function provides additional security for the attached CPU by
allowing access to the CPU only from predefined telephone numbers. When the callback function
is enabled, the Modem module answers any incoming calls, verifies the caller, and then
disconnects the line. If the caller is authorized, the Modem module then dials a predefined
telephone number for the caller, and allows access to the CPU.
The simplest form of callback is to a single predefined telephone number. If only one callback
number is stored in the Modem module configuration block, whenever the Modem module
answers an incoming call, it notifies the caller that callback is enabled, disconnects the caller, and
then dials the callback number specified in the configuration block.
The Modem module also supports callback for multiple predefined telephone numbers. In this
mode the caller is asked for a telephone number. If the supplied number matches one of the
predefined telephone numbers in the Modem module configuration block, the Modem module
disconnects the caller, and then calls back using the matching telephone number from the
configuration block. The user can configure up to 250 callback numbers.
Where there are multiple predefined callback numbers, the callback number supplied when
connecting to the Modem module must be an exact match of the number in the configuration
block of the Modem module except for the first two digits. For example, if the configured callback
is 91(123)4569999 because of a need to dial an outside line (9) and long distance (1), the number
supplied for the callback could be any of the following:
- 91(123)4569999
- 1(123)4569999
- (123)4569999
All of the above telephone number are considered to be a callback match. The Modem module
uses the callback telephone number from its configuration block when performing the callback, in
this example 91(123)4569999. When configuring multiple callback numbers, make sure that all
telephone numbers are unique excluding the first two digits. Only the numeric characters in a
telephone number are used when comparing callback numbers. Characters such as commas or
parenthesis are ignored when comparing callback numbers.
The callback to any telephone number is set up in the Modem Expansion wizard by selecting the
“Enable callbacks to any phone number” option during the callback configuration. If this option is
selected, the Modem module answers an incoming call and requests a callback telephone
number. After the telephone number is supplied by the caller, the Modem module disconnects and
dials that telephone number. This callback mode only provides a means to allow telephone
charges to be billed to the Modem module’s telephone connection and does not provide any
security for the S7-200 CPU. The Modem module password should be used for security if this
callback mode is used.
The Modem module password and callback functions can be enabled at the same time. The
Modem module requires a caller to supply the correct password before handling the callback.
312
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
The Modem module reads this configuration table from the CPU on startup and within five
seconds of any STOP-to-RUN transition of the CPU. The Modem module does not read a new
configuration table from the CPU as long the Modem module is online with STEP 7--Micro/WIN. If
a new configuration table is downloaded while the Modem module is online, the Modem module
reads the new configuration table when the online session is ended.
If the Modem module detects an error in the configuration table, the Module Good (MG) LED on
the front of the module flashes on and off. Check the PLC Information screen in
STEP 7--Micro/WIN, or read the value in SMW220 (for module slot 0) for information about the
configuration error. The Modem module configuration errors are listed in Table 10-4. If you use the
Modem Expansion wizard to create the Modem module configuration table, STEP 7--Micro/WIN
checks the data before creating the configuration table.
313
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Modem To use this wizard, the project must be compiled and set to Symbolic Addressing Mode. If you
Expansion have not already compiled your program, compile it now.
1. On first screen of the Modem Expansion wizard, select Configure an EM 241 Modem
module and click Next>.
2. The Modem Expansion wizard requires the Modem module’s position relative to the S7-200
CPU in order to generate the correct program code. Click the Read Modules button to
automatically read the positions of the intelligent modules attached to the CPU. Expansion
modules are numbered sequentially starting at zero. Double-click the Modem module that
you want to configure, or set the Module Position field to the position of the Modem module.
Click Next>.
For an S7-200 CPU with firmware prior to version 1.2, you must install the intelligent module
next to the CPU in order for the Modem Expansion wizard to configure the module.
3. The password protection screen allows you to enable password protection for the Modem
module and assign a 1 to 8 character password for the module. This password is
independent of the S7-200 CPU password. When the module is password-protected,
anyone who attempts to connect with the S7-200 CPU through the Modem module is
required to supply the correct password. Select password protection if desired, and enter a
password. Click Next>.
314
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
4. The Modem module supports two communications protocols: PPI protocol (to communicate
with STEP 7--Micro/WIN), and Modbus RTU protocol. Protocol selection is dependent on
the type of device that is being used as the remote communications partner. This setting
controls the communications protocol used when the Modem module answers a call and
also when the Modem module initiates a CPU data transfer. Select the appropriate protocol
and click Next>.
5. You can configure the module to send numeric and text messages to pagers, or Short
Message Service (SMS) messages to cellular telephones. Check the Enable messaging
checkbox and click the Configure Messaging... button to define messages and the
recipient’s telephone numbers.
6. When setting up a message to be sent to a pager or cellular phone, you must define the
message and the telephone number. Select the Messages tab on the Configure Messaging
screen and click the New Message button. Enter the text for the message and specify any
CPU data values to insert into the message. To insert a CPU data value into the message,
move the cursor to the position for the data and click the Insert Data... button. Specify the
address of the CPU data value (i.e. VW100), the display format (i.e. Signed Integer) and the
digits left and right of the decimal point. You can also specify if the decimal point should be
a comma or a period.
-- Numeric paging messages are limited to the digits 0 to 9, the letters A, B, C and D,
and the asterisk (*). The maximum allowed length of a numeric paging message
varies by service provider.
-- Text messages can be up to 119 characters in length and contain any alphanumeric
character.
-- Text messages can contain any number of embedded variables.
-- Embedded variables can be from V, M, SM, I, Q, S, T, C or AI memory in the attached
CPU.
-- Hexadecimal data is displayed with a leading ‘16#’. The number of characters in the
value is based on the size of the variable. For example, VW100 displays as 16#0123.
-- The number of digits left of the decimal must be large enough to display the expected
range of values, including the negative sign, if the data value is a signed integer or
floating point value.
-- If the data format is integer and the number of digits right of the decimal point is not
zero, the integer value is displayed as a scaled integer. For example, if VW100 =
1234 and there are 2 digits right of the decimal point, the data is displayed as ‘12.34’.
-- If the data value is greater than can be displayed in the specified field size, the
Modem module places the # character in all character positions of data value.
7. Telephone numbers are configured by selecting the Phone Numbers tab on the Configure
Messaging screen. Click the New Phone Number... button to add a new telephone number.
Once a telephone number has been configured it must be added to the project. Highlight
the telephone number in the Available Phone Numbers column and click the right arrow box
to add the telephone number to the current project. Once you have added the telephone
number to the current project, you can select the telephone number and add a symbolic
name for this number to use in your program.
The telephone number consists of several fields which vary based on the type of
messaging selected by the user.
-- The Messaging Protocol selection tells the Modem module which protocol to use
when sending the message to the message service provider. Numeric pagers
support only numeric protocol. Text paging services usually require TAP (Telelocator
Alphanumeric Protocol). SMS messaging providers are supported with either TAP or
UCP (Universal Computer Protocol). There are three different UCP services normally
used for SMS messaging. Most providers support command 1 or 51. Check with the
SMS provider to determine the protocol and commands required by that provider.
-- The Description field allows you to add a text description for the telephone number.
315
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
-- The Phone Number field is the telephone number of the messaging service provider.
For text messages this is the telephone number of the modem line the service
provider uses to accept text messages. For numeric paging this is the telephone
number of the pager itself. The Modem module allows the telephone number field to
be a maximum of 40 characters. The following characters are allowed in telephone
numbers that the Modem module uses to dial out:
0 to 9 allowed from a telephone keypad
A, B, C, D, *, # DTMF digits (tone dialing only)
, pause dialing for 2 seconds
! commands the modem to generate a hook flash
@ wait for 5 seconds of silence
W wait for a dial tone before continuing
( ) ignored (can be used to format the telephone number)
-- The Specific Pager ID or Cell Phone Number field is where you enter the pager
number or cellular telephone number of the message recipient. This number should
not contain any characters except the digits 0 through 9. A maximum of 20
characters is allowed.
-- The Password field is optional for TAP message. Some providers require a password
but normally this field should be left blank. The Modem module allows the password
to be up to 15 characters.
-- The Originating Phone Number field allows the Modem module to be identified in the
SMS message. This field is required by some service providers which use UCP
commands. Some service providers might require a minimum number of characters
in this field. The Modem module allows up to 15 characters.
-- The Modem Standard field is provided for use in cases where the Modem module
and the service provider modem cannot negotiate the modem standard. The default
is V.34 (33.6 kBaud).
-- The Data Format fields allow you to adjust the data bits and parity used by the
modem when transmitting a message to a service provider. TAP normally used 7
data bits and even parity, but some service providers use 8 data bits and no parity.
UCP always uses 8 data bits with no parity. Check with the service provider to
determine which settings to use.
8. You can configure the Modem module to transfer data to another S7-200 CPU (if PPI
protocol was selected) or to transfer data to a Modbus device (if Modbus protocol was
selected). Check the Enable CPU data transfers checkbox and click the Configure
CPU-to... button to define the data transfers and the telephone numbers of the remote
devices.
9. When setting up a CPU-to-CPU or a CPU-to-Modbus data transfer you must define the data
to transfer and the telephone number of the remote device. Select the Data Transfers tab
on the Configure Data Transfers screen and click the New Transfer button. A data transfer
consists of a data read from the remote device, a data write to the remote device, or both a
read from and a write to the remote device. If both a read and a write are selected, the read
is performed first and then the write.
Up to 100 words can be transferred in each read or write. Data transfers must be to or from
the V Memory in the local CPU. The wizard always describes the memory locations in the
remote device as if the remote device is an S7-200 CPU. If the remote device is a Modbus
device, the transfer is to or from holding registers in the Modbus device (address 04xxxx).
The equivalent Modbus address (xxxx) is determined as follows:
Modbus address = 1 + (V memory address / 2)
V memory address = (Modbus address -- 1) * 2
316
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
10. The Phone Numbers tab on the Configure CPU Data Transfers screen allows you to define
the telephone numbers for CPU-to-CPU or a CPU-to-Modbus data transfers. Click the New
Phone Number... button to add a new telephone number. Once a telephone number has
been configured it must be added to the project. Highlight the telephone number in the
Available Phone Numbers column and click the right arrow box to add the telephone
number to the current project. Once you have added the telephone number to the current
project, you can select the telephone number and add a symbolic name for this telephone
number to use in your program.
The Description and Phone Number fields are the same as described earlier for messaging.
The Password field is required if the remote device is a Modem module and password
protection has been enabled. The Password field in the local Modem module must be set to
the password of the remote Modem module. The local Modem module supplies this
password when it is requested by the remote Modem module.
11. Callback causes the Modem module to automatically disconnect and dial a predefined
telephone number after receiving an incoming call from a remote STEP 7--Micro/WIN.
Select the Enable callback checkbox and click the Configure Callback... button to configure
callback telephone numbers. Click Next>.
12. The Configure Callback... screen allows you enter the telephone numbers the Modem
module uses when it answers an incoming call. Check the ‘Enable callbacks to only
specified phone numbers’ if the callback numbers are to be predefined. If the Modem
module is to accept any callback number supplied by the incoming caller (to reverse the
connection charges), check the ‘Enable callbacks to any phone number’ selection.
If only specified callback telephone numbers are allowed, click the New Phone Number
button to add callback telephone numbers. The Callback Properties screen allows you to
enter the predefined callback telephone numbers and a description for the callback number.
The callback number entered here is the telephone number that the Modem module uses to
dial when performing the callback. This telephone number should include all digits required
to connect to an outside line, pause while waiting for an outside line, connect to long
distance, etc.
After entering a new callback telephone number, it must be added to the project. Highlight
the telephone number in the Available Callback Phone Numbers column and click the right
arrow box to add the telephone number to the current project.
13. You can set the number of dialing attempts that the Modem module makes when sending a
message or during a data transfer. The Modem module reports an error to the user program
only when all attempts to dial and send the message are unsuccessful.
Some telephone lines do not have a dial tone present when the telephone receiver is lifted.
Normally, the Modem module returns an error to the user program if a dial tone is not
present when the Modem module is commanded to send a message or perform a callback.
To allow dialing out on a line with no dial tone, check the box, Enable Dialing Without Dial
Tone Selection.
14. The Modem Expansion wizard creates a configuration block for the Modem module and
requires the user to enter the starting memory address where the Modem module
configuration data is stored. The Modem module configuration block is stored in V Memory
in the CPU. STEP 7--Micro/WIN writes the configuration block to the project Data Block. The
size of the configuration block varies based on the number of messages and telephone
numbers configured. You can select the V Memory address where you want the
configuration block stored, or click the Suggest Address button if you want the wizard to
suggest the address of an unused V Memory block of the correct size. Click Next>.
15. The final step in configuring the Modem module is to specify the Q memory address of the
command byte for the Modem module. You can determine the Q memory address by
counting the output bytes used by any modules with discrete outputs installed on the
S7-200 before the Modem module. Click Next>.
16. The Modem Expansion wizard now generates the project components for your selected
configuration (program block and data block) and makes that code available for use by your
program. The final wizard screen displays your requested configuration project
components. You must download the Modem module configuration block (Data Block) and
the Program Block to the S7-200 CPU.
317
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
1. Use the Modem Expansion wizard to create the Modem module configuration table.
2. Insert the MODx_CTRL instruction in your program and use the SM0.0 contact to execute it
every scan.
3. Insert a MODx_MSG instruction for each message you need to send.
4. Insert a MODx_XFR instruction for each data transfer.
318
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
MODx_XFR Instruction
The MODx_XFR (Data Transfer) instruction is used to
command the Modem module to read and write data to
another S7-200 CPU or a Modbus device. This instruction
requires 20 to 30 seconds from the time the START input is
triggered until the Done bit is set.
The EN bit must be on to enable a command to the module,
and should remain on until the Done bit is set, signaling
completion of the process. An XFR command is sent to the
Modem module on each scan when START input is on and
the module is not currently busy. The START input can be
pulsed on through an edge detection element, which only
allows one command to be sent.
Phone is the number of one of the data transfer telephone
numbers. You can use the symbolic name you assigned to
each data transfer telephone number when the number was
defined with the Modem Expansion wizard.
Data is the number of one of the defined data transfers. You
can use the symbolic name you assigned to the data
transfer when the request was defined using the Modem
Expansion wizard.
Done is a bit that comes on when the Modem module completes the data transfer.
Error is a byte that contains the result of the data transfer. Table 10-4 defines the possible error
conditions that could result from executing this instruction.
319
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
MODx_MSG Instruction
The MODx_MSG (Send Message) instruction is used to
send a paging or SMS message from Modem module. This
instruction requires 20 to 30 seconds from the time the
START input is triggered until the Done bit is set.
The EN bit must be on to enable a command to the module,
and should remain on until the Done bit is set, signaling
completion of the process. A MSG command is sent to the
Modem module on each scan when START input is on and
the module is not currently busy. The START input can be
pulsed on through an edge detection element, which only
allows one command to be sent.
Phone is the number of one of the message telephone
numbers. You can use the symbolic name you assigned to
each message telephone number the when the number
was defined with the Modem Expansion wizard.
Msg is the number of one of the defined messages. You
can use the symbolic name you assigned to the message
when the message was defined using the Modem
Expansion wizard.
Done is a bit that comes on when the Modem module completes the sending of the message to
the service provider.
Error is a byte that contains the result of this request to the module. Table 10-8 defines the
possible error conditions that could result from executing this instruction.
320
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
321
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table 10-8 Error Values Returned by MODx_MSG and MODx_XFR Instructions, continued
Error Description
UCP -- SMS message errors returned by service provider (continued)
38 Deferred delivery not allowed
39 New AC not valid
40 New legitimization code not allowed
41 Standard text not valid
42 Time period not valid
43 Message type not supported by system
44 Message too long
45 Requested standard text not valid
46 Message type not valid for pager type
47 Message not found in SMSC
48 Reserved
49 Reserved
50 Subscriber hang up
51 Fax group not supported
52 Fax message type not supported
Data transfer errors
53 Message timeout (no response from remote device)
54 Remote CPU busy with upload or download
55 Access error (memory out of range, illegal data type)
56 Communications error (unknown response)
57 Checksum or CRC error in response
58 Remote EM 241 set for callback (not allowed)
59 Remote EM 241 rejected the provided password
60 to 127 Reserved
Instruction use errors
128 Cannot process this request. Either the Modem module is busy with another request, or
there was no START pulse on this request.
129 Modem module error:
S The location of the Modem module or the Q memory address that was configured
with the Modem Expansion wizard does not match the actual location or memory
address
S Refer to SMB8 to SMB21 (I/O Module ID and Error Register)
322
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
Table10-11 shows the Special Memory data area allocated for the Modem module. This area is
defined as if this were the intelligent module located in Slot 0 of the I/O system.
323
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
F G H T R C 0 0
MSB LSB
7 6 5 0
D 0 ERROR
D -- Done bit;
0 -- operation in progress
1 -- operation complete
ERROR : Error Code Description, see Table 10-8
SMB227 Telephone number selector -- This byte specifies which messaging telephone number to use
when sending a message. Valid values are 1 through 250.
SMB228 Message selector -- This byte specifies which message to send. Valid values are 1 through
250.
SMB229 to Reserved
SMB244
SMB245 Offset to the first Q byte used as the command interface to this module. The offset is
supplied by the CPU for the convenience of the user and is not needed by the module.
SMD246 Pointer to the configuration table for the Modem module in V memory. A pointer value to an
area other than V memory is not accepted and the module continues to examine this
location, waiting for a non-zero pointer value.
324
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
Advanced Topics
Understanding the Configuration Table
The Modem Expansion wizard has been developed to make modem applications easy by
automatically generating the configuration table based upon the answers you give about your
system. Configuration table information is provided for advanced users who want to create their
own Modem module control routines and format their own messages.
The configuration table is located in the V memory area of the S7-200. In Table 10-12, the Byte
Offset column of the table is the byte offset from the location pointed to by the configuration area
pointer in SM memory. The configuration table information is divided into four sections.
PD CB PW MB BD 0 0 0
325
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The Modem module re-reads the configuration table when these events occur:
- Within five seconds of each STOP-to-RUN transition of the S7-200 CPU (unless the modem
is currently online)
- Every five seconds until a valid configuration is found (unless the modem is currently online)
- Every time the modem transitions from an online to an offline condition
326
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
The Messaging Telephone Number contains up to 6 fields separated by a forward slash (/)
character. Back-to-back slashes indicate an empty (null) field. Null fields are set to default values
in the Modem module.
The Telephone Number field is the telephone number that the Modem module dials when sending
a message. If the message being sent is a text or SMS message, this is the telephone number of
the service provider. If the message is a numeric page, this field is the pager telephone number. If
the message is a CPU data transfer, this is the telephone number of the remote device. The
maximum number of characters in this field is 40.
The ID is the pager number or cellular telephone number. This field should consist of the digits 0
to 9 only. If the protocol is a CPU data transfer, this field is used to supply the address of the
remote device. Up to 20 characters are allowed in this field.
The Password field is used to supply the a password for messages sent via TAP if a password is
required by the service provider. For messages sent via UCP this field is used as the originating
address or telephone number. If the message is a CPU data transfer to another Modem module,
this field can be used to supply the password of the remote Modem module. The password can be
up to 15 characters in length.
The Protocol field consists of one ASCII character which tells the Modem module how it should
format and transmit the message. The following values are allowed:
1 -- Bell 103
2 -- Bell 212
3 -- V.21
4 -- V.22
5 -- V.22 bit
6 -- V.23c
7 -- V.32
8 -- V.32 bit
9 -- V.34 (default)
The Format field is three ASCII characters which specify the number of data bits and parity to be
used when transmitting the message. This field does not apply if the protocol is set to numeric
paging. Only the following two settings are allowed:
327
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Format: <Text><Variable><Text><Variable>...
The Text field consists of ASCII characters.
The Variable field defines an embedded data value which the Modem module reads from the local
CPU, formats, and places in the message. The percent (%) character is used to mark the start
and the end of a variable field. The address and the left fields are separated with a colon. The
delimiter between the Left and Right fields can be either a period or a comma and is used as the
decimal point in the formatted variable. The syntax for the variable field is:
%Address:Left.Right Format%
The Address field specifies the address, data type and size of the embedded data value (i.e.
VD100, VW50, MB20 or T10). The following data types are allowed: I, Q, M, SM, V, T (word only),
C (word only), and AI (word only). Byte, word and double word sizes are allowed.
The Left field defines the number of digits to display left of the decimal point. This value should be
large enough to handle the expected range of the embedded variable including a minus sign if
needed. If Left is zero the value is displayed with a leading zero. The valid range for Left is 0 to 10.
The Right field defines the number of digits to display right of the decimal point. Zeros to the right
of the decimal point are always displayed. If Right is zero the number is displayed without a
decimal point. The valid range for Right is 0 to 10.
The Format field specifies the display format of the embedded value. The following characters are
allowed for the format field:
i -- signed integer
u -- unsigned integer
h -- hexadecimal
f -- floating point/real
Example: “Temperature = %VW100:3.1i% Pressure = %VD200:4.3f%”
328
Creating a Program for the Modem Module Chapter 10
If the operation is specified as a read, Count number of words are read from the remote device
starting at the Remote_address, and then written to V Memory in the local CPU starting at the
Local_address.
If the operation is specified as a write, Count number of words are read from the local CPU
starting at the Local_address, and then written to the remote device starting at Remote_address.
Format: <Operation>=<Count>,<Local_address>,<Remote_address>
The Operation field consists of one ASCII character and defines the type of transfer.
The Local_address field specifies the V Memory address in the local CPU for the data transfer
(i.e. VW100).
The Remote_address field specifies the address in the remote device for the data transfer (i.e.
VW500). This address is always specified as a V Memory address even if the data transfer is to a
Modbus device. If the remote device is a Modbus device, the conversion between V Memory
address and Modbus address is as follows:
329
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
330
Using the USS Protocol Library to
Control a MicroMaster Drive
STEP 7--Micro/WIN Instruction Libraries makes controlling MicroMaster drives easier by including
preconfigured subroutines and interrupt routines that are specifically designed for using the USS
protocol to communicate with the drive. With the USS instructions, you can control the physical
drive and the read/write drive parameters.
You find these instructions in the Libraries folder of the STEP 7--Micro/WIN instruction tree. When
you select a USS instruction, one or more associated subroutines (USS1 through USS7) are
added automatically.
Siemens Libraries are sold on a separate CD, STEP 7--Micro/WIN Add-On: Instruction Library,
with the order number 6ES7 830--2BC00--0YX0. After version 1.1 of the Siemens Library is
purchased and installed, any subsequent STEP 7--Micro/WIN V3.2x and V4.0 upgrade that you
install will also upgrade your libraries automatically at no additional cost (when library additions or
modifications are made).
In This Chapter
Requirements for Using the USS Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Calculating the Time Required for Communicating with the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Using the USS Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Instructions for the USS Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Sample Programs for the USS Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
USS Execution Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Connecting and Setting Up the MicroMaster Series 3 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Connecting and Setting Up the MicroMaster Series 4 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
331
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- Initializing the USS protocol dedicates Port 0 for the USS communications.
You use the USS_INIT instruction to select either USS or PPI for Port 0. (USS refers to the
USS protocol for SIMOTION MicroMaster drives.) After selecting to use the USS protocol
for communicating with drives, you cannot use Port 0 for any other purpose, including
communicating with STEP 7--Micro/WIN.
During the development of the program for an application using the USS protocol, you
should use a CPU 224XP, CPU 226, or EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module connected to a
PROFIBUS CP card in your computer. This second communications port allows
STEP 7--Micro/WIN to monitor the application while USS protocol is running.
- The USS instructions affect all of the SM locations that are associated with Freeport
communications on Port 0.
- The USS instructions use 14 subroutines and 3 interrupt routines.
- The USS instructions increase the amount of memory required for your program by up to
3600 bytes. Depending on the specific USS instructions used, the support routines for
these instructions can increase the overhead for the control program by at least 2300 bytes,
up to 3600 bytes.
- The variables for the USS instructions require a 400-byte block of V memory. The starting
address for this block is assigned by the user and is reserved for USS variables.
- Some of the USS instructions also require a 16-byte communications buffer. As a parameter
for the instruction, you provide a starting address in V memory for this buffer. It is
recommended that a unique buffer be assigned for each instance of USS instructions.
- When performing calculations, the USS instructions use accumulators AC0 to AC3. You can
also use the accumulators in your program; however, the values in the accumulators will be
changed by the USS instructions.
- The USS instructions cannot be used in an interrupt routine.
Tip
To change the operation of Port 0 back to PPI so that you can communicate with
STEP 7--Micro/WIN, use another USS_INIT instruction to reassign Port 0.
You can also set the mode switch on the S7-200 to STOP mode. This resets the parameters for
Port 0. Be aware that stopping the communications to the drives also stops the drives.
332
Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive Chapter 11
Some drives require longer delays when Table 11-1 Communications Times
using the parameter access instructions.
Time Between Polls of Active Drives
The amount of time required for a
Baud (with No Parameter Access Instructions
parameter access is dependent on the
Rate Active)
drive type and the parameter being
accessed. 1200 240 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
2400 130 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
After a USS_INIT instruction assigns Port 0
to use the USS Protocol, the S7-200 4800 75 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
regularly polls all active drives at the 9600 50 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
intervals shown in Table 11-1. You must set
19200 35 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
the time-out parameter of each drive to
allow for this task. 38400 30 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
57600 25 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
115200 25 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
Tip
Only one USS_RPM_x or USS_WPM_x instruction can be active at a time. The Done output of
each instruction should signal completion before user logic initiates a new instruction.
Use only one USS_CTRL instruction for each drive.
1. Insert the USS_INIT instruction in your program and execute the USS_INIT instruction for
one scan only. You can use the USS_INIT instruction either to initiate or to change the USS
communications parameters.
When you insert the USS_INIT instruction, several hidden subroutines and interrupt
routines are automatically added to your program.
2. Place only one USS_CTRL instruction in your program for each active drive.
You can add as many USS_RPM_x and USS_WPM_x instructions as required, but only
one of these can be active at a time.
3. Allocate the V memory for the library instructions
by right-clicking (to get the menu) on the Program
Block node in the instruction tree.
Select the Library Memory option to display the
Library Memory Allocation dialog box.
4
4. Configure
C fi th
the drive
d i parameters
t to
t match
t h the
th Figure 11-1 Allocating V Memory for the
baud rate and address used in the program. Instruction Library
5. Connect the communications cable between the S7-200 and the drives.
Ensure that all of the control equipment, such as the S7-200, that is connected to the drive
be connected by a short, thick cable to the same ground or star point as the drive.
Caution
Interconnecting equipment with different reference potentials can cause unwanted currents to
flow through the interconnecting cable. These unwanted currents can cause communications
errors or damage equipment.
Ensure that all equipment that is connected with a communications cable either shares a
common circuit reference or is isolated to prevent unwanted current flows.
The shield must be tied to chassis ground or pin 1 on the 9-pin connector. It is recommended
that you tie wiring terminal 2--0V on the MicroMaster drive to chassis ground.
333
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Baud sets the baud rate at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200. Baud rates
57600 and 115200 are supported by S7-200 CPUs version 1.2 or later.
Active indicates which drives are active. Some drives only support addresses 0 through 30.
When the USS_INIT instruction completes, the Done output is turned on. The Error output byte
contains the result of executing the instruction. Table 11-6 defines the error conditions that could
result from executing the instruction.
334
Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive Chapter 11
USS_CTRL Instruction
The USS_CTRL instruction is used to control an active
MicroMaster drive. The USS_CTRL instruction places the
selected commands in a communications buffer, which is
then sent to the addressed drive (Drive parameter), if that
drive has been selected in the Active parameter of the
USS_INIT instruction.
Only one USS_CTRL instruction should be assigned to
each drive.
Some drives report speed only as a positive value. If the
speed is negative, the drive reports the speed as positive
but reverses the D_Dir (direction) bit.
The EN bit must be on to enable the USS_CTRL
instruction. This instruction should always be enabled.
RUN (RUN/STOP) indicates whether the drive is on (1) or
off (0). When the RUN bit is on, the MicroMaster drive
receives a command to start running at the specified speed
and direction. In order for the drive to run, the following must
be true:
- Drive must be selected as Active in USS_INIT.
- OFF2 and OFF3 must be set to 0.
- Fault and Inhibit must be 0.
The F_ACK (fault acknowledge) bit is used to acknowledge a fault in the drive. The drive clears
the fault (Fault) when F_ACK goes from 0 to 1.
The DIR (direction) bit indicates in which direction the drive should move.
335
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The Drive (drive address) input is the address of the MicroMaster drive to which the USS_CTRL
command is to be sent. Valid addresses: 0 to 31
The Type (drive type) input selects the type of drive. For a MicroMaster 3 (or earlier) drive, set
Type to 0. For a MicroMaster 4 drive, set Type to 1.
Speed_SP (speed setpoint) is drive speed as a percentage of full speed. Negative values of
Speed_SP cause the drive to reverse its direction of rotation. Range: --200.0% to 200.0%
Error is an error byte that contains the result of the latest communications request to the drive.
Table 11-6 defines the error conditions that could result from executing the instruction.
Status is the raw value of the status word returned by the drive. Figure 11-3 shows the status bits
for Standard Status Word and Main Feedback.
Run_EN (RUN enable) indicates whether the drive is running (1) or stopped (0).
Inhibit indicates the state of the inhibit bit on the drive (0 -- not inhibited, 1 -- inhibited). To clear the
inhibit bit, the Fault bit must be off, and the RUN, OFF2, and OFF3 inputs must also be off.
Fault indicates the state of the fault bit (0 -- no fault, 1 -- fault). The drive displays the fault code.
(Refer to the manual for your drive). To clear the Fault bit, correct the cause of the fault and turn
on the F_ACK bit.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 = Ready to start
1 = Ready to operate
1 = Operation enabled
1 = Drive fault present
0 = OFF2 (Coast stop command present)
0 = OFF3 (Quick stop command present)
1 = Switch-on inhibit
1 = Drive warning present
1 = Not used (always 1)
1 = Serial operation allowed
0 = Serial operation blocked -- local operation only
1 = Frequency reached
0 = Frequency not reached
1 = Converter output is clockwise
1 = Converter output is counter-clockwise
Reserved for future use: These bits might not always be zero
Figure 11-3 Status Bits for Standard Status Word for MicroMaster 3 and Main Feedback
336
Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive Chapter 11
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 = Ready to start
1 = Ready to operate
1 = Operation enabled
1 = Drive fault present
0 = OFF2 (Coast stop command present)
0 = OFF3 (Quick stop command present)
1 = Switch-on inhibit
1 = Drive warning present
1 = Not used (always 1)
1 = Serial operation allowed
0 = Serial operation blocked -- local operation only
1 = Frequency reached
0 = Frequency not reached
0= Warning: Motor current limit
0= Motor holding brake active
0= Motor overload
1 = Motor running direction right
0= Inverter overload
Figure 11-4 Status Bits for Standard Status Word for MicroMaster 4 and Main Feedback
337
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
USS_RPM_x Instruction
There are three read instructions for the USS protocol:
- USS_RPM_W instruction reads an unsigned word
parameter.
- USS_RPM_D instruction reads an unsigned double
word parameter.
- USS_RPM_R instruction reads a floating-point
parameter.
Only one read (USS_RPM_x) or write (USS_WPM_x)
instruction can be active at a time.
The USS_RPM_x transactions complete when the
MicroMaster drive acknowledges receipt of the command,
or when an error condition is posted. The logic scan
continues to execute while this process awaits a response.
The EN bit must be on to enable transmission of a request,
and should remain on until the Done bit is set, signaling
completion of the process. For example, a USS_RPM_x
request is transmitted to the MicroMaster drive on each
scan when XMT_REQ input is on. Therefore, the XMT_REQ
input should be pulsed on through an edge detection
element which causes one request to be transmitted for
each positive transition of the EN input.
The Drive input is the address of the MicroMaster drive to
which the USS_RPM_x command is to be sent. Valid
addresses of individual drives are 0 to 31.
Param is the parameter number. Index is the index value of the parameter that is to be read. Value
is the parameter value returned. The address of a 16-byte buffer must be supplied to the DB_Ptr
input. This buffer is used by the USS_RPM_x instruction to store the results of the command
issued to the MicroMaster drive.
When the USS_RPM_x instruction completes, the Done output is turned on and the Error output
byte and the Value output contain the results of executing the instruction. Table 11-6 defines the
error conditions that could result from executing the instruction. The Error and Value outputs are
not valid until the Done output turns on.
338
Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive Chapter 11
USS_WPM_x Instruction
There are three write instructions for the USS protocol:
- USS_WPM_W instruction writes an unsigned word
parameter.
- USS_WPM_D instruction writes an unsigned double
word parameter.
- USS_WPM_R instruction writes a floating-point
parameter.
Only one read (USS_RPM_x) or write (USS_WPM_x)
instruction can be active at a time.
The USS_WPM_x transactions complete when the
MicroMaster drive acknowledges receipt of the command,
or when an error condition is posted. The logic scan
continues to execute while this process awaits a response.
The EN bit must be on to enable transmission of a request,
and should remain on until the Done bit is set, signaling
completion of the process. For example, a USS_WPM_x
request is transmitted to the MicroMaster drive on each
scan when XMT_REQ input is on. Therefore, the XMT_REQ
input should be pulsed on through an edge detection
element which causes one request to be transmitted for
each positive transition of the EN input.
The Drive input is the address of the MicroMaster drive to
which the USS_WPM_x command is to be sent. Valid
addresses of individual drives are 0 to 31.
Param is the parameter number. Index is the index value of
the parameter that is to be written. Value is the parameter
value to be written to the RAM in the drive. For MicroMaster
3 drives, you can also write this value to the EEPROM of the
drive, based on how you have configured P971 (EEPROM
Storage Control).
The address of a 16-byte buffer must be supplied to the DB_Ptr input. This buffer is used by the
USS_WPM_x instruction to store the results of the command issued to the MicroMaster drive.
When the USS_WPM_x instruction completes, the Done output is turned on and the Error output
byte contains the result of executing the instruction. Table 11-6 defines the error conditions that
could result from executing the instruction.
When the EEPROM input is turned on, the instruction writes to both the RAM and the EEPROM of
the drive. When the the input is turned off, the instruction writes only to the RAM of the drive.
Because the MicroMaster 3 drive does not support this function, you must ensure that this input is
off in order to use this instruction with a MicroMaster 3 drive.
339
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Caution
When you use an USS_WPM_x instruction to update the parameter set stored in drive
EEPROM, you must ensure that the maximum number of write cycles (approximately 50,000) to
the EEPROM is not exceeded.
Exceeding the maximum number of write cycles will result in corruption of the stored data and
subsequent data loss. The number of read cycles is unlimited.
If frequent writes to the drive parameters are required, then you should first set the EEPROM
storage control parameter in the drive to zero (for MicroMaster 3 drives) and turn off the
EEPROM input for MicroMaster 4 drives.
340
Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive Chapter 11
341
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Caution
Interconnecting equipment with different reference potentials can cause unwanted currents to
flow through the interconnecting cable.
These unwanted currents can cause communications errors or damage equipment.
Be sure all equipment that you are about to connect with a communications cable either shares
a common circuit reference or is isolated to prevent unwanted current flows.
The shield must be tied to chassis ground or pin 1 on the 9-pin connector. It is recommended
that you tie wiring terminal 2--0V on the MicroMaster drive to chassis ground.
342
Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive Chapter 11
Cable must be terminated Switch position = On Switch position = Off Switch position = On
Terminated and biased No termination or bias Terminated and biased
and biased at both ends.
On Off On
ABAB ABAB A B AB
Switch position = On: Terminated and biased Switch position = Off: No termination or bias
B
Pin # TxD/RxD + Pin #
A
TxD/RxD -
6 6
390 Ω Cable shield
B B
TxD/RxD + 3 TxD/RxD + 3
Network Network
A 220 Ω connector A connector
TxD/RxD - 8 TxD/RxD - 8
390 Ω
5 5
Cable shield 1 Cable shield 1
1. Reset the drive to factory settings (optional). Press the P key: P000 is displayed. Press the
up or down arrow key until the display shows the P944. Press P to enter the parameter.
P944=1
2. Enable the read/write access to all parameters. Press the P key. Press the up or down
arrow key until the display shows P009. Press P to enter the parameter.
P009=3
3. Check motor settings for your drive. The settings will vary according to the motor(s) being
used. Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until the display shows the motor
setting for your drive. Press P to enter the parameter.
P081=Nominal frequency of motor (Hz)
P082=Nominal speed of motor (RPM)
P083=Nominal current of motor (A)
P084=Nominal voltage of motor (V)
P085=Nominal power of motor (kW/HP)
4. Set the Local/Remote control mode. Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until
the display shows P910. Press P to enter the parameter.
P910=1 Remote control mode
343
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
5. Set the Baud Rate of the RS--485 serial interface. Press the P key. Press the up or down
arrow key until P092 appears. Press P to enter the parameter. Press the up or down arrow
key until the display shows the number that corresponds to the baud rate of your RS--485
serial interface. Press P to enter.
P092 3 (1200 baud)
4 (2400 baud)
5 (4800 baud)
6 (9600 baud -- default)
7 (19200 baud)
6. Enter the Slave address. Each drive (a maximum of 31) can be operated over the bus.
Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until P091 appears. Press P to enter the
parameter. Press the up or down arrow key until the display shows the slave address you
want. Press P to enter.
P091=0 through 31.
7. Ramp up time (optional). This is the time in seconds that it takes the motor to accelerate to
maximum frequency. Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until P002 appears.
Press P to enter the parameter. Press the up or down arrow key until the display shows the
ramp up time you want. Press P to enter.
P002=0--650.00
8. Ramp down time (optional). This is the time in seconds that it takes the motor to decelerate
to a complete stop. Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until P003 appears.
Press P to enter the parameter. Press the up or down arrow key until the display shows the
ramp down time you want. Press P to enter.
P003=0--650.00
9. Serial Link Time-out. This is the maximum permissible period between two incoming data
telegrams. This feature is used to turn off the inverter in the event of a communications
failure.
Timing starts after a valid data telegram has been received. If a further data telegram is not
received within the specified time period, the inverter will trip and display fault code F008.
Setting the value to zero switches off the control. Use Table 11-1 to calculate the time
between the status polls to the drive.
Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until P093 appears. Press P to enter the
parameter. Press the up or down arrow key until the display shows the serial link time-out
you want. Press P to enter.
P093=0--240 (0 is default; time is in seconds)
10. Serial Link Nominal System Setpoint. This value can vary, but will typically correspond to 50
Hz or 60 Hz, which defines the corresponding 100% value for PVs or SPs. Press the P key.
Press the up or down arrow key until P094 appears. Press P to enter the parameter. Press
the up or down arrow key until the display shows the serial link nominal system setpoint you
want. Press P to enter.
P094=0--400.00
11. USS Compatibility (optional). Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until P095
appears. Press P to enter the parameter. Press the up or down arrow key until the display
shows the number that corresponds to the USS compatibility you want. Press P to enter.
P095 = 0 0.1 Hz resolution (default)
1 0.01 Hz resolution
12. EEPROM storage control (optional). Press the P key. Press the up or down arrow key until
P971 appears. Press P to enter the parameter. Press the up or down arrow key until the
display shows the number that corresponds to the EEPROM storage control you want.
Press P to enter.
P971 = 0 Changes to parameter settings (including P971) are lost when power is
removed.
1 (default) Changes to parameter settings are retained during periods when
power is removed.
13. Operating display. Press P to exit out of parameter mode.
344
Using the USS Protocol Library to Control a MicroMaster Drive Chapter 11
Caution
Interconnecting equipment with different reference potentials can cause unwanted currents to
flow through the interconnecting cable.
These unwanted currents can cause communications errors or damage equipment.
Be sure all equipment that you are about to connect with a communications cable either shares
a common circuit reference or is isolated to prevent unwanted current flows.
The shield must be tied to chassis ground or pin 1 on the 9-pin connector. It is recommended
that you tie wiring terminal 2--0V on the MicroMaster drive to chassis ground.
Caution
Make sure the drive covers are replaced properly before supplying power to the unit.
+10 V 1
MM440
P 29
120 ohm
N 30
1.5K ohm
470 ohm
0V 2
+10 V 1
345
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
346
Using the Modbus Protocol Library
STEP 7--Micro/WIN Instruction Libraries makes communicating to Modbus master devices easier
by including pre-configured subroutines and interrupt routines that are specifically designed for
Modbus communications. With the Modbus Slave Protocol Instructions, you can configure the
S7-200 to act as a Modbus RTU slave device and communicate to Modbus master devices.
You find these instructions in the Libraries folder of the STEP 7--Micro/WIN instruction tree. With
these new instructions you can make the S7-200 act as a Modbus slave. When you select a
Modbus Slave instruction, one or more associated subroutines are automatically added to your
project.
Siemens Libraries are sold on a separate CD, STEP 7--Micro/WIN Add-On: Instruction Library,
with the order number 6ES7 830--2BC00--0YX0. After version 1.1 of the Siemens Library is
purchased and installed, any subsequent STEP 7--Micro/WIN V3.2x and V4.0 upgrade that you
install will also upgrade your libraries automatically at no additional cost (when library additions or
modifications are made).
In This Chapter
Requirements for Using the Modbus Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Initialization and Execution Time for the Modbus Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Modbus Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Using the Modbus Slave Protocol Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Instructions for the Modbus Slave Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
347
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- Initializing the Modbus Slave Protocol dedicates Port 0 for Modbus Slave Protocol
communications.
When Port 0 is being used for Modbus Slave Protocol communications, it cannot be used
for any other purpose, including communications with STEP 7--Micro/WIN. The MBUS_INIT
instruction controls assignment of Port 0 to Modbus Slave Protocol or PPI.
- The Modbus Slave Protocol instructions affect all of the SM locations associated with
Freeport communications on Port 0.
- The Modbus Slave Protocol instructions use 3 subroutines and 2 interrupts.
- The Modbus Slave Protocol instructions require 1857 bytes of program space for the two
Modbus Slave instructions and the support routines.
- The variables for the Modbus Slave Protocol instructions require a 779-byte block of V
memory. The starting address for this block is assigned by the user and is reserved for
Modbus variables.
Tip
To change the operation of Port 0 back to PPI so that you can communicate with
STEP 7-Micro/WIN, use another MBUS_INIT instruction to reassign Port 0.
You can also set the mode switch on the S7-200 to STOP mode. This resets the parameters for
Port 0.
The scan time is extended when the MBUS_SLAVE subroutine services a request. Since most of
the time is spent calculating the Modbus CRC, the scan time is extended by about 650
microseconds for every byte in the request and in the response. A maximum request/response
(read or write of 120 words) extends the scan time by approximately 165 milliseconds.
348
Using the Modbus Protocol Library Chapter 12
Modbus Addressing
Modbus addresses are normally written as 5 or 6 character values containing the data type and
the offset. The first one or two characters determine the data type, and the last four characters
select the proper value within the data type. The Modbus master device then maps the addresses
to the correct functions. The following addresses are supported by the Modbus Slave instructions:
You should assign a starting V location for the table which occupies 779 bytes. Be sure that the
assignment of the Modbus Slave symbols do not overlap with the V memory assigned to the
Modbus holding registers with the HoldStart and MaxHold parameters on the MBUS_INIT
instruction. If there is any overlap of the memory areas, the MBUS_INIT instruction returns an
error.
349
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
1. Insert the MBUS_INIT instruction in your program and execute the MBUS_INIT instruction
for one scan only. You can use the MBUS_INIT instruction either to initiate or to change the
Modbus communications parameters.
When you insert the MBUS_INIT instruction, several hidden subroutines and interrupt
routines are automatically added to your program.
2. Assign a starting address for the 779 bytes of consecutive V memory required for Modbus
Slave Protocol instructions.
3. Place only one MBUS_SLAVE instruction in your program. This instruction is called every
scan to service any requests that have been received.
4. Connect the communications cable between Port 0 on the S7-200 and the Modbus master
devices.
Caution
Interconnecting equipment with different reference potentials can cause unwanted currents to
flow through the interconnecting cable. These unwanted currents can cause communications
errors or damage equipment.
Ensure that all equipment that is connected with a communications cable either shares a
common circuit reference or is isolated to prevent unwanted current flows.
The accumulators (AC0, AC1, AC2, AC3) are utilized by the Modbus slave instructions and
appear in the Cross Reference listing. Prior to execution, the values in the accumulators of a
Modbus Slave instruction are saved and restored to the accumulators before the Modbus Slave
instruction is complete, ensuring that all user data in the accumulators is preserved while
executing a Modbus Slave instruction.
The Modbus Slave Protocol instructions support the Modbus RTU protocol. These instructions
utilize the Freeport utilities of the S7-200 to support the most common Modbus functions. The
following Modbus functions are supported:
350
Using the Modbus Protocol Library Chapter 12
351
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The parameter Parity is set to match the parity of the Modbus master. All settings use one stop bit.
The accepted values are:
- 0-no parity
- 1-odd parity
- 2-even parity
The parameter Delay extends the standard Modbus end-of-message timeout condition by adding
the specified number of milliseconds to the standard Modbus message timeout. The typical value
for this parameter should be 0 when operating on a wired network. If you are using modems with
error correction, set the delay to a value of 50 to 100 milliseconds. If you are using spread
spectrum radios, set the delay to a value of 10 to 100 milliseconds. The Delay value can be 0 to
32767 milliseconds.
The parameter MaxIQ sets the number of I and Q points available to Modbus addresses 00xxxx
and 01xxxx at values of 0 to 128. A value of 0 disables all reads and writes to the inputs and
outputs. The suggested value for MaxIQ is 128, which allows access to all I and Q points in the
S7-200.
The parameter MaxAI sets the number of word input (AI) registers available to Modbus address
03xxx at values of 0 to 32. A value of 0 disables reads of the analog inputs. The suggested value
for MaxAI to allow access to all of the S7-200 analog inputs, is as follows:
The parameter HoldStart is the address of the start of the holding registers in V memory. This
value is generally set to VB0, so the parameter HoldStart is set to &VB0 (address of VB0). Other V
memory addresses can be specified as the starting address for the holding registers to allow VB0
to be used elsewhere in the project. The Modbus master has access to MaxHold number of words
of V memory starting at HoldStart.
When the MBUS_INIT instruction completes, the Done output is turned on. The Error output byte
contains the result of executing the instruction. Table 12-5 defines the error conditions that could
result from executing the instruction.
352
Using the Modbus Protocol Library Chapter 12
MBUS_SLAVE Instruction
The MBUS_SLAVE instruction is used to service a request
from the Modbus master and must be executed every scan
to allow it to check for and respond to Modbus requests.
The instruction is executed on each scan when the EN
input is on.
The MBUS_SLAVE instruction has no input parameters.
The Done output is on when the MBUS_SLAVE instruction
responds to a Modbus request. The Done output is turned
off if there was no request serviced.
The Error output contains the result of executing the
instruction. This output is only valid if Done is on. If Done is
off, the error parameter is not changed. Table 12-5 defines
the error conditions that could result from executing the
instruction.
353
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
354
Using Recipes
STEP 7--Micro/Win provides the Recipe Wizard to help you organize recipes and recipe
definitions. Recipes are stored in the memory cartridge instead of the PLC.
In This Chapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Recipe Definition and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Using the Recipe Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Instructions Created by the Recipe Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
355
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Overview
Support for recipes has been incorporated into STEP 7--Micro/WIN and the S7-200 PLC.
STEP 7--Micro/Win provides the Recipe Wizard to help you organize recipes and recipe
definitions.
All recipes are stored in the memory cartridge. Therefore, to use the recipe feature, an optional
Recipe 64kB or 256kB memory cartridge must be installed in the PLC. See Appendix A for more
information about the memory cartridges.
All recipes are stored in the memory cartridge. However, a single recipe is read into PLC memory
when the user program is processing this individual recipe. For example, if you are making
cookies, there may be recipes for chocolate chip, sugar, and oatmeal cookies. Only one type of
cookie can be made at a time, so the proper recipe must be selected and read into PLC memory.
Figure 13-1 illustrates a process for making multiple types of cookies using recipes. The recipe for
each type of cookie is stored in the memory cartridge. Using a TD 200C text display, the operator
selects the type of cookie to be made, and the user program loads that recipe into memory.
Get Recipe
S7-200 CPU
Chocolate_Chip
8, 6, ... 9
TD 200C
356
Using Recipes Chapter 13
- A recipe configuration is the set of project components generated by the Recipe Wizard.
These components include instruction subroutines, data block tabs, and symbol tables.
- A recipe definition is a collection of recipes that have the same set of parameters. However,
the values for the parameters can vary depending upon the recipe.
- A recipe is the set of parameters and parameter values that provides the information
needed to produce a product or control a process.
For example, different recipe definitions can be created, such as donuts and cookies. The cookie
recipe definition may contain many different recipes, such as chocolate chip and sugar cookies.
Example fields and values are shown in Table 13-1.
The Recipe Wizard creates a recipe configuration that includes the following:
- A symbol table for each recipe definition. Each table includes symbol names that are the
same as the recipe field names. These symbols define the V memory addresses needed to
access the recipe values currently loaded in memory. Each table also includes a symbolic
constant to reference each recipe.
- A data block tab for each recipe definition. This tab defines the initial values for each V
memory address represented within the symbol table.
- A RCPx_READ instruction subroutine. This instruction is used to read the specified recipe
from the memory cartridge to V memory.
- A RCPx_WRITE instruction subroutine. This instruction is used to write recipe values from
V memory to the memory cartridge.
357
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Defining Recipes
To create a recipe using the Recipe Wizard, select the Tools > Recipe Wizard menu command.
The first screen is an introductory screen defining the basic operations of the recipe wizard. Click
on the Next button to begin configuring your recipes.
Use as many rows as necessary to define all data fields in the recipe. You can have up to four
different recipe definitions. The number of recipes for each definition is limited only by the
available space within the memory cartridge.
Recipes can be created by pressing the New button. Each recipe is initialized with the default
values specified during the creation of the recipe definition.
Recipes can also be created from the right mouse context menu by copying and pasting existing
recipes. New columns will be inserted to the left of the current cursor position including the
comment field.
Each new recipe will be given a default name that includes a reference to the recipe definition and
recipe number. This name will be in the form of DEFx_RCPy.
358
Using Recipes Chapter 13
Allocating Memory
The Allocate Memory screen specifies the starting address of the V memory area that will store
the recipe loaded from the memory cartridge. You can either select the V memory address or let
the Recipe wizard to suggest the address of an unused V memory block of the correct size.
Project Components
The project components screen lists the
different components that will be added
to your project. See Figure 13-5.
Click Finish to complete the Recipe
Wizard and add these components.
Each recipe configuration can be given a
unique name. This name will be shown
in the project tree with each wizard
configuration. The recipe definition
(RCPx) will be appended to the end of
this name.
359
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
To download a project that contains a recipe configuration, follow the steps below. See
Figure 13-7.
360
Using Recipes Chapter 13
RCPx_Write Subroutine
The Subroutine RCPx_WRITE is created by the Recipe
Wizard and is used to replace a recipe in the memory
cartridge with the contents of the recipe contained in
V memory.
The x in the RCPx_WRITE instruction corresponds to the
recipe definition that contains the recipe that you wish to
replace.
The EN input enables the execution of the instruction when
this input is high.
The Rcp input identifies the recipe that will be replaced in
the memory cartridge.
The Error output returns the result of the execution of this
instruction. See Table 13-3 for definitions of the error codes.
Tip
The EEPROM used in the memory cartridge will support a limited number of write operations.
Typically, this is one million write cycles. Once this limit has been reached, the EEPROM will not
operate properly.
Make sure that you do not enable the RCPx_WRITE instruction on every scan. Enabling this
instruction on every scan will wear out the memory cartridge in a relatively short period of time.
361
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
362
Using Data Logs
STEP 7--Micro/Win provides the Data Log Wizard to store process measurement data in the
memory cartridge. Moving process data to the memory cartridge frees V memory addresses that
would otherwise be required to store this data.
In This Chapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Using the Data Log Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Instruction Created by the Data Log Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
363
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Overview
Support for data logs have been incorporated into STEP 7--Micro/WIN and the S7-200 PLC. With
this feature, you can permanently store records containing process data under program control.
These records can optionally contain a time and date stamp. You can configure up to four
independent data logs. The data log record format is defined using the new Data Log Wizard
All data logs are stored in the memory cartridge. To use the data log feature, you must have
installed an optional 64K or 256K memory cartridge in your PLC. See Appendix A for information
about the memory cartridges.
You must use the S7-200 Explorer to upload the contents of your data logs to your computer.
S7-200 CPU
Cow #5
5, 35.2, 98.1, 14.5
Morning milking data buffer
in V memory
For this cow:
Cow #5 Milking Complete H Record unique ID
H Record amount of
milk obtained
TD 200C H Record cow
temperature
H Record milking time
- A data log is a set of records usually ordered by date and time. Each record represents
some process event that records a set of process data. The organization of this data is
defined with the data log wizard.
- A data log record is a single row of data written to the data log.
364
Using Data Logs Chapter 14
The Data Log Wizard creates a data log configuration that includes the following:
- A symbol table for each data log configuration. Each table includes symbol names that are
the same as the data log field names. Each symbol defines the V memory addresses
needed to store the current data log. Each table also includes a symbolic constant to
reference each data log.
- A data block tab for each data log record that assigns V memory addresses for each data
log field. Your program uses these V memory addresses to accumulate the current log data
set.
- A DATx_WRITE subroutine. This instruction copies the specified data log record from V
memory to the memory cartridge. Each execution of DATx_WRITE adds a new data record
to the log data stored in the memory cartridge.
Time Stamp
You can include a Time Stamp with each
data log record. When selected, the CPU
automatically includes a time stamp with
each record when the user program
commands a data log write.
Date Stamp
You can add a Date Stamp to each data
log record. When selected, the CPU
automatically includes a date stamp with
each record when the user program
commands a data log write.
Data logs are implemented as a circular queue (when the log is full, a new record replaces the
oldest record). You must specify the maximum number of records to store in the data log. The
maximum number of records allowed in a data log is 65,535. The default value for the number of
records is 1000.
365
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
366
Using Data Logs Chapter 14
Allocating Memory
The Data Log Wizard creates a block in the V memory area of the PLC. This block is the memory
address where a data log record will be constructed before it is written to the memory cartridge.
You specify a starting V memory address where you want the configuration to be placed. You can
either select the V memory address or let the Data Log wizard suggest the address of an unused
V memory block of the correct size. The size of the block varies based on the specific choices you
have made in the Data Log wizard. See Figure 14-5.
Project Components
The project components screen lists the
different components that will be added
to your project. See Figure 14-6.
Click Finish to complete the Data Log
Wizard and add these components.
Each data log configuration can be given
a unique name. This name will be shown
in the project tree with each wizard
configuration. The data log definition
(DATx) will be appended to the end of
this name.
367
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
When you download a project that contains data log configurations, any data log records
currently stored on the memory cartridge will be lost.
To download a project that contains data log configurations, follow the steps below. See
Figure 14-8.
Each time a data log is read, a new file is created. This file is saved in the Data Log directory. The
file name is formatted as follows: PLC Address, data log name, date, and time.
You can choose whether the application associated with the CSV extension is automatically
launched when the data log has successfully been read. This selection is available from the right
mouse menu of the data log file.
The Data Log directory will be below the directory specified during installation. The default
installation directory is c:\program files\siemens\Microsystems (if STEP 7 is not installed). The
default installation is c:\siemens\Microsystems (if STEP 7 is installed).
368
Using Data Logs Chapter 14
DATx_WRITE Subroutine
The Subroutine DATx_WRITE is used to log the current
values of the data log fields to the memory cartridge.
DATxWRITE adds one record to the logged data in the
memory cartridge. A call to this subroutine appears as
follows.
Error 132 is returned when this instruction fails to correctly
access the memory cartridge.
Tip
The EEPROM used in the memory cartridge will support a limited number of write operations.
Typically, this is one million write cycles. Once this limit has been reached, the EEPROM will not
operate properly.
Make sure that you do not enable the DATx_WRITE instruction on every scan. Enabling this
instruction on every scan will wear out the memory cartridge in a relatively short period of time.
369
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
370
PID Auto-Tune and the PID Tuning
Control Panel
PID Auto-Tune capability has been incorporated into the S7-200 PLCs and STEP 7--Micro/WIN
has added a PID Tuning Control Panel. Together, these two features greatly enhance the utility
and ease of use of the PID function provided in the S7-200 Micro PLC line.
Auto-tune can be initiated by the user program from an operator panel or by the PID Tuning
Control Panel. PID loops can be auto-tuned one at a time or all eight loops can be auto-tuned at
the same time if necessary. The PID Auto-Tune computes suggested (near optimum) values for
the gain, integral time (reset) and derivative time (rate) tuning values. It also allows you to select
tuning for fast, medium, slow or very slow response of your loop.
With the PID Tuning Control Panel you can initiate the auto-tuning process, abort the auto-tuning
process and monitor the results in a graphical form. The control panel displays any error
conditions or warnings that might be generated. It also allows you to apply the gain, reset and rate
values computed by auto-tune.
In This Chapter
Understanding the PID Auto-Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Expanded Loop Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Auto-Hysteresis and Auto-Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Auto-Tune Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Exception Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Notes Concerning PV Out-of-Range (Result Code 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PID Tuning Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
371
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The concept of relay feedback is to produce a small, but sustained oscillation in an otherwise
stable process. Based upon the period of the oscillations and the amplitude changes observed in
the process variable, the ultimate frequency and the ultimate gain of the process are determined.
Then, using the ultimate gain and ultimate frequency values, the PID Auto-tuner suggests a value
for the gain, reset and rate tuning values.
The values suggested depend upon your selection for speed of response of the loop for your
process. You can select fast, medium, slow or very slow response. Depending upon your process
a fast response may have overshoot and would correspond to an underdamped tuning condition.
A medium speed response may be on the verge of having overshoot and would correspond to a
critically damped tuning condition. A slow response may not have any overshoot and would
correspond to an overdamped tuning condition. A very slow response may not have overshoot
and would correspond to a heavily overdamped tuning condition.
In addition to suggesting tuning values the PID Auto-tuner can automatically determine the values
for hysteresis and peak PV deviation. These parameters are used to reduce the effect of the
process noise while limiting the amplitude of the sustained oscillations set up by the PID
Auto-Tuner.
The PID Auto-Tuner is capable of determining suggested tuning values for both direct-acting and
reverse-acting P, PI, PD, and PID loops.
The purpose of the PID Auto-Tuner is to determine a set of tuning parameters that provide a
reasonable approximation to the optimum values for your loop. Starting with the suggested tuning
values will allow you to make fine tuning adjustments and truly optimize your process.
If you use the PID Tuning Control Panel, all interaction with the PID loop table is handled for you
by the control panel. If you need to provide auto-tuning capability from an operator panel, your
program must provide the interaction between the operator and the PID loop table to initiate, and
monitor the auto-tuning process, and then apply the suggested tuning values.
372
PID Auto-Tune and the PID Tuning Control Panel Chapter 15
373
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
W0 -- Warning: The deviation setting is not four times greater than the
hysteresis setting.
W1 -- Warning: Inconsistent process deviations may result in incorrect
adjustment of the output step value.
W2 -- Warning: Actual average deviation is not four times greater than
the hysteresis setting.
AH -- Auto-hysteresis calculation in progress:
0 -- not in progress
1 -- in progress
IP -- Auto-tune in progress:
0 -- not in progress
1 -- in progress
Each time an auto-tune sequence is started the PLC clears the warning bits and sets
the in progress bit. Upon completion of auto-tune, the PLC clears the in progress bit.
AT Result (ARES) MSB LSB
Input/Output -- Byte 7 0
D Result Code
D -- Done bit:
0 -- auto-tune not complete
1 -- auto-tune complete
Must be set to 0 before auto-tune can start
Result Code:
00 -- completed normally (suggested tuning values available)
01 -- aborted by the user
02 -- aborted, watchdog timed out waiting for a zero crossing
03 -- aborted, process (PV) out-of-range
04 -- aborted, maximum hysteresis value exceeded
05 -- aborted, illegal configuration value detected
06 -- aborted, numeric error detected
07 -- aborted, PID instruction executed without having power
flow (loop in manual mode)
08 -- aborted, auto-tuning allowed only for P, PI, PD, or PID loops
09 to 7F -- reserved
AT Config (ACNFG) MSB LSB
Input -- Byte 7 0
0 0 0 0 R1 R0 DS HS
R1 R0 Dynamic response
0 0 Fast response
0 1 Medium response
1 0 Slow response
1 1 Very slow response
DS -- Deviation setting:
0 -- use deviation value from loop table
1 -- determine deviation value automatically
HS -- Hysteresis setting:
0 -- use hysteresis value from loop table
1 -- determine hysteresis value automatically
374
PID Auto-Tune and the PID Tuning Control Panel Chapter 15
Prerequisites
The loop that you want to auto-tune must be in automatic mode. The loop output must be
controlled by the execution of the PID instruction. Auto-tune will fail if the loop is in manual mode.
Before initiating an auto-tune operation your process must be brought to a stable state which
means that the PV has reached setpoint (or for a P type loop, a constant difference between PV
and setpoint) and the output is not changing erratically.
Ideally, the loop output value needs to be near the center of the control range when auto-tuning is
started. The auto-tune procedure sets up an oscillation in the process by making small step
changes in the loop output. If the loop output is close to either extreme of its control range, the
step changes introduced in the auto-tune procedure may cause the output value to attempt to
exceed the minimum or the maximum range limit.
If this were to happen, it may result in the generation of an auto-tune error condition, and it will
certainly result in the determination of less than near optimal suggested values.
If you select to automatically determine the hysteresis value, the PID Auto-Tuner will enter a
hysteresis determination sequence. This sequence involves sampling the process variable for a
period of time and then performing a standard deviation calculation on the sample results.
In order to have a statistically meaningful sample, a set of at least 100 samples must be acquired.
For a loop with a sample time of 200 msec, acquiring 100 samples takes 20 seconds. For loops
with a longer sample time it will take longer. Even though 100 samples can be acquired in less
than 20 seconds for loops with sample times less than 200 msec, the hysteresis determination
sequence always acquires samples for at least 20 seconds.
Once all the samples have been acquired, the standard deviation for the sample set is calculated.
The hysteresis value is defined to be two times the standard deviation. The calculated hysteresis
value is written into the actual hysteresis field (AHYS) of the loop table.
Tip
While the auto-hysteresis sequence is in progress, the normal PID calculation is not performed.
Therefore, it is imperative that the process be in a stable state prior to initiating an auto-tune
sequence. This will yield a better result for the hysteresis value and it will ensure that the
process does not go out of control during the auto-hysteresis determination sequence.
The deviation parameter specifies the desired peak-to-peak swing of the PV around the setpoint.
If you select to automatically determine this value, the desired deviation of the PV is computed by
multiplying the hysteresis value by 4.5. The output will be driven proportionally to induce this
magnitude of oscillation in the process during auto-tuning.
375
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Auto-Tune Sequence
The auto-tuning sequence begins after the hysteresis and deviation values have been
determined. The tuning process begins when the initial output step is applied to the loop output.
This change in output value should cause a corresponding change in the value of the process
variable. When the output change drives the PV away from setpoint far enough to exceed the
hysteresis boundary a zero-crossing event is detected by the auto-tuner. Upon each zero crossing
event the auto-tuner drives the output in the opposite direction.
The tuner continues to sample the PV and waits for the next zero crossing event. A total of twelve
zero-crossings are required to complete the sequence. The magnitude of the observed
peak-to-peak PV values (peak error) and the rate at which zero-crossings occur are directly
related to the dynamics of the process.
Early in the auto-tuning process, the output step value is proportionally adjusted once to induce
subsequent peak-to-peak swings of the PV to more closely match the desired deviation amount.
Once the adjustment is made, the new output step amount is written into the Actual Step Size field
(ASTEP) of the loop table.
The auto-tuning sequence will be terminated with an error, if the time between zero crossings
exceeds the zero crossing watchdog interval time. The default value for the zero crossing
watchdog interval time is two hours.
Based upon the information collected about the frequency and gain of the process during the
auto-tune process, the ultimate gain and ultimate frequency values are calculated. From these
values the suggested values for gain (loop gain), reset (integral time) and rate (derivative time) are
calculated.
Tip
Your loop type determines which tuning values are calculated by the auto-tuner. For example,
for a PI loop, the auto-tuner will calculate gain and integral time values, but the suggested
derivative time will be 0.0 (no derivative action).
Once the auto-tune sequence has completed, the output of the loop is returned to its initial value.
The next time the loop is executed, the normal PID calculation will be performed.
376
PID Auto-Tune and the PID Tuning Control Panel Chapter 15
Exception Conditions
Three warning conditions can be generated during tuning execution. These warnings are reported
in three bits of the ASTAT field of the loop table and, once set, these bits remain set until the next
auto-tune sequence is initiated.
- Warning 0 is generated if the deviation value is not at least 4X greater than the hysteresis
value. This check is performed when the hysteresis value is actually known, which depends
upon the auto-hysteresis setting.
- Warning 1 is generated if there is more than an 8X difference between the two peak error
values gathered during the first 2.5 cycles of the auto-tune procedure.
- Warning 2 is generated if the measured average peak error is not at least 4X greater than
the hysteresis value.
In addition to the warning conditions several error conditions are possible. Table 15-3 lists the
error conditions along with a description of the cause of each error.
If the PV is detected to be out-of-range during the auto-hysteresis sequence, then the tuning is
immediately aborted with a process out-of-range error result.
If the PV is detected to be out-of-range between the starting point of the tuning sequence and the
fourth zero-crossing, then the output step value is cut in half and the tuning sequence is restarted
from the beginning. If a second PV out-of-range event is detected after the first zero-crossing
following the restart, then the tuning is aborted with a process out-of-range error result.
Any PV out-of-range event occurring after the fourth zero-crossing results in an immediate abort of
the tuning and a generation of a process out-of-range error result.
377
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
In the Current Values region, the values of the Setpoint, Sample Time, Gain, Integral time, and
Derivative time are displayed. The value of the Output is displayed in a horizontal bar chart along
with its numerical value. To the right of the Current Values region is a graphical display.
The graphical display shows color coded plots of the PV, SP, and Output as a function of time.
The PV and SP share the same vertical scale which is located at the left hand side of the graph
while the vertical scale for the output is located on the right hand side of the graph.
At the bottom left hand side of the screen is the Tuning Parameters (Minutes) region. Inside this
region, the Gain, Integral Time and Derivative Time values are displayed. Radio buttons indicate
whether the Current, Suggested or Manual values for Gain, Integral Time and Derivative Time are
being displayed. You may click on the radio button to display any one of the three sources for
these values. To modify the tuning parameters, click the manual radio button.
You can use the Update PLC button to transfer the displayed Gain, Integral Time and Derivative
Time values to the PLC for the PID loop that is being monitored. You can use the Start Auto Tune
button to initiate an auto-tuning sequence. Once an auto-tuning sequence has started, the Start
Auto Tune button becomes a Stop Auto Tune button.
Directly underneath the graphical display is a Current PID selection region with a pull down menu
that allows you to select the PID loop that you wish to monitor with the control panel.
In the Sampling Rate region you can select the graphical display sampling rate from 1 to 480
seconds per sample. You can edit the sampling rate, then use the Set Time button to apply the
change. The time scale of the graph is automatically adjusted to best display the data at the new
rate.
You can freeze the graph by pressing the Pause button. Press the Resume button to resume
sampling data at the selected rate. To clear the graph, select Clear from the right-mouse button
within the graph.
378
PID Auto-Tune and the PID Tuning Control Panel Chapter 15
To the right of the Chart Options region is a Legend that identifies the colors used to plot the PV,
SP, and Output values.
Once you have made the desired selections, click OK to return to the main screen of the PID
Tuning Control Panel.
379
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
380
Technical Specifications
In This Chapter
General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
CPU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Digital Expansion Modules Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Analog Expansion Modules Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Thermocouple and RTD Expansion Modules Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
EM 241 Modem Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
EM 253 Position Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
(CP 243--1) Ethernet Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
(CP 243--1 IT) Internet Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
(CP 243--2) AS--Interface Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Optional Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
I/O Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable and USB/PPI Multi-Master Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Input Simulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
381
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
The SIMATIC S7-200 series meets the CSA standard.
The cULus logo indicates that the S7-200 has been examined and certified by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) to standards UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142.
382
Technical Specifications Appendix A
4000 100,000
230 VAC Inductive load according to
250 VAC resistive load IEC 947--5--1 AC15 from 0A to 3A
1000 30 VDC resistive load 24 VDC Inductive load according to
10,000
IEC 947--5--1 DC13 from 0A to 2A
Service life (x 103 operations)
100
100
250 VAC inductive load (p.f.=0.4)
30 VDC inductive load (L/R=7ms)
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated Operating Current (A) Rated Operating Current (A)
Technical Specifications
All S7-200 CPUs and expansion modules conform to the technical specifications listed in
Table A-1.
Notice
When a mechanical contact turns on output power to the S7-200 CPU, or any digital expansion
module, it sends a “1” signal to the digital outputs for approximately 50 microseconds. You must
plan for this, especially if you are using devices which respond to short duration pulses.
383
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
384
Technical Specifications Appendix A
CPU Specifications
Table A-2 CPU Order Numbers
Power Supply Digital Digital Comm Analog Analog Removable
Order Number CPU Model
(Nominal) Inputs Outputs Ports Inputs Outputs Connector
6ES7 211--0AA23--0XB0 CPU 221 24 VDC 6 x 24 VDC 4 x 24 VDC 1 No No No
6ES7 214--1BD23--0XB0 CPU 224 120 to 240 VAC 14 x 24 VDC 10 x Relay 1 No No Yes
6ES7 214--2BD23--0XB0 CPU 224XP 120 to 240 VAC 14 x 24 VDC 10 x Relay 2 2 1 Yes
6ES7 216--2BD23--0XB0 CPU 226 120 to 240 VAC 24 x 24 VDC 16 x Relay 2 No No Yes
6ES7 212--1AB23--0XB0 CPU 222 DC/DC/DC 8 Inputs/ 6 Outputs 90 x 80 x 62 270 g 5W 340 mA 180 mA
6ES7 212--1BB23--0XB0 CPU 222 AC/DC/Relay 8 Inputs/ 6 Relays 90 x 80 x 62 310 g 7W 340 mA 180 mA
6ES7 214--1AD23--0XB0 CPU 224 DC/DC/DC 14 Inputs/ 10 Outputs 120.5 x 80 x 62 360 g 7W 660 mA 280 mA
6ES7 214--1BD23--0XB0 CPU 224 AC/DC/Relay14 Inputs/ 10 Relays 120.5 x 80 x 62 410 g 10 W 660 mA 280 mA
6ES7 214--2AD23--0XB0 CPU 224XP DC/DC/DC 14 Inputs/10 Outputs 140 x 80 x 62 390 g 8W 660 mA 280 mA
6ES7 214--2BD23--0XB0 CPU 224XP AC/DC/Relay 14 Inputs/10 Relays 140 x 80 x 62 440 g 11 W 660 mA 280 mA
6ES7 216--2AD23--0XB0 CPU 226 DC/DC/DC 24 Inputs/16 Outputs 196 x 80 x 62 550 g 11 W 1000 mA 400 mA
6ES7 216--2BD23--0XB0 CPU 226 AC/DC/Relay 24 Inputs/16 Relays 196 x 80 x 62 660 g 17 W 1000 mA 400 mA
1 This is the 24 VDC sensor power that is available after the internal relay coil power and 24 VDC comm port power requirements have been accounted
for.
385
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Backup (super cap) 50 hours typical (8 hours min. at 40°C) 100 hours typical (70 100 hours typical (70 hours min. at 40°C)
hours min. at 40°C)
(optional battery) 200 days typical 200 days typical 200 days typical
I/O
Digital I/O 6 inputs/4outputs 8 inputs/6 outputs 14 inputs/10 outputs 14 inputs/10 outputs 24 inputs/16 outputs
Analog I/O none 2 inputs/1 output none
Digital I/O image size 256 (128 In/128 Out)
Analog I/O image size None 32 (16 In/16 Out) 64 (32 In/32 Out)
Max. expansion modules allowed None 2 modules1 7 modules1
Max. intelligent modules allowed None 2 modules1 7 modules1
Pulse Catch inputs 6 8 14 24
High-Speed Counters 4 counters total 6 counters total 6 counters total 6 counters total
Single phase 4 at 30 kHz 6 at 30 kHz 4 at 30 kHz 6 at 30 kHz
2 at 200 kHz
Two phase 2 at 20 kHz 4 at 20 kHz 3 at 20 kHz 4 at 20 kHz
1 at 100 kHz
Pulse outputs 2 at 20 kHz (DC outputs only) 2 at 100 kHz 2 at 20 kHz
(DC outputs only) (DC outputs only)
General
Timers 256 total timers; 4 timers (1 ms); 16 timers (10 ms); 236 timers (100 ms)
Counters 256 (backed by super capacitor or battery)
Internal memory bits 256 (backed by super capacitor or battery)
Stored on power down 112 (stored to EEPROM)
Timed interrupts 2 with 1 ms resolution
Edge interrupts 4 up and/or 4 down
Analog adjustment 1 with 8 bit resolution 2 with 8 bit resolution
Boolean execution speed 0.22 µs per instruction
Real Time Clock Optional cartridge Built-in
Cartridge options Memory, Battery, and Real Time Clock Memory and battery
Communications Built-in
Ports (Limited Power) 1 RS--485 port 2 RS--485 ports
PPI, DP/T baud rates 9.6, 19.2, 187.5 kbaud
Freeport baud rates 1.2 kbaud to 115.2 kbaud
Max. cable length per segment With isolated repeater: 1000 m up to 187.5 kbaud, 1200 m up to 38.4 kbaud
Without isolated repeater: 50 m
Max. number of stations 32 per segment, 126 per network
Max. number of masters 32
Peer to Peer (PPI Master Mode) Yes (NETR/NETW)
MPI connections 4 total, 2 reserved (1 for a PG and 1 for an OP)
1 You must calculate your power budget to determine how much power (or current) the S7-200 CPU can provide for your configuration. If the CPU power budget
is exceeded, you may not be able to connect the maximum number of modules. See Appendix A for CPU and expansion module power requirements, and
Appendix B to calculate your power budget.
386
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Input Power
Input current CPU only at 24 VDC Max. load at 24 VDC CPU only Max. load
CPU 221 80 mA 450 mA 30/15 mA at 120/240 VAC 120/60 mA at120/240 VAC
CPU 222 85 mA 500 mA 40/20 mA at 120/240 VAC 140/70 mA at 120/240 VAC
CPU 224 110 mA 700 mA 60/30 mA at 120/240 VAC 200/100 mA at 120/240VAC
CPU 224XP 120 mA 900 mA 70/35 mA at 120/240 VAC 220/100 mA at 120/240 VAC
CPU 226 150 mA 1050 mA 80/40 mA at 120/240 VAC 320/160 mA at 120/240VAC
Current limit 1.5 A peak, thermal limit non-destructive (See Table A-3 for rated load.)
387
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 VDC 5 to 28.8 VDC (Q0.0 to Q0.4) 5 to 30 VDC or 5 to 250 VAC
20.4 to 28.8 VDC (Q0.5 to Q1.1)
Surge current (max.) 8 A for 100 ms 5 A for 4 s @ 10% duty cycle
On State resistance (contact) 0.3 Ω typical (0.6 Ω max.) 0.2 Ω (maximum when new)
Isolation
Optical (galvanic, field to logic) 500 VAC for 1 minute --
Logic to contact -- 1500 VAC for 1 minute
Resistance (logic to contact) -- 100 M Ω
Isolation groups See wiring diagram See wiring diagram
Delay (max.)
Off to on (µs) 2µs (Q0.0, Q0.1), 15µs (all other) 0.5µs (Q0.0, Q0.1), 15µs (all other) --
On to off (µs) 10µs (Q0.0, Q0.1), 130µs (all other) 1.5µs (Q0.0, Q0.1), 130µs (all other) --
Switching -- -- 10 ms
Pulse frequency (max.) 20 kHz2 (Q0.0 and Q0.1) 100 kHz2 (Q0.0 and Q0.1) 1 Hz
1 When a mechanical contact turns on output power to the S7-200 CPU, or any digital expansion module, it sends a “1” signal to the digital outputs for
approximately 50 microseconds. You must plan for this, especially if you are using devices which respond to short duration pulses.
2 Depending on your pulse receiver and cable, an additional external load resistor (at least 10% of rated current) may improve pulse signal quality and noise
immunity.
3 Relay lifetime with a lamp load will be reduced by 75% unless steps are taken to reduce the turn-on surge below the surge current rating of the output.
4 Lamp load wattage rating is for rated voltage. Reduce the wattage rating proportionally for voltage being switched (for example 120 VAC -- 100 W).
388
Technical Specifications Appendix A
389
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Wiring Diagrams
24 VDC Input 24 VDC Input CPU 224 XP Analog Input/Output
Used as Sinking Inputs Used as Sourcing Inputs
V LOAD
I LOAD
+
-- +
+
+
--
1M .0 .1 .2 .3 M I V M A+ B+
1M .0 .1 .2 .3
+
--
Output Inputs
+ N(--)
L(+)
1M 1L+ .0 .1 .2
1L .0 .1 .2
N(--) N(--)
+ + L(+) L(+)
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 2M 0.4 0.5 M L+ 1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 2M 0.4 0.5 M L+
24 VDC 24 VDC
+ + Sensor + + Sensor
Power Power
Output Output
390
Technical Specifications Appendix A
N(--) N(--)
+ + L(+) L(+)
M L+ 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 M L+ DC 1L 0.0 0.1 0.2 2L 0.3 0.4 0.5 N L1 AC
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 2M 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 M L+ 1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 2M 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 M L+
+ 24 VDC 24 VDC
Sensor
+
Sensor
+ +
Power Power
Output Output
+ + +
1M 1L+ 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 2M 2L+ 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.1 M L+ DC
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 2M 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 M L+
+ + 24 VDC Sensor
Power Output
1L 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 2L 0.4 0.5 0.6 3L 0.7 1.0 1.1 N L1 AC
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 2M 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 M L+
+ + 24 VDC Sensor
Power Output
391
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
-- +
+ -- + + +
1M 1L+ 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 2M 2L+ 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.1 M L+ DC
M I V M A+ B+
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 2M 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 M L+
+ + 24 VDC Sensor
Power Output
1L 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 2L 0.4 0.5 0.6 3L 0.7 1.0 1.1 N L1 AC
M I V M A+ B+
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 2M 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 M L+
+ + 24 VDC Sensor
Power Output
392
Technical Specifications Appendix A
+ + +
1M 1L+ 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 2M 2L+ 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 M L+ DC
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.4 2M 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 M L+
24 VDC
+ +
Power
Output
1L 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 2L 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 3L 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 N L1 AC
1M 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.4 2M 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 M L+
+ +
24 VDC
Sensor
Power
Output
Figure A-6 CPU 226 Wiring Diagrams
Table A-10 Pin Assignments for the S7-200 Communications Port (Limited Power)
Connector Pin Number PROFIBUS Signal Port 0/Port 1
1 Shield Chassis ground
2 24 V Return Logic common
Pin 1 3 RS-485 Signal B RS-485 Signal B
Pin 6
4 Request-to-Send RTS (TTL)
5 5 V Return Logic common
6 +5 V +5 V, 100 Ω series resistor
Pin 9
Pin 5 7 +24 V +24 V
8 RS-485 Signal A RS-485 Signal A
9 Not applicable 10-bit protocol select (input)
Connector shell Shield Chassis ground
393
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
6ES7 221--1EF22--0XA0 EM 221 Digital Input 8 x 120/230 VAC 8 x 120/230 VAC -- Yes
6ES7 222--1EF22--0XA0 EM 222 Digital Output 8 x 120/230 VAC -- 8 x 120/230 VAC Yes
6ES7 223--1BF22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC Digital Comb 4 Inputs/4 Outputs 4 x 24 VDC 4 x 24 VDC--0.75A Yes
6ES7 223--1HF22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC Digital Comb 4 Inputs/4 Relay Outputs 4 x 24 VDC 4 x Relay--2A Yes
6ES7 223--1BH22--0AX0 EM 223 24 VDC Digital Comb 8 Inputs/8 Outputs 8 x 24 VDC 8 x 24 VDC--0.75A Yes
6ES7 223--1PH22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC Digital Comb 8 Inputs/8 Relay Outputs 8 x 24 VDC 8 x Relay--2A Yes
6ES7 223--1BL22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC Digital Comb 16 Inputs/16 Outputs 16 x 24 VDC 16 x 24 VDC--0.75A Yes
6ES7 223--1PL22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC Digital Comb 16 Inputs/16 Relay Outputs 16 x 24 VDC 16 x Relay--2A Yes
6ES7 223--1PH22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC 8 In/8 Relays 71.2 x 80 x 62 300 g 3W 80 mA ON: 9 mA/output,
4 mA/input
6ES7 223--1BL22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC 16 In/16 Out 137.3 x 80 x 62 360 g 6W 160 mA --
6ES7 223--1PL22--0XA0 EM 223 24 VDC 16 In/16 Relays 137.3 x 80 x 62 400 g 6W 150 mA ON: 9 mA/output,
4 mA/input
394
Technical Specifications Appendix A
1M .0 .1 .2 .3 1M .0 .1 .2 .3 0N 0N .0
395
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Surge current (max.) 8 A for 100 ms 30 A 5 A for 4 s @ 10% 15 A for 4 s @ 5 A rms for 2 AC cycles
duty cycle 10% duty cycle
Logic 1 (min.) 20 VDC -- L1 (--0.9 V rms)
On state resistance (contact) 0.3 Ω typical 0.05 Ω max. 0.2 Ω max. when new 0.1 Ω max. 410 Ω max. when
(0.6 Ω max.) when new load current is
less than 0.05 A
Isolation
Optical (galvanic, field to logic) 500 VAC for 1 minute -- 1500 VAC for 1minute
Coil to logic -- None --
Coil to contact -- 1500 VAC for 1 minute --
Resistance (coil to contact) -- 100 M Ω min. when new --
Isolation groups See wiring diagram See wiring diagram 1 point
Delay Off to On/On to Off (max.) 50 µs / 200 µs 500 µs -- -- 0.2 ms + 1/2 AC cycle
Switching (max.) -- -- 10 ms 15 ms --
396
Technical Specifications Appendix A
L1
N(--)
+
L(+)
0L 0L .0
1M 1L+ .0 .1 .2
1L .0 .1 .2
Wiring Diagrams
1M 1L+ .0 .1 .2 .3
1L .0 .1 .2 .3 0L .0 1L .1
1M .0 .1 .2 .3
M L+ 1M .0 .1 .2 .3 M L+ 2L .2 3L .3
L L
(+) (+)
+ 24 VDC
Coil
+ + +
24 VDC N N
Power
Coil (--) (--)
Power
Figure A-9 Wiring Diagrams for EM 222 and EM 223 Expansion Modules
397
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
EM 221 Digital Input 8 x 24 VDC EM 221 Digital Input 16 x 24 VDC (6ES7 221--1BH22--0XA0)
(6ES7 221--1BF22--0XA0)
+ +
+
1M .0 .1 .2 .3 2M .4 .5 .6 .7
1M .0 .1 .2 .3
2M .4 .5 .6 .7 3M .0 .1 .2 .3 4M .4 .5 .6 .7
+
+ +
0L 0L .0 1L 1L .1 2L 2L .2 3L 3L .3
0N 0N .0 1N 1N .1 2N 2N .2 3N 3N .3
4L .4 5L 5L .5 6L 6L .6 7L 7L .7
4N .4 5N 5N .5 6N 6N .6 7N 7N .7
EM 222 Digital Output 8 x 24 VDC EM 222 Digital Output 8 x Relays EM 222 Digital Output 4 x 24 VDC--5A
(6ES7 222--1BF22--0XA0) (6ES7 222 1HF22--0XA0) (6ES7 222--1BD22--0XA0)
N(--)
+ + +
L(+)
L
+ (+) + +
24 VDC Coil
+
N
power (--)
Figure A-10 Wiring Diagrams for EM 221 and EM 222 Expansion Modules
398
Technical Specifications Appendix A
EM 223 24 VDC Digital Combination 8 Inputs/8 Outputs EM 223 24 VDC Digital Combination 8 Inputs/8 Relay Out-
(6ES7 223--1BH22--0XA0) puts (6ES7 223--1PH22--0XA0)
N(--)
N(--)
+ +
L(+) L(+)
1M 1L+ .0 .1 .2 .3 2M 2L+ .4 .5 .6 .7 1L .0 .1 .2 .3 2L .4 .5 .6 .7
1M .0 .1 .2 .3 2M .4 .5 .6 .7 M L+ 1M .0 .1 .2 .3 2M .4 .5 .6 .7
24VDC
Coil
Power
+ +
+ + +
+ + +
1M .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 2M .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
+ +
1L .0 .1 .2 .3 2L .4 .5 .6 .7 3L .0 .1 .2 .3 4L .4 .5 .6 .7
M L+ 1M .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 2M .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
24VDC
Coil + + +
Power
399
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
400
Technical Specifications Appendix A
401
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
V LOAD
I LOAD
+ +
24 24
VDC VDC
Power Power
I LOAD
V LOAD
I LOAD
M0 V0 I0 M1 V1 I1
M L+
24
VDC
Power
402
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Tip
The state of user power is also reported in Special Memory (SM) bits. For more information, see
Appendix D, SMB8 to SMB21 I/O Module ID and Error Registers.
Input Calibration
The calibration adjustments affect the instrumentation amplifier stage that follows the analog
multiplexer (see the Input Block Diagram for the EM 231 in Figure A-15 and EM 235 in Figure
A-16). Therefore, calibration affects all user input channels. Even after calibration, variations in the
component values of each input circuit preceding the analog multiplexer will cause slight
differences in the readings between channels connected to the same input signal.
To meet the specifications, you should enable analog input filters for all inputs of the module.
Select 64 or more samples to calculate the average value.
1. Turn off the power to the module. Select the desired input range.
2. Turn on the power to the CPU and module. Allow the module to stabilize for 15 minutes.
3. Using a transmitter, a voltage source, or a current source, apply a zero value signal to one
of the input terminals.
4. Read the value reported to the CPU by the appropriate input channel.
5. Adjust the OFFSET potentiometer until the reading is zero, or the desired digital data value.
6. Connect a full-scale value signal to one of the input terminals. Read the value reported to
the CPU.
7. Adjust the GAIN potentiometer until the reading is 32000, or the desired digital data value.
8. Repeat OFFSET and GAIN calibration as required.
403
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
EM 231 EM 235
↑On ↑On
↓Off ↓Off
Fixed Terminal Block Gain Configuration Fixed Terminal Block Gain Offset Configuration
Figure A-13 Calibration Potentiometer and Configuration DIP Switch Location for the EM 231 and EM 235
Table A-20 EM 231 Configuration Switch Table to Select Analog Input Range
Unipolar
Full Scale Input
Full-Scale Resolution
SW1 SW2 SW3
OFF ON 0 to 10 V 2.5 mV
ON
O 0 to 5 V 1.25 mV
ON OFF
0 to 20 mA 5 µA
Bipolar
Full Scale Input
Full-Scale Resolution
SW1 SW2 SW3
OFF ON ±5 V 2.5 mV
OFF
ON OFF ± 2.5 V 1.25 mV
404
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Table A-21 EM 235 Configuration Switch Table to Select Analog Range and Resolution
Unipolar
Full Scale Input
Full-Scale Resolution
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 0 to 50 mV 12.5 NV
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 0 to 100 mV 25 NV
ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 0 to 500 mV 125 NV
OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 0 to 1 V 250 NV
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0 to 5 V 1.25 mV
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0 to 20 mA 5 NA
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 0 to 10 V 2.5 mV
Bipolar
Full Scale Input
Full-Scale Resolution
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF +25 mV 12.5 NV
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF +50 mV 25 NV
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF +100 mV 50 NV
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF +250 mV 125 NV
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF +500 mV 250 NV
OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF +1 V 500 NV
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF +2.5 V 1.25 mV
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF +5 V 2.5 mV
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF +10 V 5 mV
405
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
MSB LSB
15 14 3 2 0
AIW XX 0 Data value 12 Bits 0 0 0
Unipolar data
MSB LSB
15 4 3 0
AIW XX Data value 12 Bits 0 0 0 0
Bipolar data
Figure A-14 Input Data Word Format for EM 231 and EM 235
Tip
The 12 bits of the analog-to-digital converter (ADC) readings are left-justified in the data word
format. The MSB is the sign bit: zero indicates a positive data word value.
In the unipolar format, the three trailing zeros cause the data word to change by a count of eight
for each one-count change in the ADC value.
In the bipolar format, the four trailing zeros cause the data word to change by a count of sixteen
for each one count change in the ADC value.
A+
R EM 231
RA C
C
Rloop C
A-- GAIN ADJUST
A=1
R
+
B+
R Instrumentation
RB C AMP
C BUFFER
Rloop C
-- A/D Converter
B--
R A=2
11 0
C+
R
RC C
C
Rloop C
C--
R A=3
D+
R C
RD
C
Rloop C
D--
A=4
R
Input filter MUX 4 to 1
406
Technical Specifications Appendix A
A+
EM 235
R
RA C
C
Rloop C
A-- GAIN ADJUST
A=1
R
+
B+
R Instrumentation
RB C AMP
C BUFFER
Rloop C
-- A/D Converter
B--
R A=2
DATA
11 0
C+
R C REF_VOLT
RC
C +
Rloop C Buffer
C-- --
R A=3
Offset Adjust
D+
R
RD C
C
Rloop C
D--
A=4
R
Input filter MUX 4 to 1
MSB LSB
15 14 4 3 0
AQW XX 0 Data value 11 Bits 0 0 0 0
Current output data format
MSB LSB
15 4 3 0
AQW XX Data value 12 Bits 0 0 0 0
Voltage output data format
Figure A-17 Output Data Word Format for EM 232 and EM 235
Tip
The 12 bits of the digital-to-analog converter (DAC) readings are left-justified in the output data
word format. The MSB is the sign bit: zero indicates a positive data word value. The four trailing
zeros are truncated before being loaded into the DAC registers. These bits have no effect on the
output signal value.
407
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
+24 Volt
R 100
--
+
+
--
Voltage-to-current converter
Iout
R
0..20 mA
Vref
D/A converter +
+/-- 2V Vout
--
11 0 --10.. +10 Volts
DATA
Digital-to-analog converter R
Figure A-18 Output Block Diagram for the EM 232 and EM 235
Installation Guidelines
Use the following guidelines to ensure accuracy and repeatability:
- Ensure that the 24-VDC Sensor Supply is free of noise and is stable.
- Use the shortest possible sensor wires.
- Use shielded twisted pair wiring for sensor wires.
- Terminate the shield at the Sensor location only.
- Short the inputs for any unused channels, as shown in Figure A-18.
- Avoid bending the wires into sharp angles.
- Use wireways for wire routing.
- Avoid placing signal wires parallel to high-energy wires. If the two wires must meet, cross
them at right angles.
- Ensure that the input signals are within the common mode voltage specification by isolating
the input signals or referencing them to the external 24V common of the analog module.
Tip
The EM 231 and EM 235 expansion modules are not recommended for use with
thermocouples.
408
Technical Specifications Appendix A
The EM 231 and EM 235 provide an unprocessed Average Value Signal Input
digital value (no linearization or filtering) that
corresponds to the analog voltage or current presented Mean
(average)
at the module’s input terminals. Since the modules are
Accuracy
high-speed modules, they can follow rapid changes in
the analog input signal (including internal and external
noise).
You can minimize reading-to-reading variations caused
by noise for a constant or slowly changing analog input Repeatability limits
signal by averaging a number of readings. Note that (99% of all readings fall within these limits)
increasing the number of readings used in computing
the average value results in a correspondingly slower
response time to changes in the input signal. Figure A-19 Accuracy Definitions
Figure A-19 shows the 99% repeatability limits, the mean or average value of the individual
readings, and the mean accuracy in a graphical form.
The specifications for repeatability describe the reading-to-reading variations of the module for an
input signal that is not changing. The repeatability specification defines the limits within which 99%
of the readings will fall. The repeatability is described in this figure by the bell curve.
The mean accuracy specification describes the average value of the error (the difference between
the average value of individual readings and the exact value of the actual analog input signal).
Table A-22 gives the repeatability specifications and the mean accuracy as they relate to each of
the configurable ranges.
409
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
410
Technical Specifications Appendix A
411
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
EM 231 Analog Input Thermocouple, 4 Inputs EM 231 Analog Input RTD, 2 Inputs
(6ES7 231--7PD22--0XA0) (6ES7 231--7PB22--0XA0)
+ -- + -- + -- + --
M L+ Configuration
M L+ Configuration
+ +
-- --
24 VDC 24 VDC
power power
Figure A-20 Connector Terminal Identification for EM 231 Thermocouple and EM 231 RTD Modules
Compatibility
The RTD and Thermocouple modules are designed to work with the CPU 222, CPU 224,
CPU 224XP and CPU 226.
Tip
The RTD and Thermocouple modules are designed to give maximum performance when
installed in a stable temperature environment.
The EM 231 Thermocouple module, for example, has special cold junction compensation
circuitry that measures the temperature at the module connectors and makes necessary
changes to the measurement to compensate for temperature differences between the reference
temperature and the temperature at the module. If the ambient temperature is changing rapidly
in the area where the EM 231 Thermocouple module is installed, additional errors are
introduced.
To achieve maximum accuracy and repeatability, Siemens recommends that the S7-200 RTD
and Thermocouple modules be mounted in locations that have stable ambient temperature.
Noise Immunity
Use shielded wires for best noise immunity. If a thermocouple input channel is not used, short the
unused channel inputs, or connect them in parallel to another channel.
412
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Thermocouple Basics
Thermocouples are formed whenever two dissimilar metals are electrically bonded to each other.
A voltage is generated that is proportional to the junction temperature. This voltage is small; one
microvolt could represent many degrees. Measuring the voltage from a thermocouple,
compensating for extra junctions, and then linearizing the result forms the basis of temperature
measurement using thermocouples.
When you connect a thermocouple to the EM 231 Thermocouple Module, the two dissimilar metal
wires are attached to the module at the module signal connector. The place where the two
dissimilar wires are attached to each other forms the sensor thermocouple.
Two more thermocouples are formed where the two dissimilar wires are attached to the signal
connector. The connector temperature causes a voltage that adds to the voltage from the sensor
thermocouple. If this voltage is not corrected, then the temperature reported will deviate from the
sensor temperature.
DIP switch 4 is reserved for future use. Set DIP switch 4 to the 0 (down or off) position. Table A-26
shows other DIP switch settings.
413
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
+/--80mV 111
414
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Tip
H The open wire current source could interfere with signals from some low level sources such
as thermocouple simulators.
H Input voltages exceeding approximately ±200mV will trigger open wire detection even when
the open wire current source is disabled.
Tip
H Module error could exceed specifications while the ambient temperature is changing.
H Exceeding the module ambient temperature range specification could cause the module
cold junction to be in error.
1 Range status bit is bit 3 in module error register byte (SMB9 for Module 1, SMB11 for Module 2, etc.)
2 User Power Bad status bit is bit 2 in module error register byte (SMB 9, SMB 11, etc., refer to Appendix D)
3 Diagnostic errors cause a module configuration error. The User Power Bad status bit may or may not be set before the module configuration
error.
Tip
The channel data format is two’s complement, 16-bit words. Temperature is presented in 0.1
degree units. For example, if the measured temperature is 100.2 degrees, the reported data is
1002. Voltage data are scaled to 27648. For example, --60.0mV is reported as --20736
(=--60mV/80mV * 27648).
All four channels are updated every 405 milliseconds if the PLC has read the data. If the PLC
does not read the data within one update time, the module reports old data until the next module
update after the PLC read. To keep channel data current, it is recommended that the PLC
program read data at least as often as the module update rate.
Tip
When you are using the EM 231 Thermocouple module, you should disable analog filtering in
the PLC. Analog filtering can prevent error conditions from being detected in a timely manner.
415
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table A-28 Temperature Ranges (°C) and Accuracy for Thermocouple Types
Data Word (1 digit = 0.1_C)
Type J Type K Type T Type E Type R,
R S Type N ¦80mV
Dec Hex
32767 7FFF >1200.0 _C >1372.0 _C >400.0 _C >1000.0_C >1768.0_C >1300.0_C >94.071mV OF
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
32511 7EFF 94.071mV
: : OR
27649 6C01 80.0029mV
27648 6C00 ↑ 80mV
: :
17680 4510 ↑ 1768.0_C
: :
NR
13720 3598 1372.0_C ↑
: : overrange
13000 32C8 ↑ 1300.0_C 1300.0_C
: :
12000 2EE0 1200.0_C ↑
: :
10000 2710 ↑ 1000.0_C
: :
4000 0FA0 400.0_C 400.0_C
: :
1 0001 0.1_C 0.1_C 0.1_C 0.1_C 0.1_C 0.1_C 0.0029mV
0 0000 0.0_C 0.0_C 0.0_C 0.0_C 0.0_C 0.0_C 0.0mV
--1 FFFF --0.1_C --0.1_C --0.1_C --0.1_C --0.1_C --0.1_C --0.0029mV
: : underrange
--500 FE0C --50.0_C
--1500 FA24 --150.0_C
: :
--2000 F830 underrange --200.0_C
: :
: :
--32512 8100
--94.071mV UR
416
Technical Specifications Appendix A
: : overrange NR
: :
: :
18320 4790 ↑ 1832.0_F
: :
7520 1D60 752.0_F 752.0_F
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
417
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
418
Technical Specifications Appendix A
419
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
The channel data format is twos complement, 16-bit words. Temperature is presented in 0.1
degree units. (For example, if the measured temperature is 100.2 degrees, the reported data is
1002.) Resistance data are scaled to 27648. For example, 75% of full scale resistance is
reported as 20736.
(225Ω / 300Ω * 27648 = 20736)
1 Range status bit is bit 3 in module error register byte (SMB9 for Module 1, SMB11 for Module 2, etc.)
2 User Power Bad status bit is bit 2 in module error register byte (such as SMB 9, SMB 11, refer to Appendix D.)
3 Diagnostic errors cause a module configuration error. The User Power Bad status bit may or may not be set before the module
configuration error.
Channel data is updated every 405 milliseconds, if the PLC has read the data. If the PLC does not
read the data within one update time, the module reports old data until the next module update
after the PLC read. To keep channel data current, it is recommended that the PLC program read
data at least as often as the module update rate.
Tip
When you are using the RTD module, be sure to disable analog filtering in the PLC. Analog
filtering can prevent error conditions from being detected in a timely manner.
Open wire detection is performed by software internal to the RTD module. Out of range inputs and
detected open wire conditions are signaled by setting the range status bit in the SMB and by
setting the channel data up or down scale per the switch settings. Open wire detection takes a
minimum of three module scan cycles and can take longer, depending on which wire(s) are open.
Open Source+ and/or Source-- wires are detected in the minimum time. Open Sense+ and/or
Sense-- wires can take 5 seconds or more to detect. Open sense lines can randomly present valid
data, with open wire detected intermittently, especially in electrically noisy environments. Electrical
noise can also extend the time it takes to detect the open wire condition. It is recommended that
open wire/out of range indications be latched in the application program after valid data has been
reported.
Tip
If you have an unused channel, you can wire the that channel with a resistor in place of the RTD
to prevent open wire detection from causing the SF LED to blink. The resistor must be the
nominal value of the RTD. For example, use 100 ohms for PT100 RTD .
420
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Table A-33 Temperature Ranges (°C) and Accuracy for RTD Types
System Word
(1 digit = 0.1 _C) Pt100, Pt200, Ni100, Ni120,
Pt10000 Cu10 0 - 150Ω 0 - 300Ω 0 - 600Ω
Pt500, Pt1000
Pt500 Ni10001
Decimal Hex
32767 7FF.
32766 7FFE ↑ ↑ ↑
32511 7EFF 176.383Ω 352.767Ω 705.534Ω
29649 6C01 150.005Ω 300.011Ω 600.022Ω
27648 6C00 150.000Ω 300.000Ω 600.000Ω
25000 61A8 ↑
18000 4650 OR
15000 3A98
13000 32C8 ↑ ↑
10000 2710 1000.0_C 1000.0_C
--32767 8001
--32768 8000
Accuracy over full span ±0.4% ±0.1% ±0.2% ±0.5% ±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.1%
Accuracy (normal range) ±4° C ±1° C ±0.6° C ±2.8° C ±0.15Ω ±0.3Ω ±0.6Ω
*OF = Overflow; OR = Overrange; NR = Normal range; UR= Underrange; UF = Underflow
↑ or ↓ indicate that all analog values exceeding the limits report the selected out-of-range value, 32767 (0x7FF.) or --32768 (0x8000).
1 The lower limit for the normal range of 1000 Ω Ni with an alpha of 0.006178 is 0 degrees C. and there is no underrange. The 1000 Ω Ni with an alpha of 0.00672
is shown in this table.
421
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
32767 7FF.
32766 7PHAGE
Overrange
↑ ↑
Normal Range
↓ ↓
--5000 EC78
--10500 D6FC ↓
--32767 8001
--32768 8000
↑ or ↓ indicate that all analog values exceeding the limits report the selected out of range value, 32767 (0x7FFF) or --32768 (0x8000).
1 The lower limit for the normal range of 1000 Ω Ni with an alpha of 0.006178 is 32 degrees F. and there is no underrange. The 1000 Ω Ni with an alpha of
0.00672 is shown in this table.
422
Technical Specifications Appendix A
1 No power is supplied to module logic by the 24 VDC supply. 24 VDC supplies power for the communications port.
423
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Pin # Description
9-pin D 1 Chassis ground, tied to the connector shell
Female 2 24V Return (same as M on terminal block)
Connector 3 Isolated Signal B (RxD/TxD+)
4 Isolated Request to Send (TTL level)
5 5 Isolated +5V Return
9 6 Isolated +5V (90 mA maximum)
7 +24V (120 mA maximum, with reverse
voltage protection diode)
8 Isolated Signal A (RxD/TxD--)
6 1 9 No Connection
424
Technical Specifications Appendix A
The EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module has implemented the DP Standard protocol as defined for
slave devices in the following communications protocol standards:
- EN 50 170 (PROFIBUS) describes the bus access and transfer protocol and specifies the
properties of the data transfer medium.
- EN 50 170 (DP Standard) describes the high-speed cyclic exchange of data between DP
masters and DP slaves. This standard defines the procedures for configuration and
parameter assignment, explains how cyclic data exchange with distributed I/O functions,
and lists the diagnostic options which are supported.
A DP master is configured to know the addresses, slave device types, and any parameter
assignment information that the slaves require. The master is also told where to place data that is
read from the slaves (inputs) and where to get the data to write to the slaves (outputs). The DP
master establishes the network and then initializes its DP slave devices. The master writes the
parameter assignment information and I/O configuration to the slave. The master then reads the
diagnostics from the slave to verify that the DP slave accepted the parameters and the I/O
configuration. The master then begins to exchange I/O data with the slave. Each transaction with
the slave writes outputs and reads inputs. The data exchange mode continues indefinitely. The
slave devices can notify the master if there is an exception condition and the master then reads
the diagnostic information from the slave.
Once a DP master has written the parameters and I/O configuration to a DP slave, and the slave
has accepted the parameters and configuration from the master, the master owns that slave. The
slave only accepts write requests from the master that owns it. Other masters on the network can
read the slave’s inputs and outputs, but they cannot write anything to the slave.
As a DP slave device, the EM 277 module accepts several different I/O configurations from the
master, allowing you to tailor the amount of data transferred to meet the requirements of the
application. Unlike many DP devices, the EM 277 module does not transfer only I/O data. Inputs,
counter values, timer values, or other calculated values can be transferred to the master by first
moving the data to the variable memory in the S7-200 CPU. Likewise, data from the master is
stored in variable memory in the S7-200 CPU and can be moved to other data areas.
425
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The DP port of the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module can be attached to a DP master on the
network and still communicate as an MPI slave with other master devices such as SIMATIC
programming devices or S7-300/S7-400 CPUs on the same network. Figure A-24 shows a
PROFIBUS network with a CPU 224 and an EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module.
Configuration
To use the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP as a CPU 224 CPU 315-2 DP
V memory I/O address areas
DP slave, you must set the station EM 277 P000
VB0
address of the DP port to match the PROFIBUS-- DP
Module
address in the configuration of the Offset:
5000 bytes
master. The station address is set with PI256
I/O input area:
the rotary switches on the EM 277 VB4999 16 bytes PI271
module. You must power cycle the CPU VB5000 Output buffer
(Receive mail-
after you have made a switch change in VB5015 box):16 bytes
order for the new slave address to take VB5016 Input buffer
effect. VB5031
(Send mailbox): PQ256
16 bytes I/O output area:
VB5032 16 bytes PQ271
The master device exchanges data with
each of its slaves by sending information VB5119
from its output area to the slave’s output VB: variable memory byte
P: peripheral
buffer (called a “Receive mailbox”). The PI: peripheral input
PQ: peripheral output
slave responds to the message from the
master byy returning
g an input
p buffer
(called a “Send mailbox”) which the Figure A-25 V Memory and I/O Address Area
master stores in an input area.
Figure A-25 shows an example of the V memory and I/O address area of a PROFIBUS--DP
Master.
The EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP can be configured by the DP master to accept output data from the
master and return input data to the master. The output and input data buffers reside in the variable
memory (V memory) of the S7-200 CPU. When you configure the DP master, you define the byte
location in V memory where the output data buffer should start as part of the parameter
assignment information for the EM 277. You also define the I/O configuration as the amount of
output data to be written to the S7-200 CPU and amount of input data to be returned from the
S7-200 CPU. The EM 277 determines the size of the input and output buffers from the I/O
configuration. The DP master writes the parameter assignment and I/O configuration information
to the EM 277 PROFIBUS DP module. The EM 277 then transfers the V memory address and
input and output data lengths to the S7-200 CPU.
Figure A-25 shows a memory model of the V memory in a CPU 224 and the I/O address areas of
a DP master CPU. In this example, the DP master has defined an I/O configuration of 16 output
bytes and 16 input bytes, and a V memory offset of 5000. The output buffer and input buffer
lengths in the CPU 224 (determined from the I/O configuration) are both 16 bytes long. The output
data buffer starts at V5000; the input buffer immediately follows the output buffer and begins at
V5016. The output data (from the master) is placed in V memory at V5000. The input data (to the
master) is taken from the V memory at V5016.
426
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Tip
If you are working with a data unit (consistent data) of three bytes or data units greater than four
bytes, you must use SFC14 to read the inputs of the DP slave and SFC15 to address the
outputs of the DP slave. For more information, see the System Software for S7-300 and S7-400
System and Standard Functions Reference Manual.
Table A-39 lists the configurations that are supported by the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module. The
default configuration for the EM 277 module is two words of input and two words of output.
You can configure the location of the input and output buffers to be anywhere in the V memory of
the S7-200 CPU. The default address for the input and output buffers is VB0. The location of the
input and output buffers is part of the parameter assignment information that the master writes to
the S7-200 CPU. You configure the master to recognize its slaves and to write the required
parameters and I/O configuration to each of its slaves.
427
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Data Consistency
PROFIBUS supports three types of data Master Slave
consistency: Byte 0 Byte 0
Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte consistency
Byte 2 Byte 2
- Byte consistency ensures that Byte 3 Byte 3
bytes are transferred as whole Byte 0 Byte 0
units. Byte 1 Byte 1 Word consistency
- Word consistency ensures that Byte 2 Byte 2
Byte 3 Byte 3
word transfers cannot be
Byte 0 Byte 0
interrupted by other processes in Byte 1 Byte 1
the CPU (the two bytes composing Byte 2 Byte 2
the word are always moved Byte 3 Byte 3 Buffer consistency
together and cannot be split). Use Byte 4 Byte 4
Byte 5 Byte 5
Word consistency if the data
Byte 6 Byte 6
values being transferred are Byte 7 Byte 7
integers.
Figure A-26 Byte, Word, and Buffer Data Consistency
- Buffer consistency ensures that the entire buffer of data is transferred as a single unit,
uninterrupted by any other process in the CPU. Buffer consistency should be used if the
data values are double words or floating point values or when a group of values all relate to
one calculation or item.
You set the data consistency as part of the I/O configuration in the master. The data consistency
selection is written to the DP slave as part of the initialization of the slave. Both the DP master and
the DP slave use the data consistency selection to be sure that data values (bytes, words, or
buffers) are transferred uninterrupted within master and slave. The different types of consistency
are shown in Figure A-26.
The output data from the master must be moved by the user program in the S7-200 CPU from the
output buffer to the data areas where it is to be used. Likewise, the input data to the master must
be moved from the various data areas to the input buffer for transfer to the master.
Output data from the DP master is placed into V memory immediately after the user program
portion of the scan has been executed. Input data (to the master) is copied from V memory to the
EM 277 for transfer to the master at the same time.
Output data from the master is only written into V memory when there is new data available from
the master.
Input data to the master are transmitted to the master on the next data exchange with the master.
The starting address of the data buffers in V memory and the size of the buffers must be known at
the time the user program for the S7-200 CPU is created.
428
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Status Information
There are 50 bytes of special memory (SM) allocated to each intelligent module based on its
physical position. The module updates the SM locations corresponding to the modules’ relative
position to the CPU (with respect to other modules). If it is the first module, it updates SMB200
through SMB249. If it is the second module, it updates SMB250 through SMB299, and so on. See
Table A-40.
These SM locations show default values if DP communications have not been established with a
master. After a master has written parameters and I/O configuration to the EM 277
PROFIBUS--DP module, these SM locations show the configuration set by the DP master. You
should check the protocol status byte (for example SMB224 for slot 0) to be sure that the EM 277
is currently in data exchange mode with the master before using the information in the SM
locations shown in Table A-41, or data in the V memory buffer.
Tip
You cannot configure the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP I/O buffer sizes or buffer location by writing to
SM memory locations. Only the DP master can configure the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module
for DP operation.
Note: SM locations are updated each time the DP slave module accepts configuration/ parameterization information. These
locations are updated even if a configuration/parameterization error is detected. The locations are cleared on each
power up.
429
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
- After the S7-200 CPU is turned on, the DX MODE LED remains off as long as DP
communications are not attempted.
- Once DP communications have been successfully initiated (the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP
module has entered data exchange mode with the master), the DX MODE LED turns green
and remains on until data exchange mode is exited.
- If DP communications are lost, which forces the EM 277 module to exit data exchange
mode, the DX MODE LED turns OFF and the DP ERROR LED turns red. This condition
persists until the S7-200 CPU is powered off or data exchange is resumed.
- If there is an error in the I/O configuration or parameter information that the DP master is
writing to the EM 277 module, the DP ERROR LED flashes red.
- If user 24 VDC is not provided, the POWER LED will be off.
Table A-42 summarizes the status indications signified by the EM 277 status LEDs.
A maximum of six connections (six devices) in addition to the DP master can be connected to the
EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module. One connection is reserved for a programming device (PG) and
one is reserved for an operator panel (OP). The other four connections can be used by any MPI
master. In order for the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module to communicate with multiple masters, all
masters must be operating at the same baud rate. See the Figure A-27 for one possible network
configuration.
When the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module is used for MPI communications, the MPI master must
use the station address of the module for all messages that are sent to the S7-200 to which the
module is connected. MPI messages sent to the EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module are passed on
to the S7-200.
The EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP module is a slave module and cannot be used for communications
between S7-200 PLCs using the NETR and NETW functions. The EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP
module cannot be used for Freeport communications.
430
Technical Specifications Appendix A
S7-300
PROFIBUS--DP
XPUTS/XGETS STEP 7--Micro/WIN1 TD 2001,2
Master
Functions
PROFIBUS--DP
MPI
EM 277
PROFIBUS--DP 1) Communications are possible only to the
Module S7-200 CPUs and the EM 277.
2) TD 200 must be Rel 2.0 or greater.
S7-22x CPU
The device database file provides a comprehensive description of the characteristics of a device
in a precisely defined format. These GSD files are prepared by the vendor for each type of device
and made available to the PROFIBUS user. The GSD file allows the configuration system to read
in the characteristics of a PROFIBUS device and use this information when configuring the
network.
The latest versions of the COM PROFIBUS or STEP 7 software include configuration files for the
EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP Module. If your version of software does not include a configuration file
for the EM 277, you can access the latest GSD file (SIEM089D.GSD) at website
www.profibus.com.
If you are using a non-Siemens master device, refer to the documentation provided by the
manufacturer on how to configure the master device by using the GSD file.
431
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
;================================================
; GSD File for the EM 277 PROFIBUS-DP with a DPC31
; MLFB : 6ES7 277-0AA2.-0XA0 ;================================================
; DATE : 26-March-2001 ; Continuation of GSD File
;================================================ ;================================================
#Profibus_DP
;General parameters ; Module Definition List
GSD_Revision = 1 Module = ”2 Bytes Out/ 2 Bytes In -” 0x31
Vendor_Name = ”Siemens” EndModule
Model_Name = ”EM 277 PROFIBUS-DP” Module = ”8 Bytes Out/ 8 Bytes In -” 0x37
Revision = ”V1.02” EndModule
Ident_Number = 0x089D Module = ”32 Bytes Out/ 32 Bytes In -”
Protocol_Ident = 0 0xC0,0x1F,0x1F
Station_Type = 0 EndModule
FMS_supp = 0 Module = ”64 Bytes Out/ 64 Bytes In -”
Hardware_Release = ”1.00” 0xC0,0x3F,0x3F
Software_Release = ”1.02” EndModule
9.6_supp = 1 Module = ”1 Word Out/ 1 Word In -” 0x70
19.2_supp = 1 EndModule
45.45_supp = 1 Module = ”2 Word Out/ 2 Word In -” 0x71
93.75_supp = 1 EndModule
187.5_supp = 1 Module = ”4 Word Out/ 4 Word In -” 0x73
500_supp = 1 EndModule
1.5M_supp = 1 Module = ”8 Word Out/ 8 Word In -” 0x77
3M_supp = 1 EndModule
6M_supp = 1 Module = ”16 Word Out/ 16 Word In -” 0x7F
12M_supp = 1 EndModule
MaxTsdr_9.6 = 60 Module = ”32 Word Out/ 32 Word In -”
MaxTsdr_19.2 = 60 0xC0,0x5F,0x5F
MaxTsdr_45.45 = 250 EndModule
MaxTsdr_93.75 = 60 Module = ”2 Word Out/ 8 Word In -”
MaxTsdr_187.5 = 60 0xC0,0x41,0x47
MaxTsdr_500 = 100 EndModule
MaxTsdr_1.5M = 150 Module = ”4 Word Out/ 16 Word In -”
MaxTsdr_3M = 250 0xC0,0x43,0x4F
MaxTsdr_6M = 450 EndModule
MaxTsdr_12M = 800 Module = ”8 Word Out/ 32 Word In -”
Redundancy = 0 0xC0,0x47,0x5F
Repeater_Ctrl_Sig = 2 EndModule
24V_Pins = 2 Module = ”8 Word Out/ 2 Word In -”
0xC0,0x47,0x41
; Slave-Specification: EndModule
OrderNumber=”6ES7 277-0AA2.-0XA0” Module = ”16 Word Out/ 4 Word In -”
Periphery=”SIMATIC S5” 0xC0,0x4F,0x43
Slave_Family=10@TdF@SIMATIC EndModule
Module = ”32 Word Out/ 8 Word In -”
Freeze_Mode_supp = 1 0xC0,0x5F,0x47
Sync_Mode_supp = 1 EndModule
Set_Slave_Add_Supp = 0 Module = ”4 Byte buffer I/O -” 0xB3
Auto_Baud_supp = 1 EndModule
Min_Slave_Intervall = 1 Module = ”8 Byte buffer I/O -” 0xB7
Fail_Safe = 0 EndModule
Max_Diag_Data_Len = 6 Module = ”12 Byte buffer I/O -” 0xBB
Modul_Offset = 0 EndModule
Modular_Station = 1 Module = ”16 Byte buffer I/O -” 0xBF
Max_Module = 1 EndModule
Max_Input_len = 128
Max_Output_len = 128
Max_Data_len = 256
; UserPrmData-Definition
ExtUserPrmData=1 ”I/O Offset in the V-memory”
Unsigned16 0 0-10239
EndExtUserPrmData
; UserPrmData: Length and Preset:
User_Prm_Data_Len=3
User_Prm_Data= 0,0,0
Max_User_Prm_Data_Len=3
Ext_User_Prm_Data_Const(0)=0x00,0x00,0x00
Ext_User_Prm_Data_Ref(1)=1
Figure A-28 Listing of the GSD File for the EM 277 PROFIBUS Module
432
Technical Specifications Appendix A
In the following sample program for a DP module in position 0, the DP configuration data in the
SM memory area provides the configuration of the DP slave. The program uses the following data:
433
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
434
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Telephone Connection
Isolation
(phone line to logic and field power) 1500 VAC (Galvanic)
Physical connection RJ11 (6 position, 4 wire)
Modem standards Bell 103, Bell 212, V.21, V.22, V.22 bis, V.23c, V.32, V.32 bis,
V.34 (default)
Security features Password
Callback
Dialing Pulse or Tone
Messaging Protocols Numeric
TAP (alphanumeric)
UCP commands 1, 30, 51
Industrial Protocols Modbus
PPI
24 VDC Input Power Requirements
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Isolation (field power to logic) 500 VAC for 1 minute
435
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Caution
Lightning surges or other unexpected high voltages on the telephone line can damage your EM
241 Modem Module.
Use a commercially available telephone line surge protector, such as are commonly sold for
protection of personal computer modems. Surge protectors can be damaged as they protect
your EM 241 Modem Module. Choose a surge protector with a positive indicator that shows it is
functional.
Check your surge protector regularly to ensure that your EM 241 Modem Module continues to
be protected.
436
Technical Specifications Appendix A
1 Eight Q outputs are used as logical controls of the motion function and do not directly control any external signals.
Input Voltage
Maximum Continuous permissible
STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-- 30 VDC
ZP 30 VDC at 20 mA, maximum
Surge (all inputs) 35 VDC for 0.5 sec.
Rated Value
STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-- 24 VDC at 4 mA, nominal
ZP 24 VDC at 15 mA, nominal
Logic “1” signal (minimum)
STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-- 15 VDC at 2.5 mA, minimum
ZP 3 VDC at 8.0 mA, minimum
Logic “0” signal (maximum)
STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-- 5 VDC at 1 mA, maximum
ZP 1 VDC at 1 mA, maximum
Cable Length
Unshielded
STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-- 30 meters
ZP Not recommended
Shielded
STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-- 100 meters
ZP 10 meters
437
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Output delay
DIS, CLR: Off to On / On to Off 30 µs, maximum
Pulse distortion
P0, P1, outputs, RS--422 drivers, 100 Ω external 75 ns maximum
load
P0, P1 outputs, open drain, 5 V / 470 Ω external 300 ns maximum
load
Switching frequency
P0+, P0--, P1+, P1--, P0 and P1 200 kHz
Cable length
Unshielded Not recommended
Shielded 10 meters
Power Supply
L+ supply voltage 11 to 30 VDC (Class 2, Limited Power, or sensor power from PLC)
Logic supply output +5 VDC +/-- 10%, 200 mA maximum
L supply
L+ l currentt vs. 5 VDC load
l d
Load current
12 VDC Input 24 VDC Input
0 mA (no load)
120 mA 70 mA
200 mA (rated load)
300 mA 130 mA
Isolation
L+ power to logic 500 VAC for 1 minute
L+ power to inputs 500 VAC for 1 minute
L+ power to outputs None
Reverse Polarity L+ input and +5V output are diode-protected. Placing a positive voltage on any M
terminal with respect to output point connections can result in potentially damaging
current flow.
1 Operation of open drain outputs above 5 VDC may increase radio frequency emissions above permissible limits. Radio frequency containment measures
may be required for your system or wiring.
2 Depending on your pulse receiver and cable, an additional external pull up resistor may improve pulse signal quality and noise immunity.
438
Technical Specifications Appendix A
439
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Wiring Diagrams
In the following schematic figures, the terminals are not in order. See Figure A-31 for terminal
arrangement.
+5VDC
L+
T1
P/S 3.3K
P0
M
5.6K
STOP
3.3K
1K P1
1M
5.6K
RPS
3.3K
DIS
1K
2M
ZP 3.3K
CLR
3M
P0+
5.6K
LMT+
P0--
1K
P1+
5.6K
LMT-- P1--
M
1K
M
4M
Figure A-32 Internal Schematic for the Inputs and Outputs of the EM 253 Position Module
24V_RTN P0
M
24V_RTN GND
STOP
3.3K
P1
1M
ENABLE
RPS
3.3K
DIS ENABLE_N
Terminals are not in
2M
order. See Figure
ZP 3.3K A-31 for terminal
CLR arrangement.
3M
P0+ PULSE
LMT+
P0-- PULSE_N
P1+ DIR
M GND
1K
M GND
4M
440
Technical Specifications Appendix A
24V_RTN P0
M
STOP
3.3K
P1
1M
+
Terminals are not in
RPS
3.3K SD order. See Figure
DIS A-31 for terminal
2M arrangement.
ZP 3.3K
CLR
3M
P0+ +
LMT+
STP
P0--
P1+ +
DIR
LMT-- P1--
M
M
4M
Figure A-34 Connecting an EM 253 Position Module to a Industrial Devices Corp. (Next Step)
3M
P0+
LMT+
P0--
P1+
LMT--
P1--
M
4M M
Figure A-35 Connecting an EM 253 Position Module to an Oriental Motor UPK Standard
441
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
24V_RTN P0
M
STOP
3.3K DIR
P1
1M
RPS
3.3K
Terminals are not in
DIS
order. See Figure
2M A-31 for terminal
ZP 3.3K
arrangement.
CLR
3M
P0+
LMT+
P0-- Step
P1+
LMT-- P1--
M
M
4M
442
Technical Specifications Appendix A
1 Eight Q outputs are used as logical controls of Ethernet function and do not directly control any external signals.
2 Only one (CP 243--1) Ethernet module should be connected per S7--200 CPU.
The (CP 243--1) Ethernet module is a communications processor used for connecting the S7-200
system to Industrial Ethernet (IE). The S7-200 can be remotely configured, programmed and
diagnosed via Ethernet using STEP 7 Micro/WIN. The S7-200 can communicate with another
S7--200, S7-300, or S7-400 controller via Ethernet. It can also communicate with an OPC server.
Industrial Ethernet is designed for industry. It can be used with either noise-free industrial twisted
pair (ITP) technology, or the Industry-standard twisted pair (TP) technology. Industrial Ethernet can
be implemented to offer a wide range of application specific uses, such as switching, high-speed
redundancy, fast connects, and redundant networks. Using the (CP 243--1) Ethernet module, the
S7-200 PLC is made compatible with a wide range of existing products that support Ethernet.
443
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table A-56 (CP 243--1) Ethernet Module Compatibility with S7-200 CPUs
CPU Description
CPU 222 Rel. 1.10 or greater CPU 222 DC/DC/DC and CPU 222 AC/DC/Relay
CPU 224 Rel. 1.10 or greater CPU 224 DC/DC/DC and CPU 224 AC/DC/Relay
CPU 224XP Rel. 2.00 or greater CPU 224XP DC/DC/DC and CPU 224XP AC/DC/Relay
CPU 226 Rel. 1.00 or greater CPU 226 DC/DC/DC and CPU 226 AC/DC/Relay
The (CP 243--1) Ethernet module is delivered with a preset, unique worldwide MAC address that
cannot be changed.
Functions
The (CP 243--1) Ethernet module independently handles data traffic over the Industrial Ethernet.
Configuration
You can use the STEP 7--Micro/WIN Ethernet Wizard to configure the (CP 243--1) Ethernet
Ethernet
module to connect an S7-200 PLC to an Ethernet network. The Ethernet wizard helps you define
the parameters for the (CP 243--1) Ethernet module and then places the configuration instructions
in your project instruction folder. To start the Ethernet Wizard, select the Tools > Ethernet Wizard
menu command. The wizard uses the following information: IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway
Address, and communications connection type.
Connections Integrated
The (CP 243--1) Ethernet module has the ribbon cable
following connections. The connections are with socket Connector
for I/O bus for I/O bus
located under the covers of the front doors.
Additional Information
For more information about the (CP 243--1) Ethernet module, refer to the
SIMATIC NET CP 243--1 Communications Processor for Industrial Ethernet Technical Manual.
444
Technical Specifications Appendix A
1 Eight Q outputs are used as logical controls of the IT function and do not directly control any external signals.
1 Only one (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module should be connected per S7--200 CPU.
445
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module is a communications processor used for connecting the
S7-200 system to Industrial Ethernet (IE). The S7-200 can be remotely configured, programmed
and diagnosed via Ethernet using STEP 7 Micro/WIN. The S7-200 can communicate with another
S7--200, S7-300, or S7-400 controller via Ethernet. It can also communicate with an OPC server.
The IT functions of the (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module form the basis for monitoring and, if
necessary, also manipulating automation systems with a WEB browser from a networked PC.
Diagnostic messages can be e-mailed from a system. Using the IT functions, it is easy to
exchange entire files with other computer and controller systems.
Industrial Ethernet is the network for the process control level and the cell level of the SIMATIC
NET open communication system. Physically, Industrial Ethernet is an electrical network based on
shielded, coaxial lines, twisted pair cables and an optical network of fiber optic conductors.
Industrial Ethernet is defined by the International Standard IEEE 802.3.
Table A-60 (CP 243--1 IT) Internet Module Compatibility with S7-200 CPUs
CPU Description
CPU 222 Rel. 1.10 or greater CPU 222 DC/DC/DC and CPU 222 AC/DC/Relay
CPU 224 Rel. 1.10 or greater CPU 224 DC/DC/DC and CPU 224 AC/DC/Relay
CPU 224XP Rel. 2.00 or greater CPU 224XP DC/DC/DC and CPU 224XP AC/DC/Relay
CPU 226 Rel. 1.00 or greater CPU 226 DC/DC/DC and CPU 226 AC/DC/Relay
The (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module has the following features:
- The (CPU 243--1 IT) Internet module is fully compatible with the (CP 243--1) Ethernet
module. User programs written for the (CP 243--1) Ethernet module can also be run on the
(CP 243--1 IT) Internet module.
The (CP 243--1 1T) Internet module is delivered with a preset, unique worldwide MAC address
that cannot be changed.
Tip
Only one (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module should be connected per S7-200 CPU. If more than
one (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module is connected, the S7-200 CPU may not operate properly.
Functions
The (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module offers the following functions:
446
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Configuration
You can use the STEP 7--Micro/WIN Internet Wizard to configure the (CP 243--1 IT) Internet
module to connect an S7-200 PLC to an Ethernet/Internet network. The (CP 243--1 IT) Internet
module has additional web server functionality that can be configured with the Internet Wizard. To
Internet start the Internet Wizard, select the Tools > Internet Wizard menu command.
Connections
Integrated
The (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module has the ribbon cable
following connections. The connections are with socket
Connector
located under the covers of the front doors. for I/O bus
for I/O bus
Additional Information
For more information about the (CP 243--1 IT) Internet module, refer to the
SIMATIC NET CP 243--1 IT Communications Processor for Industrial Ethernet and Information
Technology Technical Manual.
447
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
6GK7 243--2AX01--0XA0 (CP 243--2) AS--Interface Module 8 Digital and 8 Analog 8 Digital and8 Analog Yes
VDC Requirements
Module Name and Dimensions (mm)
Order Number Weight Dissipation +5 VDC From
Description (W x H x D)
AS-- Interface
Features
You can operate up to two AS--Interface modules on the S7-200 at the same time, significantly
increasing the number of available digital and analog inputs/outputs (maximum 124 digital
input/124 digital output on AS--Interface per CP). Setup times are reduced because of the ability to
configure at the touch of a button. LEDs reduce downtime in the event of an error by displaying
status of the CP and of all connected slaves, and by monitoring AS--Interface main voltage.
448
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Operation
In the process image of the S7-200, the AS--Interface Module occupies a digital input byte (status
byte), a digital output byte (control byte), 8 analog input and 8 analog output words. The
AS--Interface Module uses two logical module positions. You can use the status and the control
byte to set the mode of the AS--Interface Module using a user program. Depending on its mode,
the AS--Interface stores either the I/O data of the AS--Interface slave, diagnostics values, or
enables master calls (for example, changing a slave address) in the analog address area of the
S7-200.
All the connected AS--Interface slaves can be configured at the touch of a button. Further
configuration of the CP is not necessary.
Caution
When you use the AS--Interface Module, you must disable analog filtering in the CPU.
If analog filtering is not disabled in the CPU, the digital point data will be destroyed, and error
conditions will not be returned as bit values in the analog word.
Ensure that analog filtering in the CPU is disabled.
Functions
The CP 243--2 is the AS--Interface master for the M1e master class, which means that it supports
all the specified functions. This makes it possible to operate up to 31 digital slaves on the
AS--Interface by means of double address assignment (A--B). The CP 243--2 can be set to two
different modes:
Caution
The load capacity of the AS--Interface Module contacts is a maximum of 3 A. If this value is
exceeded on the AS--Interface Module cable, the AS--Interface must not be looped into the AS--I
cable, but must be connected by a separate cable (in this case, only one pair of terminals of the
AS--Interface Module is used). The AS--Interface must be connected to the grounding conductor
via the ground terminal.
Tip
The AS--Interface Module has a connection for functional ground. This connector should be
connected to the PE conductor with as little resistance as possible.
Additional Information
For more information about the CP 243--2 AS--Interface Master, refer to the SIMATIC NET CP
243--2 AS-Interface Master manual.
449
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Optional Cartridges
Cartridge Description Order Number
Memory cartridge Memory cartridge, 32K (user program) 6ES7 291--8GE20--0XA0
Memory cartridge Memory cartridge, 64K (user program, recipe, and data logging) 6ES7 291--8GF23--0XA0
Memory cartridge Memory cartridge, 256K (user program, recipe, and data logging) 6ES7 291--8GH23--0XA0
10 mm
18 mm
Memory Cartridge
There are restrictions for using memory cartridges between CPUs of a different model. Memory
cartridges programmed in a particular model number CPU can be read by CPUs with the same or
higher model number as shown in Table A-64:
The 64K and 256K memory cartridges are designed to work only with the new CPUs that have the
order number as shown here: 6ES7 21x--xx23--0XB0. Each “x” means that this digit is a don’t
care.
It is recommended that you do not use the 32K memory cartridge (6ES7 291--8GE20--0XA0) in
version “23” CPUs because 32K memory cartridge cannot support the new CPU functionality. If
you use a version “23” CPU to store a program on a 32K memory cartridge, the programmed
cartridge is intentionally made compatible with most earlier CPU versions. None of the advanced
functionality of the new CPUs can be stored in a 32K memory cartridge.
You may have user programs stored on 32K memory cartridges originally programmed by older
CPUs (version “20”, “21”, or “22”). These cartridges can be read by the new CPUs, subject to the
model number restrictions in Table A-64.
450
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Weight 25 g
Female Connector
Male Connector
Tip
Only one expansion cable is allowed in a CPU/expansion module chain.
451
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table A-65 RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable and USB/PPI Multi-Master Cable Specifications
Description S7-200 RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable S7-200 USB/PPI Multi-Master Cable
Order Number 6ES7 901-- 3CB30-- 0XA0 6ES7-- 901-- 3DB30-- 0XA0
General Characteristics
Supply voltage 14.4 to 28.8 VDC 14.4 to 28.8 VDC
Supply current at 24 V nominal supply 60 mA RMS max. 50 mA RMS max.
Direction change delay: RS-232 stop bit edge received -- --
to RS-485 transmission disabled
Isolation RS-485 to RS-232: 500 VDC RS-485 to USB: 500 VDC
RS-485 Side Electrical Characteristics
Common mode voltage range --7 V to +12 V, 1 second, 3 V RMS continuous --7 V to +12 V, 1 second, 3 V RMS continuous
Receiver input impedance 5.4 K Ω min. including termination 5.4 K Ω min. including termination
Termination/bias 10K Ω to +5 V on B, PROFIBUS pin 3 10K Ω to +5 V on B, PROFIBUS pin 3
10K Ω to GND on A, PROFIBUS pin 8 10K Ω to GND on A, PROFIBUS pin 8
Receiver threshold/sensitivity +/--0.2 V, 60 mV typical hysteresis +/--0.2 V, 60 mV typical hysteresis
Transmitter differential output voltage 2 V min. at RL=100 Ω, 2 V min. at RL=100 Ω,
1.5 V min. at RL=54 Ω 1.5 V min. at RL=54 Ω
RS-232 Side Electrical Characteristics
Receiver input impedance 3K Ω min. --
Receiver threshold/sensitivity 0.8 V min. low, 2.4 V max. high --
0.5 V typical hysteresis
Transmitter output voltage +/-- 5 V min. at RL=3K Ω --
USB Side Electrical Characteristics
Full speed (12 MB/s), Human Interface Device (HID)
Supply current at 5V -- 50 mA max.
Power down current -- 400 uA max.
Features
The S7-200 RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable comes factory set for optimal performance with the
STEP 7--Micro/WIN 3.2 Service Pack 4 (or later) programming package. The factory setting for
this cable is different than for the PC/PPI cables. Refer to Figure 1 to configure the cable for your
application.
You can configure the S7-200 RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable to operate the same as the PC/PPI
cable and to be compatible with any version of a STEP 7--Micro/WIN programming package by
setting Switch 5 to the PPI/Freeport setting and then selecting your required baud rate.
The USB cable requires STEP 7--Micro/WIN 3.2 Service Pack 4 (or later) programming package
for operation.
Tip
For information about the PC/PPI cable refer to Edition 3 of the S7--200 Programmable
Controller Manual order number (6ES7 298--8FA22--8BH0).
452
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Table A-67 S7-200 RS-232/PPI Multi--Master Cable -- Pin-outs for RS-485 to RS-232 Remote Mode
Connector
RS-485 Connector Pin-out RS-232 Remote Connector Pin-out1
Pin Number Signal Description Pin Number Signal Description
1 No connect 1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) (not used)
2 24 V Return (RS-485 logic ground) 2 Receive Data (RD) (input to PC/PPI
cable)
3 Signal B (RxD/TxD+) 3 Transmit Data (TD) (output from PC/PPI
cable)
4 RTS (TTL level) 4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)2
5 No connect 5 Ground (RS-232 logic ground)
6 No connect 6 Data Set Ready (DSR)2
7 24 V Supply 7 Request To Send (RTS)
(output from PC/PPI cable)
8 Signal A (RxD/TxD--) 8 Clear To Send (CTS) (not used)
9 Protocol select 9 Ring Indicator (RI) (not used)
1 A conversion from female to male, and a conversion from 9-pin to 25-pin is required for modems.
2 Pins 4 and 6 are connected internally.
453
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Use the S7-200 RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable with STEP 7--Micro/WIN 3.2
Service Pack 4 (or later)
For connection directly to your personal computer:
Figure A-41 shows the S7-200 RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable dimensions, label and LEDs.
130 mm
0.8 m 4.7 m
51 mm
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88
Kbaud 123
115.2 110 8 Spare
57.6 111 7 1=10 Bit
38.4 000 0=11 Bit
19.2 001 6 1=Remote / DTE
9.6 010 0= Local / DCE
4.8 011 5 1=PPI (M Master)
2.4 100 0=PPI/Freeport
1.2 101 4 Spare
Figure A-41 S7-200 RS-232/PPI Multi-Master Cable Dimensions, Label and LEDs
454
Technical Specifications Appendix A
Table A-68 S7-200 USB/PPI Multi-Master Cable -- Pin-outs for the RS-485 to USB Series “A” Connector
RS-485 Connector Pin-out USB Connector Pin-out
Pin Number Signal Description Pin Number Signal Description
1 No connect 1 USB -- DataP
2 24 V Return (RS-485 logic ground) 2 USB -- DataM
3 Signal B (RxD/TxD+) 3 USB 5V
4 RTS (TTL level) 4 USB logic ground
5 No connect
6 No connect
7 24 V Supply
8 Signal A (RxD/TxD--)
9 Protocol select (low = 10 bit)
Figure A-42 shows the S7-200 USB/PPI Multi-Master Cable dimensions and LEDs.
130 mm
0.8 m 4.7 m
51 mm
455
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Input Simulators
Points 8 14 24
26 mm
Warning
These input simulators are not approved for use in Class I DIV 2 or Class I Zone 2 hazardous locations. The
switches present a potential spark hazard.
Do not use input simulators in Class I DIV 2 or Class I Zone 2 hazardous locations.
456
Calculating a Power Budget
The S7-200 CPU has an internal power supply that provides power for the CPU itself, for any
expansion modules, and for other 24 VDC user power requirements. Use the following information
as a guide for determining how much power (or current) the S7-200 CPU can provide for your
configuration.
Power Requirements
Each S7-200 CPU supplies both 5 VDC and 24 VDC power:
- Each CPU has a 24 VDC sensor supply that can supply 24 VDC for local input points or for
relay coils on the expansion modules. If the power requirement for 24 VDC exceeds the
power budget of the CPU, you can add an external 24 VDC power supply to provide
24 VDC to the expansion modules. You must manually connect the 24 VDC supply to the
input points or relay coils.
- The CPU also provides 5 VDC power for the expansion modules when an expansion
module is connected. If the 5 VDC power requirements for expansion modules exceeds the
power budget of the CPU, you must remove expansion modules until the requirement is
within the power budget.
The specifications in Appendix A provide information about the power budgets of the CPUs and
the power requirements of the expansion modules.
Tip
If the CPU power budget is exceeded, you may not be able to connect the maximum number of
modules allowed for your CPU.
Warning
Connecting an external 24 VDC power supply in parallel with the S7-200 DC Sensor Supply can
result in a conflict between the two supplies as each seeks to establish its own preferred output
voltage level.
The result of this conflict can be shortened lifetime or immediate failure of one or both power
supplies, with consequent unpredictable operation of the PLC system. Unpredictable operation
could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
The S7-200 DC Sensor Supply and any external power supply should provide power to different
points. A single connection of the commons is allowed.
457
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Tip
The CPU has already allocated the power required to drive the internal relay coils. You do not
need to include the internal relay coil power requirements in a power budget calculation.
The S7-200 CPU in this example provides sufficient 5 VDC current for the expansion modules, but
does not provide enough 24 VDC current from the sensor supply for all of the inputs and
expansion relay coils. The I/O requires 400 mA and the S7-200 CPU provides only 280 mA. This
installation requires an additional source of at least 120 mA at 24 VDC power to operate all the
included 24 VDC inputs and outputs.
minus
equals
458
Calculating a Power Budget Appendix B
minus
Total Requirements
equals
459
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
460
Error Codes
The information about error codes is provided to help you identify problems with your S7-200
CPU.
In This Chapter
Fatal Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Run-Time Programming Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Compile Rule Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
461
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
The S7--200 performs the following tasks when a fatal error is detected:
Table C-1 Fatal Error Codes and Messages Read from the S7--200
Error Code Description
0000 No fatal errors present
0001 User program checksum error
0002 Compiled ladder program checksum error
0003 Scan watchdog time-out error
0004 Permanent memory failed
0005 Permanent memory checksum error on user program
0006 Permanent memory checksum error on configuration (SDB0) parameters
0007 Permanent memory checksum error on force data
0008 Permanent memory checksum error on default output table values
0009 Permanent memory checksum error on user data, DB1
000A Memory cartridge failed
000B Memory cartridge checksum error on user program.
000C Memory cartridge checksum error on configuration (SDB0) parameters
000D Memory cartridge checksum error on force data
000E Memory cartridge checksum error on default output table values
000F Memory cartridge checksum error on user data, DB1
0010 Internal software error
00111 Compare contact indirect addressing error
00121 Compare contact illegal floating point value
0013 Program is not understood by this S7-200
00141 Compare contact range error
1 The compare contact errors are the only errors that generate both fatal and non-fatal error conditions. The
reason for the generation of the non-fatal error condition is to save the program address of the error.
462
Error Codes Appendix C
463
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
464
Special Memory (SM) Bits
Special memory bits provide a variety of status and control functions, and also serve as a means
of communicating information between the S7-200 and your program. Special memory bits can be
used as bits, bytes, words, or double words.
In This Chapter
SMB0: Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
SMB1: Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
SMB2: Freeport Receive Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
SMB3: Freeport Parity Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
SMB4: Queue Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
SMB5: I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
SMB6: CPU ID Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
SMB7: Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
SMB8 to SMB21: I/O Module ID and Error Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
SMW22 to SMW26: Scan Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
SMB28 and SMB29: Analog Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
SMB30 and SMB130: Freeport Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
SMB31 and SMW32: Permanent Memory (EEPROM) Write Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
SMB34 and SMB35: Time Interval Registers for Timed Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
SMB36 to SMB65: HSC0, HSC1, and HSC2 Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
SMB66 to SMB85: PTO/PWM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
SMB86 to SMB94, and SMB186 to SMB194: Receive Message Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
SMW98: Errors on the Expansion I/O Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
SMB130: Freeport Control Register (see SMB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
SMB131 to SMB165: HSC3, HSC4, and HSC5 Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
SMB166 to SMB185: PTO0, PTO1 Profile Definition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
SMB186 to SMB194: Receive Message Control (see SMB86 to SMB94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
SMB200 to SMB549: Intelligent Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
465
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
466
Special Memory (SM) Bits Appendix D
Tip
SMB2 and SMB3 are shared between Port 0 and Port 1. When the reception of a character on
Port 0 results in the execution of the interrupt routine attached to that event (interrupt event 8),
SMB2 contains the character received on Port 0, and SMB3 contains the parity status of that
character. When the reception of a character on Port 1 results in the execution of the interrupt
routine attached to that event (interrupt event 25), SMB2 contains the character received on
Port 1 and SMB3 contains the parity status of that character.
467
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
SM6.0 to
Reserved
SM6.3
SM6.4 to xxxx = 0000 = CPU 222
SM6.7 0010 = CPU 224
0110 = CPU 221
1001 = CPU 226/CPU 226XM
SMB7: Reserved
SMB7 is reserved for future use.
468
Special Memory (SM) Bits Appendix D
469
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
SM30.0 and SM130.0 and mm: Protocol selection 00 =Point-to-Point Interface protocol
SM30.1 SM130.1 (PPI/slave mode)
01 =Freeport protocol
10 =PPI/master mode
11 =Reserved (defaults to PPI/slave mode)
Note: When you select code mm = 10 (PPI master), the S7-200 will become a
master on the network and allow the NETR and NETW instructions to be
executed. Bits 2 through 7 are ignored in PPI modes.
SM30.2 to SM130.2 to bbb: Freeport Baud rate 000 =38,400 baud 100 =2,400 baud
SM30.4 SM130.4 001 =19,200 baud 101 =1,200 baud
010 =9,600 baud 110 =115,200 baud
011 =4,800 baud 111 =57,600 baud
SM30.5 SM130.5 d: Data bits per character 0 =8 bits per character
1 =7 bits per character
SM30.6 and SM130.6 and pp: Parity select 00 =no parity 10 =odd parity
SM30.7 SM130.7 01 =even parity 11 =odd parity
470
Special Memory (SM) Bits Appendix D
At the end of each scan, the S7-200 checks to see if a command to save a value to permanent
memory was issued. If the command was issued, the specified value is saved to permanent
memory.
As described in Table D-12, SMB31 defines the size of the data to be saved to permanent
memory and provides the command that initiates a save operation. SMW32 stores the starting
address in V memory for the data to be saved to permanent memory.
Table D-12 Special Memory Byte SMB31 and Special Memory Word SMW32
SM Byte Description
Format SMB31: MSB LSB
7 0
Software
command c 0 0 0 0 0 s s
MSB LSB
SMW32: 15 0
V memory
address V memory address
471
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
472
Special Memory (SM) Bits Appendix D
473
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Table D-16 Special Memory Bytes SMB86 to SMB94, and SMB186 to SMB194
Port 0 Port 1 Description
SMB86 SMB186 Receive Message status byte
MSB LSB
7 0
n r e 0 0 t c p
en sc ec il c/m tmr bk 0
474
Special Memory (SM) Bits Appendix D
475
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
476
Special Memory (SM) Bits Appendix D
For an S7-200 CPU with firmware prior to version 1.2, you must install the intelligent module next
to the CPU in order to ensure compatibility.
477
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
478
S7-200 Order Numbers
479
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
480
S7-200 Order Numbers Appendix E
1 Includes one blank overlay for customization. For additional blank overlays, order the TD 200C Faceplate Overlays.
481
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
482
Execution Times for STL Instructions
Instruction execution times are very important if your application has time-critical functions. The
instruction execution times are shown in Table F-2.
Tip
When you use the execution times in Table F-2, you should consider the effect of power flow to
the instruction, the effect of indirect addressing, and the use of certain memory areas on these
execution times. These factors can directly effect the listed execution times.
When power flow is not present, then the execution time for that instruction is 1 µs.
When instructions use indirectly addressed operands, the execution time for the instruction
increases by 14 µs for each indirectly addressed operand used in the instruction.
483
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
ATT 36 DECO 19
BCDI 35 DISI 9
DIV 67
484
Execution Times for STL Instructions Appendix F
Instruction µs Instruction µs
DLED 14 LD Using: I 0.22
SM, T, C, V, S, Q, M 0.8
DTA 302 L 6
DTI 21 LDB <=, =, >=, >, <, <> 18
DTCH 12 LDD <=, =, >=, >, <, <> 27
DTR 35 Typ LDI Using: Local inputs 15
40 Max Expansion inputs 21
DTS 305 LDN Using: I 0.3
ED 8 SM, T, C, V, S, Q, M 0.9
L 6.1
ENCO 24 Max
LDNI Using: Local inputs 15
END Power flow not present 0.2 Expansion inputs 21
ENI 11 LDR<=, =, >=, >, <, <> 29
EU 8 LDS 0.22
485
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Instruction µs Instruction µs
ONI Using: Local inputs 15 RRW Time = Base + (LMõN)
Expansion inputs 21 Base 26
Length multiplier (LM) 1.2
OR<=, =, >=, >, <, <> 29
N is the shift count
ORB 19
RTA Time = Base + (LM õ N)
ORD 29 Base (for first digit in result) 149
Length multiplier (LM) 96
ORW 25 N is the number of additional digits in
OS=, < > Time + Base + (LM õ N) result
Base 33 RTS Time = Base + (LM õ N)
Length multiplier (LM) 6.3 Base (for first digit in result x) 154
N is the number of characters compared Length multiplier (LM) 96
N is the number of additional digits in
OW <=, =, >=, >, <, <> 24
result
PID Typical 400 S For length = 1 and specified as a 2.9
Manual-to-auto transition 800 Max constant
Coefficient recalculation 770 Max
Auto-tune 650 Max Otherwise:
Time = Base + (lengthõLM)
PLS: Using: PWM 31 Base 14
PTO single segment 36 Length multiplier (LM) 0.5
PTO multiple segment 50
If length is stored as a variable, add to 17
R Length=1 and specified as a constant Base
Base for Counters (C) 9.3
SCAT Time = Base + (LM õ N)
Base for Timers (T) 16
Base 30
Base for all others 2.9
Length multiplier (LM) 5.3
Otherwise: Time = Base + (length õ LM)
N is the number of appended
Base for Counters 8.6 characters
Base for Timers (T) 8.3
Base for all others 14 SCPY Time = Base + (LM õ N) 27
Length multiplier (LM) for operand C 5.1 Base 4.6
Length multiplier (LM) for operand T 9.9 Length multiplier (LM)
Length multiplier (LM) for all others 0.5 N is the number of copied characters
If length stored as variable, add to base 17 SCRE 0.24
RCV 51 SCRT 10
RET 16 SEG 15
RI Time = Base + (lengthõLM) SFND Maximum Time =
Base 8.9 Base +((N1--N2) õ LM2) +(N2õLM1)
Length multiplier (LM) using local outputs 13 Base 39
Length multiplier (LM) using expansion 21 Length multiplier 1 (LM1) 7.6
outputs Length multiplier 2 (LM2) 6.8
If length stored as a variable, add to Base 17 N1 is the length of the source string
RLB Time = Base + (LM õ N) N2 is the length of the search string
Base 23 SHRB Time = Base + (lengthõLM1) +
Length multiplier (LM) 0.2 ((length /8) õ LM2)
N is the shift count Base (constant length) 48
RLD Time = Base + (LMõN) Base (variable length) 52
Base 28 Length multiplier 1 (LM1) 1.0
Length multiplier (LM) 1.4 Length multiplier 2 (LM2) 1.5
N is the shift count SI Time = Base + (lengthõLM)
RLW Time = Base + (LMõN) Base 8.9
Base 27 LM using local output 13
Length multiplier (LM) 0.9 LM using expansion output 21
N is the shift count If length is stored as a variable, add to 17
Base
ROUND 56 Typ
110 Max SIN 900 Typ
1070 Max
RRB Time = Base + (LMõN)
Base 22 SLB Time = Base + (LMõN)
Length multiplier (LM) 0.5 Base 23
N is the shift count Length multiplier (LM) 0.2
N is the shift count
RRD Time = Base + (LMõN)
Base 28 SLD Time = Base + (LMõN)
Length multiplier (LM)) 1.7 Base 29
N is the shift count Length multiplier (LM) 1.1
N is the shift count
486
Execution Times for STL Instructions Appendix F
Instruction µs Instruction µs
SLEN 21 STOP Power flow not present 4
SLW Time = Base + (LM + N) STR Time = Base + (LM õ N)
Base 27 Base (for 1st source character) 51
Length multiplier (LM)) 0.6 Length multiplier (LM) 81
N is the shift count N is the number of additional source
characters
SPA 371
SWAP 17
SQRT 460 Typ
550 Max TAN 1080 Typ
1300 Max
SRB Time = Base + (LM + N)
Base 22 TODR 331
Length multiplier (LM)) 0.6
TODRX 391 Typ
N is the shift count
Daylight Saving Time correction 783 Typ
SRD Time = Base + (LM + N)
TODW 436
Base 28
Length multiplier (LM)) 1.5 TODWX 554
N is the shift count
TOF 36
SRW Time = Base + (LM + N)
Base 27 TON 33
Length multiplier (LM)) 1 TONR 32
N is the shift count
TRUNC 53 Typ
SSCPY Time = Base + (LM õ N) 106 Max
Base 42
Length multiplier (LM) 5.3 WDR 7
N is the number of copied characters
XMT 42
STD Time = Base + (LM õ N)
XORB 19
Base (for 1st source character) 69
Length multiplier (LM) 27 XORD 29
N is the number of additional source
characters XORW 25
487
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
488
S7-200 Quick Reference Information
To help you find information more easily, this section summarizes the following information:
489
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
490
S7-200 Quick Reference Information Appendix G
Table G-3 Memory Ranges and Features for the S7-200 CPUs
Description CPU 221 CPU 222 CPU 224 CPU 224XP CPU 226
User program size
with run mode edit 4096 bytes 4096 bytes 8192 bytes 12288 bytes 16384 bytes
without run mode edit 4096 bytes 4096 bytes 12288 bytes 16384 bytes 24576 bytes
User data size 2048 bytes 2048 bytes 8192 bytes 10240 bytes 10240 bytes
Process-image input register I0.0 to I15.7 I0.0 to I15.7 I0.0 to I15.7 I0.0 to I15.7 I0.0 to I15.7
Process-image output register Q0.0 to Q15.7 Q0.0 to Q15.7 Q0.0 to Q15.7 Q0.0 to Q15.7 Q0.0 to Q15.7
Analog inputs (read only) AIW0 to AIW30 AIW0 to AIW30 AIW0 to AIW62 AIW0 to AIW62 AIW0 to AIW62
Analog outputs (write only) AQW0 to AQW30 AQW0 to AQW30 AQW0 to AQW62 AQW0 to AQW62 AQW0 to AQW62
Variable memory (V) VB0 to VB2047 VB0 to VB2047 VB0 to VB8191 VB0 to VB10239 VB0 to VB10239
Local memory (L)1 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63
Bit memory (M) M0.0 to M31.7 M0.0 to M31.7 M0.0 to M31.7 M0.0 to M31.7 M0.0 to M31.7
Special Memory (SM) SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to
Read only SM179.7 SM299.7 SM549.7 SM549.7 SM549.7
SM0.0 to SM29.7 SM0.0 to SM29.7 SM0.0 to SM29.7 SM0.0 to SM29.7 SM0.0 to SM29.7
Timers 256 (T0 to T255) 256 (T0 to T255) 256 (T0 to T255) 256 (T0 to T255) 256 (T0 to T255)
Retentive on-delay 1 ms T0, T64 T0, T64 T0, T64 T0, T64 T0, T64
10 ms T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and
T65 to T68 T65 to T68 T65 to T68 T65 to T68 T65 to T68
100 ms T5 to T31, and T5 to T31, and T5 to T31, and T5 to T31, and T5 to T31, and
T69 to T95 T69 to T95 T69 to T95 T69 to T95 T69 to T95
On/Off delay 1 ms T32, T96 T32, T96 T32, T96 T32, T96 T32, T96
10 ms T33 to T36, and T33 to T36, and T33 to T36, and T33 to T36, and T33 to T36, and
T97 to T100 T97 to T100 T97 to T100 T97 to T100 T97 to T100
100 ms T37 to T63, and T37 to T63, and T37 to T63, and T37 to T63, and T37 to T63, and
T101 to T255 T101 to T255 T101 to T255 T101 to T255 T101 to T255
Counters C0 to C255 C0 to C255 C0 to C255 C0 to C255 C0 to C255
High-speed counters HC0 to HC5 HC0 to HC5 HC0 to HC5 HC0 to HC5 HC0 to HC5
Sequential control relays (S) S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7
Accumulator registers AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3
Jumps/Labels 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
Call/Subroutine 0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 127
Interrupt routines 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127
Positive/negative transitions 256 256 256 256 256
PID loops 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7
Ports Port 0 Port 0 Port 0 Port 0, Port 1 Port 0, Port 1
1 LB60 to LB63 are reserved by STEP 7--Micro/WIN, version 3.0 or later.
491
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
492
S7-200 Quick Reference Information Appendix G
493
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Move, Shift, and Rotate Instructions Table, Find, and Conversion Instructions
MOVB IN, OUT ATT DATA, TBL Add data to table
MOVW IN, OUT LIFO TBL, DATA
Move Byte, Word, DWord, Real Get data from table
MOVD IN, OUT FIFO TBL, DATA
MOVR IN, OUT
FND= TBL, PTN, INDX
BIR IN, OUT Move Byte Immediate Read FND<> TBL, PTN, INDX Find data value in table that matches
BIW IN, OUT Move Byte Immediate Write FND< TBL, PTN, INDX comparison
BMB IN, OUT, N FND> TBL, PTN, INDX
BMW IN, OUT, N Block Move Byte, Word, DWord FILL IN, OUT, N Fill memory space with pattern
BMD IN, OUT, N
BCDI OUT Convert BCD to Integer
SWAP IN Swap Bytes IBCD OUT Convert Integer to BCD
SHRB DATA, S_BIT, N Shift Register Bit BTI IN, OUT Convert Byte to Integer
SRB OUT, N ITB IN, OUT Convert Integer to Byte
SRW OUT, N Shift Right Byte, Word, DWord ITD IN, OUT Convert Integer to Double Integer
SRD OUT, N DTI IN, OUT Convert Double Integer to Integer
SLB OUT, N DTR IN, OUT Convert DWord to Real
SLW OUT, N Shift Left Byte, Word, DWord TRUNC IN, OUT Convert Real to Double Integer
SLD OUT, N ROUND IN, OUT Convert Real to Double Integer
RRB OUT, N ATH IN, OUT, LEN Convert ASCII to Hex
RRW OUT, N Rotate Right Byte, Word, DWord HTA IN, OUT, LEN Convert Hex to ASCII
RRD OUT, N ITA IN, OUT, FMT Convert Integer to ASCII
RLB OUT, N DTA IN, OUT, FM Convert Double Integer to ASCII
RLW OUT, N Rotate Left Byte, Word, DWord RTA IN, OUT, FM Convert Real to ASCII
RLD OUT, N DECO IN, OUT Decode
ENCO IN, OUT Encode
Logical Instructions
ANDB IN1, OUT SEG IN, OUT Generate 7--segment pattern
ANDW IN1, OUT Logical AND of Byte, Word, and DWord ITS IN, FMT, OUT Convert Integer to String
ANDD IN1, OUT DTS IN, FMT, OUT Convert Double Integer to String
ORB IN1, OUT RTS IN, FMT, OUT Convert Real to String
ORW IN1, OUT STI STR, INDX, OUT Convert Substring to Integer
Logical OR of Byte, Word, and DWord
ORD IN1, OUT STD STR, INDX, OUT Convert Substring to Double Integer
STR STR, INDX, OUT Convert Substring to Real
XORB IN1, OUT Interrupt Instructions
XORW IN1, OUT Logical XOR of Byte, Word, and DWord
CRETI Conditional Return from Interrupt
XORD IN1, OUT
ENI Enable Interrupts
INVB OUT Invert Byte, Word and DWord
DISI Disable Interrupts
INVW OUT (1’s complement)
INVD OUT ATCH INT, EVNT Attach Interrupt routine to event
DTCH EVNT Detach event
String Instructions
Communications Instructions
SLEN IN, OUT String Length
SCAT IN, OUT Concatenate String XMT TBL, PORT Freeport transmission
SCPY IN, OUT Copy String RCV TBL, PORT Freeport receive message
SSCPY IN, INDX, N, OUT Copy Substring from String NETR TBL, PORT Network Read
CFND IN1, IN2, OUT Find First Character within String NETW TBL, PORT Network Write
SFND IN1, IN2, OUT Find String within String GPA ADDR, PORT Get Port Address
SPA ADDR, PORT Set Port Address
High-Speed Instructions
HDEF HSC, MODE Define High-Speed Counter mode
HSC N Activate High-Speed Counter
PLS Q Pulse Output
494
Index
495
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
C selecting, 214
user--defined, 225
C memory, 28 Communication requests, processing, 25
Cables Communication settings, STEP 7--Micro/WIN, 10
biasing, 223 Communications, 210
configuring background time, 43
Freeport, 231 baud rate, 231, 232
remote modem, 230 conflicts, 236
I/O expansion, 451 Interface, selecting, 210
network, 221, 222 Modbus Slave Protocol, 348
order numbers, 480 modem, 231–232
RS--232/PPI Multi--Master, 452 protocols supported, 214
selecting, 210 radio modem, 232–233
terminating, 223 Communications cards, order numbers, 480
USB/PPI Multi--Master, 452 Communications instructions
Calculating get port address, 95
power requirements, 457–459 network read, 81
token rotation time, 233 network write, 81
Calibration receive, 86
EM 231, 403 set port address, 95
EM 235, 403 transmit, 86
inputs, 403 Communications port
Call subroutine instruction, 204 connector pin assignments, 223
example, 205 Freeport mode, 225
Callback, EM 241 Modem module, 312 interrupts, 156
Cartridges Communications processors. See CP cards
memory, 450 Communications protocol
order numbers, 480 point--to--point interface (PPI), 214
Changing PROFIBUS, 215
current value in HSC, 131 TCP/IP, 215
high--speed counter direction, 130 Communications queue, 157
preset value in HSC, 131 Compare byte instruction, 96
Character interrupt control, 92 Compare double word instruction, 96
Clear interrupt event instruction, 153 Compare instructions, 59
Clearance requirements, 16 compare byte, 96
Clock compare double word, 96
cartridge, 450 compare integer, 96
status bits, 466 compare real, 96
Clock instructions compare string, 98
read real--time clock, 78 example, 96
read real--time clock extended, 79 Compare integer instruction, 96
set real--time clock, 78 Compare real instruction, 96
set real--time clock extended, 79 Compare string instruction, 98
Coil instructions Comparing, token rotation times, 235
no operation, 73
output, 73
output immediate, 73
reset, 73
496
Index
497
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
498
Index
499
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
500
Index
501
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
G SMB66--SMB85, 473
High--speed pulse outputs, 50
Gap update factor (GUF), 233 Highest station address (HSA), 233
Germanisher Lloyd (GL) Maritime Agency, 382 History log , CPU events, 48
Get port address instruction, 95 HMI devices, 225
Global variable table, 62 HSC, 50
Grounding, 20, 21 Instruction wizard, 119
GSD file, EM 277 PROFIBUS--DP, 431–432 HSC0, HSC1, HSC2 register (SMB36 to SMB65),
Guidelines 471
designing a Micro PLC system, 52 HSC3, HSC4, HSC5 register (SMB131 to SMB165),
grounding and circuit, 20 475
grounding and wiring, 21 HyperTerminal, configuring RS--232/PPI
high--vibration environment, 18 Multi--Master cable, 239–483
Inductive loads, 22
installation, 16
instructions for EM 253 Position Module, 273
interrupt routines, 54, 155 I
isolation, 20 I memory, 27
lamp loads, 22 I/O, reading and writing, 42
502
Index
503
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
504
Index
Instructions (cont.)
table, 190–195 J
table find, 193 Jump instructions
tangent, 143 jump to label, 171
transmit, 86 label, 171
truncate, 101 example, 171
up counter, 116
up/down counter, 116
USS protocol, 333
watchdog reset, 167 L
without outputs, 59 L memory, 30
Instructions, quick reference guide, 493 Label instruction, 171
Integer math instructions, example, 141 LAD editor
Integer to ASCII instruction, 103 conventions, 58
example, 106 description, 56
Integer to BCD instruction, 100 features, 56
Integer to byte instruction, 100 Ladder Logic. See LAD editor
Integer to double integer instruction, 100 Lamp loads, guidelines, 22
Integral term, PID algorithm, 147 Last--in--first--out instruction, 190
Intelligent modules, 3 example, 191
CPUs that support, 323 LEDs
status (SMB200 to SMB549), 477 diagnostic, 47
Intercharacter timer, 91 EM 241 Modem module, 314
Interface, selecting communications, 210 Libraries, Instruction, 64
International standards, 382 Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS) Maritime Agency,
Internet Devices, CP 243--1 IT, 219 382
Internet module, wizard, 447 Load sequence control relay instruction, 172
Interrupt events Load stack instruction, 75
priority, 158 Loading
quick reference, 490 new current value in HSC, 131
types, 154 new preset value in HSC, 131
Interrupt instructions Local I/O, 32
attach interrupt, 153 Local memory area (L), 30
clear interrupt event , 153 Local variable table, 55, 63
conditional return from interrupt, 153 Logic pop instruction, 75
detach interrupt, 153 Logic push instruction, 75
disable interrupt, 153 Logic read instruction, 75
enable interrupt, 153 Logic stack instructions
example, 159 AENO, 75
Interrupt routines, 25, 42 AND load, 75
calling subroutines from, 156 example, 76
communication port, 156 load stack, 75
example, 53 logic pop, 75
guidelines, 54, 155 logic push, 75
I/O, 156 logic read, 75
priority, 157 OR load, 75
queues, 157 Logic, control, 24
rising/falling edge, 156 Logical connections
sharing data with main program, 155 MPI, 215
system support, 155 PPI, 214
time--based, 156 Logical operations instructions
types supported by S7--200, 156 AND, OR, XOR, 162
understanding, 155 invert, 161
Interrupts Loop control
assigning to HSC, 126 (PID) instructions, 145–156
high--speed counters, 120 adjusting bias, 150
Invert byte instruction, 161 converting inputs, 148
Invert double word instruction, 161 converting outputs, 149
Invert instructions, example, 161 error conditions, 151
Invert word instruction, 161 forward/reverse, 150
Isolation modes, 151
network, 221 ranges/variables, 150
wiring guidelines, 20 selecting type, 148
505
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
M MM4 drive
connecting, 345
M memory, 27 setup, 346
Manual mode, PID loop, 151 Modbus Protocol Library, 347
Manuals, order numbers, 480 Modbus RTU Protocol, 350
Mapping address to S7--200, Modbus, 349 EM 241 Modem module, 309
Maritime Agency approvals, 382 functions supported by Modem module, 309
Master devices, 211 mapping addresses, 310
Math instructions Modbus Slave Protocol
add, 140 addresses, 349
decrement, 144 configuring symbol table, 349
divide, 140 CRC table, 348
divide integer with remainder (DIV), 142 example of programming, 354
increment, 144 execution error codes, 353
multiply, 140 execution time, 348
multiply integer to double integer (MUL), 142 functions supported, 350
subtract, 140 initialization, 348
Maximum and start/stop speeds, position control instructions, 350
wizard, 255 mapping aadresses to S7--200, 349
Maximum character count, 92 MBUS_INIT, 351
MBUS_INIT instruction, 351 MBUS_SLAVE, 353
MBUS_SLAVE instruction, 353 resources used, 348
Memory special memory, 348
accessing, 26 Mode switch, 41
CPU, 2 Modem
retentive, 44 remote, PPI Multi--Master cable, 230
Memory areas with PPI Multi--Master cable, 231
clearing, 49 Modem Expansion Wizard, EM 241 Modem module,
operand ranges, 69 314
Memory Cartridge, restoring program from, 38 Modem Expansion wizard, 230
Memory cartridge, 36, 450 Modem module, 435
electrostatic discharge, 36 configuration table, 313
error codes, 462 CPU Data Transfer Message Format, 329
storing program, 37 data transfers, 311
Memory cartridges, order number, 480 errors from instructions, 321
Memory fill instruction, 192 example, 323
example, 192 features, 308
Memory functions instructions, 318
block move instructions, 166 International telephone line interface, 308
move instructions, 164 Messaging Telephone Number, 327
rotate instructions, 179 Modem Expansion wizard, 314
shift instructions, 179 MODx_CTRL instruction, 319
shift register bit instruction, 181 MODx_MSG instruction, 320
swap instructions, 183 MODx_XFR instruction, 319
Memory ranges numeric paging, 310
CPU modules, 68 paging, 310
quick reference, 491 password protection, 311
Memory retention, 36–39 RJ11 jack, 308
ranges, 44 security callback, 312
Message timer, 91 Short Message Service, 310
Messages, token--passing network, 234 SMS messaging, 310
Messaging Telephone Number Format, EM 241 status LEDs, 314
Modem module, 327 Text Message Format, 328
Micro PLC system, designing, 52 text paging, 310
506
Index
N Numeric instructions
cosine, 143
National standards, 382 natural exponential, 143
Natural exponential instruction, 143 natural logarithm, 143
Natural logarithm instruction, 143 sine, 143
Navigation bar, 55 square root, 143
Negative transition instruction, 70, 71 tangent, 143
Nesting, subroutines, 204 Numeric paging, EM 241 Modem module, 310
NETR, NETW, Instruction Wizard, 81
Network
addresses, 211
baud rate, 221 O
biasing cable, 223 Off--delay timer instruction (TOF), 196, 201
building, 221 example, 199
cable, 221, 222 On--delay timer instruction (TON), 196, 201
calculating distances, 221 example, 198
communications port, 223 OP3, OP7, OP17, order numbers, 481
communications setup, 210–433 Open Loop Control, 252
507
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
Open loop position control, using steppers or servos, Peer--to--peer communications, 217–218
255 Performance, optimizing network, 233
Opening, program editor, 11 Permanent Memory, copying V memory, 40
Operand ranges, 69 Permanent memory, 36, 39
Operation modes, CPU Permanent program storage, 39
changing, 41 PID , loop table, expanded, 372
Freeport protocol, 226 PID Auto--Tune
status bits, 466 auto--hysteresis, 375
Operator interfaces, order number, 481 deviation, 375
Operator stations, specifying, 52 error conditions, 377
Optimizing, network performance, 233 exception conditions, 377
OR instruction, 162 prerequisites, 375
example, 163 PV out of range, 377
OR load instruction, 75 sequence, 376
Order, of interrupt events, 158 understanding, 372
Order numbers, 479–922 PID Tuning Control Panel, 378
CP 243--2 AS--Interface Module, 448 PID loop instruction, 145
CPU modules, 385 alarm checking, 151
digital expansion module, 394 automatic mode, 151
analog expansion module, 400, 411 converting loop inputs, 148
input simulators, 456 converting loop outputs to scaled integer, 149
PPI Multi--Master cables, 452 derivative term, 148
Output block diagram error conditions, 151
EM 232, 408 forward--acting, 150
EM 235, 408 integral term, 147
Output data word format loop control, 148
EM 232, 407 loop control types, 148
EM 235, 407 loop table, 152
Output image register, 24 manual mode, 151
Output immediate instruction, 73 modes, 151
Output instruction, 73 normalizing loop inputs, 148
Output specifications proportional term, 147
analog expansion module, 401 ranges, 150
CPU modules, 388 reverse--acting, 150
discrete expansion module, 396 understanding, 146
Outputs, 24 variables, 150
CPU module, 390 wizard, 145
discrete expansion module, 397 Pin assignment, communications port, 223
EM 253 Position Module, 265 Pipelining, PTO pulses, 134
instructions without, 59 PLC Information dialog box, 60
Outputs and relays, 22 Pointers, indirect addressing, 33
Outputs, analog, configuring values, 44 Port, settings, PPI Multi--Master cables, 220
Outputs, Digital, configuring states, 43 Position Control Wizard, 267
Overview, open loop control, 252 PTOx_ADV, 264
PTOx_CTRL, 260
PTOx_LDPOS, 263
P PTOx_MAN, 262
PTOx_RUN, 261
Paging, Modem module, 310 Position Control wizard, 133
Panel mounting, 18 Position module
Parameters ACCEL_TIME, 256
in subroutines, 205 configuration, 291
types for subroutines, 205 Configuration/Profile table, 294
Parity errors configuring, 267
SMB3, 467 configuring motion profiles, 257
SMB30 and SMB130, 92 creating instructions, 302
Password DECEL_TIME, 256
clearing, 49 diagnostics information, 291
configuring, 49 displaying and controlling operation, 290
CPU functions, 48 eliminating backlash, 306
recovering lost, 49 EM 253 Control Panel, 290–292
restricting access, 49 error codes, 292
Password protection, EM 241 Modem module, 311 Features, 265
508
Index
509
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
510
Index
511
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
512
Index
513
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
514
Index
515
S7-200 Programmable Controller System Manual
516
To
SIEMENS ENERGY & AUTOMATION INC
ATTN: TECHNICAL COMMUNICATIONS
ONE INTERNET PLAZA
PO BOX 4991
JOHNSON CITY TN USA 37602--4991
From
Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Job Title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Company Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
City and State: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Country: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Telephone: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
❒ Automotive ❒ Pharmaceutical
❒ Chemical ❒ Plastic
❒ Electrical Machinery ❒ Pulp and Paper
❒ Food ❒ Textiles
❒ Instrument and Control ❒ Transportation
❒ Non-electrical Machinery ❒ Other ___________________________
✄
❒ Petrochemical
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within a range from 1 (very
good) to 5 (very poor).
Additional comments:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 1 of 8
Use Refrigeration
2. Hazards identification
EC Classification
EC Directive 67/548/EEC Not classified as hazardous
Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 (CLP) Gases under pressure – Liquefied gas
Label Elements
Name on label
Hazardous components 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane (143a)
Pentafluoroethane (R125)
1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane (R134a)
Hazard statement(s) H280: Contains gas under pressure; may explode if heated
Hazard pictogram(s)
Precautionary statement(s)
Storage P410 + P403: Protect from sunlight. Store in a well-ventilated place.
SAFETY DATA SHEET
According to Regulation (EC) No.1907/2006
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 2 of 8
Skin contact Allow to evaporate. Wash off with warm water. If symptoms persist,
call a physician.
Eye contact Immediately irrigate with eyewash solution or clean water, holding the
eyelids apart for at least 10 minutes. Obtain immediate medical
attention.
Skin contact Contact with liquid or refrigerated gas can cause cold burns and
frostbite. Prolonged skin contact may defat the skin and produce
dermatitis.
5. Fire-fighting measures
Extinguishing media
Suitable extinguishing media As appropriate for surrounding fire. Keep fire exposed containers cool
by spraying with water.
Unsuitable extinguishing media None.
SAFETY DATA SHEET
According to Regulation (EC) No.1907/2006
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 3 of 8
Special protective actions for Fire- Wear self-contained breathing apparatus and protective suit
Fighters Wear chemical resistant oversuit
Special protective actions for fire-fighters
In case of fire, use water spray
Keep product and empty container away from heat and sources of
ignition
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 4 of 8
Exposure controls
Hand protection Take note of the information given by the producer concerning
permeability and break through times and of special workplace
conditions (mechanical strain, duration of contact).
Protective gloves
Suitable material: Fluoroelastomer
Hygiene measures Eye wash bottles or eye wash stations in compliance with applicable
standards
When using do not eat, drink or smoke
Gloves, overalls and boots have to be double layered (protection
against cold temperature).
Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice
Environmental exposure controls Dispose of rinse water in accordance with local and national
regulations.
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 5 of 8
Possibility of hazardous reactions Strong oxidizers, alkali metals and alkaline earth metals may cause
fires or explosions.
Vapours are heavier than air and may spread along floors
Materials to avoid Light and/or alkaline metals, powdered metals, alkaline earth metals,
oxidising agents
Repeated dose toxicity Inhalation, after a single exposure, dog, 10% w/w, risk of cardiac
sensitization at high dose (Pentafluoroethane)
Inhalation, repeated exposure, rat, >=50000ppm, NOAEL
(Pentafluoroethane)
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 6 of 8
Bioaccumulative potential Bioaccumulative potential: log Pow 1.48. Result: does not
bioaccumulate (Pentafluoroethane)
IATA-DGR
UN number UN 3337
Class 2.2
ICAO-Labels 2.2 - Non-flammable, non-toxic gas
Proper shipping name REFRIGERANT GAS R404A
SAFETY DATA SHEET
According to Regulation (EC) No.1907/2006
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 7 of 8
IMDG
UN number UN 3337
Class 2.2
IMDG-Labels 2.2 - Non-flammable, non-toxic gas
HI/UN No. 3337
EmS F-C, S-V
Proper shipping name REFRIGERANT GAS R404A
ADR
UN number UN 3337
Class 2
ADR/RID Labels 2.2 - Non-flammable, non-toxic gas
HI/UN No. 20 / 3337
Proper shipping name REFRIGERANT GAS R404A
RID
UN number UN 3337
Class 2
ADR/RID Labels 2.2 - Non-flammable, non-toxic gas
HI/UN No. 20 / 3337
Proper shipping name REFRIGERANT GAS R404A
ADN
UN number UN 3337
Class 2
ADR/RID Labels 2.2 – Non-flammable, non-toxic gas
Proper shipping name REFRIGERANT GAS R404A
HARP® R404A
Version: CLP01 Date: May 2012 Page 8 of 8
This datasheet was prepared in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006.
Information in this publication is believed to be accurate and is given in good faith but it is for the user to satisfy
itself of the suitability for its own particular purpose. Accordingly, Harp International Limited gives no warranty as
to the fitness of the product for any particular purpose and any implied warranty or condition, statutory or otherwise,
is excluded except to the extent that such exclusion is prevented by law. Freedom under Patent, Copyright and
Designs cannot be assumed. HARP® is a trademark, the property of Harp International Ltd.
Harp International Limited is registered in England & Wales No. 02432294. Registered office: Gellihirion Industrial
Estate, Pontypridd, Rhondda Cynon Taff, CF37 5SX.
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
1.2. Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
Use of the : At this time we do not yet have information on identified uses.
Substance/Mixture They will be included in this safety data sheet when available.
Recommended restrictions : At that time we do not yet have information on use restrictions.
on use They will be included in this safety data sheet when available.
2. Hazards identification
R5455 1/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
Hazard
Hazard class Hazard category Target Organs
statements
Acute toxicity Category 4 H302
For the full text of the H-Statements mentioned in this Section, see Section 16.
For the full text of the R-phrases mentioned in this Section, see Section 16.
Hazard symbols :
Precautionary statements
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
• ethanediol
3. Composition/information on ingredients
3.1. Substances
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
In case of skin contact : Wash off immediately with soap and plenty of water.
In case of eye contact : Rinse thoroughly with plenty of water, also under the eyelids.
Consult a physician.
4.2 Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
5. Fire-fighting measures
R5455 4/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
Personal precautions : Use personal protective equipment. Keep people away from
and upwind of spill/leak. Provide adequate ventilation. Keep
away from heat and sources of ignition. Avoid contact with
skin and eyes. Do not breathe gas/fumes/vapour/spray.
Environmental precautions : Do not flush into surface water or sanitary sewer system.
If the product contaminates rivers and lakes or drains inform
respective authorities.
Methods and materials for : Ensure adequate ventilation. This material and its container
containment and cleaning must be disposed of as hazardous waste. Contain spillage,
up and then collect with non-combustible absorbent material,
(e.g. sand, earth, diatomaceous earth, vermiculite) and place
in container for disposal according to local / national
regulations (see section 13).
R5455 5/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
Advice on safe handling : Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety
practice. Avoid contact with the skin and the eyes. Keep
container tightly closed. Provide sufficient air exchange and/or
exhaust in work rooms. Emergency eye wash fountains and
emergency showers should be available in the immediate
vicinity.
Hygiene measures : Take off all contaminated clothing immediately. Do not breathe
gas/fumes/vapour/spray. Avoid contact with the skin and the
eyes. Keep away from food, drink and animal feedingstuffs.
Smoking, eating and drinking should be prohibited in the
application area. Wash hands before breaks and at the end of
workday.
Requirements for storage : Keep in an area equipped with solvent resistant flooring. Keep
areas and containers away from heat and sources of ignition. Keep in a dry, cool and
well-ventilated place. Store in original container.
R5455 6/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
CAS-No.
Component: ethanediol
107-21-1
Other OELs
Regulatory Basis : EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of
risks related to work exposure to chemical, physical, and biological
agents.
Regulatory List : EU ELV
Value type : Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL):
Value : 40 ppm
Value : 104 mg/m3
Remarks : Indicative
Regulatory Basis : EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of
risks related to work exposure to chemical, physical, and biological
agents.
Regulatory List : EU ELV
Value type : Time Weighted Average (TWA):
Value : 20 ppm
Value : 52 mg/m3
Remarks : Indicative
R5455 7/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
Hand protection
R5455 8/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
Material : polychloroprene
Gloves : >= 8 h
Gloves : >= 8 h
Material : butyl-rubber
Gloves : >= 8 h
Eye protection
R5455 9/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
Colour : colourless
Odour : sweet
Flammability (solid, gas) : Currently we do not have any Information from our
supplier about this.
Relative vapour density : Currently we do not have any Information from our
supplier about this.
Water solubility : 20 °C
R5455 10/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
completely miscible
Viscosity, dynamic :
Explosive properties : Currently we do not have any Information from our
supplier about this.
10.1. Reactivity
Advice : No information available.
R5455 11/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
CAS-No.
Product: ethanediol; ethylene glycol
107-21-1
Acute toxicity
Inhalation
Remarks : Vapours may cause irritation, headache, dizziness and may have
narcotic effects and other central nervous effects.
Further information
R5455 12/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
CAS-No.
Component: ethanediol
107-21-1
Acute toxicity
Oral
Dermal
Irritation
Skin
Species : rabbit
Result : No skin irritation
Eyes
Species : rabbit
Result : Mild eye irritation
Sensitisation
R5455 13/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
12.1. Toxicity
CAS-No.
Component: ethanediol
107-21-1
Acute toxicity
Fish
algae
Bacteria
R5455 14/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
CAS-No.
Component: ethanediol
107-21-1
Persistence and degradability
Biodegradability
Biodegradation : 56 %
Exposure time : 28 h
Method : OECD 301 C
Remarks : biodegradable
CAS-No.
Component: ethanediol
107-21-1
Bioaccumulation
CAS-No.
Product: ethanediol; ethylene glycol
107-21-1
Mobility
CAS-No.
Product: ethanediol; ethylene glycol
107-21-1
Results of PBT and vPvB assessment
R5455 15/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
CAS-No.
Product: ethanediol; ethylene glycol
107-21-1
Additional ecological information
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
R5455 16/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
14.7. Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC Code
15.1. Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or
mixture
Currently we do not have any Information from our supplier about this.
R5455 17/18 EN
SAFETY DATA SHEET according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
MONOETHYLENE GLYCOL
Version 3.0 Print Date 2010/11/19
Revision Date 2010/11/19 MSDS code: MMEG001
The information provided in this Safety Data Sheet is correct to the best of our knowledge,
information and belief at the date of its publication. The information given is designed only as a
guidance for safe handling, use, processing, storage, transportation, disposal and release and
is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification. The information relates only to the
specific material designated and may not be valid for such material used in combination with
any other materials or in any process, unless specified in the text.
R5455 18/18 EN
Technical data sheet NRQ24A
Technical data
Electrical data Nominal voltage AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz / DC 24 V
Nominal voltage range AC/DC 19.2 ... 28.8 V / DC 21.6 ... 28.8 V
Power consumption In operation 12 W @ nominal torque
At rest 1.5 W
For wire sizing 18 VA (I max. 20 A @ 5 ms)
Connection Cable 1 m, 3 x 0.75 mm2
Parallel connection Possible, note the performance data
Functional data Torque (nominal torque) Min. 8 Nm @ nominal voltage
Manual override Gearing latch disengaged with push-button, can be locked
Running time 9 s / 90°
Sound power level Max. 52 dB (A)
Position indication Mechanical, pluggable
Safety Protection class III Safety extra-low voltage
Degree of protection IP54 in any mounting position, UL/NEMA 2
EMC CE according to 2004/108/EC
Certification cULus according to UL 60730-1A and UL 60730-2-14
and CAN/CSA E60730-01:02
Certified to IEC/EN 60730-1 and IEC/EN 60730-2-14
Mode of operation Type 1 (EN 60730-1)
Rated impulse voltage 0.8 kV (EN 60730-1)
Control pollution degree 3 (EN 60730-1)
Ambient temperature 0 ... +40 °C (no restrictions)
! +40 ... +50 °C (Caution: can only be used with
restrictions. Please contact your Belimo representative.)
Non-operating temperature –40 ... +80°C
Ambient humidity 95% r.H., non-condensating (EN 60730-1)
Maintenance Maintenance-free
Dimensions / Weight Dimensions See «Dimensions» on page 2
Weight Approx. 1.8 kg
Safety notes
• The actuator has been designed for use in stationary heating, ventilation and air conditioning
! systems and is not allowed to be used outside the specified field of application, especially in
aircraft or in any other airborne means of transport.
• It may only be installed by suitably trained personnel. Any legal regulations or regulations
issued by authorities must be observed during assembly.
• The switch for changing the direction of rotation may only be operated by authorised
personnel. The direction of rotation must not be reversed in a frost protection circuit.
• The device may only be opened at the manufacturer‘s site. It does not contain any parts that
can be replaced or repaired by the user.
• The cable must not be removed from the device.
• Self adaptation is necessary when the system is commissioned and after each adjustment of
the angle (press the adaptation push-button)
• The device contains electrical and electronic components and is not allowed to be disposed
of as household refuse. All locally valid regulations and requirements must be observed.
Product features
Simple direct mounting Straightforward direct mounting on the ball valve with only one screw.
The assemply tool is integrated in the plug-on position indicator. The mounting position in
relation to the fitting can be selected in 90° steps.
Manual override Manual override with push-button possible (the gear is disengaged for as long as the button is
pressed or remains locked).
Adjustable angle of rotation Adjustable angle of rotation with mechanical end stops.
High functional reliability The actuator is overload-proof, requires no limit switches and automatically stops when the end
stop is reached.
Home position When the supply voltage is switched on for the first time, i.e. at commissioning or after pressing
the «gear disengagement» switch, the actuator moves to the home position.
Factory setting: Y2 (counter-clockwise rotation)
Rotary actuator Rotary valve
Y2 A – AB = 0%
Y1 A – AB = 100%
The actuator then moves into the position defined by the control signal.
Accessories
Description Data sheet
Electrical accessories Auxiliary switch S..A.. T2 - S..A..
Feedback potentiometer P..A.. T2 - P..A..
Electrical installation
T ~
Wiring diagrams
– +
Note
• Connect via safety isolation transformer. !
• Parallel connection of other actuators
possible. Note performance data for supply.
1 2 3
Dimensions [mm]
Dimensional drawings
100
68
140
R65
93
30 132 41
1 2
1 2
3 4
A–
A AB =
100%
A– AB
A
A B – B = 100
AB = %
0%
AB
B
2
A–
AB =
100%
T ~
– +
N L1
1 2 3
Y1
Y2 Y2
T ~ ~
AC 24 V / DC 24 V – + +
1 2 3
LRQ..
NRQ..
AC 24 V / DC 24 V T ~ Y DC (0) 2 ... 10 V
– + U DC 2 ... 10 V
1 2 3 5
LRQ..-SR LRQ..-SZ
NRQ..-SR NRQ..-SZ